PanSystem 3.5 User Guide

PanSystem 3.
5 User Guide
Table of Contents
PanSystem.............................................................................................................. 1
Welcome to PanSystem .......................................................................................... 1
Preparing Data for Analysis in PanSystem ................................................................. 3
Using PanSystem for Analysis ................................................................................. 4
Using PanSystem for Test Design ............................................................................ 5
Program Menu Bar Options and Commands ............................................................... 6
PanSystem Menus and Windows Commands Index .................................................. 6
PanSystem Menus and Window Commands ............................................................ 7
PanSystem File Menu Index............................................................................... 7
File Menu........................................................................................................ 8
File New ...................................................................................................... 8
Open Dialog ................................................................................................. 9
Save Dialog................................................................................................ 11
Save As Dialog ........................................................................................... 12
Save As Previous Version Dialog.................................................................... 13
Import v1.80 Dialog .................................................................................... 14
Graphics Export Dialog ................................................................................ 15
Send as e-mail ........................................................................................... 16
Print Dialog ................................................................................................ 17
Page Set-Up Dialog ..................................................................................... 19
Printer Set-Up Dialog ................................................................................... 21
Connect to Printer Sub-Dialog ....................................................................... 23
Page Set-Up Codes...................................................................................... 24
Exit ........................................................................................................... 25
PanSystem Edit Menu Index ............................................................................ 26
Edit Menu ..................................................................................................... 27
Copy to Clipboard ....................................................................................... 27
Title Dialog ................................................................................................ 28
Legend Dialog ............................................................................................ 29
Results Dialog ............................................................................................ 30
Description Dialog ....................................................................................... 31
Datasets Dialog .......................................................................................... 32
X-Axis Dialog.............................................................................................. 33
Y-Axis Dialog .............................................................................................. 35
T-Axis Dialog .............................................................................................. 37
R-Axis Dialog.............................................................................................. 38
Edit Plot Right Hand Axis .............................................................................. 39
View Co-ordinates ....................................................................................... 41
iii
PanSystem 3.5 User Guide
Plot Rate Schedule ...................................................................................... 42

Overlay Pressure Dialog ............................................................................... 43
Mark Points ................................................................................................ 45
Marker Text Dialog ...................................................................................... 46
Delete Marker ............................................................................................. 47
Show Marker Text ....................................................................................... 48
PanSystem Dataprep Menu Index ..................................................................... 49
Dataprep Menu .............................................................................................. 50
Dataprep Gauge Data .................................................................................. 51
PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Analytical) .................................................... 121
PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical) .................................................... 255
Tide Data .................................................................................................. 307
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning .............................................................. 319
PanSystem Analysis Menu Index ..................................................................... 354
Analysis Menu .............................................................................................. 356
Analysis Plot Overview ................................................................................ 356
Analysis Plot - Define Line Dialog.................................................................. 361
Deconvolution / Convolution ........................................................................ 363
Analysis Selection Dialog ............................................................................. 392
Select Analysis Model Dialog ........................................................................ 393
Input/Model Parameters Sub-Dialog ............................................................. 398
Suggest Model Dialog ................................................................................. 399
Autofit Lines .............................................................................................. 400
Pressure Extrapolation Dialog ...................................................................... 402
Time Transformation Dialog ......................................................................... 404
Pressure Transformation Dialog .................................................................... 405
Non-Darcy Skin Analysis ............................................................................. 407
Correct for Rate Dependency (Change F) Dialog ............................................. 409
Export TC (Type-Curve) File Dialog ............................................................... 410
Enter Model Parameter Dialog ...................................................................... 411
PanSystem Simulate Menu Index .................................................................... 412
Simulate Menu ............................................................................................. 413
Quick Match Dialog..................................................................................... 413
Copy Layer Pressure Dialog ......................................................................... 421
Boundary Type Dialog ................................................................................. 422
Automatic Matching Dialog .......................................................................... 426
Auto Match - Points Selection Dialog ............................................................. 429
Advanced Automatic Matching Sub-Dialog ..................................................... 431
Matching Progress Sub-Dialog ...................................................................... 432
Advanced Simulation/PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog ..................................... 434
iv
Table of Contents
Advanced Simulation Control Dialog.............................................................. 435

Advanced Simulation Observation Points Sub-Dialog ....................................... 439
Advanced Simulation/PanFlow Rate Simulation Progress Sub-Dialog - (Calculating
Advanced Simulation) ................................................................................. 441
PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog ................................................................... 442
Advanced Simulation/PanFlow Rate Simulation Simulated Column Names Sub-
Dialog ...................................................................................................... 444
Advanced Simulation/PanFlow Rate Simulation Start Pressures/Rates Sub-Dialog 445
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) .................................................................. 446
Advanced Simulation .................................................................................. 498
PanSystem Deliverability Menu Index .............................................................. 517
Deliverability Menu ....................................................................................... 518
IPR Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Overview .................................................... 518
IPR Transient Well Test Deliverability/Injectivity Results (Oil/Water) Dialog ........ 523
IPR Transient Well Test and LIT Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog ..................... 526
IPR C& Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog ....................................................... 529
IPR C&n Results - Additional Data Sub-Dialog ................................................ 532
IPR Model Parameters Sub-Dialog ................................................................ 534
Production Forecasting Dialog ...................................................................... 535
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Menu ............................................................. 541
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Plot Overview ............................................... 541
Enter New Rate Dialog ................................................................................ 546
Reporting Menu ............................................................................................ 547
PanSystem Report Menu Overview ............................................................... 547
Report Cover ............................................................................................. 550
Report Configure........................................................................................ 554
EUB Reports .............................................................................................. 564
Report Print .............................................................................................. 583
PanSystem Configure Menu Index ................................................................... 585
Configure Menu ............................................................................................ 586
General .................................................................................................... 587
Units ........................................................................................................ 590
Gauge ...................................................................................................... 596
Graphs ..................................................................................................... 599
Fonts ....................................................................................................... 602
PanWizard ................................................................................................... 604
What Next? Dialog ..................................................................................... 604
Run on System Start-Up? ............................................................................ 605
Initialization - Load File Dialog ..................................................................... 606
Model Selection Dialog ................................................................................ 607
v
Suggest Model Dialog ................................................................................. 609

Quit Dialog ................................................................................................ 610
PanSystem Help Menu Index .......................................................................... 611
Help Menu ................................................................................................... 612
General Index ........................................................................................... 612
Keyboard Procedures Index ......................................................................... 613
Commands Index ....................................................................................... 614
Procedures Index ....................................................................................... 615
Screen Regions Help Index .......................................................................... 616
Glossary ................................................................................................... 617
Using the PanSystem On-Line HTML Help ...................................................... 618
About PanSystem Dialog ............................................................................. 625
Printing .................................................................................................... 626
Context-Sensitive Help ............................................................................... 627
PanSystem Windows System Commands .......................................................... 628
Windows System Commands .......................................................................... 629
System Close ............................................................................................ 629
System Maximize ....................................................................................... 630
System Minimize ........................................................................................ 631
System Move ............................................................................................ 632
System Restore ......................................................................................... 633
System Size .............................................................................................. 634
PanSystem and PanMesh Toolbar Commands ...................................................... 635
Toolbar Specific Commands .............................................................................. 636
PanSystem Dataprep Toolbar.......................................................................... 636
Dataprep ..................................................................................................... 639
Zoom In ................................................................................................... 639
Zoom Normal ............................................................................................ 640
Delete ...................................................................................................... 641
Data Reduction and Smoothing Facility/Dialog ................................................ 642
Smoothed Column Names Sub-Dialog ........................................................... 646
Initialize ................................................................................................... 647
Undo ........................................................................................................ 648
Confirm Data Reduction Facility/Dialog .......................................................... 649
Number of Points Facility/Dialog ................................................................... 650
Copy and Paste Block of Data (incl. Time) Facility/Dialog ................................. 651
Copy, Re-sample, and Paste from a Single Column Facility/Dialog ..................... 653
Copy and Re-sample Entire Column to New Column Facility/Dialog .................... 654
Shift Facility/Dialog .................................................................................... 655
Difference Facility/Dialog............................................................................. 657
vi
Table of Contents
Exact Point Facility/Dialog ........................................................................... 658

Nearest Point Facility/Dialog ........................................................................ 659
Define Point Facility/Dialog .......................................................................... 660
Auto Flow Period Generation Facility/Dialog ................................................... 661
Create Rate Facility/Dialog .......................................................................... 664
Ungroup Flow Periods ................................................................................. 667
Tidal Filter Mode Facility/Dialog .................................................................... 668
Tidal Lag................................................................................................... 670
Tidal Filter Facility/Dialog ............................................................................ 671
Save Tidal Filtered Data Sub-Dialog .............................................................. 672
PanSystem Analysis Toolbar ........................................................................... 673
Analysis ...................................................................................................... 675
Zoom In ................................................................................................... 675
Zoom Normal ............................................................................................ 676
Delete ...................................................................................................... 677
Time Function Facility/Dialog ....................................................................... 678
Test Overview Plot ..................................................................................... 681
Cartesian Plot ............................................................................................ 684
Semi-Log Plot ............................................................................................ 686
Linear Flow Plot ......................................................................................... 689
Bilinear Flow Plot ....................................................................................... 692
Spherical Flow Plot ..................................................................................... 693
Log-Log Plot .............................................................................................. 694
Type-Curve Plot ......................................................................................... 698
SvQ (Skin versus Flow Rate) Plot ................................................................. 700
Tile .......................................................................................................... 702
Point Selection........................................................................................... 703
Global Point Selection Dialog ....................................................................... 704
Windowed Point Selection Dialog .................................................................. 705
LIT Plot .................................................................................................... 706
Test Period Type Dialog .............................................................................. 709
LIT Flow-After-Flow Dialog .......................................................................... 710
LIT Isochronal Dialog .................................................................................. 711
C&n Plot ................................................................................................... 712
C&n FAF Dialog .......................................................................................... 715
C&n Isochronal Dialog ................................................................................ 716
Flow Regime Definition Facility/Dialog ........................................................... 717
Confirm Results ......................................................................................... 718
Change T0 Facility/Dialog ............................................................................ 719
Line Results Facility/Dialog .......................................................................... 720
vii
Zero Slope Line ......................................................................................... 721

Unit Slope Line .......................................................................................... 722
Half Slope Line .......................................................................................... 723
Quarter Slope Line ..................................................................................... 724
Negative Half Slope Line ............................................................................. 725
Floating Line ............................................................................................. 726
Analysis Toolbar ........................................................................................ 727
Change Line Type ...................................................................................... 728
Fit Line ..................................................................................................... 729
Known Slope Line Facility/Dialog .................................................................. 730
Known Line Dialog ..................................................................................... 731
Parallel Line .............................................................................................. 732
Derivative Selection Facility/Dialog ............................................................... 733
Time Mark Facility/Dialog ............................................................................ 735
Fcd Range Dialog ....................................................................................... 736
Edit Time Mark Dialog ................................................................................. 737
Select Type-Curve Match............................................................................. 738
Type-Curve File Dialog ................................................................................ 740
Type-Curve Choose Zwd Dialog .................................................................... 741
Type-Curve Next/Confirm Facility/Dialog ....................................................... 742
Type-Curve Previous .................................................................................. 743
Type-Curve Pd Facility/Dialog ...................................................................... 744
Smoothing Facility/Dialog ............................................................................ 745
Type-Curve Force Facility/Dialog .................................................................. 746
Pressure Extrapolation Dialog ...................................................................... 747
Pressure Decline Analysis (PDA) Toolbar .......................................................... 749
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) ...................................................................... 751
Zoom In ................................................................................................... 751
Zoom Normal ............................................................................................ 752
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) Facility/ECR Parameters Dialog ........................ 753
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Type-Curves ............................................. 756
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Pressure Decline Plot .................................. 759
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Type-Curves ............................................. 761
Exit PDA Mode ........................................................................................... 764
Deliverability Toolbar .................................................................................... 765
Deliverability ................................................................................................ 767
Zoom In ................................................................................................... 767
Zoom Normal ............................................................................................ 768
IPR Results Facility/Dialog ........................................................................... 769
Transient Linear Plot ................................................................................... 770
viii
Table of Contents
Test Data Linear Plot .................................................................................. 771

Transient/Test Data Linear Plot .................................................................... 772
Transient Log-Log Plot ................................................................................ 773
LIT Linear Plot ........................................................................................... 774
LIT Log-Log Plot ........................................................................................ 775
Transient/LIT Linear Plot ............................................................................. 776
Transient/LIT Log-Log Plot .......................................................................... 777
Extended Linear Plot ................................................................................... 778
Extended Log-Log Plot ................................................................................ 779
Stabilized Linear Plot .................................................................................. 780
Stabilized Log-Log Plot................................................................................ 781
Extended/Stabilized Linear Plot .................................................................... 782
Extended/Stabilized Log-Log Plot ................................................................. 783
Production Forecasting ................................................................................ 784
Flow Rate v Time Plot ................................................................................. 785
Flow Rate and Cumulative Production v Time Plot ........................................... 786
Average Reservoir Pressure and Cumulative Production v Time Plot ................... 787
Average Reservoir Pressure and BHFP v Time Plot .......................................... 788
Export and Save Forecast Results as TPR....................................................... 789
Screen Regions .................................................................................................. 790
PanSystem General Windows Screen Regions Index ............................................. 790
PanSystem and Windows Screen Regions ............................................................ 791
Application/Window Exit Box .......................................................................... 791
Maximize Box ............................................................................................... 792
Menu Bar ..................................................................................................... 793
Minimize Box................................................................................................ 794
Restore Box ................................................................................................. 795
Scroll Bars ................................................................................................... 796
Title Bar ...................................................................................................... 797
Window Border ............................................................................................. 798
PanSystem Specific Screen Regions Index ........................................................... 799
PanSystem Specific Screen Regions ................................................................... 800
Plot Window ................................................................................................. 800
Toolbar Windows .......................................................................................... 802
Ruler Bar ..................................................................................................... 803
Menu Help Windows ...................................................................................... 806
Status Bar Window ....................................................................................... 807
PanSystem Graphing Index ............................................................................... 808
Graphing Specific Screen Regions ...................................................................... 809
Graphs/Plots ................................................................................................ 809
ix
Graphing Title .............................................................................................. 810

Graphing Legend .......................................................................................... 811
Graphing Results .......................................................................................... 812
Graphing X-Axis ........................................................................................... 813
Graphing Y-Axis............................................................................................ 814
Graphing R-Axis ........................................................................................... 815
Graphing T-Axis............................................................................................ 816
Printing, Windows and Graphing Procedures ........................................................... 817
Printing and Windows Procedures ...................................................................... 818
Printing Procedures Index .............................................................................. 818
Printing Procedures ....................................................................................... 819
Printing the Screen..................................................................................... 819
Setting-Up a Printer ................................................................................... 820
Setting-Up The Page Layout ........................................................................ 821
Windows Procedures Index............................................................................. 822
Windows Procedures ..................................................................................... 823
Closing a Window ....................................................................................... 823
Maximizing a Window ................................................................................. 824
Minimizing a Window .................................................................................. 825
Moving a Window ....................................................................................... 826
Restoring a Window.................................................................................... 827
Sizing a Window ........................................................................................ 828
Graphing Specific Procedures Index ................................................................... 829
Graphing Specific Procedures ............................................................................ 830
Adding and Removing the Co-ordinates ............................................................ 830
Adding the Description .................................................................................. 831
Adding and Removing the Legend ................................................................... 832
Adding and Removing the Title ....................................................................... 833
Altering the Appearance of the Axes ................................................................ 834
Altering the Appearance of the Dataset ............................................................ 835
Altering the Appearance of the Description ....................................................... 836
Altering the Appearance of the Legend ............................................................. 837
Altering the Appearance of the Title ................................................................. 838
Plot Annotation ............................................................................................. 839
Zooming In and Out ...................................................................................... 840
Keyboard Procedures Index ................................................................................. 841
Keyboard Procedures .......................................................................................... 842
PanSystem and Windows Keys .......................................................................... 842
Graphing Keys ................................................................................................ 843
Switching to Another Application ........................................................................ 845
x
Table of Contents
PanSystem Glossary ........................................................................................... 846

Definition of PanSystem Terms .......................................................................... 846
EPS Copyright ................................................................................................. 850
EPS Address ................................................................................................... 851
PanSystem Technical Information ......................................................................... 853
PanSystem Dietz Shape Factor Models ................................................................ 854
Dietz Shape Factors ...................................................................................... 854
PanSystem Derivative Diagnostic Library ............................................................ 856
Closed Reservoir Compartments ..................................................................... 856
Constant Pressure Boundaries ........................................................................ 858
Dual-Porosity and Dual-Permeability Systems ................................................... 860
Horizontal Wells............................................................................................ 862
Limited Entry and Radial Composite Systems .................................................... 864
Partially-Communicating Faults and Linear Composite Systems ........................... 866
Semi-Infinite Sealing Fault System .................................................................. 868
Vertical Fractured Well .................................................................................. 871
Wellbore Storage Overlay .............................................................................. 873
PanSystem Calculations .................................................................................... 875
Oil Analysis .................................................................................................. 876
Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) ............................................................................ 877
Oil Analysis (Linear Flow) ............................................................................ 904
Oil Analysis (Bilinear Flow) .......................................................................... 909
Oil Analysis (Spherical Flow) ........................................................................ 911
Oil Analysis (Horizontal Wells)...................................................................... 913
Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis)................................................................ 919
Oil Analysis (Slug Test Analysis) ................................................................... 940
Oil Analysis (PanWizard Equations) ............................................................... 944
Gas Analysis ................................................................................................ 946
Overview .................................................................................................. 946
Gas Analysis (Radial Flow)........................................................................... 948
Gas Analysis (Linear Flow)........................................................................... 967
Gas Analysis (Bilinear Flow) ......................................................................... 969
Gas Analysis (Spherical Flow) ...................................................................... 970
Gas Analysis (Horizontal Wells) .................................................................... 971
Gas Analysis (Type Curve Analysis) .............................................................. 977
Gas Analysis (PanWizard Equations) ............................................................. 989
PanSystem File Structures ................................................................................ 992
PanSystem File Types .................................................................................... 992
Type-Curve File ............................................................................................ 996
*.PAN File .................................................................................................. 1002
xi
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File .................................................................. 1003

*.PIC (Pressure/z-Factor/Viscosity) File .......................................................... 1005
*.SEA Maritime Tide Table File ...................................................................... 1006
PanSystem Test Period Analysis Workflows........................................................ 1007
Slug Test Analysis Workflow ......................................................................... 1007
PanSystem Technical References ..................................................................... 1011
Technical References ................................................................................... 1011
PanSystem Windows Registry .......................................................................... 1018
PanSystem - Windows Registry ..................................................................... 1018
PanSystem Tutorials ......................................................................................... 1021
Tutorial 1: Dataprep Gauge Data (Gas Well) ...................................................... 1022
PanSystem Tutorial Example 1...................................................................... 1022
Dataprep Gauge Data (Gas Well) .................................................................. 1022
Importing Gauge Data Files - Step 1 .............................................................. 1023
Plotting and Appending Data - Step 2 ............................................................ 1030
Shifting Data - Step 3.................................................................................. 1034
Data Quality Generating Differences - Step 4 .................................................. 1036
Editing Data - Step 5 ................................................................................... 1041
Copying Data From File To File - Step 6 ......................................................... 1044
Defining Flow Periods - Step 7 ...................................................................... 1051
Creating Flow Rate Column - Step 8 .............................................................. 1059
Reducing Data - Step 9................................................................................ 1060
Grouping Flow Periods into Test Periods - Step 10 ........................................... 1062
Saving Data to PanSystem Data File - Step 11 ................................................ 1063
Exporting Gauge Data - Step 12 ................................................................... 1064
Tutorial 2: Manual Data Entry (Oil Well) ............................................................ 1065
Manual Data Entry (Oil Well) ........................................................................ 1065
xii
Table of Contents

Dataprep Data Entry - Step 1 ....................................................................... 1066
Dataprep Data Entry - Step 2 ....................................................................... 1071
Plotting Raw Data - Step 3 ........................................................................... 1076
Analysis - Step 4 ........................................................................................ 1081
Simulation - Step 5 ..................................................................................... 1088
Type-Curve Matching - Step 6 ...................................................................... 1098
Tutorial 3: Gas Well DST and Deliverability........................................................ 1102
Gas Well DST and Deliverability .................................................................... 1102
Gas Fluid Properties - Step 1 ........................................................................ 1106
Initial Build-Up Analysis - Step 2 ................................................................... 1109
Final Build-Up Analysis - Step 3 .................................................................... 1111
Flow-After-Flow Transient Analysis - Step 4 .................................................... 1113
Full Test Sequence History Match and Refinement - Step 5 ............................... 1119
Deliverability From Transient Analysis - Step 6 ................................................ 1125
Flow-After-Flow LIT Analysis - Step 7 ............................................................ 1127
Flow-After-Flow C-and-n Analysis - Step 8...................................................... 1133
Production Forecasting - Step 9 .................................................................... 1137
Tutorial 4: Reporting ...................................................................................... 1139
Reporting .................................................................................................. 1139
Altering Printer Settings - Step 1 .................................................................. 1140
Changing the Report Font - Step 2 ................................................................ 1142
xiii

Configuring a Report - Step 3 ....................................................................... 1144
Printing a Report - Step 4 ............................................................................ 1148
Export to Word Document - Step 5 ................................................................ 1149
Using Report Templates - Step 6 ................................................................... 1150
Creating a Text-Only Report - Step 7 ............................................................. 1153
Tutorial 5: Test Design ................................................................................... 1156
Test Design................................................................................................ 1156
Setting-Up the Test Design Parameters - Step 1 .............................................. 1157
Analysis of the Simulated Responses - Step 2 ................................................. 1167
Changing the Test Design Model - Step 3 ....................................................... 1180
Analyzing Multiple Test Design Scenarios - Step 4 ........................................... 1184
Changing the Design Test Sequence - Step 5 .................................................. 1189
PanMesh Tutorials ............................................................................................ 1193
Tutorial 1: Well Near a Pinch-Out ..................................................................... 1194
PanMesh Tutorial Example 1 ......................................................................... 1194
Well Near a Pinch-Out - Overview ................................................................. 1194
PanMesh Dataprep - Step 1 .......................................................................... 1195
Running PanMesh - Step 2 ........................................................................... 1201
Additional PanMesh Runs ............................................................................. 1205
Tutorial 2: Two-Layered Reservoir (One Layer Perforated) ................................... 1207
Two-Layer Reservoir (One Perforated) ........................................................... 1207
Tutorial 3: Horizontal Well in a Single-Layered Reservoir ..................................... 1211
Horizontal Well in a Single-Layer Reservoir ..................................................... 1211
Tutorial 4: Partially Completed Well.................................................................. 1216
xiv
Table of Contents
PanMesh Turorial Example 4 ......................................................................... 1216

Partially-Completed Well .............................................................................. 1216
Product Support, Training and Consultancy .......................................................... 1220
PanSystem Product Support, Training and Consultancy ....................................... 1220
EPS Product Support ...................................................................................... 1220
PanSystem Product Support, Training and Consultancy ....................................... 1221
EPS Product Training and Consulting Services .................................................... 1221
Index ................................................................................................................ 1223
xv
PanSystem
Welcome to PanSystem
New Link to New Features

Features
in v3.5
Introduction:
Welcome to PanSystem
PanSystem is a powerful tool for:
Preparing and editing Well Test Data from conventional gauges and wireline
formation testers.
Analyzing and history matching Transient Well Test Data using Analytical and
Numerical* methods.
Analyzing and history matching long-term Flowing Pressure and Production Data
using Pressure Decline Analysis (PDA) methods.
Analyzing and history matching wireline formation tester probe or packer data
simultaneously with observation probe data.
Computing Well Deliverability/Injectivity and Forecasting long-term production.
Designing Well Tests.
Preparing detailed Reports on Well Test Analysis.
All these functions (apart from Numerical Simulation*) are provided in one integrated
program. PanSystem uses the familiar Windows interface to make it easy for users to
move around and assimilate the program options.
*The PanMesh Numerical Simulator is an optional extra.

For a quick introduction to PanSystem features and concepts, some useful links are
provided below:
For an explanation of nomenclature used within the program, refer to Definition of
Terms.
An index to the PanSystem menu system and Windows features can be found in
PanSystem Menus and Windows Commands.
For a description of the Reservoir Flow Models (including external Customer Models)
and Flow Model Parameters used within PanSystem and their application, refer to
Model Parameters.
For a description of the Reservoir Parameters used in PanSystem and their
application, refer to Layer Parameters.
1
Refer to PanSystem/Panmesh Overview for a description of PanSystem/PanMesh

Data Preparation; the PanMesh Graphical Interface is described in Numerical
(PanMesh) Graphical Interface.
Information relating to the various Help systems and the interactive PanWizard (i.e.
a series of screen dialogs or "Wizards" that are designed to guide users step-by-
step through Data Preparation into Analysis), can be accessed via the Help menu.
2
PanSystem
Preparing Data for Analysis in PanSystem
Overview:
The following diagram shows the sequence of events users should follow to create a .Pan
System File for Analysis. The Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning module uses wavelet
analysis and is designed for efficient processing of large datasets. Refer to the Dataprep
Help menu for additional information on selected topics:
3
Using PanSystem for Analysis
Overview:
The following diagram shows the sequence of events users should follow when using
PanSystem to analyze Well Test results. Information on each option is available from the
Analysis Help menu:
4
PanSystem
Using PanSystem for Test Design
Overview:
The following diagram shows the sequence of events users should follow when using
PanSystem for Test Design and Advanced Simulation:
5
Program Menu Bar Options and Commands
PanSystem Menus and Windows Commands Index

General:
Select one of the following links to open up a sub-index of Help topics or a specific Help
topic related to each specific menu command:
File Menu
Edit Menu
Dataprep Menu
Analysis Menu
Simulate Menu
Deliverability Menu
PDA Menu Option (Plot)
Reporting Menu
Configure Menu
Help Menu
Windows System Commands
6
PanSystem
PanSystem Menus and Window Commands
PanSystem File Menu Index
The following program commands provide control over the application as a whole (e.g.
file input and output, printing and page configuration. For more specific details on each
topic, select the relevant links outlined below:
New - Clears the existing analysis from memory prior to beginning a new analysis.
Open - Opens an existing analysis from file.
Save - Saves the current analysis to file.
Save As - Saves the current analysis under a different filename.
Save As Previous - Saves the current analysis from this version of PanSystem in
previous version file format.
V 1.80 Import - Imports PanSystem V-1.8 files (the last DOS version of
PanSystem).
Graphics Export - Allows PanSystem plots to be saved for use in other applications.
Send as E-mail - Sends the currently open file to another user via a MAPI-compliant
mail system.
Print - Prints out the current plot window.
Page Setup - Sets up the page layout.
Printer Setup - Configures the printer prior to sending output.
Exit - Exits from PanSystem.
7
File Menu
File New
General:
This option is used to prepare a new system file. PanSystem clears the computer's
internal memory ready to recall or input new data.
When the New command is selected, PanSystem clears anything formerly displayed in the
plot area. All other current data will also be cleared.
This option will clear any data currently stored in the computer's internal memory.
To keep this data, it must be saved by using the Save option.
8
PanSystem
Open Dialog
General:
This option is used to locate and load an existing system file (*.PAN).
The names of the last four files opened appear at the bottom of the File menu. To open
one of these, use the left mouse button to highlight and select the filename, then double-
click.
PanSystem uses a range of file types and it is important to know about these before
starting a work session. Users should familiarize themselves with the following types of
files (default extensions in brackets):
Gauge Data files (*.TPR)
System files (*.PAN or *.PAX)
Tide Table files (*.SEA)
Report files (text only) (*.RPT)
The file extensions (*.TPR, *.PAN, *.PAX, *.SEA and *.RPT) are default file
extensions used in PanSystem. If required, users can assign their own extensions.
The File Open option will overwrite any data currently stored in the internal
memory. To keep this data, it must be saved using the Save option before
opening a new file.
Screen Dialog and Operational Instructions:
This is a standard Windows Open dialog and users should refer to the Windows Reference
Manual or Windows Online Help if assistance is required with any of the Windows-specific
options.
The default file type is the ASCII (*.PAN) file. The alternative ASCII-formatted (*.PAX)
file, used for UNIX versions of PanSystem, may be selected from the List Files of Type
drop-down menu section of the dialog window.
As files are selected, summary information from the selected file (e.g. test data, well
details, etc.), is displayed in the lower text field part of the dialog.
With the required file highlighted, select Open to open. Files can also be opened on an
individual basis, by double-clicking on the desired file icon in the viewing field to open
directly.
If users are trying to locate a PanSystem file with specific criteria, a Search button is
located at the base of this dialog for this purpose. Select the button to open a Search
Criteria sub-dialog and specify:
The Directory to search for appropriate files via the Browse button.
Specify the Search Criteria to locate appropriate files by checking the relevant fields
(e.g. Field, Well, Reservoir Model, Fluid Type, Number of Layers, etc.) and
selecting/inputting appropriate information (where required).
On selecting OK, a Search Results dialog is generated. When files are
selected/highlighted in the list field, the report parameters from the selected file
(e.g. test data, well details, etc.), are displayed in the lower text field part of the
9
dialog. Select/highlight the required file, then select the Open button to load the
file into PanSystem.
If an existing file has been saved in plot display mode that file will re-open in plot
display mode. In cases where files have been saved in blank screen mode, the file
will re-open in blank screen mode, awaiting user input. If users are uncertain what
to do next, they should select PanWizard What Next? option from the upper menu
bar to activate the PanSystem Wizard assistant.
Other points to note:
The default working directory path can be pre-set via the Config General menu
option. This will be the default path for File Open, Save and Save as... whenever a
PanSystem session is started.
If the user subsequently browses to a folder that is different from the preset
working directory and opens a file, the File Save and Save as... operations will
target the new folder and will continue to do so until a new folder is browsed, or
until the PanSystem session is terminated. Upon starting a new session, the preset
working folder will be reinstated.
When a (*.PAN) file has been opened, users can start to enter, edit or analyze data.
To enter or edit data use the Dataprep menu options.
To analyze the data use the Analysis menu options.
Also refer to the help topic for Gauge Data Files.
10
PanSystem
Save Dialog
General:
This option is used to save the data currently stored in the computer's internal memory to
a file. PanSystem will give the file the default extension (*.PAN). Users can change this
and use another extension if required.
If an existing file is being edited, Save will overwrite it with the current data. No
warning is given. To retain the original file, use the Save As option and give the
current data a new filename.
This is a standard Windows Save dialog and users should refer to the Windows Reference
options.
When saving the current PanSystem data to a file, the default file type is the ASCII
(*.PAN) file.
option. This will be the default path for File Open, Save and Save as whenever a
If the user subsequently browses to a folder which is different from the preset
working directory and opens a file, the File Save and Save as operations will target
the new folder and will continue to do so until a new folder is browsed, or until the
PanSystem session is terminated. Upon starting a new session, the preset working
folder will be reinstated.
11
Save As Dialog
General:
This option should be used when an existing file has been edited and the current data
stored in the computer's internal memory is to be saved without overwriting the original
data. The Save As option prompts users to supply a new filename for the data.
This is a standard Windows File Save As dialog and users should refer to the Windows
Reference Manual or Windows Online Help if assistance is required with any of the
Windows-specific options.
This dialog can be used to save the current data to a new filename. The default file type
is the ASCII (*.PAN) file.
option. This will be the default path for File Open, Save and Save as whenever a
If the user subsequently browses to a folder which is different from the preset
working directory and opens a file, the File Save and Save as operations will target
the new folder and will continue to do so until a new folder is browsed, or until the
PanSystem session is terminated. Upon starting a new session, the preset working
folder will be reinstated.
12
PanSystem
Save As Previous Version Dialog
General:
This option should be used after an existing file has been edited and users wish to save
the data in the previous version format, rather than the current version of PanSystem.
This option may be required for a number of reasons (e.g. version of software being used
by partners, etc.). Users will be prompted to supply a name for the data file.
There may be a number of changes in file format between previous and current versions,
and although files from earlier versions of PanSystem can be read by the latest version
of PanSystem, the converse is not necessarily true unless these files have been saved
using this option.
When this option is selected, a dialog similar to the Save As dialog appears, prompting
users to supply a filename for the file which will be saved in the previous version format.
This is a standard Windows File Save As dialog and users should refer to the Reference
options.
The default file type is the ASCII (*.PAN) file.
The data directory can be pre-set to locate users' files via the Config General menu
option.
13
Import v1.80 Dialog
General:
This option can be used to import data that was prepared using the DOS PanSystem
v1.80 or earlier versions. These files will normally have the extensions (*.OIL), or
(*.GAS) and (*.PRO). Once imported via this option, the data can be analyzed in the
usual way. On completion, users can save the re-worked imported data as a PanSystem
v3 compatible system file (*.PAN), using the Save As option.
Users can choose the file type they wish to recall and select OK. A File Open dialog is
then generated, with the appropriate default file extension displayed.
Other points to note:
When the file has been opened, users can start to enter, edit or analyze the data.
The data directory can be pre-set to locate users' files via the Config General menu
option.
To enter or edit data use the Dataprep menu options.
To analyze the data use the Analysis menu options.
For v1.80 Gas Welltests, the Gas Pseudo-Pressure Tables in the (*.PRO) file must
also be imported. Once loaded into PanSystem, the tables can be saved as part of
the (*.PAN) file and are no longer separate.
14
PanSystem
Graphics Export Dialog
General:
Use this option to save a PanSystem plot as a graphic file for use in other applications.
Whatever plot is on the screen will be captured automatically when the Graphics Export
window is opened.
The following options are available on the Graphic Viewer and Compression Utility menus:
File menu item:
Load: This allows users to view any GIF (*.GIF), JPEG (*.JPG), Device
Independent Bitmap (*.DIB) or TIFF (*.TIF) file format in the Graphic
Viewer.
Save As: This allows users to save any viewed image as a GIF (*.GIF), JPEG
(*.JPG), Device Independent Bitmap (*.DIB) or TIFF (*.TIF) file format.
Exit: Closes the Graphic Viewer and Compression Utility.
Edit menu item:
Capture: This option copies the current plot in PanSystem to the Graphic
Viewer. (Obsolete function as the plot is now captured automatically.)
Help menu item:
About: This shows the version and copyright data for this facility.
15
Send as e-mail
General:
Use this option to send the currently active PanSystem file by e-mail.
Selecting this option from the menu opens an e-mail dialog and attaches the currently
active (*.PAN) file to a new MAPI compliant e-mail message. Users can select recipients,
add textual information and send from this dialog.
The e-mail dialog also has a self-contained help which can be consulted for e-mail specific
queries.
16
PanSystem
Print Dialog
General:
This option is used to print the currently displayed plot as a hard copy. Users can also
optionally print out model and line results if these have been selected in the Page Set-Up
option.
File Print brings up a standard Windows Print dialog. Select the target printer, set the
printer Properties, and proceed. As an alternative to direct paper output, plots can be
saved as Graphics Files - for example, in PDF format by installing the Adobe PDF
Converter in the printer list.
If Page Set-up has been configured to include textual output, File Print will bring up an
intermediate dialog with a choice of sending the graphic and text to the printer, or of
saving the textual content to a text file (extension .RPT).
As an alternative, to capture the plot for use in a word processor or graphics package,
use the Edit Copy option or the Windows Alt + Print Screen command, to transfer the plot
window to the ClipBoard, where it then becomes available for pasting into other
applications.
Use this dialog to print the currently displayed plot to hard copy or file, along with any
additional information selected under the Page Set-Up option.
The form of the Print dialog will depend on the printer selected. The main characteristics
are as follows:
Printer: Select a printer to use. The PanSystem default printer is highlighted.
Name: Displays the name of the currently selected printer or application
that data will be assigned to. Users can select an alternative printer or
application from the drop-down menu on the right-hand side of the text
field.
The Properties button gives the user access to a further print sub-dialog
where additional Layout and Paper/Quality properties can be specified. For
example:
Orientation: Select from Portrait and two Landscape options (options
are displayed graphically).
Page Order: Set the printing order for multiple documents from Back
to Front or Front to Back.
Pages per Sheet: This option can be used to tile multiple plots on a
single page by using the drop-down menu to specify the number of
plots (pages) required per single sheet (options are displayed
graphically).
Paper Source: Select a tray or manual feed source for paper supply
to the current printer. The default is Automatically Select. The
Advanced button gives users access to a further sub-dialog where
current print settings can be reviewed and Paper Size can be
specified from a drop-down menu.
17
An Advanced button gives users access to a further sub-dialog where

Status: Supplies information on the current printer status (i.e. operational
or off-line).
Type: Supplies technical specification of the current printer.
Where: Supplies location of the current printer.
Comment: Supplies additional system information about the current printer.
Print Range:
All: By default, all pages will be printed.
Copies:
Number of copies: Select the number of copies required via the drop-down
menu.
If the file is sent directly to a printer, a box showing the status of the printer appears on
the screen while the plot and/or hard copy is being printed.
If the text file option is selected, a File Save As dialog will be displayed with the option to
save a Report file with the default extension (*.RPT).
To print a fuller Report consisting of an input data summary, the results of several
selected plots, and other data, the Print Report option from the Report menu should be
used.
Refer also to the help file for:

Printer Set-Up
18
PanSystem
Page Set-Up Dialog
General:
This option can be used to set-up how the plot will appear on the printed page prior to
using the Print option. Users can also specify the Print Content elements they want to
include on a plot (e.g. model and line results).
This dialog is primarily used to edit items for inclusion on the plot and to set the plot size
and margins. To set the plot orientation, choose from portrait or landscape options via
the Print Setup option from the File menu. The Page Set-Up dialog has three sections:
Print Contents: Items can be appended to the plot:
Plot: This will print the screen plot, with line/s, legend and results box if
present. If this is the only box checked, nothing else will appear on the
page.
Header/Footer: Allows for the inclusion of text that will be printed at the top
and bottom of the page, outside the plot frame. The contents of the Header
and Footer are configured from the Report menu item by choosing Configure
Report, then selecting the Edit Layout button from the configuration dialog.
Textual items can also include company logos.
The Header/Footer font is configurable via the Config Fonts menu option by
selecting the Report Font button.
Refer also to Page Set-Up Codes for details of how the Header and Footer
sections of Report pages can be set-up to have the current Date and Time
embedded.
Quick Match: Lists the parameters used for a Quick Match response
generation. (These need not necessarily be the same as the Model Results).
Model Results: Lists the results appearing in the plot results box, in a framed
area beneath the plot, using full textual description of parameters (e.g.
"Permeability" instead of "k"). The font is configurable via the Config Fonts
menu option by selecting the Report Font button.
Line results: Lists the parameters associated with lines drawn on the plot.
Description box: Adds information defined by the user within the
Description option of the Edit menu, for printouts of the current plot.
Margins: Sets the page margins for the drawing area.
The default Top/Bottom setting is 0.75 inches (19 mm). The drawing area defined
by the printer driver is usually slightly smaller than the page, so a setting of zero
will still leave a small margin.
Size: Select from three options how the plot is to be printed on the page.
Screen Size: Prints the plot at the current screen size and aspect ratio,
subject to margin constraints.
Fit to Page: Sizes the plot to be as large as possible within the margins,
while retaining the same aspect ratio as the screen plot. This is the default
setting.
19
Full Page: The aspect ratio is adjusted to fill the page out to the margins.
With the exception of the margins, these settings are global, and will apply to all plots
and all files. The margins settings apply to all plots but are file specific (i.e. they are
saved to file).
Refer also to the help files for:
Print
Printer Set-Up
20
PanSystem
Printer Set-Up Dialog
General:
This option is used to select and set-up a Printer for use with PanSystem. It is also
possible to select between a portrait or landscape orientation for hard copy and choose a
paper size and source for supply to the selected printer.
The Printer can also be set-up from this dialog, in which case a sub-dialog is generated to
allow users to choose from a range of options. The sub-dialog appearance and option
availability are dependent on the selected Printer. The fields are described as follows:
Any changes made here are local to the PanSystem program.
Printer: Select a printer to use. The PanSystem default Printer is highlighted.
Name: Displays the name of the currently selected Printer or application
that data will be assigned to. Users can select an alternative Printer or
application from the drop-down menu on the right-hand side of the text
field.
The Properties button gives the user access to a further Print sub-dialog
where additional Layout and Paper/Quality properties can be specified:
Orientation: Select from Portrait and two Landscape options (options
are displayed graphically).
Page Order: Set the printing order for multiple documents from Back
to Front or Front to Back.
Pages per Sheet: This option can be used to tile multiple plots on a
single page by using the drop-down menu to specify the number of
plots (pages) required per single sheet (options are displayed
graphically).
Paper Source: Select a tray or manual feed source for paper supply
to the current Printer. The default is Automatically Select. The
Advanced button gives users access to a further sub-dialog where
Status: Supplies information on the current Printer status (i.e. operational
or off-line).
Type: Supplies technical specification of the current Printer.
Where: Supplies location of the current Printer.
Comment: Supplies additional system information about the current Printer.
Paper: Select a Paper Size and Source via the drop-down menu system.
Orientation: Select a Page Orientation from a choice of Portrait or Landscape
(options are displayed graphically).
Network: Opens a Connect to Printer sub-dialog that allows users to browse the
existing system network to select a suitable shared Printer.
It is very important to set-up the Printer correctly otherwise it may not produce
what is required.
21

Page Set-Up
Print
22
PanSystem
Connect to Printer Sub-Dialog
General:
This option is used to browse for and select a shared printer from the existing system
network. The sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Network button within the Print
Setup Dialog.
This sub-dialog is comprised of a selection field, a browse area (with an associated
checkbox), an information area and two function buttons, described as follows:
Printer: This field will contain the path to the selected network printer and the
printer name once it has been selected.
Shared Printers: This browse area allows users to locate and highlight a network
printer for selection. The network is situated at the top of the hierarchy, with the
subsidiary components located below (i.e. various domains and network drives).
Double-click on the required drive icon to locate a suitable printer. When the
printer is selected with a mouse-click, it will be highlighted and the path and printer
name will appear in the Printer field described above. Printer status information for
the selected printer will also be displayed in the Printer Information area described
below.
Expand by Default: If this checkbox is checked, the network hierarchy displayed
in the Shared Printers area will be automatically expanded when this sub-dialog is
subsequently opened.
Printer Information: Once a printer has been selected in the Shared Printers
area, the current status of the selected printer is displayed here, in conjunction with
any other relevant information on the printer (e.g. documents waiting to be printed,
etc.).
23
Page Set-Up Codes
General:
The header and footer sections of report pages can be set-up to have the current date
and time embedded (i.e. derived from Windows Control Panel International settings), by
typing the following codes into the report layout.
Procedure:
Select Report/Configure Report from the main menu to open a Configure Report dialog.
Select the Edit Layout button to open an Edit Report Layout dialog.
The following codes may then be typed into the appropriate text fields within the Report
Header and Report Footer sections:
&d: Enters the current date in the format set-up on the Windows Control Panel
International settings (e.g. "04-27-1991").
&t: Enters the current time in the format set-up on the Windows Control Panel
International settings (e.g. "17:34:21").
24
PanSystem
Exit
General:
Use this option to quit PanSystem.
If a file is currently open, users will be prompted by a Confirm dialog to Save the
Current Data to File. If the No option is selected, current data will not be saved.
25
PanSystem Edit Menu Index
The following commands are used to manage and edit plotting and display parameters for
the current analysis. For more specific details on each topic, select the relevant links
outlined below:
Copy to Clipboard - Copies current plot, and/or numerical values of plotted data, to
Clipboard.
Copy to Grid Data View- Displays numerical values of plotted data as a table, with
an option to copy some or all to the Clipboard.
Title - Alters title appearance.
Legend - Alters legend appearance.
Results - Alters results box appearance.
Description - Edit description box beneath current plot.
Datasets - Alters dataset appearance (symbols, lines, etc).
Axes - (sub-menu items):
X Axis - Alters X axis appearance.
Y Axis - Alters Y axis appearance.
R Axis - Alters R axis appearance.
T Axis - Alters T axis appearance.
Plot Right Hand Axis - Control label and scaling assigned to R axis.
View Coordinates - Switch data co-ordinates display on or off.
Plot Rate Changes - Switch display of rate change data on or off on Data Edit and
Test Overview plots.
Overlay Pressure - Control display of alternative pressure columns in the same data
file.
Mark Points - Mark currently selected points with a number and text string.
Marker Text - Add text to the currently marked points, edit existing text, delete a
marker.
Delete Marker - Delete currently selected marker and text.
Show Marker Text - Turn the display of the marker text on or off.
26
PanSystem
Edit Menu
Copy to Clipboard
General:
The Edit / Copy to Clipboard function allows the following to be copied to the Windows
Clipboard for subsequent pasting into other applications:
the current graph
the numerical values of the plotted data
A sub-menu is displayed with three options:
Graph: copy the graphic
Data: copy the x- and y-axis data values (and derivative if present), as plotted (see
example below)
Quick Match data: copy the x- and y-axis values of the Quick Match data, if plotted.
Note that it is the plotted (transformed) values of the data which are copied. (This option
is also available as r;transformed data in Report / Configure Report).
Log-Log Plot
Transformed Data
Equivalent Time P P Derivative
(hours) (kPa2/uPa.s (*1E-06)) (kPa2/uPa.s (*1E-06))
0.000999 0.355702 0.000000
0.001266 0.447166 0.426004
0.001602 0.556764 0.510048
0.002022 0.685754 0.601073
0.002556 0.837718 0.695565
Example of log-log plot data copied to Clipboard and pasted to an editor
27
Title Dialog
General:
The title appears at the top of the plot screen.
Use the Edit Title dialog to:
Change the title text by typing new text into the Title field.
Choose the title text Color from the drop-down menu and menu scroll bar.
Decide whether or not to show the title by checking or unchecking the Show Title
checkbox.
28
PanSystem
Legend Dialog
General:
The legend box is initially displayed at the top right-hand corner of the plot by default. The box can be moved
around by clicking on it with the left mouse button and dragging it to a new position with the button depressed.
The legend names displayed for a column of plotted data are the same as the column names displayed in the gauge
data file. They can be edited via the DataPrep Menu by:
Selecting the Gauge Data option to open a Gauge Data Preparation dialog.
Selecting the Edit button from the Data File section to open a Select Data File to
Edit sub-dialog.
Selecting OK in Select Data File to Edit to open an Edit sub-dialog.
Selecting the Names button from the right-hand side of the Edit sub-dialog to open
an Edit Column Names sub-dialog and editing the names as required.
Use the Edit Legend dialog to:
Choose the box frame and text Color from the drop-down menu and menu scroll
bar.
Decide whether or not to show the legend by checking or unchecking the Show
Legend checkbox.
Refer also the the Help topic for Graphing Configuration.
29
Results Dialog
General:
This dialog can be generated by either selecting the Results option from the Edit menu, or double-left clicking with
the mouse on a Results Box within a plot window. The Results Box displays the results computed for a line fit (i.e.
Model Results) or curve match (i.e. Quick Match Results). The box can be dragged with the left mouse button and
dropped at a new position.
The dialog is comprised of two selection areas and two functional buttons, described as
follows:
Color: Choose the box frame and text Color from the drop-down menu and menu
scroll bar.
Hide Results; this plot: Check the box to hide the Model Results or Quick Match
results for the current plot. Any lines or traces will remain.
Hide Results; all plots: Check the box to hide the Model Results or Quick Match
results for all the analysis plots. Any lines or traces will remain.
To show Model Results or Quick Match results again when they have been hidden,
bring up the Edit Results dialog and OK leaving both boxes unchecked.
Refer also the the Help topic for Graphing Configuration.
30
PanSystem
Description Dialog
General:
A short description (i.e. up to 20 lines), of the current plot can be printed in a box directly beneath the plot. This is
useful for presenting additional information about the plot. The description for a particular plot can be saved to file,
and is only associated with that plot type in that file. Users can write, view or edit their short description of the
current plot via this dialog.
The description is not visible on the plot screen and to view it, the Edit Description option has to be selected. The
description will be printed beneath the plot when it is printed to hard copy from the File/Print or Report/Report
Output/Print Report menu options. The description will also be saved as part of the System file when the Save
menu option is used.
Use this dialog to:
Choose the box frame and text Color from the drop-down menu and menu scroll
bar.
Specify if the description is to appear on the print or not (i.e. type in appropriate
text and OK or leave the text entry field blank and OK or Cancel).
Write, view or edit the description text. Up to 20 lines of description can be
entered.
31
Datasets Dialog
General:
This dialog is used to specify how data appears on the plot for both screen viewing and printing. Each Dataset can
either be represented as distinct points or as a continuous line. Users can also select the color, style and weight of
the plot data.
The main features of the dialog are described below:
Individual Datasets are selected for editing from the drop-down menu entitled
Dataset Style.
Each Dataset can either be represented as distinct symbols, as a continuous line of
chosen thickness (weight), or hidden by selecting the appropriate buttons.
For the Lines style option, the Line Thickness can be varied between 1 and 5 by
using the drop-down menu item and selecting an appropriate thickness. This
option has been added because single thickness lines appear very fine on a hi-res
(600 dpi) printer.
Although a line thickness of 3 may not have a good screen resolution, it will look
good on a printed page.
Select the color and style of the plot data from the appropriate drop-down menus
and menu scroll bars.
When the Symbol Weight option is checked, this allows points on the plot to appear
bolder in the printed copy.
The Dataset style selected in this dialog will be applied to all plots that use this
Dataset style.
32
PanSystem
X-Axis Dialog
General:
This dialog is used to format textual/graphical display and scaling parameters for the plot
X-axis (bottom of plot). It can also be accessed by double-clicking in the numbers along
the axis.
This menu option is used to:
Set the Min and Max values of the plot X-axis (plot-specific, saved to file).
Change the X-axis Label text (plot-specific, saved to file).
Change the X-axis display Color (global setting, plot-type specific).
Time Format: Select a suitable Time Format for the X-axis label (e.g. hours,
dd:mm:hh:ss, etc.) on the Data Edit Plot and Test Overview. The (DATE)
hh:mm:ss format is a 24-hr clock presentation, intended for use with imported
dates. However, it also can be use when dates are not available if the 24-hour clock
presentation is required. The dd:hh:mm:ss format is also 24-hour clock, but
includes a day counter.
Divisions: Choose the spacing between the X-axis grid lines, or Ticks, by setting the
number of divisions. This automatically sets the axis numbering (global setting,
plot-type specific).
The Divisions option is not enabled for logarithmic scaling.

Show or Hide the gridlines, ticks, labels and/or scales, etc. on the X-axis by
checking or unchecking the appropriate check boxes (global settings, plot-type
specific).
Logarithmic: plots with logarithmic axes can be scaled in terms of real values (0.1,
1, 10, 100...) - tick box on - or log of real values (-1, 0, 1, 2...) - tick box off.
Show date: If the date has been imported with the gauge data, it can be added to
the x-axis of the Data Edit and Test Overview plots by ticking the Show date box.
Lock a particular X-axis scale setting to prevent it from changing. This holds the X-
axis scaling at the current setting and prevents any automatic re-scaling (setting
not saved). Lock is automatically switched on when a Min or Max axis scale value is
changed manually, but not after a zoom.
If Lock is subsequently switched off after a manual scale change, the scale will, if
necessary, be rounded automatically to 'cosmetic' values close to those that were
used.
33
Refer also to the Help topic for Graphing Configuration.
34
PanSystem
Y-Axis Dialog
General:
Y-axis (i.e. left-hand side of plot). It can also be accessed by double-clicking in the
numbers along the axis.
Set the Min and Max values of the plot Y-axis (plot-specific, saved to file).
Change the Y-axis Label text (plot-specific, setting not saved).
Change the Y-axis display Color (global setting, plot-type specific).
Divisions: Choose the spacing between the Y-axis grid lines, or Ticks, by setting the
number of divisions. This automatically sets the axis numbering (global setting,
plot-type specific).
The Divisions option is not enabled for logarithmic scaling.

Show or Hide the gridlines, ticks, labels and/or scales, etc. on the Y-axis by
checking or un-checking the appropriate check boxes (global settings, plot-type
specific).
Logarithmic: plots with logarithmic axes can be scaled in terms of real values (0.1,
1, 10, 100...) - tick box on - or log of real values (-1, 0, 1, 2...) - tick box off.
Lock a particular Y-axis scale setting to prevent it from changing. This holds the Y-
axis scaling at the current setting and prevents any automatic re-scaling (setting
not saved). Lock is automatically switched on when a Min or Max axis scale value is
changed manually, but not after a zoom.
If Lock is subsequently switched off after a manual scale change, the scale will, if
necessary, be rounded automatically to 'cosmetic' values close to those that were
used.
35
Refer also to the Help topic for Graphing Configuration.
36
PanSystem
T-Axis Dialog
General:
T-axis (top axis of plot).
Change the T-axis Label text (setting not saved).
Change the T-axis display Color (global setting, plot type specific).
Show or Hide the ticks, labels and/or scales, etc. on the T-axis by checking or
unchecking the appropriate checkboxes (global setting, plot type specific).
37
R-Axis Dialog
General:
R-axis (right-hand side of plot). It is accessed via the Edit / Axes menu or by double-
clicking in the numbers along the axis.
Set the Min and Max values of the plot R-axis (plot specific, saved to file).
Change the R-axis Label text (setting not saved).
Change the R-axis display Color (global setting, plot type specific).
Choose the spacing between the R-axis grid lines or ticks) by setting the number of
divisions. This automatically sets the axis numbering (global setting, plot type
specific).
If the Divisions setting for the R-axis is used in this dialog, it can be set
independently of the left-hand side Y-axis, provided the Show Grid checkbox is not
checked in the Edit Y-axis dialog. If it is checked, the R-axis takes on the gridding
defined for the Y-axis.
Show or Hide the ticks, labels and/or scales, etc. by checking or un-checking the
appropriate check boxes (global setting, plot type specific).
Lock a particular R-axis scale setting to prevent it from changing. This holds the
scaling at the current setting and prevents any automatic re-scaling (setting not
saved).
The box next to Lock Scales will be automatically checked as soon as you enter a
number in the Min or Max fields. If you un-check the box, the selected axis will be
auto-scaled based on the entered values.
38
PanSystem
Edit Plot Right Hand Axis
General:
This dialog is used to control which label and scaling to assign to the R-axis (right-hand
side of plot) when multiple data columns are plotted, and to temporarily remove selected
traces from the plot. It is accessed via the Edit / Plot Right Hand Axis menu option. It
applies to the Data Edit Plot and the Test Overview plot.
Data Edit Plot: On the Data Edit Plot, if Pressure is selected to plot, the Rate Schedule
will be plotted by default, if it has been created. The Data Edit Plot has the option to plot
additional data such as temperature, and measured flowrates, but the right-hand axis is
assigned to the Rate Schedule by default.
The upper section of the Plot Right Hand Axis menu lets you assign a different plotted
dataset (label and scaling) to the R-axis. In the example, Pressure and Temperature
were selected to plot. The R-axis was automatically assigned to the Rate Schedule. The
temperature trace was auto-scaled and plotted but its scaling is not displayed. By
clicking on Temperature in the menu, the right-hand axis can be switched from Rate
Schedule to Temperature. The Rate Schedule trace remains on the plot, but it now has
no axis label or scaling.
The axis properties (scale, etc) can be changed via the Edit / Axes / R Axis menu option,
or by double-clicking to the right of the axis.
The upper part of the Plot Right Hand Axis menu will now feature Rate Schedule instead
of Temperature, and clicking on this will reassign the R-axis to the Rate Schedule.
39
The lower menu options prefixed by Remove... can be used to remove a plotted dataset -
along with its R-axis label and scales if assigned - from the plot. Returning to the default
situation with Rate Schedule on the R-axis, Remove Rate Schedule will remove the trace
from the plot and give the R-axis to Temperature. The Rate Schedule option will now
become enabled in the upper part of the menu, and the Rate Schedule trace can be
restored to the plot by clicking this.
Likewise Remove Temperature will delete the temperature trace, and give the R-axis to
the Rate Schedule if present. The Temperature option will now become enabled in the
upper part of the menu, and the Temperature trace can be restored to the plot by clicking
this.
Removing Rate Schedule and Temperature will leave the R-axis blank.
Test Overview: The Test Overview plots Pressure and Rate Schedule, but does not offer
the facility to plot other data apart from a measured flowrate if it has been selected as
the master rate column. The above description applies where relevant.
The upper part of the menu switches between axis labels for plotted datasets.
The lower part of the menu removes a dataset (and its R-axis attributes if assigned
to it) from the plot. If the dataset has been removed from the plot, the upper part
of the menu restores the trace and assigns the axis.
40
PanSystem
View Co-ordinates
General:
This menu check option is used to switch the plot co-ordinate display values on and off.
The co-ordinate display values appear in four small panels situated centrally within the
horizontal display bar underlying the plot. These values correspond to X-, Y-, T- and R-
axis co-ordinates respectively, reading from left to right.
If the co-ordinate display is switched on, a check mark will appear against the View Co-
ordinates option in the Edit menu. As the mouse pointer is moved around within the plot
area, the co-ordinate values for each configured axis are displayed in the panels
underlying the plot.
This is a very useful feature for reading off precise values at specific points on the
plot.
To switch the View Coordinates option off, select Edit/View Coordinates from the main
menu bar, so that the check mark is removed.
41
Plot Rate Schedule
General:
This menu check option is used to display the Test Rate Schedule on the Plot (it is on by
default). The Time and Rate Data are read from the Rate Changes table which is plotted
in Step Form (refer to Dataprep/Gauge Data and Data Editor dialogs for further details on
editing this table).
To switch the Plot Rate Schedule option off, select Edit/Plot Rate Changes from the main
menu bar, so that the check mark is removed. This has the effect of de-activating the
Test Rate Schedule Plot on the Plot View and removing it from the Plot Printout.
42
PanSystem
Overlay Pressure Dialog
General:
This option is used to overlay an additional pressure record in conjunction with the
currently displayed pressure being analyzed (e.g. pressure from a second gauge run on
the same test).
This Overlay Pressure option is available on all analysis plots, but the additional
pressure data must be a column of data that is already present in the current
Master Data File, otherwise users will receive the error message - "There are no
Pressure Columns to Overlay".
Within the Select Pressure Column to Overlay list field, select the pressure/s that is/are to
be overlaid and check the Show Overlaid Pressure checkfield. This list field contains the
names of any other pressure data column/s present in the current Master Data File.
An additional data field entitled P0 for Overlaid Pressure (i.e. the pressure at the start of
the test period) is activated for plots that have p, p2 or m(p) on the Y-axis (e.g. Log-
Log Plot), because this important pressure obviously affects the Y-axis values. The
pressure value corresponding to T0 will be read automatically from the selected data
column. If there is no value exactly at T0, the preceding data point will be selected if
there is one. Change the value in the edit box if required. To reset to the default value,
select the pressure name in the list box and it will be reset to the default value each time
the dialog is opened. Users have a choice of up to five data columns for overlaying.
To remove pressure overlays, select the Edit/Overlay Pressure option again, then
uncheck the Show Overlaid Pressure checkfield.
If there are no other pressure datasets in the current Master Data File selected for
analysis, no pressure column names will be listed.
Copying Data into the Master File:
If an additional gauge pressure exists within the (*.PAN) file, but is not listed when the
Edit/Overlay Pressure option is selected, this is because it is not part of the current
Master Data File. Gauge pressure data can be copied into the Master Data File through
the following process:
1. Select the Dataprep/Gauge Data menu option to open a Gauge Data Preparation
dialog. The Master Data File/Columns section is located in the lower right-hand
side of the dialog.
2. Select the required file from the Data File/Column List section of the Gauge Data
Preparation dialog, then select the Add to List button to make the file appear in the
List to Plot section of the dialog. Ensure the master pressure file is also included in
the List to Plot section.
3. Select the Plot button to generate a Dataprep Data Edit plot in the viewer. The
Dataprep Toolbar is generated automatically.
4. Select the Copy Resample + Paste From a Single Data Column button (tooltips are
displayed to help identify the correct icon). The plotted column of the source data
file is listed on the left, in the Copy from Column field. Type a name for the new
data column to be created in the master file, in the Paste into Column field (users
43
should ensure that they paste into the Master Data File), then OK from dialog. The
Master Data File now contains the additional data and the pressure column/s are
now ready to be overlain.
5. Select Analysis/Plot from the main menu and follow the procedure for the Edit
Overlay Pressure Dialog outlined earlier.
Data Importation:
Where data has not already been imported, the following procedure applies:
1. As before, select the Dataprep/Gauge Data menu option to open a Gauge Data
Preparation dialog.
2. Additional gauge pressure data can be imported in via the Import button from the
Data File section located in the lower left-hand side of the dialog. This generates
an Open sub-dialog from which gauge files (*.TPR), can be selected and imported
in Spreadsheet Style (refer to the Gauge Data Open File dialog for additional
information on this method of gauge data importation). Alternatively, use the
Append button in the Gauge Data Preparation dialog, to append to the designated
Master Data File (refer to Gauge Data Preparation for details of this process).
3. Select and import the pressure data which should now appear within the Data
File/Column List section of the Gauge Data Preparation dialog.
4. Perform steps 2 to 5 from Copying Data into the Master File described in the
previous section.
44
PanSystem
Mark Points
General:
This option allows users to identify selected events on plots generated from the Dataprep
and Analysis sections of PanSystem by numbering selected data points. Textual
identification can also be applied to each mark and displayed on the plot. Up to 50 marks
and text can be applied to each plot and subsequently edited within this dialog. The
marks and text are carried through to all other plots and saved with the *.PAN data file.
The font used for the marker text is the same as the one selected for the legend.
Users should first select a data point or series of points from the plot by left mouse-
clicking over the required point/s. A small arrow will appear around the selected point/s.
Select Edit/Mark Points from the main menu to open the Edit Marker Text dialog and the
currently selected data points will be numbered in order of increasing time, and listed in
the Marker Text List section of the dialog.
To append text to a number, select and highlight the required number in the Marker Text
List section and type appropriate identification text into the Marker Text section of the
dialog. The text will subsequently appear beside the point in the Marker Text List and on
the plot when the OK button is selected to close the dialog.
To remove points that are no longer required, select and highlight the points in the
Marker Text List section and then select the Delete button.
45
Marker Text Dialog
General:
This option allows users to edit existing text for markers that have already been placed.
Select this option to generate an Edit Marker Text dialog box.
To place new markers and add text, use the Mark Points option.
Users should first select a data point or series of points from the plot by left mouse-
clicking over the required point/s. A small arrow will appear around the selected point/s.
Select Edit/Mark Points from the main menu to open the Edit Marker Text dialog and the
currently selected data points will be numbered in order of increasing time, and listed in
the Marker Text List section of the dialog.
To append text to a number or edit existing text, select and highlight the required
number in the Marker Text List section and either type text into or edit text within the
Marker Text section of the dialog. The text will subsequently appear beside the point in
the Marker Text List and on the plot when the OK button is selected to close the dialog.
To remove points that are no longer required, select and highlight the points in the
Marker Text List section and then select the Delete button.
46
PanSystem
Delete Marker
General:
This option is used to delete one or more marked points and any associated text.
Using the left mouse-button, select and highlight the point marker/s to be cleared (a
small arrow will appear around the point), then select the Edit/Delete Marker option from
the main menu.
The selected marks and text will disappear from the plot and any remaining markers will
be re-numbered accordingly.
The data points themselves will not be deleted!

This process can also be carried out in the Edit Marker Text dialog.
47
Show Marker Text
General:
This menu check option is used to show or hide the marker text displayed on the plot.
The marker numbers will still be displayed when the text is hidden.
If the marker text display is switched on, a check mark will appear against the Show
Marker Text option in the Edit menu. When switched off (i.e. no check mark present in
the Edit menu against Show Marker Text), the text is still retained in the Edit Marker Text
dialog, and can be re-displayed by switching the Show Marker Text option on.
To modify or edit marker text, use the Mark Points or Edit Marker Text options from the
Edit menu.
48
PanSystem
PanSystem Dataprep Menu Index
The following commands are used for Data Preparation (Dataprep) prior to performing an
analysis (i.e. data entry, import, export, editing, copy and paste). For more specific
details on each topic, select the relevant links outlined below:
Gauge Data (Pressure and Rate Data Preparation) - Import, Export, Edit and Plot
the Gauge Data.
Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) - Enter Reservoir and Well Data for the
PanSystem Analytical Simulation method.
Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) - Enter Reservoir and Well Data for the
PanMesh 3-D Numerical Simulation method.
Tide Data - Edit and/or enter the Tide Table or Tidal Pressure Gauge data.
49
Dataprep Menu
50
PanSystem
Dataprep Gauge Data
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation Dialog
General:
This option is accessed via the Dataprep/Gauge Data main menu item, allows users to
import and prepare Gauge Data for Analysis, Simulation and Test Design. For a
description of any of the terms used here, refer to the Glossary.
Some of the options available depend on the fluid type selected in Reservoir
Description (Analytical) or Material Properties (Numerical). Users should ensure
that if they have Gas Well Gauge Data to prepare, they must first change the Fluid
Type from the default Oil option.
Stages for Gauge Data Preparation:
The raw Gauge Data files are ASCII files which contain the Time (T), Pressure (P) and
(optionally) Rate (Q) and Cumulative Production (Np/Gp) data used to perform the
analyses. Files may contain other data, including additional Pressure records, but only
the Time, Pressure and Rate data are used in analyses. It is also possible to import other
Columns of data for editing, plotting and inclusion in reports. The suggested stages for
setting up analyses include:
Import Columns of data from raw Gauge Data file/s into PanSystem.
Append data if acquired as a series of sequential files.
Quality-control the raw data.
Edit Gauge Data - with shifts, copy and paste, data resampling, smoothing.
Identify and enter flow Rate Changes within the test
Optionally, export edited Columns of Gauge Data to an ascii file.
Select the Gauge Data file or data Column required for analysis (if several have
been imported).
Apply Tidal Corrections.
At the end of Gauge Data Preparation, users can begin to analyze any one of the data
sets by selecting it as the Master Data file. Any other Gauge Data file read in can be
analyzed by simply selecting it as the Master Data file. All the imported data can be
stored in the *.PAN system file, along with supporting information about the Well, Fluids
and Reservoir.
There are several types of data used in PanSystem which are referred to throughout the
program. It is essential to know about this data in order to understand how the program
works:
Well - Create from the Well Control section of the Dataprep/Well and Reservoir
Description (Analytical) dialog.
Data Files - Import, Export, Edit , Delete and Plot via this dialog.
System Data File - New, Open, Save, Save As and Import V-1.80 files via the main
File menu.
Master Data File - Select via this dialog.
Master Pressure and Rate Columns - Select via this dialog.
Rate Changes - Enter/Edit in tabular form via this dialog. Create or edit on the plot
using the relevant plot tool options from the Dataprep Toolbar.
51
Flow Periods - Can be Grouped and Ungrouped on the plot.

Test Periods - Can be edited on the plot using the Ruler Bar by double-clicking on
the Test Periods with the left mouse button (i.e. top half of Ruler Bar).
Rate Column (optional) - Edit contents via this dialog. A rate column can be
created using the 'Q' (i.e. Create Rate) plot tool from the Dataprep Toolbar.
The dialog contains five main sections, each described below:

Well to Edit: Select the Well associated with the data that is to be edited
(normally there will be only one Well).
Data File/Column List: Select the Columns to be plotted, edited, appended, etc.
by using a left mouse-click to highlight them.
Selected Items: The selected Columns to plot or append are listed here.
Four function buttons lie between the two list sections described above:
Add to List>> button: Select this button to add the highlighted Columns
in the Data File/Column List section to the Selected Items section.
<<Remove from List button: Select this button to remove the
highlighted Columns from the List to Plot section to the Selected Items
section.
Plot: Select this button to plot the Columns contained in the Selected Items
section as a Data Edit Plot.
Append: This button can be used to append data from a selected file to the
currently selected Master Data File. Only the master file and the file to be
appended should be listed in the Selected Items box.
52
PanSystem
Only two selected files at a time can be handled by this facility and one of
these must be the Master Data File.
If the selected Master Data File contains a Column that is not present in the
selected file to Append, the appended section will contain zeros for that
Column.
If the file to Append contains a Column that is not present in the Master Data
File, no data from that particular Column will be appended (i.e. the Master
Data File determines which Columns will be used).
In the event of a Time overlap (i.e. the second Gauge starts before the first
Gauge (Master) ends), the overlap section in the Master Data File is replaced
by the section from the appended file.
When the button is selected, the Select Columns to Append (or Copy and
Paste) sub-dialog is generated. Users can either accept or adjust the Column
mapping as required, then select the OK button to close the sub-dialog and
perform the Append.
OK: Select this button to accept/save the current settings and close the
dialog.
Data File: Gauge Data Files are manipulated in this section using the following
function buttons (if no Data Files have been imported, only the Edit, Import..., Test
Design and New buttons will be enabled):
Delete - Used to remove Gauge Data files, or selected Columns within
Gauge Data files from memory (but not from disk!).
Edit - Used to edit Columns of Gauge Data. Enter, edit and view selected
Columns of Gauge Data files in spreadsheet format. At least one Column
must be selected in the Data File/Column List section before this button is
selected.
If no Data Files have been imported, this button will generate the Define
New Data File dialog.
Export - Used to export edited Gauge Data to disk as a new Gauge Data
file (ASCII format). This option also allows selected Columns of data to be
written from one file to a new file.
ASCII format Gauge Data files (default *.TPR) are loaded and saved using
the Import and Export buttons described above. System files (*.PAN and
(obsolete) *.PAX), are loaded and saved using the Open, Save and Save As
commands on the File menu.
Import from File - Used to import Columns of data from raw Gauge Data
files (ASCII or Excel format) into PanSystem. The imported columns of
data will be associated with the Well that is currently displayed in the Well to
Edit section.
Rate Changes - Used to enter, edit and view the table of Rate Change data
for the selected Well and Master Data File.
A file cannot be analyzed unless a Rate Change Table has been set up.
Test design - Used to enter, edit and view the Flow Rate Schedule to be
used in Test Design for the Simulate/Advanced Simulation option from the
main menu.
53
This item will be grayed-out (i.e. disabled) if users do not have a current
licence for this Advanced Simulation option.
New - Used to specify the format of a new Gauge Data File to be entered
manually (not imported).
THP to BHP - Used to convert a THFP versus Time record to a BHFP versus
Time record, allowing for Well Completion and instantaneous Flow Rate,
Phase Ratios, Gas-Lift, etc. at each point. This conversion can be
performed on the basis of using either a:
VFP (*.VFP) file
WellFlo (*.WFL) file (i.e. with licensed version of WellFlo)
Simple Gas Model
to compute the pressure difference.
A Pressure Column must be highlighted/selected in the Data File/Column

List section before selecting this button.
For the VFP and WellFlo options, users can optionally import and use
sampled data for Oil, Water and Gas Flow Rates or Cumulative Production (if
available). For Gas-Lifted Oil Wells, a sampled Lift-Gas Injection-Rate must
be imported. In this case, the Gas Flow Rate should be the Total Gas
Production Rate (i.e. Solution Gas + Lift Gas).
For the Simple Gas Model option, users can select the Pressure and
(optionally) Gas Rate Column or Cumulative Column and (optionally)
Wellhead Temperature Column.
Import from Clipboard This facility uses standard Copy and Paste Windows
functions to import raw data into PanSystem. Once the data is pasted into
the dialog from the clipboard, the functionality follows the standard Import
Data Files dialog. This dialog functions in the same way whether the data
was pasted from the clipboard or imported from another file type.
The user should copy the data from an external program source prior to
clicking on this button.
Import from ODBC This feature can import data directly from
Weatherfords RMS (Reservoir Monitor System) database as well as standard
(ODBC) open database connections.
Import from Log Data DPK/LAS Files This facility should be used to import
wireline formation tester (WFT) data from DPK and LAS format data files.
Special data preparation options are enabled when this option is taken, and
a special dual-pressure mode can be invoked if data from packer/probe or
dual/probe tests are imported.
Master Data File/Columns: The Master Data File is selected in this section in
conjunction with the selected Columns of data that will be used to perform
analyses. This section of the dialog has two formats, depending on whether single-
or dual-pressure analysis is to be performed.
Single-pressure analysis: this is the normal situation. The example shows
pressure and temperature data imported from a single gauge:
54
PanSystem
In this case there are no choices to be made in the Master section.

The next example shows data imported from a 2-gauge carrier. There is one Master
Data File DST4 containing two sets of gauge data (upper and lower) on a
common time-base:
55
Different Master Pressure and Rate Columns can be selected if there are several to
choose from within a given Master Data File:
Data File: Select the Master Data File to be analyzed in this data field via
the drop-down menu. In the example, there is one Master Data File DST4.
Pressure Column: Select the Master Pressure Column in this data field via
the drop-down menu. . The choice here is between P upper gauge and P
lower gauge. Only one of them can be selected at a time for analysis.
Rate Column: Select the Master Rate Column in this data field via the drop-
down menu. Normally, this will be the Rate Changes table a record of the
surface rates during the test set up during data preparation.
WFT with Observation Probe Test: Whenever two pressures are imported in the
same master file (DST4 in this case), this tick-box will appear at top right. This is
intended for use with wireline formation tester data (to allow simultaneous dual-
pressure analysis) and the box should be left unticked for ordinary gauge data.
Dual-pressure analysis: This option has been implemented to facilitate
simultaneous analysis of flowing and observation data from a wireline formation
tester in packer-probe or dual-probe configuration.
In the example, data has been imported from a dual-probe formation test using the
Import from Log Data DPK/LAS Files facility:
56
PanSystem
WFT with Observation Probe Test - Whenever two pressures are imported in the
same master file (TEST3 in this case), this tick-box is enabled in the upper right
corner of the screen. Switch it on to invoke the dual-pressure analysis mode. If it
is not switched on, the user will have to choose just one of the pressures to
analyze, as in the previous example.
When the box is ticked, new fields will appear in the master data files/columns
section:
Flowing Pressure replaces Pressure Column. Select the pressure
corresponding to the active or flowing response the packer in a
packer/probe test, the active probe in a dual-probe test.
Observation Pressure select the pressure corresponding to the observation
probe
WFT Test select the test type:
WFT Packer test: packer-probe configuration in a single homogeneous,
isotropic layer
WFT Probe test: dual-probe configuration in a single homogeneous,
isotropic layer
Dual-permeability: packer-probe configuration in a dual-permeability
system
57
Select Data File to Delete Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog by selecting
the Delete button. It is used to remove one or more Columns of data from PanSystem.
It does not have any effect on files stored on disk.
The dialog is comprised of two sections and a checkbox, described below:
Data File To Delete: Select the Data File that contains the Columns to be deleted
from this field, using the drop-down menu.
Columns to Delete: PanSystem lists the Columns of data from the selected Data
File in this field. Select individual Columns to be deleted by highlighting them with
the left mouse button.
Delete All Columns: Check this checkbox if all Columns contained in the selected
Data File are to be deleted.
58
PanSystem
Edit Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog by first
selecting a file or files to be edited, then selecting the Edit button; it is used to enter,
view or edit the Gauge Data for the selected Well and Master Data File.
The number of Columns displayed will depend on the number of Data Columns that were
selected in the Gauge Data Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, but within the
table field, only 16 rows can be viewed at a time. Users can scroll through the file using
the scroll bar on the right-hand side of the table field to move cell by cell (i.e. left mouse-
click on arrow keys) or page by page (i.e. left mouse-click on scroll bar either side of
slider).
For Windows 2000 users, the scroll bar also has right mouse button functionality. By
selecting anywhere on the vertical scroll bar with the right mouse button, a short menu is
activated that allows users to move the table cells to selected locations (e.g. with the
menu command Scroll Here - the table cells will be moved to the exact position on the
scroll bar that the user right-clicks on. The other commands are self explanatory -
Top/Bottom of table column, Page Up/Down to the next block of data, Scroll Up/Down by
one cell).
Individual cells can be edited by highlighting and entering a new value. The edit buttons
located down the right-hand side of the dialog can also be used for the following:
Function: Change values in a range of cells. Refer to Gauge Data Editing
Function.
Goto: Go to a particular row. Refer to Gauge Data Editing Goto.
Clear: Clear values from a range of cells. Refer to Gauge Data Editing Clear.
Insert: Insert a number of rows. Refer to Gauge Data Editing Insert.
Copy: The user has four options to copy data: copy a single cell, copy a single row,
copy an entire column or copy the entire table. The data subsequently can be
pasted into a spreadsheet (e. g. Excel).
Paste: This button allows users to paste in columns of data from an external
source via the windows clipboard. The source data must contain the same number
of columns as those in the table being pasted into, and must also be tab-separated.
Time data may be input in any of the usual accepted formats (e.g. hours,
hh:mm:ss, etc.), except minutes or seconds. Time data must also be cumulative
(i.e. it must not reset to zero at the start of each new day unless it is in
dd:hh:mm:ss format). When pasting DATE data, the user will be prompted to
determine the DATE format. Use the drop down boxes to determine the day,
month and year.
To import data via the Clipboard, use the Edit/Copy menu command or Ctrl+C
keyboard command to copy the columns to Clipboard from the editor being used
(e.g. NotePad, Excel, etc.). Switch to PanSystem, place the cursor at the insertion
point in the time column and select the Paste button - do not use Ctrl+V from
the keyboard. The Paste option will automatically translate the incoming time
format into the format being used for the current PanSystem display, if different.
59
Data will be pasted in from the insertion point downwards and will overwrite
existing data within overlapping cells. To prevent data being overwritten in this
manner, first use the Insert option to open up the appropriate number of empty
lines, then Paste.
Delete: Delete a number of rows. Refer to Gauge Data Editing Delete.
Time: Change the time format. Refer to Gauge Data Editing Time.
Names: Change the column names. Refer to Gauge Data Editing Names.
TPR Header: This option opens the TPR Header Editor, which displays any header
information within the file, and allows users to annotate the file with any relevant
information for reporting purposes.
Find: This option opens the Find a Value sub-dialog, which allows users to find a
value in a selected column. The first occurrence of that value will appear at the top
of the screen.
60
PanSystem
Export Data Files Dialog
General:
the Export button. This option can be used at any time to export selected columns of
data to a new Gauge Data file (ASCII). Use this facility when Gauge Data has been edited
and it is desirable to save as a separate file. It can also be used to save selected columns
of data from a multi-column file to a smaller file.
Only the sampled (or re-sampled) gauge data are saved. To save any supporting
fluid and reservoir parameters with gauge data, users are advised to save to the
system file (*.PAN), using the File/Save or File/Save As commands.
The Export Data Files dialog is comprised of three sections. Use this option to export, or
save, selected columns of data to a new Gauge Data file. The main features of the dialog
are described below:
Data file to export: Select the Gauge Data file for export by using the drop-down
menu.
Column Numbers to Write to: This section contains the data columns in the
selected file. You can organize the exported data in any column order. If users do
not wish to export a particular data column from the original file, select the drop-
down menu on the right-hand side of the data entry field and select the Not Used
option.
Time format to export: Select the time format to be used by using the drop-down
menu.
Column Delimiter: Select the delimiter for the columns of data to be exported by
selecting the relevant button (i.e. choice of space delimited, comma delimited or
tab delimited).
Select the OK button, to accept the settings and export the data.
61
Open Data Files Dialog
General:
the Import button. It is based on a standard Windows Open dialog and is used to import
columns of data from a Gauge Data file into PanSystem. Although users can select from
any of the data columns present, the Time column must be imported from the file.
There is no limit to the number of data points (i.e. lines of data) that can be imported,
providing there is enough disk space.
Up to 20 columns of data can be read-in via the Spreadsheet method (refer to Import
Data Files sub-dialog for more details), and up to 9 columns by the Non-Spreadsheet
method (refer to File Import Column Definition sub-dialog for more details).
If the user's system has sufficient memory, large files will be transferred automatically
into memory immediately after import, otherwise Dataprep will page to hard disk. The
transfer to memory can only be made if there are fewer than 160,000 lines of data - in
excess of this, disk-paging is used.
Repeated hard disk access makes plotting and editing slower.

All the imported Gauge Data files from one or several wells can be saved to one system
file. Individual Gauge Data files can be exported in ASCII format (*.TPR).
The Open dialog is based on a standard Windows dialog used for file opening. The main
features of the dialog are described below:
Look In: The current data folder being used to locate Gauge Data files (e.g.
C:\\Program Files\EPS\Pansystem 3.4\Data). If data files have been stored
elsewhere on the network or user's system, use the drop-down menu to browse for
the correct data folder. Available files are displayed in the list field below.
File Name: Select the Gauge Data file that data is to be imported from by
highlighting the required file in the list field with a left mouse-click.
Files of Type: This field displays the file extension for Gauge Data Files. The
default file extension is *.TPR.
Gauge Files (*.tpr): The default file extension for data in ASCII format is
*.TPR. To list files with different extensions (.TXT, .DAT, etc), either select
All Files (*.*) from the drop-down menu, or replace 'r;*.TPR' in the File
Name window with, for example, 'r;*.DAT'.
MS Excel (*.xls): data can be imported directly from a MS Excel
spreadsheets. If there is more than one worksheet in the file, you will be
prompted to select one of them.
Style: PanSystem provides users with two options for the import of data files:
Spreadsheet Style (i.e. Spreadsheet Style checkbox checked): This option
allows users to preview their data files in the form of a spreadsheet, and
select/name the columns to be imported. A wide range of data formats are
supported, including dates and columns with missing values and file
headers. Any TPR files that do not contain a Date Column can be assigned
dates by entering a Start Date. Refer to Import Data Files sub-dialog for
more details.
62
PanSystem
Non-Spreadsheet Style (i.e. Spreadsheet Style checkbox unchecked): This

is a much simpler import facility with less flexibility (i.e. Columns with
missing values and/or File Headers are not supported). Refer to the File
Import Column Definition sub-dialog for more details.
PRD Import: Click this to open the EUB PRD File Import sub-dialog. This sub-dialog
allows users to import rate data information in PRD.PAS files, a file format required
by the Canadian Energy & Utilities Board (EUB) for reporting well data.
63
Import Data Files (Spreadsheet Style) Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by importing data from the Clipboard or from the Open Data
Files dialog by selecting the Open button with the Spreadsheet Style import option
checked. The Gauge Data filename for the file selected in the Open Data Files dialog is
displayed in the window Title Bar with the full file path and default file extension (*.TPR).
Select this text to view the Import Data Files dialog box.
Import Data Files:
If the Spreadsheet Style import option is unchecked in the Open Data Files dialog,
the File Import Column Definition sub-dialog will be generated instead.
A Gauge Data File contains the recorded Gauge Test Data. This will normally be supplied
on disk by the company that carried out the welltest.
Users can select MS EXCEL (*.xls) files from the Files of type: drop-down list to import
Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. Select this text to see an example of the Import Excel file
dialog box.
Import Excel files:
64
PanSystem
Up to 20 Columns of data can be read in. Two of these must contain the Time and
Pressure values, which are mandatory for Analysis.
It is also possible to import Flow Rate data versus Time independently of the Pressure
data, if it exists as a separate record. Cumulative Production data can be used as an
alternative to Flow Rate data. An optional Flow Rate data Column may also be read in
for use in Analysis.
Other Columns of data (e.g. Temperature) will not be used in Analysis but users may still
want to import them into PanSystem for Editing, Reporting, Plotting, etc. Users may also
have another set of Pressure data in the same file, in which case they will be able to
compare two (or more) Gauge records, and analyze each in turn.
Users must tell PanSystem which type of Data is in which Column before importing the
file for Analysis.
Once the Data has been Imported, additional Columns can be created through Editing,
Smoothing, Copy/Pasting, up to a maximum of 100 Columns per file.
The data in the Gauge Data File must be arranged in Columns separated by spaces or
other valid de-limiters (refer below for details of valid delimiters). Various Import modes
are available depending on the layout of the data.
A special Fixed Column Width mode can be used to import Columns containing missing
data (blank entries).
Spreadsheet Style: This option allows users to preview Gauge Data files in the form of
a spreadsheet and select/name the columns to be Imported.
Select this text to see an example of what the Spreadsheet Style dialog looks like
Spreadsheet Style Dialog:
65
This is a very flexible Import facility capable of handling a wide range of data formats,
including Dates and Columns with missing values, and will also import File Headers. The
main features of the dialog are described below in terms of a suggested workflow:
File Name: The Gauge Data filename defaults to the file selected in the Open Data
Files dialog. If users wish to give the file a new internal working name, it can be
entered in this field (i.e. the file name used here for importation purposes does not
have to be the same as the original Gauge Data file name).
Column Name: The name of the column currently selected (i.e. highlighted) within
the display window of this sub-dialog. If the Automatically Set Name checkbox is
checked, the column name is determined by the type of Gauge selected in the
adjacent section of the sub-dialog. Alternatively, users can uncheck this checkbox
and allocate their own unique column name for the file import (refer also to Gauge
section below).
Number of Lines in Header: If the data file contains Header information, this can be
imported as a separate block of data from the Gauge record. Enter a value in this
field. The lines covered will appear in blue. Adjust the number if necessary to
select the required data for the Header.
Header lines marked with an asterisk (*) are automatically recognized as Header
information and will be ignored; other lines similarly marked (including lines of
Gauge Data) will also be ignored.
If users are in Space/Tab Delimited mode, they will only see the numerical content
of the Header on screen. However, the full Header will be read in during the
Import process.
If the Header lines in the data file have been tagged with an asterisk (*) character
at the beginning, they will be automatically recognized by the spreadsheet viewer
as Header data. In this case, the entire text strings will be displayed.
Data Column Definition: This section (top right of the sub-dialog), is used to
specify whether the data columns will be Delimited (i.e. by spaces, tabs, commas,
etc.), or will be a Fixed Width. Check either the Space/Tab Delimited or Fixed
Column Widths button as appropriate.
This will affect the organization of the Gauge Data on the screen, depending on how
the selected file is structured. Some file structures lend themselves to both
methods, some do not.
It is always good practice to scroll down through the data to check for any
anomalies and to ascertain whether Space/Tab Delimited or Fixed Column Widths
should be used.
Space/Tab Delimited mode:
66
PanSystem
Importing gauge data using Space/Tab Delimited mode

This is illustrated in the example above. The data are automatically allocated to columns
based on valid Delimiters such as spaces, tabs, commas (,), semi-colons (;), backward
slashes (\) and asterisks (*), but not colons (:), forward slashes (/) or hyphens (-).
The date, if present, will be seen as a single column. Date formats (DMY, MDY, etc) can
be selected from the Date selection menu.
The Delimited import mode will handle most file formats. It will not handle columns with
missing data (blank entries) correctly if spaces or tabs are used as delimiters; null
entries must be bracketed by two commas or other delimiter type. Zeroes are recognized
as data entries.
Do not use this mode for times which are in 12-hr clock format with am and pm.
Please refer to the section on Fixed Column Width mode for help in importing this type of
time format.
If users select Space/Tab Delimited mode, they should scroll down through the file to
make sure all the data has been correctly grouped before proceeding. Missing data will
cause the column assignments to become jumbled.
Fixed Column Widths Mode:
67
Section from a sample Gauge Data File containing Dates and data from two gauges with
missing entries (an ideal candidate for the Fixed Column Widths Import mode)
This mode can only be used if the data columns are truly of a Fixed Width when viewed
in a text editor such as Notepad. The individual columns are defined using the mouse.
The Space/Tab Delimited option (above) will handle most formats, but this mode will
handle missing data (blank entries, as shown above) provided the columns remain
aligned. It should also be used to import time formats using the 12-hour clock with am
and pm (see example below).
Column markers (i.e. vertical lines) should be moved and/or created using the mouse as
follows to define the distinct Data Columns.
To move an existing Column Boundary, press the keyboard CTRL key and
drag a Column Edge with the left mouse button.
To create a new Column Boundary, press the keyboard CTRL key and click
with the left mouse button to the right of the last character in the Column
and a new Column Boundary will appear.
To delete a Column Boundary, press the keyboard CTRL key and double-click
the left mouse button on the Boundary.
68
PanSystem
Importing gauge data (two gauges) using Fixed Column Width mode
If users wish to read in Dates, the Date format is flexible and will accommodate any
order, any valid delimiter, and the Month as a number or word (short (Jan) or in full
(January)). Choose a separate Column for the Day, Month and Year. Position the right-
hand side of the Column to the right of the Delimiter. In the example below, the Date
format is Day-Month-Year with a dash as a separator:
e.g. 24-Feb-96 should be divided up as 24-| Feb-| 96|:
Decide which Columns are required for Import and identify the type of data in each
Column. It is not necessary to import every data Column in the file. For Analysis,
only Time and Pressure are required, plus optional simultaneous Rate, but other
Columns can be Imported for editing and display. If a record of the Rate History
has been Imported, it will probably be Time and Rate only.
Identifying Columns (Fixed Column Widths and Space/Tab Delimited Modes):
Choose a Column and select one of the following items from the upper middle section of
the sub-dialog:
Date: The two modes are described as follows:
When using Fixed Column Width mode, a selection field with drop-down
menu is present. Click on one of the Date columns, then click on the Date
button and select Day, Month or Year as appropriate. Repeat as necessary
until the three Date Columns have been defined.
In Space/Tab delimited mode, the date is treated as a single column.
Select the date format from the Date drop-down menu (DMY, MDY, etc)
Select the (DATE)hh:mm:ss Time format if Date information is being read-in

(refer to Time section below).
Refer below to the note for the hhhh:mm:ss Time format regarding the 24
hr. Update checkbox.
Time: Select the Column, check the Time button, and select the Time format from
the drop-down menu.
69
Ensure that only one Time Column is defined. If the file contains more than one
Time Column, pick only one of them and Skip the others (as explained below). A
number of different formats are available:
hours - cumulative decimal Hours.
hhhh:mm:ss - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc.
If the Hours are in 24-hour clock format and reset to zero at midnight,
leave the 24hr. Update checked and PanSystem will add 24 hrs. to the
counter each time it resets. If the clock time is cumulative (i.e. increasing
monotonically, with no zero reset), switch off the 24hr. Update option.
dd:hh:mm:ss - Cumulative days. The Hours should reset to zero at the
start of each new Day. The delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc.
minutes - decimal minutes.
seconds - decimal seconds.
(DATE)hh:mm:ss - This is a Time Column in hh:mm:ss format, intended for
use when a Date column is being imported. The Time will be either:
24-hour clock and will restart at zero each new Day, or
12-hour clock with am and pm, restarting at zero at midday and
midnight.
Select this (DATE)hh:mm:ss Time format only if Date information is being

read-in; this format is strictly Date-driven and will not increment correctly
at midnight if no Date is imported (i.e. Date Column is Skipped). In most
situations, it is equivalent to the hhhh:mm:ss format with 24-hr update.
However, there are exceptions;for example, a data stream where there are
no readings during an entire day will be only correctly parsed by this date-
driven format.
Importing date and 24-hr clock time with Space/Tab Delimited mode
70
PanSystem
Importing date and time in 12-hr clock (am/pm) format using Fixed Column Width mode
(DATE)hh:mm:ss:c - the same format as - (DATE)hh:mm:ss, but with

1/10th secs after the last delimiter.
hhhhmmss - the same format as hhhh:mm:ss, but with no delimiter
between Hours, Minutes and Seconds.
Refer also to comment under hhhh:mm:ss about 24 hr. Update.

ddhhmmss - no delimiter between Days, Hours, Minutes and Seconds.
Cumulative Days, Hours in 24-hr clock format.
hhhh:mm:ss:tt - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. The tt
refers to ticks, or 1/ 60th seconds.

dd:hh:mm:ss:tt - as for dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/60th secs.
hhhh:mm:ss:cc - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. The cc
refers to 1/100th seconds.

dd:hh:mm:ss:cc - as for dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/100th secs.
hhhh:mm:ss:c - same as hhhh:mm:ss, but with 1/10th secs after the last
delimiter.
dd:hh:mm:ss:c - same as dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/10th secs after the last
delimiter.
HHHH:ss (EUB); this is the Canadian Alberta EUB format for time. A time of
2:30:15 PM (14:30:15) is represented as 1430:15 in this format.
Gauge: Select the Column, check the Gauge button, and select the Gauge Type:
If the Automatically Set Name checkbox is checked in the Column Name section,
the Column Name will change according to the Gauge Type chosen. If one Pressure
Column has been identified and automatically named Pressure #1 and a second one
71
is then selected, the name Pressure #2 will automatically appear. If a large

number of Pressure Gauge Columns are present, the system will successively
number these Pressure # 1, Pressure # 2, etc. Users can also allocate unique
Column Names by unchecking the Automatically Set Name checkbox (refer also to
Column Name section above).
Skip: If users do not wish to Import a Column, select and highlight the Column
with the left mouse button, then select the Skip button.
TPR Format Template: The Template section is situated at the lower right-hand
corner of the sub-dialog. If other files are to be Imported which have the same
Column characteristics as the initially Imported file, repetition of the formatting
process can be avoided by saving the initial file format as a Template. Users are
prompted to Save a Template when they select Import.
After preparing the initial Import settings as described above, select the Save
Template button. This will generate a Save As dialog box for TPR Template Files
(*.tpt) file type. The default directory is the one nominated for PanSystem Reports.
Templates can be loaded for use with the Load Template button which generates a
standard Windows Open dialog to locate previously saved Template Files.
On completion of the data formatting process, select the Import button to import the data
and close this sub-dialog. When all the data has been Imported, the system will return to
the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog.
Alternatively, select the Import and Plot button, to Import the data and close this sub-
dialog to go directly to the Dataprep Data Edit Plot.
In either case, a File Import Status dialog is generated as this sub-dialog is closed and
data points are Imported.
72
PanSystem
File Import Column Definition (Non-Spreadsheet Style) Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated from the Open Data Files dialog by selecting the Open button
with the Spreadsheet Style import option unchecked (i.e. Non-Spreadsheet Style).
If the Spreadsheet Style import option is checked in the Open Data Files dialog,
the Import Data Files sub-dialog will be generated instead.
Up to 9 Columns of data can be read in via the Non-Spreadsheet method, and 20
Columns by the Spreadsheet method. Two of these must contain the Time and Pressure
values, which are mandatory for Analysis.
Non-Spreadsheet Style: This sub-dialog allows users to select which Columns of data
they want to import into PanSystem and to define what type of data is present in each
Column.
Select this text to see an example of what the Non-Spreadsheet Style dialog looks like
Non-Spreadsheet Style Dialog:
The main features of the sub-dialog are described below:

File Name: The Name assigned to the incoming file will be the default displayed in
this File Name field, but if users want to give the file a new internal working Name,
73
just enter it into this field (i.e. the File Name used here does not have to be the
same as the physical data File Name).
View Data File: Use this option to check the data format in the file. This sub-dialog
remains active behind the Data File display window, so users may switch freely
between the two without having to close down the display window. This is useful
for checking if Header data is present before using the Append to File option in the
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog.
Header lines marked with an asterisk (*), are automatically recognized as Header
information and will be ignored; other lines similarly marked (including lines of
Gauge Data) will also be ignored.
Time Column Number: Specify the Column where the Time is recorded. This is
normally recorded in Column 1 by default.
Ensure that only one Time Column is defined. If the file contains more than one
Time Column, pick only one of them.
Time Format: Select the Time Format from the drop-down menu.
It is very important to select the correct Time Format or PanSystem may read
the data from the file incorrectly. A number of different Time Formats are
available:
hours - cumulative decimal Hours.
hhhh:mm:ss - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc.
If the Hours are in 24-hour clock format and reset to zero at the start of
each new Day, check the 24hr. Update checkbox and PanSystem will add
24 hrs. to the counter each time it resets. If the clock time is cumulative
(i.e. increasing monotonically, with no zero reset), do not enable the
24hr. Update option (i.e. leave the 24hr. Update checkbox unchecked).
dd:hh:mm:ss - Cumulative days. The Hours should reset to zero at the
start of each new Day. The delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc.
minutes - decimal minutes.
seconds - decimal seconds.
(DATE)hh:mm:ss - This is a Time Column in hh:mm:ss format, associated
with a Date, which appears in a separate Column as in the examples above.
The Hours will be 24-hour clock and will restart at zero each new Day.
Use this option in Fixed Column Width mode when Dates are being
imported.
Select the (DATE)hh:mm:ss Time format if Date information is being read-

in; this format is strictly Date-driven and will not increment correctly at
midnight if no Date is imported (i.e. Column is skipped). Using the Optional
Start Date feature in Tab Delimited mode, requires the hhhh:mm:ss option
to be used with the 24hr. Update option enabled, and will not work correctly
with this (DATE)hh:mm:ss Time format.
(DATE)hh:mm:ss:c - the same format as - (DATE)hh:mm:ss, but with
1/10th secs after the last delimiter.
74
PanSystem
hhhhmmss - the same format as hhhh:mm:ss, but with no delimiter

between Hours, Minutes and Seconds.

ddhhmmss - no delimiter between Days, Hours, Minutes and Seconds.
Cumulative Days, Hours in 24-hr clock format.
hhhh:mm:ss:tt - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. The tt
refers to r;ticks, or 1/ 60th seconds.

dd:hh:mm:ss:tt - as for dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/60th secs.
hhhh:mm:ss:cc - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. The cc
refers to 1/100th seconds.

dd:hh:mm:ss:cc - as for dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/100th secs.
hhhh:mm:ss:c - same as hhhh:mm:ss, but with 1/10th secs after the last
delimiter.
dd:hh:mm:ss:c - same as dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/10th secs after the last
delimiter.
Column Number: Enter the Column Numbers for each Column of data to be
imported from the selected file. It is not necessary to import every Data Column in
the file. For Analysis, only Time and Pressure are required (plus the optional
Simultaneous Rate), but other Columns can be imported for editing and display
purposes. If a record of the Rate History is being imported, it will probably be Time
and Rate only.
Column Type: Specify the type of data by selecting from the drop-down menu.
Column Name: Give the Column a working Name (e.g. Upper Gauge or Pressure
#1, etc.). This is the Name that is used to identify the data within PanSystem.
On completion of the data formatting process, select the Import button to Save and
Import the data and close this sub-dialog. As this sub-dialog closes, the File Import
Status dialog is generated and Data Points are imported.
When all the data has been Imported users will be returned to the Pressure and Rate
Data Preparation dialog.
75
Import Status Sub-Dialog
General:
This status sub-dialog is displayed while PanSystem is importing a Gauge Data file. It
supplies information on the number of Data Points that have been imported.
Select the OK button to validate and close the dialog.
If the number of Data Points is incorrect or the user wishes to terminate the import,
select the Abort button.
76
PanSystem
Edit Rate Changes Dialog
General:
the Rate Changes button. It is used to enter, view or edit the Rate Changes Table for the
selected Well and Master Data File.
Rate Changes are Events where the surface Flow Rate changes. This includes Rate
History (prior to a Test, perhaps before the Gauge started recording), and Rate
Variations during a Test or sequence of Tests. A maximum of 2000 entries is allowed in
a Rate Changes Table.
A file cannot be analyzed unless a Rate Changes Table has been set up.
Once entered, the Rates are plotted as a step profile on the Dataprep Data Edit Plot. The
Events are marked by Arrows in the Ruler Bar and dashed vertical lines on the Plot.
To define a Rate Changes Table, select the file and associated Data Columns as the
"Masters" and proceed as outlined below.
1. Select the Well for defining a Rate Changes Table in the Well to Edit field of the
2. Select the Rate Changes button to generate this dialog.
3. Enter/edit the Rate Changes data. Individual cells can be edited by highlighting
and entering a new value. The editing buttons situated down the right-hand side
of this dialog may also be used.
Users can scroll through a lengthy table with the scroll bar (which will appear at the
side of the window if there are more than 16 lines in the table). Refer to the
Gauge Data Edit dialog for additional details on the editing buttons and right-mouse
click functions for scrolling (post-Windows 2000 users only).
If more than one Well has been defined, it is necessary to define Rate Changes
separately for each Data File imported for each of the Wells.
Rate Changes are normally defined graphically by identifying the Points where the
Flow Rate changed on the Dataprep Data Edit Plot. Editing can be subsequently
performed in this dialog or in the Rate Change dialog (i.e. generated from the
Dataprep Data Edit Plot).
Within the table field, only 16 rows can be viewed at a time. Users can scroll through the
file using the scroll bar on the right-hand side of the table field to move cell by cell (i.e.
left mouse-click on arrow keys) or page by page (i.e. left mouse-click on scroll bar either
side of slider).
For post-Windows 2000 users, the scroll bar also has right mouse button functionality.
By selecting anywhere on the vertical scroll bar with the right mouse button, a short
menu is activated that allows users to move the table cells to selected locations (e.g. with
the menu command Scroll Here - the table cells will be moved to the exact position on
the scroll bar that the user right-clicks on. The other commands are self explanatory -
one cell).
Individual cells can be edited by highlighting and entering a new value.
77
The table field is comprised of five columns:

Data Point: Identification number for Rate Change Data Points, set in chronological
order.
Time: The Time at the selected Rate Change Data Points.
Pressure: The Pressure at the selected Rate Change Data Points.
Rate: The Flow Rate leading up to the selected Rate Change Data Points (as
illustrated below by the red line):
Np or Gp: The Cumulative Production (or Injection) of Oil, Gas or Water at the
selected Rate Change Data Points.
Even if the imported data is Cumulative Production (or Injection), it will be

converted to Flow Rates for the Rate Changes Table and a Cumulative (Np or Gp)
value will be computed from these Rates.
The edit buttons located down the right-hand side of the dialog can also be used for the
following:
Function.
Copy: Copies all the columns of data contained in the table to the clipboard. These
columns of data can be subsequently pasted into a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).
source via the Windows ClipBoard. The source data must contain the same
number of columns as those in the table being pasted into, and must also be tab-
separated. The Time data may be input in any of the usual accepted formats (e.g.
hours, hh:mm:ss, etc.), except minutes or seconds. The Time data must also be
cumulative (i.e. it must not reset to zero at the start of each new day unless it is
in dd:hh:mm:ss format).
To import data via the ClipBoard, use the Edit/Copy menu command or Ctrl+C
keyboard command to copy the columns to ClipBoard from the editor being used
point in the Time column and select the Paste button - do not use Ctrl+V from
the keyboard. The Paste option will automatically translate the incoming Time
78
PanSystem
lines, then Paste.
Transfer: This button generates the Rate Data Transfer sub-dialog; this is used for:
Importing Rate Changes Data from an external source. This is useful
if the Test has an extensive History and the Time/Rate data are already in
ASCII file format (e.g. exported from a spreadsheet). This can also be
achieved using the Paste button.
Transferring a Rate Changes Table. A Rate Changes Table already
entered for one dataset (e.g. an Upper Gauge), can be transferred into a
new Rate Changes Table required for a second dataset (e.g. Lower Gauge).
Rate Changes can also be defined graphically by identifying the Points where the
Flow Rate changed on the Dataprep Data Edit Plot (refer to the Data Edit Plot
Overview for details). Users can still view or edit Rate Changes created graphically
within this dialog.
Average Rates: This button generates the Rate Data Averaging sub-dialog; this is
used to Average Flow Rates over pre-defined Flow Periods. Using this facility, a
series of Flow Rate or Cumulative Production measurements (i.e. as loaded from a
Production Report), can be made compatible with Rate Change Events picked from
the Pressure record. This provides a means of:
Converting Cumulative Data to Flow Rates for the Rate Changes Table.
Synchronizing the Rate Data to Pressure events.
Simplifying the Rate Data by averaging, where Test Periods span several
Rate measurements.
Respecting Cumulative Production.
Operational Checklist:
The first entry (i.e. line 1) should be the start of the first Flow Period in the
recorded Test, or the start of its Rate History (if there was flow before the Test
was recorded). It should therefore have a Flow Rate of zero.
If it is the start of the Test Record, users should enter a Pressure in the first
line.
If it is the start of the Flow History, with no recorded data, there is no need
to enter an initial Pressure - PanSystem will estimate this for users during
Analysis.
In each line, enter the Flow Rate leading up to the specified Time.
The Pressure entered for the start of a Flow Period will be used in Analysis as P0
("Pressure at Start of Test"). This affects any diagnostic plot with p on the Y-axis,
and any Skin Factor computations which use P0. Users should ensure that the
correct Pressure has been entered at the start of any Flow Period they intend to
analyze.
For other Flow Periods, such as the history before the Test, the Pressure is
unimportant and can be left at zero.
79
In a DST, users will not often know the initial Pressure (i.e. line 1) at the start of
the Test - leave it at zero or put in an estimate (i.e. it may be one of the things that
users wish to obtain from the Analysis).
The last line should correspond to the end of the last Flow Period. If users do not
define the end of the last Flow Period, its associated data will not be recognized in
Analysis.
Enter negative Flow Rates for Injection/Fall-Off Tests.
For Oil fluid type with either of the Multi-Phase options (i.e. oil/water/gas), enter
the oil Flow Rates. The Flow Rates of the other phases will be computed from the
water/oil and gas/oil ratios.
For Condensate fluid type:
If Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure is not being used, the gas Flow Rates
entered should correspond to the primary (i.e. high pressure) Separator
Offtake corrected to standard conditions (also refer to Condensate Fluid
Parameters sub-dialog).
If Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure is being used, the gas Flow Rates entered
should correspond to the total Produced gas, corrected to standard
conditions.
Special Set-Up for Slug Tests:
If the status of Slug Test is assigned to a Test Period whilst operating in the Data Edit
Plot, users will find the following special set-up in the Rate Changes Table. This is
performed automatically on exit from the Data Edit Plot:
Initial Pressure (i.e. Start of Slug Test) set to:
Layer Pressure for the Ramey et al Type-Curve Method (i.e. because the
Initial Sandface Pressure, on the Formation side of the Valve, is the Layer
Pressure).
Zero for the Pressure Integral Method (i.e. a consequence of the
mathematics employed).
The Initial Pressure must be left at Layer Pressure if the Ramey et al Type-Curve
Method is being used, and at Zero if the Pressure Integral Method is being used.
Flow Rate (i.e. second line of Slug Test) set to a nominal value of 1. Slug Test
Analysis does not require a Flow Rate here, but PanSystem requires a non-zero
value to permit entry into the Analysis section.
These values are set-up automatically, and do not normally need to be edited.
80
PanSystem
Edit Test Design Dialog
General:
the Test Design button. It is provided for setting up Test Design runs for use with the
Advanced Simulation option found on the Simulate menu.
This option will be grayed-out (i.e. disabled) if users do not have a licence for the
Advanced Simulation option (i.e. the Version 2 equivalent of PanSim).
For a Test Design, the surface rate schedule and computational time-steps for each
individual well involved need to be specified by the user.
The Advanced Simulation option will subsequently compute the response of the reservoir
model to these surface rates. The result is a prediction of flowing pressures and
downhole Flow Rates at each time-step.
The reservoir model must be fully defined by the user in terms of permeability,
skin, etc.
The main features of the dialog and a suggested workflow are described below:
The Test Design option is used to create a new data file for each well, with the times and
surface rates specified. This dialog box will only appear if the currently selected well is
the principal well.
1. Data Point: This is the identification number for data points, set in chronological
order.
2. Time/Rate: In these first two columns of the table field, enter the time (i.e.
cumulative) of each rate change, and the rate prior to the change. Enter a
negative rate for injection.
The first flow period is assumed to start at time = zero, so the first entry (i.e. line
1), must have a time value > 0. If users want the test to begin at a later time,
define the first line as a shut-in (i.e. flowrate = 0) up to this time. Use negative
flowrates for injection wells.
3. No. of Steps: In Column 3, enter the number of time-steps required in each flow
period.
4. Format: In Column 4, enter the spacing format of the time-steps. This is done
according to the following convention:
1 = Linear (divide flow period into equally spaced steps)
2 = Logarithmic, first step 0.001 hours
Linear time-stepping is recommended (but not mandatory), if users are looking
particularly at wellbore storage or the pseudo steady-state part of an extended drawdown
81
in a closed reservoir, both of these flow regimes being essentially linear with time.
Otherwise, users are advised to use logarithmic spacing.
Logarithmic and linear spacings can be mixed and it is also possible to subdivide a flow
period into different step formats.
Once the Test Design has been edited, select OK to generate a Test Design sub-dialog.
side of slider).
one cell).
Individual cells can be edited by highlighting and entering a new value.
The editing buttons situated on the right-hand side of the dialog are used for the
following:
Function.
Copy: Copies all the columns of data contained in the table to the clipboard. These
columns of data can be subsequently pasted into a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).
source via the windows clipboard. The source data must contain the same number
Time data may be input in any of the usual accepted formats (e.g. hours,
hh:mm:ss, etc.), except minutes or seconds. Time data must also be cumulative
(i.e. it must not reset to zero at the start of each new day unless it is in
dd:hh:mm:ss format).
keyboard command to copy the columns to Clipboard from the editor being used
the keyboard. The Paste option will automatically translate the incoming time
lines, then Paste.
82
PanSystem
Transfer: This option allows users to copy the Rate Change Times and Flowrates
directly from the Rate Changes Table. The number of time-steps per flow period
and the stepping format can subsequently be typed in as described above.
This facility is useful if Advanced Simulation is to be used for history matching
against gauge data, but instead of letting the program use the gauge clock times
for response generation, users specify their own time-steps. This may be
preferable if the gauge clock times are irregularly spaced (i.e. using Test Design will
give you a regular spacing), or there may be too many points (i.e. users can control
the number of steps in Test Design).
Test Design for Interfering Wells:
If users have Multiple Wells, they can either enter new Times and Flow Rates for each
Well independently, or use the Time-Steps created for the "Principal Well and just enter
the different Flow Rates. Proceed as follows:
Select an Interfering Well (i.e. one that is not the "Principal") in the Well to Edit area of
Selecting an Interfering Well

Select the Test Design button from the Data File section and the following prompt will be
generated - "Do you wish to use Principal Well Times"
No: If users answer No (the default setting and recommended choice), a dialog
will prompt for data names:
Test Design Names dialog for Well 2

The Surface Flow Rate Column Name has been entered as Well 2 Qsurf. The Data
File Name has defaulted to TEST DESIGN, but can be changed if desired.
The Initial Wellbore Pressure has defaulted to the Layer 1 Pressure, but can also be
changed if desired.
On selecting OK an Edit Test Design dialog will be generated:
83
Entering the Surface Rates for Well 2

Enter the Surface Rate Schedule for the Well (assumed to start at Time = zero). In
this example, the Well will be producing at 7.5 MMscf/day for 50 hrs (i.e. the
duration of the period to be Simulated at Well 1). Now select OK.
Yes: If users answer Yes to the prompt (only recommended if a Rate is to be
entered at every Time-Step) a dialog will prompt for Data Names and Initial
Wellbore Pressure in the same way as for the No response.
The edit screen that appears next is the same as for the No response, but will list
all the Time-Steps of the Principal Well. Enter the Interfering Well Rates (where
non-zero) at each Time (the Function option can be used for block entries of the
same Rate value):
Entering Well 2 Surface Rates against the Time-Steps

This is obviously the more tedious approach, and would not normally be used.
Both approaches will result in the creation of a Surface Rate Column for the Well:
Surface Flow Rate Column created for Well 2

The Surface Flow Rate data for Well 2 has the name "Well 2 Qsurf" in this example,
and it is part of the Well 2 data group called TEST DESIGN.
84
PanSystem
Regardless of which entry mode is used (i.e. Yes or No), the Surface Flow Rate Schedule
for Interfering Wells will only be sampled at the Time-Steps of the Principal Well for
Simulation purposes. The No option is the quickest way of entering data and can be used
in most situations.
If users have already set-up the Well, Layer, Fluid and Boundary parameters, they are
now ready to proceed to the Advanced Simulation option under the Simulate Menu option
(refer also to Advanced Simulation Overview).
85
Test Design Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Edit Test Design dialog by selecting the OK button.
The dialog is comprised of two sections as described below:
Test Design Names: Fill in names for the internal Data File that will be created
(default name Test Design), and the Rate Column (default name Test Rate).
Initial Wellbore Pressure: This field is defaulted to the pressure of Layer 1, but
can be changed if required. This is a wellbore pressure - if different from the layer
pressure/s, Advanced Simulation will compute production (i.e. if underbalanced) or
injection (i.e. if overbalanced) during the early time-steps.
On selecting OK, a data column is created with times and surface rates filled in according
to the test design schedule specified by the user in the Edit Test Design dialog.
86
PanSystem
Define New Data File Dialog
General:
the New button. It is used to specify the format of a new Gauge Data File.
The main features of the dialog are described below:
Data File Name: Enter the name of the new Gauge Data File in this field.
Number of Rows: Specify the Number of Rows allocated to the new Gauge Data
File in this field (it is possible to Add/Remove Rows later via the Gauge Data Edit
dialog, so this operation is not critical at this stage).
Column Number: Displays the Column Number in ascending order.
PanSystem automatically sets aside Column #1 for the Time data, so it is not
necessary to specify the Type of data in Column #1.
Column Type: Specify the Type of data in Column #2 by selecting the drop-down
menu to the right of the entry field and choosing a Column Type from the list. This
selection defines how data will be treated in the program. Choices include:
Pressure
Temperature
Oil Flow Rate
Gas Flow Rate (3)
Fluid Density
Other Gauge
Pressure Difference
Other Gauge Difference
Cumulative Oil Production
Cumulative Gas Production (2)
Column Name: Enter the Column Name. This is the Name that is used to identify
the data within PanSystem.
87
Wellhead to BHP Conversion Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog by selecting a
Pressure Column (and optionally, measured Flow Rate or Cumulative Production) in the
Data File/Column List section of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, then
selecting the THP to BHP button; it is used to convert a THP versus Time record to a BHP
versus Time record, allowing for Well Completion and instantaneous Flow Rate, Phase
Ratios, Gas-Lift, etc. at each Pressure point.
Three methods are available for performing the conversion:
Using VFP Tables
Using a WellFlo (*.WFL) File containing the Well and Fluid Models.
This option requires a licensed version of WellFlo.

Simple Gas (for Dry Gas Wells)
This facility can also be used to convert from any Gauge Depth to BHP provided the
VFP file or WellFlo Model is set-up appropriately.
The three conversion methods are implemented via separate tabs in the dialog, described
as follows:
Using VFP Table tab:
This option is used to open a selected VFP file for a Production Well (using the Browse
facility described below).
PanSystem uses the selected Gauge Pressure (THP) Column, one Pressure at a time (and
depending on the keywords used in the VFP file), supplies the appropriate data to the
interpolation routine (e.g. WCT or WOR, etc.). A complete set of values is supplied to the
conversion routine for each THP to BHP calculation:
The Water-Cut (WCT) or Water/Oil Ratio (WOR) is computed from the Oil and Water
Flow Rates. The Water/Gas Ratio (WGR) is derived from Water and Gas Flow Rates
in Gas and Condensate Wells.
The Solution Gas/Oil Ratio (GOR) or Gas/Liquid Ratio (GLR) is computed from the
Gas and Oil (and Water) Flow Rates. The Condensate/Gas Ratio (CGR) or Oil/Gas
Ratio (OGR) is derived from Oil and Gas Rates in a Condensate Well.
Qgi (Gas Injection Rate): Enter a constant value for Qgi if no Gas-Injection Rate
was selected in the Data File/Column List section of the Rate Data Preparation
dialog.
In a Gas-Lifted Oil Well, the Total Gas Rate and Lift-Gas Injection-Rate must be supplied
as sampled data. The Solution GOR is calculated as:
[(Total Gas Rate) minus (Gas-Injection Rate)] / (Oil Flow Rate).
If any sampled data (e.g. Flow Rate, Water Rate, etc.) are not available or have not
been selected with the Pressure, users can specify a single value of each missing
parameter to be used for all Pressures (e.g. this would allow the conversion to be
performed with only measured THPs (i.e. users specify the constant principal phase
88
PanSystem
Flow Rate, a constant Water-Cut/GOR or WOR/CGR, or constant Gas-Injection

Rate/Qgi)) .
On selecting the Calculate button, PanSystem interpolates in the multi-dimensional VFP
Table and extracts the BHP for each input THP. Where a parameter is represented by
only a single value in the VFP Table (e.g. a Water-Cut is supplied by PanSystem, but
VFP has only one (different) value), it will assume the VFP value.
Wellflo will calculate bottom hole pressures AT THE FORMATION LAYER NODE IN
THE WELLFLO MODEL - regardless of the node selected as the "solution node" in
Wellflo. If the user wishes to calculate pressures at a different depth in the
wellbore, the Wellflo model must be altered so that the formation layer is located at
the depth where pressure calculations are desired.
PanSystem checks that the Fluid Type in the VFP File Header is appropriate to the Fluid
Type selected in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog within PanSystem.
Users can check the third item in the Header Line after the VFPPROD line (i.e.
usually this will be Line Three, but there may be Comment lines too). An example
is given below:
--PRODUCTION WELL VFP TABLE 5

VFPPROD
1 9100 'LIQ' 'WCT' 'GOR' 'THP' ' ' 'FIELD' 'BHP' /
'LIQ' and 'OIL' are both acceptable for Oil Fluid Type and 'GAS' is acceptable for
Gas and Condensate Fluid Type.
PanSystem will display an appropriate error message if the VFP file is not compatible
with the current settings for PanSystem (e.g. PanSystem set to Oil Fluid Type, but the
VFP file is for a Gas Well).
ESP Wells and Injection Wells cannot be used with this facility at present. Also
note that 'WAT' Fluid Type is only allowed under VFPINJ and is therefore not
compatible with the current release.
Oil Rate (Oil)/Gas Rate (Gas or Condensate): Enter a constant value for the
principal phase Flow Rate if no Oil Flow Rate/Gas Flow Rate (or Cumulative)
Column was selected in the Data File/Column List section of the Pressure and Rate
Data Preparation dialog (e.g. to represent a Constant Rate Drawdown).
Water-Cut/WGR: Enter a constant value for Water-Cut/WGR if no Water Rate (or
Cumulative) Column was selected in the Data File/Column List section of the
GOR (Oil)/CGR (Condensate): Enter a constant value for GOR/CGR if no Gas
Rate/Oil Rate (or Cumulative) Column was selected in the Data File/Column List
section of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog. This GOR is the Solution
GOR (corresponding to the VFP Table definition).
dialog.
89
VFP File/Browse button: Use the Browse button to generate a standard Windows
File Open dialog and locate/select an appropriate *.VFP file on the system/network.
Once the required file is located/selected, choose the Open button to load the
*.VFP file into PanSystem.
Name for BHP Column: Enter a Name for the BHP Column that will be generated
after selecting Calculate (i.e. default Name is BHP).
Time/THP/BHP Data Field: Initially, this field displays the Time and THP Values
associated with the selected Pressure Column. After the Calculate button is
selected, the field will also be populated with the corresponding BHP Values derived
from the calculation process.
Calculate button: Select this button to perform the BHP computation; the current
THP and the corresponding BHP will be displayed in the overlying Data Field. VFP
interpolation is performed for each input Pressure. If a value input to the VFP
Table is outside the table range, linear extrapolation will be used to complete the
calculations.
For a zero principal phase Flow Rate during a Shut-In, the Phase Ratios will be
the values used with the last non-zero Flow Rate (i.e. the Shut-In will be treated
like the end of the preceding Flow Period). If the very first Flow Rate point is
zero, Phase Ratios of zero will be used (i.e. unless constant values have been
specified in this dialog, in which case these will be used throughout). Any
negative Flow Rate value in any of the Rate Columns will stop the calculation and
a warning will be issued, since Injection is not handled in this release.
90
PanSystem
On completion of the calculations, OK from this dialog to return to the Pressure and Rate
Data Preparation dialog, where the new BHP Column will be listed in the Data File/Column
List section.
Using WellFlo tab:
This option is used to call WellFlo (if licensed) over a DDE link and open a WellFlo *.WFL
file containing the Well and Fluid Models (i.e. the file is selected from PanSystem using
the Browse facility described below and opened via WellFlo).
The location of WellFlo.exe is specified in the Windows Registry.

PanSystem supplies the selected Gauge Pressure (THP) Column, one Pressure at a time,
to WellFlo. With each Pressure there will be a Liquid Flow Rate, Water-Cut, GOR, (and
Qgi); or Gas Flow Rate with WGR and CGR, depending on the Fluid Type selected in the
Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. A complete set of values is supplied to
the conversion routine for each THP to BHP calculation:
The Water-Cut (WCT) or Water/Oil Ratio (WOR) is computed from the Oil and Water
Flow Rates. The Water/Gas Ratio (WGR) is derived from Water and Gas Flow Rates
in Gas and Condensate Wells.
The Solution Gas/Oil Ratio (GOR) or Gas/Liquid Ratio (GLR) is computed from the
Gas and Oil (and Water) Flow Rates. The Condensate/Gas Ratio (CGR) or Oil/Gas
Ratio (OGR) is derived from Oil and Gas Rates in a Condensate Well.
In a Gas-Lifted Oil Well, the Total Gas Rate and Lift-Gas Injection-Rate must be
supplied as sampled data. The Solution GOR is calculated as:
[(Total Gas Rate) minus (Gas-Injection Rate)] / (Oil Flow Rate).
If any sampled data (e.g. Flow Rate, Water Rate, etc.) are not available with the
Pressure, users can specify a single value of each missing parameter to be used for all
Pressures (e.g. this would allow the conversion to be performed with only measured
THPs (i.e. users specify the constant principal phase Flow Rate, a constant Water-
Cut/GOR or WOR/CGR, or constant Gas-Injection Rate/Qgi)).
On selecting the Calculate button, WellFlo will run a top-down Pressure Drop calculation
for each THP starting from the Wellhead (or another specified Start Node) to the mid-
perforation (i.e. Casing) Node. The BHP is produced as output and appears as a Column
of Pressures in the same file as the THP.
PanSystem checks that the Fluid Type in the *.WFL file is appropriate to the Fluid Type
selected in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog within PanSystem.
The Volatile Oil Fluid Type available in WellFlo has no direct equivalent in
PanSystem and is not compatible with this facility.
WellFlo only recognizes a Start Node at the Outlet, Wellhead/Xmas Tree or

Pressure Gauge Nodes. The Pressure Gauge Node must be downstream of the
Wellhead/Xmas Tree. If a Gauge Node is present in the WellFlo Model, the top-
down calculation will always start there.
ESP Wells and Injection Wells cannot be used with this facility at present.
Oil Rate (Oil)/Gas Rate (Gas or Condensate): Enter a constant value for the
principal phase Flow Rate if no Oil Flow Rate/Gas Flow Rate (or Cumulative)
Column was selected in the Data File/Column List section of the Pressure and Rate
Data Preparation dialog (e.g. to represent a Constant Rate Drawdown).
91
Water-Cut/WGR: Enter a constant value for Water-Cut/WGR if no Water Rate (or

Cumulative) Column was selected in the Data File/Column List section of the
GOR (Oil)/CGR (Condensate): Enter a constant value for GOR/CGR if no Gas
Rate/Oil Rate (or Cumulative) Column was selected in the Data File/Column List
section of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog. This GOR is the Solution
GOR (corresponding to the VFP Table definition).
dialog.
WellFlo File/Browse button: Use the Browse button to generate a standard

Windows File Open dialog and locate/select an appropriate *.WFL file on the
system/network. Once the required file is located/selected, choose the Open
button to load the *.WFL file into PanSystem.
THP at: Use the drop-down menu to select the location where the THP
measurements were obtained (i.e. Wellhead/Xmas Tree Gauge or Outlet).
after selecting Calculate (default Name is BHP).
Time/THP/BHP Data Fields: Initially, this area displays the Time and THP Values
selected, the BHP field will also be populated with the corresponding BHP Values
derived from the calculation process.
92
PanSystem
THP and the corresponding BHP will be displayed in the overlying Data Fields.
For a zero principal phase Flow Rate during a Shut-In, the Phase Ratios will be
the values used with the last non-zero Flow Rate (i.e. the Shut-In will be treated
like the end of the preceding Flow Period). If the very first Flow Rate point is
zero, the Phase Ratios from the *.WFL file will be used (i.e. unless constant values
have been specified in this dialog, in which case these are used throughout). Any
negative Flow Rate value in any of the Rate Columns will stop the calculation and
a warning will be issued, since Injection is not handled in this release.
Data Preparation dialog, where the new BHP Column will be listed in the Data File/Column
List section.
Simple Gas tab:
This option provides a simplified approach for Dry Gas using the Energy Equation
(Reference 78), for single-phase flow (i.e. Gravity plus Pipe Friction components only).
This tab is only activated when a *.PAN file with a Gas Fluid Type is currently
loaded or a Gas Fluid Type is selected in the Well and Reservoir Description
(Analytical) dialog.
Gas Rate: Enter a constant value if the Gas Rate Column was not selected in the
Data File/Column List section of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog.
Wellhead Temperature: Enter a constant value if the Wellhead Temperature
Gauge Data Column was not selected in the Data File/Column List section of the
Bottom Hole Depths (MD) and (TVD): Enter values for each of these Depths;
PanSystem can then derive average Well Deviation.
Tubing ID: Enter the Internal Diameter of the Tubing (i.e. Monobore Tubing
Completion).
Bottomhole Temperature: Enter a constant value (PanSystem will default to the
Reservoir Temperature if this has already been entered in the Layer Parameters
dialog).
after selecting Calculate (default Name is BHP).
Time/THP/BHP Data Fields: Initially, this area displays the Time and THP Values
selected, the BHP field will also be populated with the corresponding BHP Values
derived from the calculation process.
THP and the corresponding BHP will be displayed in the overlying Data Fields.
Gas Gravity is derived from the Gas Fluid Parameters dialog. If this is zero,
PanSystem will prompt users to enter a value (at this stage, the Layer Parameters
and Fluid Parameters may not have been initialized by users).
A default Pipe Roughness of 0.0012 is used (i.e. same default as WellFlo).
93
Data Preparation dialog, where the new BHP Column will be listed in the Data
File/Column List section.
94
PanSystem
Editing Function Sub-Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by the Function button in the Gauge Data Editor. It is used to
adjust the value/s in any single cell or range of cells within a column of data from the
current file displayed in the Gauge Data Editor dialog using a shift and multiplier (i.e. [x'
= ax+b] function). This may be necessary for shifting Gauge Pressures to a different
datum, re-calibrating Gauge Pressures, converting spinner rps to Flow Rates or for
shifting Times to a common reference.
Column to Function: Select the column that the function is to be applied to.
Start Row: Select the first row that the function is to be applied to.
End Row: Select the last row that the function is to be applied to.
Multiplier: Enter a multiplier value for the function.
Shift: Enter a shift value for the function.
95
Editing Goto Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by the Goto button in the Gauge Data Editor. It is used to
move to any row within the current file displayed in the editor main dialog.
Row Number: Users select the row they wish to move to. The row number entered
in the entry field then becomes the first row displayed in the editor main dialog
after selecting OK.
Range: Displays the range of row numbers available (e.g. 1-125).
96
PanSystem
Editing Clear Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by the Clear button in the Gauge Data Editor. It is used to
clear the values from any cell or range of cells within any of the columns displayed in the
data editor main dialog.
Start Row: Select the first row to be cleared.
End Row: Select the last row to be cleared.
All Columns: Check this option to clear all available columns.
Single Column: Check this option to clear a single selected column.
Column Name: Select the column to be cleared using the drop-down menu.
This is only applicable if the single column option has been selected.
97
Editing Insert Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by the Insert button in the Gauge Data Editor. It is used to
insert one or more rows at any point in the current file displayed within the data editor
main dialog.
Start Row: Select the row number where the insertion is to start or end depending
on whether the Before or After button has been checked.
Number of Rows: Enter the number of rows to be inserted.
Before: Insertion will be before the row specified in the Start Row field.
After: Insertion will be after the row specified in the Start Row field.
98
PanSystem
Editing Delete Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by the Delete button in the Gauge Data Editor. It is used to
delete one or more rows at any point in the current file displayed within the data editor
main dialog.
Start Row: Select the row number where the deletion is to start.
End Row: Select the row number where the deletion is to end.
99
Editing Time Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by the Time button in the Gauge Data Editor. It is used to
change the Time Data Format for the current file displayed within the main Data Editor
dialog.
Time Format: Select the required Time Format from the drop-down menu. The
Time field within the current file displayed in the main Data Editor dialog will be
updated after selecting OK from this sub-dialog.
100
PanSystem
Editing Names Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by the Names button in the Gauge Data Edit dialog. It is
used to assign new names to any of the columns that have been defined for the current
file displayed within the data editor main dialog.
The sub-dialog will contain a data entry field for each column that is present within the
current file displayed in the data editor main dialog. The column number is defined on
the left-hand side of this sub-dialog and the corresponding column name is displayed in
the data field on the right-hand side. If required, highlight the column name to be
changed and insert a new column name.
101
PanSystem Report - Edit Remarks Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by the TPR Header button in the Gauge Data Editor and a
similar sub-dialog is generated by the Edit Remarks button from the Report Cover Page
dialog. It is used as a reporting remarks data entry screen. The Remarks field is free
format text and can be any relevant data associated with the current file displayed in the
data editor main dialog, that the user requires to have printed on the front page of the
report.
The sub-dialog contains a single data entry field entitled Remarks. If users enter fewer
than 45 lines in this field, they will get the Cover Page panel and Remarks panel on a
single page. Otherwise, the Remarks panel will be continued on a new page.
The maximum capacity of the Remarks page is 4000 characters.

When Importing Gauge Data, users may Import the Header of the file as well as the
measured Data (see Number of Lines in Header). The Header (if any) associated with
the dataset being edited will be displayed here for reference:
Example of TPR Header information

Users may wish to edit the Header or copy it (i.e. click and drag to block select, then
Ctrl+C) and paste it (Ctrl+V) into the Remarks section of the Report Cover Page.
Report Menu
Configure Fonts
102
PanSystem
Rate Data Transfer Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Edit Rate Changes dialog by selecting the Transfer
button. It is used to transfer Rate Data into the current Rate Changes Table from an
external source. Data is inserted before the beginning of any existing Rate Changes in
the table.
The dialog contains two data entry/selection sections and an illustrated example for user
guidance as described below:
Select Rate Column to Use: Use the drop-down menu on the data entry field to
select the Name of the Rate Column from which Rate Data is to be transferred.
Time Entries Correspond to: Specify how the Times and Rates are related in the
file to be transferred. The illustration on the right-hand side of the dialog will
change depending on the Rate Period button option selected within this section.
First/Last Period Starts/Ends at: Enter a Time for the start of the first Flow
Period or the end of the last Flow Period (depending on Duration button
option that is selected within this section).
103
Rate Data Averaging Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Edit Rate Changes dialog by selecting the Average Rates
button; it is used to calculate Average Flow Rates over pre-defined Flow Periods. Using
this facility, a series of Flow Rate or Cumulative Production measurements (e.g. as loaded
from a Production Report), can be made compatible with Rate Change Events picked from
the Pressure record.
Basic principle of Rate Averaging to Flow Periods defined from the Pressure Record
Before entering this dialog, users should already have:
Imported the necessary Pressure and Time/Rate (or Time/Cumulative) data.
Synchronized the clock Times for the Pressure and Rate or Cumulative data (if
necessary).
Picked the Rate Change events from the Pressure data (refer to Data Edit Plot
Overview and the Rate Change dialog for details of how this is performed
graphically and also refer to the Synchronization section below for guidance on the
treatment of Flow Periods).
The dialog contains two data entry/selection sections, an option to perform data reduction
and an illustrated example for user guidance as described below:
Select Column to Use: Use the drop-down menu on the data entry field to select
the Name of the Rate Column or Cumulative Production Column on which Rate Data
Averaging is to be performed.
104
PanSystem
This must be a Rate Column or Cumulative Production Column for the principal
fluid type.
Perform Data Reduction: Select this option to implement data reduction on rate
changes. Performing a data reduction automatically groups rate changes through
data reduction by wavelet analysis. If Perform Data Reduction is selected, the user
can select the percentage of Rate-Change data to keep from the reduction. In order
to make a selection from the Keep drop-down menu, the Rate-Changes table must
exist and have valid rate data previously defined.
To perform data reduction on pressure or rate channels, use the Dataprep Toolbar
for Data Reduction.
Time entries correspond to: Specify how the Times and Rates are related in the
Rate Column to be averaged. The illustration on the right-hand side of the dialog
will change depending on the radio button option selected within this section (i.e.
Starts of Rate Periods or Ends of Rate Periods).
The convention within PanSystem is that the Rate value assigned to a certain Time
is the Flow Rate leading up to that Time. This corresponds to the default "Ends of
Rate Periods" setting of the radio button within this section of the dialog.
On selecting OK to exit the dialog, one of the following averaging processes will be
performed, depending on the type of Data Column that was selected:
Flow Rate Data: Upon exit from the dialog, the Flow Rates are averaged over
each Flow Period defined by the Rate Change Times (Tn). PanSystem calculates the
Cumulative Production (Vn) over the Test Period between (Tn-1) and (Tn), then
divides by the Test Period Duration (Tn - Tn-1), to get the Average Flow Rate (Qn),
where:
105
This value will be inserted at Time (Tn) in the Rate Changes Table.
Cumulative Production Data: Upon exit from the dialog, PanSystem calculates
the incremental Cumulative Production (VTn - VTn-1), over each Test Period. The
Average Flow Rate (Qn) at Rate Change Time (Tn), is given by:
This value will be inserted at Time (Tn) in the Rate Changes Table.
If Perform Data Reduction was selected, the following prompt appears after the
reduction while the user views the changes in the data-prep graph.
Click Yes to accept the reduction, or click No to go back to the original data set.
Data Synchronization:
If the Test Period marker at (Tn) does not correspond exactly to a Flow Rate or
Cumulative Production measurement (and it usually will not), the appropriate fraction of
the current days Production (i.e. from the previous measurement up to Tn) must be
used (e.g. if the Cumulative Production data correspond to midnight readings, and there
is a Rate Change event at 08:00, then 8/24 of the current days Production will be
assigned to that Flow Period, and the remaining 16/24 to the next Flow Period/s).
These Time splits require some special treatment if the next Flow Period is a Shut-In, as
illustrated below:
106
PanSystem
Special treatment of Flowing Periods before and after a Shut-In

PanSystem performs the following checks when the next Test Period is a Shut-In:
If a Shut-In Period has a residual (as illustrated above just after Shut-In), it will
not have an Average Flow Rate of zero, so the residual must be back-assigned to
the preceding Flowing Period (i.e. the previous Flowing Period is assigned all of
the measured Production).
Similarly, if the Average Daily Flow Rate becomes non-zero again before the end
of the Shut-In Period (as illustrated above), the residual must be assigned to the
next Flowing Period, so that the Average Rate during a "Shut-In" is always zero.
This check procedure will only fail if there is a spurious zero Flow Rate
measurement during a Flowing Period (or two successive Cumulatives are
identical), so that a Flowing Period is incorrectly perceived as a Shut-In. Any
spurious zero production figures should be eliminated.
107
Data Edit Plot Overview
General:
This plot is accessed by selecting a data file in the List to Plot section of the Pressure and
Rate Data Preparation dialog, then selecting the Plot button. To change which data are
plotted in the Data Edit Plot, return to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog and
add data for plotting by selecting it in the Data File/Column List section, then select the
Add to List button, or remove data by selecting it in the List to Plot section, then select
Remove From List.
Screen Display:
In addition to editing Gauge Data using the options in the Pressure and Rate Data
Preparation dialog, it can also be edited graphically in the Data Edit Plot, using the
Dataprep Toolbar function buttons and the Ruler Bar (which lies below the Dataprep
Toolbar). The Ruler Bar is used to select Rate Changes or Test Periods for editing. It also
displaysFlow Periods.
If no Rate Changes, Test Periods or Flow Periods have been defined, users will
have to either select them using the Exact Point, Nearest Point, Define Point and/or
Auto Flow Period tools from the Dataprep Toolbar, or manually input the data via
the Edit Rate Changes dialog.
Most of the tools operate by selecting points or ranges of data and then clicking the
relevant tool button. Users can:
Select individual points on the plot by pointing at them and clicking the left mouse
button. A selected point becomes a solid square.
Select ranges of data by holding down the left mouse button and dragging a box
around the points to be selected.
Select Rate Changes by left-clicking the arrow/s once in the lower half of the Ruler
Bar. The arrows can also be moved by left-clicking and dragging. By holding down
the CTRL key and clicking a Rate Change arrow or by just a right-click near the
arrow, the Rate Change dialog will appear for editing Time, Pressure and Rate (TPR)
data. Move a Rate Change time by clicking on the marker arrow and dragging it
along the Ruler Bar. Change the pressure associated with a Rate Change by
clicking the marker arrow and, keeping the left mouse button depressed, dragging
the cursor down the vertical dashed line to the desired (pressure) position.
Select Test Periods by clicking on the upper half of the Ruler Bar above the plot. To
select several contiguous Test Periods, hold down the SHIFT key, then click on the
first Test Period required and drag the mouse pointer over the remaining Test
Periods required (the selected Test Periods are displayed in a darker color). To
select all Test Periods, hold the control down and right-click on the test period. To
de-select the current selection, single click anywhere on the upper half of the Ruler
Bar. Also refer to the Group and Ungroup tools on the Dataprep Toolbar.
Define a Test Type (i.e. only necessary for Slug Tests and Interference Tests), by
double-clicking in the appropriate Test Period. A Test Period Classification dialog is
generated which allows the Test Type to be selected; for Slug Tests, the Slug Test
Analysis Parameters can also be selected/entered.
108
PanSystem
Plot Annotation can be applied by selecting Ctrl + right-clicking on the plot, refer to
Plot Annotation for more details of this facility.
109
Dataprep Data Files
Data Files:
These refer to time, pressure, rate (i.e. TPR) and any other Gauge Data held internally by
PanSystem under a file name. Up to 5 files can be held at any time for each well. There
can be up to 100 columns (= channels) in each file, and there may be more than one
pressure and rate column. All data files are saved for all wells to the PanSystem data file
(i.e. *.PAN or *.PAX). The Gauge Data can be edited via the Dataprep/Gauge Data main
menu option, which generates the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog. Select the
Edit button from this dialog to access the Gauge Data Edit dialog.
Master Data File:
The Master Data file/columns have two main purposes:
1. They represent the data on which analyses will be performed. If there is more than
one gauge record to analyze, select each in turn as a "master".
2. They are the "target" file/columns for some data preparation functions (e.g. the
Copy and Paste functions work by pasting into the nominated Master Data
file/columns (as appropriate) and it may be necessary to temporarily redefine a file
as the Master Data file during data preparation in order to paste data into it).
System Data File:
These have the file extension *.PAN (binary) or *.PAX (ASCII), representing the data file
that PanSystem writes to disk, containing all input Gauge Data, fluid and reservoir
description, etc. and the analysis results. The "system file" may contain Gauge Data from
several different raw "data files" if more than one has been imported. If several wells
have been configured, the "data files" for all wells are saved to one system file.
110
PanSystem
Dataprep Well
Well:
Up to five Wells can be defined in PanSystem. Select and define in the Well and
Reservoir Description dialog. Each Well can have up to five independent data files stored
with it (e.g. five separate Welltests, or five sets of Gauge Data on the same Welltest) and
each can be Plotted, Edited and Analyzed.
111
Dataprep Master Pressure and Rate Columns
Column:
The term used for a channel (i.e. sequence, stream) of data in a data file (e.g. the "Time
Column" is the gauge clock record for the welltest and the "Pressure Column" represents
the associated pressure readings). They appear as columns when listed on-screen.
Master Pressure and Rate Columns:
The selected columns of data in the Master Data file, which analyses will be performed
with. The selected Master Pressure also has a special status in certain data editing
functions involving other gauges. Different Master Pressure/Rate Columns can be
selected if there are several to choose from in a given Master Data file.
PanSystem Analysis requires a rate value to accompany each time-pressure pair.
Generally, gauge records will not include simultaneously recorded rates, unless a
flowmeter was run, so there will not be a Rate Column as such. In this case, PanSystem
will create a Rate Column automatically by digitising the manually entered Rate Change
data.
Rate Column:
Values of Flow Rate corresponding to the gauge clock time values in a data file.
PanSystem Analysis requires a rate value to accompany each time-pressure pair.
Generally, the gauge will not have recorded rates at these times, unless a simultaneous
flowmeter was run, so PanSystem will create a rate column automatically, using the
manually entered surface Rate Change data or a Rate Column can be created from the
Data Edit plot, but this is not usually necessary except for special applications.
112
PanSystem
Dataprep Rate Change Dialog
General:
These are events where the surface Flow Rate changes. This includes Rate History (i.e.
prior to a Test, perhaps before the Gauge started recording) and major Flow Rate
variations during a Test or sequence of Tests. A maximum of 2000 lines may be
included in the table.
Associated with a Rate Change event are:
The Time.
The Flow Rate leading up to the selected Point (i.e. the Point marks the end of
the Flow Period - as illustrated below).
The Pressure (not always required).

These TPR (Time/Pressure/Rate) entries can be edited from the Edit Rate Changes dialog,
or on the Data Edit Plot. The Rate Changes will be marked as Arrows along the lower
half of the Data Edit Plot Ruler Bar.
When a particular Test Period is being analyzed, PanSystem computes superposition for
the period up to the start of that Test Period by referring to the Rate Changes Table.
Superposition during the Test being analyzed is computed from the Rates in the Master
Rate column.
Once entered, the Flow Rates are plotted as a step profile on the Data Edit Plot. The Rate
Change Events are marked by upward pointing Arrows in the Ruler Bar and dashed
vertical lines on the plot.
This dialog can be accessed at any time for editing by:
For an existing Rate Change marker; holding down the CTRL key and clicking the
left mouse button on one of the Arrows in the Ruler Bar, or clicking the right
mouse button on one of the Arrows in the Ruler Bar.
To create a new Rate Change marker; using one of the Point Selection buttons
from the Dataprep Toolbar (e.g. Exact Point, Nearest Point or Define Point tools),
then left-clicking on a Point in the Plot.
The dialog has three entry fields for Time, Pressure and Rate as described above. Users
can edit these values if required.
113
The Mark as END of Build-Up checkbox is only required for Flow Rate Averaging
purposes (refer to the guideline section below, Edit Rate Changes and Rate Data
Averaging for details). As the checkbox name suggests, it should only be used to
Mark the Point representing the end of a Shut-In Period. It is only required when
the measured Flow Rate Data that is to be averaged does not record a zero rate
during that Shut-In Period (i.e. the presence of a zero rate tells PanSystem it is a
Shut-In. If there is no zero rate recorded, the Shut-In period is too short and
PanSystem needs to be told by the user).
Press OK to confirm any changes and the Rate Change co-ordinates will be transferred to
the Rate Change Table. Any new Rate Change Events will also be marked by an upward
pointing Arrow on the Ruler Bar above the plot (i.e. Black Arrow for the end of a Flow
Period and a Red Arrow for the end of a Build-Up identified with the Mark as END of
Build-Up checkbox).
Press the Delete button on the dialog to abort the pick - not Cancel.
Users can also define and edit Flow Periods on a tabular basis using the Rate
Changes Table, accessed via the Edit Rate Changes facility.
Guidelines for Identifying Shut-In Periods:
Shut-In Periods can be identified in two ways:
Automatically (by PanSystem): The Test Period must contain at least one zero
rate measurement, for the Shut-In to be identified correctly.
Manually (by users): This allows short Shut-Ins to be positively identified if they
do not contain a zero rate measurement. The Test Period is identified as a Shut-
In by using this dialog and the Mark as END of Build-Up facility (described above).
There are two cases to consider (illustrated below):
114
PanSystem
Special treatment of short Shut-In Periods that do not have a zero rate to
identify them automatically
Type I (from illustration above):
In this case, the first Average Rate measurement during the Shut-In represents
production during the preceding Flowing Period up to the Shut-In time. This will
need to be back allocated.
The first Average Rate measurement during the next Flowing Period represents
production since the end of Shut-In. This will need to be forward allocated.
Type II (from illustration above):
In this case, there is no Average Rate measurement during the Shut-In. The next
Average Rate measurement is during the next Flowing Period and represents
production just prior to the Shut-In plus production since the Shut-In (i.e. it has
to be allocated to two Flow Periods).
For the Flowing Period before the Shut-In, check if the next Period is a Shut-In,
and check if there is an Average Rate (or Cumulative) measurement. If yes,
proceed normally (refer to Rate Data Averaging dialog). If no, get the
measurement from the next Period, divide this up in proportion to the two
"Residual Flowing Times" and give the appropriate portions to the two Periods.
Where the "Residual Flowing Time"
115
= (Time from the last measurement to Shut-In) for the Flowing Period before the
Shut-In
= (Time from the end of Shut-In to the next measurement) for the Flowing Period
after the Shut-In.
Thus in the illustration above, if Rate measurements are made at 12:00 every day,
and the Well was Shut-In between 15:00 and 21:00, the production measured at
12:00 next day has to be split so that 3/15 goes to the first Flowing Period and
12/15 to the second Flowing Period.
116
PanSystem
Dataprep Flow Periods
Flow Periods:
These are the Time Intervals between Rate Changes. They are represented graphically
by spaces between the Rate Change arrows along the lower half of the Ruler Bar.
117
Dataprep Test Period Classification Dialog
General:
Test Periods are time intervals, spanning one or several Flow Periods, on which analysis
will be performed. They are marked on the Dataprep Data Edit plot as tick marks along
the upper half of the Ruler Bar and can be edited on the plot.
Each Flow Period defined in the Dataprep menu option automatically becomes a Test
Period in the Analysis menu option, unless several Flow Periods are grouped into a
single Test Period.
Select with a single left mouse-click on the Ruler Bar. Edit by applying a double left
mouse-click to generate this Test Period Classification dialog (i.e. only necessary for Slug
Tests and Interference Tests).
In PanSystem, Test Periods are classified as:
Normal (default): This is simply a Test which is not an Interference or Slug Test.
It includes conventional Drawdowns, Build-Ups, Injection and Fall-Off Tests
involving flow at surface.
Slug: This category includes Wellbore Fill-Up and Leak-Off Tests with no flow at
surface and the Well open at surface. Slug Tests can be analyzed using the
Ramey, Agarwal and Martin Slug Test Type-Curves (Reference 40) or the Pressure
Integral Method of Peres, Onur and Reynolds (Reference 96) if this Test Type is
selected.
When this Test Type is selected, the lower half of this dialog (i.e. Slug Test Analysis
Parameters), is enabled for additional data entry. Also refer to Slug Test Analysis
Workflow for more details on setting-up this type of Analysis.
Implementation of the Pressure Integral Method was sponsored by Petrobras.

Interference: This Test applies to the Pressure Response in a Shut-In Well
located some distance from a Well producing at a constant Surface Rate. Users
will be able to access the Interference Test (Exponential Integral) Type-Curve if this
Test Type is selected.
For an Interference Test, it is also necessary to initialize the Inter-Well Distance in

the Well Parameters dialog under Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical).
Additional Data Entry Requirements for Slug Tests:
When a Slug Test is selected in the upper half of the dialog, the Slug Test Analysis
Parameters section is enabled to enter the following data:
Initial Wellbore (Cushion) Pressure: This is the wellbore pressure to which the
sandface is subjected at the instant that flow is initiated. It usually corresponds to
the column or cushion of liquid in the tubing, and it determines the initial
underbalance or overbalance (Player - Pcushion). This is required to compute the Y-
axis pressure functions used in the type-curve and pressure integral methods.
Wellbore Storage Coefficient: This is a mandatory input. For a Slug Test, the
Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) is given by:
118
PanSystem
where:
d = Pipe Inside Diameter or ID (inches)
= Wellbore Fluid Density (gm/cm ) 3
= Average Angle of Pipe Deviation (degrees) over the Fill-Up (or Leak-Off)
Interval (i.e. over the Length of Tubing along which the liquid movement occurs).
These parameters are all assumed to be constant for the duration of the Slug
Test.
If a value for the Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) has already been entered in the
Wellbore Storage Model Parameters sub-dialog, it will appear in this dialog by
default.
For Two-Phase (Oil/Water) Flow, the Wellbore Fluid (Mixture) Density is defined as:
where:
fw = In-Situ Water-Cut
o and w = In-Situ Phase Densities for Oil and Water respectively
This represents the Total (Two-Phase) Storage Coefficient.

Estimated Layer Pressure: Enter a value for Estimated Layer Pressure. This is
also required to compute the Y-axis Pressure Functions used in the Type-Curve and
Pressure Integral Methods. Analysis may indicate that this estimate needs to be
revised.
If a value for the Layer Pressure has already been entered in the Layer Parameters
dialog, it will appear in this dialog by default.
Use Pressure Integral Method: This checkbox should be left unchecked to use
the classical Ramey, Agarwal and Martin Slug Test Type-Curves (Reference 40) for
Slug Test Analysis. Proceed to the Type-Curve section in Analysis.
Also refer to Slug Test Analysis Workflow for more details on setting-up this type of
Analysis.
This checkbox should be checked to use the Pressure Integral Method of Peres,
Onur and Reynolds (Reference 96). Proceed to the Diagnostic Plots in Analysis.
Also refer to Slug Test Analysis Workflow for more details on setting-up this type of
Analysis.
119
ODBC Import Support Documentation
The way ODBC Import process works is very specific in nature for database types. The
ODBC Import process has been tested on Oracle, Microsoft SQL, and Access only. If a
customer tries to run this process on some other database, there will be a chance failure.
This document will try to show some of the types of issues and what can be done to help
the customer.
The customer will have a log file that is automatically created and shows what the DLL
was trying to do when it failed. This is a text file that can be used to determine the
underlying problem in the folder: Documents and
Settings\user\applicationdata\eps\Panver.\reports\odbclog.txt. With this file, a good deal
of troubleshooting can be done.
The syntax of the query can be checked. This also has to deal with case sensitivity of the
fields on some databases. The last query completed will be at the end of the log. The
support analyst can type the query into the database to see if it will run at all or to see if
there is a problem with a column / field definition.
If the problem arises due to syntax, the DLL will most likely have to be modified to
include the new database dependant syntax for the queries.
If the problem arises due to field definition or column definition, then IT has a chance to
correct this on their end.
120
PanSystem
PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Analytical)
Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) Dialog
General:
This option is accessed via the Dataprep/Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) menu
item and is used to enter, view or edit the well and reservoir parameters for use in
PanSystem Analysis and Advanced Simulation options. For a description of any of the
terms used here, refer to the Glossary.
This dialog is comprised of four main sections:
Well Control section: This is used to describe the wells within a reservoir and exhibits
the following features:
Add Wells: In PanSystem, a reservoir can have a minimum of one well and a
maximum of five. Use the Add Well option to add wells to a reservoir, up to a
maximum of five wells. A newly added well is automatically active. Users will be
prompted to supply a well name.
Delete Wells: Use this option to delete the current well. Deleting will erase the
associated well parameters. To remove a well temporarily without losing associated
parameters, make it Inactive. If there is only one well, it becomes the principal
well by default and cannot be deleted. If more than one well exists it can be
deleted. The well immediately above the deleted well becomes the principal well.
Copy Wells: Use this option after a new well has been added, to copy the well
description (e.g. radius, storage model, etc.) from an existing well.
Principal Well: One well is nominated as the principal well and this well is
designated by having a P character beside it. It is treated as the main test well,
the others being interfering wells. The principal well only plays a part in Advanced
Simulation and Test Design, where one well can affect another well. In the
Analysis and Quick Match options, PanSystem only considers one well at a time.
The principal well cannot be made inactive.
Active or Inactive: If more than one well exists, a well can either be active or
inactive.
Well Parameters: Use the Well Parameters button to view, enter or edit the
parameters of the highlighted well and select the Wellbore Storage Model. Use the
tab to move between the parameter options. The Well Parameters to be entered
and/or edited include well radius, inter-well distance and well co-ordinates.
The Active, Inactive and Principal options are only used for Advanced Simulation
analyses and Test Designs. By making a well inactive, it does not form part of the
Advanced Simulation or Test Design. However, the well data is retained in the
event that it is made active again at a later stage. If a well is made the principal
well, indicated by having a P character adjacent, it is considered to be at co-
ordinate position (0,0) for image well calculations and complex simulations, where
well offsets have to be considered.
Layer Control section: This is used to describe the layer configuration of a reservoir
and exhibits the following features:
For the Reservoir:
121
Add Layer: Use the Add Layer option to add a layer to a reservoir. A
reservoir can have a minimum of one layer and a maximum of five layers.
In the Analysis and Quick Match options only one layer is modelled. Added
layers only play a part in Advanced Simulation and Test Design. An added
layer affects the whole of the reservoir and therefore all the wells in the
reservoir will have a layer added to them. If a fault exists in the simulated
reservoir or test design and users do not want a layer to extend to a well
sharing this reservoir, the layer for that well can be temporarily removed by
making it inactive. Users will be prompted for a layer name.
To re-name a layer, highlight the required layer in the list field (i.e. lower
field), change the name in the edit field (i.e. upper field), then apply a left
mouse-click to the highlighted name in the list field to re-name the layer.
Delete Layer: Use this option to delete the current layer from the Layer
Control section. A reservoir must have at least one layer.
Copy Layer: Use this option after a new layer has been added, to copy the
complete description of an existing layer (i.e. layer and fluid parameters,
boundary parameters, etc.) into the new layer.
Create Composite: The Create Composite option allows users to create a
composite layer from two or more specified layers. In order create a
composite, at least two "active" layer names must be present in the list
field. The program combines the layers to create a single layer with
averaged properties. A dialog is generated to allow users to select the layer
from which to use the pseudo-pressure tables (i.e. if using gas or
condensate Fluid Parameters).
The composite layer now has the status of any other layer, can be edited,
and is available for selection on entry to Analysis, etc. It will not however
be included in an Advanced Simulation run. Advanced Simulation will only
use the active constituent layers.
Create Commingled: Use this option to create a commingled system from
any two layers in the reservoir description. This further allows users to
model a two-layered system in the Quick Match and Automatch options.
This is an alternative to using thickness-averaged values combined in a
single composite layer as described above. In addition, when a closed
system boundary model is used, the simulation will respect differential
pressure depletion between the layers, leading to cross-flow and recharging
during build-up.
Commingled systems can only be constructed from layers whose flow models
are radial homogeneous and only two layers can be commingled at any one
time.
Once created, the commingled layers system is available for selection on
entry to the Analysis menu. However, it will not be included in an Advanced
Simulation run. Advanced Simulation only uses the active constituent layers.
Pseudo-Pressures: This button is only enabled when the Multiphase Pseudo-
Pressure Method has been selected in the Fluid Type section of this dialog.
It generates a pseudo table editing sub-dialog for the selected layer, that
allows for the editing, importation or creation of a Multiphase Pseudo-
Pressure Table (i.e. m(p)) for Gas and Condensate or normalised pseudo-
pressure for Oil.
For each Layer:
122
PanSystem
Active or Inactive: These options are used to set the current layer to active
or inactive. When a layer is added to a reservoir it covers the whole of the
reservoir and not just the current well. If the reservoir has complex layer
boundaries and another well in the reservoir well is not to have this layer
added to it, make the layer inactive for that well. This option can also be
used to exclude selected layers from the Create Composite facility, where
layers that are not to be included in the composite can be made Inactive.
Layer Parameters: The Layer Parameters button is used to view/enter/edit
the rock parameters. These include layer thickness, porosity etc. Users can
also set the flow model and enter/edit any parameters pertaining to the
model (e.g. permeability, fracture half-length).
Layer Boundaries: The Layer Boundaries button enables users to perform
the following for each layer in a reservoir:
Define the boundary model of a layer.
Calculate image wells (max. 16,000 per layer).
Edit image wells table.
Fluid Parameters: This button allows users to view/enter/edit the Fluid
Parameters of a given layer. A Fluid Parameters dialog box can be brought
up for any layer by highlighting it in the Layer Control list field.
Before setting the Fluid Parameters, users must first choose the fluid type
from the range of options available in the Fluid Type section of this dialog
(i.e. Oil, Water, Gas or Condensate), since each generated Fluid Parameters
dialog is fluid-specific.
The fluid parameters describe the fluid in the layer. Fluid properties can be
typed in, or calculated from production or laboratory data. The selected fluid
type applies to all layers, but the fluid properties themselves can be different
in each layer. The parameters that can be quantified depend on the type of
fluid selected.
Not all parameters are required to be quantified for analysis. Parameters that
must be given a specified value are highlighted in red. However, users have
the option to de-select the values for certain parameters if required (e.g. Bo,
Uo, Bw, Uw, Bg, Ug, Co, Cw, Cg, Cf and/or Ct), by unchecking the check
boxes associated with these parameters. In this situation, only the remaining
(i.e. checked) parameters will be included in the calculations. PanSystem
can also calculate certain parameter values using correlations, provided users
have entered the minimum dataset.
The Multi-Phase Perrine Method is available for an oil Fluid Type selection.
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Tables can be imported/edited/calculated for
an oil, gas or condensate Fluid Type selection.
Copy Layer: Use this option after a new layer has been added, to copy the
complete description of an existing layer (i.e. layer and fluid parameters,
boundary parameters, etc.) into the new layer.
Fluid Type section: This section is used to describe the main fluid contents in a layer.
The chosen fluid type will apply to all layers. It is not possible to have different Fluid
Types in each layer, but Fluid Parameters can be varied.
Five options are available:
123
Oil (Single-Phase): Is used when the mobile reservoir fluid is oil, without water or
gas production. In Analysis options, PanSystem calculates all reservoir parameters
using oil flow rates and properties. Other phases are ignored.
Water (Single-Phase): Is used when the mobile reservoir fluid is water. In Analysis
options, PanSystem calculates all reservoir parameters using water flow rates and
properties. Other phases are ignored.
Gas (Single-Phase): Is used when the mobile reservoir fluid is dry gas. Although a
water/gas ratio (i.e. WGR), can be specified, the water phase is ignored and
PanSystem calculates all reservoir parameters using dry gas flow rates and
properties. Gas impurities or full composition may be used.
Condensate: Is used when the reservoir fluid is a retrograde condensate or wet
gas system. In the conventional analysis approach, the specified surface
separator gas and liquid condensate properties are recombined to obtain in-situ
rich gas single-phase properties. The mobile phase is therefore assumed to be a
gas phase in the reservoir and the effects of liquid drop-out on relative
permeability are not considered. In Analysis options, PanSystem calculates all
results using the rich gas flow rates and properties. Although a water/gas ratio can
be specified, it is ignored.
Multi-Phase Options: Two multi-phase options are available in the Fluid Type
section:
1. For oil there is a simplified multi-phase approach, Multi-Phase Perrine
Method to handle oil produced with water and/or gas in the reservoir.
2. For oil, gas and condensate, the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method
provides a more rigorous treatment of multi-phase flow which includes
relative permeability effects.
Up to and including the PanSystem V-2.4 release, the second feature

required importation of a Multiphase Pseudo-Pressure file from an external
source. From PanSystem V-2.5 release onwards, the Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressure file can be generated internally.
Multi-Phase Perrine Method (oil): This option can be used when the
mobile reservoir fluid is made up of several phases, (e.g. oil+water, oil+gas
or oil+water+gas).
The relevant phase properties must be specified via the Fluid Parameters
button situated in the Layer Control section of this dialog. Within the
generated Oil (Multiple-Phase) sub-dialog, the Water-Cut must be greater
than zero, for water to be included in the analysis and the Produced Gas-Oil
Ratio must be greater than the Solution Gas-Oil Ratio, for gas to be included
in the analysis.
Single-phase oil mobility koo is replaced by the total mobility (k/)t
calculated using the flow rates and properties of all mobile phases, according
to the Perrine Method. This has impact on the computed skin factors (i.e. Xf ,
Rinv, etc.). The effective permeability to each phase will be calculated and
reported in Analysis.
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method: This option can be used when the
mobile reservoir fluid is made up of several mobile phases, and it provides a
more rigorous treatment of relative permeability effects and fluid property
variations with pressure.
124
PanSystem
When this option is checked the Pseudo-Pressures button is activated in the

Layer Control section of this dialog, allowing users to either edit, import or
create:
A Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Table (i.e. m(p) Table) for gas or
condensate via the generated Gas or Condensate Pseudo-Pressure
Table Editing sub-dialog
A Normalized Pseudo-Pressure Table for oil via the generated Oil
Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog.
A Relative Permeabilities button is also activated in the Layer Parameters sub-
dialog and users are advised to check this data.
The relevant phase properties must be specified via the Fluid Parameters
button situated in the Layer Control section of this dialog.
This method can be applied to the simultaneous flow of:
Oil with water and/or gas.
Gas with water.
Condensate systems with liquid dropout and/or water.
Volatile Oil systems with gas liberation and/or water (condensate
fluid type is also used for a volatile oil).
For oil and condensate systems, it can account for the effects of any near
wellbore gas evolution or liquid dropout.
Principal Well Orientation section: In this section users can choose from:
Vertical (i.e. default) - suitable for 0 to 75 inclination. A wide range of Reservoir
Flow Models will be offered. If an Infinite-Conductivity Vertical Fracture Model is
being used, for the purposes of defining Boundary Geometries, the Fracture is
considered to be parallel to the X-axis (i.e. east-west).
Horizontal (i.e. parallel to the Layer upper and lower Boundaries). A limited set of
Reservoir Flow Models will be offered. For the purposes of defining Boundary
Geometries, the Well is considered to be parallel to the X-axis (i.e. east-west).
The choice made here will determine whether Vertical or Horizontal well models are
offered in the Analysis and Simulate menu options.
125
Well Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
This option is accessed from the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog by selecting the
Well Parameters button from the Well Control section and is used to view, enter or edit
parameters for the current well. Mandatory items for data input are highlighted in red
within the dialog.
This sub-dialog can also be accessed from the Well Configuration tab of the
PanMesh Well and Reservoir (Numerical) data preparation dialog. In this
application, only the lower portion of this dialog is enabled, for selecting a
Wellbore Storage Model and entering model parameters.
This sub-dialog is comprised of three main sections, described below:
Input Parameters section: Contains two data entry fields:
Well Radius: This defines the Radius of the open hole Wellbore (i.e. not
the Casing). This is a compulsory input.
Inter-Well Distance: This defines the Distance between the Tested Well and
an Interfering Well. This parameter is used only for interference type-
curve analysis and can be left at zero if the Gauge Data are not for an
Interference Test.
Interwell Distances are measured from the mid-point of the horizontal

open interval (i.e. for Horizontal Wells).
Well Co-ordinates section: This parameter is required only for Test Design and
Advanced Simulation, when more than one Well is involved. These co-ordinates
describe the (X, Y) position of the Well.
The Principal Well should always be located at co-ordinate position (0, 0). This is
the mid-point of the horizontal open interval (i.e. for Horizontal Wells).
Wellbore Storage Model section: Used to describe the storage capacity of the
wellbore (Cs). Four wellbore storage models are available from the drop-down
menu field:
Classic Wellbore Storage: This model assumes a constant storage coefficient
(Cs).
Fair's Model (Reference 49): This option models a gradual change of storage
coefficient. It includes the effects of wellbore phase redistribution and
assumes that these decay exponentially with time.
Hegeman's Model (Reference 50): This is similar in principle to Fair's Model,
except that the exponential decay is now a function of [t/]2 and is therefore
stronger.
Time-Stepped Wellbore Storage: this option models an abrupt change of
storage coefficient at a specified elapsed time.
126
PanSystem
The Wellbore Storage Model Parameters button generates a Wellbore Storage Model
Parameters sub-dialog where the parameters associated with the current model can
be edited.
Normally, a constant storage coefficient and skin factor (i.e. mechanical and
turbulent) are assumed for the entire test. If users suspect that any or all of these
parameters is/are varying from one flow period to the next, the Allow different
skins and storage per flow period checkbox allows a table of different values to be
defined for each period. If this checkbox is checked, a table can be generated into
which the Darcy Skin (S), Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) and (for gas and
condensate welltests only), the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D), can be
entered for each Flow Period.
127
Wellbore Storage Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
This option is accessed from the Well Parameters sub-dialog by selecting the Wellbore
Storage Parameters button from the Wellbore Storage Model section. With the exception
of the Slug Test, there is no need to enter values for Wellbore Storage Parameters if a
conventional welltest analysis is being performed, since these parameters will be
determined from diagnostic plots.
These parameters must be defined if Advanced Simulation is being used for Test
Design.
Four different sub-dialog options are available, depending on the Wellbore Storage Model
selected and the status of the Allow Different Skins and Storage per Flow Period checkbox
in the Well Parameters sub-dialog. Each option is described below:
Classic Wellbore Storage Model selection: The Classic Model assumes a
constant Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs). For analyzing a conventional well test,
there is no need to enter a value here, since it will be derived from Analysis.
For Slug Tests: Enter a non-zero value based on the Wellbore Fluid Pressure
Gradient,
(Cs) = 0.00224 D2 / Cos
where:
D = Pipe ID (inches),
= Fluid Density (gm/cm ), 3
= Average Angle of Pipe Deviation (degrees), over the Fill-Up/Leak-Off section.

For Two-Phase (Oil/Water) Flow, the Wellbore Fluid (Mixture) Density is defined as:
where:
fw = In-Situ Water-Cut
o and w = In-Situ Phase Densities for Oil and Water respectively
This represents the Total (Two-Phase) Storage Coefficient.

For Advanced Simulation: For conventional well test design with Production at
surface, enter a value here (zero is valid), based on the Compressibility of the
Wellbore Fluids
(Cs) = VCwb
where:
V = Wellbore Volume (bbls, etc.),
Cwb = Average Compressibility of the Wellbore Fluids (psi-1, etc.).
For Slug Test (i.e. Wellbore Fill-Up or Leak-Off) Simulation, enter a value:
128
PanSystem
(Cs) = 0.00224 D2 / Cos

as defined above.
For Slug Test Simulation a zero Flow Rate should be entered in the Test Rate
Schedule, since there is no flow at surface; the Initial Wellbore Pressure should
also be set-up to be either less than Layer Pressure (i.e. for Fill-Up) or greater
than Layer Pressure (i.e. for Leak-Off).
Fair's Model (Reference 49) selection: This option models a gradual change of
storage coefficient. It includes the effects of wellbore phase redistribution, and
assumes that these decay exponentially with time. It is only necessary to enter
values here if Advanced Simulation is going to be performed.
The Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), is the final value when phase redistribution
effects have dissipated (i.e. not the initial value).
The Storage Amplitude (Cf), is the maximum phase redistribution pressure change.
It can be positive (i.e. increasing wellbore storage - e.g. "humping" caused by
rising gas in an oil well when it is shut-in), or negative (i.e. decreasing wellbore
storage - e.g. compression of wellbore fluids).
The Storage Time Constant (), is the time required for 63% of the total change to
occur.
These parameters would normally be derived from the log-log plot analysis, but
with some difficulty. Users will probably find it easier to use Quick Match by trial
and error.
The Storage Coefficient at Early Time (C), which can be obtained from the Log-Log
Unit Slope, is defined by the three parameters (Cs), (C) and ():
Where (q), is the total downhole flow rate (res bbls/day).

Hegeman's Model (Reference 50) selection: This is similar in principle to Fair's
model, except that the exponential decay is now a function of [t/ ]2 and is
therefore stronger.
Only enter values if Advanced Simulation is to be performed.
Time-Stepped Wellbore Storage Model selection: This option models an
abrupt change of storage coefficient at a specified elapsed time. The dialog entry is
described below:
Wellbore Storage: Input the original value of Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs).
Second Wellbore Storage: Input the new value of Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs).
Time of Change to Second Storage: The exact time of the transition is entered
here.
Allow Different Skins and Storage per Flow Period: This option from the
Well Parameters sub-dialog allows users to assign a different value of (Cs) to
each flow period in the test by checking the checkbox. In this sub-dialog, the edit
field for a single storage coefficient value is replaced by the word <TABLE>.
Left mouse-click on <TABLE> to generate the Edit Skin & Storage Table sub-dialog
for the well and layer in question. The table is constructed from the same flow
129
periods as the Rate Changes Table. Each flow period can be assigned a Skin Factor
(S), Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), and for gas and condensate, a Rate-
Dependent Skin Coefficient (D). If a Fractured Well Model has been chosen, the
Skin (S) term is replaced by a Fracture Face Skin (Sf) term. This table can be
populated either by direct entry of values or by values derived from analysis of
each flow period.
An estimate of the wellbore storage coefficient and of the expected time to end of
wellbore storage can be obtained by selecting PanWizard/Test Design/Test Schedule
from the main menu, then following the Wizard's Testing Time Advisor. The
estimated time to end of wellbore storage for any specified storage coefficient will
be displayed. If users also want the Wizard to calculate the storage coefficient,
select the WBS Advisor button.
130
PanSystem
Edit Skin and Storage Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Wellbore Storage Model Parameters dialog by left
mouse-clicking on the <TABLE> text within the edit field. The table is constructed from
the same flow periods as the Rate Changes Table. Each flow period can be assigned a
Skin Factor (S), Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), and for gas and condensate, a Rate-
Dependent Skin Coefficient (D). If a Fractured Well Model has been chosen, the Skin (S)
term is replaced by a Fracture Face Skin (Sf) term. This table can be populated either by
direct entry of values or by values derived from analysis of each flow period.
For simulation purposes, it is not possible for a build-up and its preceding flow
period to have different skin factors, since the skin factor only affects the flowing
pressures. Therefore, on the Test Overview Plot, Quick Match and Advanced
Simulation will ignore the (S) and (D) values corresponding to any build-up and will
use the values from the drawdown that preceded it.
side of slider).
one cell).
Function.
Clear: Clear values from a range of cells. Refer to Gauge Data Editing
Clear.
Insert: Insert a number of rows. De-activated within this dialog.
Copy: Copies all the columns of data contained in the table to the clipboard.
These columns of data can be subsequently pasted into a spreadsheet (e.g.
Excel).
source via the windows clipboard. The source data must contain the same
number of columns as those in the table being pasted into, and must also be
tab-separated. Time data may be input in any of the usual accepted formats
(e.g. hours, hh:mm:ss, etc.), except minutes or seconds. Time data must
also be cumulative (i.e. it must not reset to zero at the start of each new
day unless it is in dd:hh:mm:ss format).
131
keyboard command to copy the columns to Clipboard from the editor being
used (e.g. NotePad, Excel, etc.). Switch to PanSystem, place the cursor at
the insertion point in the time column and select the Paste button - do not
use Ctrl+V from the keyboard. The Paste option will automatically
translate the incoming time format into the format being used for the current
PanSystem display, if different.
existing data within overlapping cells. To prevent data being overwritten in
this manner, first use the Insert option to open up the appropriate number
of empty lines, then Paste.
Delete: Delete a number of rows. De-activated within this dialog.
Names: Change the column names. Refer to Gauge Data Editing Names.
132
PanSystem
Add New Well Sub-Dialog
General:
Add Well button from the Well Control section and is used to add and name a new Well
for a Reservoir.
The sub-dialog contains a single data entry field as follows:
Please Enter New Well Name: Enter the name of the new Well (or accept the
default name) and select the OK button to validate. The new Well name will now
be listed within the Well Control section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog.
133
Add New Layer Sub-Dialog
General:
Add Layer button from the Layer Control section and is used to add and name a new
Layer for a Reservoir.
Please Enter New Layer Name: Enter the name of the new Layer (or accept the
default name) and select the OK button to validate. The new Layer name will now
be listed within the Layer Control section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical)
dialog.
134
PanSystem
Copy Well/Layer Sub-Dialog
General:
This shared sub-dialog is accessed from the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog by
either selecting the Copy Well button from the Well Control section or the Copy Layer
button from the Layer Control section. It is used for copying Well/Layer parameters from
an existing Well/Layer to a new Well/Layer.
Before using this copy facility it is necessary to have a Well/Layer to copy

parameters into. Use the Add Well or Add Layer commands as appropriate.
The sub-dialog contains two fields, described as follows:
For Copy Well: When a new Well has been added, copy existing Well parameters
(i.e. Radius, Wellbore Storage, Model, etc.) from the Well named in the Copy From
field into the Well named in the Copy To field. A drop-down menu allows users to
select from the range of available Wells.
For Copy Layer: When a new Layer has been added, copy existing Layer
parameters (i.e. Layer and Fluid parameters, Boundary parameters, etc.) from the
Layer named in the Copy From field into the Layer named in the Copy To field. A
drop-down menu allows users to select from the range of available Layers.
135
Layer Parameters Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog by selecting the
Layer Parameters button from the Layer Control section. This option is used to view,
enter or edit the parameters of the currently selected Layer (i.e. the highlighted Layer
within the list of Layers). Parameters required for analysis are highlighted in red.
The dialog is comprised of two sections, described as follows:
Parameters section: The Layer Parameters are described in this section:
Formation thickness (h): Represents the effective (i.e. net) dip-normal
Thickness of a Layer, and is compulsory for Analysis and Simulation. For
the Dual-Porosity (i.e. "two-layer" block geometry) and Dual-Permeability
models, (h) is the Thickness of the producing Layer, not the Total
Thickness of both Layers.
Porosity (): Describes the connected Porosity of a Layer, and is
compulsory for Analysis and Simulation. It is also required to calculate
Rock Compressibility. For the Radial Composite model it refers to the inner
region. For the Dual-Porosity model used for natural fractures, it refers to
the total system (bulk-averaged) Porosity. For the Dual-Permeability
model, it refers to the producing Layer.
Layer Pressure: Describes the initial Pore Pressure of the fluid in a Layer at
the start of the Rate History. This is not compulsory for Analysis, but will
be required for Test Design and Simulation. This is mandatory for the
analysis of Gas and Condensate Fluid Types, and for all Fluid Types for
Advanced Simulation. The Layer Fluid Properties should be evaluated at
Layer Pressure. They will be assumed to remain constant unless a Closed
System Boundary model is used and the Material Balance Correction is
switched on, in which case the effect of decreasing Layer Pressure on fluid
properties with time will be taken into account.
Layer Temperature: This is a mandatory input for Gas and Condensate
Fluid Types, and for all Fluid Types if the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure
Method checkbox has been checked.
Water Saturation (Sw): The fraction of water in the pore-space of a Layer.
It is used in the calculation of the Total Compressibility.
Gas Saturation (Sg): The fraction of gas in the pore space of a Layer. It is
used in the calculation of the Total Compressibility.
Rock Compressibility (Cf): The Pore Volume Compressibility of the rock in a
Layer. The Rock Compressibility is calculated from Porosity in the Fluid
Parameters dialog (i.e. Oil, Gas or Condensate). When a value is updated in
one cell, PanSystem automatically writes it into the other.
Total Compressibility (Ct): Describes the Total Compressibility of the fluids
and rock that are present within a Layer (refer to the comments about
Porosity for what to use in the various models).
136
PanSystem
Ct cannot be edited in the Layer Parameters dialog; the value displayed

here is carried through from the relevant Fluid Parameters dialog (i.e. Oil,
Gas, Condensate or Water), where it can either be entered manually or
calculated.
Relative Permeabilities button: This button only appears if the Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure option has been selected within the Fluid Type section of
the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. The Relative Permeabilities of
individual phases in Multi-Phase Flow have an obvious impact on fluid
movement. The Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure model makes rigorous use of
Relative Permeabilities and the variation of fluid properties with Pressure.
This is particularly important in Condensate systems where liquid dropout
occurs below dew-point, and in Oil systems where gas evolution occurs
below bubble-point. Good Relative Permeability data are therefore
necessary to make effective use of this facility. Selecting the button
generates an IPR Relative Permeabilities sub-dialog for the selected Layer,
where users can choose between Parametric or Tabular Relative Permeability
data and can also edit the data.
Model section: The Flow Model (i.e. Vertical or Horizontal Well) section is used to
specify the Reservoir Flow Model that PanSystem will apply in the Analysis,
Simulation or Test Design parts of the application. PanSystem provides a wide
selection of models that are dependent on the Well Orientation set within the
Principal Well Orientation section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. A
drop-down menu with associated scroll bar is used to select a suitable Model Type.
All Model Types, except the Free Model, are defined by a set of Model Parameters
that constitute the Reservoir Description. The Model Parameters button (described
below), is disabled when the Free Model is selected.
The Dual-Porosity Block Type button (described below), is only activated when a
Dual Porosity model option is selected.
For Analysis and Quick Match, it is not necessary to specify the parameters now, as
these can be derived from the analysis itself. However, they must be initialized
here for Advanced Simulation.
Allow Different Skins and Storage per Flow Period: Normally, a constant
Storage Coefficient and Skin Factor (i.e. Mechanical and Turbulent) are
assumed for the entire test. If users suspect that any or all of these
parameters may be varying from one Flow Period to the next, checking this
checkbox allows a table of different values to be defined for each Flow
Period. Each Flow Period can be assigned a Skin Factor (S), Wellbore
Storage Coefficient (Cs), and for Gas and Condensate, a Rate-Dependent
Skin Coefficient (D). If a Fractured Well Model has been chosen, (S) is
replaced by (Sf), the Fracture Face Skin. This table can be populated either
by direct entry of values or by values derived from analysis of each Flow
Period.
Model Parameters button: Select this button to generate the Model
Parameters dialog.
Dual Porosity Block Type button: Select this button to generate the Dual-
Porosity Block Type sub-dialog. This button is only available when a Dual-
Porosity model option is selected.
137
IPR Relative Permeability - Data Selection Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Layer Parameters dialog by selecting the Relative
Permeabilities button within the Parameters section. This button is only available if the
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option has been selected within the Fluid Type section of the
Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog.
Users can choose between Parametric or Tabular relative permeability data and can also
edit this data by selecting the Edit button to generate a further sub-dialog for either Edit
Parametric Data or Edit Tabular Data, depending on the choice made in this sub-dialog.
This sub-dialog can also be accessed from the PanSystem - PanMesh Data
Preparation area (i.e. when Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method is enabled), by
selecting the Relative Permeabilities button in the Material Properties tabbed dialog.
The Relative Permeability Data Selection section contains two radio buttons:
Parametric Relative Permeability Data: Check this option if parametric relative
permeability data (i.e. Corey Coefficients) are available (Reference 103).
Table Relative Permeability Data: Check this option if tabular relative permeability
data are available.
The Edit Data button generates an appropriate sub-dialog box based upon the selection
above, allowing users to enter/edit relative permeability data (refer either to Edit
Parametric Data or Edit Tabular Data as appropriate).
Use of Relative Permeability Data Sets:
The relative permeability data sets are used as follows, according to which phases are
flowing:
3-Phase Flow:
Black oil system below the bubble point with a non-zero water cut and GOR, or
condensate system below the dew point with non-zero WGR and CGR: Relative
permeabilities (kro, krg, krw) derived from oil/gas and oil/water tables at Sw, Sg
(by Stone's Method).
2-Phase Flow:
Black oil system above the bubble point with a non-zero water cut: Relative
permeabilities (kro, krw) calculated from the oil/water table at Sw.
Black oil system below the bubble point with zero water cut: Relative
permeabilities (kro, krg) calculated from the oil/gas table at Sg.
Condensate above the dew point with non-zero WGR: Relative permeabilities (krg,
krw) calculated from the gas/water table at Sw.
Condensate below the dew point with a zero WGR: Relative permeabilities (kro,
krg) calculated from the oil/gas table at Sg.
Dry Gas with a non-zero WGR: Relative permeabilities (krg, krw) calculated from
the gas/water table at Sw.
Single-Phase Flow:
138
PanSystem
Black oil above the bubble point with zero water cut: End point relative
permeability kro (normally set to 1.0) taken from the oil/water table at Swi.
Gas with zero WGR or condensate above the dew point with zero WGR: End point
relative permeability krg (normally set to 1.0) from the gas/water table at Swi.
139
IPR Relative Permeability - Edit Parametric Data Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Edit button from the IPR Relative
Permeability - Data Selection sub-dialog with the Parametric option selected. It allows
the entry of measured relative permeability curve parameters for use in the Layer
Parameters dialog.
The dialog contains three sections and the data entry fields are described as follows:
Gas/Water End-Point Parameters section:
Krg: Enter the gas end point relative permeability at irreducible water saturation
into this field. (i.e. for a gas reservoir, this would conventionally be 1.0)
Krw: Type the water end point relative permeability at residual gas saturation into
this field.
Swi: Type the irreducible water saturation into this field.
Sgr: Type the residual gas saturation into this field.
m: Enter the Corey Exponent for the gas relative permeability curve into the edit
box (i.e. typically a value of 3.5).
n: Enter the Corey Exponent for the water relative permeability curve into the edit
Gas/Oil End-Point Parameters section:
Kro: Enter the oil end point relative permeability at critical gas saturation Sgc (and
irreducible water saturation Swi as specified in the Oil/Water area below), into this
field.
Krg: Type the gas end point relative permeability at residual oil saturation (and
irreducible water saturation Swi as specified in the Oil/Water area below) into this
field.
Sgc: Type the critical gas saturation into this field (i.e. fraction of total pore
volume).
Sorg: Type the residual oil saturation into this field (i.e. fraction of total pore
volume).
m: Enter the Corey Exponent for the oil relative permeability curve into the edit
n: Enter the Corey Exponent for the gas relative permeability curve into the edit
Note that Sgc + Sorg + Swi (oil/water rel perms) < 1.0)
Oil/Water End-Point Parameters section:
Kro: Enter the oil end point relative permeability at irreducible water saturation
Swi into this field. (For an oil reservoir, this would conventionally be 1.0).
Krw: Type the water end point relative permeability at residual oil saturation Sor
into this field.
140
PanSystem
Swi: Type the irreducible water saturation into this field. This saturation is also
used for gas/oil.
Sor: Type the residual oil saturation into this field.
m: Enter the Corey Exponent for the oil relative permeability curve into the edit
n: Enter the Corey Exponent for the water relative permeability curve into the edit
The "typical" values quoted for the exponents are averages based on the work of
Tjolsen, Scheie and Damsleth (Reference 104) for oil/water, and Honarpour,
Koederitz and Harvey (Reference 105) for gas/oil.
Plot (from Excel) of Relative Permeability Curves defined by Corey Coefficients

This Excel Plot shows the Oil/Water curves for End-Point data, using typical values
for the Corey Coefficients (Reference 103). The straight lines are the corresponding
curves for m = n = 1.
141
IPR Relative Permeability - Edit Tabular Data Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Edit button from the IPR Relative
Permeability - Data Selection sub-dialog with the Table option selected. It allows entry of
tabular relative permeability data for use in the Layer Parameters dialog. At least two
points (i.e. corresponding to the end point relative permeabilities and saturations) must
be entered.
The table fields and sub-dialog buttons are described as follows:
Water Saturation: Enter Sw values between Swi (irreducible water saturation,
where Krw=0) and (1 - Sor, where Kro=0) inclusive for an oil/water table, or (1 -
Sgr, where Krg=0) inclusive for a gas/water table.
Gas Saturation: Enter Sg values between Sgc (critical gas saturation, where
Krg=0) and (1 - Sorg - Swi, where Kro=0) inclusive for an oil/gas table.
Saturations are percentage of total pore volume.
Water Rel Perm: Enter values of Krw corresponding to the water saturation values
into this column. End point values must be entered.
Oil Rel Perm: Enter values of Kro corresponding to the water or gas saturation
values into this column. End point values must be entered.
Gas Rel Perm: Enter values of Krg corresponding to the water or gas saturation
values into this column. End point values must be entered.
The Next Table button moves to the next relative permeability table in the set of three.
142
PanSystem
Model Parameters Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Layer Parameters dialog by selecting the Model
Parameters button from the Flow Model section; it is used to enter data relating to Layer
Model Parameters. The data entry fields will vary depending on the selected model (i.e.
Vertical Well Models, Horizontal Well or Customer-Defined Flow Models). Each model type
is defined in the following sections and short-cut links to these sections are also provided
below:
Vertical Well Flow Models
Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters
Horizontal Well Flow Models
Horizontal Well Flow Model Parameters
Customer-Defined Flow Models
Slanted Well
Multiple Radial Composite
Partially-Sealing Fault
Pinch-Out
Three-Layer Homogeneous with Internal Cross-Flow
Two-Layer Homogeneous with Internal Cross-Flow
General Intersecting Fault
Composite Linear Reservoir Model
Wireline formation test with packers and probe in a single homogeneous
layer
Wireline formation test with two probes in a single homogeneous layer
Wireline formation test with packers and probe in a Dual-Permeability
system
Vertical Well Flow Models:
The parameters required for each Vertical Well Flow Model are described below:
1. Free Model: No Flow Model is stipulated at this stage. This may be because users
have not yet examined the data and identified a Flow Model. As a consequence, no
Results will be calculated from the diagnostic plots other than a tentative Permeability
(k) and Skin (S) for assumed Radial Flow and no parameters can be entered for
Advanced Simulation and Test Design. Refer below for a definition of Flow Model
Parameters.
2. Radial Homogeneous: The Flow Model for this Homogeneous Reservoir is Radial.
The Finite Wellbore Radius Solution (Reference 2) is used for Simulation. Associated
parameters include:
Permeability (k), "true" or "mechanical" Skin (S) and "true" Rate-Dependent Skin
Coefficient (D) (for Gas). Refer below for a definition of Flow Model Parameters.
143
3. Vertical Fracture - Infinite Conductivity: This Flow Model (References 72 and

99) has a single symmetrical Vertical Fracture intercepting the Well. There is no
resistance to flow along the Fracture and flow is concentrated at the tips. The Fracture
Height is assumed to be the same as the Layer Height. Associated parameters include:
Permeability (k), Fracture Face Skin (Sf), Fracture Half-Length (Xf) and "true" Rate-
Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas). Refer below for a definition of Flow Model
Parameters.
4. Vertical Fracture - Uniform Flux: This Flow Model (Reference 25) has a single
symmetrical Vertical Fracture intercepting the Well. The flow enters the Fracture at the
same Rate over the entire surface. The Fracture Height is assumed to be the same as the
Layer Height. Associated parameters include:
Permeability (k), Fracture Face Skin (Sf), Fracture Half-Length (Xf) and "true" Rate-
Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas). Refer below for a definition of Flow Model
Parameters.
5. Vertical Fracture - Finite Conductivity: This Flow Model (Reference 102) has a
single symmetrical Vertical Fracture intercepting the Well. The Fracture has a finite
Permeability and flow tends to be concentrated more towards the Wellbore end. The
Fracture Height is assumed to be the same as the Layer Height. Associated parameters
include:
Permeability (k), Fracture Face Skin (Sf), Fracture Half-Length (Xf), Dimensionless
Fracture Conductivity (FCD) and "true" Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (for
Gas). Refer below for a definition of Flow Model Parameters.
6. Vertical Fracture - Limited Height: This Flow Model (References 72 and 99) has
a single symmetrical Vertical Fracture which does not extend to the full Layer Height. The
Fracture also has a finite Permeability. Associated parameters include:
Permeability (k), Vertical Permeability (kz), Fracture Face Skin (Sf), Fracture Offset
(Zwdf), Fracture Height (hf), Fracture Half-Length (Xf), and "true" Rate-Dependent
Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas). Refer below for a definition of Flow Model
Parameters.
7. Dual Porosity (Pseudo-Steady-State): This Flow Model (Reference 27) has a
Dual-Porosity configuration (i.e. Blocks or Slabs), with a Pseudo-Steady-State
Interporosity Flow. Associated parameters include:
Permeability (k), "true" or "mechanical" Skin (S), Interporosity Flow Coefficient
(), Storativity Ratio (), and "true" Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas).
Refer below for a definition of Flow Model Parameters.
8. Dual Porosity (Transient): This Flow Model (Reference 33) has a Dual-Porosity
configuration (i.e. Blocks or Slabs), with Transient Interporosity Flow. Associated
parameters include:
(), Storativity Ratio (), and "true" Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas).
9. Dual Permeability: This Flow Model (Reference 46) has two distinct Layers, with
Horizontal Radial Flow in both Layers. Only one Layer is open to the wellbore and the
second Layer cross-flows vertically into the Producing Layer. There may or may not be a
thin semi-permeable stratum at the interface. Advanced Simulation does not require a
second Layer to be configured because the secondary, supporting Layer is implicit in the
Model. Associated parameters include:
144
PanSystem

(), Flow Capacity Ratio (), Storativity Ratio () and "true" Rate-Dependent Skin
Coefficient (D) (for Gas). Refer below for a definition of Flow Model Parameters.
This model is based on Reference 46 (Ehlig-Economides and Ayoub). The definition

of the Interporosity Flow Coefficient () - Lambda term in Equation 14 of this paper
is the same as that used by PanSystem, except that an EPS modification has been
added to allow for reduced Vertical Permeability in the second Layer also; if this
modification is ignored, the equation is identical.
10. Radial Composite: This Flow Model (Reference 101) consists of an inner
cylindrical Homogeneous Region surrounded by an outer region of different properties.
The flow in both regions is Radial and Horizontal. Associated parameters include:
Permeability (k) for inner Region, "true" or "mechanical" Skin (S), Flow Mobility
Ratio (M), Storativity Ratio (), Radial Distance to Discontinuity (Lrad) and "true"
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas). Refer below for a definition of Flow
Model Parameters.
Any Boundaries are assumed to be in the outer Region.

11. Partial Penetration: This Flow Model (Reference 100) has a Homogeneous
Reservoir with Horizontal Radial Flow. Only part of the interval is open to flow at the
wellbore, so there is Flow Convergence. Associated parameters include:
"True" Radial Permeability (k), "true" or "mechanical" Skin (S), Vertical
Permeability (kz), Perforated Interval (hp), Distance from Top of Layer to Top of
Perforations (htop), "true" Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (for Gas) and Radial
Permeability at Perforations (kp). Refer below for a definition of Flow Model
Parameters.
12. Gas Cap/Aquifer: Parameters for this Flow Model are the same as for the Partial
Penetration Model (Reference 100), except that this Flow Model adds a Constant Pressure
(upper or lower) Boundary:
The parameter (htop), is now the Distance from Top of Perforations to Base of Gas-
Cap, or the Distance from Bottom of Perforations to Top of Aquifer.
Layer Thickness (h), should not include the Gas-Cap or Aquifer unless a Thickness-
Averaged Permeability is required.
Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters:
Radial Permeability (k): The (Effective) Horizontal Permeability of the Reservoir
Rock to the mobile phase.
Vertical Permeability (kz): The Permeability to the mobile phase in the
vertical direction.
Skin (S): The "true" or "mechanical" Darcy Skin Factor (i.e. the Non-Turbulent
Skin Factor at the wellbore, attributed to damage, improvement and completion).
Do not confuse this with the Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr), which is an apparent Skin
Factor computed when Pseudo-Radial Flow develops in some Flow Models. For
example, a partially-penetrated Reservoir with a "true" Damage Skin (S) of +2.0
may have a Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr) of +20 or more.
145
The Skin Factor (S) requested for input to Quick Match and Advanced Simulation is
always the "true" Damage Skin (S), not the Pseudo-Radial Skin. The (Spr) term
will appear as a computed result on some diagnostic plots. The (Spr) term is also
required in the Deliverability IPR section because PanSystem uses the (Pseudo-)
Radial Inflow Equation to compute the Productivity Indices.
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): The "true" Turbulent Skin Coefficient at
the wellbore (i.e. for Gas and Condensate Wells). Turbulent Skin is D x Flow Rate.
The above information for Skin (S) relating to Pseudo-Radial Flow also applies to
(D).
Fracture Half-Length (Xf): The Length of one Fracture Wing from the wellbore
axis to the tip.
Fracture Skin (Sf): The Darcy Fracture Face Skin Factor, representing an
additional Pressure Drop across the Fracture Face.
Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity (Fcd): This is defined by:
Where (kf) is the Fracture Proppant Permeability and (w) is the mean Fracture
Width.
Storativity Ratio (): The definition of this parameter depends on what Flow
Model is being used:
Model Definition
Dual-Porosity = (Ct)f [(Ct)f +(Ct)m]
Dual- = (hCt)1 [(hCt)1 +
Permeability (hCt)2]
Radial = (Ct)outer (Ct)inner
Composite
Interporosity Flow Coefficient (): Coefficient describing flow between:
The Matrix and the Fracture System in a Dual-Porosity Reservoir:
Where () is a Geometrical Coefficient for the Matrix Block Type, (km) is the
Matrix Permeability and (kf) is the Fracture System Permeability.
Layer 1 and Layer 2 across a semi-permeable interface in a Dual-
Permeability Reservoir:
Where the subscript "1" refers to the Producing Layer, and "2" to the second
(i.e. Non-Perforated) Layer. The term (Teff) represents the Effective Vertical
Conductivity given by:
146
PanSystem
Which includes the Conductivity Tv = kv/hv of a thin, semi-permeable Layer

(i.e. if present), at the interface, and Conductivity T2 = 3kz2/h2 of "2".
Flow Capacity Ratio (): The ratio of Permeability-Thickness in a Dual-
Permeability system:
Where the subscript "1" refers to the Producing Layer (i.e. perforated), and "2" to
the second (i.e. non-perforated) Layer.
Discontinuity Radial Distance (Lrad): The Distance from the wellbore to the
interface between the inner and outer Regions of a Radial Composite Reservoir.
Mobility Ratio (M): Ratio of the outer Region Mobility to the inner Region
Mobility in a Radial Composite Reservoir:
Perforation Height (hp): The Length (TVD) of the Open Interval (i.e. the
sandface interval that is actually producing):
(htop + hp h)
Perforation Top Dist (htop): The Distance (TVD) from the top of the Open
Interval to the top of the Layer in the Partial Penetration Model. The Distance
(TVD) from the top of the Open Interval to the base of the Gas-Cap, or from the
bottom of the Open Interval to the top of the Aquifer, in the Gas-Cap/Aquifer
Model:
(htop + hp h)
Fracture Height (hf): The Height of the Fracture in a Limited Height, Vertically
Fractured Well:
(hf <h)
Fracture Offset (Zwdf): A decimal fraction giving the position of the mid-point of
the Fractured Interval relative to the top and bottom of the Layer. A value of 0.5
means the Fracture is in the middle.
The term hf cannot be greater than 2h.Zwdf

Horizontal Well Flow Models:
The parameters required for each Horizontal Well Flow Model are described below:
1. Free Model: No Flow Model is stipulated at this stage. This may be because users
have not yet examined the data and identified a Model. As a consequence, no Results
will be calculated from the diagnostic plots other than a tentative Permeability (k) and
Skin (S) for assumed Radial Flow and no parameters can be entered for Advanced
Simulation and Test Design. Refer below for a definition of Flow Model Parameters.
2. Two No-Flow Boundaries - Homogeneous: This Flow Model (References 72 and
99) consists of an Infinite-Acting Homogeneous Layer with impermeable upper and
lower Boundaries. Associated parameters include:
Radial Permeability (k), Vertical Permeability (kz), "true" or "mechanical" Skin
Factor (S), "true" Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (gas), Well Offset from
upper or lower Boundary (ZWD) and (Effective) Well Length (Lw). Refer below for a
definition of Flow Model Parameters.
147
3. Two No-Flow Boundaries - Dual-Porosity: This Flow Model (References 27, 72

and 99) uses a Dual-Porosity system with impermeable upper and lower Boundaries. The
Inter-Porosity Flow is Pseudo-Steady-State. Associated parameters include:
Factor (S), "true" Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (gas), Well Offset from
upper or lower Boundary (ZWD), (Effective) Well Length (Lw), Storativity Ratio ()
and Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient (). Refer below for a definition of Flow Model
Parameters.
4. No-Flow / Constant Pressure Boundary - Homogeneous: This Flow Model
(References 72 and 99) uses a Homogeneous Layer, with one impermeable Boundary
and one Constant Pressure Boundary (upper or lower). Associated parameters include:
Factor (S), "true" Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (gas), Well Offset from the
No-Flow Boundary (ZWD) and (Effective) Well Length (Lw). Refer below for a
definition of Flow Model Parameters.
5. No-Flow / Constant Pressure Boundary - Dual-Porosity: This Flow Model
(References 27, 72 and 99) uses a Dual-Porosity system with one impermeable Boundary
and one Constant Pressure Boundary. The Inter-Porosity Flow is Pseudo-Steady-State.
Associated parameters include:
Factor (S), "true" Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) (gas), Well Offset from No-
Flow Boundary (ZWD), (Effective) Well Length (Lw), Storativity Ratio (), and Inter-
Porosity Flow Coefficient (). Refer below for a definition of Flow Model Parameters.
Horizontal Well Flow Model Parameters:
Many of the Well Flow Model Parameters defined above for Vertical Wells are also
applicable here (e.g. and ). Those specific to Horizontal Well applications are defined
below:
Radial Permeability (k): The (Effective) Horizontal Permeability of the Reservoir
Rock to the mobile phase at current saturation.
Vertical Permeability (kz): Permeability to the mobile phase in the vertical
direction.
Skin (S): The "true" or "mechanical" Darcy Skin Factor (i.e. the Non-Turbulent
Skin Factor at the wellbore, attributed to damage, improvement and completion).
Do not confuse this with the Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr), which is an apparent Skin
Factor computed when Pseudo-Radial Flow develops in some Flow Models. For
example, a long Horizontal Well with a "true", "mechanical" or "damage" Skin (S)
of +5.0 may have a Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr) of 6.0. The (Spr) term includes the
beneficial effects of the long drain-hole.
The Skin Factor (S) requested for input to Quick Match and Advanced Simulation is
always the "true", "mechanical" or "damage" Skin and not the Pseudo-Radial Skin
(Spr). The (Spr) term will appear as a computed result on some diagnostic plots.
The (Spr) term is also required in the Deliverability IPR section because
PanSystem uses the (Pseudo-)Radial Inflow equation to compute the Productivity
Indices.
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): The "true" Turbulent Skin Coefficient at
the wellbore (i.e. for Gas and Condensate Wells). The Turbulent Skin is D x Flow
148
PanSystem
Rate. The overlying note for Skin (S) relating to Pseudo-Radial Flow also applies to
(D).
Well Offset (ZWD): The average Dimensionless Vertical Distance (zw/h) of the Well
Axis from the upper or lower Boundary (i.e. No-Flow/No-Flow Models), or from the
No-Flow Boundary (i.e. No-Flow/Constant Pressure Models).
0 < ZWD < 1.0
Well Length (Lw): The (Effective) Well Length (i.e. the Length actually open to
flow).
Lw Design Length
Customer-Defined Flow Models:
It is possible for users to define and code their own Reservoir Flow Models and to
implement them in PanSystem via the Dynamic Link Library (DLL) facility.
Any Customer-Defined Flow Models will be listed with the other supplied Models in the
Flow Models list and can be selected for use in Analysis (i.e. Line-Fitting and Flow
Regimes, but not Type-Curve Matching) and Simulation (i.e. Quick Match, Auto Match,
Advanced Simulation and PanFlow).
Several Customer-Defined Flow Models (described below) are supplied with the current
release of PanSystem (i.e. those marked with a *).
For more information about the correct format to link Customer-Defined Flow Models into
PanSystem, please contact a local EPS representative or the Edinburgh UK office.
External Models Supplied with PanSystem:
1. Slanted Well Model:
This is for a Partially-Penetrating Inclined Well in an Anisotropic Radial
Homogeneous Reservoir. The upper and lower Boundaries may be both No-Flow,
both Constant Pressure or a No-Flow/Constant Pressure combination.
In addition to Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), Radial Permeability (k), "true" or
"mechanical" Skin Factor (S) and Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D), this
Customer-Defined Flow Model uses the following parameters:
ANG: This is the Deviation Angle from the vertical, averaged across the interval or
the Deviation Angle relative to the dip-normal direction if the layer is dipping. In
the sub-dialog generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the
Slanted Well Angle.
ZWDT: This is represented by the Distance From the Top of Pay to Top of Perfs
Layer Thickness.
Measured Length or TVD are used for both dimensions. In the sub-dialog
generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Pay Top to
Perforation Top.
ZWDB: This is represented by the Distance From the Top of Pay to Bottom of Perfs
Layer Thickness.
Measured Length or TVD are used for both dimensions. In the sub-dialog
generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Pay Top to
Perforation Bottom.
RKZR: This is represented by Vertical Permeability Horizontal Permeability.
In the sub-dialog generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as
the Permeability Ratio.
IBDY: Upper / Lower Boundary Types:
149
1: upper and lower = No-Flow

2: upper = No-Flow and lower = Constant-Pressure
3: upper and lower = Constant Pressure
the Boundary Condition.
Reference: Internal customer-supplied model.
2. Multiple Radial Composite Systems:

Two-Zone, Three-Zone and Four-Zone Radial Composite Models are available. The
Well is vertical and fully-completed.
Boundaries are not currently allowed with these Models.

In addition to Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), Inner Region (Zone 1) Radial
Permeability (k), "true" or "mechanical" Skin Factor (S) and Rate-Dependent Skin
Coefficient (D), these Customer-Defined Flow Models use the following parameters:
Second Region (zone 2):
K2: The Radial Permeability of Zone 2. In the sub-dialog generated by the Model
Parameters button this is referred to as the Perm of Zone 2.
RCP2: The Ratio of Zone 2 Storativity to Zone 1 Storativity given by:
(Ct)zone 2 (Ct)zone 1.
In the sub-dialog generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as:
(POR*CT)2 (POR*CT)1.
RI2: The Inner Radius of Zone 2.
Third Region (zone 3):
Fourth Region (zone 4):
Reference: Internal customer-supplied model.
150
PanSystem
3. Partially-Sealing Fault Model:

This is a fully-completed Vertical Well in a Homogeneous Reservoir which is cut by a
vertical, Partially-Sealing Fault of infinite extent. The Model is Infinite-Acting in
both Regions. The Transmissibility across the Fault is described by a "Fault
Conductivity", which is defined below. The Layer has the same Rock and Fluid
Properties on either side of the Fault, but can have a different Thickness (h2) on
the far side.
Based on reference 107.
No additional Boundaries are allowed with this Model.
Partially-Sealing Fault Model - Plan View
Partially-Sealing Fault - Side View

This Customer-Defined Flow Model uses the following parameters:
h2: The Layer Thickness on the far side of the Fault. In the sub-dialog generated
by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Secondary Thickness.
The Layer/Formation Thickness (h) specified within the Layer Parameters dialog is
the Layer Thickness on the Well side of the Fault.
L1: The Distance from the Well to the Fault. In the sub-dialog generated by the
Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Distance to Fault.
Fc: The Conductivity of a Partially-Sealing Fault represented by:
151
Fc = Permeability of Fault Zone Thickness of Fault Zone.

the Fault Conductivity.
4. Pinch-Out Model:
This is a fully-completed Vertical Well in a Homogeneous Reservoir with a wedge-
shaped cross-section (i.e. Pinch-Out). The Reservoir has parallel No-Flow
Boundaries on two sides, and is closed by the Pinch-Out on the third side.
No additional Boundaries can be added to this Model.
From reference 108.

This Customer-Defined Flow Models uses the following parameters:
Lp: The Distance from the Well to the Pinch-Out. In the sub-dialog generated by
the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Distance to Pinch-Out.
L1: The Distance to parallel Boundary 1 (refer below to Plan View).
L3: The Distance to parallel Boundary 3 (refer below to Plan View).
Pinch-Out Model - Plan View
Pinch-Out Model - Side View
The Layer/Formation Thickness (h) specified within the Layer Parameters dialog is
the Layer Thickness at the Well (refer above to Side View).
152
PanSystem
5. Three-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir With Internal Cross-Flow:

This is a fully-completed Vertical Well in a Reservoir consisting of three
Homogeneous Layers. These Layers can have different Rock and Fluid Properties
and vertical communication is allowed between the Layers lying within the
Reservoir. This is the three-layer equivalent of the Dual-Permeability Model, except
that in this case, all Layers are open to flow.
From reference 109.
Boundaries are not allowed with this Model.
Three-Layer Reservoir - Side View
All Rock and Fluid Properties described below for the Layer Parameters dialog refer
to Layer 1; these are suffixed with a 1 in the diagram illustrated above.
The Properties of each Layer are defined as a fraction of the Total System
Properties via the ratio terms Kappa (), Omega () and Lambda (). The
properties for Permeability (k) and Skin (S) of Layer 1 are specified in the usual
way via the Layer Parameters dialog. These, combined with the ratios, are
sufficient to define the Properties of the other two Layers. Only their Skin Factors
are specified explicitly.
k: The Permeability of Layer 1.
S, S2, S3: The Skin Factors of Layers 1, 2 and 3 respectively. A Layer can be
closed-off from the wellbore by specifying a large Skin Factor.
Kap1 (Layer 1 Kappa), Kap2 (Layer 2 Kappa): The Permeability-Thickness of each
Layer as a fraction of the total:
153
Kap3 is not available as an input since it is dependent on Kap1 and Kap2. The
terms (k1) and (h1) correspond to the Permeability and Thickness respectively,
specified within the Layer Parameters dialog for Layer 1. The (kh)total is given by
(k1h1 + k2h2 + k3h3).
w1 (Layer 1 Omega), w2 (Layer 2 Omega): The Storativity of each Layer as a
fraction of the Total Storativity:
w3 is not available as an input since it is dependent on w1 and w2. The terms

(1), (Ct1) and (h1) from the diagram above are the Properties specified within the
Layer Parameters dialog for Layer 1.
Lam12 (Layer 1-2 Lambda), Lam23 (Layer 2-3 Lambda): The Inter-Layer Flow
Coefficient (Lambda) for Internal Cross-Flow between Layers 1-2 and between
Layers 2-3 respectively:
Where the Cross-Flow Coefficients ), are defined by:
The terms (kv1), (kv2) and (kv3) represent the Vertical Permeability in each Layer.
To prevent Internal Cross-Flow between Layers, enter a very small value for
Lambda.
D: The Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient. The effect of Turbulence in individual
Layers has not been incorporated into this Model. The same value of (D) is
applied to all Layers.
6. Two-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir With Internal Cross-Flow:

This is a fully-completed Vertical Well in a Reservoir consisting of two Homogeneous
Layers. These Layers can have different Rock and Fluid Properties and vertical
communication is allowed between the Layers lying within the Reservoir. This is
equivalent to the Dual-Permeability Model, except that in this case, both Layers are
open to flow.
From reference 109.
Boundaries are not allowed with this Model.
154
PanSystem
Two-Layer Reservoir - Side View
All Rock and Fluid Properties described below for the Layer Parameters dialog refer
to Layer 1; these are suffixed with a 1 in the diagram illustrated above.
The Properties of each Layer are defined as a fraction of the Total System
Properties via the ratio terms Kappa (), Omega () and Lambda (). The
properties for Permeability (k) and Skin (S) of Layer 1 are specified in the usual
way via the Layer Parameters dialog. These, combined with the ratios, are
sufficient to define the Properties of the other two Layers. Only their Skin Factors
are specified explicitly.
k: The Permeability of Layer 1.
S, S2: The Skin Factors of Layers 1 and 2 respectively. A Layer can be closed-off
from the wellbore by specifying a large Skin Factor.
Kap1 (Layer 1 Kappa): The Permeability-Thickness of each Layer as a fraction of
the total:
Kap2 is not available as an input since it is dependent on Kap1. The terms (k1)
and (h1) correspond to the Permeability and Thickness respectively, specified
within the Layer Parameters dialog for Layer 1. The (kh)total is given by
(k1h1+k2h2).
w1 (Layer 1 Omega): The Storativity of each Layer as a fraction of the Total
Storativity:
w2 is not available as an input since it is dependent on w1. The terms (1), (Ct1)
and (h1) from the diagram above are the Properties specified within the Layer
Parameters dialog for Layer 1.
Lam12 (Layer 1-2 Lambda): The Inter-Layer Flow Coefficient (Lambda) for
Internal Cross-Flow between Layers 1-2:
155
Where the Cross-Flow Coefficients ), are defined by:
The terms (kv1) and (kv2) represent the Vertical Permeability in each Layer.
To prevent Internal Cross-Flow between Layers, enter a very small value for
Lambda.
D: The Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient. The effect of Turbulence in individual
Layers has not been incorporated into this Model. The same value of (D) is
applied to all Layers.
7. General Intersecting Fault Model:

This is a fully-completed Vertical Well in a Homogeneous Reservoir which is cut by
two Vertical Faults which Intersect at an Angle (F ang). The Well is situated at
Distance (Lint) from the Intersection, and subtends a Well Location Angle (W ang)
with one of the Faults, expressed as a fraction of the Angle (F ang).
From reference 110.
No other Boundaries can be added to this Model.
General Intersecting Fault Model - Plan View
156
PanSystem

Lint: The Distance from the Well to the Intersection of the Faults. In the sub-dialog
generated by the Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Distance to
Intersection.
F ang: The Angle between the Faults (degrees). In the sub-dialog generated by the
Model Parameters button this is referred to as the Angle Between Faults.
W ang: The Well Location Angle, expressed as a fraction of F ang. In the diagram
illustrated above, this is the Fractional Angle (0 < W ang 1.0) subtended by Fault
BDY1 with the line (formed by Lint) between the Well and the Fault Intersection.
IBDY1, IBDY2: The Boundary Type Flags for the two Faults BDY1 and BDY2:
1 = No-Flow
0 = Constant Pressure
There are some restrictions on the angles which can be modeled:
Both Boundaries = No-Flow:
Any Intersection Angle (F ang). Any Well Location Angle (W ang).
One Boundary = No-Flow, other Boundary = Constant Pressure:

F ang =360 4N, with N = any integer. Any Well Location Angle (W ang).
Both Boundaries = Constant Pressure:

F ang =360 2N, with N = any integer. Any Well Location Angle (W ang).
8. Composite Linear Reservoir Model:

Both Cells have the same Thickness (h) and Permeability (k). The second Cell
feeds into the main Cell across a Partially-Sealing Fault. It models Transient Flow
through the second Cell before the onset of Total Closed System Boundary Effects.
This Model assumes Linear Flow across the Partially-Sealing Fault. The Fault
Position is defined by the dimension L2 (refer to the underlying diagram), so the
dimensions for the main Cell should be specified such that L2 > 2(L1 + L3) or of
that order (i.e. the second Cell should be at the END of the channel rather than at
the SIDE).
Note that the alternative Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model in

PanSystem assumes Semi-Steady-State Flow in the second Cell, with no Transient
Phase.
157
Composite Linear Reservoir Model - Plan View

Transmissibility across the Leaky Fault is described by a "Fault Conductivity":
Fc = (kf Lf)
where:
Lf is the Thickness of the Fault Zone and kf is its Permeability.
From reference 111.

9. Wireline formation test with packers and probe in a single homogeneous
layer:
The pressure response at the active packer region and at an observation probe in a
homogeneous layer can be analyzed and simulated individually, or in dual-pressure
'combo mode if both are available.
158
PanSystem
For dual-pressure mode, the special WFT with Observation Probe Test option should
be enabled in the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, and WFT Packer Test
should be selected as the WFT Test type.
If you are not working in dual-pressure mode, simply select the appropriate model
(see below) from the Flow Model list.
Schematic of the WFT Packer Test configuration with optional observation probe
Geometrical parameters for the WFT Packer Test configuration

Active zone (packers)
The active zone model is the standard PanSystem-supplied model for Partial
Penetration (reference 100) in the Flow Models list.
Line calculations for the active zone model
159
The radial (horizontal) permeability, k, must be determined first from radial flow
line (log-log or semi-log plot); the spherical flow plot can then be used to obtain kz.
Quick Match input parameters for the active zone
k: horizontal (radial) permeability
kz: vertical permeability
hp: height of active zone (packer separation)
htop: distance from top of the open interval to top of layer (or bottom of interval to
bottom of layer)
S: (true) skin factor
The quantities hp and htop may be specified as fixed in the Auto Match process, or
they may be allowed to be variables provided the appropriate upper and lower
limits are imposed.
Observation Probe
The observation probe model is an external (customer) model which appears as
Packer-Obs in the Flow Models list.
From reference 112.

Line calculations for the observation probe model
*Spherical flow will only be observed when the probe is very close to the packer
(zVp << h).
Quick Match parameters for the observation probe (see diagram)
hp: height of active zone (packer separation)
htop: distance from top of the open interval top of layer (or bottom of interval to
bottom of layer)
160
PanSystem
zVp: distance from top of the open interval to the observation probe (or bottom of
interval to observation probe if it is below the packers).
zVp should be set as a fixed value if Auto Match is used.

Combo
No line-fitting results are available in Combo mode.
Quick Match for the dual pressure match will display both input screens side-by-
side.
The combined set of parameters will be available for regression in Auto Match. For
Auto Match:
zVp should be set as a fixed value if Auto Match is used. hp and htop may be
fixed, or allowed as variables provided the appropriate upper and lower limits are
imposed.
10. Wireline formation test with two probes in a single homogeneous layer:
The pressure response at the active packer region and at an observation probe in a
homogeneous layer can be analyzed and simulated individually, or in dual-pressure
'combo mode if both are available.
Schematic of the WFT Probe Test configuration with optional observation probe
161
Geometrical parameters for the WFT Probe Test configuration
Active probe
The active probe model is an external (customer) model which appears as Probe-
Active in the Flow Models list.
From reference 113.

Line calculations for the active probe model
Ssd is a spherical skin factor associated with formation damage and possible probe
blockage.
The radial (horizontal) permeability, k, must be determined first from the radial
flow line (log-log or semi-log plot); the spherical flow plot can then be used to
obtain kz.
Hemispherical flow is due to the initial wellbore blocking effect and will only be
observed at very early time. The spherical flow regime will develop rapidly.
162
PanSystem
In the case of the active probe in drawdown, the steady-state calculation on the
Cartesian plot requires kz to have been already determined. The output is k.
Firstly, the steady-state regime is defined on the log-log diagnostic plot using the
last few data points. A line is fitted to this regime on the Cartesian graph and the
user manually adjusts the slope to zero with the line passing through the last
flowing point.
Quick Match input parameters for the active probe (see diagram)
rp : probe aperture radius
zs: distance from active probe to nearest of top or bottom of layer
Ssd: spherical damage skin factor
The quantities rp and zs should be specified as fixed if Auto Match is used.
Note that probe radius is specified in ft or m !.

Observation Probe
Probe-Obs in the Flow Models list.
From reference 113.

*Spherical flow will only be observed when the probes are very close together: (z -
zs) << h.
The radial (horizontal) permeability, k, must be determined first from radial flow
line (log-log or semi-log plot), or from the active probe response. The spherical
flow plot can then be used to obtain kz if spherical flow is observed.
Quick Match parameters for the observation probe
zs: distance from active probe to nearest of top or bottom of layer
z: distance from observation probe to the reference used for zs
z and zs should be set as fixed values if Auto Match is used.

Combo
163
side.
The combined set of parameters will be available for regression in Auto Match.
z, zs and rp should be set as fixed values if Auto Match is used.
11. Wireline formation test with packers and probes in a Dual Permeability
system:
This dual-permeability model consists of two permeable layers (active and
observation) separated by a thin, low permeability barrier. The active layer is
flowing and is fully open and, in this case, the observation layer is not flowing.
In the context of a wireline formation tester, this would represent a packer-probe
test with the observation probe on the other side of the barrier. Since no flow
convergence effects are modeled, it is assumed that the packer section covers the
full thickness of the active layer. The observation layer is assumed to have good
vertical permeability, such that probe position within the layer thickness is
unimportant.
The pressure responses in the active layer and in the observation layer can be
analysed and simulated individually, or in dual-pressure 'combo mode if both
measurements are available (as in a vertical interference test).
This model could also be used to analyze a conventional vertical interference test
where the two layers are isolated by a packer, with the lower layer open to the
tubing and the upper layer open to the annulus, or to a second tubing.
164
PanSystem
Schematic of the Dual-permeability configuration with optional observation probe

Active zone (packers)
The active zone model is the standard PanSystem-supplied model for Dual-
permeability (reference 46).
Line calculations for the active zone model
The properties of the semi-permeable barrier and the observation layer are not
obtained explicitly, but are implicit in the ratios (kappa), (omega) and
(lambda). These parameters are defined elsewhere in the notes on the dual-
permeability model.
Quick Match input parameters for the active zone
S: (true) skin factor
: permeability-thickness ratio (active layer / total system)
165
: storativity ratio (active layer / total system)

: inter-layer flow coefficient
Observation Probe
Dual-Permeability Obs in the Flow Models list.
From reference 46.

No line calculations are available for the observation pressure. The radial flow
regime here corresponds to the total system kh.
The parameter set for the observation layer is identical to the active layer, except
that the skin factor is absent:
: permeability-thickness ratio (active layer / total system)
: storativity ratio (active layer / total system)
: inter-layer flow coefficient
Combo
side.
The combined set of parameters will be available for regression in Auto Match.
166
PanSystem
Dual-Porosity Block Type Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Layer Parameters dialog by selecting the Dual-
Porosity Block Type button from the Flow Model section. This option is used to select the
matrix block geometry for Dual-Porosity model options (refer to Model Parameters dialog
for more details on these model options).
The Dual-Porosity Block Type button is only available in the Layer Parameters
dialog when a Dual Porosity model option is selected.
For the Dual-Porosity model options, the choice made in this sub-dialog affects the
relationship between the interporosity flow coefficient () and the matrix
permeability/block height ratio (km/hb2), which is derived from the semi-log diagnostic
plot.
For these models:
Where:
(km) = Matrix Permeability
(hb) = Block (i.e. full) Height
() is a Geometrical Coefficient for the Matrix Block Type
The terms (hb2) and (AFD2) have the following values:
Block Model hb2 AFD2
Slabs 12 4
Cubes/Spheres 60 36
Two-Layers (Vertical Cross-Flow) 12 1
Rectangular Prisms/Cylinders 32 16
Also refer to Oil Analysis, Radial Flow Semi-Log Plot.
167
Boundary Model Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog by selecting the
Layer Boundaries button from the Layer Control section; it enables users to perform the
following tasks for each Layer in a Reservoir:
Define the Boundary Model of each Layer.
Where necessary, calculate Image Wells (maximum of 16,000 per Layer), to
represent the Boundaries.
Where necessary, edit the Image Wells table.
The Advanced Simulation facility requires Image Wells to model Boundaries for all
Reservoir Models except the following, which use Greens Functions:
Radial Homogeneous
Vertical Fracture Infinite Conductivity
Vertical Fracture Limited Height
Horizontal Well all models
The Simulate Quick Match option does not require the generation of Image Wells for any
model.
Users may decide on a Boundary Geometry to be used in Analysis or Simulate Quick
Match in this dialog or later during the Analysis stage (when the data has been examined)
via the Analysis Model option.
For Advanced Simulation only, users must:
Select the geometry required and specify the distances from the Principal Well to
each Boundary.
For a Horizontal Well, all distances are measured from the mid-point of the open
interval. For the Vertical Fracture Models, the Fracture runs east-west and all
Boundary distances are measured from the Well.
Specify whether the Boundary condition is "No-Flow" or "Constant-Pressure" (this
applies to all models except Infinitely-Acting).
The Image Wells can be calculated, or typed in. The Image Well Co-ordinates are written
to the (*.PAN) system file using the File/Save or File/Save As commands.
The dialog is comprised of two main sections, described as follows:
Boundary Model section: The available models are:
Infinitely-Acting: This model has no Boundaries.
The buttons for Boundary Parameters, Edit Image Wells and Calculate
Image Wells are disabled with this option.
Single Fault: A single, vertical, linear Boundary of infinite extent. The
distance L1 is the perpendicular distance to the fault. The Image Well Co-
ordinates assume the fault is "south" of the well.
168
PanSystem
Single Fault Models (plan view) with Vertical Well (left) and Horizontal Well
(right)
For Horizontal Wells, the Well Trajectory runs east-west (i.e. X-direction),
and all Boundary Distances are measured from the mid-point of the Well
(i.e. the open interval).
Parallel Faults: Two parallel, vertical, linear Boundaries of infinite extent
(e.g. a channel sand). The distances L1 and L3 are measured from the well
to each fault on the basis of being perpendicular to the respective fault. The
faults are modeled as being to the south (L1) and north (L3) of the well.
Parallel Fault Models (plan view) with Vertical Well (left) and Horizontal Well
(right)
Intersecting Faults (30), (45), (60), (90), (120): Two vertical
boundaries intersecting at an angle denoted by the value in brackets. The
distances L1 and L2 are measured from the well to the fault on the basis of
being perpendicular to each fault.
30 Intersecting Fault Models (plan view) with Vertical Well (left) and
Horizontal Well (right)
169
170
PanSystem
U-Shaped Faults: Parallel vertical Boundaries closed at one end by a

perpendicular Boundary (e.g. a channel closed at one end). The distances
L1(south), L2 (east) and L3 (north), are measured from the well to each
fault on the basis of being perpendicular to each fault.
U-Shaped Fault Models (plan view) with Vertical Well (left) and Horizontal
Well (right)
Closed System: Four vertical linear Boundaries forming a closed rectangle.
The distances L1, L2, L3 and L4 are measured from the well to each
Boundary on the basis of being perpendicular to each Boundary.
Closed System Models (plan view) with Vertical Well (left) and Horizontal Well
(right)
2-Cell Compartmentalized: The selected Reservoir Flow Model is in a closed
system connected via a partially communicating ("leaky") Boundary to a
second cell which provides semi-steady-state pressure support. The
distances L1, L2, L3 and L4 are measured from the well to each Boundary in
the first cell on the basis of being perpendicular to each Boundary.
The leaky Boundary (i.e. L4), is the farthest one from the well.
The volume of each cell is denoted by V1 and V2 respectively, while (Teff)
represents the effective transmissibility (Teff), across the Boundary.
171
2-Cell Compartment Models (plan view) with Vertical Well (left) and
Hexagonal: This model may be used to replicate circular Boundary Models
by representing the circular geometry by that of a hexagon. The well is
assumed to be at the centre of the hexagon. The distance L1 is measured
from the well to one of the vertices on the Boundary. The Drainage Area
Size (A), is calculated by PanSystem.
Hexagonal Models (plan view) with Vertical Well (left) and Horizontal Well
(right)
172
PanSystem
Boundary Parameters button: This button opens an appropriate Boundary

Parameters sub-dialog, based upon the selection made above. Users enter the
appropriate Boundary Parameters described above, depending on the model
selected.
Image Wells section: This section contains two buttons that perform the
following functions:
Edit Image Wells button: Select to generate the Edit Image Well dialog
where users can view or enter Image Well Co-ordinates.
Calculate Image Wells button: Select to generate the Estimated Test
Duration dialog. This represents the total duration of the test (including
the history) and is needed to ensure that enough Image Wells are
generated.
Image Wells are only required for specific Advanced Simulation calculations as
outlined at the start of this Help topic. The Quick Match option uses a library of
response tables and does not require Image Wells.
Before PanSystem can calculate the Image Wells a Boundary Model needs to be
selected and the required Image Well information must be entered as described
above. PanSystem can then calculate the Image Well Co-ordinates relative to the
"Principal" Well, which, by definition, is at co-ordinate position (0,0).
If additional "Active" Wells are being modeled, a set of Image Wells will be
generated for each Well. These can also be viewed and/or edited.
Remember, if a Well is added after Image Wells have been generated, the Image
Wells must be calculated again, to generate the set required for the new Well.
For all models, the computation of Boundary Effects in Advanced Simulation is

strictly only valid if the Boundaries are far enough from the Well for Pseudo-Radial
Flow to have developed by the time the first Boundary is encountered.
173
Boundary Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is primarily accessed from the Boundary Model dialog by selecting the
Boundary Parameters button from the Boundary Model section, although it can also be
accessed from the following dialogs in other areas of PanSystem (e.g. Analysis and
Simulate):
The Boundary Parameters button in the Boundary Model area of the Select Analysis
Model dialog (i.e. Model option from Analysis menu).
The Boundary Parameters button in the Boundary Type dialog, which is generated
by selecting either the Quick Match or Auto Match options from the PanSystem
Simulate menu, when a Boundary Model other than Infinitely-Acting has been
selected (i.e. either in the Dataprep Boundary Parameters sub-dialog or the
Analysis Select Analysis Model dialog).
The fields in this sub-dialog will vary depending on the model selected within the
Boundary Model dialog (i.e. seven of the eight available models are applicable to this sub-
dialog). Annotated graphical representations of each model are presented in the relevant
sub-dialog.
This sub-dialog is not available for an Infinitely-Acting Boundary Model selection.

The Advanced Simulation facility requires Image Wells to model Boundaries for all
Reservoir Models except the following, which use Greens Functions:
Radial Homogeneous
Vertical Fracture Infinite Conductivity
Vertical Fracture Limited Height
Horizontal Well all models
For all the other Reservoir Models in Advanced Simulation, Boundary Effects are modeled
using Image Wells with Radial Homogeneous (Ei-function) responses. Advanced
Simulation requires a table of Image Wells to be generated for the selected Boundary
Model; Quick Match uses a library of look-up tables supplied with PanSystem.
With the Image Well approach, the simulated response will be rigorously valid provided
that the nearest Boundary is far enough away from the Well for Pseudo-Radial behaviour
to have developed before any Boundary Effect is observed. As a rule-of-thumb:
For a Hydraulically Fractured Well, the nearest Boundary should be a distance of at
least (2Xf) (i.e. two Fracture Half-Lengths) away from the Well.
For a Horizontal Well, the nearest Boundary should be a distance of at least (Lw)
(i.e. Effective Well Length) away from the mid-point of the Well.
For Vertical Wells with Reservoir Models like Dual-Porosity, Radial Homogeneous,
etc., the nearest Boundary should be far enough away from the Well for (total
system) Pseudo-Radial behaviour to have developed before any Boundary Effect is
observed.
If a Boundary is positioned closer than these (approximate) limits, the response will start
to deviate from strict validity.
174
PanSystem
Since Pseudo-Radial Flow is assumed, the Boundary Orientation relative to a

Horizontal Well or Hydraulic Fracture Trajectory is not considered.
Some models offer a choice of Boundary Types from either:
No-Flow (i.e. impermeable Boundary).
Constant Pressure (i.e. uniform Flow Rate on either side of the Boundary).
After selecting the appropriate Boundary Type, enter the Boundary distances from the
Well (L). Where applicable, the Calculate button is then used to calculate:
The Volume (V1), of the main cell using (L), and also (h) and () from the Layer
Parameters dialog.
The Drainage Area Size (A), for Closed System, 2-Cell Compartmentalized and
Hexagonal Boundary options.
The Dietz Shape Factor (CA), for Closed System and 2-Cell Compartmentalized
options.
For Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundaries, two additional parameters have to be
defined:
The volume (V2), of the supporting cell, which determines how much support will
be provided.
The effective transmissibility (Teff), across the Boundary, which determines how
rapidly the support is provided.
The models are described and illustrated in the Boundary Model dialog and each possible
sub-dialog option is described below:
Single Fault: Single length required, select one Boundary Type.
Parallel Fault: Two lengths required to each Boundary, select one Boundary Type
for each.
Intersecting Faults (30): Two lengths required to each Boundary, select one
Boundary Type for each.
Intersecting Faults (120): Single length required, select one Boundary Type.
U-Shaped Faults: Three lengths required to each Boundary, select one Boundary
Type for each.
Closed System: Four lengths required to each Boundary, select one Boundary Type
for each and Calculate (A) and (CA).
2-Cell Compartmentalized: Four lengths required to each Boundary, select one
Boundary Type for each and Calculate (V1), (A) and (CA). The additional terms
(V2) and (Teff) must be specified.
Hexagonal Boundary: Enter the single length (L), equivalent to the radius of a
circle (R). The equivalence between radius (R) and length (L) is based on area.
Only the No-Flow Boundary option is available at present. Calculate (A).
175
Number of Image Wells Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Boundary Model dialog by selecting the Edit Image
Wells button from the Image Well section.
This sub-dialog is not available for an Infinitely Acting boundary model selection.
If there is no existing Image Well Table, this sub-dialog box is generated, prompting
users to enter the number of wells required:
Number of Image Wells: Enter the number of image wells to be included (i.e. up to
a maximum of 16,000 per layer).
On selecting the OK button the Edit Image Wells sub-dialog is generated with the
requisite number of rows and an empty table field for data entry.
If an Image Well Table exists for the current project this sub-dialog will not appear and
users are taken directly to the Edit Image Wells sub-dialog.
176
PanSystem
Edit Image Wells Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Boundary Model dialog by selecting the Edit Image
Wells button from the Image Well section, providing that an Image Well Table has already
been generated.
If there is no existing Image Well Table, or users have just finished describing the
boundary model and have not selected Calculate Image Wells, then the Number of Image
Wells dialog will be displayed first, prompting users to enter the number of wells required.
After entering the number of wells and selecting the OK button, this sub-dialog is
generated with the requisite number of rows and an empty table field for data entry.
The Image Well Table of Well Co-ordinates can be viewed and edited in this sub-dialog.
These co-ordinates can either be entered manually or calculated by PanSystem
internally, using the Calculate Image Wells button within the Boundary Model dialog.
For the Calculate Image Wells option and in the case of existing Image Well Tables, a
table appears with the calculated Image Well Co-ordinates, which can be viewed and/or
edited.
If the Calculate Image Wells option has not been selected or users have entered this sub-
dialog via the Number of Image Wells sub-dialog, an empty table will appear, ready to be
populated with Image Well Co-ordinates.
The number of columns displayed will depend on the number of Image Wells selected in
the above options, but within the table field, only 16 rows can be viewed at a time. Users
can scroll through the file using the scroll bar on the right-hand side of the table field to
move cell by cell (i.e. left mouse-click on arrow keys) or page by page (i.e. left mouse-
click on scroll bar either side of slider).
one cell).
Clear.
Excel).
177
tab-separated.
the relevant insertion point and select the Paste button - do not use Ctrl+V
from the keyboard.
178
PanSystem
Estimated Test Duration Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Boundary Model dialog by selecting the Calculate
Image Wells button from the Image Well section.
This dialog is used determine the number of image wells required in relation to the test
duration, when there is no existing Image Well Table information or when users wish to
re-calculate the number of image wells they require.
Image Wells are only required for Advanced Simulation calculations. The Quick Match
option uses a library of tables and does not require image wells.
Before PanSystem can calculate the Image Wells a boundary model needs to be selected
and the required image well information must be entered as described in the Boundary
Model dialog.
This co-ordinates of the Image Wells can then be calculated relative to the "principal"
well, which, by definition, is at co-ordinate position (0,0).
Estimated Test Duration: Enter the approximate total duration of the test (i.e.
covering all the test periods to be simulated). For some geometries, the longer the
test duration the greater the number of Image Wells to be calculated. If the
number of Image Wells is too large, it can be reduced by entering a smaller value
for the test duration, albeit at the risk of introducing simulation errors at late time.
On selecting OK, if there is existing Image Well Table information, a Confirm sub-dialog
will be generated with the message:
Do you wish to discard current image wells?
Select Yes, to calculate new Image Well information or No to retain the existing Image
Well information.
When the calculation option is selected or no Image Well Table information exists, a
Computing Image Well Information sub-dialog is generated, that displays the Number of
Image Wells per Active Well. This number calculated by PanSystem can now be entered
in the Number of Image Wells sub-dialog.
179
Oil Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog by selecting
Oil (Single-Phase or Multi-Phase Perrine) within the Fluid Type section, then selecting the
Fluid Parameters button in the Layer Control section. An Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog
is subsequently generated to view, enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of the currently
selected layer.
The selected fluid type applies to all layers, but the fluid properties themselves can be
different in each layer. An Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog box can be brought up for any
layer by highlighting it in the Layer Control section of the Reservoir Description
(Analytical) dialog. Not all parameters displayed in the sub-dialog actually need to be
specified for welltest analysis purposes. The mandatory parameters appear in red and
fluid properties can be typed in, or calculated from production or laboratory data.
The same Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog box is used for the single-phase and multi-
phase modes. Differences exist only in the minimum datasets required for analysis and
on-screen fluid property calculations for each mode.
For the single-phase option, both of the multi-phase options should be left unchecked in
the Fluid Type section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. For the multi-
phase option, users need to check the Multi-Phase Perrine Method (oil) checkbox in the
Fluid Type section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. The sub-dialog is titled
Multi-phase Oil Fluid Parameters in the latter case.
A different sub-dialog is generated when the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method

is selected from the Fluid Type section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical)
dialog. Users should refer to the Help topic for Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog.
Preparation area (i.e. when Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox is
unchecked), by selecting the PVT Calculator button for an Oil fluid type in the
Material Properties tabbed dialog.
The sub-dialog is comprised of six data entry sections and four function buttons and the
following table identifies the fluid parameters required for each type of analysis, test or
calculation:
Purpose Oil (single-phase) Oil (multi-phase)

Analysis Bo, o, Cf, Ct Bo, o, Bw, w,
Bg, g, Cf, Ct
On-Screen Calculation P(layer), T(layer), P(layer), T(layer),
Oil specific gravity, Gas Oil specific gravity, Gas
specific gravity, specific gravity,
GOR (prod) GOR (prod),
180
PanSystem
Salinity
The mandatory parameters (colored red), can be manually typed into the Analysis
section (i.e. lower main section), or calculated using the Calculate button, once the
parameters associated with the Calculation sections (i.e. upper active sections) have been
entered.
To enable the Calculate button, check the Use Correlations checkbox. Choose the
appropriate correlations for Bo, Pb, Rs; Oil Viscosity and Gas Viscosity from the drop-
down list boxes. The fluid properties are computed at the specified Check Pressure and
Check Temperature (i.e. nominally set equal to the layer conditions).
Note that if the Use Correlations option is enabled, any checked parameters in the
lower Analysis section will be overwritten by the Calculate process. The
parameters can only be manually edited when they are checked, but users should
remember to uncheck any parameters they wish to retain before using the
Calculate button.
Different correlations can be used to calculate the hydrocarbon fluid properties. With the
exception of Vazquez-Beggs, these correlations assume a single-stage flash to standard
conditions. The published Vazquez-Beggs correlation assumed the first stage separator
to be at a "typical" 100 psig and 60 F, and provided for a pressure (and temperature)
correction to gas gravity if different. To simplify the data input, PanSystem assumes 100
psig and 60 F and applies no correction).
If comparing with multi-stage flash experimental data, be sure to total up the GORs from
all stages, and to enter a gas gravity which is the GOR-weighted sum of the gravities
from each stage. The screen is not suited to comparison with differential liberation data.
For Bo, Pb, Rs and Co, the following correlations are available (References 22, 35 and
91to 94):
Glas.
Lasater.
Standing.
Vazquez & Beggs.
For Oil Viscosity o, the following correlations are available (References 22, 35, 86 and
88):
Beggs et al.
Beal et al.
For Gas Viscosity g, the following correlations are available (References 21, 22, 35, 89
and 90):
Lee et al.
Carr et al.
Other properties are computed with fixed correlations as described below:
For Water:
Bw is calculated from Numbere, Brigham and Standing (Reference 13b)
w is calculated from Van Wingen's correlation (Reference 13c)
Cw is calculated from Meehan's correlation (Reference 13a)
181
For Gas:
Tc and Pc are calculated internally from Standing's correlation (Reference 22)
z-factor is calculated from Dranchuk et al (Appendix A of Reference 21)
Cg is calculated from Mattar et al (Appendix A of Reference 21)
The Datum Input... button is used to correct all pressures computed from diagnostic plot
analysis (p*, etc.), to a reference datum depth, by adding or subtracting the appropriate
hydrostatic pressure difference. Selecting this button generates the Correction to Datum
Input (Oil) sub-dialog.
Calculated Properties: These parameters are conventionally computed at the layer
pressure and temperature for welltest analysis:
Bo: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the oil. It is a mandatory parameter for
analysis in Oil (single-phase and multi-phase) modes. Typical values are 1.1 - 2.0
for black oil reservoirs and > 2.0 for volatile oil reservoirs.
Bw: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the water. It is only a mandatory
parameter for analysis in Oil (multi-phase) mode if the water/oil ratio (WOR) > 0,
and in Water (single-phase) mode. Although dissolved salts and gases can affect
the water FVF these effects are often ignored. Typically, the water FVF lies within
the range 0.99 - 1.07.
Bg: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the gas. It is only a mandatory
parameter for analysis in Oil (multi-phase) mode if the Produced gas/oil ratio (GOR)
> Solution (GOR) (i.e. there is free gas in the reservoir). Typical values range
between 0.002 and 0.2, with values of (Bg) increasing with decreasing reservoir
pressure.
o: The viscosity of the oil. It is a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil (single-
phase multi-phase) modes. Oil viscosity measures the oil's resistance to flow and
this is affected by oil composition (e.g. low API = high viscosity, high API = low
viscosity), temperature, dissolved gas and pressure. The oil viscosity values should
fall slowly in relation to declining reservoir pressure until the bubble point pressure
(pb) is reached. Below bubble point pressure, the oil viscosity values should rise
sharply, as gas is liberated from the liquid phase. Typically, oil viscosity will be
around 1cp, for a light API oil gravity between 40 - 50 at reservoir conditions.
w: The viscosity of the water. It is only a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil
(multi-phase) mode if the water/oil ratio (WOR) > 0, and in Water (single-phase)
mode. Water viscosity is dependent on pressure, temperature and salinity. In
general, brine viscosity increases with increasing pressure, increasing salinity and
decreasing temperature. Typically, the water viscosity lies within the range 0.2 -
2.5 cp.
g: The viscosity of the gas. It is only a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil
(multi-phase) mode if the Produced GOR > Solution GOR (i.e. there is free gas in
the reservoir). A typical value of gas viscosity at reservoir conditions is 0.025 cp,
which is approximately 40 times smaller than light oils with an API gravity of 40 -
50, which exhibit viscosities of around 1cp. Gas viscosity values should decrease
as reservoir pressure decreases.
Co: The isothermal compressibility of the oil. Typically, this will be between 10 -
15 x 10-6/psi.
Cw: The isothermal compressibility of the water. Above bubble point pressures
this is defined as the change in water volume per unit water volume per psi change
182
PanSystem
in pressure. A typical value for reservoir brines is around 3.0 x 10-6/psi. However,
dissolved salts and gases can affect water compressibility.
Cg: The isothermal compressibility of the gas. Gas compressibility is almost
hyperbolic in relation to pressure, with low values at high pressure, tending to
increasingly higher values as pressure decreases. Typical values of (Cg) can range
between 200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 5,000 psia) to 500 x 10-6/psi
(reservoir pressure of 2,000 psia), increasing to 1200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure
of 1,000 psia).
Cf: The rock pore-volume compressibility. This is defined as the fractional change
in pore volume (PV) of the rock with unit change in pressure. Typically the pore
compressibility in consolidated and unconsolidated reservoirs is 2.5 - 10.0 x 10-6/psi
respectively.
In high porosity, over-pressured reservoirs, the pore compressibility exhibits a low
value during early production, but subsequently increases as production and
pressure depletion continues. As fluid pressure in the reservoir is reduced during
production, the subsequent pore volume collapse creates a higher pore
compressibility. Compaction in this instance can create significant subsidence at
surface, particularly if the rock matrix is weak (e.g. Ekofisk chalk with porosity
values of 25 - 48% ). The Norwegian Ekofisk field, with reservoir fluids initially
over-pressured in excess of 2,000 psi, suffered an abnormal degree of reservoir
compaction, with typical pore compressibilities increasing from 6 x 10-6/psi up to a
maximum of ~100 x 10-6/psi. Similarly, in shallow unconsolidated reservoirs,
values in excess of 100 x 10-6/psi have been measured (e.g. Bolivar Coast,
Venezuela).
PanSystem calculates rock pore volume compressibility using either the Hall
correlation or a calculation based upon Solid Mechanics. The Hall correlation is an
empirical relationship between porosity and rock compressibility (References 2 and
16).
The Solid Mechanics model requires the input of Youngs Modulus and Poissons
ratio for the reservoir rock. These inputs are utilized in the equation:
Cf = 3(1-2)/(E)
(where is Poissons ratio, is porosity, and E is Youngs modulus)
The following table provides estimates of the range of these properties for various
rock types.
Material Youngs Modulus Poissons Ratio

(GPa)
Sandstone 10-20 0.21-0.38
Shale 5-70 0.2-0.4
Limestone 35-55 0.18-0.25
Source:
The Applied Seismology Laboratory
Liverpool University Department of Earth Sciences
183
Jane Herdman Laboratories, 4 Brownlow St., Liverpool L69 3GP

www.liv.ac.uk
Ct: The total compressibility of the layer, calculated as:

Ct = SwCw + SoCo + SgCg + Cf
(where Sw, So and Sg are the water, oil and gas saturations respectively)
The value entered in the (Ct) data entry field is automatically written to the Layer
Parameters dialog, where it is displayed for information only.
o: The oil density at the Check Pressure and Check Temperature. Equivalent to
the oil specific gravity and not used in calculations.
w: The water density at the Check Pressure and Check Temperature. This term is
also a function of dissolved constituents (i.e. Water Salinity term) and is not used in
calculations.
g: The gas density at the Check Pressure and Check Temperature. Equivalent to
the gas specific gravity and not used in calculations.
Bubble Point (Pb): The bubble point pressure of the oil at the Check Temperature,
computed using the specified Produced GOR. If the produced GOR is high because
of the production of free gas (e.g. from a gas cap), the bubble point will not
correspond to the true value for the oil. This will not affect the oil properties used
in analysis, since they are computed at the Check Pressure, not the bubble point
pressure.
Solution GOR (Rs): This describes gas dissolved in the reservoir oil at the specified
Check Pressure and Check Temperature. Typical values are less than 1,500 - 2,000
scf/stb for a black oil system and between 1,500 - 3,500 scf/stb for a volatile oil
system.
If it is less than the produced GOR, there is free gas in the reservoir. In this case, a
Perrine multi-phase analysis can be performed if the Oil (multi-phase) fluid type has
been selected.
Input Parameters for Fluid Property Calculation: The following parameters are
required to calculate the fluid parameters (above) using the correlations:
Produced GOR (Rsp): This is the gas/oil ratio produced from the layer.
Note this is the total GOR (i.e. solution gas plus any free gas).
If the Oil (multi-phase) fluid type has been selected, the Perrine-Martin method for
multi-phase flow analysis will be invoked for the gas phase if Produced Rsp >
Solution Rs.
Water-Cut: This is the (decimal) fraction of water in the fluid produced from the
layer. If the Oil (multi-phase) fluid type has been selected, the Perrine-Martin
method for multi-phase flow analysis will be invoked for the water phase if Water-
Cut > 0.
Check Pressure: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties. Use this
entry to check fluid properties at different pressures (e.g. to compare with lab
data), but remember to compute them at the correct pressure (i.e. conventionally
the layer pressure) before proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.
Check Temperature: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties. Use
this entry to check fluid properties at different temperatures (e.g. to compare with
184
PanSystem
lab data), but remember to compute them at the correct temperature (i.e.
conventionally the layer temperature) before proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.
Oil Specific Gravity: This is the stock tank gravity of the oil produced from the
layer. This parameter is required to calculate fluid parameters for Oil (single and
multi-phase) systems. Specific gravities of oil generally lie between 0.73 to slightly
above 1.0 and in API gravity terms, the usual range starts with water density at
10 and rises to volatile oils and condensate liquids at around 60-70.
Gas Specific Gravity: Gas specific gravity (relative to air), is the gravity of the
separator gas at standard conditions, produced from the layer. This is required to
calculate properties for Oil (single and multi-phase) systems. In a multi-stage
separation, it should represent the gas yield from all stages, suitably weighted. For
the Vazquez & Beggs correlation, the first stage separator is assumed to be at 100
psig. Typical values for hydrocarbon gas mixtures range from 0.65 (dry gas) to
0.95 (wet gas).
Water Salinity: This describes the total amount of dissolved solids in the produced
water. The salinity of pore waters in reservoirs typically increases by 6 to 160 g/L
(6,000 to 160,000 ppm) per km depth. The causes of increased salinity are:
Salt dissolution (primary).
Membrane filtration (secondary).
Seawater salinity is about 35 g/L (35,000 ppm). Much higher salinities are found in
oil field brines. Typical salinities for oil and gas reservoirs are 30 g/L (30,000 ppm)
for sandstones and 90 g/L (90,000 ppm) for carbonates.
Concentrations of total dissolved solids (TDS) range from 80 to 300 g/L (80,000 to
300,000 ppm)in reservoirs deeper than 1 km.
185
Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) Sub-Dialog
General:
Oil and checking the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox within the Fluid Type
section, then selecting the Fluid Parameters button in the Layer Control section. An Oil
Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog is subsequently generated
to view, enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer.
Note that this selection also activates the Pseudo-Pressures button in the Layer
Control Section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. Refer to the Oil
Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing and Pseudo Tables Data sub-dialogs for additional
information on features associated with this button.
different in each layer. An Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-
dialog box can be brought up for any layer by highlighting it in the Layer Control section
of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog.
A different sub-dialog is generated when the Single-Phase Oil or Multi-Phase

Perrine Method is selected from the Fluid Type section of the Reservoir Description
(Analytical) dialog. For either of these selections users should refer to the Help
topic for the Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog.
checked), by selecting the PVT Calculator button for an Oil fluid type in the
This sub-dialog is comprised of three data entry sections and four function buttons. It is
used to set up and calculate the various black oil or volatile oil fluid parameters values.
The adjacent data entry fields colored in blue indicate that they are interrelated, so
changing one parameter (e.g. oil API gravity) results in the associated parameter being
re-calculated (e.g. oil specific gravity). The data entry fields and button functions are
described as follows:
Produced Fluid Data section:
Oil API Gravity: Enter the Oil API Gravity here (or skip and enter the Oil
Specific Gravity). If a new value is entered, this will automatically update
the underlying Oil Specific Gravity field.
Oil Specific Gravity: Enter the Oil Specific Gravity here (or skip and enter Oil
API Gravity). If a new value is entered, this will automatically update the
overlying Oil API Gravity field. The Specific Gravities of Oil generally lie
between 0.73 to slightly above 1.0 and in API Gravity terms, the usual range
starts with Water Density at 10 and rises to Volatile Oils and Condensate
liquids at around 60-70.
Gas Specific Gravity: Enter the Gas Specific Gravity (at standard
conditions). Typical values for hydrocarbon Gas mixtures range from 0.65
(Dry Gas) to 0.95 (Wet Gas).
186
PanSystem
Water Salinity: Enter the Water Salinity (NaCl equivalent) into this field, or
skip and enter the Water Specific Gravity. If a new value is entered, this
will automatically update the underlying Water Specific Gravity field. The
salinity of pore waters in Reservoirs typically increases by 6 to 160 g/L
Seawater salinity is about 35 g/L (35,000 ppm). Much higher salinities are
found in oil field brines. Typical salinities for Oil and Gas Reservoirs are 30
g/L (30,000 ppm) for sandstones and 90 g/L (90,000 ppm) for carbonates.
Concentrations of total dissolved solids (TDS) range from 80 to 300 g/L
(80,000 to 300,000 ppm) in Reservoirs deeper than 1 km.
Water Specific Gravity: Enter the Water Specific Gravity here (or skip and
enter the Water Salinity). If a new value is entered, this will automatically
update the overlying Water Salinity field.
Layer Data section:
Layer Name: For each Layer selected from the drop-down list (i.e. except
those with a Tabulated IPR Model), the following two fluid ratios can be
entered:
Produced GOR: Enter the Produced GOR into this field. This is the
Gas/Oil Ratio produced from the Layer.
Note this is the total GOR (i.e. Solution Gas plus any Free Gas).
Water-Cut: Enter the Produced Water-Cut into this field. This is the
(decimal) fraction of Water in the Fluid produced from the Layer.
Correlations section:
Pb, Rs, Bo: Select the relevant correlation for these values from this drop-
down list box. Users can choose from the following (References 22, 35, 84,
85 and 91to 94):
Glas.
Lasater.
Standing.
Vazquez & Beggs.
Petrosky-Farshad.
Macary.
o: Select the required Oil Viscosity correlation from this drop-down list
box. Users can choose from the following (References 86 to 88):
Beal and Chew et al.
Beggs et al.
ASTM and Chew et al.
ASTM and Beggs et al.
Note that the ASTM correlations should only be used after being Matched to
the observed Dead Oil Viscosity at two (or more) different Temperatures.
187
g: Select the required Gas Viscosity correlation from this drop-down list
box. Users can choose from the following (References 21, 22, 35, 89 and
90):
Carr et al.
Lee et al.
Additional Function Buttons:
Check: Select this button to generate the Black Oil Properties Check sub-
dialog.
Match: Select this button to generate the Match Black Oil Properties sub-
dialog.
188
PanSystem
Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog can only be accessed when the Oil option has been selected and the
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method has been checked in the Fluid Type section of the
Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. These selections activate the Pseudo-
Pressures... button in the Layer Parameters section of the dialog. When the Pseudo-
Pressures... button is selected this sub-dialog is generated, allowing users to select, edit,
import and plot a multi-phase pseudo-pressure table (i.e. m'(p)) for oil.
Unlike the single-phase oil fluid parameters for viscosity and compressibility which are
considered to be constant over a range of pressures, multi-phase fluid parameters are
pressure-dependent.
As a result of these pressure-related variations in fluid parameters (e.g. density, viscosity
and compressibility), pseudo-pressure formulations have been adopted to account for this
non-linear behaviour:
The Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method for oil can be used when the mobile
reservoir fluid is made up of several mobile phases and it provides a more rigorous
treatment of relative permeability effects and removes the non-linear fluid property
behaviour caused by the variation of oil formation volume factor (Bo) and oil
viscosity () with pressure. Although Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure is computed
using tables prepared in this sub-dialog, the relevant phase properties must be
specified in the Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog and
the Relative Permeability data should be checked via the Layer Parameters dialog.
The Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure method can be applied to the simultaneous flow of:
Oil, water and/or gas (for oil systems, it will account for the effects of any near
wellbore gas evolution or liquid dropout).
This sub-dialog is comprised of a Table Selection List Field and six function buttons,
Table Selection List Field: A single table type is available for multi-phase oil:
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (m'(p) versus Pressure (p))
Edit Table: Select and highlight the table in the Table Selection List Field, then
select this button to enter new data manually or view an existing table for editing.
If the table is empty, users will first be prompted with the Pseudo Table Data sub-
dialog, where the Number of Data Points and the Start and End Pressures can be
specified, then OK from this sub-dialog to enter the Edit Pseudo Table sub-dialog.
If the table is already populated with data, users are taken directly to the Edit
Pseudo Table sub-dialog, where existing data can be edited before selecting OK or
Plot (if required).
Calculate: This button is used to calculate a multi-phase pseudo-pressure table
based upon user-input oil fluid parameters, relative permeabilities, layer pressure
and temperature. After the calculation is performed, the Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressure (Oil) - Data Review sub-dialog is generated.
Import: This button is only available for importing a Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure
Table (multi-phase oil). The Psi(p) or (p) File is loaded with default extension
189
(*.PSP) in ASCII format. A standard Windows Open dialog is generated for the
import.
This file is internally converted within PanSystem from Psi(p) or (p) to an m'(p)
format.
Plot: This button is used to generate a plot (i.e. p versus m'(p)), of the input,
calculated or imported multi-phase pseudo-pressure table parameters.
There are three options available for creating multi-phase pseudo-pressure tables,
Option 1 - Fully Automatic Calculation:
Select the Calculate button. As described above, this will generate the Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure (Oil) - Data Review sub-dialog. This sub-dialog is used to check
for consistency between the parameters used in the external program to produce
the pseudo-pressure file and those currently in PanSystem.
Select OK to return to the Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog, then select
OK to accept settings or the Plot button (if required).
Option 2 - Manual Entry/Edit of m'(p) Data:
The m'(p) table can be entered or edited manually by pasting in values from an
external source or by directly typing in values, then selecting OK to accept settings
or the Plot button (if required).
To enter data, select the Edit Table button to generate the Edit Pseudo Table sub-
dialog for data entry/editing and enter new data manually or edit an existing table.
dialog, where the Start and End Pressures and Number of Points are specified for
the table. On OK from this sub-dialog, PanSystem will then generate the Edit
Pseudo Table sub-dialog and the table is set-up with the pressure steps filled in.
Note that when performing a manual data entry/edit by pasting, the data must be
tab-separated and when typing or pasting, data must always be m'(p) data,
not Psi(p) or (p) data.
Option 3 - Import of External Pseudo-Pressure Table:
Users can import a multi-phase pseudo-pressure table for oil. These Psi(p) or (p)
Files are loaded with default extension (*.PSP) in ASCII format (refer to Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure (*.PSP) File for details of this file format). A standard Windows
Open dialog is generated for the import (e.g. from WellFlo data file), then the file is
internally converted to an m'(p) format within PanSystem. The import process
generates the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (Oil) - Data Review sub-dialog. This
sub-dialog is used to check for consistency between the parameters used in the
external program to produce the pseudo-pressure file and those currently in
PanSystem.
Select OK to return to the Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog, then select
OK to accept settings or the Plot button (if required).
190
PanSystem
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (Oil) - Data Review Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog, after
selecting either the Calculate, Calculate All or Import buttons.
The sub-dialog is comprised of three columns:
Transfer Value?: The incoming values will overwrite the current PanSystem values
unless the left-hand checkbox(es) are unchecked.
New Value: Some of the key parameters associated with the external pseudo-
pressure table generation and read from the incoming file.
Current Value: The corresponding internal values current in PanSystem.
This dialog is used primarily to check for consistency between the parameters used in
WellFlo to produce the pseudo-pressure file, and those in PanSystem for the well test in
question. They should be the same.
The fluid saturations are for information only. They were computed in WellFlo for the
specified produced water fraction (if any), using relative permeability tables. They
indicate the saturations (at Layer Pressure and Layer Temperature) at which multi-phase
flow is occurring. The Relative Permeabilities are also for information only.
191
Correction to Datum for Oil Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog, by selecting the
Datum Input... button. This facility corrects all pressures computed from diagnostic plot
analysis (i.e. p*, etc.) to a reference datum depth, by adding or subtracting the
appropriate hydrostatic pressure difference.
No correction is applied to the input data itself, only to computed pressures. The
hydrostatic correction can include one or two fluid contacts and it should be used
with caution if there happen to be different contacts in the wellbore and reservoir -
a sketch of the situation is recommended before entering data in this case.
This sub-dialog is comprised of three data entry sections, described as follows:
Depth and Oil Gradient section: Enter the vertical depths of the Pressure Gauge
and the Reference Datum (i.e. relative to the same zero level - e.g. mean sea level
(MSL)). Enter the Oil Gradient and check the Apply Correction... checkbox to enable
the datum correction. It can be disabled by un-checking the box.
Gas Data section: An optional field depending on whether a gas/oil fluid contact
is present or not. Enter the Gas Gradient and vertical depth to the Gas/Oil Fluid
Contact.
Water Data section: Also an optional field depending on whether an oil/water
fluid contact is present or not. Enter the Water Gradient and vertical depth to the
Oil/Water Fluid Contact.
192
PanSystem
Black Oil Properties Check Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures)
sub-dialog, by selecting the Check button.
This sub-dialog is comprised of one data entry section, a calculation section and three
functional buttons. It allows users to check the correlations and tuning selected at
different test values. The data entry fields and button functions are described as follows:
Check Properties at... section:
Check Pressure: Type in the pressure value that fluid properties are to be
checked at.
Check Temperature: Type in the temperature value that fluid properties are
to be checked at.
Produced GOR: Type in the produced gas/oil ratio (GOR) that fluid
properties are to be checked at.
Calculation section:
Select the Calculate button to calculate the bubble point pressure and other related
PVT parameters according to the correlations and the test conditions entered in the
Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog. If the calculated
results are grayed out, it means that one of the check values has been changed, so
these results no longer relate to the data. Selecting this button will re-evaluate the
PVT at the entered check values.
193
Match Black Oil Properties Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures)
sub-dialog, by selecting the Match button.
This sub-dialog has five main sections and eight functional buttons. It allows users to
tune the black oil correlations against measured data using a minimization routine.
Data from PVT reports should correspond to constant mass/constant composition

experiments (i.e. CME/CCE), not constant volume depletion (i.e. CVD).
Tuning the PVT data is very important, since the influence of fluid properties, particularly
gas/oil ratio (GOR), on pressure drop can be dramatic. The data entry fields and button
options are described as follows:
Control section: This is situated at the top left corner of the sub-dialog and is
used to select the PVT properties and set gas/oil ratio (GOR) conditions for the
tuning process.
Match Property: Choose the PVT property required for tuning by selecting it
from the drop-down list menu. Six choices are available:
Bubble Pt. Pressure (Pb)
Solution GOR (Rs)
Formation Volume Factor (FVF - Bo)
Oil Viscosity (o)
Gas Viscosity (g)
Z-factor
Using Correlation: The correlation displayed is the one previously assigned
for each selected property within the Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase
At Produced GOR: This allows users to enter the measured gas/oil ratio
(GOR) at which the tuning will take place (i.e. this should be the value of
produced GOR at which all the test data were acquired at).
As stated above, the correlation displayed is the one selected in the Oil Fluid
Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog, and is simply
displayed for information on the tuning screen. This avoids possible
inconsistencies in parameter tuning, such as using one correlation for tuning
bubble-point, and another for solution GOR. An asterisk (*) beside the
name of the displayed correlation indicates that a fluid property has already
been tuned using this correlation.
Tuning Parameters section: This is situated centrally on the left side of the sub-
dialog and is used to display the current tuning coefficients (i.e. multiplier - upper
number and shift - lower number), for the selected Match Property and Correlation.
194
PanSystem
Reset Tuning: This button can be used after tuning has been performed, to
re-set the selected correlation back to the un-tuned state (i.e. multiplier = 1
and shift = 0).
The tuning performed here will be used throughout the data set unless the
tuning parameters are Reset.
Anchored and Free Tuning: These options are only available for Bubble Pt
Pressure and Solution GOR selection options from the Match Property
section.
With the Anchored option switched on for GOR tuning, Rs is forced to equal 0
at standard pressure and temperature. For the bubble point tuning, Pb at an
Rs of 0 is forced to equal standard pressure at standard temperature.
With the Free option switched on, no such constraint is applied. This results
in a better match for oils whose solution GORs are higher than those
predicted by the untuned correlation below bubble point, but may result in a
poorer match near standard conditions.
The default choice can be pre-set to Free by setting the key string anchor-
PbRs-tuning to the value "0" in the WellFlo folder of the Windows Registry.
To pre-set Anchored as the default, replace the value "0" by "1".
Observed Values section: This is the upper table section on the right side of the
sub-dialog.
Observed Values: Observed data is entered into this section of the table
matrix, at the specified pressure/s and temperature/s. To calculate a set of
values at different pressures and/or temperatures, enter any non-zero
numbers here (e.g. 1), then select the Calculate button at the base of the
sub-dialog. To perform a best-fit analysis, only valid observed data should
be entered, then select the Best-Fit button at the base of the sub-dialog.
Pressure: These values are entered as column headers in the table matrix.
Enter the pressure/s at which the observed data was measured (either
overtype or retain defaults).
These pressures do not apply when Bubble Pt Pressure is the selected Match
Property or when entering dead oil viscosities to tune an ASTM viscosity
correlation.
Temperature: These values are entered as row ends (left) in the table
matrix. Enter the temperature/s at which the observed data was measured
(either overtype or retain defaults).
Zero Values: This button is situated centrally on the left side of the sub-
dialog and is used to clear all the values typed into the Observed Values
table cells.
Calculated Values section: This is the lower table section on the right side of the
sub-dialog. Values in this section of the table matrix are displayed after the
Calculate or Best-Fit buttons have been selected - they are non-editable.
Calculated values will appear in the corresponding cells of the
pressure/temperature matrix providing that non-zero numbers have been entered
into the Observed Values section of the table matrix.
195
Match section: This display field lies at the lower left corner of the sub-dialog and
is used as an indicator of the match quality provided by a Best-Fit calculation
following a Calculate selection (i.e. a value of 1.000 indicates a perfect match).
Functional Buttons: The three additional function buttons are described as
follows:
Calculate: Select this button to see the effect of the current tuning
coefficients on the user input observed values. Numbers will be generated
in the Calculated Values pressure/temperature matrix where non-zero
numbers have been entered in the corresponding cells within the Observed
Values matrix.
Best-Fit: Select this button to perform a best-fit calculation on the entered
Observed Values.
Copy: This button will select all the Observed Values, together with their
pressures, temperatures and Calculated Values, and transfer them to the
Windows Clipboard. This information can subsequently be pasted into
another clipboard-enabled application such as Notepad, WordPad, Word or
Excel.
Plot: Select this button to plot the Observed Values and Calculated Values
of the current Match Property, provided there is at least one line or column
in the table matrix with multiple values.
If there is only one line or column of multiple values in the matrix, further use
of Plot is allowed, to compare the results of successive calculations. For
example, these might be performed with/without Best-Fit, or with the Best-Fit
Anchored/Free (when permitted), or with different property correlations (i.e.
selected by returning to the Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressures) sub-dialog).
If there are several lines of multiple values in the matrix, the Plot button
presents a PVT Match Plot Selection sub-dialog from which to select the
vertical or horizontal line of values to be plotted. This multiple choice of
values excludes the option, described above, to plot the results of multiple
calculations for a single line of values.
To Tune Pb with a single point Observed Value entry, select Bubble Pt Press as
the Match Property. It is not possible to Tune it indirectly by selecting Solution
GOR (Rs) and entering a single value Rs = Rsp at the desired pressure.
If tuning Solution GOR against multiple Observed Values, do not enter data for P
> Pb , as this will unfairly bias the Match. The only value of Rs = Rsp (if available)
should be entered at P = Pb. Any number of values of Rs < Rsp at P < Pb may be
entered.
If the Bubble Point is Tuned, users will not be able to Tune the Solution GOR (Rs).
This is necessary to ensure consistency. However, it is possible to specify a
measured Bubble Point, and use this to Weight the Tuning of the GOR (refer to
the examples below for details of how this can be achieved).
Matching Examples:
The first step is to enter the Observed Values:
Select the required Match parameter. In the example dialog illustrated below, this
is the FVF (Bo), with the Glas Correlation (selected previously).
196
PanSystem
Enter the Pressure (column) and Temperature (row) values (e.g. for the example
illustrated below, data for 1000, 2000, 3000 and 4000 psia at 230F has been
entered).
Select Calculate to see the results at the specified points. These would normally be
the untuned values, but this button includes the effect of any previous Tuning
(this can be cancelled by selecting the Reset Tuning button first).
For each value in the Observed Values fields, corresponding Calculated Values will
be displayed in the lower panel. Note that nothing in the Calculated Values area
can be edited.
This is also a useful way of generating a table of PVT Results at different Pressures and
Temperatures. Enter dummy values (e.g. 1.0) in the Observed Values fields, and select
Calculate to get an array of computed values (but do not try to Best-Fit in this case).
Observed and Untuned Calculated Values of Formation Volume Factor

When the Observed Values have been entered, select Best-Fit. This starts the Matching
routine, which displays the Best-Fit Calculated Values, and the resultant Tuning
parameters. The Match field (i.e. bottom left), is a quality-of-fit indicator with 1.000
being a perfect Match.
197
Best-Fit for Formation Volume Factor

The Tuning performed here will be used throughout the data set unless users Reset the
Tuning parameters.
Simultaneous Tuning of Solution GOR and Bubble-Point:
If the Bubble-Point is Tuned, users will not be able to Tune the Solution GOR; this is
necessary for consistency. However, users may specify a measured Bubble-Point, and
use this to weight the Tuning of the GOR as described below:
Select Bubble-Point and enter the desired Observed Value at the appropriate
Temperature and GOR. Do not Tune (and/or Reset any previous Tuning).
Select Solution GOR, enter Observed Value/s at the appropriate Pressure/s and
Temperature in the normal way.
Select the Best-Fit button, then answer Yes at the first prompt:
At the second prompt, enter a Bubble-Point Weighting Factor between 0.01 and
1000. A factor of 0.01 means almost no Weighting at all (i.e. the GOR will be
Tuned without paying much attention to the specified Bubble-Point). A factor of
1000 will force the GOR algorithm to respect the specified Bubble-Point as closely
198
PanSystem
as possible. The Weighting has a roughly logarithmic dependence on the value

entered, and a factor of 10 is a midway "compromise" Weighting.
If Tuning Solution GOR with multiple Observed Value entries, but without Bubble-
Point Weighting (i.e. if users answered No at the prompt), do not enter any values
at Pressures higher than the Bubble-Point, as this will unfairly bias the Matching
process. Users may enter any number of values of Rs < Rsb at P < Pb, but do not
enter anything higher than Rs = Rsb at P = Pb.
Anchored and Free Tuning:
For the Bubble-Point and Solution GOR, the Tuning parameters area contains a choice of
Anchored and Free tuning.
With the Anchored option enabled for GOR Tuning, Rs is forced to equal zero at
standard Pressure and Temperature. For the Bubble-Point Tuning, Pb is forced to equal
standard Pressure at standard Temperature.
With the Free option enabled, no such constraint is applied; this results in a better Match
for oils with GORs higher than those predicted by the untuned correlation below
Bubble-Point.
For example, in the following illustrations the Observed GOR at 1000 psia is 180. With
the Anchoring constraint enabled, the Best-Fit value is 135.337. With no Anchoring, the
Best-Fit is 192.866.
199
Calculated Values for Anchored Solution GOR
200
PanSystem
Calculated Values for Free Solution GOR

Once a satisfactory Match has been obtained, the Observed Values and Calculated Values
of the current Match Property can be plotted (provided there is at least one line in the
table matrix with multiple values). Select the Plot button to produce a plot similar to the
illustration below. This plot can also be edited and re-formatted within the Plotting
Utility, using the Edit Menu options, before Printing or Exporting using the File Menu
options.
201
Plot of Observed and Calculated Solution GOR for Best-Fit on Free Solution GOR
202
PanSystem
PVT Match Plot Selection Sub-Dialog
General:
This plotting sub-dialog is generated from the Match Black Oil Properties or Match Dry
Gas Properties sub-dialogs when the Plot button is selected and the table matrix in
Observed Values and Calculated Values has more than one vertical or horizontal line of
multiple values.
There are two optional plot selection fields and two functional buttons described as
follows:
Plot vs. Pressure at Temperature: Users can either toggle this option, then choose
a temperature from the drop-down list menu, to select a row of values to plot.
Plot vs. Temperature at Pressure: Alternatively, users can toggle this option, then
choose a pressure from the list, to select a column of values to plot.
Plot: Select this button to add the selected row or column to the plot.
Done: Select this button to close the plot and return to the Match Black Oil
Properties or Match Dry Gas Properties sub-dialog.
203
PVT Match Plot Sub-Dialog
General:
This plot display sub-dialog is used to view Observed Values plotted against Calculated
Values from the Match Black Oil Properties or Match Dry Gas Properties sub-dialogs. The
plot display is generated directly when the Plot button is selected and the table matrix in
Observed Values and Calculated Values has a single vertical or horizontal line of multiple
values.
If the table matrix contains more than one vertical or horizontal line of multiple values,
the PVT Match Plot Selection sub-dialog will be generated first, and after making an
appropriate selection (i.e. Plot versus P at T or Plot versus T at P), then selecting the Plot
button, users can then enter this sub-dialog to view the selected plot type.
Users can edit and/or format the plot display using menu option or by left-clicking on
specific parts of the plot (e.g. axes, legend, etc.), to generate editing/formatting sub-
dialogs.
When users move the cursor around within the plot display, the plot co-ordinates are
displayed beneath the X-axis for the cursor point position.
Whether the plot display is used in the default format or customized to an individual
user's requirements, further plot options are available to:
Alter the plot display ("page") set-up for viewing/printing.
Copy the plot to clipboard for pasting into other applications.
Export the plot in a range of formats via the Graphics Export facility.
Select and set-up a printer to print the plot display.
Save the customized plot set-up as a plotting template for future use or import
previously saved templates for current use.
The following options are available from the four PVT Match Plot menu items:
File menu item:
Page Set-up: This option generates a sub-dialog that is similar to the
PanSystem main File menu option Page Setup dialog in operation. For
special code settings that can be applied in the Header and Footer sections,
also refer to the Help topic for Page Setup Codes.
Print: This option generates a sub-dialog that is similar to the PanSystem
main File menu option Print dialog in operation. The Setup button generates
a sub-dialog that is similar to the PanSystem main File menu option Printer
Setup dialog in operation.
Printer Set-up: This option generates a sub-dialog that is similar to the
PanSystem main File menu option Printer Setup dialog in operation.
Copy: This option copies the currently displayed plot to the clipboard, for
pasting into other applications (a confirmation dialog is generated).
Export: This option opens the Graphics Export facility, where users can
select from a number of file formats for exporting the currently displayed
plot.
204
PanSystem
Save Template/Load Template: These options allow users to save their

customized settings as a template for future re-use or load a previously
saved template for current use respectively. A similar Graphing Template
sub-dialog is used in each case, except for the Save File As Type field in the
Save Graphing Template sub-dialog, which is a List Files of Type field in the
respective Load Graphing Template sub-dialog. Users can also browse their
system/network to find a suitable file storage or loading location:
File Name: Select a suitable file from the underlying List Field (*.gtp
format) and it will be displayed within this field.
Save File As Type/List Files of Type: Only Graphing Template
(*.gtp) files are supported.
Folders: This field initially displays the full folder path from the
currently selected system/network drive. Users can double-click on a
particular folder to display additional folders contained within it.
Drives: This field initially displays the currently selected
system/network drive. Users change to a different drive by selecting
another drive from the drop-down list. Note that this also changes
the folders displayed in the overlying Folders field.
Network: This button is used to generate a Map Network Drive sub-
dialog, where users can specify a letter for the drive connection and
associate it with a suitable folder, enabling easier access to the
template storage and/or loading location.
Exit: This option closes the PVT Match Plot and associated Match Fluid
Properties sub-dialogs and returns users to the Well and Reservoir
(Analytical) dialog.
Edit menu item:
X-Axis/Y-Axis: These options generate an appropriate Edit sub-dialog where
users can format textual/graphical display and scaling parameters for the
plot X-axis or Y-axis (i.e. bottom and left axes of plot respectively). Users
can:
Min/Max Value: Set the Min and Max values for the selected axis by
typing in new limits.
Label: Change the selected axis Label text by typing in new text.
Color: Change the selected axis display Color by selecting a new
color from the drop-down list.
Ticks: Choose the spacing between the selected axis grid lines (i.e.
Ticks) by setting the number of ticks. For guidance, the number of
divisions on the plot equals the number of ticks minus one. This
automatically sets the axis numbering.
The Ticks option is overridden when Log Scale is selected. Double-

clicking on the selected axis can also be used to generate the Edit
sub-dialog.
Round: Invoke axis scale rounding for the selected axis. This
partially overrides the Min and Max values specified earlier, since the
Round option selects Min and Max values so the tick values will be
round numbers, taking into account the range covered by the data
(on by default).
205
Grid/Subgrid: Apply a (vertical/horizontal) lined grid to the selected

axis at each Tick point by checking Grid. Users can also apply a finer
gridding between Ticks by entering a suitable number of lines to
display; the subgrid appears as a lighter series of lines.
Show Labels/Ticks: Choose to display or not display these items on
the selected axes by checking or unchecking the appropriate
checkboxes (both shown by default).
Log Scale: Display an appropriate logarithmic scale for the selected
axis.
The Ticks option is overridden when Log Scale is selected.

Legend/Co-ordinates: These options generate an appropriate Edit sub-
dialog where users can format the color and display parameters for the
associated textual and graphical items. Users can:
Choose the box frame (i.e. for Legend option only) and text Color
from the drop-down menu.
Decide whether or not to show the Legend/Co-ordinates display by
checking or unchecking the Show Legend/Co-ordinates checkbox.
The Legend box can be re-positioned on the plot by left-clicking and

dragging it to a new position. Double-clicking on the selected
Legend/Co-ordinates can also be used to generate the Edit sub-
dialog.
Title/Description: These options generate an appropriate Edit sub-dialog
where users can format the color and display parameters for the associated
textual items. The Title is displayed above the plot and the Description
below the plot. Users can:
Choose the text Color from the drop-down menu.
Decide whether or not to show the Title/Description text by checking
or unchecking the Show Title/Description checkbox.
Enter/edit the text to be displayed by typing text into the text entry
field.
Note that the Description is off by default. Double-clicking on the

selected Title/Description can also be used to generate the Edit sub-
dialog.
Plot Options: This option generates a sub-dialog where users can format the
background color display and initial display parameters for the line width,
axis rounding and co-ordinate display. Users can:
Background: Choose a different Background Color from the drop-
down menu (white default).
Initial Line Width: Change the default setting (i.e. 1), to display a
different line width on the plot when this plot sub-dialog is next
opened.
Initial Axis Rounding: Uncheck this checkbox to remove axis
rounding from the plot when this plot sub-dialog is next opened
(checked by default - axis rounding on).
206
PanSystem
Initial Co-ordinates: Uncheck this checkbox to remove co-ordinates

from the plot when this plot sub-dialog is next opened (checked by
default - axis rounding on).
The three Initial options have no effect on the current plot - they
are only applied when the Match Plot facility is next used.
Fonts: This option allows users to alter the current Font settings for all text
and numerals on the plot display. There are sub-menu options for Legend
and Description, Header and Footer, Title, Axis Numbers and Axis Labels. All
of these options generate the same Font sub-dialog. Users can:
Select a suitable type of Font from a scrolling list (e.g. Arial).
Select a suitable Font Style from a static list (e.g. Italic).
Select a suitable Font Size from a scrolling list (e.g. 10 pt.).
Select a suitable Font Script for the plot display from a drop-down list
(default = Western).
When the first three parameters have been selected, a text sample is
displayed in the Sample field.
Dataset (1,2): This option allows users to alter the current Dataset display
settings for the Observed Values and Calculated Values on the plot display.
Both Dataset options generate the same Edit Dataset sub-dialog. Users
can:
Title: Edit the Title text for the selected Dataset (i.e. displayed in the
Legend box) by entering new text.
Point Color: Select a new color for the selected Dataset Points from
the drop-down menu (i.e. only applied when Show Points is checked).
Point Shape: Select a new shape for the selected Dataset Points
from the drop-down menu (i.e. only applied when Show Points is
checked) .
Line Color: Select a new color for the selected Dataset Line from the
drop-down menu (i.e. only applied when Show Lines is checked).
Line Style: Select a new style for the selected Dataset Line from the
drop-down menu (i.e. only applied when Show Lines is checked).
Fill Color: Select a new color for any Fill Area displayed on the plot
(i.e. only applied when Fill Area is checked - unchecked/off by
default).
Fill Hatch: Select a new hatching texture for any Fill Area displayed
on the plot (i.e. only applied when Fill Area is checked -
unchecked/off by default).
Line Width: This line width setting is only applied to selected
Dataset Points or to a solid (not dashed) Dataset Line (default = 1).
A warning to this effect is issued.
Show Set: Check/uncheck this checkbox to display/not display the
selected Dataset.
Show Lines: Check/uncheck this checkbox to display/not display the
selected Dataset Lines.
Show Points: Check/uncheck this checkbox to display/not display the
selected Dataset Points.
207
Fill Area: Check/uncheck this checkbox to fill/not fill the area below
the selected Dataset with a colored/hatched area (i.e. dependent on
selections made above). This checkbox is unchecked/off by
default.
Zoom Menu item:
Zoom In: Select this option to Zoom In (enlarge), the currently displayed
plot.
Zoom Out: Select this option to Zoom Out (reduce), the currently displayed
plot.
Zoom Region: When this option is selected, the cursor changes from an
arrow to a cross. Position the cross at the extreme corner of the region to
be selected, then left-click and drag the cursor to the opposite corner of the
region. The selected region appears blackened until the mouse button is
released, then a new plot is displayed with the selected region co-ordinates.
Zoom Normal: Select this option to restore the original plot display area
before any Zoom operations were applied.
Help menu item:
About: This shows the version and copyright data for this facility.
208
PanSystem
Water Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
Water within the Fluid Type section, then selecting the Fluid Parameters button in the
Layer Control section. A Water Fluid Parameters sub-dialog is subsequently generated to
view, enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer.
different in each layer. A Water Fluid Parameters sub-dialog box can be brought up for
any layer by highlighting it in the Layer Control section of the Reservoir Description
specified for well test analysis purposes. The mandatory parameters appear in red and
A similar sub-dialog box is used for the Oil Fluid Parameters (i.e. Single-Phase and Multi-
Phase Perrine Methods). Differences exist only in the minimum datasets required for
analysis and on-screen fluid property calculations for each mode. This sub-dialog is
comprised of five data entry sections and four function buttons and the following table
identifies the fluid parameters required for each type of analysis, test or calculation:
Purpose Water (single-phase)

Analysis Bw, w, Ct
On-Screen Calculation P(layer), T(layer),
Salinity
The mandatory parameters (colored red), can be manually typed into the Analysis section
(i.e. lower main section), or calculated using the Calculate button, once the parameters
associated with the Calculation sections (i.e. upper active sections) have been entered.
The Use Correlations checkbox is unavailable in this sub-dialog and if no custom settings
have been applied in the other relevant Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs (e.g. oil, gas, etc.),
default settings will be applied. The fluid properties are computed at the specified Check
Pressure and Check Temperature (i.e. nominally set equal to the layer conditions).
Note that any checked parameters in the lower Analysis section will be overwritten
by the Calculate process. The parameters can only be manually edited when they
are checked, but users should remember to uncheck any parameters they wish to
retain before using the Calculate button.
Input (Water) sub-dialog.
pressure and temperature for welltest analysis:
209
Bo: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the oil. It is a mandatory parameter for
analysis in Oil (single-phase and multi-phase) modes. Typical values are 1.1 - 2.0
for black oil reservoirs and > 2.0 for volatile oil reservoirs.
Bw: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the water. It is only a mandatory
parameter for analysis in Oil (multi-phase) mode if the water/oil ratio (WOR) > 0,
and in Water (single-phase) mode. Although dissolved salts and gases can affect
the water FVF these effects are often ignored. Typically, the water FVF lies within
the range 0.99 - 1.07.
Bg: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the gas. It is only a mandatory
parameter for analysis in Oil (multi-phase) mode if the Produced gas/oil ratio (GOR)
> Solution (GOR) (i.e. there is free gas in the reservoir). Typical values range
between 0.002 and 0.2, with values of (Bg) increasing with decreasing reservoir
pressure.
o: The viscosity of the oil. It is a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil (single
and multi-phase) modes. Oil viscosity measures the oil's resistance to flow and this
is affected by oil composition (e.g. low API = high viscosity, high API = low
viscosity), temperature, dissolved gas and pressure. The oil viscosity values should
fall slowly in relation to declining reservoir pressure until the bubble point pressure
(pb) is reached. Below bubble point pressure, the oil viscosity values should rise
sharply, as gas is liberated from the liquid phase. Typically, oil viscosity will be
around 1cp, for a light API oil gravity between 40 - 50 at reservoir conditions.
w: The viscosity of the water. It is only a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil
(multi-phase) mode if the water/oil ratio (WOR) > 0, and in Water (single-phase)
mode. Water viscosity is dependent on pressure, temperature and salinity. In
general, brine viscosity increases with increasing pressure, increasing salinity and
decreasing temperature. Typically, the water viscosity lies within the range 0.2 -
2.5 cp.
g: The viscosity of the gas. It is only a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil
(multi-phase) mode if the Produced GOR > Solution GOR (i.e. there is free gas in
the reservoir). A typical value of gas viscosity at reservoir conditions is 0.025 cp,
which is approximately 40 times smaller than light oils with an API gravity of 40 -
50, which exhibit viscosities of around 1cp. Gas viscosity values should decrease
as reservoir pressure decreases.
Co: The isothermal compressibility of the oil. Typically, this will be between 10 -
15 x 10-6/psi.
Cg: The isothermal compressibility of the gas. Gas compressibility is almost
hyperbolic in relation to pressure, with low values at high pressure, tending to
increasingly higher values as pressure decreases. Typical values of (Cg) can range
between 200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 5,000 psia) to 500 x 10-6/psi
(reservoir pressure of 2,000 psia), increasing to 1200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure
of 1,000 psia).
respectively.
210
PanSystem
In high porosity, overpressured reservoirs, the pore compressibility exhibits a low

overpressured in excess of 2,000 psi, suffered an abnormal degree of reservoir
Venezuala).
(where Sw, So and Sg are the water, oil and gas saturations respectively)
Parameters dialog, where it is displayed for information only.
o: The oil density at the Check Pressure and Check Temperature. Equivalent to
the oil specific gravity and not used in calculations.
calculations.
Bubble Point (Pb): The bubble point pressure of the oil at the Check Temperature,
computed using the specified Produced GOR. If the produced GOR is high because
of the production of free gas (e.g. from a gas cap), the bubble point will not
correspond to the true value for the oil. This will not affect the oil properties used
in analysis, since they are computed at the Check Pressure, not the bubble point
pressure.
Solution GOR (Rs): This describes gas dissolved in the reservoir oil at the specified
Check Pressure and Check Temperature. Typical values are less than 1,500 - 2,000
scf/stb for a black oil system and between 1,500 - 3,500 scf/stb for a volatile oil
system.
If it is less than the produced GOR, there is free gas in the reservoir. In this case, a
Perrine multi-phase analysis can be performed if the Oil (multi-phase) fluid type has
been selected.
Note that the Use Correlations option must be activated and suitable correlations
selected.
Produced GOR (Rsp): This is the gas/oil ratio produced from the layer.
Note this is the total GOR (i.e. solution gas plus any free gas).
211
If the Oil (multi-phase) fluid type has been selected, the Perrine-Martin Method for
multi-phase flow analysis will be invoked for the gas phase if Produced Rsp >
Solution Rs.
Water-Cut: This is the (decimal) fraction of water in the fluid produced from the
layer. If the Oil (multi-phase) fluid type has been selected, the Perrine-Martin
Method for multi-phase flow analysis will be invoked for the water phase if Water-
Cut > 0.
Check Pressure: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties. Use this
entry to check fluid properties at different pressures (e.g. to compare with lab
data), but remember to compute them at the correct pressure (i.e. conventionally
the layer pressure) before proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.
Check Temperature: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties. Use
this entry to check fluid properties at different temperatures (e.g. to compare with
lab data), but remember to compute them at the correct temperature (i.e.
conventionally the layer temperature) before proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.
Oil Specific Gravity: This is the stock tank gravity of the oil produced from the
layer. This parameter is required to calculate fluid parameters for Oil (single and
multi-phase) systems. Specific gravities of oil generally lie between 0.73 to slightly
Gas Specific Gravity: Gas specific gravity (relative to air), is the gravity of the
separator gas at standard conditions, produced from the layer. This is required to
calculate properties for Oil (single and multi-phase) systems. In a multi-stage
separation, it should represent the gas yield from all stages, suitably weighted. For
the Vazquez & Beggs correlation, the first stage separator is assumed to be at 100
psig. Typical values for hydrocarbon gas mixtures range from 0.65 (dry gas) to
0.95 (wet gas).
Water Salinity: This describes the total amount of dissolved solids in the produced
water. The salinity of pore waters in reservoirs typically increases by 6 to 160 g/L
212
PanSystem
Correction to Datum for Water Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Water Fluid Parameters sub-dialog, by selecting the
Datum Input... button. This facility corrects all pressures computed from diagnostic plot
analysis (i.e. p*, etc.) to a reference datum depth, by adding or subtracting the
appropriate hydrostatic pressure difference.
Depth and Water Gradient section: Enter the vertical depths of the Pressure
Gauge and the Reference Datum (i.e. relative to the same zero level - e.g. mean
sea level (MSL)). Enter the Water Gradient and check the Apply Correction...
checkbox to enable the datum correction. It can be disabled by un-checking the
box.
Gas Data section: An optional field depending on whether a gas/water fluid
contact is present or not. Enter the Gas Gradient and vertical depth to the
Gas/Water Fluid Contact.
Oil Data section: Also an optional field depending on whether an oil/water fluid
contact is present or not. Enter the Oil Gradient and vertical depth to the Oil/Water
Fluid Contact.
213
Gas Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
Gas within the Fluid Type section, then selecting the Fluid Parameters button in the Layer
Control section. A Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog is subsequently generated to view,
enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer.
different in each layer. A Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog box can be brought up for any
layer by highlighting it in the Layer Control section of the Reservoir Description
fluid properties can be either be entered directly, or calculated from production or
laboratory data.
For the gas multi-phase option, users need to check the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure
Method (gas) checkbox in the Fluid Type section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical)
dialog. The sub-dialog is titled Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) in
the latter case.

dialog. Users should refer to the Help topic for Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase
unchecked), by selecting the PVT Calculator button for a Gas fluid type in the
This sub-dialog is comprised of six data entry sections and six function buttons and the
following table identifies the gas parameters required for each type of analysis, test or
calculation:
Purpose Using Correlations Using EoS

Analysis T(layer), Bg, g, Cf, T(layer), Bg, g, Cf,
Ct, z, Cg Ct, z, Cg
On-Screen Calculation P(layer), T(layer), Gas specific gravity,

Gas specific gravity Gas composition
214
PanSystem
However, not all parameters displayed actually need to be quantified for well test
analysis purposes; users have the option to de-select the values for Cg, Cw, Cf and/or Ct,
if they specifically require to do so.
Note that if the Use Correlations option is enabled, any checked parameters in the
lower Analysis section will be overwritten by the Calculate process. The
parameters can only be manually edited when they are checked, but users should
remember to uncheck any parameters they wish to retain before using the
Calculate button.
During the Calculate process, the individual rock and fluid compressibilities are normally
computed from correlations and combined in the total compressibility Ct. If users wish to
enter their own values for any of these compressibilities, type in a preferred value, then
un-check the checkbox next to the parameter as outlined above. The Calculate process
will then include this value in the Ct calculation.
The Calculate button will not overwrite any data whose check box has been
switched off.
To enable the Calculate button, check the Use Correlations checkbox and choose the
appropriate correlations for gas viscosity from the drop-down list box provided, or check
the Using EoS checkbox and select from a similar drop-down list. This will either
calculate gas properties at the specified pressure and temperature Using Correlations (i.e.
from a specified gas gravity) or an Equation of State (i.e. from a specified gas
composition). Enter the parameters listed in the appropriate table section above, from
the On-Screen Calculation row.
For the Using Correlations option the gas properties are computed at the specified
Check Pressure and Check Temperature (i.e. nominally set equal to the layer
conditions). For the Using EoS option the full gas composition from C1 - C7+ will
be required and these data are input by selecting the Gas Composition button to
generate the Gas Composition sub-dialog.
For Gas Viscosity g, the following correlations are available (References 21, 22, 35, 89
and 90):
Lee et al.
Carr et al.
Other properties are computed with fixed correlations as described below.
In addition, tables of g , z and g , Ct can be computed (or edited) for the pseudo-
pressure and pseudo-time integrals. A facility is also available to import an externally-
generated table of viscosity and z-factor values against pressure. There is a conventional
real gas pseudo-pressure generation facility, and it is also possible to generate or import
a multi-phase pseudo-pressure table. These options are accessed via selection of the
Pseudo-Tables button (refer to the Pseudo-Tables Editing and Pseudo-Table Data sub-
dialogs).
Input (Gas and Condensate) sub-dialog.
pressure and temperature for well test analysis:
215
Bg: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the gas. Typical values range between
0.002 and 0.2, with values of (Bg) increasing with decreasing reservoir pressure. It
is mandatory for gas well test analysis.
g: The viscosity of the gas. A typical value of gas viscosity at reservoir conditions
is 0.025 cp, which is approximately 40 times smaller than light oils with an API
gravity of 40 - 50, which exhibit viscosities of around 1cp. Gas viscosity values
should decrease as reservoir pressure decreases. It is mandatory for gas well test
analysis.
Z: The gas deviation factor or Z-factor corresponding to each pressure
measurement (Reference 21, Appendix A). This is a dimensionless parameter that
represents the degree of deviation from ideal gas behaviour, with a range of values
lying between 0.3 and 2.0. At high reservoir pressure the Z-factor is at a
maximum, but as pressure decreases, the Z-factor falls to a minimum value, then
rises again in hyperbolic fashion to approach unity. It is mandatory for analysis.
Bw: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the water. Although dissolved salts and
gases can affect the water FVF these effects are often ignored. Typically, the
water FVF lies within the range 0.99 - 1.07.
w: The viscosity of the water. Water viscosity is dependent on pressure,
temperature and salinity. In general, brine viscosity increases with increasing
pressure, increasing salinity and decreasing temperature. Typically, the water
viscosity lies within the range 0.2 - 2.5 cp.
Cg: The isothermal compressibility of the gas (Appendix A of Reference 21). Gas
compressibility is almost hyperbolic in relation to pressure, with low values at high
pressure, tending to increasingly higher values as pressure decreases. Typical
values of (Cg) can range between 200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 5,000 psia)
to 500 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 2,000 psia), increasing to 1200 x 10-6/psi
(reservoir pressure of 1,000 psia). It is mandatory for wellbore storage analysis.
respectively.
Venezuela).
216
PanSystem

16).
Cf = 3(1-2)/(E)
rock types.

(GPa)
Sandstone 10-20 0.21-0.38
Shale 5-70 0.2-0.4
Limestone 35-55 0.18-0.25
Source:
www.liv.ac.uk

(where Sw, So and Sg are the water, oil and gas saturations respectively. Where
applicable, the isothermal compressibility of the oil (Co), typically lies between 10 -
15 x 10-6/psi.)
Parameters dialog, where it is displayed for information only. It is mandatory for gas
welltest analysis.
calculations.
Check Temperature: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties
(Reference 22). Use this entry to check fluid properties at different temperatures
(e.g. to compare with lab data), but remember to compute them at the correct
temperature (conventionally the layer temperature) before proceeding to Analysis
or Simulate. It is also a mandatory entry for well test analysis, since it appears in
the inflow equation.
217
Check Pressure: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties (Reference

22). Use this entry to check fluid properties at different pressures (e.g. to compare
with lab data), but remember to compute them at the correct pressure
(conventionally the layer pressure) before proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.
Gas Specific Gravity: This is the specific gravity (relative to air) of the separator
gas, at standard conditions. It is required to compute the gas properties using
correlations. Typical values for hydrocarbon Gas mixtures range from 0.65 (Dry
Gas) to 0.95 (Wet Gas).
Water Salinity: Water salinity describes the total amount of dissolved solids in the
produced water. The salinity of pore waters in reservoirs typically increases by 6 to
160 g/L (6,000 to 160,000 ppm) per km depth. The causes of increased salinity
are:
Water/Gas Ratio (WGR): The water / gas ratio is the ratio of produced water to
produced gas. This is not used in analysis, and is for information only.
218
PanSystem
Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) Sub-Dialog
General:
Gas and checking the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox within the Fluid
Type section, then selecting the Fluid Parameters button in the Layer Control section. A
Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog is subsequently
generated to view, enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer.
Control Section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. Refer to the Gas
and Condensate Pseudo Table Editing and Pseudo Table Data sub-dialogs for
additional information on features associated with this button.
different in each layer. An Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-
dialog box can be brought up for any layer by highlighting it in the Layer Control section
of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog.
A different sub-dialog is generated when the Single-Phase Gas model is selected

from the Fluid Type section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. For this
selection users should refer to the Help topic for the Gas Fluid Parameters sub-
dialog.
checked), by selecting the PVT Calculator button for a Gas fluid type in the
This sub-dialog is comprised of three data entry sections and five function buttons. It is
used to set up and calculate the various gas fluid parameters values. The adjacent data
entry fields colored in blue indicate that they are interrelated, so changing one parameter
(e.g. water salinity) results in the associated parameter being re-calculated (e.g. water
specific gravity). The data entry fields and button functions are described as follows:
Gas Specific Gravity: Enter the gas specific gravity (at standard conditions).
Typical values for hydrocarbon gas mixtures range from 0.65 (dry gas) to
0.95 (wet gas).
Water Salinity: Enter the water salinity (NaCl equivalent) into this field, or
skip and enter the water specific gravity. If a new value is entered, this will
automatically update the Water Specific Gravity field below. The salinity of
pore waters in reservoirs typically increases by 6 to 160 g/L (6,000 to
160,000 ppm) per km depth. The causes of increased salinity are:
219
found in oil field brines. Typical salinities for oil and gas reservoirs are 30 g/L
(30,000 ppm) for sandstones and 90 g/L (90,000 ppm) for carbonates.
(80,000 to 300,000 ppm)in reservoirs deeper than 1 km.
Water Specific Gravity: Enter the water specific gravity here (or skip and
update the Water Salinity field above.
Layer Data section:
Layer Name: For each producing reservoir layer from the drop-down list
with the Normalized Pseudo-Pressure IPR model, the following fluid ratio can
be entered:
Water/Gas Ratio: Enter the produced water/gas ratio (WGR) into this
edit box.
g: Select the required gas viscosity correlation from this drop-down list
box. Users can choose from the following (References 21, 22, 35, 89 and
90):
Carr et al.
Lee et al.
Inorganics: Select this button to generate the Inorganics in Dry Gas sub-
dialog that allows entry of the inorganic impurity contents of a dry gas.
Check: Select this button to generate the Dry Gas Properties Check sub-
dialog.
Match: Select this button to generate the Match Dry Gas Properties sub-
dialog.
220
PanSystem
Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog can be accessed in two different ways, depending on whether a single-
phase or multi-phase gas/condensate option has been selected in the Reservoir
Description (Analytical) dialog:
Single-Phase Gas/Condensate: In the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog
select either the Gas or Condensate option in the Fluid Type section, then select the
Fluid Parameters button to enter the Gas Fluid Parameters or Condensate Fluid
Parameters sub-dialogs respectively. Enter this Pseudo-Table sub-dialog for a
Multi-Phase Gas or Condensate option by selecting the Pseudo Tables... button.
Multi-Phase Gas/Condensate: In the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog
select either the Gas or Condensate option and check the Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressure Method checkbox in the Fluid Type section (the latter action will activate
the Pseudo Pressures... button in the Layer Control section of the dialog). Enter
this Pseudo-Table sub-dialog for a Multi-Phase Gas or Condensate option by
selecting the Pseudo Pressures... button.
In both cases, the Gas and Condensate Pseudo Table Editing sub-dialog is used to select,
edit, import and plot pseudo-pressure tables.
Unlike the single-phase oil fluid parameters for viscosity and compressibility which are
considered to be constant over a range of pressures, the gas/condensate equivalents are
pressure-dependent. Gas compressibility is inversely proportional to pressure (i.e.
initially it is very easy to compress at low pressure and becomes increasingly difficult to
compress at higher pressures) and gas viscosity increases with pressure (i.e. molecules
are compressed closer together and molecular collisions become more frequent).
As a result of these pressure-related variations in fluid parameters (e.g. density, viscosity
and compressibility), Pseudo-Pressure formulations have been adopted to account for this
non-linear behaviour:
Single-Phase Pseudo-Pressure m(p), or Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure m'(p), removes the
non-linear behaviour caused by the variation of gas volume (Z) and viscosity (g) with
pressure. These options are computed using tables prepared in this sub-dialog. Pseudo-
tables can be generated for the pseudo-pressure integrals from fluid properties tables
(i.e. closely spaced values of p-g-z for m(p)). It is also possible to generate or import a
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Table, m'(p).
For Single-Phase Gas/Condensate:
A fluid properties table can be:
Generated internally with the Using Correlations or Using EoS options from the Gas
Fluid Parameters or Condensate Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs.
Entered manually.
Imported from an external source (e.g. an externally-generated table of p-g-z for
m(p)).
In each case, these tables may also be edited.
The Single-Phase Pseudo-Pressure m(p), is theoretically rigorous and should be

used in all single-phase situations.
221
Pseudo-Time (t'), is an empirical correction for the variation of gas viscosity (g) and
total compressibility (Ct) with pressure. This is computed from tables prepared in this
sub-dialog (i.e. closely spaced values of p-g-Ct for t').
This option is not available for the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method.

PanSystem deals with single-phase gas behaviour by using one of the following three
pressure transforms:
Pressure (p), with no transform.
Pressure-Squared (p2).
Pseudo-Pressure with or without Pseudo-Time (i.e. only available for Single-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure m(p) Table, not the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure m'(p) Table).
The first two transforms are approximations which are more or less valid depending on
test conditions:
Pressure (p), for pressures above approximately 3000 psia or tests where the
drawdown is small.
Pressure-Squared (p2), for pressures below about 3000 psia, or tests where the
drawdown is small.
During Analysis, users can select which pressure and time transform to use via the
Analysis menu with the Time Transformation and Pressure Transformation
commands.
For Multi-Phase Gas/Condensate:
The Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method for gas or condensate can be used when the
mobile reservoir fluid is made up of several mobile phases, and it provides a more
rigorous treatment of relative permeability effects and fluid property variations with
pressure. The relevant phase properties must be specified in either the Gas Fluid
Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) or Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialogs and Relative Permeability data should be checked via the
Layer Parameters dialog. It can be applied to the simultaneous flow of:
Gas with water.
Condensate systems with liquid dropout and/or water (for condensate systems, it
will account for the effects of any near wellbore liquid dropout).
Volatile oil systems with gas liberation and/or water (i.e. condensate fluid type is
used for a volatile oil).
This sub-dialog is comprised of a Table Selection List Field and seven function buttons,
Table Selection List Field: Three table types are available for single-phase
gas/condensate:
Z-Factor and Gas Viscosity (g) versus Pressure (i.e. p-g-z for m(p)).
Total Compressibility (Ct) and Gas Viscosity (g) versus Pressure (i.e. p-g-
Ct for t').
Single-Phase Pseudo-Pressure m(p) versus Pressure
Only one table type is available for multi-phase gas/condensate:
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure m'(p) versus Pressure (p)
222
PanSystem
Edit Table: Select and highlight the table to be worked on in the Table Selection
List Field, then select this button to enter new data manually or view an existing
table for editing. If the table is empty, users will first be prompted with the Pseudo
Table Data sub-dialog, where users specify the Number of Data Points and the Start
and End Pressure, then OK from this sub-dialog to enter the Edit Pseudo Table sub-
dialog. If the table is already populated with data, users are taken directly to the
Edit Pseudo Table sub-dialog, where existing data can be edited before selecting OK
or Plot.
Calculate Table: For a single-phase option, selection of this button will generate
the Edit Pseudo Table sub-dialog, where users specify the Number of Data Points
and the Start and End Pressures. After entering pressure data or accepting the
defaults, OK from the Pseudo Table Data sub-dialog to calculate a table of the
currently selected type.
For a multi-phase option, this button is used to calculate a multi-phase pseudo-
pressure table based upon user-input oil fluid parameters, relative permeabilities,
layer pressure and temperature. After the calculation is performed, the Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure (Gas and Condensate) - Data Review sub-dialog is generated.
Calculate All: For the single-phase gas and condensate, selection of this button will
generate the Pseudo Table Data sub-dialog, where users specify the Number of
Data Points and the Start and End Pressures. After entering pressure data or
accepting the defaults, OK from this sub-dialog to calculate tables of fluid properties
and pseudo-pressure m(p).
This button is not available for multi-phase options.

Import: This button is only available for importing p-g-z tables (single-phase
gas) or for importing m'(p) tables (multi-phase gas or condensate). For single-
phase gas, these PVT Files are loaded with default extension (*.PIC) in ASCII
format and for multi-phase gas or condensate, these Psi(p) or (p) Files are loaded
with default extension (*.PSP) in ASCII format. In each case, a standard Windows
Open dialog is generated for the import.
Plot: This button is used to generate a plot of the imported and/or calculated table
parameters for the currently selected table in the Table Selection List Field.
There are three options for creating pseudo tables,
Option 1(a) - Fully Automatic Calculation:
Single-Phase: Select the Calculate All button. As described above, this will
generate the Pseudo Table Data sub-dialog, where users are prompted to specify
the Start and End Pressures and Number of Points for the tables. On OK from the
sub-dialog, PanSystem will calculate all the available tables. Tables can also be
calculated individually with the Calculate button.
The default settings should be adequate, but change them if required. The End
Pressure should be higher than the Layer Pressure. The Start Pressure is best left
at zero (although the welltest pressures may not be low, remember that in
Deliverability, the AOF is computed at atmospheric pressure). The program will
extrapolate beyond the end pressures in the tables in Analysis and Deliverability if
necessary.
Select OK to accept settings or the Plot button (if required).
Multi-Phase: Select the Calculate button to calculate a multi-phase pseudo-
pressure table based upon user-input fluid parameters, relative permeabilities,
layer pressure and temperature. After the calculation is performed, the Multi-Phase
223
Pseudo-Pressure (Gas and Condensate) - Data Review sub-dialog is generated.

This sub-dialog is used to check for consistency between the parameters used in
the external program to produce the pseudo-pressure file and those currently in
PanSystem.
Select OK to return to this sub-dialog, then select OK to accept settings or the Plot
button (if required).
Option 1(b) - Manual Fluid Parameter Entry/Edit with Automatic m(p)
Integration:
Single-Phase only: Users can type or paste in the p-g-z tables (for single-phase
gas or condensate), then have PanSystem calculate the m(p) integral. Similarly,
users can type or paste in the p-g-Ct tables for the pseudo-time.
Select the table required in the Table Selection List Field, then select the Edit Table
button to enter new data manually (or view/edit an existing table).
dialog, where the Start and End Pressures and Number of Points for the table must
be entered. On OK from the Pseudo Table Data sub-dialog, PanSystem will
calculate pressure steps for the table. The Edit Pseudo Table sub-dialog will
subsequently be generated for entry/editing of the gas properties. Users can edit
the pressure values if their data is not evenly-spaced.
It is also necessary to check the mandatory fixed values in the Gas Fluid
Parameters and Condensate Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs. Ensure that values have
been entered for each parameter.
Return to the Gas and Condensate Pseudo Table Editing sub-dialog and select m(p)
Table from the Table Selection List Field, then select Calculate Table to perform the
m(p) integral. It will use the same pressure steps.
Option 2 - Manual Entry/Edit of m(p):
Single-Phase: The m(p) table can be entered or edited manually by pasting in
values from an external source or by directly typing in values (by-passing the
intermediate fluid property tables), then selecting OK to accept settings or the Plot
button (if required). .
Select m(p) Table in the Table Selection List Field, then select the Edit Table button
to generate the Edit Pseudo Table sub-dialog for data entry/editing and enter new
data manually or edit an existing table.
be entered. On OK from the Pseudo Table Data sub-dialog, PanSystem will
calculate pressure steps for the table. The Edit Pseudo Table sub-dialog will
subsequently be generated for data entry/editing.
If the pseudo-time option is also required, users must supply a p--Ct table, either
by direct entry or calculation. Return to this sub-dialog and select Viscosity/Ct
Table in the Table Selection List Field, then select the Edit Table or Calculate
buttons.
Multi-Phase: The m'(p) table can be entered or edited manually by pasting in
values from an external source or by directly typing in values, then selecting OK to
accept settings or the Plot button (if required).
Select m'(p) Table in the Table Selection List Field, then select the Edit Table button
to generate the Edit Pseudo Table sub-dialog for data entry/editing and enter new
data manually or edit an existing table.
224
PanSystem
be entered. On OK from this sub-dialog, PanSystem will calculate pressure steps
for the table. The Edit Pseudo Table sub-dialog will subsequently be generated for
further data entry/editing.
Note that when performing a manual data entry/edit by pasting, the multi-phase
pseudo-pressure data must be tab separated. When typing or pasting, data
must always be m'(p) data, not Psi(p) or (p) data.
Option 3 - Import of External Pseudo-Pressure Table:
Single-Phase: Users can import p-g-z tables (single-phase gas only). These
PVT Files are loaded with default extension (*.PIC) in ASCII format (users should
refer to Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (*.PSP) File for details of this file format).
Note that the (*.PIC) file format, which was implemented to meet a customers
specifications, is actually P/Z/Viscosity.
Select the P/Viscosity/Z Table from the Table Selection List Field, then the Import
button.
The imported Z-factor data and gas gravity are used to compute (Bg), (Cg) and
(g) at layer pressure and temperature in the Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog, to
ensure consistency. The p/viscosity/Ct table is also updated, or created,
automatically. The m(p) table is also created.
There should therefore be no need to Calculate any Fluid Parameters after
importing a (*.PIC) file.
Multi-Phase: Users can import m'(p) tables (multi-phase gas or condensate).
These Psi(p) or (p) Files are loaded with default extension (*.PSP) in ASCII
format (users should refer to Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (*.PSP) File for details of
this file format).
Select the m'(p) Table from the Table Selection List Field, then the Import button.
A standard Windows Open dialog is generated for the import (e.g. from WellFlo data
file), then the file is internally converted to an m'(p) format within PanSystem.
The import process generates the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (Gas and
Condensate) - Data Review sub-dialog. This sub-dialog is used to check for
consistency between the parameters used in the external program to produce the
pseudo-pressure file and those currently in PanSystem.
Select OK to return to this sub-dialog, then select OK to accept settings or the Plot
button (if required).
225
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (Gas and Condensate)

Data Review Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing
sub-dialog, after selecting either the Calculate, Calculate All or Import buttons.
The sub-dialog is comprised of three columns:
Transfer Value?: The incoming values will overwrite the current PanSystem values
unless the left-hand checkbox(es) is/are unchecked.
New Value: Some of the key parameters associated with the external pseudo-
pressure table generation and read from the incoming file.
Current Value: The corresponding internal values current in PanSystem.
This dialog is used primarily to check for consistency between the parameters used in
WellFlo to produce the pseudo-pressure file, and those used in PanSystem for the well
test in question - they should be the same.
The fluid saturations are for information only. These were computed in WellFlo for the
specified produced water fraction (if any), using relative permeability tables. They
indicate the saturations (at Layer Pressure and Layer Temperature) at which multi-phase
flow is occurring. The relative permeabilities are also for information only, except the
relative permeability to gas which is used to correct the calculation of permeability.
226
PanSystem
Pseudo-Table Data Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing
or Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialogs by selecting either the Calculate Table or
Calculate All buttons.
It can also be accessed by selecting the Edit Table button when the table is empty. In
this case, users will be prompted initially with this sub-dialog.
The default settings should be adequate, but change them if required.
This sub-dialog is comprised of three data entry fields, described as follows:
Number of Points: The number of data points to include in the table. This can be
edited later in the Edit Pseudo Table sub-dialog.
Start Pressure: This is best left at zero.
Although Well Test Pressures may not be low, remember that, in Deliverability, the
AOF is computed at atmospheric pressure.
End Pressure: This should be higher than the Layer Pressure.
The program will extrapolate beyond the end pressures in the table in Analysis and
Deliverability if necessary.
A standard PanSystem table editing sub-dialog, Edit Pseudo Table will follow for data
entry/editing. The table title will carry the name of the currently selected table type from
the Table Selection List Field (e.g. Edit P/m/Z Table).
227
Edit Pseudo-Table Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is either accessed:
Directly: From the Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing or Oil
Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialogs by selecting the Edit Table button.
Indirectly: If the table is empty, users will first be prompted with the Pseudo Table
Data sub-dialog where they must specify the Number of Data Points and the Start
and End Pressures; after entering data or accepting the defaults and selecting OK, a
table of pseudo-pressures is calculated and this sub-dialog is generated.
The dialog will have a header appropriate to the table being edited (e.g. m(p) for
single-phase and m'(p) for multi-phase).
side of slider).
one cell).
Function.
Clear.
Excel).
tab-separated.
the insertion point in the time column and select the Paste button - do not
use Ctrl+V from the keyboard.
228
PanSystem
Time: Change the time format. De-activated within this dialog.
Names: Change the column names. De-activated within this dialog.
229
Gas and Condensate Composition Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Gas Fluid Parameters or Condensate Fluid
Parameters sub-dialogs (single-phase) by selecting the Gas Composition... button. It is
used to input the component molecular fractions of inorganics and where required, the
hydrocarbon gas components and to calculate the gas or condensate gravity based on
this composition.
This sub-dialog is used in two different ways depending on the whether the Use
Correlations or Use EoS option was selected in the Gas Fluid Parameters or Condensate
Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs:
Inorganics correction for Correlations: When using correlations to calculate
gas properties, the mole-percentages of non-hydrocarbon "inorganics" (N2 , H2S
and CO2) need to be entered. Corrections will then be applied to (z) and (g), using
the equations of Wichert & Aziz (Appendix A in Reference 21). There is no need to
specify the hydrocarbon composition of the gas, since equations of state are not
being used.
Do not use the Calculate or Normalize buttons in this case, but OK back to the Gas
Fluid Parameters or Condensate Fluid Parameters sub-dialog and select Calculate.
Equations of State (EoS) Calculations: For this option, the various component
mole-fractions (C1 - C7+ and N2 , H2S and CO2), that make-up the gas in the layer
must be entered. From this data the gas gravity and critical temperature and
pressure can be calculated and the Schmidt-Wenzel Equation of State is used to
compute the z-factor (References 36 and 37). The other gas properties are then
derived from these using the correlations described previously. If these molecular
fractions do not total 100% exactly, a normalization process can be applied to
adjust each fraction proportionately by the requisite amount.
This sub-dialog is comprised of a data entry section, a display field and four function
buttons, described as follows:
Component Molecular Fractions: Enter the mole-percentages of non-hydrocarbon
"inorganics" (i.e. H2S , CO2 , N2) and/or the hydrocarbon gas fractions to C7+ in
the relevant data entry fields as described above. The mole-fractions should total
100.0% with a small tolerance.
Calculated Gas Gravity From Composition: The gas gravity will be displayed in this
field after selecting the Calculate button (with or without using the Normalize
button) - for EoS method only.
If the molecular fractions do not total 100%, users will be prompted to either
correct a possible error or to Normalize them all to achieve a total of 100.0%. In
the latter case, use the Normalise button, then the Calculate button again, to
calculate the Gas Gravity From Composition.
After calculation, select OK to return to the Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog. The fluid
properties can then be calculated using the equations of state (EoS).
230
PanSystem
For the Use Correlations method, simply enter the inorganics, then select OK to
return to the Gas Fluid Parameters or Condensate Fluid Parameters sub-dialog to
Calculate as described above.
For either method, select Cancel to ignore any changes made to the Gas Composition in
this sub-dialog.
231
Correction to Datum for Gas and Condensate Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog can be accessed from either the Gas Fluid Parameters or Condensate Fluid
Parameters sub-dialogs, by selecting the Datum Input... button. This facility corrects all
pressures computed from diagnostic plot analysis (i.e. p*, etc.) to a reference datum
depth, by adding or subtracting the appropriate hydrostatic pressure difference.
Depth and Gas Gradient section: Enter the vertical depths of the Pressure
Gauge and the Reference Datum (i.e. relative to the same zero level - e.g. mean
sea level (MSL)). Enter the Gas Gradient and check the Apply Correction...
checkbox to enable the datum correction. It can be disabled by un-checking the
box.
Oil Data section: An optional field depending on whether a gas/water fluid
contact is present or not. Enter the Oil Gradient and depth to the Gas/Oil Fluid
Contact.
Water Data section: Also an optional field depending on whether an oil/water
fluid contact is present or not. Enter the Water Gradient and depth to the
Gas/Water Fluid Contact.
232
PanSystem
Inorganics in Dry Gas Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressures) sub-dialog by selecting the Inorganics button and allows entry of the inorganic
impurity contents of a dry gas.
When using correlations to calculate gas properties, users can input mole-percentages of
non-hydrocarbon "inorganics" (i.e. H2S , CO2 , N2) in this sub-dialog. Corrections will
then be applied to (z) and (g), using the equations of Wichert & Aziz (Appendix A in
Reference 21).
This sub-dialog is comprised of three data entry sections described as follows:
Mole Fraction of H2S: Input the mole-percentage of hydrogen sulfide in this field.
Mole Fraction of CO2: Input the mole-percentage of carbon dioxide in this field.
Mole Fraction of N2: Input the mole-percentage of nitrogen in this field.
There is no need to specify the hydrocarbon composition of the gas, since the equations
of state (EoS) are not being used.
For the Wichert-Aziz correction to be valid, neither H2S nor CO2 nor their sum may
exceed 80%, and the sum of all three impurities may not exceed 99%.
Changes to the inorganic fractions may be found to invalidate the total gas gravity
already entered in the Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-
dialog. In this case, a warning message is presented after selecting OK.
233
Dry Gas Properties Check Sub-Dialog
General:
Pressures) sub-dialog, by selecting the Check button.
functional buttons. It allows users to calculate the properties of gas and water (even if a
water/gas ratio (WGR) of zero has been specified) at any Temperature and Pressure. The
data entry fields and button functions are described as follows:
Check Temperature: Type in the temperature value that fluid properties are
to be checked at.
Check Pressure: Type in the pressure value that fluid properties are to be
checked at.
Select the Calculate button to calculate the displayed PVT parameters (the Sigma w
parameter is the surface tension of water relative to air).
All fluid properties are re-calculated at prevailing conditions wherever necessary
using the input data specified in the Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressures) sub-dialog.
Set the pressure and temperature to reservoir conditions before leaving this
section.
234
PanSystem
Match Dry Gas Properties Sub-Dialog
General:
Pressures) sub-dialog, by selecting the Match button.
This sub-dialog has five main sections and eight functional buttons. It allows users to
tune the dry gas correlations against measured data using a minimization routine.

The data entry fields and button options are described as follows:
used to select the PVT properties for the tuning process.
from the drop-down list menu. Two choices are available:
Gas Viscosity (g).
Z-factor.
Using Correlation: The correlation displayed is the one previously assigned
for each selected property within the Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase
An asterisk (*) beside the name of the displayed correlation indicates that a
fluid property has already been tuned using this correlation.
dialog and is used to display the current tuning coefficients (i.e. multiplier - upper
number and shift - lower number), for the selected Match Property and Correlation.
re-set the selected correlation back to the un-tuned state (i.e. multiplier = 1
and shift = 0).
The tuning performed here will be used throughout the data set unless the
tuning parameters are Reset.
sub-dialog.
matrix, at the specified pressure/s and temperature/s. To calculate a set of
values at different pressures and/or temperatures, enter any non-zero
numbers here (e.g. 1), then select the Calculate button at the base of the
sub-dialog. To perform a best-fit analysis, only valid observed data should
be entered, then select the Best-Fit button at the base of the sub-dialog.
Enter the pressure/s at which the observed data was measured (either
235
Temperature: These values are entered as row ends (left) in the table
matrix. Enter the temperature/s at which the observed data was measured
(either overtype or retain defaults).
table cells.
Calculated values will appear in the corresponding cells of the
pressure/temperature matrix providing that non-zero numbers have been entered
into the Observed Values section of the table matrix.
follows:
Calculate: Select this button to see the effect of the current tuning
coefficients on the user input observed values. Numbers will be generated
in the Calculated Values pressure/temperature matrix where non-zero
numbers have been entered in the corresponding cells within the Observed
Values matrix.
Best-Fit: Select this button to perform a best-fit calculation on the entered
Observed Values. The Multiply and Shift values (initially 1.0 and 0.0) in the
Tuning Parameters section, are adjusted to minimize the overall error and
the optimized parameter values will be displayed.
pressures, temperatures and Calculated Values, and transfer them to the
Windows Clipboard. This information can subsequently be pasted into
another clipboard-enabled application such as Notepad, WordPad, Word or
Excel.
Plot: Select this button to plot the Observed Values and Calculated Values
of the current Match Property, provided there is at least one line or column
in the table matrix with multiple values.
If there is only one line or column of multiple values in the matrix, further use
of Plot is allowed, to compare the results of successive calculations. For
example, these might be performed with/without Best-Fit, or with different
property correlations (i.e. selected by returning to the Gas Fluid Parameters
(Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog).
If there are several lines of multiple values in the matrix, the Plot button
generates a PVT Match Plot Selection sub-dialog from which to select the
vertical or horizontal line of values to be plotted. This multiple choice of
values excludes the option, described above, to plot the results of multiple
calculations for a single line of values.
236
PanSystem
Condensate Fluid Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
Condensate within the Fluid Type section, then selecting the Fluid Parameters button in
the Layer Control section. A Condensate Fluid Parameters sub-dialog is subsequently
generated to view, enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of the currently selected layer.
This dialog is similar to that for gas, but several new parameters must be quantified
(refer also to Gas Fluid Parameters and Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs).
different in each layer. A Condensate Fluid Parameters sub-dialog box can be brought up
for any layer by highlighting it in the Layer Control section of the Reservoir Description
For the condensate multi-phase option, users need to check the Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressure Method (Condensate) checkbox in the Fluid Type section of the Reservoir
Description (Analytical) dialog. The sub-dialog is titled Condensate Fluid Parameters
(Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) in the latter case. With this option, users can generate
or import a multiphase pseudo-pressure table which will allow a more rigorous treatment
of condensate fluid properties (e.g. liquid drop-out, etc.) and relative permeability effects.

dialog. Users should refer to the Help topic for Condensate Fluid Parameters
(Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog.
unchecked), by selecting the PVT Calculator button for a Condensate fluid type in
the Material Properties tabbed dialog.
This sub-dialog is comprised of six data entry sections and four function buttons and the
following table identifies the condensate parameters required for each type of analysis,
test or calculation:
Purpose Using Using Using EoS

Correlations Correlations (Reservoir
(Separator (Reservoir Fluid)
Fluid) Fluid)
Analysis T(layer), Bg, g, T(layer), Bg, g, T(layer), Bg, g,
Cf, Ct, z, Vvap Cf, Ct, z, Vvap Cf, Ct, z, Vvap
On-Screen P(layer), P(layer), P(layer),

Calculation T(layer), T(layer), T(layer),
Separator Gas, Reservoir Gas, Reservoir Fluid,
237
Specific Gravity, Specific Gravity, Specific Gravity

API, CGR, Psep, API, CGR, Psep, and Composition,
Tsep Tsep API, CGR, Psep,
Tsep
However, not all parameters displayed actually need to be quantified for well test
analysis purposes; users have the option to de-select the values for Cg, Cw, Cf and/or Ct,
if they specifically require to do so. This is achieved by clicking on the associated check
boxes to clear them, then only the remaining marked boxes will be updated by Calculate.
During the Calculate process, the individual rock and fluid compressibilities are normally
computed from correlations and combined in the total compressibility Ct. If users wish to
enter their own values for any of these compressibilities, type in a preferred value, then
switch off the check box next to the parameter as outlined above. The Calculate process
will then include this value in the Ct calculation.
The Calculate button will not overwrite any data whose check box has been
switched off.
The Calculate button is already enabled with Use Correlations checkbox as the default
setting. Users can choose an appropriate correlation for gas viscosity (g) and vaporizing
volume ratio (Vvap), from the drop-down list box provided, or check the Using EoS
checkbox and select from a similar drop-down list box. This will either calculate gas
properties at the specified pressure and temperature Using Correlations (i.e. from a
specified gas gravity) or an Equation of State (i.e. from a specified gas composition).
Enter the parameters listed in the appropriate table section above, from the On-Screen
Calculation row.
For the Using Correlations option the gas properties are computed at the specified
Check Pressure and Check Temperature (i.e. nominally set equal to the layer
conditions). For the Using EoS option the full gas composition from C1 - C7+ will
be required and these data are input by selecting the Gas Composition button to
generate the Gas and Condensate Composition sub-dialog.
There are two classes of calculations associated with condensate fluid properties. All
calculations are made at the specified Check Pressure and Check Temperature:
Calculate reservoir fluid properties via correlations (Use Correlations option) or by
equation of state (Use EoS option) in the same manner as for Gas (single-phase)
fluid type. The separator gas gravity is corrected to the recombined wet stream
gas gravity for these calculations.
Calculate the volumetric correction from primary separator gas rates to recombined
wet stream gas rates, allowing for the vaporisation of the surface condensate
fraction at reservoir conditions. The reservoir fluid is then assumed to be single-
phase rich gas. This is made via a selected correlation for the Vaporizing Volume
Ratio (Vvap):
Qres fluid = Qsep gas [1 + CGR Vvap 1e-06] (oil field units)
Two correlations are available:
Leshikar (Appendix A in Reference 21)
238
PanSystem
Gold, McKain and Jennings (Reference 17)

Other properties are computed with fixed correlations as described below.
There are also two ways to describe the produced fluids for the calculation of fluid
properties:
Separator Fluids option:
For Use Correlations: The gas rate and gravity are assumed to correspond
to the high pressure separator gas. Using the condensate/gas ratio (CGR)
and condensate gravity, it is converted to the equivalent reservoir rich gas
gravity and this is used as input to the correlations to compute the fluid
properties.
For Use EOS: This option is not allowed.
Reservoir Fluids option:
For Use Correlations: The gas gravity is taken as the single-phase rich gas
gravity in the reservoir (measured at standard conditions). This gravity is
used directly by the correlations without correction.
For Use EOS: The Gas and Condensate Composition must be supplied and
is taken as the rich gas composition in the reservoir.
In all cases, the calculated volumetric correction is applied to all gas flow rate data used
in Analysis, this normally being specified as a primary separator gas rate. If users have
a direct value of downhole flow rates at standard conditions, it is possible to disable the
correction simply by setting the Vvap term to zero.
In addition, tables of g , z and g , Ct can be computed (or edited) for the pseudo-
pressure and pseudo-time integrals. A facility is also available to import an externally-
generated table of viscosity and z-factor values against pressure. There is a conventional
real gas pseudo-pressure generation facility, and it is also possible to generate or import
a multi-phase pseudo-pressure table. These options are accessed via selection of the
Pseudo-Tables button (refer to the Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing
and Pseudo-Tables Data sub-dialogs).
Input (Gas and Condensate) sub-dialog.
pressure and temperature for well test analysis:
Bg: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the gas. Typical values range between
0.002 and 0.2, with values of (Bg) increasing with decreasing reservoir pressure. It
is mandatory for gas well test analysis.
g: The viscosity of the gas. A typical value of gas viscosity at reservoir conditions
is 0.025 cp, which is approximately 40 times smaller than light oils with an API
gravity of 40 - 50, which exhibit viscosities of around 1cp. Gas viscosity values
should decrease as reservoir pressure decreases. It is mandatory for gas well test
analysis.
Z: The gas deviation factor or Z-factor corresponding to each pressure
measurement (Reference 21, Appendix A). This is a dimensionless parameter that
represents the degree of deviation from ideal gas behaviour, with a range of values
lying between 0.3 and 2.0. At high reservoir pressure the Z-factor is at a
239
maximum, but as pressure decreases, the Z-factor falls to a minimum value, then
rises again in hyperbolic fashion to approach unity. It is mandatory for analysis.
Bw: The formation volume factor (FVF) of the water. Although dissolved salts and
gases can affect the water FVF these effects are often ignored. Typically, the
water FVF lies within the range 0.99 - 1.07.
w: The viscosity of the water. Water viscosity is dependent on pressure,
temperature and salinity. In general, brine viscosity increases with increasing
pressure, increasing salinity and decreasing temperature. Typically, the water
viscosity lies within the range 0.2 - 2.5 cp.
Cg: The isothermal compressibility of the gas (Appendix A of Reference 21). Gas
compressibility is almost hyperbolic in relation to pressure, with low values at high
pressure, tending to increasingly higher values as pressure decreases. Typical
values of (Cg) can range between 200 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 5,000 psia)
to 500 x 10-6/psi (reservoir pressure of 2,000 psia), increasing to 1200 x 10-6/psi
(reservoir pressure of 1,000 psia). It is mandatory for wellbore storage analysis.
respectively.
Venezuela).
16).
Cf = 3(1-2)/(E)
rock types.

(GPa)
240
PanSystem
Sandstone 10-20 0.21-0.38
Shale 5-70 0.2-0.4
Limestone 35-55 0.18-0.25
Source:
www.liv.ac.uk

(where Sw, So and Sg are the water, oil and gas saturations respectively. Where
applicable, the isothermal compressibility of the oil (Co), typically lies between 10 -
15 x 10-6/psi.)
Parameters dialog, where it is displayed for information only. It is mandatory for gas
welltest analysis.
calculations.
Check Temperature: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties
(Reference 22). Use this entry to check fluid properties at different temperatures
(e.g. to compare with lab data), but remember to compute them at the correct
temperature (conventionally the layer temperature) before proceeding to Analysis
or Simulate. It is also a mandatory entry for well test analysis, since it appears in
the inflow equation.
Check Pressure: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties (Reference
22). Use this entry to check fluid properties at different pressures (e.g. to compare
with lab data), but remember to compute them at the correct pressure
(conventionally the layer pressure) before proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.
Separator Pressure: This refers to the high pressure separator.
Separator Temperature: This refers to the high pressure separator.
Condensate Gas Ratio (CGR): The CGR is the ratio of the condensate liquid to gas
produced at the primary (i.e. high pressure) separator, converted to standard
conditions. This term also defined as (rv), represents the condensate yield
recovered by the surface separators. A gas condensate system is generally
classified as a gas reservoir with a condensate liquid/gas ratio (CGR) greater than
10-500 stb/MMscf.
241
Condensate Gravity (o): This is the gravity of the stock tank liquid expressed at
standard conditions. Specific gravities of oil generally lie between 0.73 to slightly
Gas Specific Gravity (g): : For the Separator Fluids option, this is the specific
gravity of the high pressure separator gas, converted to standard conditions. For
the Reservoir Fluids option, it is the gravity of the rich reservoir gas, at standard
conditions. In both cases, it is measured relative to air (=1). It is entered directly
for Use Correlations option, or computed from the compositional data for Use EoS
option. Typical values for hydrocarbon gas mixtures range from 0.65 (dry gas) to
0.95 (wet gas).
Water/Gas Ratio (WGR): The water/gas ratio is the ratio of produced water to
produced gas. This is not used in analysis, and is for information only.
Water Salinity: Water salinity describes the total amount of dissolved solids in the
produced water. The salinity of pore waters in reservoirs typically increases by 6 to
160 g/L (6,000 to 160,000 ppm) per km depth. The causes of increased salinity
are:
Condensate Vaporising Volume Ratio (Vvap): This is the volume of vapour
(measured at standard conditions) that a unit stock tank volume of condensate
liquid occupies in the reservoir, assuming the reservoir to be above the dew point.
Defining Condensate Properties:
Option 1: Manual entry of mandatory parameters:
In this case, the parameters appearing in red in the dialog box are entered, (i.e.
listed in the "Analysis" section of the table displayed above): Tlayer, Bg, g, z, Ct
and Vvap.
Option 2: Calculation of parameters:
Enter the properties listed in the "On-Screen Calculation" section of the table
displayed above. The three available options are also explained above; these are:
Reservoir Fluid with Use EOS option: Enter the gas composition via the Gas and
Condensate Composition sub-dialog.
Reservoir Fluid with Use Correlations option: Enter rich gas gravity. The gas
Inorganics can be entered in the Gas and Condensate Composition sub-dialog.
Enter the CGR, Condensate Gravity and Psep, Tsep for the Vvap calculation.
Separator Fluid with Use Correlations option: Enter primary (i.e. high pressure)
separator Gas Gravity, CGR, Psep, Tsep and stock tank Condensate Gravity for the
fluid property and Vvap calculations. The gas Inorganics can be entered in the Gas
and Condensate Composition sub-dialog.
242
PanSystem
Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) Sub-Dialog
General:
Condensate and checking the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox within the
Fluid Type section, then selecting the Fluid Parameters button in the Layer Control
section. A Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog is
subsequently generated to view, enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of the currently
selected layer.
Control Section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. Refer to the Gas
and Condensate Pseudo Table Editing and Pseudo Table Data sub-dialogs for
additional information on features associated with this button.
different in each layer. A Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures)
sub-dialog box can be brought up for any layer by highlighting it in the Layer Control
section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog.
A different sub-dialog is generated when the Single-Phase Condensate is selected

from the Fluid Type section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. For this
selection users should refer to the Help topic for the Condensate Fluid Parameters
sub-dialog.
For a condensate well test, the multiphase pseudo-pressure function rigorously models
flow above and below the dew point (i.e. liquid drop-out), with or without water
production. This approach accounts not only for the variation of fluid properties with
pressure, but also the variations in relative permeability as fluid properties and
saturations change with pressure. It is therefore particularly useful for tests where the
flowing pressure falls below the dew point.
checked), by selecting the PVT Calculator button for a Condensate fluid type in the
No general correlations are available to model the PVT behaviour of gas condensates or
volatile oils, which are referred to collectively as r;near-critical fluids. Traditionally, an
Equation of State (EoS) is used to model such fluids, and this requires a detailed
compositional analysis to be performed by a laboratory on samples of live fluid.
Invariably, the equivalent EoS model then has to be tuned to measured property
variations on the fluid samples before being used in predictive mode.
In PanSystems Condensate Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option, the Gas and Oil
Gravities and the Layer CGR are used as constraints in the determination of the fluid
composition for each layer in terms of four pseudo-components (Reference 59). The
four-component model is a balance between accuracy of fluid property prediction (i.e.
ideally performed using a full and detailed compositional analysis), and speed of
calculation/ease of use (i.e. achieved by reducing the number of components).
The use of four r;pseudo-components, with the additional capability of tuning the
computed results, has been found to be highly effective in modeling a wide range of
243
Condensate Fluid systems. The reduced user input requirement of two Stock-Tank
Gravities and a CGR also makes problem initialization very easy.
In the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure method, the Oil and Gas Gravities should refer
to the total Fluid Production, not just the primary Separator. The Gas Production
Rate should also refer to the total Gas Production, expressed at standard
conditions. The method effectively assumes a single-stage flash of Reservoir Fluid
to Stock-Tank conditions.
This sub-dialog is comprised of three data entry sections and four function buttons. It is
used to set up and calculate the various condensate fluid parameter values. The adjacent
data entry fields colored in blue indicate that they are interrelated, so changing one
parameter (e.g. Oil API Gravity) results in the associated parameter being re-calculated
(e.g. Oil Specific Gravity). The data entry fields and button functions are described as
follows:
Oil API Gravity: Enter the Oil API Gravity here (or skip and enter the Oil
Specific Gravity). If a new value is entered, this will automatically update
the underlying Oil Specific Gravity field.
Oil Specific Gravity: Enter the Oil Specific Gravity here (or skip and enter Oil
API Gravity). If a new value is entered, this will automatically update the
overlying Oil API Gravity field. The Specific Gravities of Oil generally lie
between 0.73 to slightly above 1.0 and in API Gravity terms, the usual range
starts with Water Density at 10 and rises to Volatile Oils and Condensate
liquids at around 60-70.
Gas Specific Gravity: Enter the Gas Specific Gravity (at standard
conditions). Typical values for hydrocarbon Gas mixtures range from 0.65
(Dry Gas) to 0.95 (Wet Gas).
Water Salinity: Enter the Water Salinity (NaCl equivalent) into this field, or
skip and enter the Water Specific Gravity. If a new value is entered, this
will automatically update the underlying Water Specific Gravity field. The
salinity of pore waters in Reservoirs typically increases by 6 to 160 g/L
found in oil field brines. Typical salinities for Oil and Gas Reservoirs are 30
g/L (30,000 ppm) for sandstones and 90 g/L (90,000 ppm) for carbonates.
(80,000 to 300,000 ppm)in reservoirs deeper than 1 km.
Water Specific Gravity: Enter the Water Specific Gravity here (or skip and
update the overlying Water Salinity field.
Layer Data section:
Layer Name: For each producing reservoir layer from the drop-down list
with the Normalized Pseudo-Pressure IPR model, the following fluid ratios
can be entered:
244
PanSystem
Produced CGR: Enter the Produced Condensate/Gas Ratio (CGR) into

this field.
Water/Gas Ratio: Enter the Produced Water/Gas Ratio (WGR) into
this field.
Only the EPS Internal Equation of State can be used for Condensates
(Reference 59).
Check: Select this button to generate the Condensate Properties Check sub-
dialog.
Match: Select this button to generate the Match Condensate Properties sub-
dialog.
245
Condensate Properties Check Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressures) sub-dialog, by selecting the Check button.
functional buttons. It allows users to view the phase properties and phase split at any
specified pressure, temperature and CGR. The data entry fields and button functions are
Check Pressure: Enter the pressure value that fluid properties are to be
checked at.
Check Temperature: Enter the temperature value that fluid properties are
to be checked at.
Condensate Gas Ratio: Enter the producing condensate/gas ratio (CGR) that
fluid properties are to be checked at.
Jones and Raghaven (Reference 63), recommend using the producing CGR
rather than the reservoir CGR when using multi-phase pseudo-pressure.
Select the Calculate button to calculate the dew point pressure and other related
PVT parameters according to the EPS correlation and the test conditions entered in
the Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog. If the
calculated results are grayed out, it means that one of the check values has been
changed, so these results no longer relate to the data. Selecting this button will re-
evaluate the PVT at the entered check values.
Users will probably need to Tune the EoS in order to match measured data (refer to
the Match Condensate Properties sub-dialog). Set the pressure and temperature to
reservoir conditions before proceeding to analysis.
The Relative Volume is defined as the total volume (at check pressure), divided by
the volume at dew point. It therefore equals 1.0 at pressure = dew point.
The parameters Vo and Vg are the volumetric fractions of the oil and gas phases
respectively (at the check pressure). Term Vo = 0.0 at the dew point. The
retrograde liquid drop-out (not displayed in this sub-dialog) is simply Vo x relative
volume.
At pressures above dew point, the viscosity and density displayed for oil are set
equal to those of gas for convenience.
The terms Sigma o and Sigma w represent the surface tensions of oil and water
respectively, relative to air.
Dew-Point/Bubble-Point Systems:
Depending on the gas and oil gravities specified, increasing the CGR will tend to take the
fluid type from gas condensate towards volatile oil. Eventually, the saturation pressure
will change from a dew-point to a bubble-point as it passes through the critical pressure.
246
PanSystem
Since this fluid model is primarily designed for gas condensate systems, a warning
message will be issued if a bubble point system is detected.
However, users can continue to work with the condensate system they have defined.
It is possible to tune the condensate properties to match measured data. The multi-
phase pseudo-pressure incorporates fluid properties (including liquid dropout) over a wide
range of pressures, so tuning is advisable where PVT data are available.
247
Match Condensate Properties Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressures) sub-dialog, by selecting the Match button.
Each calculation in this sub-dialog assumes constant composition (constant mass)

expansion. Do not tune to constant volume depletion measurements.
No general correlations are available to model the PVT behaviour of gas condensates or,
for that matter, volatile oils, which are referred to collectively as "near-critical fluids".
Traditionally, an Equation of State (EoS), is used to model such fluids and this requires a
detailed compositional analysis to be performed by a laboratory on samples of live fluid.
Invariably, the equivalent EoS model then has to be tuned to measured property
variations on the fluid samples before being used in predictive mode.
In PanSystem's Condensate Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option, the gas and oil gravities
and the layer CGR are used as constraints in the determination of the fluid composition
for each layer in terms of four pseudo-components. The four-component model is a
balance between:
Accuracy of fluid property prediction (i.e. ideally performed using a full and detailed
compositional analysis).
Speed of calculation and ease of use (i.e. achieved by reducing the number of
components).
The use of four "Pseudo-Components", with the additional capability of Tuning the
computed results, has been found to be highly effective in modeling a wide range of
Condensate fluid systems. The reduced user input requirement of two Stock Tank
Gravities and a CGR also makes problem initialization very easy (refer to the Tuning
Section below for additional details).
This sub-dialog has five main sections and seven functional buttons. It allows users to
Tune the Condensate Correlation against measured data using a minimization routine.

Any or all of the listed parameters can be tuned. At the very least, the dew point and
liquid dropout should be tuned if possible, as they strongly affect the relative permeability
in the wellbore vicinity. It is equally important to have good relative permeability data.
To tune a parameter, enter at least one pressure/CGR pair with an observed value.
Since each row in the table is for a constant CGR, it is only suited to CCE (constant
composition expansion) experiments. The EoS does not handle CVD (constant
volume depletion) experiments, where the CGR changes at each step, as liquid is
removed (the API gravity of the condensate liquid will also change). For instance,
when matching to liquid dropout data at a spread of pressures from a PVT report,
use CCE data when available. If the available data is CVD, only the first pressure
below dew point can be used for tuning at the original CGR.
The data entry fields and button options are described as follows:
248
PanSystem
used to select the PVT properties and set the Test Temperature (if required), for the
tuning process.
from the drop-down list menu. Seven choices are available:
Dew Pt. Pressure (Pb).
Liquid Drop-Out.
Relative Volume.
Gas Z-factor.
Oil Viscosity (o).
Gas Viscosity (g).
Surface Tension.
Test Temperature: The default temperature corresponds to the temperature
specified for the currently selected layer in the Layer Parameters dialog.
Users may change this if they wish to perform tuning at a different
temperature.
dialog and is used to display the current tuning coefficients for the selected Match
Property and the EoS. Up to three internal EoS coefficients will be adjusted,
depending on the Match Property selected and the number of Observed Values
specified. The deviation of these coefficients from their initial values will be
indicated by the values displayed in this section. The quality of the fit is presented
in the Match section. It should be larger after tuning than before, with a maximum
value of 1.0.
re-set the status of the selected Match Property back to an un-tuned state.
Once a parameter has been tuned, all subsequent calculations of that

parameter and any that depend on it, will include the effects of the tuning
unless the tuning parameters are Reset.
sub-dialog.
matrix, at the specified Pressure/s and CGR/s. To calculate a set of values
at different Pressures and/or CGR's, enter any non-zero numbers here (e.g.
1), then select the Calculate button at the base of the sub-dialog. To
perform a best-fit analysis, only valid observed data should be entered,
then select the Best-Fit button at the base of the sub-dialog.
Enter the Pressure/s at which the observed data was measured (either
If dew-point pressure is selected in Match Property, the Pressure data fields

across the top of the table matrix are irrelevant and are grayed out. Only
one observed value can be entered per specified CGR in this case.
249
Condensate/Gas Ratio (CGR): These values are entered as row ends (left)
in the table matrix. Enter the CGR/s at which the observed data was
measured (either overtype or retain defaults).
table cells.
Calculated values will appear in the corresponding cells of the Pressure/CGR matrix
providing that non-zero numbers have been entered into the Observed Values
section of the table matrix.
follows:
Calculate: By selecting this button any Pressure/CGR cell in the Observed
Values section of the table matrix containing a non-zero value will cause a
corresponding field in the lower Calculated Values section to be computed.
The Pressure and CGR values in this area are updated automatically for
reference, and nothing in the calculated data area can be edited. Provided
no tuning has yet been performed, all calculated values will correspond to
the untuned EoS.
Best-Fit: Select this button to start the non-linear minimisation and perform
a best-fit calculation on the entered Observed Values.
Pressures, CGR's and Calculated Values, and transfer them to the Windows
Clipboard. This information can subsequently be pasted into another
clipboard-enabled application such as Notepad, WordPad, Word or Excel.
Principles of Tuning:
The EoS Tuning takes particular EoS intrinsic parameters such as Critical Temperatures,
Critical Volumes or Volume Shift Coefficients (depending on the required property) and
adjusts them according to a non-linear least-squares minimization to obtain a Best-Fit.
The appropriate intrinsic parameters will be selected automatically, depending on the
property to be Matched and number of Observed Values entered.
The properties available for Tuning on the drop-down menu in the Match Property field
are treated in categories, according to a hierarchical approach which requires a three-
stage adjustment:
1. Dew-Point and Liquid Drop-Out: The Dew-Point (or Bubble-Point) and Liquid Drop-
Out are generally most sensitive to the proportions and characteristics of the
heaviest components and in particular, their Critical Temperatures.
2. Volumetrics: Volumetric properties such as Relative Volume and Z-Factor (of vapor
phase) both depend on the Gas Z-Factor. The Peneloux Volume Correction used in
the three-parameter Peng-Robinson EoS (PR3) (Reference 81), is calculated after
Dew-Point Pressure and Liquid Drop-Out have been evaluated. Therefore, the
volume correction coefficients can safely be adjusted to Match these volumetric
quantities without changing the phase determination.
250
PanSystem
3. Viscosities, Surface Tension of Oil (relative to Air): The Viscosities are calculated
from the two reference component Corresponding States method presented by
Aasberg-Petersen and Stenby. The Surface Tension (Oil) uses the Macleod-Sugden
correlation (References 82 and 83 respectively).
The advantage of this method is that the Tuning used at Stage 3 has no effect on the
properties evaluated at Stage 2 and Stage 1, etc.
The Need for Tuning:
As mentioned above, an EoS using 20 or more components (corresponding to very
detailed compositional analysis), rarely predicts measured Fluid Properties such as Dew-
Point Pressure and Liquid Drop-Out accurately without some degree of Tuning. With a
four-component "reduced" model, Tuning will be essential, particularly where the Dew-
Point and liquid drop-out are concerned:
Dew-Point: This is the lowest Pressure at which a drop of retrograde liquid can
exist. The calculated Dew-Point Pressure is most sensitive to the heaviest
pseudo-component and associated mole fractions and properties. Invariably, the
four-component EoS will calculate a Dew-Point Pressure which is too low and
therefore Tuning is strongly recommended.
Liquid Drop-Out: This is defined as the volume of retrograde liquid at a specified
Pressure + the Volume of vapor at Dew-Point and is probably the most difficult
quantity to calculate (and to measure), being a phase discriminant (i.e.
liquid/vapor) fraction. Tuning is almost always required for Liquid Drop-Out,
after Tuning the Dew-Point Pressure (which is used as an anchor point).
251
Create Composite Sub-Dialog
General:
the Create Composite button from the Layer Control section. This option is used to create
a composite layer from two or more layers.
In order create a composite, at least two Active layer names must be present in the
list box within the Layer Control section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical)
dialog.
This sub-dialog is comprised of a display section, a selection section with a drop-down
menu and two functional buttons. It allows users to combine several layers to create a
single layer with averaged properties.
Once created, the composite layer has the status of any other layer, can be edited, and is
available for selection on entry to Analysis. It will not, however, be included in an
Advanced Simulation run, since Advanced Simulation only uses the active constituent
layers.
Combining Layers section: This display section lists all the layers that will be
combined together after the Combine button is selected. To exclude a layer from
being combined, it must be "de-activated" using the Inactive button from the Layer
Control section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog.
The following composite layer properties are computed automatically as thickness-
averaged values:
All other layer and fluid parameters take their values from Layer 1.
Edit the composite layer parameters if different values are to be used.
Select Layer for Pseudo-Tables section: This section is only of significance in gas
and condensate wells. Only one set of pseudo-tables can be used in Analysis and
Simulate, and the appropriate set of tables must be selected here.
Combine: Select this button to create the composite layer. Upon return to the
Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog, the composite layer will be listed in the
Layer Control section of the dialog.
252
PanSystem
Create Commingled Sub-Dialog
General:
the Create Commingled button from the Layer Control section. This option is used to
create a Composite Layer from any two Layers in the Reservoir Description.
In order create a composite, at least two Active layer names must be present in the
list box within the Layer Control section of the Reservoir Description (Analytical)
dialog.
This sub-dialog allows users to model a two-layered system in Quick Match and Auto
Match keeping the Permeability (k) and Skin (S) of the two layers explicit. This is an
alternative to combining them into a single r;Composite Layer using thickness-averaged
values.
The advantage of this configuration is that, in addition to keeping Permeability (k) and
Skin (S) separate for each layer, the effects of cross-flow between layers can be included.
In particular, when a closed system boundary model is used, the simulation will respect
differential pressure depletion between the layers, leading to cross-flow and recharging
during build-up.
There are guidelines to be followed:
Commingled systems can only be constructed from layers whose flow models are
radial homogeneous.
Only two layers can be commingled at any one time.
Both layers must have the same Boundary Model and are assumed to have the
same initial pressures at the start of the rate history. This initial pressure is
nominally the pressure in the first line of the Rate Changes table. As for the single-
layered models, Quick Match will provide an estimate of the correct Initial Pressure
(Pi), should the specified one be wrong.
It is not necessary to create a commingled layer if Advanced Simulation is going to
be used. Advanced Simulation offers the flexibility of different boundary models
and initial pressures in each layer, plus the ability to commingle up to five layers.
If a commingled layer is set-up for use with Quick Match, it will not be included in
any Advanced Simulation run - Advanced Simulation will ignore commingled (and
composite) layers and will only use the active constituent layers.
The sub-dialog is comprised of a list section with checkbox selection options, a selection
section with a drop-down menu and two functional buttons, described as follows:
Combining Layers (Two Layers Only): This section lists all the available (i.e. active)
layers that can be commingled. Only two can be selected at any time. Select the
two layers for commingling by checking on/off the checkboxes as required.
Select Layer for Pseudo-Tables and Fluid Parameters: This will assign the fluid
properties of the chosen layer to the commingled system. For a gas or condensate
well, only one set of pseudo-tables can be used in Analysis and Quick Match, and
the appropriate set must be selected here. The Boundary Model (if any) associated
with the selected layer will be applied to both layers.
253
Combine: Select this button to create the commingled layer. Upon return to the
Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog, the commingled layer will be listed in the
Layer Control section of the dialog.
If the properties or any of the constituent layers are altered in Dataprep, the
commingled layer should be deleted and recreated.
When modeling a commingled system with a closed boundary configuration in

Quick Match, the Material Balance option should be activated to model depletion in
each layer.
254
PanSystem
PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical)
PanSystem - PanMesh Overview
General Overview of PanMesh Workflow:

PanMesh is a single-well, multi-layer, 3-D numerical Well Test simulator; it is the
Numerical Simulation module within PanSystem. Before running a PanMesh simulation
via the Simulate menu command, the Reservoir data has to be initialized within
PanSystem.
Data for the Reservoir Model are input by selecting the Well and Reservoir Properties
(Numerical) option from the Data Preparation menu.
For the Flow Rate data, two options are available:
Use the Test Design facility in the Gauge Data section of the Data Preparation
menu. Here users can specify a Flow Rate sequence; anything from a single
Flowing Period to a series of Flowing and Shut-In Periods. The objective might be
to investigate the nature of the Transient Response to a certain Reservoir
Geometry, or to perform Well Test Design.
Use the Flow Rates associated with an existing Well Test. Users are simply required
to import the Well Test data in the usual way, perform any editing that is required,
then pick the Rate Change events, as if for an analysis. If users intend to analyze
the data first (e.g. to establish an approximate model and to estimate some of the
parameters), they should enter the necessary Rock and Fluid Properties in the Well
and Reservoir Properties (Analytical) section of the Data Preparation menu.
When users are ready to run a PanMesh session, the available Rock and Fluid Properties
will be transferred automatically into this Well and Reservoir Properties (Numerical)
section of Data Preparation. It then remains to specify the Reservoir Structure,
Anisotropy, Heterogeneity, etc., through each of the tabbed sub-dialogs.
The geological model is passed through to PanMesh, which generates the 3-D mesh. The
simulation then produces a Dimensionless, Constant-Rate Drawdown Response. When
users exit PanMesh, it writes a table of Dimensionless Pressure (Pd) versus Dimensionless
Time (Td) to a file with the extension (*.TCX); this is the reference response for the
geological model.
The Dimensionless Response is then picked-up by PanSystem, where it is convolved with
Wellbore Storage and the Rate Schedule, then presented in terms of Real Time and
Pressure. The simulated Pressure Response can be inspected using the diagnostic plots,
just like any other Well Test data. It can also be overlain with Gauge Data if users are
attempting to match a real Well Test.
Users should take note of the following points:

PanMesh itself does not deal with Multi-Rate Superposition or Wellbore Storage.
This is handled by PanSystem when it picks up PanMesh's reference Constant-Rate
255
Drawdown Response. This is done (invisibly most of the time) using PanSystem's
existing Advanced Simulation facility, which accesses the dimensionless (*.TCX)
response file written by PanMesh.
The Darcy Skin Factor is built into the Reservoir Model in the form of a damaged
region; because PanMesh computes a Constant-Rate Response, the Non-Darcy (or
Turbulent) Skin in Gas Wells is handled by PanSystem during the rate and storage
convolution.
The Analytical and Numerical Modeling facilities have two distinct input sections.
It is quite possible (and often useful), to employ Analytical diagnostics and
Simulation, in addition to Numerical Simulation, for solving a Well Test problem.
These two approaches can be configured and run in the same PanSystem file.
However, since the two methods use very different approaches for configuring
multi-layered Reservoirs, if users wish to define multiple Layers for Analytical
Simulation, EPS recommend that one PanSystem file is set-up for Analytical
Simulation and a separate file is set-up for Numerical Simulation to avoid possible
confusion.
The term "Sub-Layer" is used when referring to layering or stratification in PanMesh
models. The term "Layer" is used in the Analytical Simulation context of
PanSystem. The Layers in PanSystem cannot communicate except in the
Wellbore. The Sub-Layers in PanMesh can communicate in the Wellbore and the
Reservoir. Otherwise, a Sub-Layer and a Layer are the same geologically. There
is, of course, far more flexibility in the definition of a PanMesh Sub-Layer's shape,
anisotropy, and heterogeneity than there is for a PanSystem Layer.
PanMesh Description:
The PanMesh finite element simulator can be used in History Matching mode to generate
Well Test responses to match against measured Well Test data, or in predictive mode to
design a Well Test or investigate the response to a specified Reservoir configuration:
If users are intending to History Match a Well Test, import and prepare Gauge Data
in the usual way, they should refer to Gauge Data Preparation.
If users are going to design a Well Test or investigate a response, they should set
up their intended Rate Schedule by using the Test Design facility.
In either case, Well and Reservoir data are entered through the Well and Reservoir
Description (Numerical) option on the main Data Preparation menu. This will take users
into the PanMesh Data Preparation dialog for the entry of Well, Fluid and Rock Properties,
and description of the geometrical and geological aspects of the Reservoir.
On entering this section for the first time, PanSystem will transfer across any Well, Layer
and Fluid Properties that have already been set-up in the Well and Reservoir Properties
(Analytical) section. For example, users may have previously been working on a Well
Test using the diagnostic plot and Analytical Simulation facilities.
There is no need to enter the same data all over again. Any subsequent changes made in
the Analytical section will not be transferred into the Numerical section.
Note however, that there is no data transfer from Numerical to Analytical.

The PanMesh Data Preparation dialog consists of four tabbed sections:
Reservoir Geometry
Well Configuration
Material Properties
Run Mode (optional)
256
PanSystem
Although the Reservoir Geometry dialog appears first, users may enter data on the
first three tabs, in any order. However, the first three tabbed dialogs must be
correctly initialized before users can OK from the main dialog.
257
PanSystem - PanMesh
258
PanSystem
Data Preparation
Reservoir Geometry Tabbed Dialog
General:
This tabbed dialog is accessed from the Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) option
on the main Data Preparation menu. Four tabbed dialogs are available:
1. Reservoir Geometry (current tab)
2. Well Configuration
3. Material Properties
4. Run Mode (Optional)
Users may enter data on any of the first three tabbed dialogs, in any order. You may
OK from the main dialog at any stage without fully initialising them. Any errors or
omissions will be trapped later upon trying to invoke PanMesh from the Simulate menu.
In addition, a User menu button allows users to alter the display in the Drawing Area and
create or edit features within the Reservoir Model.
Screen Dialog Description:
This tab of the dialog is comprised of a color Drawing Area with seven associated function
buttons (along top edge of Drawing Area), a Co-ordinate Display, Sub-Layer selection
field, Node Information Table (below Drawing Area) and two functional buttons (top right-
hand side of dialog); it allows users to draw a representation and define the physical
characteristics of the Reservoir to be simulated:
259
Reservoir Geometry tab with the Drawing Area

Drawing Area: This is represented by a black, gridded viewing window on first
entering the Reservoir Geometry tabbed dialog. This is a Plan view, centred on the
origin, formed by the intersection of the red-colored x- and y-axes, which initially
lie along the top and left edge of the Drawing Area respectively. The positive x-
direction (scaled along the bottom edge of the Drawing Area), is to the right (East),
the positive y-direction (scaled along the left edge of the Drawing Area), is towards
the top of the screen (North). The positive z-direction is downwards into the
Drawing Area.
An active co-ordinate display is situated below the bottom left corner of the
Drawing Area and this provides an exact position for the mouse cursor to allow
accurate positioning of drawing elements.
260
PanSystem
To adjust the position of the origin relative to the display, click and hold the right
mouse button down on either of the red axes, or the origin, then move the mouse
cursor to the new position and release the button.
A Reservoir is designed in the Drawing Area on the principle of Nodes connected by
Boundaries. Each Node contains properties which allow the vertical nature of the
Reservoir to be described in terms of depth and layer structure. Each Node is
assigned (x, y, z) co-ordinates that define the upper surface of the Reservoir.
Users can edit any of the displayed Node properties by double left-clicking on
any Node to generate the Node Parameters sub-dialog. Up to twenty Nodes can
initially be used to define the shape of the Reservoir, which must conform to a
convex layout (i.e. all angles of the Reservoir Outline must be greater than 180
degrees). The properties assigned to each interconnecting Boundary define their
condition and users can also edit any of the displayed Boundary Conditions by
double left-clicking on any Boundary Line to generate the Boundary Conditions
sub-dialog.
Internal Boundaries can also be drawn to define Regions which can be assigned
Material Properties. These Boundaries are drawn by left-clicking and dragging a
line from outside the Reservoir Outline across the Reservoir to bisect an existing
Region, then clicking again outside the Reservoir Outline on the opposite side. An
Internal Boundary will be displayed with two new Nodes and each Region is
automatically assigned a color scheme.
In addition to drawing a Reservoir, users can also start from five geometric
Reservoir Shapes, using the Triangle, Rectangle, Pentagon, Hexagon or Octagon
buttons situated at the top of the Drawing Area. Select a shape, then left-click in
the Drawing Area to paste it in. The Nodes can be selected and moved to re-shape
the Reservoir Outline as required.
The five Reservoir Shape button options cannot be used if there is already
something in the Drawing Area.
To account for more complex Reservoir Shapes, there are also button options to:
Import Template: This generates a standard Windows Open dialog, where
users can browse for and/or select from a list of useful and geologically
significant generic Reservoir Templates (*.ptl files). These can be imported
into the Drawing Area and subsequently modified.
Import Map: This option also generates a standard Windows Open dialog,
where users can browse for and select a pre-existing map file (i.e. graphic
file formats JPEG (*.jpg), GIF (*.gif), DIB (*.bmp) and TIFF (*.tif) are all
supported). Once a file has been selected, this action activates the Import
Map Wizard which can be used to import a scanned or electronic image of a
Reservoir Map.
Node Information Table: Each Node in the Reservoir View has a set of properties
which are summarized in the Node Information Table situated below the Drawing
Area. This table contains the following information:
The Node Identification Numbers.
A green tick mark is displayed next to a Node when it is used to define the
upper and lower surfaces of the Sub-Layers; conversely a red cross
signifies that the Node is not used in this fashion. Only three points are
needed to define a plane - hence only three green tick marks are shown.
Any three Nodes can be selected providing they are co-linear.
261
The (x, y, z) co-ordinates of the Nodes.

The vertical thickness of any defined Sub-Layer/s.
Thicknesses need only be defined at the three Nodes with green tick marks.
Information relating to the Boundary Condition acting between a Node and
the next Node in the sequence.
Number of Sub-Layers: This toggle switch allows users to increase or decrease
the number of Sub-Layers in a Reservoir Model. It works in conjunction with the
Sub-Layer column/s in the Node Information Table and any increase or decrease of
Sub-Layers will affect the number of associated columns displayed in the table. A
maximum of 31 sub-layers is possible.
Radial Regions button: This button is used to define a Radial Composite Region,
centred on the Well. If a Reservoir has a Region around the Wellbore with different
Fluid/Reservoir Properties, this may be modeled by setting up a Radial Composite
Region. Selecting the Radial Regions button, opens up the Radial Regions Around
the Wellbore sub-dialog, where the Radius of the Radial Region can be entered.
User Menu button (and associated short-cuts): This button is available on the
full-screen Map Window and on the right-hand side of the Drawing Area. The tiered
menu options allow users to alter the presentation and add features to the
Reservoir. Some of these options also have keyboard and/or mouse-operated
short-cuts (refer to the Help topic for User Menu Button).
Operational Instructions - Design Methods:
Four different design methods can be employed to create a Reservoir Model; the Drawing
method, Pre-Defined Shapes method, Import Template method and Import Map method.
These are each described as follows:
1. Drawing Method: The red x- or y-axes can be moved by right-clicking and
dragging with the mouse. Once axis scales have been assigned users are ready to
start creating the plan view of the Reservoir Model.
To define the first Node, click and hold the left mouse button at the point on the
gridded Drawing Area where the first Node is to be placed, then drag the mouse
cursor to the point where the second Node is to be located. A white line will be
drawn with a box at each end, representing the individual Node points.
Drawing Node Points and Boundary Lines

To define any further Boundary Lines and Nodes, click and hold the left mouse
button on the last Node created and drag the mouse to the location of the next
Node. Alternatively, left-click on the intended position of the next Node and move
262
PanSystem
the mouse slightly; a line will appear, linking the previous Node to the new Node.
Repeat this process until the Reservoir Outline is defined. The Nodes will change
into larger rectangular boxes containing a Node Identification Number. The
maximum number of Nodes currently available is 20. If 20 Nodes are created, the
Reservoir Outline will automatically close by drawing a Boundary between Node
numbers 20 and 1.
Use the {Backspace} key from the keyboard to delete Nodes (in reverse order).
Once the Reservoir Outline has been closed, Nodes can be moved to new positions
by clicking and dragging with the left mouse button. If extra outer boundary
Nodes are required (i.e. up to a maximum of 20), the {Backspace} key must be
used to re-open the shape, then the additional Boundary Lines and Nodes can be
drawn as described above.
The (x, y, z) co-ordinates of the Nodes are listed in the table beneath the Drawing
Area.
263
Completed Reservoir outline

Do not cross over an existing line while drawing the outline - PanMesh will be
unable to create the mesh for this when the time comes.
If creating an external angle less than 180 degrees (i.e. concave) while drawing
the outline, refer to: External Angles Less Than 180 Degrees at the end of this
section.
If a Reservoir Outline requires more than 20 Nodes, draw an approximate outline
using the 20 available Nodes, then refer to: Creating More Than 20 Nodes For An
Outline at the end of this section.
2. Predefined Shapes Method: Along the top of the Drawing Area there are five
buttons which allow users to select a regular polygonal shape from a choice of: Triangle,
Rectangle, Pentagon, Hexagon or Octagon. Select a shape, then left-click in the Drawing
264
PanSystem
Area to paste it in. The Nodes can be selected and moved to reshape the Reservoir
Outline. The {Backspace} key from the keyboard can also be used to delete Nodes (in
reverse number order), for editing purposes and extra Nodes can be inserted in the
opening thus created, up to a maximum of 20.
Reservoir created from the Octagonal Shape
This option cannot be used if there is already something in the Drawing Area.
3. Using Templates: The Drawing Area is limited in terms of the complexity of
Reservoir Model that can be constructed. If a Reservoir Model is too complex to build
using the PanMesh drawing facilities or if a model has been built, but PanMesh is unable to
construct a mesh for it, two options remain:
Import a Template: This option generates a sub-dialog that gives users
access to two template libraries offering a selection of useful and
geologically significant generic structures. These models can be imported
into the Drawing Area and modified (if necessary). The selection will be
augmented over time.
The Standard Template Library contains numerical equivalents of the available

analytical models, plus some hybrids. The User Template folder contains
other configurations, and may be added to by the user. The available
selection will be augmented by EPS in successive releases.
These models can be imported into the Drawing Area and modified if
necessary.
265
Contact EPS: The company offers expert advice and can build a custom
Reservoir Template if required.
4. Importing a Reservoir Map: This option generates a standard Windows Open
dialog that gives users the option to import their own maps.
The size of the map graphic should be less than the resolution of the screen to
avoid possible problems with drawing the reservoir outline. Thus for a display
setting of 1280x1024, the map pixel dimensions should be less than 1280 in the x-
direction and less than 1024 in the y-direction. (You may have to downsize slightly
further than this.) Graphics can be resized in Windows Paint (Image Stretch, then
check with Image Attributes), or other graphics editors.
Once a map is selected for import, this activates the Import Map Wizard which
provides detailed instructions on how to import the scanned or electronic image of a
Reservoir Map:
Reservoir Map in Map Window with PanWizard overlaid

First, users are prompted by the PanWizard to define the map scaling, by providing
the co-ordinates of two arbitrary Reference Points. Double-click on the first
Reference Point and enter its co-ordinates (UTM or whatever system is required).
The Units can always be changed via the Units option on the main PanSystem
Configure Menu.
266
PanSystem
Defining a Reference Point for Map Scaling

Select OK from the dialog, double-click on a second Reference Point and enter its
co-ordinates. This is enough for PanSystem to compute the relationship between
map pixels and distance in the x- and y-directions and to scale the map. If users
want to repeat this operation to correct a mistake, both Reference Points must be
re-defined, not just one of them.
If the Reference Points happen to lie in an exact east-west or north-south line,
PanSystem will only be able to scale in that one direction. It will assume the same
pixel/distance scaling in the other direction (i.e. that the map grid is square).
Now draw the Reservoir Outline as described earlier.
If the first line drawn shifts to the left upon releasing the mouse button, refer to
the Note at the beginning of this Section 4 about image size vs display resolution.
Once the Reservoir Outline has been closed, users may drag Nodes to new
positions, but they cannot add new Nodes. To add extra Nodes (up to the
maximum of 20), use the {Backspace} key to re-open the shape and then draw in
the additional lines.
Reservoir Map with outline drawn on
267
On closing the Map Window, the map and Reservoir Outline will be displayed in the
Drawing Area. The co-ordinates of the Nodes are listed underneath.
Drawing Area showing Reservoir Map and outline

In the example above, a more faithful Reservoir Outline could be achieved by
introducing some extra Nodes and some Concave Angles. This will be explained
below in External Angles Less Than 180 (Concave) and Creating More Than 20
Nodes for the Outline.
The path to the Map File will be written in the *.PAN file next time that users save
it. Make sure the Map File is in a suitable folder (such as the Data folder) before
it is imported. If users subsequently change the location of the Map File,
PanSystem will not be able to find it and will issue a warning, followed by an Open
Map File dialog to permit browsing to the new location.
To edit the path, open the *.PAN file in an editor such as NotePad, search for the
Map Name (it will be located in the [panmesh]section of the file) and change it.
Operational Instructions - Specific Tasks:
Defining Number of Sub-Layers:
If users are in the process of building the Reservoir Model, select the number of Sub-
Layers required by toggling the Number of Sub-Layers counter (default = 1, maximum
31). Extra columns for Sub-Layer Thicknesses will be generated in the Node Information
Table.
Moving Nodes and/or the Reservoir Outline:
Once the Reservoir Outline has been closed, users may want to adjust the positions of
Nodes, or shift the whole shape relative to the origin.
Nodes: To do this graphically, click and hold the left mouse button on the Node.
The word NODE # will appear next to the cursor when it is correctly positioned
268
PanSystem
over the Node. Drag the selected Node to the desired location and release the
mouse button:
Moving a Node
To specify the exact co-ordinates for Nodes, open the Node Parameters sub-dialog
by double left-clicking on the Node itself, or on the Node Number in the Node
Information Table, situated beneath the Drawing Area. Enter the exact values into
this sub-dialog.
Reservoir Outline: To shift the entire Reservoir in the Drawing Area without altering
the shape, click and hold the left mouse button on any of the outer Boundaries.
The word EDGE will appear next to the cursor when it is correctly positioned over a
Boundary. Drag the Reservoir to a new location in the Drawing Area and release
the mouse button:
Moving the whole Reservoir Outline

It is not possible to move any part of the Reservoir out of the Drawing Area.
Increase the axis scales if a larger working area is required.
Moving the Axes and/or Origin:
The x-axis can be moved up or down and/or the y-axis can be moved left or right, by
right-clicking on the axis and dragging it. If a Reservoir Outline has already been
drawn, it will move with the axes (i.e. there will be no change in the prevailing Node co-
ordinates).
The Reservoir Geometry area is normally centered on the origin. To adjust the position of
the origin relative to the display, click and hold the right mouse button down on either
of the red axes or the origin, then move the mouse to the new position and release the
mouse button.
Deleting A Reservoir Design:
To delete the Reservoir, (short-cut) double right-click in the Drawing Area, anywhere
outside the Reservoir. This will permanently delete all the Nodes, Regions, Boundary
269
Lines, etc., that have been created. Any parameters defined under the other tabs within
the PanMesh Data Preparation dialog will also be wiped, but will be retained in memory
and can be retrieved if the appropriate parts of the Reservoir Geometry are re-created.
Alternatively, select Clear Reservoir from the User Menu).
Editing Node Details:
To edit the details of a Node, double left-click on a Node in the Drawing Area when
Reservoir View (i.e. plan view) is activated. This will generate the Node Parameters sub-
dialog. The cursor should display NODE # before the mouse button is clicked. The Node
Parameters sub-dialog can also be generated by clicking on the Node Number in the Node
Information Table, situated beneath the Drawing Area.
Internal Boundaries, Regions and Nodes:
Up to 99 Internal Boundaries can be added to a Reservoir Model. These are straight-line
interfaces crossing the Reservoir, that can be used to:
Define Regions with different material (i.e. rock and fluid) properties:
Regions of large areal extent with different petrophysical characteristics, or
containing a different fluid.
Thin Regions representing altered or fault zones of low transmissibility, or
fissures of high transmissibility.
Define No-Flow Boundaries within the Reservoir.
Define concave angles in the Reservoir outline.
Add up to 198 more Nodes to get a better-shaped outline.
These Internal Boundaries are drawn by left-clicking and dragging a line from outside
the Reservoir area across the Reservoir to bisect an existing Region, then releasing the
mouse button outside the Reservoir on the opposite side. An Internal Boundary will be
displayed with two new Nodes and each Region is automatically assigned a color scheme.
Nodes can be left-clicked and dragged to new positions if any adjustment is required.
Clicking and dragging the mouse cursor to create an Internal Boundary
270
PanSystem
Internal Boundary with colored Regions and new Nodes

Internal Boundaries are vertical, and extend through the full thickness of the Reservoir.
In a Multi-Layered Reservoir, they cut through all the Layers. They are transparent and
do not influence the well test response unless they are converted into No-Flow
Boundaries.
An Internal Boundary plane must not traverse the trajectory of a deviated Vertical
Well - a warning will be issued if this happens. This restriction does not apply to a
Horizontal Well.
There are also meshing rules governing Well/Boundary Distances (L):
If a damaged region is not present, L > 12 rw (i.e. 12 x Wellbore Radius).
If a damaged region is present, L > 1.2 Rd (i.e. 1.2 x Damaged Zone Radius).
Since a restriction of Rd > 1.5rw already applies (refer to Material Properties,
Wellbore Damage Section under Damage Radius for details) this means that L
cannot be closer than 1.8rw, when the smallest Damaged Zone Radius is used.
Thus a boundary can be put closer to the wellbore by creating a dummy damaged
region.
In a similar manner, Regions can also be bisected to create smaller Regions Regions by
drawing lines across them; internal Nodes will be created at any Internal Boundary
crossing points.
An Internal Boundary can also be created between two existing Nodes by first selecting
the Shift key, then carefully selecting the first Node with the left mouse button (ensure
the cursor displays NODE # before clicking the mouse button) and dragging a line across
exactly onto the second Node before releasing the Shift key.
Refer to the User Menu Button (Pop-Up) for more details on Drawing Window short-
cuts and Using Regions and Defining Areal Heterogeneity for examples of Region
sub-division and Internal Boundary creation/deletion.
Up to 20 Nodes are allowed per polygonal region, with a maximum of 1000 Nodes allowed
per PanMesh session (refer to Using Regions and Areal Heterogeneity for more details).
Deleting a Region or Internal Boundary:
To delete a Region, double right-click on one of the Internal Boundary lines bounding
the Region to open the Delete Areal Region sub-dialog. The cursor should display LINE #
before the mouse button is clicked. Alternatively, the same sub-dialog can be generated
271
by selecting the Remove Regions option from the User Menu. Scroll the Region/Line
toggles until the required Region/Line combination for deletion is displayed.
When a Region/Line is deleted, an adjacent Region must expand to replace it. If there is
a Region on either side of the Region targeted for deletion, choose which of the two
Regional Properties to use from the Use Regional Properties drop-down selection field. If
the Region/Line removal is going to create a non-convex Region an error message will
be displayed and a new selection will be required.
On selecting OK from the sub-dialog, the target Region will disappear and the selected
Regional Properties will be applied to the new enlarged Region. Deleting a Region is also
the way to delete the Internal Boundary that lay between it and the neighbouring Region.
Boundary Editing:
This is performed in the Boundary Conditions sub-dialog, which is generated by double
left-clicking on any Boundary displayed in the Drawing Area (i.e. while operating in
Reservoir View mode). The cursor should display EDGE before the mouse button is
clicked. Users can select between No-Flow and Constant Pressure Boundary Conditions to
be applied between Nodes and to the top and bottom of the Reservoir, with respect to the
selected Boundary.
External Angles Less Than 180 Degrees (Concave):
If users wish the Reservoir Outline to contain an angle of less than 180 (referred to as
"concave, as viewed from the outside), a special precaution must be taken in order to
allow PanMesh to create a successful mesh. Failure to do this will result in a warning
message of the form: Reservoir region # must be convex upon invoking PanMesh from
the Simulate menu.
In the following example, the angle at Node 5 is concave. PanMesh will not be able to
mesh this basic polygon. The idea is subdivide this into two good polygons by splitting
the offending angle in this case by drawing a line from Node 5 to Node 2, as follows:
272
PanSystem
Reservoir outline contains a concave angle at Node 5

Press the Shft key, carefully place the mouse cursor on Node 5 (ensure the cursor
displays Node 5), and click the left mouse button:
Carefully click on the node with the Shft key depressed

Drag a line across the reservoir exactly onto Node 2 and release the mouse button:
Drag the line across to Node 2

Effectively, two polygonal regions have been created, both of which contain only convex
angles, thereby respecting the meshing rules.
If the user is not precise enough with the engagement of either of the end nodes,
an extra node will be created very close to the target node. You are advised to
delete the line you have just created and to try again. The unwanted node will also
disappear. To delete an internal line, refer to Delete Areal Region Sub-Dialog.
The Material and Fluid Properties of the two defined Regions can be made identical, in
which case the Internal Boundary does not exist as far as well testing is concerned, or
they can be made different if Areal Heterogeneity is to be modeled. By judicious placing
273
of Internal Boundaries (up to 99), several concave angles can be created in the Reservoir
Outline.
Creating More Than 20 Nodes For An Outline:
The initial Reservoir Outline is currently limited to a maximum of 20 Nodes, although the
Internal Boundary option can be used to create up to 198 extra Nodes (i.e. 99 lines, with
two Nodes per line), making a total of 218 Nodes available to refine the Reservoir
Outline. If there is no Areal Heterogeneity, simply apply the same Material Properties to
all the Regions.
Three-Dimensional (3-D) Design View:
Once the Reservoir Outline has been designed in Plan View and the Sub-Layer Thickness
(or Thicknesses) have been defined, double left-click the mouse on the Drawing Area
outside of the Reservoir Outline, to display the Reservoir in 3-D perspective (i.e. Solid
Elevation, Opaque display as described in the User Menu section above).
A number of features are available to manipulate the 3-D image:
Click and drag with the left mouse button to freely rotate and/or move the image.
Use the additional Viewing controls below the User Menu button. These controls
allow users to:
Zoom Reservoir thickness: exaggerates the reservoir thickness without
zooming its area.
Zoom Reservoir: zooms the reservoir image in all three dimensions.
Zoom Well: this simply enlarges the representation of the wellbore. It is most
effective with the Sketch Display (User Menu) set to Wire Elevation, Hidden
lines removed, and is even more so if there is a damaged region.
Rotate X, Y, Z: these rotate the Reservoir image about the x-, y- or z-axes of
the viewing window.
Pan Sideways and Pan Up/Down: displaces the reservoir image in a Sideways
or Up / Down direction.
The F5 and F6 keys can be used to rotate this view clockwise and anti-clockwise
respectively.
The F7 and F8 keys can be used to apply and remove an exaggerated perspective
respectively..
Applying a double left-click on the Drawing Area outside of the Reservoir image
reverts to the Plan view of the Reservoir.
274
PanSystem
Radial Regions Around the Wellbore Sub-Dialog

General:
This sub-dialog is accessed by selecting the Radial Regions button situated on the right-
hand side of the Reservoir Geometry tab of the PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation
dialog.
If a Reservoir has a Region around the Wellbore with different Fluid/Reservoir Properties
(e.g. Swept Region around a Water-Injector), this sub-dialog allows users to set-up a
Radial Composite Region by entering the Radius for the Region.
Different Material Properties can be assigned to each Sub-Layer, but the Radial Region
must have the same Radius for all Sub-Layers in the Reservoir. The Material Properties
for each Region (i.e. inner and outer) should be entered separately under the Material
Properties tabbed dialog.
The Skin Factor (S), will also be modeled as a circular Region around the Wellbore with a
Finite Radius and a Permeability value as follows:
For a positive Skin - Permeability is less than the Reservoir Permeability.
For a negative Skin - Permeability is greater than the Reservoir Permeability.
The Damaged Zone Radius (Rd), is configured separately in the Material Properties
tabbed dialog.
Provided the Radial Region has a larger Radius than the Damaged Zone Radius, the
model can contain both.
The units of Length used throughout the PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation dialog
are those defined in the Units option of the Configuration menu item.
275
Well Configuration Tabbed Dialog

General:
1. Reservoir Geometry
2. Well Configuration (current tab)
OK from the main dialog at any stage without fully initialising them. Any errors or
The dialog allows users to define the Well Configuration using Horizontal or Vertical Well
Models and assign Open Intervals for the Well Completion; the data entry fields and
function buttons are described as follows:
Well Geometry section:
This section has different input parameters, depending on whether a Vertical (default) or
Horizontal Well is being defined:
Co-ordinates for a Vertical well: The X co-ordinate and Y co-ordinate refer to where
the Well cuts the upper surface of the Reservoir.
There are also rules governing Well/Boundary Distances (L):
If a Damaged Region is not present, L > 12 rw (i.e. 12 x Wellbore Radius).
If a Damaged Region is present, L > 1.2 Rd (i.e. 1.2 x Damaged Zone
Radius). Since a restriction of Rd > 1.5rw already applies, this means that L
cannot be closer than 1.8rw, when the smallest Damaged Zone Radius is
used.
Co-ordinates for a Horizontal Well: The X, Y and Z co-ordinates define the position
of the heel of the Horizontal Well. The Z direction is positive in a downwards
direction. Ensure that the Z co-ordinate in this dialog is consistent with the Z co-
ordinate used to define the upper surface of the Reservoir in the Reservoir
Geometry tab.
Measured Depth: The datum reference for Measured Depths is completely
arbitrary. The Measured Depth to Top of Reservoir (i.e. for a Vertical Well) or the
Measured Depth to Heel of Well (i.e. for a Horizontal Well), can be Relative to
Original Kelly Bushing (i.e. MDRKB), Mean Sea-Level (i.e. MSL), etc., or can be left
at zero.
Deviation from Vertical: An input field for Vertical Slant Wells (i.e. Wells that
deviate between 1 up to 87 from the vertical).
Dip from Horizontal: The Dip From Horizontal data entry field, to allow a Dipping
Well, has not yet been implemented (i.e. the entry field is de-activated).
Azimuth: This represents the Well Direction (i.e. for Vertical Slant Wells and
Horizontal Wells), from 0 up to 360 and is measured clockwise from North on the
Drawing Area
276
PanSystem
Wellbore Radius (rw): This dimension is obtained by halving the Wellbore Diameter
(i.e. drilled Openhole Diameter).
Open Intervals (MD) section:
This section is used to enter Measured Depths of the open Completion Interval/s within
the Wellbore (i.e. Measured Depths to the start and end points of each open Completion
Interval). The default setting has data entry fields activated for one Completion Interval,
but a maximum of six open Completion Intervals are allowed. To activate or de-activate
the data input fields for additional Completion Intervals, use the Completions counter and
toggle at the base of the section.
Orientation section:
Vertical: This category includes Slanted Wells, up to a maximum of 87 from the
vertical.
The line of the Vertical Well Trajectory must cut both the top and bottom surfaces
of the Reservoir. In addition, Slant Wells are not allowed to cut through Region
Boundaries, but they are allowed to cut through Sub-Layers.
Horizontal: This category is for a Well set at 90 from the vertical.
The line of the Horizontal Well Trajectory must not cut the top or bottom surfaces
of the Reservoir, but must pass through the sides of the structure. However, a
Horizontal Well Trajectory is allowed to cut through Region Boundaries, but it must
not cut an interface between Sub-Layers if a Multi-Layered Reservoir is being
modeled (i.e. the Well Trajectory must lie in the same Sub-Layer across the full
width of the Reservoir). The relative dip of the formation containing the Well is
therefore limited by these conditions.
Wellbore Storage button:
Performs the same function as the button used in PanSystem Well and Reservoir
Description (Analytical), but in this case, only the lower portion of the dialog is enabled.
Users can select a Wellbore Storage Model and enter Model Parameters in the Well
Parameters sub-dialog generated with this button.
Instructions for Well Configuration:
Select whether the Well is Vertical (this includes Slant Wells) or Horizontal, by activating
the appropriate button in the Orientation area, then define the Position, Deviation,
Azimuth, Wellbore Radius and Completion Interval/s of the Wellbore in the Well Geometry
and Open Intervals (MD) sections as appropriate:
Example of Vertical Well Configuration (side elevation)
277
Example of Horizontal Well Configuration (side elevation)

For a Slanted Vertical Well, enter the Deviation from Vertical (angle) and the Azimuth
(angle of the Well Trajectory, relative to North on the Drawing Area).
Enter the Measured Depth to Top of Reservoir (Vertical Well) or Measured Depth to Heel
(Horizontal Well), then the Start and End Measured Depths of the Open Interval/s. Use
the Completions counter in the Open Intervals section if more than one Open Interval is
required (i.e. up to a maximum of six Open Intervals).
As discussed above, the datum reference for Measured Depths is completely

arbitrary, but the Open Interval Depths must be consistent with whatever
reference is used.
When designating the Well Position, it is important to ensure that this lies within the
Boundaries of the Reservoir. Any Vertical Wells must intersect the top and bottom
Layers of the Reservoir, but Horizontal Wells must not. To visually inspect the Well
Positioning, return to the Reservoir Geometry tab.
If users inadvertently specify Open Intervals that extend outside the Reservoir, they will
be issued with a warning message, but the program will automatically trim the offending
Open Intervals to fit, so there is no need to take corrective action.
278
PanSystem
Material Properties Tabbed Dialog

General:
3. Material Properties (current tab)
OK from the main dialog at any stage without fully initializing them. Any errors or
Rock and Fluid Material Properties of Sub-Layers and Regions are defined in this tabbed
dialog. On entering the Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) data preparation area
for the first time, PanSystem will transfer any data parameters that have already been
set-up in the PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Analytical) data preparation area into all
Regions (e.g. users may have previously been working on a Well Test using the
Diagnostic Plot and Analytical Simulation facilities); any data thus transferred can then be
edited at this stage if changes are required.
The data entry fields, selection areas and button functions are described as follows:
Fluid Type selection area:
Three Fluid Types are available as selection button options:
Oil
Gas
Condensate
This selection refers to the principal produced Fluid Type and will apply to all Sub-Layers
in the Reservoir. The Gas and Condensate Fluid Types require a Real Gas Pseudo-
Pressure m(p) Table to be generated using the PVT Calculator button (described below).
Selection of a Gas or Condensate option will also activate the Rate Dependent Skin
Coefficient (D) data entry field in the Wellbore Damage section of the dialog.
Regardless of the selected produced Fluid Type, this dialog and associated sub-dialogs
provide the flexibility to apply Gas, Oil or Water Fluid Properties to any Region (e.g. to
model an Aquifer or Gas-Cap). These different Fluids are simply variations in Material
Properties that affect the propagation of the Transient Pressure Disturbance.
The PanMesh simulator does not model movement of these Fluids; although an
edge or underlying Aquifer can be modeled, there will be no modeling of Water
Encroachment, Coning or Fingering. Similarly, no Gas-Cap expansion will be
modeled. All Region Boundaries are strictly static.
Sub-Layer and Region section:
Each Region in each Sub-Layer can be assigned unique Rock and Fluid Material
Properties. The Sub-Layer and Region selection toggles are situated at the top left corner
of this section; if multiple Sub-Layers and/or Regions have been configured in the
Reservoir Geometry tabbed dialog, these toggles can be used to generate a new page of
279
data entry fields to enter and/or edit Material Properties for each Sub-Layer and/or
Region as required.
Where a number of Regions are to have the same Material Properties, enter data for one
Region, then use the Copy button. Then:
Select another Region using the toggles to generate a new (i.e. blank) page for
data entry, then select the Paste button to populate the page with data.
Use the Paste to All Regions button to paste the Material Properties into all the
Regions in the selected Sub-Layer.
Use the Paste to entire reservoir button to paste the Material Properties into all
Regions in all Sub-layers.
The Copy facility does not make the Material Properties available on the Windows
ClipBoard for export outside PanSystem.
The PVT Calculator button (described below) can be used to estimate Fluid Properties
from Production Data. Data entry parameters include:
Formation Volume Factor (Bo, Bg, etc.): Of the mobile Fluid.
Viscosity (o, g, etc.): Of the mobile Fluid.
Total Compressibility (Ct): Of the Rock and Fluids.
Temperature (T): Of the Region.
Pressure (p): Only the Pressure of the Region containing the Well in Sub-Layer 1 is
currently considered.
All Regions and Sub-Layers are assumed to have this same Initial Pressure.
Porosity (): The connected Porosity of the Region.
Permeability (k): This represents the Effective Permeability of the mobile Fluid.
Directional components can be assigned along the three principal axes as kx, ky
and kz, allowing for Areal and Vertical Anisotropy. The kx- and ky-axes lie in the
plane of the lower surface of the Sub-Layer, and the kz-axis is perpendicular to it.
Principal X-Axis: This defines the orientation (i.e. clockwise from North), for the
kx-component of Horizontal Permeability. The default angle is 90 from North (i.e.
in the West-East plane of the x-axis from the Reservoir Geometry tabbed dialog).
This allows the kx- and ky-axes of Permeability to be different from the
geometrical x- and y-axes.
Note that all Regions in a Sub-Layer should be assigned the same value, but
different Sub-Layers may have different values.
Region is Active: This checkbox should be unchecked if a Region is to be
excluded from the model. When a PanMesh Simulation is run, any Regions not
flagged as active will be excluded from the Mesh. This is a useful feature when
complex Reservoir shapes are being modeled.
Vertical Mesh Refinement in Adjacent Layers: This checkbox is used where there is
a high horizontal Permeability contrast between adjacent Layers (e.g. greater than
10:1). A Localized Grid Refinement (LGR), is applied to Layers of lower
Permeability that lie each side of the selected (i.e. higher Permeability) Layer. The
Localized Grid Refinement is applied to each adjacent Layer of low Permeability in a
vertical direction, using logarithmic spacing (i.e. fine to coarse) away from each
interface.
280
PanSystem
High Permeability Contrast between adjacent Layers - plan view
Due to the increased number of Mesh elements involved, this feature will slow
down the solution time for any Numerical Simulation performed in PanMesh, but
will produce a better response.
Wellbore Damage section:
The Darcy or Mechanical Skin Factor (S), is modelled in PanMesh as a circular region of
finite radius with altered Permeability around the Wellbore; often referred to as the
r;Damaged Zone. The Skin Factor and Damaged Zone Radius can be different in each
Sub-Layer that the Well penetrates.
For a Horizontal Well, only one damaged Region Permeability can be used, owing
to the current restriction that a Horizontal Well must stay within one Sub-Layer.
To enter data within this section, use the Sub-Layer toggle within the Sub-Layer and
Region section, to select the Sub-Layer required.
Mechanical Skin (S): Enter the Mechanical Skin Factor (i.e. the Darcy or Non-
Turbulent Skin Factor at the Wellbore, attributed to the Completion, and damage or
improvement of the near-wellbore region).
Damage Zone Radius (Rd): For positive values of Mechanical Skin (S), enter the
Radius (Rd) of the Damaged Zone around the Wellbore (default value is 2 ft, or
0.6096 m). For negative values of Mechanical Skin (S), a high Damaged Zone
Permeability is imposed and the corresponding Radius (Rd) is calculated. Users
have no control over this Radius.
Note that Radius (Rd) must not be less than 1.5 times the Wellbore Radius (rw).
Damage Zone Permeability (Kd): This is calculated automatically from Hawkins'

formula using the specified (Rd) and (S) values and the undamaged Region
Permeability. The calculated (Kd) value is then used as a near-wellbore Material
Property in the numerical model.
With Vertical and Slanted Wells, where a different (S) and (Rd) can be
specified for each Sub-Layer, the undamaged Region Permeability in each
Sub-Layer is used in Hawkins' formula.
For Horizontal Wells (which in PanMesh can only lie in one Sub-Layer), the
undamaged Permeability of the Region containing the heel of the Well is
281
used in Hawkins' formula, and the computed (Kd) is applied over the length
of the Well. As a result, if the Well traverses regions of different
Permeability, the simulated response will not model a constant Skin Factor
along the Well.
In the case of anisotropic Reservoirs, the Well Deviation and Azimuth relative to
the Dip and Strike of the Sub-Layer are taken into account when computing the
appropriate undamaged Permeability to use in the Hawkins' formula. The isotropy
is respected in the Damaged Region.
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): This Skin Coefficient accounts for Turbulent
Flow resulting from high Gas Flow Rates and is only available for Gas and
Condensate Fluid Types. The Rate-Dependent Pressure Response attributed to
Turbulent Flow is added analytically to the simulated pressure in PanSystem after
the PanMesh run and does not require representation as a Finite Region in the
Finite Element Model.
Unlike the Darcy Skin Factor (S), only one value can be specified for (D).
Therefore:
For Vertical and Slanted Wells in a multi-layered model, (D) should be
considered as an average or composite value for the layered Reservoir.
For Horizontal Wells, (which in PanMesh can only lie in one Sub-Layer), (D)
should be considered as an average or composite value for the traverse of
the Well.
PVT Calculator button:
The Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs generated by selecting this button are identical to those
used in the PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Analytical) data preparation area. The sub-
dialog allows users to view, enter or edit Fluid Parameters for the currently selected Sub-
Layer.
Different sub-dialogs are generated for each Fluid Type depending on whether the
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox has been checked or left unchecked
in the underlying section.
For single-phase fluid parameter data, users should refer to the help topics for:
Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog.
Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog.
Condensate Fluid Parameters sub-dialog.
Real Gas Pseudo-Pressure m(p), is available for Gas and Condensate Fluids.
For multi-phase pseudo-pressure fluid parameter data, users should refer to the help
topics for:
Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog.
Gas Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog.
Condensate Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog.
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure m'(p), is available for all three Fluid Types.
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method selection area:
This option is available for all Fluid Types, when the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method
is enabled. It allows users to account for important variations in Fluid Properties with
pressure and multi-phase phenomena, such as gas break-out below bubble-point or liquid
282
PanSystem
drop-out below dew-point, and the consequent reduction in the Relative Permeability to
the producing fluid.
Computed saturations have radial symmetry around the Wellbore and have no vertical
gradient; as a result, it is not possible to model Water or Gas Coning.
The associated sub-dialogs for the calculation of PVT Properties, Relative Permeabilities
and Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures for all Fluid Types are identical to those used in the
PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Analytical) data preparation area.
Relative Permeabilities button:
This button option is only available if the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox
has been checked in the underlying section. It generates an IPR Relative Permeability -
Data Selection sub-dialog for the selection, entry and editing of Relative Permeability
data.
Pseudo-Pressures button:
Again, this button option is only available if the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method
checkbox has been checked in the underlying section. It generates a Pseudo Table
Editing sub-dialog specific to the selected Fluid Type. Users should refer to the help
topics for:
Oil Pseudo Table Editing sub-dialog.
Gas and Condensate Pseudo Table Editing sub-dialog.
283
Run Mode Tabbed Dialog

General:
4. Run Mode (current tab - optional)
Users may enter data on any of the first three tabbed dialogs, in any order. However,
the first three tabbed dialogs must be correctly initialised before users can OK from the
main dialog.
The dialog allows users to set-up a Single Run or a Batch Run of PanMesh for a number of
different PanMesh Numerical Models (i.e. once they have been initialized within
PanSystem). Once the Run Mode has been selected, the PanMesh Numerical Simulation
process can be initiated and it will run through each model in Single Run (default) or
Batch Run Mode, without further user intervention. The data entry fields and button
functions are described as follows:
Mode area: Two Run Modes are available:
Single Run Mode: This is the default setting. If users wish to proceed with a Single
Run, no further input is required. On selecting OK from this Data Preparation
tabbed dialog, PanSystem writes a standard DATA.SET file to the paging directory,
containing all the necessary information. This file will be read, then deleted by
PanMesh once it has processed all the information.
Batch Run Mode: When this option is checked, the Start New Batch Set-Up button
is activated in the Batch Control Section and users can proceed with the batch set-
up. In Batch Run mode PanSystem writes a (*.SET) file named DATAj.SET (where j
= 1 - n), for each model in the paging directory. If users check before starting
PanMesh they will also find a DATA.SET file, which is identical to the last DATAj.SET
(i.e. j = n) file written. When PanMesh is started, PanSystem re-writes this
DATA.SET file and inserts a BATCH flag (so PanMesh knows what to expect), the
names of the (*.SET) files, etc.
Batch Control section: Input is only required in this section if a Batch Run is being
prepared. This section is used to set-up and assign a name to a Batch Run and add
Numerical Reservoir Models to a Batch Run. The operational procedure is described as
follows:
Start New Batch Set-Up: This button is activated once Batch Run mode has been
selected in the Mode section. When selected, other areas of the dialog are
activated for initiating the Batch Run and two new buttons are generated:
The Batch Name field is activated (changes to white background).
The End Batch Set-Up button is activated.
A new button, Save As Pan File is generated at the lower left corner of the
dialog.
A new button, Add to Batch is generated at the lower right of the dialog,
replacing the OK button.
284
PanSystem
Both of these new buttons are available on all four of the tabbed dialogs
while they are active. Users do not have to return to the Run Mode tabbed
dialog to operate the Save As Pan File and/or Add to Batch buttons.
Batch Name: Enter a name for the current Batch in this field (up to 20
alphanumeric characters are allowed).
Number of Runs in Batch: This field provides information on the number of runs
included in the current Batch (up to 20 runs are allowed in a Batch).
Extend Existing Batch Set-Up: Once models have been added to a Batch Run and
the End Batch Set-Up button has been selected, this button is activated to allow
additional models to be added at a later stage (if required). Select this button to
reinstate the Add to Batch and Save As Pan File buttons to the dialog.
End Batch Set-Up: Select this button once all the necessary Numerical Models have
been added to the current Batch Run. The Add to Batch button will then be
replaced by the OK button and the Save As Pan File button disappears from the
lower left corner of the dialog.
Add to Batch: Select this button to add the current Numerical Model to a Batch
Run.
Save As Pan File: This button allows users to save each model in turn as a (*.PAN)
file for future recall. As discussed earlier in the Mode section, all of the (*.SET) files
are deleted once PanMesh has finished using them, so users will never be able to
see any of the modified DATA.SET files to view any changes that were applied
during separate runs.
If users wish to keep a running log of changes applied to Numerical Models during
various runs, they should save this data using the Save As Pan File button.
Another useful logging feature can be found in the Report menu. Select the
Report Coverpage option from this menu, then select the Edit Remarks button to
open the Edit Remarks sub-dialog. Use this sub-dialog to keep a record of any
changes made to models during each run (e.g. changes to Permeability, Skin, Fluid
Properties, etc.).
Setting-Up a Batch Run:
To set-up a Batch Run:
1. Select the Batch button in the Mode area.
2. Select the New Batch Set-Up button in the Batch Control section.
3. Enter a Batch Name (i.e. up to 20 alphanumeric characters maximum), in the Batch
Control section.
4. Set-up the first model using the other three tabbed dialogs (i.e. if not already
done).
5. Select the Add to Batch button in any of the tabbed dialogs.
6. Optionally, use the Save as Pan File button in any of the tabbed dialogs, to save as
a (*.PAN) file.
7. Set-up the next model in accordance with steps 4 to 6.
8. Continue until all the desired models have been added (i.e. up to 20 models
maximum), then select the End Batch Set-Up button in the Batch Control section.
9. Select the OK button to exit the PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation tabbed
dialog.
285
10. Proceed to PanMesh and run the Simulation (i.e. open PanMesh using the Simulate
menu and Numerical Simulation/PanMesh: New run... option). It should continue
through all the Batched models without further user intervention.
11. Additional models can be added via the Extend Existing Batch Set-Up button, which
will open up the current Batch for new models to be added.
286
PanSystem
User Menu
User Menu Button (Pop-Up)
General:
This pop-up menu system is available within the PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation
tabbed dialog. In the opening tab - Reservoir Geometry, the User Menu button is
situated on the right-hand side (center) of the dialog. The tiered menu options allow
users to alter the display in the Drawing Area and create or edit features within the
Reservoir Model. Some of these options also have keyboard and/or mouse-operated
short-cuts.
Menu Items:
These are described as follows:
Sketch Display: Allows users to switch between the default Plan view of the
Reservoir and either of the two 3-D Elevation view options.
The Reservoir Thickness (i.e. Sub-Layer Thickness) must be defined before the
Elevation view options become available.
(Short-cut: Double left-click in the area outside the Reservoir to toggle between
Plan and Elevation).
Plan View: The default option as described in the Drawing Area above -
essentially a two-dimensional (aerial) view of the Reservoir.
Solid Elevation: The Reservoir structure is displayed as a 3-D block diagram,
with any Regions displayed in the same colors as the Plan view.
Transparent: The Region colors are respected, Internal Boundary
lines and the Well are visible. If the Well is indistinct or not visible,
use the Zoom Well option described below; this accentuates the
representation of the Well (and any Damaged Regions if present).
This assumes that the Well Properties have already been defined in
the Well Configuration tab.
Opaque: The Region colors are respected, but only the outer surface
of the Reservoir Model is displayed, without internals.
Wire Elevation: The Reservoir structure is displayed as a wire frame box.
Hidden lines removed: Only the outer surface Edges are displayed
(this will include the Well outline where it penetrates the surface) -
no Internal Regional Boundary lines or the Well position are visible.
Hidden lines shown: The Internal Regional Boundary lines and the
Well Open Interval/s are displayed.
When an Elevation menu option is activated, additional Viewing

controls become available. These are situated to the right of the
Drawing Area and allow users to Zoom relative to the Reservoir or
Well, Rotate the Reservoir image on the x- or y-axis, and Pan the
viewing position relative to the Reservoir in a Side-Ways or Up and
Down direction. The Reservoir image can also be freely rotated and
moved using the left mouse button to click and drag the image to
an appropriate viewing angle.
287
Map Display: If a Reservoir map graphic has been imported and the Reservoir
outline has been drawn over it, users can choose from:
Show: Display the map in the Drawing Area.
No Show: Do not display the map in the Drawing Area, but show the
outline.
Full Window: Switch to the full-screen display of map and outline.
Region Colors: This controls the coloration of each Region. This is a useful option if
a Reservoir map is displayed, because Region colors may partially obscure the map.
Off: No Region colors are displayed.

By Region Index: The Region colors are displayed in terms of bounded
regions (default).
By Material Properties: The Region colors are displayed in terms of Material
Properties (i.e. where these have been defined in the Material Properties tab,
otherwise a single color will be used for all Regions).
Drawing Mode: This affects the appearance of the Reservoir outline when there is a
map in the background.
Blend: The map is still visible behind the Reservoir outline and Regions.
The Reservoir outline and Region colors are blended as they cross different
background colors (default).
Overwrite: The Reservoir Outline is drawn in the selected pen color (see
next item), and the Region colors obliterate the map.
Pen Color: Users have the choice of Red or White (default) for the Reservoir
Outline.
Graph Scales: This option is used to re-scale the Drawing Area.
(Short-cut: Double left-click on the end value of either axis scale).
Manual: Opens the Graph Window Scales sub-dialog, where the minimum
and maximum values for the x- and y-axes can be defined.
Auto: Re-adjusts the scaling to fit the Reservoir within the Drawing Area
(e.g. in case the re-scaling gets messed-up).
UnZoom: Only enabled if users have Zoomed on a portion of the Reservoir
image. (Zoom by pressing the {Ctrl} key and drawing a box using the left
mouse button). UnZoom will return to the scaling used prior to the Zoom
or series of Zooms.
(Short-cut: Press {Ctrl} and right-click in the Drawing Area).
Key Window: Choose to have the Region color Key hidden or displayed with this
option.
(Short-cut: Double left-click on any of the Region colors in the Key to hide it).
Close Reservoir: When drawing the Reservoir outline, this option will add a
Reservoir Boundary from the last Node created to the first, thereby closing the
Reservoir Outline.
(Short-cut: Right mouse-click).
Clear Reservoir: This option will clear all Reservoir details, including the map, from
the Drawing Area. Any parameters defined under the other tabs within the
PanMesh Data Preparation dialog will also be cleared, but will be retained in
288
PanSystem
memory and can be retrieved if the appropriate parts of the Reservoir Geometry
are re-created.
(Short-cut: Double right-click in the Drawing Area outside the Reservoir).
Node Dialog: This opens the Node Parameters sub-dialog for entering or editing
Node Co-ordinates. If entering via the menu, select the Node Number when in the
sub-dialog. If entering via a short-cut, the Node clicked on will already be selected.
(Short-cut 1: Double left-click on the Node in the Drawing Area (ensure the
cursor displays the word "NODE")).
(Short-cut 2: Double left-click on the Node Number in the Node Information
Table, situated beneath the Drawing Area).
Boundary Dialog: This opens the Boundary Conditions sub-dialog for specifying the
No-Flow (default) or Constant-Pressure condition at each outer Boundary.
(Short-cut: Double left-click on the outer Boundary (ensure the cursor displays
the word "EDGE")).
Remove Regions: This opens the Delete Areal Region sub-dialog to allow the
removal of an Internal Region. By deleting a Region, an Internal Boundary also has
to be deleted.
(Short-cut: Double right-click in the Region (the cursor displays the Region
Number)).
Internal No-Flow Boundaries: This option will open the Define Internal No-Flow
Boundaries sub-dialog which allows the editing of Internal Boundaries (if any
Boundaries have been created) - in particular, the conversion of a portion of the
Internal Boundary into a No-Flow Boundary of finite extent.
(Short-cut: Double left-click on the Internal Boundary (ensure the cursor
displays the words "LINE")).
Save Template File: This will open a Windows Save as... dialog. The current model
can be saved as a template file with extension .tpl.
Cancel: This option closes the menu.
289
Define Internal No-Flow Boundaries Sub-Dialog

General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from the Reservoir Geometry tab of the PanSystem - PanMesh
Data Preparation dialog while operating in the Drawing Area. The sub-dialog can be
opened in two different ways:
If a Plan view is currently displayed in the Drawing Area, select an Internal
Boundary line (the mouse cursor should display "LINE"), then double left-click
with the mouse.
With any view displayed in the Drawing Window, select the User Menu button, then
the Internal No-Flow Boundaries item from the list of menu options.
Although any view can be used for the User Menu option, it is best to be in Plan
view, since all the Nodes and Node Numbers are displayed while operating in this
mode, to help identify the correct Boundary to be defined.
The sub-dialog allows users to create Control Points (i.e. reference points on the
Boundary line), and define No-Flow Boundaries of limited extent within the Reservoir
Model. As a pre-requisite, an Internal Boundary line must either be present or it will
have to be created (refer to the Help topic for Using Regions and Defining Areal
Heterogeneities for detailed instructions on creating Regions and Internal Boundaries).
The Internal Boundary can be sub-divided into two or more sections (i.e. up to a
maximum of 10), and one or more of the sections can be designated as No-Flow. Thus, a
fault or faults of finite extent can be modeled, either touching an outer Boundary (Edge)
of the Reservoir, or isolated internally. The sub-dialog is described as follows:
Line Number: Identifies the Internal Boundary, with the pair of Nodes that it
connects. If there is more than one Internal Boundary present, the toggle can be
scrolled to select another Internal Boundary.
Joining Node: Identifies the Nodes at each end of the currently selected Internal
Boundary line displayed in the Line Number selection field.
Flow Control/Co-ordinate Table Field: This table is used to display the current
Control Point status and start/end (x, y) co-ordinates between each Control Point
that define a segment on the Internal Boundary. One or more segments can either
be designated as No-Flow or Flow, by clicking on the text entries contained in the
Flow Control column of the table. On selecting OK from the dialog, any designated
No-Flow segments will appear as thicker lines of a contrasting color on the
Reservoir Model (i.e. operating in Plan view).
The first Control Point in the table represents the initial start and end points of the
Internal Boundary (i.e. Node positions).
Slider and Current Slider Position: The slider is used to set Control Points at a set
percentage and/or distance along the length of the selected Internal Boundary. As
the slider is moved from left to right, a white square marker will appear on the
selected Internal Boundary of the Reservoir Model displayed in the Drawing Area
(i.e. operating in Plan view). This represents the Control Point to which Flow or
No-Flow attributes will be attached.
Position the Control Point, either visually on the Reservoir Model, or use the
percentage and/or distance information fields, then select the Add Control Point
290
PanSystem
button. This locks the Control Point into place, dividing the Internal Boundary into
two segments. The current Control Point status and start/end (x, y) co-ordinates
will be displayed above in the Flow Control/Co-ordinate Table Field.
Additional Control Points can be added in the same way providing the new slider
position is moved further to the right.
Add Control Point button: This button is used to create and lock new Control Points
into place. After adding the first Control Point on the Internal Boundary, additional
Control Points can be created with the slider, as long as the new slider position is
further to the right.
The slider must be moved from the last Control Point position before selecting this
button or an Information screen prompt will be issued.
Delete Last Control Point button: To move or delete Control Points once they have
been added, it is necessary to return to this sub-dialog and delete them with this
button. They will be deleted in reverse order from the Flow Control/Co-ordinate
Table Field. New Control Points can then be added using the slider control as
described above.
The first Control Point in the table cannot be deleted since it represents the initial
start and end points of the Internal Boundary (i.e. Node positions).
291
Node Parameters Sub-Dialog

General:
Data Preparation dialog. The sub-dialog can be opened in three different ways:
Double left-click on the node number in the Node column beneath the Drawing
Area.
If a Plan view is currently displayed in the Drawing Area, select any Node (the
mouse cursor should display Node #), then double left-click with the mouse.
the Node Dialog item from the list of menu options.
The sub-dialog allows users to edit the parameters of any selected Node in the current
Reservoir Model. The sub-dialog is described below:
Node ID: Choose a Node by typing in the Node ID number manually, or selecting
it with the toggle.
X co-ordinate: Defines the X-direction co-ordinate (East-West), for the selected
Node in Plan View.
Y co-ordinate: Defines the Y-direction co-ordinate (East-West), for the selected
Node in Plan View.
Z co-ordinate: Defines the Z-direction co-ordinate (+ve downwards), for the
selected Node in Plan View (i.e. the Position and Slope of the plane forming the top
surface of the Reservoir, in terms of Vertical Depth below an arbitrary datum). To
model a dipping surface it is only necessary to enter Z co-ordinates at three Nodes
(i.e. default Nodes 1, 2 and 3), then check the Used in Calculation of Planes
checkbox for each Node.
A maximum dip of 45 from horizontal is currently allowed.

Sub-Layer ID: Select a Sub-Layer (if more than one is defined), using the toggle
control.
Sub-Layer Thickness: Enter a Vertical Thickness for the selected Sub-Layer (i.e.
equal to the Reservoir Thickness if it is to be a single-layered model).
If the Sub-Layer is of constant Thickness, enter a value at one Node and
select OK from the dialog; the Sub-Layer thicknesses at the other Nodes will
be filled-in automatically.
If the Sub-Layer is not of constant Thickness, it is only necessary to enter
Thickness values at the three Nodes flagged for the Calculation of Planes,
similar to the procedure described above for the Z co-ordinate. This defines
the plane of the bottom surface of the Sub-Layer.
If the Reservoir Model consists of several Sub-Layers, enter their Vertical
Thicknesses individually by toggling the Sub-Layer counter. Ensure that this step is
carried out at the three Nodes flagged for Calculation of Planes, to define the planar
surfaces representing the bases of each Sub-Layer.
The Thickness values at other Nodes can also be entered, but since these are
redundant, they will be ignored in the geometrical calculations.
292
PanSystem
Apply thickness to all nodes: If thicknesses have already been entered, and
a change is subsequently made, enabling this tick box will copy the new
value, entered at one node, to all the nodes (layer of constant thickness).
Used in Calculation of Planes: This checkbox must be checked for at least three
Nodes (not collinear) in order to model a dipping surface.
By default, the Reservoir is centered on the origin of the Drawing Area. If users wish to
adjust the position of the origin relative to the display, this can be done by clicking and
holding the right mouse button down on either of the red colored axes, or the origin,
moving the mouse to the new position required, then releasing the mouse button. The
actual Reservoir Geometry (and Well) can assume any position within this Drawing Area.
When users OK from this sub-dialog, they will see a green tick mark against Node
Numbers in the Node Information Table of the Reservoir Geometry tab, if these Nodes are
to be used for the Calculation of Planes of the upper surface of the Reservoir (and the Sub-
Layers). Conversely, a red cross signifies that these Nodes are not to be used for this
purpose.
293
Boundary Conditions Sub-Dialog

General:
Data Preparation dialog. The sub-dialog can be opened in two different ways:
If a Plan view is currently displayed in the Drawing Area, select any outer Boundary
line (the mouse cursor should display EDGE), then double left-click with the
mouse.
the Boundary Dialog item from the list of menu options.
The sub-dialog allows users to set the Boundary Condition for any of the selected outer
Boundaries in the current Reservoir model at:
Reservoir Top.
Reservoir Bottom.
Boundary between each Node->Node pair (select the required Boundary by toggling
through the listed Node->Node pairs).
The upper and lower surfaces of the Reservoir structure and each of the outer Boundary
surfaces, can be designated as No-Flow (default) or Constant Pressure Boundaries by
checking the required condition.
Also refer to the Help topics for Using Regions and Areal Heterogeneity and Delete
Areal Region.
294
PanSystem
Delete Areal Region Sub-Dialog

General:
If a Plan view is currently displayed in the Drawing Area, select an Internal
Boundary line (the mouse cursor should display "LINE"), then double right-click
with the mouse.
the Remove Regions item from the list of menu options.
view, since all the Nodes and Node Numbers are displayed while operating in this
mode, to help identify the correct Region/Line for deletion.
The sub-dialog allows users to delete any Internal Boundaries and Regions in the current
Reservoir Model. The sub-dialog is described as follows:
Delete Line: Scroll the toggles until the required Line for deletion is displayed in
the selection field.
Joining x to y: This information field displays the Node Numbers (i.e. x and y) that
lie at each end of the line currently selected in the Delete Line field.
Use Properties: When a Region/Line is deleted, an adjacent Region must expand to
replace it. If there is a Region on either side of the target Region, choose which of
the two Regional Properties to use with the toggle controls.
Deletion of Internal Boundary and associated Nodes to create expanded Region

If the Region/Line removal is going to create a non-convex Region an error message will
be displayed and a new selection will be required.
On selecting OK from the sub-dialog, the target Region and the associated Nodes and
Internal Boundary will disappear and the selected Regional Properties will be applied to
the new (i.e. larger) Region.
295
Regions and Areal Heterogeneity

Using Regions and Defining Areal Heterogeneity
General:
This feature is available within the PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation tabbed dialog,
in the opening tab - Reservoir Geometry. The Reservoir Models are created and
displayed in the Drawing Area section of this dialog and can then be sub-divided into
smaller Regions on the basis of Areal Heterogeneities (i.e. Regional differences in Rock
and/or Fluid Properties - assigned in the Material Properties tabbed dialog).
Creating Regions
By defining Internal Boundaries the Reservoir can be sub-divided into Regions. With a
maximum of 99 Boundaries available, up to 100 Regions can be created and each Region
can be assigned a unique set of Material Properties (i.e. Rock and/or Fluid).
When Regions are created, a Legend box will appear at the top left corner of the Drawing
Area, relating colors to Region Numbers. The Region Number will also appear at the
mouse pointer as it is moved across the Reservoir Model.
Internal Boundaries are drawn by left-clicking and dragging a line from outside the
Reservoir area across the Reservoir to bisect an existing area, then releasing the mouse
button outside the Reservoir on the opposite side. An Internal Boundary will be
displayed with two new Nodes and each Region is automatically assigned a color scheme.
The Nodes can be left-clicked and dragged to new positions if any adjustment is
required.
296
PanSystem
Internal Boundaries are vertical (i.e. in plan view), and extend through the full thickness
of the Reservoir. In a multi-layered Reservoir, they cut through all the Sub-Layers.
They are transparent and do not influence the Well Test Response unless they are
converted into No-Flow Boundaries.
An Internal Boundary plane must not traverse the trajectory of a deviated Vertical Well,
otherwise a warning will be issued. No such restriction applies to a Horizontal Well.
In a similar manner, Regions can also be bisected to create smaller Regions; internal
Nodes will be created at any Internal Boundary crossing points. Up to 20 Nodes are
allowed per polygon, with a maximum of 1000 Nodes allowed per PanMesh session.
To further sub-divide the example illustrated above (e.g. to create four Regions), it is
necessary to break the line drawing process down into two stages:
297
In the first stage, left-click and drag a line across the upper Region to create two new
Regions and two new Nodes, then left-click on the lowest of these new Nodes whilst also
selecting the Shift key (ensure that the cursor displays NODE# before clicking, otherwise
the Node will not be selected).
Keeping the Shift key depressed, drag a new line across the lower Region from the
selected Node to an area outside the Reservoir Model. This will create another Internal
Boundary, contiguous with the upper vertical Internal Boundary and four Regions.
Editing Regions:
To edit the Material Properties of a Region, place the cursor over the required Region in
the Drawing Area and double left-click. This will open the Material Properties tabbed
dialog for that Region. Alternatively, click on the Material Properties tab at the top of the
screen and select the Region number in the Material Properties tabbed dialog using the
toggle controls. This facility can also be used to model a thin altered Region or fault zone
separating two compartments.
298
PanSystem
Deleting a Region or Internal Boundary:

To delete a Region, double right-click on one of the Internal Boundary lines surrounding
the Region to open the Delete Areal Region sub-dialog. The cursor should display LINE
before the mouse button is clicked. Alternatively, the same sub-dialog can be generated
by selecting the Remove Regions option from the User Menu. Scroll the Region/Line
toggle controls until the Region/Line for deletion is displayed.
When a Region/Line is deleted, an adjacent Region must expand to replace it. If there is
a Region on either side of the target Region, choose which of the two Regional Properties
to use from the Use Regional Properties drop-down selection field. If the Region/Line
removal is going to create a non-convex Region an error message will be displayed and a
new selection will be required.
On selecting OK from the sub-dialog, the target Region and the associated Nodes and
Internal Boundary will disappear and the selected Regional Properties will be spread to
the new (i.e. larger) Region.
Control Points and Internal No-Flow Boundaries:
It is possible to create No-Flow Boundaries of limited finite extent within the Reservoir
Model. To achieve this, an Internal Boundary must first be created. The Internal
Boundary can be sub-divided into two or three sections, and one or two of the sections
can be designated No-Flow. In the example illustrated below (shown with the Region
299
Colors switched off for clarity), a Boundary has been created diagonally across the
Reservoir Model. Hover the mouse cursor over the Boundary until the Line caption is
displayed, then double left-click to generate the Define Internal No-Flow Boundaries
sub-dialog:
The sub-dialog can be positioned to the side of the Drawing Area and using the Slider
Control, users can position and view the location of Control Points (indicated by the
white-colored square on the Boundary Line), before adding them via the Add Control
Point button:
300
PanSystem
In the next illustration, four Control Points have been added along the Boundary Line and
these have been allocated Flow (colored white) or No-Flow (colored blue) status by left-
clicking on the appropriate entries in the Flow Control column of the sub-dialog.
If the Region Colors are enabled, a contrasting Boundary Line color is used to
indicate the position of any designated No Flow Boundaries.
The Start and End co-ordinate points indicate the extent of the individual Flow and No-
Flow Boundaries:
301
To move either of the Control Points once they have been added, users must return to
the Define Internal No-Flow Boundaries sub-dialog, delete one or both with the Delete
Last Control Point button, and re-create using the Slider Control. The sub-dialog can also
be accessed via the Internal No-Flow Boundaries option on the User Menu. Alternatively,
use the left mouse-click method described earlier. Remember that the Line caption needs
to be displayed before the mouse button is clicked.
Any existing internal Boundary can be designated as a No-Flow Boundary without

having to create Control Points as described above, providing the Boundary Line
does not completely cross the Reservoir Model.
In the example illustrated below, the internal Boundary between Nodes 7 and 10 has
been designated as a No-Flow Boundary using the Define Internal No-Flow Boundaries
sub-dialog as described above, but without having to create Control Points. However, the
internal Boundary between Nodes 3 and 6 cannot be designated as a No-Flow Boundary
since it completely crosses the Reservoir Model:
302
PanSystem
The final illustration shows how a thin altered Region or partially sealing fault of finite
extent and low permeability can be modeled (i.e. the blue-colored Region), either
touching an outer edge of the Reservoir Model, or isolated internally:
In this case, if users double left-click in the blue-colored Region, this generates the
Material Properties tabbed dialog, where the physical characteristics of the Region can be
defined.
Imported Templates or Maps:
Where imported Templates or Reservoir Maps are being used, the following rules apply
for Regions and Nodes:
Templates with existing internal Regions do not allow new Regions and Nodes to
be created (i.e. 3-Region, Enclosed Region and OWC models).
Templates without internal Regions do allow new Regions and Nodes to be
created.
The {Backspace} key cannot be used to delete Nodes within Templates and new
Internal Boundaries cannot be deleted where they will create a non-convex Region.
303
Window Scale
Graph Window Scale Sub-Dialog
General:
If a Plan view is currently displayed in the Drawing Area, place the mouse cursor
near the end points of the Graph Window Scale (i.e. top left, bottom left or bottom
right of the Drawing Area - the mouse cursor should change from an arrow to a I
symbol), then double left-click with the mouse.
the Graph Scales and Manual items from the tiered list of menu options.
view, since the Graph Window Scale is only displayed while operating in this mode.

The sub-dialog is used to edit the existing Graph Window Scales (i.e. default settings)
and define a new minimum and maximum value for the X- and Y-axes of the Drawing
Area:
Min X: Enter a new value for the X-axis minimum value (i.e. negative).
Max X: Enter a new value for the X-axis maximum value (i.e. positive).
Min Y: Enter a new value for the X-axis minimum value (i.e. negative).
Max Y: Enter a new value for the X-axis maximum value (i.e. positive).
On OK from the sub-dialog the new scaling will be applied to the Drawing Area for the
current model.
304
PanSystem
Map Wizard
Import Map Wizard
General:
The Wizard is an on-screen Help system designed for PanSystem novices and
intermediate users, who may need varying degrees of assistance or a reminder in terms
of what to do next.
In this instance, the Wizard is used to offer instructions on Importing a Map via the
Reservoir Geometry tab of the PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation dialog.
The Wizard dialogs are intended to be brief, concise and easily assimilated, but further
help is available from each of the dialogs should it be required.
If an existing Reservoir Map is available in graphic file format (i.e. JPEG (*.jpg), GIF
(*.gif), Dib (*.bmp) and TIFF (*.tif) formats are all supported), it can be imported and an
outline drawn over it for use in PanSystem. The map image must not be tilted on the
page, as no correction for rotation can be made.
The Reservoir Map import is initiated from the Reservoir Geometry tab by selecting the
Import Map button option. This generates a standard Windows Open dialog to browse for
and select a suitable Reservoir Map file in a supported format. Once a Reservoir Map file
has been located and selected, OK from the Open dialog to generate the map in a display
window and open the PanSystem Wizard; detailed instructions will be given by the Wizard
from this point.
The path to the Reservoir Map file will be written in the (*.PAN) file next time it is
saved. Ensure that the Reservoir Map file is stored in a suitable folder (such as the
data folder) before it is imported. If the location of the Reservoir Map file is
subsequently changed, PanSystem will not be able to find it unless the path is
edited in the (*.PAN) file. To edit the path, open the (*.PAN) file in an editor such
as Notepad, search for the Reservoir Map name (it will be in the [panmesh] section
of the file) and change it as necessary.
The Wizard help is offered in a number of steps:
1. The Wizard instructs users to define the map scaling for the imported map image,
by providing the co-ordinates of two arbitrary reference points on the image.
Double-click on the first reference point to generate an Enter Co-ordinates sub-
dialog and enter co-ordinates (east and north). The units can be changed before
the import is performed via the Units option of the Configuration menu (i.e. if
required).
2. On selecting OK from the dialog, double-click on a second reference point and enter
the co-ordinates. This is enough for PanSystem to compute the relationship
between map pixels and distance in the x- and y-directions and to scale the map.
If it becomes necessary to repeat this step to correct a mistake, both reference
points must be re-defined.
3. If the reference points happen to lie in an exact east-west or north-south line,
PanSystem will only be able to scale in that one direction. It will assume the same
pixel/distance scaling in the other direction (i.e. that the map grid is square).
4. Draw the Reservoir outline as described in Reservoir Geometry. Once the Reservoir
shape has been closed, the Nodes can be dragged to new positions, but new Nodes
cannot be added. To add extra Nodes (i.e. up to a total of 20), use the
{Backspace} key to re-open the shape and then draw in the additional lines.
305
5. On closing the map display window, the imported Reservoir Map and Reservoir
outline will be displayed in the Drawing Area with the co-ordinates of the drawn
Nodes listed below in the Node Information Table.
6. Refer to the Help topics for specific tabs in the PanSystem - PanMesh Data
Preparation dialog for specific information on other operations that can be
performed with imported Reservoir Maps:
Reservoir Geometry
Well Configuration
Material Properties
Run Mode (optional)
306
PanSystem
Tide Data
Tide Data - Overview
General:
The Tidal Filter facility in PanSystem corrects for the effects of ocean tides on extended
well test data. The filter works as follows:
The local sea tidal waveform (Tide Height or Pressure versus Time) is first
synchronized with the Well Test record so as to correlate with the tide-induced
features in the Gauge Data.
This waveform is then subtracted from the Gauge Data. A suitable scaling factor is
found by trial and error, such that the tidal disturbances are reduced to a minimum.
Example of Gauge Data Affected by Tidal Effects

The Tide Data menu option on the PanSystem Dataprep Menu provides two different
methods of including tide data for use with the Tidal Filter facility:
Maritime Tide Table: This approach constructs a tidal signal from published
maritime tide tables (i.e. high and low Tide Heights versus Time) covering the
period of the well test.
Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge: This approach uses data from a sub-sea pressure gauge
directly for the tidal signal.
Before attempting to remove tidal effects in this manner, users should try the data
smoothing facility available on the Data Edit Plot. This plot is generated from the
Dataprep/Gauge Data menu item (refer to the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation Dialog).
Once a plot has been generated, use the Data Reduction and Smoothing icon from the
Dataprep Toolbar, to generate the Enter Reduction Smoothing Details dialog and apply
Data Smoothing. This may be sufficient for reducing small amplitude tidal interference
effects to an acceptable level.
307
The Tidal Filter tools are also to be found on the Data Edit Plot toolbar in Dataprep/Gauge
Data, and users should also refer to the Help topics for the Dataprep Toolbar and
Dataprep Toolbar Tidal Filter Mode dialog.
308
PanSystem
Maritime Tide Table
General:
This is one of two sub-menu options available within PanSystem from the Dataprep menu
under the Tide Data... option (i.e. Maritime Tide Table or Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge). It is
used to construct a tidal signal from published maritime tide tables (i.e. high and low Tide
Heights versus Time) covering the period of the well test.
On selection of the Maritime Tide Table sub-menu option, anEdit Tide Table dialog is
generated, the objectives of which are:
To enter the high and low Tide Heights and Times for the period spanning the well
test (max 100 lines). The data can either be typed in, loaded from an existing file,
or pasted in from an external editor. The table is saved as part of the (*.PAN) file.
To enter Local Time information to enable approximate synchronization between
the tidal waveform and the gauge clock.
An alternative to using published tide tables is to place a pressure gauge on the sea-bed
(or anywhere below the sea surface) and record the tidal fluctuations as a change in
hydrostatic pressure. If tidal pressure gauge data is to be used, refer to the Help topic
for Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge.
309
Edit Tide Table Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Dataprep/Tide Data sub-menu option entitled Maritime
Tide Table. It is used to construct and/or edit a tidal signal from published maritime tide
tables (i.e. high and low Tide Heights versus Time) covering the period of the well test.
The main objectives of this dialog are:
To enter and/or edit data manually, load in from an existing file, or paste in from an
external editor. The table is saved as part of the (*.PAN) file.
the tidal waveform and the gauge clock (i.e. using the Parameters button).
Note that PanSystem V-1.80 tide tables are not compatible.

Two columns of data are displayed, but within the table field, only 16 rows can be viewed
at a time. Users can scroll through the file using the scroll bar on the right-hand side of
the table field to move cell by cell (i.e. left mouse-click on arrow keys) or page by page
(i.e. left mouse-click on scroll bar either side of slider).
one cell).
Open: This option allows users to select a data file by generating a Windows file
Open dialog, filtered to accept suitable file types. This a standard file Open option,
to import a tide table in (*.SEA) format. The ASCII format of the (*.SEA) file
(introduced in V-2.6), is described below. Earlier binary format files from program
versions as far back as PanSystem V-2.3 (16-bit and 32-bit) can also be imported.
Save As: Opens a Windows File Save As dialog that is filtered to save the file with
the appropriate PanSystem file extension. This is a standard file Save option, to
export an ASCII tide table, with default extension (*.SEA). The tide table and other
information are saved as part of the (*.PAN) file, so saving a separate (*.SEA) tide
table file (e.g. for use with other well tests) is optional.
Copy: Copies all the columns of data contained in the table to the ClipBoard.
These columns of data can be subsequently pasted into a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).
source via the windows ClipBoard. The source data must contain the same number
The Time data may be input in any of the usual accepted formats (e.g. hours,
hh:mm:ss, etc.), except minutes or seconds. The Time data must also be
310
PanSystem
lines, then Paste.
Successive entries in the tide table should represent high and low Tide Times and
Heights - over a period slightly longer than the duration of the well test. Do not
enter any intermediate Times and Heights.
Parameters: Opens the Tide Table Parameters sub-dialog that allows users to
synchronize regional and Local Times to the gauge clock Time and mean Tide
Height.
Function: Change values in a range of cells. Users can also Re-scale and Shift the
tidal signal during the filtering operation, so use of this facility at this stage is not
essential. Refer to Gauge Data Editing Function.
File Structure for ASCII (*.SEA):
[18922 = code word]
[Local time at 12:00 ST] [Test start time (gauge)] [Test start time (local)] [Mean tide
height]
t1 h1
t2 h2
....
....
tn-1 hn-1
tn hn
0 0
tj = time in decimal hours, hj = tide height (i.e. at high and low tide points only).
All Times are cumulative decimal hours (e.g. 14:30:00 on the first day in the table is
14.500, 14:30:00 next day is 38.500, and so on). The file may be space- or tab-
delimited. The final row of zeroes defines the end of the file. Maximum 100 lines.
Example:
18922
12.000000 0.000000 9.500000 3.608920
50.266666 1.968500
56.566666 4.921260
62.700001 2.624670
311
68.683334 4.921260
75.300003 2.296590
81.699997 4.593180
87.933334 2.952760
....
....
193.833328 4.921260
199.833328 1.968504
206.250000 5.249344
212.433334 1.968504
0.000000 0.000000
312
PanSystem
Edit Tide Table Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from theEdit Tide Table dialog after selecting the Parameters
button. It is used to enter the high and low Tide Heights and Times for the period
spanning the well test or enter Local Time information to enable approximate
synchronization between the tidal waveform and the gauge clock.
The sub-dialog is comprised of four data entry fields and four function buttons described
as follows:
Local Time at 12.00 am Standard Time: If the tide tables are in a Standard Time
format (e.g. GMT or EST), rather than Local Time, this entry allows for
synchronization between the two. If the tide tables are already in Local Time, enter
12:00:00 here (i.e. no Shift).
Test Starts at (Gauge Clock Time): Enter the Time that the well test started (or the
Time of some major event), according to the Gauge Clock.
Test Starts at (Actual Local Time): Enter the Time that the well test started (or the
Time of some major event), according to Local Clock Time.
By synchronising Local time with Standard Time, and the Gauge Clock with Local
Time, the tide tables can be aligned with the Well Test.
Mean Tide Height: Usually quoted above LAT (i.e. Lowest Astronomical Tide), or
some arbitrary datum. The Tide Heights in the table must be measured relative to
the same datum. This will be subtracted from the Maritime Tide Height signal at
the filtering stage, so it is reduced to amplitude fluctuations about a mean of zero.
Time button: This allows users to select the Time Format for the Time data entries
(i.e. default setting is Hours), by generating the Tide Table Time Formats sub-
dialog.
Calculate Mean button: This button will determine a Mean Tide Height from the
data entered in the table by calculating an average value.
Note that it is better to use the published value if this is available.
313
Tide Table Time Formats Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is accessed from theEdit Tide Table Parameters dialog after selecting the
Time button; it is used to select the Time Format for the Time entries used in the Edit
Tide Table Parameters dialog (i.e. default setting is Hours).
The sub-dialog is described as follows:
Local Time at 12.00 am Standard Time: Select the Time Format for the Local Time
field from the drop-down list.
Test Starts at (Gauge Clock Time): Select the Time Format for the Gauge Clock
well test Start Time from the drop-down list.
Test Starts at (Actual Local Time): Select the Time Format for the Actual Local well
test Start Time from the drop-down list.
314
PanSystem
Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge
General:
This is one of two sub-menu options available within PanSystem from the Dataprep menu
under the Tide Data... option (i.e. Maritime Tide Table or Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge). An
alternative to using published tide tables is to place a pressure gauge on the sea bed (or
anywhere below the sea surface) and record the tidal fluctuations as a change in
hydrostatic pressure.
Before using this option, the sub-sea pressure gauge data must be imported into
PanSystem using the Import button option in the Data File section of the Gauge
Data (TPR) Preparation dialog.
On selection of the Sub Sea Pressure Gauge sub-menu option, a Select Tidal Pressure
Gauge dialog is generated. Providing that data has been imported, the available tidal
gauge data will be displayed in a drop-down list.
On selection of the required tidal gauge data, then the OK button, an Edit Tidal
Pressure Gauge sub-dialog will be generated.
Unless tidal gauge data has already been imported into PanSystem it will not
appear in this list - select Cancel and import the data using the Import button
option in the Data File section of the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog.
If sub-sea pressure gauge data is unavailable, published tide tables can be used. For
details of how these are used, refer to the Help topic for Maritime Tide Table.
315
Select Tidal Pressure Gauge Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed from the Dataprep menu under the Tide Data... sub-menu option
by selecting Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge. It is used to select the appropriate Pressure
Gauge column from a sub-sea pressure gauge directly for the tidal signal, as an
alternative to using published Maritime Tide Tables. In this case, the pressure gauge is
placed on the sea-bed (or anywhere below the sea surface), where it records the tidal
fluctuations as a change in hydrostatic pressure.
Before using this option, the sub-sea pressure gauge data must be imported into
PanSystem using the Import button option in the Data File section of the Gauge
Data (TPR) Preparation dialog.
Tidal Gauge: Using the drop-down menu, select a data set from the available
Pressure Gauge columns (i.e. data set/s imported via the Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog).
Select the required tidal gauge data, then the OK button, to generate an Edit Tidal
Pressure Gauge sub-dialog.
Unless tidal gauge data has already been imported into PanSystem it will not
appear in this list - select Cancel and import the data using the Import button
option in the Data File section of the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog.
316
PanSystem
Edit Tidal Pressure Gauge Dialog
General:
This dialog is accessed via the Dataprep/Tide Data sub-menu option entitled Sub-Sea
Pressure Gauge. This sub-menu option generates a Select Tidal Pressure Gauge dialog,
and providing that gauge data has been imported, the available tidal gauge data will be
displayed in a drop-down list. On selection of the required tidal gauge data, then the
OK button, an Edit Tidal Pressure Gauge sub-dialog will be generated; this is used to
construct and/or edit a table of tidal fluctuations as a change in Hydrostatic Pressure
versus Time, covering the period of the well test.
The main objectives of the dialog are:
To enter and/or edit data manually, load in from an existing file, or paste in from an
external editor. The table is saved as part of the (*.PAN) file.
the tidal waveform and the gauge clock (i.e. using the Parameters button).
Two columns of data are displayed, but within the table field, only 16 rows can be viewed
at a time. Users can scroll through the file using the scroll bar on the right-hand side of
the table field to move cell by cell (i.e. left mouse-click on arrow keys) or page by page
(i.e. left mouse-click on scroll bar either side of slider).
one cell).
Function: Change values in a range of cells. The Time or Pressure data can be
corrected by Shifting and/or Re-scaling. Users can also Re-scale and Shift the tidal
signal during the filtering operation, so use of this facility at this stage is not
essential. Refer to Gauge Data Editing Function.
Copy: Copies all the columns of data contained in the table to the ClipBoard.
These columns of data can be subsequently pasted into a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).
source via the windows ClipBoard. The source data must contain the same
number of columns as those in the table being pasted into, and must also be tab-
separated. The Time data may be input in any of the usual accepted formats (e.g.
hours, hh:mm:ss, etc.), except minutes or seconds. The Time data must also be
317
point in the Time column and select the Paste button - do not use Ctrl+V from
Format into the format being used for the current PanSystem display, if different.
lines, then Paste.
Time: Change the Time Format. Refer to Gauge Data Editing Time.
Parameters: Opens the Tide Table Parameters sub-dialog that allows users to
synchronize Regional and Local Times to the Gauge Clock Time and Mean Tide
Height.
318
PanSystem
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning
1. General
Modern pressure gauges record pressure at a high rate. The time versus pressure data
obtained over a period of time is sometimes huge and it is difficult to analyze and store
this amount of data. Also the conventional techniques for noise removal lead to
suppression of small transience which was of interest to the reservoir engineers.
Similarly, the standard data reduction techniques do not preserve all the transience and
hence any analysis performed on this reduced data may lead to incorrect estimation of
well and reservoir parameters.
Advanced gauge data conditioning uses wavelet based algorithms to remove single point
outliers, denoise the data, and identify transients (buildups and drawdowns) and to
reduce the data in such a manner that these transients are preserved in the reduced data
set. The workflow to perform data conditioning is defined as follows and cannot be
changed:
Outlier Removal
Interpolation
Denoising
Event Detection
Data Reduction
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning can be used to analyze pressure data obtained from
conventional gauges, permanent down-hole gauges and from Formation Tester systems.
Acronyms & Definitions
Term Definition
1. ADC Advanced Data Conditioning/Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning
2. TPR Time, Pressure, Rate
2. Steps Involved:
2.1 Menu Option
The Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning menu option is available under the Dataprep
menu item in PanSystem. The ADC menu gets enabled when at least one TPR with a
pressure column is loaded into PanSystem.
319
Figure 1: Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning Menu Option
2.2 Dataset selection for Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning

Upon clicking the "Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning" menu option, the list of all the
TPRs that have at least one pressure column will appear in a list box as shown in the
figure below. This dialog will appear only if there are more than one such TPR. If there is
only one TPR then this dialog will not appear and the TPR shall be considered for ADC by
default.
Figure 2: Dataset Selection Dialog
The dataset that the user is currently analyzing shall appear as the default selection in
the list, but the user can choose another data set. Only one dataset can be selected as
ADC can be performed on only one dataset at a time.
Select the dataset and click OK, or else Cancel the operation.
2.3 Configuration file selection
After selecting the dataset the system asks to load a previously saved configuration file.
The configuration file contains the configuration parameters required to perform ADC on a
given dataset. This is usually specific to a particular dataset, but can, of course, be used
with others.
The message box shown in the following Figure will appear. Select "Yes" to load an
existing configuration file, or select "No". If a configuration file is not selected then the
320
PanSystem
ADC module calculates default values for the configuration parameters and shows them in
the ADC wizard screens.
Figure 3: Configuration File Selection Prompt
If the user selects "Yes", it opens up a Windows File Open dialog and the user can select
the file. Configuration files are xml files with .cfg file extension. The default selection
directory shall be users data directory.
2.4 Preparing the data for Data Conditioning (Preprocessing)

After selecting the configuration file, data is loaded into the ADC module from PanSystem
and is preprocessed to remove
Data points with negative pressure values.
Data points where pressure is 0 psia.
Data points where the pressure value is greater than 20,000 psia.
Any data point that is a duplicate in time. Only one point is kept for each time
stamp.
A status bar is displayed in PanSystem during preprocessing as shown below.
Figure 4: Preprocessing Status Bar
The preprocessed data are shown in blue in Figure 5.

2.5 Screen Dialog and Operational Instructions
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning gives a wizard-like interface for the various steps of
the workflow. The screen is divided into 3 panes as shown below.
321
Figure 5: Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning Wizard
The following items are in the left pane:
Data Conditioning Workflow: The first group box named "Data Conditioning Workflow"
shows the steps in the data conditioning workflow. The workflow is predefined and can
not be changed. The current workflow step remains highlighted in bold.
Configuration parameters: The title and contents of each box changes according to the
current workflow step. The user enters values for the configuration parameters, or
accepts the defaults. The configuration parameters for each workflow step will be
explained in detail in later sections.
Add data as TPR: Processed data obtained at each workflow step can be saved as an
individual TPR for further analysis if required. However in most of the cases the outlier-
removed data and denoised data is not required in separate TPR form outside of the ADC
module. The user can select the datasets to save as TPRs, except for the final stage,
which is mandatory.
322
PanSystem
Click "Run & Plot" to process the data with the configuration values entered,
and view the results in the plot area. A progress bar along with an "Abort" button is
displayed to show the status of the processing. The processed data is plotted along with
the previous steps processed data. If one or more previous steps were skipped by the
user, then the skipped steps will be performed internally before performing the current
step. The user may "Run & Plot" any number of times with different configuration values
until satisfied with the results. Each new run will restart from the original data that came
through to that stage.
Example: If the user is on the Denoising step and clicks "Run & Plot" then the Denoising
operation will be performed on the interpolated data, and denoised data will be plotted
against interpolated data. If the Interpolation step was skipped by the user then
interpolation will be performed internally using the default values before performing
Denoising. If the user denoises again with different parameters, the operation will be
rerun on the interpolated data.
Click the "Next" button to move to the next workflow step. You should move
to the next step once you are satisfied with the results of the current step. Clicking the
"Next" button will display the configuration parameters for the next step and a plot of the
data of the previous step.
The user can click "Next" on each screen, without clicking "Run & Plot", to navigate to the
last workflow step, and then click "Run All" to perform the entire sequence.
Configuration values will be saved at each "Next" click if the "Save all configuration"
option is checked. Use the browse button to define the destination folder and file name
(extension .cfg).
Example: If the current step is Denoising and "Next" button is clicked then the next
workflow step (Event Detection) is selected and the configuration parameters for event
detection are displayed. Plot of denoised data will be shown in the plot area.
Click the "Back" button to navigate to the previous workflow step in the ADC
wizard.
: Switch on the check box to save the configuration values to a .cfg file
for future use. If this is checked then configuration values for all the steps will be written
to a file in xml format. The user can select the location and file name by clicking the
browse button. The default path for this file is C:\Documents and Settings\user
name\Application Data\EPS\PanSystem 3.5\data and the default name of the file is same
as the dataset name. Each time the user clicks "Next" or "Run All", the configuration
values are saved to this file.
The right pane is the plot area and displays the plot of latest processed data versus
previous workflow step data. The plot area contains a toolbar with the following buttons
to facilitate various viewing options.
323
Resume: The resume button enables tracking on all axes. When tracking is enabled,
the axes will adjust their minimum and span values based on the tracking style. In
addition to enabling tracking, all cursors will be hidden, and the axes minimum & span
will be restored to the values they had when the axes tracking was initially disabled. This
button can also be used to unzoom.
Pause: The pause button turns off tracking on all axes. When tracking is off, the
axes will remain fixed while data is being added.
Scroll (Axes): When the Axes Scroll Mode button is active, the user can drag the
axis and scroll the view. When this button is selected, the Axes Zoom Mode button is
unselected.
Zoom out: When this button is clicked, all axes are zoomed out by a factor 2x
(Default is 2, use the ZoomInOutFactor property from the Properties toolbar to

change this). When this button is clicked, tracking on all axes will be disabled to pause
the view.
Zoom in: When this button is clicked, all axes are zoomed in by a factor 2x (Default
is 2, use the ZoomInOutFactor property from the Properties toolbar to change this).
When this button is clicked, tracking on all axes will be disabled to pause the view.
Zoom box: This button allows the user to zoom into a particular region in the
DataView. The box can start at any point, but the mouse must be dragged to the lower
right to actually cause a zoom. The zoom action will affect all axes. You can also use this
button for a second purpose by handling the OnBeforeZoomBox event and setting the
Cancel parameter to TRUE. By setting the Cancel to True, the zoom will not occur and you
can substitute your own code for the behavior you desire such as zooming only the X-Axis
or possibly adding annotations. When this button is clicked, Tracking is not initially
disabled; only after the user selects rubber-bands a proper area and then releases the
mouse button, tracking on all axes will be disabled.
Cursor: This button generates a vertical red line which you can drag sideways with
the mouse. As it moves, it displays a readout of the x- and y-coordinates of the newly
processed data.
Properties: This button brings up the run-time property editor for the component.
Here you can make temporary changes to the plot properties (color, size, trace/marker,
scaling, etc).
Copy to clipboard: This button copies an image of the plot component to the
clipboard. The format is Bitmap, Metafile, or JPEG as specified by the
"CopyToClipBoardFormat" property on the main interface.
Save: This button brings up a save dialog to save the image of the plot component
to a file. The user can select Bitmap, Metafile, or JPEG as the file type.
324
PanSystem
Print: This button will print the screen display of the plot component. If the
PrintShowDialog property is set to True, the user will first see a dialog for selecting the
printer and setting specific options. The user will also have the option of canceling the
print job when the print dialog is shown.
The bottom pane contains the following wizard buttons.
This button restores default values for configuration parameters in

all the workflow steps. If a configuration file is loaded initially, then it restores the values
from the configuration file. Otherwise the default calculated values will be restored.
Click this button to run all the workflow steps at any point during data
conditioning. This is a quick way to perform ADC and should be done if the user is sure
about the configuration values entered. If specific workflow step/steps have been
performed individually by clicking "Run & Plot" then "Run All" will skip those steps and
perform the remaining steps. After processing, "RunAl" closes ADC, adds the reduced
data as a new TPR in PanSystem, and plots the reduced data on the Data Edit Plot. If the
option to add other processed data was selected in "Add data as TPR", then those
datasets will also be added as TPR. Flow periods (events) will be marked on the Data Edit
Plot as shown in Figure 15.
This button cancels ADC and returns to the PanSystem Data Edit Plot window.
If any data has been processed before Cancel and "Add data as TPR" is switched on for
that data set then this processed data will be added to PanSystem as a new TPR. Cancel
should be used if you are in the middle of ADC and need to close ADC without losing the
processed data. The processed data can be loaded again by performing ADC all over
again on the saved/processed TPR.
Example: After performing outlier removal you cancel ADC. If you had switched on "Add
outlier removed data as TPR", then the outlier removed data will be added as a new TPR.
You can restart ADC later, but this time pick the TPR added for outlier removed data in
the selection list box. Make sure that you load the configuration file you saved last time.
The outliers that were removed last time will not appear.
This button cancels ADC and does not save any data. In other words this is a
way to quit ADC without saving any processed data or configuration data.
This button opens the ADC help file for user reference. This help file can also
be opened by pressing F1.
3. Data Conditioning Workflow

3.1 Outlier Removal
325
"Outliers" are data points that lie away from the trend of the data. They can be identified
by their misalignment with the rest of the data.
Figure 6: Outliers in a dataset
Since an outlier is isolated and lies away from the rest of the data, it causes
discontinuities in the data stream, creating two consecutive singularities. For example, an
outlier that lies above the trend of the data departs from the data trend, creating the first
singularity. The second singularity is a result of a sudden decrease from the outlier back
to the trend of the signal. These singularities are detected by using wavelets and
analyzing their detail coefficients.
Show Coefficients Plot: The Coefficient plot shows the detailed wavelet
coefficients. As mentioned in the previous paragraph, whenever there exists an
outlier in the data, the detail coefficient will first change sharply in one direction,
either increasing or decreasing, and then change again in the opposite direction.
Therefore, the singularities created by the outliers can be detected by screening for
two large magnitudes of the detail coefficients with opposite signs. An appropriate
threshold can be selected by carefully observing the coefficients plot.
326
PanSystem
Figure 7: Wavelet coefficients plot for outlier removal
Threshold: This is the coefficient threshold in psi to remove outliers. An outlier

point in the original data will be removed when two consecutive coefficients of
opposite sign cross this threshold. A rule of thumb in choosing a threshold is to ask
oneself how far a point has to be from the general trend to be considered an
outlier. Since pressure data may be spurious with outliers of different magnitudes,
the obvious outliers should be eliminated first, thus revealing the main structure of
the signal, and the less obvious ones are eliminated iteratively. The default value is
calculated by statistically analyzing the coefficients plot.
Unless the Recursive option is switched on, each new run will restart from the
original data that came through to this stage.
Recursive: To perform outlier removal iteratively, switch on this flag. Outliers

whose magnitudes in the detail signal are higher than, say; 20 psi should be
removed first. Then, the threshold should be reduced successively to 15 psi, 10 psi,
and 5 psi. For a better value of threshold for the dataset, observe the coefficients
plot after each iteration. Each time you enter a new threshold click "Run & Plot" to
perform outlier removal and view the results in the plot area.
327
Outlier Removed data set name: This will be the name of the TPR if "Add outlier
removed data as TPR" has been checked.
Figure 8: Outlier removed (blue) data after applying iterative thresholding
3.2 Interpolation
In order to obtain the wavelet transform, the input data must be sampled uniformly. In
many cases, the pressure data is unevenly spaced. At first glance, it may seem desirable
to interpolate between data points to obtain an evenly sampled set of data. Interpolation
is a method of constructing new data points within the range of a discrete set of known
data points.
Each new run will restart from the preprocessed data that came through to this
stage.
Type of Interpolation: There are two types of interpolation algorithms

implemented. One is "Linear" and other is "Nearest".
328
PanSystem
Linear Interpolation:A new point(s) is introduced between two data points

at a predetermined time where pressure is determined by fitting a line
between the two neighboring data points of the input data.
Nearest Interpolation:A new point(s) is introduced between two points at
a predetermined time where pressure is determined to be the pressure of
the point nearest (in time) among the two neighbors of the input data.
The default linear interpolation is recommended. Other types of interpolation may not
work as well as the linear interpolation method since they tend to smear out the regions
where there are rapid changes.
Interpolation Interval: This is the interpolation interval in seconds to interpolate

the data. A default value is suggested based on a preliminary analysis of the data.
Interpolation interval should not be too small otherwise it would introduce many
points resulting in a huge data set. Also if there are too many interpolated points
between any two points then the local behavior will be dominant and the overall
trend will be affected. On the other hand, if the interpolation interval is large then it
may end up losing data points. If the data points deleted lie in the fast changing
early transient region then the results will be affected and the algorithm may not be
able to detect the exact rate change events in later steps.
The Interpolation Interval must, of course, be less than the total time range.
Tolerance Factor:During interpolation, if the difference between the

predetermined time of the point to be interpolated and time coordinate of one of
the neighboring data points is less than a certain tolerance factor, then no
interpolated point is created and the original point is preserved with its time and
pressure coordinates.
The tolerance factor must be less than 10% of the interpolation interval.
329
Figure 9: Interpolated data (blue) using linear interpolation
3.3 Denoising
Denoising is a procedure that is applied to the data to reduce the scattering and the
fluctuations in the data values in order to extract the most representative features from
the data. One of the most effective ways to denoise data without making prior
assumptions about their behavior is the wavelet thresholding method. While most
denoising methods tend to smear out sharp features in the data, the wavelet thresholding
method generally preserves most of these features. In any case, the smearing effect
cannot be avoided when data spacing is large. The denoising process thus gives the best
results when the data is collected at a high sampling frequency.
Each new run will restart from the outlier-removed data that came through to this
stage.
Wavelet type: Select wavelet type from Haar and Sym8.

Decomposition level:Select the level of decomposition. The level of
decomposition represents the frequencies that will be smoothed out. Level 1
represents frequencies that lie between the maximum frequency fmax and fmax/2.
330
PanSystem
Level 2 represents frequencies that lie between fmax/2 and fmax/4 and so on.
Therefore, Level 1 represents high frequency noise and level 10 is very low
frequency noise.
The decomposition level should satisfy the following equation:

For the maximum level (LMAX): 2LMAX number of interpolated points.
Smooth all levels up to this level:If this is ON then smoothing will be applied to
all the levels starting from level 1 up to the selected level - that is, all the
frequencies that lie between fmax and
fmax / (2LMAX) will be smoothed out. If this is off, then only the frequencies
corresponding to selected level will be smoothed out.
Thresholding Rule:Select the threshold calculation rule from Rigrsure, Heursure,

Minimax and Sqtwolog.
Rigrsure:This is an adaptive threshold selection using the principle of

Stein's Unbiased Risk Estimate (quadratic loss function). One gets an
estimate of the risk for a particular threshold value t. Minimizing the risks in
t gives a selection of the threshold value.
Threshold is where j is the level of decomposition.

[Ref:
http://www.mathworks.com/access/helpdesk_r13/help/toolbox/wavelet/ch06
_a44.html ]
[Ref: Wavelet Estimators in Nonparametric Regression: A Comparative
Simulation Study by Anestis Antoniadis, Jeremie Bigot,et al. Journal of
Statistical Software, 6, Issue 6, 1-83 (2001).(available from
http://www.jstatsoft.org/v06/i06/paper)]
Sqtwolog:The strategy adopted consists of thresholding the coefficients of wavelet

transform, not according to the coefficients of the data with the threshold , but
directly with a threshold T suitably determined according to the noise model. We
assume Gaussian white noise; the estimator is obtained by preserving only the
coefficients of data that cross the threshold. T= and replacing the
others with 0 is satisfactory since it leads to almost as good results (up to a
logarithmic factor). (See the second reference, pg.228.)
[Ref:
http://www.mathworks.com/access/helpdesk_r13/help/toolbox/wavelet/ch06_a44.
html ]
[Ref: Wavelets and their Applications; Edited by Michel Misiti,Yves
Misiti,Georges Oppenheim]
Heursure:'Heursure' is a mixture of the two previous options. As a result, if the

signal-to-noise ratio is very small, the RIGSURE estimate is very noisy. If such a
situation is detected, the fixed form threshold obtained from a universal
331
thresholding method like RIGSURE is used for lower levels of wavelet analysis
where the noise content is not apreciable, and Square2log is used for higher levels
where noise content is appreciable.
[Ref:
html ]
[Ref: Discrete Wavelet-Based Thresholding Study On Acoustic Emission,
www.engg.le.ac.uk/fss/DWT%20THRESHOLDING%20STUDY%20ON%20AE%
20TO%20DETECT%20BEARING%20DEFECT.pdf ]
Minimax:'Minimax' uses a fixed threshold chosen to yield minimax (that is to

minimize errors in the worst case scenario) performance for mean square error
against an ideal procedure. The minimax principle is used in statistics in order to
design estimators. Since the denoised signal can be assimilated to the estimator of
the unknown regression function, the minimax estimator is the one that realizes the
smallest of the maximum mean square errors obtained for the worst function in a
given set.
[Ref:
html ]
[Ref: Wavelet Estimators in Nonparametric Regression: A Comparative
Simulation Study by Anestis Antoniadis, Jeremie Bigot, et al; Journal of Statistical
Software, 6, Issue 6, 1-83 (2001).(available from
http://www.jstatsoft.org/v06/i06/paper)]
Thresholding Type:Select the threshold type from Hard and Soft.

Hard Thresholding: Hard thresholding can be described as the usual
process of setting to zero the elements whose absolute values are lower
than the threshold. The hard threshold signal is x if x > threshold, and is 0 if
x threshold.
Soft Thresholding: Soft thresholding is an extension of hard thresholding,
first setting to zero the elements whose absolute values are lower than the
threshold, and then shrinking the nonzero coefficients towards 0.
Denoised Data set name: This will be the name of the TPR if "Add denoised data
as TPR" has been checked.
332
PanSystem
Figure 10: Noisy data versus denoised data (blue) using sym8, Rigrsure and Soft
thresholding
3.4 Event Detection

Event detection is a wavelet-based algorithm to find out the start of 'events' (buildups
and drawdowns) in the dataset. The terms 'buildup' and 'drawdown' correspond to sudden
changes in the pressure in response to a change in flowrate, and this behavior can be
recognized by applying appropriate wavelets.
Unless the Multiple Step option is switched on, each new run will restart from the
original denoised data that came through to this stage.
Shortest Transient Interval:This is the length of the shortest transient in the

dataset and is used to determine the level of wavelet decomposition. The wavelet
modulus maxima at different levels of decomposition provide different types of
information. Specifically, at intermediate levels, the singularities caused by noise
disappear while the signal singularities are still present. From this characteristic,
the beginning of a new transient can be detected at an intermediate level of
decomposition. This intermediate level of decomposition depends on data spacing
333
as well as the length of the shortest transient in the data set. Zoom into various
parts of data set to estimate this value.
Shortest transient interval should be greater than or equal to two times the
interpolation interval.
Show Coefficients Plot: This shows the wavelet coefficients plot at the
intermediate level. There will be spikes in the coefficient plot corresponding to the
events in the data set. By applying a threshold the approximate location of these
events can be determined.
Figure 11: Wavelet coefficients plot along with denoised data
Noise Threshold:Noise is an inherent characteristic of the signal. Although we

have de-noised the signal in the previous step, there is still some residual noise left
in the signal. Enter a value for the noise level in the denoised signal. A pressure
change up to this value between two points will not be considered as the start of an
event.
Pressure Threshold:This is the wavelet coefficients threshold that will be used to

determine the approximate location of events in the data set. A suitable threshold
should be entered by looking at the coefficients plot. In order to determine small
334
PanSystem
pressure changes that are responses to small variations in flow rate, the pressure
threshold should also be small. However, the threshold should not be too small
otherwise all minor variations such as noise may be misinterpreted as new
transients.
Multiple step mode: Sometimes the pressure signal contains small transients as
well as big transients. The small transients generally occur due to small variations
in flow rate while big transients are the response to major rate changes. These
transients cannot all be detected by entering one single set of values for shortest
transient interval and pressure threshold. So the process needs to be repeated with
different sets of configuration values. Switch on Multiple step mode to enter a new
set of configuration values and identify new events, which can, if desired, be added
to existing events using the Keep button.
Keep:This button will only be enabled if new events are detected in Multiple step
mode. Click the Keep button to save the new events identified in the current pass.
The events identified in the current pass will be added to the previously identified
events.
Clear:Click the Clear button to clear the new events identified in the current pass.
Figure 12: Events detected (blue markers) in the de-noised data
335
If you make a number of passes in Multiple Step Mode and Keep the results, then switch
off Multiple Step Mode, Run&Plot will clear all kept events and replace them with a new
set.
3.5 Data Reduction

The size of data sets acquired with permanent pressure gauges is enormous. A gauge
system with a 10-second recording interval registers more than three million data points
a year. It is cumbersome even to plot the data to see the general behavior, not to
mention analyzing them. Data reduction using wavelets reduces the data in such a
manner that the events are preserved in the reduced data set. The reduction is applied in
the region where pressure changes slowly.
Data reduction uses event information obtained from the previous step. Each event has
two phases, one is rapid phase (or transient region) and other is gradual phase.
Rapid phase:The initial part of the event where pressure changes rapidly. In this
region the slope will be steep. The rate of change of pressure decreases slowly and
reaches a threshold at a certain point. The region from the start of the event until
this point is referred to as the 'rapid phase'.
Gradual phase:The rate of change of pressure with time is below the threshold.
The region from the end of the rapid phase to the start of the next event is
referred to as the 'gradual phase'.
The data in the rapid phase is not reduced, thereby preserving the early-time detail
required in transient analysis. The data in the later (and often longer) gradual phase is
reduced.
In order to determine the end of the rapid phase and start of the gradual phase, a slope
detection algorithm is applied for each event. The user inputs the following parameters.
Slope Threshold: This is the maximum change in pressure per hour. If the slope
goes below this value at a certain time, then that point can be taken as the start of
the gradual phase.
Average Window Size: The slope is measured between two points a certain time
apart (see Moving window size). The slope between two points can be spuriously
high or low if there is noise or disturbance in the data, so rather than use the actual
time and pressure values at the two points, an average is calculated for each, over
a number of consecutive points that lie on either side in the averaging window.
Moving Window Size: In order to avoid taking the slope between two points that
lie in noise or a disturbance, minimum time spacing can be specified between the
points.
Maximum Interval: Since the data is reduced logarithmically, the spacing
between consecutive points increases with time. Maximum Interval caps the time
spacing between points in the reduced data. Once this spacing is reached all the
reduced points coming after this shall be separated by this interval. This can be
used to control the amount of reduction in the gradual phase.
336
PanSystem
Reduced Data set name: Name of the reduced data set.
A logarithmic reduction is applied to the data in the gradual phase. The reduced data here
is therefore equally spaced in the log time domain, and logarithmically spaced in the
normal time domain.
Figure 13: Reduced data set (Zoomed in this picture of a buildup)
3.6 Abort Functionality

A progress bar is displayed when Run & Plot or Run All is clicked. The progress bar
displays the current step that is being processed. An Abort button is provided on the
progress bar to abort the processing at any time.
On aborting Run&Plot, the current operation will be cancelled, and the data will be
cleaned up and returned to the state it was in before starting the current process.
On aborting Run All, all processing will be cancelled, and the user will be returned
to the preprocessed data screen (Figure 6).
The user will not be able to do anything after Abort is invoked until it completes.
This might take some time be patient!
337
Figure 14: The progress bar
3.7 Addition of reduced data to Data Edit Plot window

Once the user clicks Finish or Run All on ADC, any pending workflow steps will be
performed and the reduced data added as a new TPR. The Rate Changes Table will be
populated with the event data obtained in the ADC (if selected to add).
The reduced data, along with flow periods if saved, is plotted in the Data Edit Plot
window. The previously plotted (raw) data, and rate changes (if any), will be removed
from the plot window.
Figure 15: Reduced data plotted in the Data Edit Plot window along with flow
periods
338
PanSystem
Figure 16: Rate change table after ADC
4 Example Tutorial
Let's take an example data set and perform advanced gauge data conditioning on it. Load
test2.tpr from the installation data folder and plot in PanSystem. The pressures in this file
are psia, and the tutorial is described using oilfield (absolute) units. After import, you
may work through this tutorial using an alternative units system if you prefer, making the
necessary conversions to the cited threshold values, etc as you go.
339
Go to the Dataprep menu option and select "Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning". Say
"No" when asked about loading a configuration file. Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning
opens up the following screen displaying the pre-processed data.
340
PanSystem
Observe outliers in the data. Click on the "Show coefficients plot" button.
341
The first two peaks are of opposite sign and correspond to an outlier point. Select a value
of 190.00 (as read from the coefficients plot) and click "Run & Plot" to remove this
outlier.
Make sure that the "Recursive" check box is checked. Now select a lower threshold of 100
psi and click "Run & Plot".
342
PanSystem
Click on the "Show coefficients plot" button to determine a new Threshold value.
Enter 50 psi as Threshold and click "Run & Plot".
343
Again check the coefficients plot and enter a Threshold of 10 psi and click "Run & Plot" to
remove the remaining outlier.
Click "Next" to go to "Interpolation".
344
PanSystem
Default coefficient values are suggested based on a preliminary analysis of data.
Interpolation Interval should not be too small otherwise it will introduce many points
resulting in a huge data set. On the other hand, if the Interpolation Interval is large then
it may end up losing data points. The Interpolation Interval must be less than the total
time range.
The Tolerance Factor should be selected such that it is less than 10% of the interpolation
interval.
Select Type of Interpolation as "Linear", Interpolation Interval as 720 seconds and

Tolerance Factor as 36 seconds. Click "Run & Plot" to interpolate the data.
Click "Next" to go to the "Denoising".
345
The default coefficient values are suggested based on the preliminary analysis of data for
denoising. You can choose other values and see the effect on the processing. Select the
Decomposition Level such that it satisfies the equation for Maximum level (LMAX):
2LMAX number of interpolated points.
The level of decomposition represents the frequencies that will be smoothed out. If
"Smooth all levels..." is on then smoothing will be applied to all the levels starting from
level 1 up to the selected level: that is, all the frequencies that lie between fmax and fmax/
(2LMAX) will be smoothed out.
Click "Next" to go to "Event Detection".
346
PanSystem
Set the Shortest Transient Interval parameter and click "Show Coefficient Plot" for
plotting event detection coefficients.
347
By applying a Pressure Threshold (read from the Pressure Coefficient Plot) and Shortest
Transient Interval time, the approximate location of these events can be determined. Set
the threshold such that it is greater than or equal to two times the interpolation interval
and less than the total time interval, and click "Run & Plot" to detect the events
In some datasets, not all the transients can be detected by entering one single set of
configuration values. The process can be repeated with different sets of Pressure
Threshold and Shortest Transient Interval times by switching ON the Multiple Step Mode.
348
PanSystem
Enter new values for the configuration parameters. If more Events are detected, click
"Keep" to keep these events, or else click "Clear" to clear the newly detected events from
memory.
349
Click "Next" to go to "Data Reduction".

The default values are suggested based on the preliminary analysis of data for data
reduction. You can choose other values and see the effect on reduction. Set the
appropriate parameters and click "Run&Plot" to see the reduced data.
350
PanSystem
Click "OK". The reduced data can be seen in the plot with the denoised data.
Zoom in to observe the reduction achieved.
351
Click "Finish" to close the Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning dialog and the system will
return to the Data Edit Plot from where further preparation of the data can be carried out
if desired.
352
PanSystem
353
PanSystem Analysis Menu Index
General:
The Analysis area is used in PanSystem to analyze the Gauge Data prepared in Dataprep.
The maximum data capacity of Analysis is unlimited. There are two principal methods of
Analysis:
Line fitting to specialized diagnostic plots, and curve matching using Type-Curves
supplied with the program.
Curves generated on-screen by manual or automatic parameter selection.
From these two methods, Flow Regimes can be identified and the various Well and
Reservoir parameters can also be derived.
During Analysis, the Results from any particular plot can be transferred to the set of main
Reservoir Description parameters by using the Confirm toolbar option. In this way, the
Reservoir Description can be constructed and continually updated as the Analysis
proceeds.
The latest status of every plot invoked (i.e. Lines Fitted, Results, Flow Regimes, Axis
Scales, etc.), is written to the (*.PAN) file by the file Save or Save As... options.
Subsequent recall of the file will reinstate all plots so that the Analysis can be resumed
from where it was left off. If users have more than one Pressure and/or Flow Rate
column to choose from (e.g. if two Pressure gauges were run during the well test), the
current selection can be changed at any time by returning to the Dataprep Gauge Data
(TPR) Preparation dialog and selecting a different Column Name in the Master Data
File/Columns section.
Menu Items:
The following commands are used to perform a well test Analysis. For more specific
details on each topic, select the relevant links outlined below:
Plot: Use this option to display the Test Overview Plot showing the complete
Pressure and Flow Rate records selected for Analysis. Choose the Test Period/s to
analyze before proceeding to the diagnostic plots and Type-Curves.
If there is a choice of Wells and/or Layers, the Analysis Selection dialog is
generated. Ensure that the correct field is checked for the Well and Layer
appropriate to the data columns nominated for Analysis in Dataprep Gauge Data
(TPR) Preparation (i.e. Master Data File/Columns section). The choice of Well and
Layer determines which set of Well and Layer Parameters will be used to analyze
the Master Data. PanSystem cannot check for consistency.
Deconvolution: Use this option to convert any variable rate pressure record into an
equivalent constant rate drawdown response with duration equal to the total
duration of the pressure record.
Model: This option allows users to perform multiple interpretations of the same
data (tabbed dialog), change the Wellbore Storage, Reservoir Flow Model and Outer
Boundary Model, and some of the basic Reservoir Parameters, without having to go
back to Dataprep. If a model has not already been selected in Dataprep, the
default settings Free Model and Infinite Acting will apply until they are changed by
the user.
Suggest Model: This model selection PanWizard option is designed to be used in
conjunction with the Log-Log Plot. It provides users with a short-list of possible
354
PanSystem
model types. This short-list will respect any Flow Regimes that have been defined
on the Log-Log Plot (e.g. if a Radial Flow Period followed by Linear Flow has been
marked on the plot, the Boundary Model list will be restricted to those geometries
that can include Linear Flow. A Linear Flow Period preceding Radial Flow will
restrict the list of Reservoir Flow Models to the Vertical Fracture set).
Autofit Lines: This will automatically fit the most suitable line to the data within a
Flow Regime marked on a plot. To apply the Flow Regime Markers, refer to Flow
Regime Definition. Once a Flow Regime is defined, a line will be fitted automatically
through the data within the Flow Regime and relevant Results calculated.
Pressure Extrapolation: This is used to change Extrapolated Pressure or back-out a
Pressure Trend from well test data. For example:
When a global Pressure Trend induced by interference from Injection or
Production Wells needs to be removed from the Gauge Data so that a
Transient Analysis can be performed.
To correct the Gauge Pressure for the effects of the flowing history of the
Well rather than to use Superposition Theory to function the Time (i.e. this
is the principle of the Slider "Desuperposition" Method - Reference 19).
Time Transformation: Used to change the method for calculating Pseudo-Time,
when the Layer Fluid Type is Gas or Condensate. Provided a valid table of Viscosity
() and Total Compressibility (Ct) data versus Pressure (p) is available (refer to
Fluid Parameters Help topics for Gas and Condensate), Pseudo-Time can be used
instead of Real Time in the Analysis plots. Note that Pseudo-Time should be used
in conjunction with Pseudo-Pressure (refer to Pressure Transformation, the next
item).
Pressure Transformation: Used to change the method for calculating Pseudo-
Pressure, when the Layer Fluid Type is Gas, Condensate or Multi-Phase Oil (refer to
Fluid Parameters Help topics for Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures - Gas, Condensate
and Oil).
Non-Darcy Analysis: Switch Non-Darcy Skin Analysis on/off. The Non-Darcy Skin
Analysis facility enables users to estimate the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient for
Turbulent or Non-Darcy flow by a special analysis technique applicable to multi-rate
Oil, Gas or Condensate well tests. Three requirements must be fulfilled in order for
this option to be enabled:
The Reservoir Model must be Radial Homogeneous (i.e. Vertical Well), or
any of the Horizontal Well Models.
The plot on the screen must be a Radial Flow (Semi-Log) Plot.
More than one test period must have been selected for Analysis on the Test
Overview Plot.
If these requirements are not satisfied, a warning message will be issued.
Correct for Rate Dependency: Used to change and/or apply the Non-Darcy Flow
Coefficient (F). This option is only available if the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis option
has been enabled (refer to Non-Darcy Analysis, the previous item), and is only
applicable for Gas and Condensate well tests.
Export TC: Used to export data in Type-Curve format. This option is only enabled
on the Log-Log Plot. It can be used to save data in Dimensionless Type-Curve
format. Usually, this is only necessary if the data has been generated with
Advanced Simulation and Results are to be stored in Dimensionless form for future
Type-Curve Matching against real data.
355
Analysis Menu
Analysis Plot Overview
General:
This screen is generated by selecting the Plot option from the Analysis menu. When this
selection is made, PanSystem performs a number of checks on the data before it is
plotted. The program checks that:
All necessary Well and Reservoir input parameters are initialized.
Gauge Data is present and fewer than 8192 readings are involved.
At least one Test Period has been defined.
If users receive a message that there is no Test Period available for Analysis, it is
worth checking that the first entry in the Rate Changes Table has a zero rate, so
that the Length of Time the Well was on Production prior to Shut-In (Tp), can be
calculated.
Plot annotation can be applied by selecting Ctrl + right-clicking on the plot, refer to
Screen Display:
On initially being generated, the screen display is comprised of two main elements:
The Test Overview Plot showing the complete Pressure and Flow Rate records
selected for Analysis. By default, the Test Overview Plot displays the Master
Pressure and Rate channel plus the Rate Changes, presented as a step profile,
based on the Rate Changes Table (the same as in the Data Edit Plot).
By extending the x-axis scale to the left, any Rate Changes that occurred before the
Pressure data were recorded can also be displayed.
The Rate Changes display can be switched on/off via the Plot Rate Changes option
on the Edit menu. The status of the Rate Changes (on or off) is saved to file.
Choose the Test Period/s to be analyzed before proceeding to the diagnostic plots
and Type-Curves. The selection procedure is described below.
The Analysis Toolbar. Different Toolbar button options (icons) are available
depending on the type of plot being analyzed and the Toolbar buttons can be split
into eight main groups:
Standard Tools: Those that always appear in the Toolbar, regardless of
which diagnostic plot is being considered (e.g. Confirm Results and Change
T0/P0).
Plotting Tools: Comprising the Test Overview Plot button, which displays the
entire test or sequence of tests in the file, the Tile button, the Auto Match
Point Selection button and various other diagnostic plot buttons (i.e.
Cartesian, Semi-Log/Radial Flow, Square Root/Linear Flow, Fourth
Root/Bilinear Flow, Spherical Flow, Log-Log and Skin versus Flowrate).
When a diagnostic plot has been selected, a new set of buttons (i.e. the line
fitting tools) appear.
356
PanSystem
Line Fitting Tools: The Log-Log Plot has a set of specific line-fitting tools
which allow users to identify Flow Regimes from the characteristic slopes of
portions of the Pressure Derivative data (i.e. Zero Slope, Unit Slope, Half
Slope, Quarter Slope, Negative Half Slope). In some cases, a calculation will
be made from the position of the line and a result displayed:
Pressure Axis Time Axis Type of Flow Regime
Pressure Time Wellbore Storage,

Semi-Steady-State
Log Pressure Log Time All Flow Regimes *
Pressure Log Time Radial Flow
Pressure Square-Root Time Linear Flow
Pressure Fourth-Root Time Bilinear Flow
Pressure 1/Square-Root Time Spherical Flow
*On a Log Pressure/Log Time Plot, the Derivative is also plotted to help
users identify different types of Flow.
A number of other Line Fitting tools are available for the remaining plot types
(i.e. Best-Fit/Least Squares, Floating Line, Known Slope, Parallel to Existing
Line and Average Slope). If the selected Reservoir Flow Model and/or
Boundary Model are such that a Result can be calculated from the line, a
Define Line dialog appears. Otherwise the line is drawn immediately and no
Results are displayed. The Change Line Type button can be used to change
the definition of an existing line (i.e. to change the identity of Flow Regime to
which the associated test data belongs).
These tools are not available for the Type Curve option.
Curve Fitting Tools: Type Curves are supplied for each Reservoir Flow Model
and a number of Boundary configurations. In addition, users can display
Type Curves that have either been generated within PanSystem or some
external source. This option displays one selected Test Period as a plot of
log10 Delta-Pressure and its Derivative versus log10 of Elapsed Time. It is
also possible to use Rate-Normalized Delta-Pressure and a Logarithmic
Superposition Function, depending on the nature of the test and the Time
Function that has been selected with the (Tf) button option.
Additional button options become available when the Type Curves option is
selected; refer to the Help topic for Type Curves for more details.
General Tools for all Diagnostic Plots except Type Curves: In addition to
the line fitting tools described earlier, these include the Flow Regime
Definition (FR) button and the Selected Line Details and Results (LR) button:
The (FR) button is an optional facility that allows users to identify and
mark Flow Regimes on a diagnostic plot, based on an inspection of
the data. This would normally be done using the Log-Log Derivative,
but the option is available on all of the diagnostic plots.
357
The (LR) button is used to display a detailed list of the Results

associated with a line on the plot. The line must first be selected by
holding down the Ctrl key and left-clicking on the line with the mouse
cursor.
General Tools for the Log-Log Plot: In addition to the specific line fitting
tools described earlier, this includes the Select Derivative Smoothing
Constant (T') button, which is used to:
Select/de-select Derivative Types for display on the Log-Log Plot.
Alter the degree of Smoothing of a Derivative.
When this option is selected a Derivative Selection dialog is generated; this
allows users to check the Derivatives they wish to display and edit the
Smoothing constants for each Derivative.
General Tools for all Diagnostic Plots except Log-Log Plot and Type Curve
Plot: In addition to the specific line fitting tools described earlier (except for
the Floating Line and Change Line Type tools which are available in the Log-
Log Plot), this includes the Add Time Mark (T*) button, which is used to:
Mark the Point at which the data leaves the straight line (i.e. Bilinear
Flow) trend. An estimate of the Fracture Half-Length (xf), will be
computed, and the Fracture Conductivity (kfw) (and Dimensionless
Fracture Conductivity - Fcd) will also be re-computed accordingly.
This option is only enabled if the Reservoir Model is Vertical

Fracture: Finite Conductivity and the Bilinear Flow Plot is displayed.
Tools available only for Gas or Condensate well test data:
The LIT Plot option performs the Laminar-Inertial-Turbulent analysis
of multi-rate test data to derive the Darcy (Laminar) and Non-Darcy
(Turbulent) Flow Coefficients (B) and (F) respectively (referred to in
some references as a and b), in the Deliverability relationship:
m(p) = m(player) - m(pwf) = BQ + FQ2
The LIT Plot button is only enabled if:
The Fluid Type is Gas or Condensate.
At least two Flowing Periods have been selected from the Test
Overview Plot. If users do not have a Gauge Data recording,
but wish to key in end-point Flowing Pressures, refer to the LIT
Plot (single and four-point tests) for details of this procedure.
The C&n Plot option applies the simplified C&n Method to the analysis
of multi-rate test data to derive a C-coefficient and an n-exponent
describing Laminar and Turbulent Flow through the empirical
Deliverability equation:
Q = C(p2)n
Where:
p2
= p2 - p2wf
The value of (p) should be the current (i.e. average) Layer Pressure.
There is no Pseudo-Pressure version of this relationship - it is only
formulated in terms of Pressure-Squared.
The C&n Plot button is only enabled if:
358
PanSystem
The Fluid Type is Gas or Condensate (refer to Dataprep)

At least two Flowing Periods have been selected from the Test
Overview Plot. If users do not have a Gauge Data recording,
but wish to key in end-point Flowing Pressures, refer to the
C&n Plot (single and four-point tests) for details of this
procedure.
Operational Instructions:
If users have configured a single Well and Layer in Dataprep, the Test Overview Plot is
the first plot screen to be displayed. If there is no sampled Rate Data with the Gauge
Pressure (e.g. from a flowmeter or a surface rate channel created with the Create Rate
(Q) button from the Dataprep Toolbar on the Data Edit Plot), a message is issued to
inform users that a Temporary Rate Column has been created (i.e. sampled from the Rate
Changes Table).
If there is a choice of Wells and/or Layers, the Analysis Selection dialog will be displayed
to allow users to select a Layer and Well to analyze, then the Test Overview Plot will be
displayed.
The Test Period markers defined in Dataprep are displayed along the top of the Test
Overview Plot on the Ruler Bar. In order to proceed with any form of plot analysis, one
or more of these Test Periods must be selected. To select more than one, hold down the
Ctrl key whilst making additional selections. To de-select a Test Period, simply left-click
on it again with the mouse cursor.
To group several contiguous Test Periods into a single Test Period, hold down the Shift
key and left-click and drag the mouse cursor through the required Test Periods. On
releasing the mouse button, the selected periods will be grouped into a single test period.
To revert back to the individual Test Periods, simply hold down the Shift key and apply a
left mouse-click to the Ruler Bar.
To group all of the test periods into a single period, hold down the Ctrl key and right-click
in any period in the ruler bar. (Note that if the very last test period is a shut-in (zero
rate) it will be excluded from the group.) To ungroup, Ctrl + right-click in the group.
After selecting the Test Period/s, a whole range of different Analysis plots can be
accessed depending on the Well Type being analyzed and the settings selected in
Dataprep. For further details about these plots, refer to the Help topic for the Analysis
Toolbar.
When the Plot button is selected, PanSystem makes certain validity checks on the Rate
Changes Table and Gauge Data for the selected Test Period/s before proceeding. Most
importantly:
If the selected Test Period is a Shut-In Period (Q = 0), it is not preceded by a zero
Flow Rate in the table.
If the selected Test Period is a Shut-In Period (Q = 0), following a Flowing Period (Q
> 0), the last recorded Gauge Pressure in the Test Period (i.e. Build-Up) > Start
Pressure in the Rate Changes Table for that Build-Up. For Injectors, where the
359
Shut-In follows an Injection Period (Q < 0), the last recorded Gauge Pressure >
Start Pressure in the table.
The second check is the most common cause of the following error messages:
"The Test Period Selected is not Valid for Analysis"

This error message also lists five possible things that may be causing problems.
The selected Test Period will not be considered valid if:
1. It contains only one Pressure Point or no Pressure Points.
2. It is a Build-Up or a Fall-Off Test (i.e. it has a zero Flow Rate), but it has no
Rate History. At least one Flow Period should be defined prior to the selected
Period (see point 3). Check the Rate Changes Table.
3. It is a Build-Up or a Fall-Off Test (i.e. it has a zero Flow Rate), and there is a
Flow Period (or there are Flow Periods) defined before the Shut-In, but the
Flow Period immediately before it has a zero Flow Rate. A Build-Up or Fall-Off
Test must have a Flowing Period with a non-zero Flow Rate immediately prior
to Shut-In (and the Flow Rate should be negative (Injection) for a Fall-Off
Test). Again, check the Rate Changes Table.
4a. It is a Build-Up and the Start Pressure (P0 in the Rate Changes Table) is
greater than the last measured Gauge Pressure in that particular Test Period
(e.g. a spuriously low Pressure measurement); PanSystem compares the
Pressure entered in the Rate Changes Table at the start of the Shut-In Period
(P0), with the last Gauge Pressure in the Test Period.
If the end of the Period has been wrongly identified, or if there is noisy data, it
is possible for the last Pressure to be less than P0. This is considered to be
invalid for a Build-Up Test.
4b. It is a Fall-Off Test and the Start Pressure (P0 in the Rate Changes Table) is
less than the last measured Gauge Pressure in that particular Test Period (e.g.
a spuriously high Pressure measurement).
The comments from point 4a also apply here, except that a final Gauge
Pressure greater than P0 would be considered as invalid for a Fall-Off Test.
5. It consists of grouped Flow Periods with non-zero Flow Rates, but the last
Flow Rate is zero.
If a Test Period is made up of a group of Flow Periods, some of which are non-
zero, then the final Flow Period must not have a zero Flow Rate. The Flow
Periods should be ungrouped, then regrouped without the offending final Flow
Period.
"None of the Test Periods Defined are Analyzable - Check the Rate Column
and Rate Changes in Dataprep Gauge Data"
These errors are usually caused by the End of Test Time corresponding to a noisy Gauge
Data Point which either reads:
Less than the Pressure at the start of the test (i.e. for a Producer).
Greater than the Pressure at the start of the test (i.e. for an Injector).
It can be cured by either deleting the offending Data Point or re-defining the End of
Test to avoid the noise.
360
PanSystem
Analysis Plot - Define Line Dialog
General:
This dialog is available within the Analysis Plot screen if the selected Reservoir Flow Model
and/or Boundary Model are such that a Result (e.g. Permeability (k), Skin (S), Wellbore
Storage (Cs), etc.), can be calculated from the Line Type. The selection options available
within the dialog vary depending on the Line Types that are allowed for each diagnostic
plot (refer to the table below for Line/Model/Result combinations that are available for the
Log-Log Plot). The dialog can be generated in one of two ways:
If a Reservoir Flow Model and/or Boundary Model has already been selected, the
dialog is generated when one of the Line Tool buttons is selected (e.g. Unit Slope
Line), providing that the selected Line Slope corresponds to a valid Flow Regime.
Otherwise the line is drawn immediately onto the plot.
For an existing line drawn onto a plot, the dialog is generated by selecting the line,
then selecting the Change Line Type (Typ) button.
Screen Display and Operational Instructions:
The dialog contains a single selection area with a variable number of check button
options:
Line Type: Select the required Line Type and any Results that can be derived from
the Line Slope and/or Intercept will be displayed in the Model Results data box on
the plot.
If a Model has not already been selected in Dataprep, the default settings Free Model and
Infinite Acting will be applied until they are changed in the Analysis Model dialog.
For the Free Model option, no Results will be displayed on any plot that lines are
fitted to.
For the Radial Homogeneous Reservoir Model with the Infinite Acting Boundary
Model, the Results will be computed on the Radial Flow/Semi-Log Plot, but none
will appear when a line is fitted to the Linear Flow/Square-Root Time Plot, since
there can be no Linear Flow with this type of Model. Results will only appear on a
Linear Flow/Square-Root Time Plot if a Vertical Fracture Flow Model or a Parallel
Faults Boundary Model has been selected (i.e. where the Linear Flow regime is
valid).
To select an existing line, press the Ctrl key and left-click on the line, or right-click on the
line to select it directly. In either case, the line displays a black square at the mid-point
(handle), which can be used to "grab" the line for re-positioning. In the case of a Floating
Line, there are additional handles at each end of the line to allow for stretching and
movement along the plot axes.
Delete the selected line by clicking the Delete button (i.e. wastebasket icon at the
left end of the Analysis toolbar).
Re-position the selected line by left-clicking and dragging the black square/s
(handle/s).
Change the selected Line Type using this dialog (i.e. accessed using the Change
Line Type (Typ) button.
Log-Log Plot - Fixed Slope Lines, Models, Line Definition and Results Displayed:
361
Line Type Reservoir Boundary Model Line Definition Results

Model Selected (Flow Regime) Displayed in
(Analysis Menu
Selected Model Results
button)
Data Box
Zero slope Radial Any Radial flow k, S
(horizontal) homogeneous
Dual porosity Single faults Single fault radial k, S
Others... flow
Perpendicular Perpendicular k
faults fault radial flow
Any (Early) fracture None

radial flow
(Late) system k, S, Lambda ()

radial flow
(Middle) Omega ()
transition
Unit slope Any Any Wellbore storage Cs, Cd
Closed system Closed system, Area

pseudo-steady -
Hydrocarbons in
state flow
place
Half slope Fractured well Any Fracture linear Xf
flow
Any Parallel faults Reservoir linear W

flow
Horizontal well Any Linear flow Lw

through layer
Quarter slope Fractured well Any Bilinear flow Fcd, kfw

(finite
conductivity)
Negative half slope Partial Any Transition to full Kz

penetration gas thickness
cap and/or
aquifer
Wireline Any Spherical flow Kz, Ssd

formation
tester probe
models
362
PanSystem
Deconvolution / Convolution
1. Introduction
The Deconvolution module in PanSystem is based on work done at Imperial College,
London, using the Total Least-Squares (TLS) method1.
In a series of flowing and shut-in periods, it is quite possible that no individual transient is
long enough to detect remote boundaries or, more importantly, closure. The
deconvolution process converts any variable rate pressure record into an equivalent
constant rate drawdown response with duration equal to the total duration of the
pressure record. It does not require any prior knowledge or assumptions about a
reservoir or boundary model. This long constant rate response has a far larger radius of
investigation than the short transients, and therefore has the potential (data quality
permitting!) to reveal boundaries, closure, remote pressure support, etc very clearly.
The deconvolved constant rate drawdown response function represents a "model" which
is, as yet, unidentified and unquantified in geological terms. It is delivered to the user for
analysis as a record of pressure vs time for a nominal constant production rate.
In the same way as the standard constant rate drawdown models supplied in PanSystem
for reservoir and boundaries, the deconvolved response can be convolved with the test
flowrates to generate a pressure record of the whole test, which can be compared
(history matched) with the measured data as a quality check. The closeness of this
match is one of the criteria for minimizing an error function, E, in the TLS equation (see
Appendix 2). In addition to the pressure match criterion, E also allows for some
adjustment of the input flowrates, and for the appearance (smoothness) of the pressure
derivative.
The user has control over the smoothness and rate optimization aspects of the process,
and can therefore make repeated runs until satisfied with the results.
The preferred deconvolved pressure response can then be analyzed using the standard
constant rate drawdown techniques for model identification and parameter estimation in
PanSystem. Once the model has been quantified in physical terms, it can be used to
history match the test data, using, if desired, the optimized flowrates, and further
adjustments to the model can be made.
2. Entering the Deconvolution module
The Deconvolution work-flow starts in the Analysis section in PanSystem. You must have
a valid pressure record, with flow periods set up in the Rate Changes table, and well,
reservoir and fluid input parameters initialized. There are three ways to start the
Deconvolution process:
1. Click on the toolbar icon in the Analysis toolbar;

2. Press {F2} on the keyboard;
3. Select Deconvolution from the Analysis menu.
With this third option, there are two choices as shown in Figure 1:
363
Figure 1: Accessing the Deconvolution module from the Analysis menu

From existing deconvolution: This is only enabled if you have already run
Deconvolution with this file in the current PanSystem session. It will display your
previous passes, and default to the last-used Deconvolution settings.
New: this will start a new session in the Deconvolution module, and clear any
previous passes.
The other two starting options do not offer this choice, and will take you into the module
in From existing deconvolution mode if previous runs have been made.
It takes several seconds to start up the module for the first time, but subsequent start-
ups are faster.
If you have imported more than one pressure file (TPR) into PanSystem, you will
have to choose which one you wish to use for Deconvolution, as shown in Figure 2.
The default will be the current or master file that you selected during Dataprep.
Figure 2: Selecting a dataset to deconvolve

If you choose a file that has multiple pressure columns, you will also be able to select the
pressure column to work with. For the master file, the default will be the master
pressure.
The Deconvolution Toolset screen is shown in Figure 3, with the pressure and flowrate
schedule for the entire test.
364
PanSystem
Figure 3: The initial screen in the Deconvolution module

3. Using the Deconvolution toolset
3.1 Initial pressure
The default Initial Pressure value (Figure 4) will be the larger of the pressure in the first
line of the Rate Changes table, the Layer Pressure specified in the Layer Parameters, and
the first measured pressure data point.
Set: Use the default value, or edit it.
Optimize: The Set value is ignored, and the deconvolution will estimate an
optimum value for initial reservoir pressure. This will be displayed at the end of the
processing.
Figure 4: Initial reservoir pressure area
If you do not select all of the flow periods for inclusion in Deconvolution (see
Section 3.2), the Initial Pressure corresponds to the reservoir pressure at the
beginning of the first selected flow period. Depletion must therefore be taken into
account if you are imposing a Set pressure value.
365
3.2 Flow Period selection
The Flow Periods button allows you to use all, or a subset, of the flow
periods in the test. The Flow Period Selection dialog is shown in Figure 5. The default
selection is all of the periods. Use the Range Selection area to choose a subset of
contiguous periods. The 'Used' check box is for information only, and can not be used for
selection.
Figure 5: Flow Period Selection dialog
If you do not select all of the flow periods, the Initial Pressure corresponds to the
reservoir pressure at the beginning of the first selected flow period. Depletion
must therefore be taken into account if you are imposing a Set value. This will be
done automatically if using the Optimize option.
Leaving out part of the rate history by starting some way through the test might
adversely affect the results, since the excluded flow periods will not be contributing
to the superposition function. This omission is less significant if you start after a
long shut-in period.
3.3 Pressure Period selection
The Pressure Periods button allows you to use the pressures from all, or a
subset, of the flow periods in the test. The Pressure Period Selection dialog is shown in
Figure 6.
366
PanSystem
Figure 6: Pressure Period Selection dialog

The default selection is all of the periods within the range of Flow Periods you have
selected via the Flow Periods button. Use the Range Selection area to choose a subset of
contiguous periods, or check the 'Use' column tick-boxes to pick non-contiguous periods,
as in the Figure.
If you select the flow periods first, the periods for pressure will be constrained to lie
within this selected range. If you select pressure periods first, then flow periods, it
will be possible to have an inconsistent mix with pressure periods not covered by
flow periods. In this situation, a warning message will appear (Figure 7). You may
continue, but the results might suffer.
Figure 7: Inconsistent flow and pressure period selection

3.4 Initialization
367
Figure 8: TLS parameters after initialization

The edit box below Optimize Q contains the weighting value ( ) for the optimization of
the rate term in the TLS equation. When Optimize Q is unchecked, the flowrates will not
be modified and this term is set to zero internally.
The edit box below Lambda () contains the value that will be used as the regularization
parameter for the derivative smoothness term in the TLS equation.
When you click the Initialize button the values for Lambda () and Optimize Q ( ) will be
calculated and displayed. You may edit these if you wish. Upon first entry into the
Deconvolution screen, initialization will also enable the Run button.
3.5 Running the deconvolution
When the Run button is pressed, the deconvolution process is started and a
progress bar will give an (approximate) indication of progress.
On completion (typically after 5-20 iterations), several plots will be displayed by default
as shown in Figure 9
368
PanSystem
Figure 9: Deconvolution screen after the first run

The Viewable Plots control in Figure 10 allows you to pick and choose different plots to
display.
Figure 10: Plot display options with default selection
You may double-click any single plot to zoom to fill the viewing area (hiding the other
plots), and double-click again to return it to its previous size. A single click in the plot
area can be used to select that plot as the current window for the toolbar controls to act
on (see Plot Toolbar).
In Figure 10, the default plot display consists of:
369
The deconvolved pressure derivative (right side): this represents the constant rate
drawdown response which has been deconvolved from the measured data and, as such,
can be analyzed to identify a possible reservoir and boundary model or models. Different
values of the coefficient will affect the smoothness of this curve. The default value is
usually adequate. Altering the number of nodes (see Advanced options) will also affect
its quality. There is, therefore, a subjective element in the optimization.
Rate Match: compares the input measured flowrates with the output optimized
flowrates;
Pressure Match: compares the input measured pressure record with the pressure
generated by convolving the constant rate response with the optimized rates;
Pressure + Rate: this is a display of the input measured pressures and flowrates;
Pressure Difference: the difference between the pressures in the
Pressure Match plot, expressed as a percentage: x100%
The other plot options are:

Rate Difference: the difference between the rates in the Rate Match plot, expressed as
a percentage: x100%;
Pressure: the input measured pressures;
Rate: the input measured flowrates.
3.6 Advanced options
The Advanced button allows you to specify the number of nodes used for
deconvolution, and the maximum number of iterations. The initial defaults are set to 40
and 50 respectively.
Figure 11: Advanced Deconvolution options
370
PanSystem
The Number of Nodes used in the deconvolution will affect the quality of the
deconvolved derivative in terms of coarseness. It does not have the same effect as
the weighting coefficient , which is an integral part of the error minimization in
the TLS process.
This is demonstrated in Figure 12. The black trace is the pressure derivative
deconvolved using the default and number of nodes (40). The purple trace shows
the effect of too small a (left), and only 15 nodes (right).
In some cases, 15 nodes might be adequate. Since a higher setting implies a

slower computation, you are advised - at least for a large dataset - to start with 15
to make sure that the process will run OK, before using a larger setting.
The choice of Maximum Iterations will have no effect on the process as long as it
terminates naturally before the maximum number is reached. Processing takes,
typically, fewer than 25 iterations.
Figure 12: Left: -coefficient too small. Right: Number of nodes too small
3.7 Deconvolved Datasets
Each run of deconvolution will appear in the Deconvolved Datasets window as a colored
bar, up to a maximum of 8 (Figure 13).
371
Figure 13: The Deconvolved Datasets

The properties of each pass can be viewed by hovering the mouse pointer over the
corresponding bar (Figure 14).
All of the datasets are displayed on all of the selected plots by default. To remove a
dataset from the plots, uncheck the tick-box in the Deconvolved Datasets window (Figure
13). To remove (or add) a plot, uncheck (or check) a tick-box in the Viewable Plots
window (Figure 10).
The Delete a Run button will open a Delete dialog where you can select
any datasets to delete permanently from the list.
Figure 15: 'Delete a Run' dialog
You may change the colors, line types, and line or marker size of each
trace by using the Curve Properties button beneath the Viewable Plots window.
The following dialog will be displayed. Here, Rate and Pressure refer to the measured
data, DC refers to the deconvolution datasets.
372
PanSystem
Figure 16: Curve Properties dialog

Save writes the modified properties to a separate configuration file and exits the dialog.
The changes will be permanent, until changed again.
The Cancel button on the main screen (Figure 9) cancels any runs that you
have made during the current session in the Deconvolution module, and exits the
module. The exit button in the top right corner of the Deconvolution Toolset window has
the same effect.
3.9 Test Data Derivative overlay
Use the Plot Test Derivatives button to overlay derivatives from the test
data on the deconvolved derivative.
373
Figure 17: Derivative Period Selection dialog for derivative overlays

You can select up to 5 flow periods by checking the boxes in the Plot column. The
derivatives will be computed with respect to full superposition (using the rate history in
the Rate Changes Table) and will be plotted against elapsed time and with a rate
normalized y-axis, to make them compatible with the deconvolved derivative (Figure 18).
374
PanSystem
Figure 18: Test derivative overlays (points) on deconvolved derivative (line)

3.10 Saving your deconvolved pressure for further analysis
The deconvolved datasets are, so far, internal to the Deconvolution

module. The Save button on the main screen (Figure 9) passes one selected dataset out
of the module to PanSystem for analysis. If you have more than one dataset in the
module, you will have to deselect the others in the Deconvolved Datasets list (Figure 13)
prior to saving, but you do not have to delete them.
The following data are passed from the module and will appear in the Data File/Column
list:
Deconvolved pressure vs time: This is computed at a nominal constant flowrate
of 100 STB/day or 1 MMscf/day. The time-steps are logarithmically spaced, and of
duration equal to the total time spanned by the selected pressure periods (Section
3.3). If you enter Dataprep / Gauge Data you will see this as a new pressure
column called Deconvolved Pressure #1 in a new TPR dataset called DECON. If
another run is subsequently saved, the new pressure will be Deconvolved Pressure
#2, and so on.
Optimized flowrate vs time: This is on the same time-base as the measured
data, and appears in the same TPR group. These rates track the input measured
flowrates, but may differ from them as a result of the optimization. In Dataprep /
375
Gauge Data the flowrates will appear in the test TPR file as Optimized Rate #1,
Optimized Rate #2, etc from successive saved runs.
Figure 19: The deconvolved data saved from the module (shown here after two runs have
been saved)
The Master data file/columns panel will be automatically switched to the new deconvolved
pressure so that it is ready for analysis:
Figure 20: The deconvolved pressure selected for analysis

Once the Save button is clicked, you will be taken to the log-log plot with the new
DECON: Deconvolved Pressure #n plotted as shown in Figure 21.
376
PanSystem
Figure 21: Log-log diagnostic plot with the deconvolved pressure and its derivative
You can now proceed to identify the reservoir and boundary models, and to solve for
reservoir properties, using conventional constant rate drawdown analysis techniques.
Once the model has been quantified in physical terms, it can be used to history match the
test data, by switching the Master Data File back to the test data. By default, the original
rate changes table will be used as the Master Rate. If you wish to use the optimized
flowrates, switch the Master Rate Column to the appropriate rate. (This is demonstrated
in the Tutorial.) Further adjustments to the model can then be made in the usual way.
The pressures and derivatives from several runs can be compared using the Edit /
Overlay pressure... option in the plot menu.
During a PanSystem session, you will be able to exit and reenter the Deconvolution
module without losing any of the datasets, as long as you select the 'From existing
deconvolution' option each time you reenter.
When you save the PAN file itself, only the last selected deconvolution dataset will be
retained in the Deconvolution section. Consequently, when you re-open the PAN file
later, and take the 'From existing deconvolution' option, only that one dataset will be
found in the Deconvolution module. All of the deconvolved TPR data and optimized rates
will, of course, be retained in the Dataprep/Gauge Data section (Figure 19).
3.11 Gas wells with rate-dependent skin
The deconvolution processing assumes a constant skin factor (S). When there is a rate-
dependent component (D), it will attempt to compensate by optimizing (ie: adjusting) the
flowrates to minimize the TLS error function. Thus the deconvolved derivative might be
of reasonable quality, sufficient to allow identification of the model and some of the key
parameters.
A rigorous approach to dealing with rate-dependent skin would require:
1. Estimation of the D-coefficient from conventional rate-dependent skin analysis
(multi-rate test or wellbore storage);
2. Computation the rate-dependent pressure drop from DQ (through m(p), or an
approximation using p2);
3. Subtraction of this from the test pressures;
4. Deconvolution of the resulting 'clean' pressure.
This extra functionality will be considered for the next upgrade.
Appendix 1: Plot toolbar
The plot area contains a toolbar with the following buttons to facilitate various viewing
options. All changes to plot properties made here will be temporary, and will revert to
the defaults when a new run is made, or when you exit the Deconvolution module.
Tracking Resume: This button can be used to unzoom, and to generally reset
plot scaling. It enables tracking on all axes - the axes will adjust their minimum and span
values based on the tracking style - all cursors will be hidden, and the axes minimum and
span will be restored to the values they had when the axes tracking was initially disabled.
A drop-down menu to the right of the button can be used to Resume on all plots or on a
selected plot.
377
Tracking Pause: The pause button turns off tracking on all axes. When tracking is
off, the axes will remain fixed while data is being added.
Axes Scroll: When the Axes Scroll button is active, the user can drag the plot view
around with the mouse the axes scales will scroll automatically. This is useful if you
have zoomed in and wish to get to another part of the plot while still zoomed. You can
reset the scales using the Tracking Resume button.
Axes Zoom: The x- or y-axis of the selected plot can be expanded or compressed
by mouse movement.
Zoom out: When this button is clicked, the selected plot is zoomed out by a factor
of 2. Unzoom using the Zoom in or Tracking Resume button.
Zoom in: When this button is clicked, the selected plot is zoomed in by a factor of
2. Unzoom using the Zoom out or Tracking Resume button.
Select: This button allows you to select items in the data view area.
Zoom-box: This button allows you to zoom into a particular region of a selected
plot by drawing a box with the cursor.
Data-Cursor: The Data-Cursor button provides a cross-hair on the selected plot,

and displays the x- and (left-hand axis) y- coordinates of the crosss position. Drag the
cross-hair with the mouse to read the (x, y) coordinates on any part of the plot.
Edit: This button brings up the run-time property editor for the selected plot. (It
takes several seconds to come up.) Here you can make temporary edits to plot scales,
trace and symbol properties, etc. Properties can be saved to a configuration file which
can be reloaded subsequently via the File I/O option on the Control tab.
Copy to clipboard: This button copies an image of the selected plot, or a list of
the data values, to the clipboard. The choice between image and data is made via a drop-
down menu to the right of the button.
Save: This button brings up a Windows Save dialog to save the image of the
selected plot to a file. A number of graphic file types are offered.
Print: This will print the selected plot.
Preview: Brings up a preview of the printed page.
Page Setup: Set up the page margins, orientation, etc.
Appendix 2: Theoretical background

The Total Least Squares1 method is based on the following equation:
378
PanSystem
The deconvolution algorithm minimizes the total least squares error function E, which is a
weighted combination of pressure match (first term), rate match (second term), and a
penalty term (third term) based on the overall curvature of the graphed derivative, whose
purpose is to enforce smoothness.
In the TLS equation:
is the pressure match component. pi is the average reservoir pressure, p

is the measured pressure, y is the optimized flowrate, and g is a matrix function of the
response coefficients (see Ref 1 for details). y.g represents the result of re-convolving
the deconvolved constant rate response with the optimized flowrates.
is the rate match component. q is the measured flowrate, y is the optimized

flowrate and is the relative weighting (user input).
and is the curvature term. z is a vector of response coefficients, with

operators: matrix D, vector k. is the regularization parameter (user input).
The objective is to minimize E over y and z, and over pi if the Optimize pi option has been
chosen. Outputs from the minimization are:
Record of deconvolved pressure vs time, representing the constant rate drawdown
response function that best satisfies the minimization criteria;
Optimized flowrates vs time (if the Optimize Q option has been selected).
Average reservoir pressure (if the Optimize pi option has been chosen).
References
Ref 1: Deconvolution of Well-Test Data as a Nonlinear Total Least-Squares Problem; T.
von Schroeter, F. Hollaender and A.C. Gringarten; SPE 77688 (San Antonio 2002), SPEJ
(Dec 2004).
Deconvolution Tutorial
The file used in the following tutorial is DeconOilExample.pan, which can be found in the
PanSystem installation default data folder. It contains a simulation of about 110 days of
production with several shut-ins. The flowrates have been modified post-simulation to
introduce "measurement errors" so that we can demonstrate the Optimize rates facility.
The tutorial is presented in oilfield units. You may use your own units system if you
prefer.
Basic Workflow
1. Open the file and enter the Deconvolution module.
379
2. By default, all of the flow periods and all of the pressure periods are selected. You
can check this via the Flow Periods and Pressure Periods buttons.
Leave the initial reservoir pressure set to 5000 psia and click on Initialize. The two
coefficients will be updated.
3. Click on Run. The deconvolution will take 8 iterations.
380
PanSystem
The deconvolved derivative is of good quality using the default

coefficients.
The pressure match plot shows a good match over all flow periods...
... and the % pressure differences are close to zero.
381
Some adjustments were made in the TLS computation to optimize the flowrates
(DC1 trace):
The optimized rates are in fact very close to the original rates used in the simulation
to generate the test data.
4. Click on the Plot test derivatives button and select the five buildups (or any other
flow periods if you wish):
5. Click Save to return to the main screen, to see the derivative overlays:
382
PanSystem
Derivative overlays
The test derivatives are rate-normalized using the test rates. They do not overlay
perfectly in the radial flow portion because of the flowrate errors.
6. Click the Save button to exit the deconvolution module.
383
This constant rate drawdown has the same duration as the original test (2700 hrs)
and shows the pure response trend underlying the multi-rate test record.
7. The deconvolved data can be analyzed in the usual way to identify reservoir and
boundary model types and to estimate the parameters.
Derivative analysis
If you wish to take a short-cut here, go to Analysis / Model and select the 'After' tab.
The 'After' interpretation contains the full set of results.
Cartesian plot analysis
384
PanSystem
Pressure and derivative match to the constant rate drawdown response

8. Having identified and quantified the model, we can now test it by attempting a
history match to the test data.
Go to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation screen via Dataprep / Gauge Data.
(Note the additional data appearing in the Data File/Column list - see Section 3.10.)
Change the Master data file/columns from DECON (the deconvolved response that
we have just analyzed) to DST-1 (the test data), and OK from the dialog.
On the Test Overview plot, run Quick Match:
385
History match to the test data using the measured flowrates

The match is reasonable, but there are discrepancies, which are most likely due to
rate measurement errors or, of course, a deficiency in the model.
9. We can rerun this history match using the optimized rates. Return to the data
preparation screen via Dataprep/Gauge Data, and change the master rate to Optimized
Rate #1.
386
PanSystem
Warning: At this point, your Rate Changes table will be updated with the optimized
rate values, and the original flowrates will be lost. If you wish to keep a record of
the original rates so that you can restore them to the table at some later stage,
please refer to the note at the end of this tutorial.
Now return to the Test Overview and rerun Quick Match. The match is much closer,
and can be improved by a small reduction in the skin factor.
History match using the optimized flowrates

That summarizes the basic workflow. Now for some details.
Optimizing Initial Pressure
Now return to the Deconvolution module via Analysis, selecting From existing
deconvolution and DST-1 on the way. You will find your previous deconvolution run on the
screen.
Select Optimize in the Initial Pressure area, then Initialize and Run.
387
In this case the deconvolution will compute an optimum value for Pi. A second
deconvolved derivative will be plotted, and will be almost indistinguishable from the first
one. The flowrates, which were already optimized by the first run, will be almost
unchanged.
If you wanted to save this second run, you would have to either deselect the first one
(uncheck the tick-box), or to delete it (via Delete a Run) before clicking the Save button.
Deconvolving only part of the test
Selected flow periods
So far we have used all of the pressure record. If you have bad pressure data in some of
the flow periods, you might prefer to exclude it from the deconvolution. For example, you
might want to use only some, or all, of the buildup pressures. The Flow Period selection is,
by default, all periods, and this should be kept because the flowrates are required to keep
the superposition correct. Open the Pressure Period Selection dialog and select the
buildups. (You do not have to select them all, but remember that the deconvolution only
spans the time range of your selection. Selecting the first and last buildup would give the
maximum time-span.)
Selecting a subset of the test pressures

Save the selection, Initialize and Run. The new deconvolved derivative is very close to the
others.
388
PanSystem
Second half of test

Since the middle buildup is fairly long and has almost stabilized, it should be possible to
obtain a reasonable deconvolution of just that part of the test coming after it.
In the Flow Period Selection dialog, select the range 10 - 13 and Save.
In the Pressure Period Selection dialog, note that the range is already restricted to 10 - 13
(to prevent you picking pressure periods that would have no rate history - #5 for
example). Within this range you may pick and choose the pressure periods to deconvolve.
We will keep all of them. Save the selection.
If the reservoir is behaving as a closed system, there will have been depletion. The
options here for Initial Pressure are:
Derive an estimate of current average reservoir pressure from analysis of the long
buildup, from a material balance calculation, etc and enter this as the Set value;
Select Optimize and let the TLS processing derive an estimate for you.
Click the Optimize radial button, then Initialize and Run.
The new deconvolved derivative is very close to the others, but of shorter duration
because of the shorter time range covered by the selected pressure periods. The
optimized initial pressure is 4713 psia. From the simulation that was used to generate this
example, we know that it should be 4730 psia - an error of 6% in terms of depletion from
389
an initial 5000 psia. This will be, in part, a consequence of excluding the first 9 flow
periods from the history.
From here you may decide to Save some of the runs, or to Delete some. In the following
screen-shot, 3 runs have been saved. Note that the DST-1 file contains the original
measured pressure and the 3 optimized rates, while the DECON file contains the 3
deconvolved constant rate pressures.
You may select any of the DECON pressures for analysis by setting the master file and
pressure, as in the screen-shot above. You may overlay any of the other DECON
pressures (and their derivatives) on it for comparison using the Edit / Overlay pressure
option on any Analysis plot menu.
To work on the measured data in Analysis, select DST-1 as the master file. P1 will
automatically become the master pressure (because there are no others in the DST-1 file).
Next choose an optimized flowrate.
Note: to preserve the original (measured) Rate Changes
PanSystem currently assigns only one Rate Changes table to each pressure column.
Initially, we had pressure P1 with its measured rate history in the table, and Rate Changes
was assigned as the master rate column. These rates are lost if replaced by optimized
rates, and cannot be restored except by retyping or re-importing.
To make a backup of the original rates, before running Deconvolution (or, at least, before
selecting an optimized rate as master):
1. Plot P1 on the Data Edit plot. The measured Rate Schedule will also be plotted.
2. Select the 'Q' icon in the toolbar and Step-rate as Interpolation Type. Choose a
name for the rate column that you are about to generate, and click OK.
390
PanSystem
3. A new rate column will appear:
4. To restore the original measured rates to the Rate Changes table at any time,
simply select this rate column as the master. The values at the rate change times will be
read into the table:
391
Analysis Selection Dialog
General:
When the Plot option is selected from the Analysis menu, users are normally directed to
the Test Overview Plot, providing that a single Well and Layer has been configured in
Dataprep.
However, if there is a choice of different Wells and/or Layers, this dialog will be
generated.
The dialog is comprised of two selection areas:
Well to Analyze: Select the required Well data by checking the appropriate button.
Layer to Analyze: Select the required Layer data by checking the appropriate
button.
Users should ensure that they select the Well and Layer appropriate to the data
channels nominated for Analysis in the Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation
dialog within the Master Data File/Columns section. The choice of Well and Layer
determines which set of Well and Layer Parameters will be used to analyze the
Master Data. PanSystem cannot check for consistency.
392
PanSystem
Select Analysis Model Dialog
General:
The Select Analysis Model dialog is generated by selecting the Model option from the
PanSystem Analysis menu. It allows users to perform Multiple Interpretations of the
same data (tabbed dialog), change the Wellbore Storage, Reservoir Flow Model, Outer
Boundary Model and some of the basic Reservoir Parameters, without having to go back
to Dataprep.
If a Model has not already been selected in Dataprep, the default settings Radial
Homogeneous and Infinite Acting will be applied until they are changed.
A Model (or Models) must be selected in order to perform a well test interpretation. The
choice would normally be based on preliminary inspection of the diagnostic plots,
geological evidence, inspired guesswork, etc. Several important aspects of the Analysis
are determined by the choice of Analysis Model:
The Results that will be obtained fromLine-Fits on the diagnostic plots.
Which Flow Regimes can be assigned to different portions of the data (optional).
Which of the supplied (default) Type-Curves will be made available.
The Reservoir Description (including Parameters) to be used for simulated response
generation (i.e. in Simulate Quick Match and Advanced Simulation).
For example:
For the Free Model option, no Results will be displayed on any plot that has lines
fitted to it.
For the Radial Homogeneous Reservoir Model with the Infinite Acting Boundary
Model, the Results will be computed on the Semi-Log Plot, but none will appear
when a line is fitted to the Square-Root Time Plot, since there can be no Linear
Flow with this combination. The Results will only appear on a Square-Root Time
Plot if a Vertical Fracture Flow Model or a Parallel Faults Boundary Model has been
selected, where the Linear Flow regime is then valid.
In terms of information requirements, only a small amount of the Wellbore Storage,

Reservoir Flow and Boundary Model information needs to be initialized for Analysis,
because the answers are as yet unknown.
If a multiple interpretation is involved, the dialog will appear with a series of tabs, each
representing a separate interpretation of the same data. The dialog is described as
follows:
Multiple Interpretations of the Same Data area: This facility allows users to
perform up to six different Analyses (i.e. sensitivities) with the same set of data.
Different Model Parameters can be applied to each interpretation.
New: Select this button to generate an Interpretation Name sub-dialog.
After entering a name (or accepting the default name), then selecting OK, a
new tab will be added to the Select Analysis Model dialog for users to set-up
a new interpretation model.
393
Edit Name: Select this button to generate the Interpretation Name sub-
dialog for the currently selected tab of the Select Analysis Model dialog. The
current name of the interpretation can be changed if required.
Delete: Select this button to delete the currently selected tab of the Select
Analysis Model dialog. A confirmation prompt is issued, to ensure that the
correct tab is being deleted.
If a dual-pressure analysis is being performed with active and observation
pressure data from a wireline formation tester, three tabs will automatically be
reserved for Flowing, Observation and Combo analysis.
If users change any of the Layer or Fluid Parameters in the Well and
Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog, the changes only apply to the
selected interpretation.
Wellbore Storage Model area: Select one of the Wellbore Storage Models from
the drop-down list.
Wellbore Storage Parameters: Select this button to generate a Wellbore
Storage Parameters sub-dialog. The generated sub-dialog is appropriate to
the Model initially selected from the drop-down list in this area and the
current set of "confirmed" Wellbore Storage Parameters is displayed (i.e. the
last set of Results that have been Confirmed with the Confirm Results (Cnf)
button). These are not normally edited in Analysis, because they are
Results rather than input.
For any Wellbore Storage Model, it is possible to edit certain key Model
Parameters during Analysis, although this is not normally necessary unless
Advanced Simulation is going to be used and the Parameters have not
already been initialized in Dataprep.
Flow Model (Vertical or Horizontal Well) area: This area will be entitled
Vertical Well or Horizontal Well, depending on the Well Type selection made in the
File menu or the Dataprep menu. Select one of the Well Flow Models from the
drop-down list. Different types of Flow Model will be available depending on
whether a Vertical or Horizontal Well has been selected (refer to the Help topic for
Model Parameters for details of all the available Flow Model Types and Flow Model
Parameters).
This area is disabled for the Combo tab when dual-pressure analysis with active and
observation data a wireline formation tester is being performed.
Allow Different Skins and Storage per Flow Period: This option allows users
to assign a different value of (S), (D) and/or (Cs) to each Flow Period in the
Analysis by checking the checkbox. When the Wellbore Storage
Parameters button is selected in the Wellbore Storage Model area to
generate a Wellbore Storage Parameters sub-dialog, the edit field for a
single Storage Coefficient (Cs) value, is replaced by the word <TABLE>.
Similarly, when the Input/Model Parameters button is selected in Flow
Model area to generate an Input/Model Parameters sub-dialog, the values in
the edit fields for Skin Factor (S) and Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D),
are replaced by the word <TABLE>.
In each of these sub-dialogs, when users click on the word <TABLE>, an Edit
Skin & Storage Table sub-dialog is generated for the current Well and Layer.
The table is constructed from the same Flow Periods as the Rate Changes
Table. Each Flow Period can be assigned a Skin Factor (S), Wellbore Storage
394
PanSystem
Coefficient (Cs), and for Gas and Condensate, a Rate-Dependent Skin

Coefficient (D). If a Fractured Well Model has been chosen, Skin Factor (S) is
replaced by Fracture Face Skin (Sf). This table can be populated either by
direct entry of values or by values derived from Analysis of each Flow Period.
An estimate of the Wellbore Storage Coefficient and of the expected Time to
End of Wellbore Storage can be obtained by selecting PanWizard/Test
Design/Test Schedule from the main menu, then following the Wizard's
Testing Time Advisor. The estimated Time to End of Wellbore Storage for any
specified Storage Coefficient will be displayed. If users also want the Wizard
to calculate the Storage Coefficient, select the WBS Advisor button.
Input/Model Parameters: Select this button to generate an Input/Model
Parameters sub-dialog. The sub-dialog contains three sections that display
Layer, Fluid and Model Parameters.
The Layer and Fluid areas contain some of the input data from Dataprep.
They can be changed during Analysis using this option (e.g. to see the effect
of revising Layer Thickness). The Model area contains the current set of
Results from Analysis (i.e. the last set of Results confirmed with the Confirm
Results (Cnf) button), constituting the current Reservoir Description. They
are initially zero, but during the normal course of events, they can be updated
if required, by using the Confirm Results (Cnf) button, following a Line-Fitting
or Type-Curve Matching procedure.
It is not necessary to initialize the Model Parameters before Analysis.
However, they are required as input for Simulate Quick Match and Advanced
Simulation and must be initialized before a response can be generated.
This button is disabled for the Combo tab when dual-pressure analysis with
active and observation data a wireline formation tester is being performed.
Dual-Porosity Block Type: If the selected Reservoir Flow Model is Dual-
Porosity (Pseudo-Steady-State) or Dual-Porosity Transient (Inter-Porosity
Flow), the Dual-Porosity Block Type button is enabled. Select this button to
generate a Dual-Porosity Block Type sub-dialog and select the Matrix Block
Geometry. This choice affects the relationship between the Inter-Porosity
Flow Coefficient () and the Matrix Permeability/Block Height Ratio (km/hb2),
derived from the Semi-Log Plot, and this has a minor effect on both
Analysis and Simulation.
Boundary Model area: Select one of the Boundary Models from the drop-down
list. It is not necessary to initialize the Boundary Parameters unless Advanced
Simulation is going to be used and they have not already been initialized in
Dataprep.
For the Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model, an additional selection is
required via the Two Compartment Analysis Type button, which is only enabled for
this Model (refer to the Help topic for Boundary Model for details of all the available
Boundary Model Types).
Two-Compartment Analysis Type: Select this button if a Two-Cell
Compartmentalized Boundary Model has been selected in the Boundary
Model area above. A Two-Compartment Analysis Type sub-dialog is
generated with two possible selection options. Normally, users should either
select:
The Drawdown Analysis option for Flowing Periods (i.e. Production or
Injection).
395
The Build-Up Analysis for Shut-In Periods (i.e. Build-Up/Fall-Off).
With reference to the sub-dialog note, it states that if the Slider Pressure
Extrapolation Correction is applied to a Build-Up/Fall-Off test, the Drawdown
Analysis option should be selected, because the Superposition Effect of the
preceding semi-steady-state flow history has been removed and made into
an equivalent Drawdown/Injection. The choices made here will determine
the type of Results obtained from the Cartesian Plot, and the nature of the
Type-Curves that are made available for a Type-Curve Analysis.
Boundary Parameters: Select this button to generate a Boundary
Parameters sub-dialog. The generated sub-dialog is appropriate to the
Model initially selected from the drop-down list in this area and the current
set of Results from Analysis is displayed (i.e. the last set of Results
confirmed with the Confirm Results (Cnf) button), constituting the current
Boundary description. They are initially zero, but during the normal course
of events, they can be updated if required, by using the Confirm Results
(Cnf) button, following a Line-Fitting or Type-Curve Matching procedure.
It is not necessary to initialize the Model Parameters before Analysis.
However, they are required as input for Advanced Simulation and must be
initialized before a response can be generated.
Short Flow area:
When a test period is being analysed or matched on a specialised plot, PanSystem
uses the surface rate history in the Rate Changes Table to compute the
superposition function for line-fitting analysis and for simulation. This is usually a
step-rate profile, with a constant rate through each test period.
Generally, when wellbore storage is small, and/or the flowing period is long, this
step-rate profile can be considered a close enough representation of the sandface
rate for superposition purposes. However, if storage is large and/or a test period is
short, the sandface rate may still be in the afterflow phase when a new test period,
such as a shut-in, is instigated. Consequently, the constant rate profile will not
give the correct superposition function for the ensuing test, and the analysis will be
in error. This is particularly true for an Impulse test, where a flow period of
extremely short duration precedes a buildup test, but it is generally true for any
test where wellbore storage afterflow takes up a significant part of the preceding
flowing period.
The problem will be observed as:
Diagnostic plots: consistent line-fitting results and Quick Match simulation
for that test period, since both use the same (erroneous) superposition
function, but:
Diagnostic plots: results for that test period do not match results for other
test periods;
Diagnostic plots: wrong or dubious Pi computed
Test Overview Plot: results for a test period obtained from a diagnostic plot
do not give a good Quick Match.
Test Overview Plot: the Quick Match trace does not respect the pivot point
at the start of a test period selected in the ruler bar.
The last two points are due to the fact that, on the Test Overview Plot, Quick Match
always starts at the beginning of the rate history and simulates forward. Afterflow
396
PanSystem
effects are replicated faithfully by the simulation on the way through, and are
therefore built into the superposition function as the simulation progresses.
On the other hand, when a single test period is selected on, say, the log-log plot,
Quick Match starts at the beginning of that test period, and the history is
approximated from the stepped surface rates specified in the Rate Changes Table
and any preceding afterflow is not taken into account. Where afterflow is
significant, therefore, the Test Overview and diagnostic plots require a different set
of interpretation parameters for a match.
A first step towards addressing this problem has been introduced in v3.4. After
making an initial interpretation by the usual step rate methods on the diagnostic
plots, a special Short Flow logic can be invoked to refine the analysis (ie: to
include the missing effects of afterflow) on the Test Overview Plot. This will be
extended to include the specialised plots in a future release.
At the bottom of the Analysis Model dialog in v3.4 are two tick-boxes:
The r;Short Flow Detection box flags whether the test being analysed might
be a candidate for the short flowing period treatment. This is an automatic
indicator based on the duration of wellbore storage and is there for
information only.
The Short Flow box can be checked to invoke the Short Flow logic -
regardless of the detection flag setting - for the Test Overview Plot.
With Short Flow switched on, Auto Match can be run on the Test Overview to
optimise the initial parameter set, including initial pressure, and a good match
should now be obtained. The model parameters and the initial pressure may be
significantly different from the original estimates.
This new parameter set will, of course, no longer match on the diagnostic plots.
However, the match to the Test Overview should be considered as the optimum
interpretation.
The Short Flow logic will also compute a better estimate of initial pressure Pi from
Quick Match when it is run on the Test Overview for a given set of input parameters
with, say, a buildup period selected in the ruler bar. (The "r;pivot point" will be
respected.)
The Short Flow logic is currently only effective on the Test Overview Plot.
The logic may be invoked, or not, regardless of the Impulse Detection flag status.
The impulse test logic is useful for any test where the wellbore storage-dominated
period has not ended when the preceding rate is changed such as for a buildup
following a short flowing period or for any test exhibiting the results
characteristics described earlier.
397
Input/Model Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Input/Model Parameters button within the
Flow Model (Vertical or Horizontal Well) area of the Select Analysis Model dialog; it can be
used to edit and/or input the Layer, Fluid and Model parameters for the current model if
required.
The sub-dialog contains three sections that display Layer, Fluid and Model Parameters:
The Layer and Fluid areas contain some of the input data from Dataprep. They
can be changed during Analysis using this option (e.g. to see the effect of revising
Layer Thickness). Refer to Layer Parameters and the individual Fluid Parameters
for Oil, Gas and Condensate for more details.
The Layer Parameters fields will always be the same but the Model and Fluid
Parameters will vary with the Model selected and the Fluid Type.
The Model area contains the current set of Results from Analysis (i.e. the last set
of Results "confirmed" with the Confirm Results (Cnf) button), constituting the
current Reservoir Description. They are initially zero, but during the normal
course of events, they can be updated if required, by using the Confirm Results
(Cnf) button, following a Line-Fitting or Type-Curve Matching procedure. Refer to
Model Parameters for more details of individual models.
It is not necessary to initialize the Model Parameters before Analysis. However,

they are required as input for Simulate Quick Match and Advanced Simulation and
must be initialized before a response can be generated.
398
PanSystem
Suggest Model Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Suggest Model option from the Analysis menu.
It can only be used in conjunction with a Log-Log Plot and provides the user with a
short-list of possible Model Types that are available for performing an Analysis.
This option provides users with the same selection procedures that are available in
the PanWizard for identifying Reservoir Flow and Boundary Models from a Log-Log
Plot.
The dialog is described as follows:
Possible Model List Based on Marked Flow Regimes area: This short-list will
respect any Flow Regimes that may have been defined on the Log-Log Plot (e.g. if a
Radial Flow Period followed by Linear Flow has been defined, the Boundary Model
list will be restricted to those geometries that can include Linear Flow. Similarly, a
Linear Flow Period preceding Radial Flow will restrict the list of Reservoir Flow
Models to the Vertical Fracture set).
Reservoir Flow Model list: Select a suitable Flow Model from this list.
Boundary Model list: Select a suitable Boundary Model from this list.
Users can browse the available Models from the two lists and display their Pressure
Derivatives as a graphical image, using the More Details button and/or select
Models here, then proceed to Analysis by selecting the Set Model button.
Questions area: Further selection criteria are provided in this area using key
fundamental questions in conjunction with a Yes/Not Sure versus No button
selection response. Selecting No to any of these questions will remove any
inappropriate Models from the Reservoir Flow Model and Boundary Model lists.
Function button area:
More Details button: This button generates a More Details sub-dialog
containing graphical images of the typical Derivative Shapes for any
Reservoir Flow Model and Boundary Model highlighted in the two Model lists
described above. Where several different Derivative Shapes are possible
(e.g. Models with/without Wellbore Storage), up/down scroll arrows will
appear in a scroll-bar next to the image. The OK button will return users
back to the Suggest Model dialog.
Set Model button: This button serves the same purpose as the Select
Analysis Model dialog. Users can (optionally) make their Model selection
here by highlighting the desired choices, then clicking the Set Model button.
These will then be applied in PanSystem and users can proceed with their
Analysis of the data.
Close button: Returns users to the Analysis Plot screen.
399
Autofit Lines
General:
This facility is activated by selecting (i.e. checking) the Autofit Lines option on the
Analysis menu. A tick mark is displayed next to the menu option text when the facility is
enabled. It will automatically fit the most suitable line to the data lying within a Flow
Regime that has been defined (i.e. selected) on a plot. For details on how to define the
Flow Regime Markers, refer to the Help topic for Flow Regime Definition. Once a Flow
Regime has been defined, the Define Line dialog is displayed after selecting any of the
Line Tools from the Analysis Toolbar, allowing users to choose the appropriate Line Type
for fitting to the plot.
The selection options available within the Define Line dialog will vary depending on
the Line Types that are allowed for each specific diagnostic plot.
Example Application:
Once a Flow Regime is defined, a line will be fitted automatically through the data within
the Flow Regime/s, and Results appropriate to the selected Model are also calculated
(e.g. on the Log-Log Plot, a Zero-Slope Line will appear in the Radial Flow Regime (with k
and S calculated), a Unit Slope Line will appear in the Wellbore Storage Regime (with Cs
and Cd calculated), a Half-Slope Line will appear in the Fracture Linear Flow Regime (with
Xf calculated), a Half-Slope Line will appear in the Reservoir Linear Flow Regime (with W
calculated), and so on).
Appropriate line-fits will also appear when users switch to any of the other
diagnostic plots (e.g. a Radial Flow Line on a Semi-Log Plot, a Linear Flow Line on a
Square-Root Plot, etc.), provided the relevant Flow Regime has been
identified.
Example of Autofit Lines on Log-Log Plot - three Flow Regimes defined (pairs of dashed
vertical lines)
400
PanSystem
If users do not want lines to be fitted automatically, switch the facility off from the
Analysis menu, by selecting the Autofit Lines menu option with a left-click and ensuring
there is no tick mark displayed next to the menu option text.
401
Pressure Extrapolation Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Pressure Extrapolation option from the
PanSystem Analysis menu. It can be used to compensate for a Pressure Variation in the
Reservoir and to back-out a Pressure Trend from well test data:
When a global Pressure Trend induced by interference from Injection or Producing
Wells needs to be removed from the Gauge Data so that a Transient Analysis can
be performed
When the Gauge Pressure has to be corrected for the effects of the Flowing History
of the Well rather than use Superposition Theory to function the Time (i.e. the
principle of the Slider Method - Reference 19).

Type area: Select the Type of Extrapolation trend to be applied, from the five
choices. Each selection requires a different set of Parameters to be defined in the
underlying section. The table below illustrates the specific Parameters required for
each Flow Type selection:
Type selection Parameters required

None Not used
Semi-Steady-State Linear Rate of Pressure
Flow Change
Radial Flow Logarithmic Pressure
Trend
Elapsed Time to Start of
Test
Linear Flow Square-Root Pressure
Trend
402
PanSystem
Test
Bilinear Flow Fourth-Root Pressure
Trend
Test
Parameters section: With reference to the Flow Type area and the table above,
enter the appropriate Parameters in the data entry fields, when they are enabled:
Rate of Pressure Change: This Trend can be estimated from a plot (i.e. with
an appropriate Time axis) of the data at the tail end of the preceding Test
Period if available. To generate this for a Gas well test, remember to change
the Pressure Transformation option to Pressure, otherwise the Trend will be
measured in m(p)/day and not pressure/day.
Elapsed Time to Start of Test: The Logarithmic, Square-Root and Fourth-
Root Pressure Trend options require this additional input. The preceding
Trend is attributed to an assumed Single Constant Rate Period (use the
Effective (Tp) for a Build-Up, where Tp(eff) = Total Volume Produced last
Flow Rate before Shut-In). Unlike the Linear Extrapolation, the size of the
correction applied to the Test data depends on how long these Trends
existed before the Test Period under Analysis.
Note that a positive data entry indicates a Pressure Trend declining with Time,
and a negative data entry indicates a Pressure Trend increasing with Time.
Use (Extrapolation) area: Choose the Type of Extrapolation to be used from the
two available choices, to either represent Rate History Effects for the same Well or
Interference Effects from other Wells.
Extrapolation to Model Rate History: This replicates the Slider Method
(Reference 19) to account for the effects of Rate History by Desuperposition.
The selected Trend (i.e. identified from the preceding Test Period data), is
added to the Gauge Data when plotted. Since this correction accounts for
Rate History, the "No History" option should be selected under the Time-
Function (Tf) tool. The correction is also applied to any Quick Match or
Advanced Simulation data which are plotted.
Extrapolation to Model Interference Effects: In this case, only the Gauge
Data are corrected with the Extrapolation Trend, to Plot the pure response
cleaned of any Interference Effects. Any Well Rate History pertaining to the
Test should be respected by retaining the default Time-Function (Tf) setting
of "Use History". There is no Pressure Correction applied to any Quick
Match or Advanced Simulation data which are plotted, since these already
represent the pure response.
If a different Test Period is subsequently analyzed, remember to switch the

Pressure Extrapolation facility off or change the Parameter/s as appropriate.
403
Time Transformation Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Time Transformation option from the PanSystem
Analysis menu.
This option can only be used when the Layer Fluid Type is Gas or Condensate and
provided that a valid table of () and (Ct) data versus Pressure is available (refer to
Fluid Parameters for Gas and Condensate), Pseudo-Time will be used instead of
Real Time in the Analysis Plots. Pseudo-Time (t'), is the normalized form of the
Pseudo-Time ta(p) defined in Agarwal's paper (Reference 41 and Reference 66) -
also refer to PanSystem Equations Gas Analysis Overview for more details).
There are two choices available, but Pseudo-Time should always be used in conjunction
with Pseudo-Pressure:
Normal Time: Normal Time Transformation is applied.
Pseudo-Time: Pseudo-Time Transformation is applied.
404
PanSystem
Pressure Transformation Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Pressure Transformation option from the
PanSystem Analysis menu; it deals with:
Pressure Formulations - a choice is available when the Layer Fluid Type is Gas,
Condensate or Oil (Multi-Phase).
Material Balance Correction -a choice is available when the Layer Fluid Type is Gas,
Condensate, or Oil
1. Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option not selected in the Well and Reservoir
Pressure: Available for Gas, Condensate and Oil (Multi-Phase) - (also refer below
for applicability).
Pressure Squared (Reference 21): Available for Gas and Condensate (also refer
below for applicability).
Pseudo-Pressure (Reference 21 and Reference 98): Available for Gas and
Condensate. This option requires a valid table of Pseudo-Pressure Data. The
Single-Phase Real Gas Pseudo-Pressure Table can be generated in the Analytical
Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog, or imported from an
external source.
Applicability:
The first two transforms are approximations which are more or less valid depending
on test conditions:
Pressure (p), for Pressures above approximately 3000 psia or tests where
the Drawdown is small.
Pressure-Squared (p2), for Pressures below about 3000 psia, or tests where
the Drawdown is small.
The Real Gas Pseudo-Pressure transform is theoretically rigorous and is valid under
all conditions.
2. Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option selected in Well and Reservoir Description
(Analytical) dialog:
Pseudo-Pressure: The only available option, enabled for Gas, Condensate or Oil.
This option requires a valid table of Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Data, which can
be generated in either the Analytical Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure Table
Editing or the Analytical Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog, or imported
from an external source.
3. Material Balance Correction:
This checkbox option can be checked to enable the Material Balance Correction for
Gas, Condensate or Oil wells. It will only have an effect for Closed System
Boundary Model, where it will correct Fluid Properties particularly the
compressibility - as the Reservoir Pressure declines. This provides improved
modeling of extended production periods in Quick Match, Advanced Simulation and
405
Deliverability Forecasting by re-evaluating Fluid Properties as the Reservoir

Pressure declines. If this option is not used (i.e. unchecked), the initial Fluid
Properties will be used (i.e. constant Compressibility).
The material balance correction is not currently available when the multiphase
pseudopressure is in use.
406
PanSystem
Non-Darcy Skin Analysis
General:
This facility is activated by selecting (i.e. checking) the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis option on
the Analysis menu. A tick mark is displayed next to the menu option text when the
facility is enabled. It allows users to estimate the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D)
for Turbulent or Non-Darcy Flow by a special analysis technique applicable to multi-rate
Oil, Gas or Condensate well tests.
Three further requirements must be fulfilled in order for the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis
option to be applied:
The Reservoir Model must be Radial Homogeneous and the Boundary Model Infinite
Acting.
The plot on the screen must be a Semi-Log Plot.
More than one Test Period must be selected for Analysis.
If these requirements are not satisfied, an error message will be displayed.

When the option is enabled, the Semi-Log Analysis will lead to a plot of Total Skin versus
Normalized Flow Rate (i.e. S versus Q Plot), from which the Darcy Skin (S), Rate-
Dependent Skin Coefficient (D) and corresponding Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), will be
derived. In addition, the facility to correct the Semi-Log Plot for Non-Darcy effects will
become available.
Application Example:
With the option enabled, plot all the selected Flow Periods together on the Semi-Log Plot.
Fit parallel lines through the Flow Periods. Each line provides a Total Skin Factor (S +
DQj) for each of the Flow Periods (Qj). The selected Test Periods can either be all
Flowing Periods or all Shut-In Periods. The Analysis must be performed on the Radial
Flow portion of the data for a Vertical Well, or on the Vertical Radial Flow portion for a
Horizontal Well, or the Results will be invalid.
If preferred, independent lines can be fitted through the Flow Periods first, then their
average slope determined with the Average Line (Av) button. At the next stage, parallel
lines can be re-fitted with this slope through each data set.
Alternatively, include a good Build-Up with the selected Flow Periods, fit a line through
the Build-Up data to establish a reliable slope, then place this line over one of the Flow
Periods. Next, proceed with parallel lines through the other Flow Periods. Using the
Build-Up as a reference in this way is helpful if the Flow Period data is of poor quality.
407
The image above shows a four-rate Flow-After-Flow test with parallel lines fitted through
the Flow Periods. Parallel lines must be fitted (i.e. only one Permeability can apply to all
Flow Periods), in order to be able to proceed to the S versus Q Plot. For consistency, the
Permeability should be confirmed using the Confirm Results (Cnf) button, before leaving
the Radial Flow Plot.
408
PanSystem
Correct for Rate Dependency (Change F) Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Correct for Rate Dependency option from the
PanSystem Analysis menu.
This option is only enabled if the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis option has been enabled
from the Analysis menu and is only available for Gas and Condensate well tests.
When a well test has a non-zero Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient and a Non-Darcy Skin
Analysis has been performed (i.e. Semi-Log Plot (Radial Flow) and S versus Q Plot
analysis), the data sets on the Semi-Log Plot (i.e. typically several Test Periods from a
Flow-After-Flow or Isochronal Test), can be corrected for the effects of Non-Darcy
(Turbulent) Flow, using a specified Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F). This is the principle of
the Essis-Thomas Plot.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient: Enter the new value for (F) into this field. This will
default to the current confirmed value (i.e. normally derived from the S versus Q
Plot).
Apply Rate Dependency Correction: Check this checkbox and the data on the
Semi-Log Plot will be corrected accordingly.
If the correct (F) coefficient has been used, the data for the different Flow Periods should
overlay (compare the following image with the corresponding image from Non-Darcy Skin
Analysis).
409
Export TC (Type-Curve) File Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Export TC option from the PanSystem Analysis
Menu.
This option is only enabled on the Log-Log Plot.

Use the Export TC facility to save data in Dimensionless Type-Curve Format. This would
normally only be of interest if data has been generated using Advanced Simulation and
the Results are to be stored in Dimensionless form for future Type-Curve Matching
against real data. The User Selected Type-Curve option on the Select Type Curve dialog
allows users to load their own Type Curves.
The facility could also be used as a means of comparing one data set (saved in
Dimensionless form) with others.
The form of Type-Curve that can be saved depends on the Reservoir Flow Model selected.
Different Reservoir Flow Models require different definitions of the Dimensionless Time
(Td) function, and the files are given different file extensions to distinguish them. Each
extension corresponds to a different Dimensionless Time-Axis formulation.
The dialog is comprised of a single data entry section (i.e. Type-Curve Type), and two
function buttons, described as follows:
The (*.TCH) file extension corresponds to the Wellbore Storage Analysis format (Pd
vs Td/Cd).
The (*.TCB) file extension corresponds to the Bounded Reservoir Analysis format
(Pd vs Td/Ld2). This format is available for all Flow Models, any others are Flow
Model specific.
The (*.TCX) file extension corresponds to the special (Pd versus Td) format used by
Advanced Simulation. It is only available for the Radial Homogeneous Flow Model.
This enables users to generate their own (Pd versus Td) functions and use them for
response simulation.
When the appropriate file type is chosen and OK is selected, a standard Windows File
Save As dialog is generated.
Depending on the Type-Curve Type, users may be prompted to Enter a Model Parameter
value needed in the computation of the Dimensionless Times. For the Bounded Reservoir
(*.TCB) Type-Curve, this will be the Distance to the Nearest Boundary (L), required for
calculating (Td/Ld2).
Users may also be prompted for a User Defined Curve Label (to identify the Type-Curve
during Matching). Enter up to 15 alpha-numeric characters or leave blank as required.
410
PanSystem
Enter Model Parameter Dialog
General:
This "prompt" dialog is issued to users in Dataprep and Analysis when they have omitted
to enter data into one of the compulsory data entry fields (or deleted the existing data),
then attempted to perform an Analysis Calculation.
The dialog has a single data entry section, with the following instructions:
Enter the Following Model Parameter to Allow Calculation: Enter the required Model
Parameter (e.g. Porosity, Permeability, Wellbore Storage, etc.), in the correct Units
as specified next to the data entry field.
If several Model Parameters have been omitted (or deleted), users will be
presented with a series of these dialogs until all the required Model Parameters
have been entered to allow an Analysis Calculation to be performed.
411
PanSystem Simulate Menu Index
The following menu options can be used to perform Simulation calculations on the
complete Analysis:
Quick Match: Used to perform a Quick Pressure Simulation; an on-screen Single
Well/Single Layer Pressure Response generation to validate the Model and
Parameters derived from Analysis (i.e. equivalent to the V1.80 Gen Internal
facility). The Simulated Data are temporary.
Auto Match: Used to perform Automatic Parameter Matching. The Parameters are
optimized with non-linear regression to obtain the Parameter Set that best
matches the plotted test data (i.e. equivalent to the V1.80 Auto facility).
Advanced Simulation: Used to perform Advanced Analytical Pressure and Rate
Simulation. The Pressure Response generation uses more advanced features than
are available in Quick Match (i.e. Multiple Wells, Multiple Layers, etc.). The
Simulated Data are written to file.
PanFlow Rate Simulation: Used to derive Flow Rate from Wellbore Pressure
Simulation. This determines the Sandface Flow Rate from the Wellbore Pressure for
a specified Reservoir Model and Boundary Model. Wellbore Pressure is therefore an
input, Sandface Flow Rate is the output. This facility has the same Multi-Layer
capabilities as Advanced Simulation, but is a Single Well Model. The Simulated
Data are written to file.
Numerical Simulation: This option opens the PanMesh 3-D Well Test Simulator (i.e.
if licensed), providing a Numerical Pressure and Rate Simulation capability. This
is a 3-D Numerical Simulation based on Finite Element Mesh technology, comprised
of individual, twenty-noded iso-parametric bricks. The Simulated Data are written
to file.
The Simulate menu option is available on almost all diagnostic plots from Analysis,
including the Test Overview Plot. A Quick Match response generated on one plot
can be viewed on any other plot without regenerating it, simply by switching plots.
412
PanSystem
Simulate Menu
Quick Match Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Quick Match option from the PanSystem
Simulate menu. It is used for setting-up the parameters to Simulate the Pressure
Response for currently displayed data. The Quick Match facility serves to test the
correctness of the selected Reservoir and Boundary Models and derived parameters, by
generating the theoretical Single-Well/Single-Layer Pressure Response for comparison
with plotted data.
Users would normally start by using the Results from the current Analysis Plot, and input
parameters can be modified by trial and error (i.e. if required) to improve the Match. The
Reservoir and Boundary Models can also be changed via the Analysis Model option.
This dialog can either be accessed directly or via an additional dialog stage depending on
the Boundary Model selected:
If the Boundary Model is Infinitely Acting, the Quick Match dialog is generated
directly.
If a Boundary Model other than Infinitely Acting has been selected, users will first
be directed to the Boundary Type dialog and presented with options relating to the
Boundary Geometry. After entering the required parameters, then selecting OK,
the Quick Match dialog is generated.
The Quick Match dialog is comprised of two data entry sections, a checkbox option and
three function buttons, described as follows:
The values in the data entry sections are read from the current Reservoir Description.
These will correspond to the Model Results from the current plot if the Confirm Results
(Cnf) button was selected after performing a Line Fit. The value of any parameter can
be changed by either entering a new value (or values) in the relevant data entry field/s or
by scrolling the up/down toggles to select a new option (or options) where applicable.
For the Test Overview Plot, when the Allow Different Skins and Storage per Test Period
option has been enabled in the Layer Parameters dialog, additional options become
available, to identify individual Skins and Storage Coefficients for the different Test
Periods selected. To edit these parameters, select <TABLE> in the Skin or Wellbore
Storage fields of the dialog. This will open up the Edit Skin & Storage Table sub-dialog
for the Well and Layer in question.
Start and End: These are the Start and End values on the plot X-axis (rather than
actual times). The values default to the plot scaling but can be altered.
Some models require a lot of computing time. The Test Period can be covered
more rapidly if a very large value is entered for End, (or Start in the case of
Horner-Type Superposition) and stop the calculation around the half-way point.
Replace Previous: To retain the previous Quick Match trace, uncheck the Replace
Previous checkbox before running the next one. You must OK/Cnf from your
last Quick Match and re-enter Simulate Quick Match for this to take effect.
By performing Quick Match in this manner, up to 5 traces can be accumulated as
413
described below. If the previous trace is not to be kept, check the Replace
Previous checkbox and it will be overwritten by the new trace.
Calculate button: To generate the response, select the Calculate button. A Quick
Match Progress status box is displayed while the response is being calculated. If
the calculation is stopped in mid-stream, the Part-Response will be displayed. The
Response is then drawn on the plot, and the plot Results Box will be updated with
the Quick Match Results. Up to five calculations can be performed, with five plots
displayed simultaneously.
The parameter values can be edited and the Response regenerated until a
satisfactory Match is achieved. Click and drag the Quick Match input data box (by
the title bar) to a different location if it is in the way. If users attempt to perform
more than five calculations and display plots simultaneously, a warning will be
issued to "Delete a History Plot Before Saving Another".
OK/Confirm button: The OK/Confirm button exits the Quick Match facility and
writes the parameter values to the Reservoir Description (i.e. analogous to the
Confirm Results (Cnf) button for plot analysis).
Cancel: The Cancel button exits the Quick Match facility and clears all traces of the
Response generation. If users decide they need to change the Reservoir or
Boundary Model, click Cancel and use the Model option from the Analysis menu.
If the Flow Rate data being used is a "varying Flow Rate", corresponding to a
Downhole Sandface Flow Rate measurement, remember to set the Wellbore
Storage Coefficient (Cs) to zero in the data entry field. The Downhole Flow Rate
already accounts for Wellbore Storage effects, so it will be applied twice if a non-
zero value for Cs is used.
Quick Match Traces
The Quick Match facility allows users to review up to five traces on a plot. With multiple
traces, the Results box exhibits a tabbed appearance and the active tab is identified with
a blue highlight (example illustrated below for the maximum five traces). Numbered tabs
represent the first and subsequent passes. The left-most, highlighted, tab with no number
assigned always represents the last pass made.
To delete one or several Quick Match traces, right-click on a trace, or select the Matches
option from the Edit menu. Then proceed as described in the PanSystem Edit Matches
Dialog help.
Quick Match Results Box:
414
PanSystem
The Results box contains the Results computed for a Line Fit (i.e. Model Results) or Curve
Match (i.e. Quick Match Results). The box can be edited or deleted by either double-
clicking on it with the left mouse button, or selecting the Results option from the Edit
menu. Then proceed as described in the PanSystem Edit Results Dialog help.
In addition to the values corresponding to the Model Results from the current plot (e.g.
values for Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), Permeability (k), Skin (S), etc.), the Quick
Match Results box includes the following:
Skin pressure drop (dpS): This is the pressure drop corresponding to the skin factor
S or, for gas and condensate wells, the total skin (S+DQ). Note that this is the
pressure drop for the true or damage skin, not the pseudo-radial skin.
Initial Pressure (Pi): This is the theoretical Pressure at the start of the Rate History
for the current Model and it is calculated by backwards superposition from the start
of the selected Test Period when Quick Match is run on any of the diagnostic plots.
This provides the estimate of Initial Layer Pressure (e.g. a gauge may not have
been in place when the Rate History started, or the initial gauge reading may be
unreliable).
Note that this (Pi) includes the effect of any Boundaries.
For any boundary model which is not closed, Pi is also the current reservoir
pressure, since there will have been no depletion.
In addition, when using Quick Match on the Test Overview Plot, if a Test Period is
selected in the ruler bar, Quick Match will still simulate the entire test sequence,
but the generated Pressure record will be shifted as necessary to pass through the
measured Pressure at the start of that Test Period, rather than at the start of the
history, and an estimate of the corresponding (Pi) will appear in the Results box.
If no Test Period, or the first Test Period, is selected in the Ruler Bar, the initial
pressure becomes a user input, P_lay, in the Quick Match dialog. This is initially
equal to the first pressure entered in the Rate Change Table, but can be changed by
trail and error until a good overall Match is obtained.
Average Layer Pressure (Pavg): For the Closed System Boundary Model, an
estimate of (Pavg) will appear in the Results box when a buildup (or fall-off) test is
being analyzed. This estimate is valid for:
Any Reservoir Flow Model.
Any Closed Boundary Model and Well Position, including Constant Pressure
Boundaries.
Any duration of Production Period.
and is preferable to the MBH Calculation (PMBH), from the Line Fit on the Semi-Log
Plot.
It is computed by projecting the Build-Up Response forward in time far enough to
reach a stable shut-in Pressure.
Permeability- Thickness Product (kh): This is displayed for all Reservoir Models.
Fracture Conductivity (kfw): This is only displayed for Vertical Fracture Models.
Refer to Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity (FCD) in Model Parameters, for a
definition of kfw.
415
Drainage Area Size (A): This is only displayed for Closed System, 2-Cell
Compartmentalized and Hexagonal Boundary options.
Hydrocarbons-in-place (OOIP, OGIP) / Water-in-place (OWIP): This is only
displayed for Closed System, 2-Cell Compartmentalized and Hexagonal Boundary
options.
Material Balance Correction:
This option can be found in the Pressure Transformation dialog in the Analysis menu. It
can be checked to enable the Material Balance Correction for Gas, Condensate or Oil
wells. It will only have an effect for the Closed System and Hexagonal Boundary models,
where it will correct Fluid Properties for declining Reservoir Pressure. This provides
improved simulation of extended production periods by re-evaluating Fluid Properties
particularly the compressibility - as the Reservoir Pressure declines. If this option is not
used (i.e. unchecked), the initial Fluid Properties will be used (i.e. constant
Compressibility).
For infinite and semi-infinite systems, switching the correction on will have no effect,
because there will be no depletion.
The material balance correction will not be applied when the 2-cell
Compartmentalised boundary model has been selected.
Quick Match Combo dialog and results for wireline formation tests
Dual pressures: If formation tester active and observation pressures have been
imported and the WFT with Observation Probe Test checkbox has been ticked in the top
right corner of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, a special dual pressure
mode (Combo) will be enabled for Quick Match simulation and Auto Match parameter
optimization.
In Combo mode, both pressures will be displayed on each analysis plot, and Quick Match
can be run for both datasets simultaneously. In addition, Auto Match will regress on both
datasets simultaneously to find a unique set of parameters that best matches them.
The Analysis / Model dialog will contain three tabs one each for the active and
observation pressures, and a Combo tab for dual-pressure presentation and analysis.
Select Flowing or Observe to work on an individual pressure; select Combo to work on
both pressures.
416
PanSystem
Analysis Model dialog for a WFT Test in dual pressure mode

It is recommended as part of the work flow to find a set of parameters that match
independently for each model before choosing the Combo tab. Normally, you would start
by analyzing and matching the active (flowing) pressures by line-fitting and Quick Match /
Auto Match, and then the observation data. No line-fitting results are available in Combo
mode.
417
Quick Match inputs for a packer-probe test:

Active (flowing) zone selected
Quick Match inputs for a packer-probe test:

Observation probe selected
418
PanSystem
Finally, refine the analysis in Combo mode, matching both data sets simultaneously using
Quick Match and/or Auto Match to arrive at a single, consistent interpretation.
Combo Mode Quick Match inputs for the same Packer-Probe Test
Note that at this stage it is possible to have an inconsistent set of parameters for the
active and observation models. Obviously, the final interpretation should use the same
values for both.
When running Auto Match, a single, combined, set of model parameters is presented.
This ensures a single consistent interpretation.
419
Combo mode Auto Match inputs
420
PanSystem
Copy Layer Pressure Dialog
General:
This dialog is only generated when the Quick Match option is selected from the Simulate
menu under the following circumstances:
The Test Overview Plot is currently displayed with the first Test Period selected, so
that the Quick Match calculation is being initiated from the start of the test
sequence (i.e. at Reservoir Pressure).
In Quick Match, the Start Pressure is taken from the Pressure in the first row of the
Rate Changes Table. If the Layer Pressure (derived from the Layer Parameters
dialog), is different from this Start Pressure/Reservoir Pressure, this dialog warns
users of the difference and allows the Layer Pressure to be copied over to the first
Rate Change Pressure.
Users are also able to edit the Start Pressure in the Quick Match dialog.
The dialog contains textual instruction and is self-explanatory. Basically, there are two
potential outcomes:
Selecting the Yes button will replace the Start Pressure/Reservoir Pressure with the
Layer Pressure for the Quick Match calculation.
Selecting the No button will use the Start Pressure/Reservoir Pressure from the
Rate Changes Table for the Quick Match calculation.
In either case, the Pressure value can be checked (and edited if required), in the Quick
Match dialog.
421
Boundary Type Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting either the Quick Match or Auto Match options from
the PanSystem Simulate menu, when a Boundary Model other than Infinitely Acting has
been selected (i.e. either in the Dataprep Boundary Parameters sub-dialog or the Analysis
Select Analysis Model dialog). Users are first directed to this dialog and presented with
options relating to the Boundary Geometry. After entering the required Boundary
Parameters for Simulation, then selecting OK, the Quick Match or Auto Match dialog is
generated.
The dialog title, data entry fields and function button availability will vary
depending on the Boundary Type selected in Dataprep or Analysis (e.g. Parallel
Faults, U-Shaped Faults, etc.). Annotated illustrations of these Models are
available in the Boundary Model dialog.
Boundaries in Quick Match and Auto Match:
The Quick Match and Auto Match facilities use the Image Well principle in most cases, but
unlike Advanced Simulation, apply it through look-up tables rather than requiring Image
Wells to be computed. Some Boundary Models use Green's Functions (described below),
in which case look-up tables are not required.
Note that all Boundaries are of the No-Flow type unless otherwise stated,
regardless of any selection that may have been made in the Boundary Parameters
sub-dialog.
These Boundary Responses computed with Image Well look-up tables are valid only
when the well test has reached Pseudo-Radial Flow, which means the Boundaries should
not be positioned "too close" to the Well. Errors may be introduced if the onset of a
Boundary effect occurs before Pseudo-Radial Flow is attained:
For Fractured Well Models, "too close" means less than about two Fracture Half-
Lengths (<~2xf) from the Well.
For Horizontal Well Models, it means less than about one Well Length (<~Lw) from
the mid-point of the Well.
Note that the Fracture or Horizontal Wellbore is considered to be oriented parallel

to the X-axis (i.e. east-west on the viewing screen) for specification of distances
L1, L2, L3, L4.
The following models use Green's Functions instead of tables:
For the Radial Homogeneous Model, all the orthogonal geometries (i.e. Parallel, U-
Shaped, Closed System and 2-Cell Compartmentalised), offer the choice of variable
Well Position and the special case of central Well Position (i.e. equidistant). These
are modeled using Green's Functions instead of Image Well look-ups. This offers
more flexibility (variable distances) and accuracy. The Boundary Parameters button
generates the appropriate Boundary Parameters sub-dialog, where users can select
the No-Flow and Constant Boundary types and specify the Boundary Distances.
Once the Boundary Types have been selected there is no need to re-enter this
dialog (unless they need to be changed), because the Boundary Distances can be
entered in either the Quick Match or Auto Match dialog which follows.
422
PanSystem
For the Vertical Fracture (Infinite Conductivity and Limited Height) Models, all the
orthogonal geometries are modeled using Green's Functions, which permits
Boundaries to be placed at any desired Distance from the Well. There is no
minimum Distance, providing no Boundary crosses the Fracture. The Fracture
Orientation relative to the Boundaries can therefore be taken into account.
For the Horizontal Well Models,all the orthogonal geometries are modeled using
Green's Functions, and this allows Boundaries to be placed at any desired Distance
from the Well. There is no minimum Distance, providing no Boundary crosses the
Wellbore. The Well Orientation relative to the Boundaries can therefore be taken
into account.
Note that the Fracture or Horizontal Wellbore is considered to be oriented parallel

to the X-axis (i.e. east-west on the viewing screen) for specification of distances
L1, L2, L3, L4.
All other Reservoir and Boundary Models offer a limited selection of geometries
based on look-up tables derived from Image Wells.
Models Available in the Closed System Dialog:
Additional Boundary Models are available in this dialog; as with Models depicted in the
Boundary Model dialog, the Distances L1 to L4 are allocated on a plan view basis, starting
from the south with L1 and working anti-clockwise, to L4. These Distances are also
measured from the Well to each Fault/Boundary on the basis of being perpendicular to
each Fault/Boundary:
Variable Well Position: Available for the three Model types described above that
use Green's Functions. Users can either specify the Boundary Geometry in terms of
L1, L2, L3 and L4, or if the Well is in the center, users specify L1 and the other
three Distances are allocated automatically.
Square Reservoir (No-Flow Boundary), Well in one Corner: In this case, L = L1 =
L2 and L3 = L4 = 9 x L.
Square Reservoir (No-Flow Boundary), Well at one End: In this case, L = L1, L2 =
L4 = 5 x L and L3 = 9 x L.
423
Square Reservoir (No-Flow Boundary), Well at the Center: In this case, L1 = L2 =

L3 = L4.
Square Reservoir (Constant-Pressure Boundary), Well at the Center: In this case,

L1 = L2 = L3 = L4.
5:1 Rectangular Reservoir (No-Flow Boundary), Well at the Center: In this case, L
= L1 = L3 and L2 = L4 = 5 x L.
5:1 Rectangular Reservoir (No-Flow Boundary), Well at one End: In this case, L =
L1= L2 = L3 and L4 = 9 x L.
424
PanSystem
Equilateral Triangle (No-Flow Boundary), Well in one Corner: In this case, L = L1=
L2 and L3 = 13 x L.
This Model is only available in Quick Match and Auto Match. It is not available
through the Dataprep or Analysis Boundary Model dialogs.
No Boundary: No Boundary specification required. This is a useful sensitivity to
run for comparison against a Model with a Boundary.
425
Automatic Matching Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Auto Match option from the Simulate menu,
after selecting Data Points. These Data Points can either be selected manually or
automatically, using the Auto Match Point Selection Tool from the Analysis Toolbar. If
users select the Auto Match option without first choosing any Data Points, PanSystem will
generate the Auto Match - Points Selection dialog, which supplies users with a range of
options for manual, semi-automatic or fully-automatic Data Point selection.
This option is available on almost every plot on condition that a single Test Period
has been selected for Analysis. Only the Test Overview Plot allows an entire
sequence of tests to be Matched.
If the Auto Match option is selected with 5 or fewer points selected, a warning message
will appear alerting the user to this fact. This is to prevent regression being performed on
a few points that may have been accidentally selected.
Use the Auto Match facility for parameter optimization by non-linear regression to obtain
the Parameter Set that best Matches the plotted test data. This is the automated
equivalent of manual adjustment of Quick Match input parameters by trial and error.
The process is kicked off at specified starting values (i.e. tentative Analysis Results,
guesses, etc.), and each parameter is made to vary between specified limits during the
search for an optimum solution. Any parameter can be held constant at a fixed value if it
is not to be optimized (i.e. the answer is already known).
The regression seeks to Match the test data to within a specified tolerance or "Match
Quality" (based on a least-squares criterion), within a specified number of iterations.
The theoretical Pressure Response is then generated using the optimized parameters for
comparison with the plotted data.
Auto Match Combo dialog and results for wireline formation tests
Dual pressures: If formation tester active and observation pressures have been
imported and the WFT with Observation Probe Test checkbox has been ticked in the top
right corner of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, a special dual pressure
mode (Combo) will be enabled for Quick Match simulation and Auto Match parameter
optimization.
In Combo mode, both pressures will be displayed on each analysis plot, and Quick Match
can be run for both datasets simultaneously. In addition, Auto Match will regress on both
datasets simultaneously to find a unique set of parameters that best matches them.
The Analysis / Model dialog will contain three tabs one each for the active and
observation pressures, and a r;Combo tab for dual-pressure presentation and analysis.
Select Flowing or Observe to work on an individual pressure; select Combo to work on
both pressures.
It is recommended as part of the work flow to find a set of parameters that match
independently for each model before choosing the Combo tab. Normally, you would start
by analyzing and matching the active (flowing) pressures by line-fitting and Quick Match /
Auto Match, and then the observation data. Note that at this stage it is possible to have
an inconsistent set of parameters for the active and observation models. Obviously, the
final interpretation should use the same values for both.
426
PanSystem
When running Auto Match, a single, combined, set of model parameters is presented.
This ensures a single consistent interpretation.
After Data Point selection (described above), the Automatic Matching dialog is generated
as described below:
Only the Parameters relevant to the currently selected Reservoir and Boundary
Model are listed.
Table Data Entry/Edit section: This section is used to enter/edit parameter
values, select variables and set limits for the optimization process:
Start Values: These values are read from the current (i.e. confirmed)
Reservoir Description. These will correspond to the Model Results from the
current diagnostic plot if the Confirm Results (Cnf) button was selected
from the Analysis Toolbar after performing a Line Fit. Edit if necessary.
Variable: Check this checkbox if the associated parameter is to be
optimized. Uncheck the checkbox if the parameter is to be held constant at
the Start Value.
When using Auto Match on the Test Overview Plot , if any particular Test
Period is not selected, the Initial Pressure will be included as a parameter to
be optimized.
Lower and Upper Limits: These are set to reasonable values if the default
start values are non-zero. Edit as necessary - do not impose too tight a
constraint on any parameter as this may impede the search process.
Maximum Number of Iterations section: Users should leave this at the default
setting unless they want to restrict or increase the number (i.e. maximum number
is 999).
Match Quality area: These are qualitative definitions of the tightness of the
Match tolerance to be met, Excellent being the closest Match criterion. The Auto
Match stops when the current iteration produces a Match within the tolerance. If
the full run of iterations fails to achieve this, the set of parameters giving the
closest Match will be adopted.
Solution Method area: Two methods are available for the Auto Match
calculations:
Adaptive (Reference 55 and 56).
Levenberg-Marquardt (Reference 57).
Adaptive should achieve the higher quality Match of the two methods. However,
the accuracy of this method can be compromised by spurious data such as noise.
If the Adaptive option gives a result which is not satisfactory due to poor data
quality, then the Levenberg-Marquardt method should be used as this method has
better noise handling characteristics.
Advanced button: This generates the Advanced Automatic Matching sub-
dialog, that is used to switch on/off Parameter Transform and Parameter
Re-Scaling. Edit the dialog box if necessary, then select OK to proceed to
Auto Match.
427
Pressure/Derivative Weighting area: This slider control allows users to select

how much weighting (i.e. 0 to 100%), to assign to Pressure and Derivative. The
default setting is 100% Pressure.
Selection of Points for the Regression:
Before selecting Auto Match, select the Data Points for the regression by clicking them
with the mouse or using the Auto Match Point Selection Tool from the Analysis Toolbar.
The regression will be more effective if more points are used. It is particularly
important to cover the Storage-Dominated portion in detail. However, too many Data
Points selected will entail slower regression. Usually, 20-30 Data Points are adequate.
If users select the Auto Match option without first choosing any Data Points, PanSystem
will generate the Auto Match - Points Selection dialog, which supplies users with a range
of options for manual, semi-automatic or fully-automatic Data Point selection.
When manually choosing Data Points, users can assign Confidence Weighting Factors
based on perceived data quality. These will subsequently influence the relative Weighting
of the data in the regression.
A Confidence Weighting Factor can be assigned by pressing the UP (= high) or DOWN (=
low) arrow key from the keyboard first, then selecting the Data Point. To apply a
medium Weighting, it is not necessary to use any of the arrow keys. This Weighting can
be based on the quality of the data in different portions of the test (e.g. a noisy Wellbore
Storage period gets low Weighting), or whether users want a particular portion of the
data to have a stronger influence on the Results (i.e. high Weighting). If there is nothing
special about the data, the arrow keys do not have to be used. The Weighting Factors
are illustrated in the table below:
Confidence Level Arrow
Key
"High": 0.10 psia UP
"Medium": 1.0 psia None
"Low": 10 psia DOWN
The selected Data Points will be highlighted with different symbols depending on their
Weighting:
Low, Medium and High Weighting Symbols

After this Weighting process has been completed, select Auto Match again; the Points
Selection dialog will be skipped and the regression can be started.
Select the Esc key to cancel all Data Point selections and Weighting.
428
PanSystem
Auto Match - Points Selection Dialog
General:
This warning dialog is generated when the Auto Match option is selected from the
Simulate menu and no data points have been selected. Three Point Selection Options
are suggested for users:
Automatic (i.e. the program selects Data Points).
Advanced (i.e. semi-automatic program selection of Data Points, with manual
override).
Manual (i.e. user selects Data Points with mouse).
For Manual Point Selection, users are also provided with instructions on how this is
performed.
Automatic Method:
Select the OK button on the Auto Match - Points Selection dialog. The program will use
all the Data Points in the test up to the maximum of 50. If there are more than 50
Data Points, the Data Points will be re-sampled - logarithmically in time for the diagnostic
plots, linearly for Test Overview.
Advanced Method:
Select the Advanced button on the Auto Match - Points Selection dialog. This generates a
Global Point Selection dialog. This dialog can also be generated by selecting the Auto
Match Point Selection Tool from the Analysis Toolbar.
Enter the Maximum Required Number of Points, choose Linear or Logarithmic
(recommended for most purposes) selection, then select OK to proceed with the
regression process.
Manual Method:
Select the Cancel button on the Auto Match - Points Selection dialog. This takes users
out of Auto Match mode, so Data Points can be selected manually with the mouse cursor
(i.e. up to a maximum of 499). If users are on the Log-Log Plot, select Derivative Points
(the Auto Match Point Selection Tool described above can also be used).
While picking a point, a Confidence Weighting Factor can be assigned by pressing the UP
(= high) or DOWN (= low) arrow key from the keyboard first, then selecting the Data
Point. To apply a medium Weighting, it is not necessary to use any of the arrow keys.
This Weighting can be based on the quality of the data in different portions of the test
(e.g. a noisy Wellbore Storage period gets low Weighting), or whether a particular
portion of the data is to be given a stronger influence on the Results (i.e. high
Weighting). If there is nothing special about the data, the arrow keys do not have to be
used. Weighting Factors are illustrated in the table below:
Confidence Level Arrow Key
"High": 0.10 psia UP
"Medium": 1.0 psia None
"Low": 10 psia DOWN
429
The selected Data Points will be highlighted with different symbols depending on their
Weighting:
Low, Medium and High Weighting Symbols

Once this selection and optional Weighting process has been completed, select the Auto
Match option from the Simulate menu again - the Auto Match - Points Selection dialog will
be skipped and the regression can be started.
Select the Esc key to cancel all Data Point selections and Weighting.
430
PanSystem
Advanced Automatic Matching Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Advanced button in the Solution Method
area of the Automatic Matching dialog. It is used to apply different settings to the
regression calculations performed in Auto Match. Users would not normally need to alter
these settings, but the facility is included or flexibility.
Parameter Transform: This uses the logarithm of each variable in the regression.
This generally produces better results and is ON by default (i.e. checked).
Parameter Re-Scaling: Normalizes the variables with respect to their upper and
lower limits so they lie in the range 0 to 1.0. This also produces better results and
is ON by default (i.e. checked).
431
Matching Progress Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated from the Automatic Matching dialog by selecting the OK
button, and indicates the progress of the current Auto Match process. After the process is
complete, selecting OK in the Match Progress sub-dialog returns users back to the Quick
Match dialog.
A "ticker" (<>) will appear in the Current Iteration area during slow iterations to
indicate that the system is working.
Screen Dialogs and Operational Instructions:
Current Estimate area: This displays the current estimates of parameter values
based on the regression settings and Quick Match simulation.
Current Iteration area: This shows the number of iterations required to reach a
solution for the current settings. As indicated above, a moving "ticker" (<>)
indicates that the system is working.
Goodness of Match area: This is the root mean square deviation of the Pressure for
the current iteration. The regression will stop if this drops below the Match Quality
tolerance set in the Automatic Matching dialog.
Stop button: Select this button to terminate the regression before it has finished
normally. It is necessary to wait until the end of the current iteration before
anything happens.
Confidence button: This button generates the Enter Model Parameter dialog, where
users are prompted to confirm the Pressure Gauge Resolution, then OK. This is
followed by two information dialogs in succession providing statistical information
on the Match:
Confidence Interval: This sub-dialog presents the optimized estimates for
the variable Parameters. The true value of each Parameter has a 95%
probability of lying within the Confidence Intervals.
95% Confidence Intervals for each optimized Parameter

Parameter Correlations: This sub-dialog presents the correlation between
Parameters. A coefficient above 0.95 indicates a strong degree of
correlation between a pair of Parameters.
432
PanSystem
Correlation between Parameters

OK button: Select this button to trigger the response generation and return to the
Quick Match dialog. The resulting plot is redrawn with the test and simulated data
displayed in conjunction with a Quick Match dialog. This enables users to further
refine the Match if required (i.e. edit the parameters, then select the Calculate
button in the Quick Match dialog):
Example of an Optimized Parameter Match on a Horner Build-Up Plot

From this point users can either:
OK/Confirm to exit the Quick Match facility and write the Parameter Values to the
Reservoir Description.
Cancel to return to the Plot and clear all traces of the Response Generation.
Initial Pressure: When using Auto Match on the Test Overview Plot, if users do
not click on any particular Test Period, the Initial Pressure will also be included as
a Parameter to be optimized.
433
Advanced Simulation/PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog
General:
This generic dialog is generated by selecting either the Advanced Simulation or PanFlow
Rate Simulation options from the PanSystem Simulate menu. Select one of the options
below to access the specific Help topic for these menu options:
Advanced Simulation Control version
PanFlow Rate Simulation version
434
PanSystem
Advanced Simulation Control Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Advanced Simulation option from the PanSystem
Simulate menu. This option performs the same function as Quick Match as far as the
validation of an interpretation is concerned, but there are three important differences:
The model is not restricted to a Single-Well/Single-Layer, so Multi-Layer effects
and interference from other Wells can be included.
The characteristics of the Pressure Gauge (i.e. Resolution, Noise and Drift), can be
included in the Simulated Pressure Response (refer to Gauge Details).
The Simulated Data are not temporary, but are written to new Data Columns and
can be saved to disk in Real and Dimensionless form for future use. The Flowing
Pressure, Total Downhole Flow Rate and individual Layer Downhole Flow Rates are
computed.
To introduce the basic mechanics of Advanced Simulation, this Help topic will deal with
the same Single-Well/Single-Layer case (as was used to explain the Quick Match and
Auto Match facilities).
The full capabilities of this facility are covered in detail in Advanced Simulation -
Overview.
The Reservoir Flow Model and Boundary Model (if included), must be fully initialized. This
can be built up in three ways:
During the Data Preparation (i.e. Dataprep) stage (with particular reference to
Layer Parameters).
During Analysis of diagnostic plots (refer to Confirm Results (Cnf)).
During Analysis by direct edit of the model parameters (refer to Select Analysis
Model).
Well area:
Input Datafile/Column Name: The Pressure Response in each Well is
computed according to user-defined Surface Rates. The Surface Rate
Column Names are displayed here for each Well in the Reservoir. Normally,
there will be no choice, but in some cases, the nominal Surface Rates (i.e.
Test Rate) and a measured Downhole (i.e. Spinner) Rate may be available
for a particular well test. Select the appropriate Column Name for each Well
from the drop-down list.
Output Datafile Name: Enter the Output Data file name in this field. This is
picked up automatically when the Rate Column is selected. The Simulated
Data will be written to this file.
Output Column Names (Names button): Select this option to generate the
Simulated Column Names sub-dialog. The Advanced Simulation facility will
generate the Wellbore Pressure with a default name Sim P. It will also
generate the Sandface Rate from each Layer (i.e. in or out) and the Total
Rate (i.e. the sum of the Sandface Rates from all Layers). The default
435
Names will be Sim Q Total, Sim Q#1, Sim Q#2, etc. If users wish to change
these, select the button and enter new Names.
The Sim Q Total rate will be identical to the Surface Rate, except during the
Wellbore Storage dominated period. For a Single-Layered Model, Sim Q Total
will be identical to Sim Q#1.
Layer area:
Solution Model: Some models are supplied as ascii lookup tables (*.TCX)
stored in the ..\typecurv folder, others are internal computations. Users can
ignore this area unless they wish to supply an alternative response function
(where defined by a lookup table) to one or more Layers. In this case,
select the required Solution Model (*.TCX) file/s from the drop-down list.
Speed Option area:
This section is largely obsolete for todays fast computers. The selection determines
the speed and precision of the computation. Speed is traded-off against the detail
with which Rate Variations are treated (economy of superposition). Selecting "1" is
slowest but most accurate, "4" is fastest but may introduce errors, particularly
during the Storage-Dominated period. Higher speeds are recommended for trial
runs and may prove quite adequate. Gas Wells with Storage and Non-Darcy Skin
often need the slowest speed, "1" to obtain good Results.
Additional Information area:
m(p) and B Layer: Select the Layer m(p) table to use from the drop-down
list. Ignore this if there is only one Layer or if the Fluid Type is Water or Oil
(i.e. Single-Phase or Multi-Phase (Perrine) Method). For Gas and
Condensate Fluid Types or Oil (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure), if there are
several Layers with different Fluid Properties, users must select which set of
Pseudo-Pressure tables and other Fluid Properties to use in the Simulation
(i.e. no mixing of Pseudo-Properties is possible).
Gauge Details button: This generates the Gauge Details sub-dialog. This
allows users to specify the technical characteristics of the Pressure Gauge.
This is optional and Real Gauge Characteristics may be ignored if required.
If working in Test Design, users are recommended to use a large number of

linearly spaced time-steps to create the appearance of Real Gauge Data in
the Simulation.
Observation Points button: This button generates the Observation Points sub-
dialog. An Observation Point is a remote point (x, y), defined in the Reservoir, at
which Pressure is also calculated. Where there are several Layers, the Pressure is
calculated in each Layer.
In order for Pseudo-Radial flow to occur, the Observation Points must be far
enough away from the active Well/s.
Start Pressures button: This button generates the Start Pressures sub-dialog. The
sub-dialog allows users to alter Start Pressures without leaving Simulation Mode.
These Pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common datum (i.e. there is
no hydrostatic difference between Layers). The initial condition of the system (i.e.
at time zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-steps. The Layer
Pressure of each Layer (i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in Dataprep) and the
436
PanSystem
Initial Wellbore Pressure in each Well (i.e. set-up via Rate Changes in Dataprep)
are therefore important.
Implementation:
When this dialog is initialized, select OK to start the Simulation. The Simulation Progress
sub-dialog will be displayed. Let the Simulation run to the end, then select OK in the
sub-dialog. To terminate the Simulation before the end, select Stop in the sub-dialog;
the Response generated to that point will be retained and the remaining time-steps will
be assigned zero pressures.
Once the Simulation has finished users will be returned to the plot. To display the
Simulated Pressure select the Overlay Pressure option from the Edit menu. In the
Overlay Pressure dialog, select the Pressure Column Name to display, check the Show
checkbox, then select OK. The Simulated Data will subsequently appear on the plot. It is
possible to overlay on any other diagnostic plot types.
If an overlay is undertaken on any plot whose Y-axis involves pressure (p), (e.g.
the Log-Log Plot), the Simulated Data will only plot correctly if (T0, P0) at the start
of the Test Period are identical for the field and Simulated Data. Remember that
the Rate Changes Table has been set up for real Gauge Data.
Message Dialogs:
If users are issued with the following error message:
it means that data Columns already exist with the Names that have been selected. This
will most likely arise when users make a second Advanced Simulation run using the
default output Names; these will obviously conflict with the Columns generated from the
first run.
If users want to keep the first run output, select Cancel and specify new Names for the
data to be computed in the dialog that appears.
If users do not wish to keep the output from the previous run, select OK and it will be
overwritten by computed data from the current run.
The calculations will now proceed.
For Gas and Condensate Fluid Types with a Turbulent Skin (i.e. Rate-Dependent Skin
Coefficient D > 0), users will receive the following prompt:
The iteration option improves the Response calculation during periods of varying Flow
Rate (i.e. particularly Wellbore Storage, or immediately following a Step-Rate Change).
The computations will take slightly longer.
437
Once users initiate the calculations, a status box/counter is generated to provide progress
information:
When the computations have terminated, select the OK button to proceed to the next
stage. Users can abort the calculations at any time by selecting the Stop button and they
will be terminated at the end of the current time-step. The Simulated data will be given
zero values for any steps that were not computed.
Material Balance Correction:

This option can be found in the Pressure Transformation dialog in the Analysis menu. It
can be checked to enable the Material Balance Correction for Gas, Condensate or Oil
wells. It will only have an effect for the Closed System and Hexagonal Boundary models,
where it will correct Fluid Properties for declining Reservoir Pressure. This provides
improved simulation of extended production periods by re-evaluating Fluid Properties
particularly the compressibility - as the Reservoir Pressure declines. If this option is not
used (i.e. unchecked), the initial Fluid Properties will be used (i.e. constant
Compressibility).
For infinite and semi-infinite systems, switching the correction on will have no effect,
because there will be no depletion.
The material balance correction will not be applied when the 2-cell Compartmentalised
boundary model has been selected.
438
PanSystem
Advanced Simulation Observation Points Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Observation Points button in the Advanced
Simulation dialog. Use this option to enter Observation Point data for the Advanced
Simulation option.
An Observation Point is a remote point defined in the Reservoir at co-ordinates (x, y), at
which Pressure will be calculated. Up to 5 points can be specified. Where there are
several Layers, a Pressure is calculated at each point in each Layer. In order for Pseudo-
Radial Flow to occur the Observation Points must be far enough away from the active
Well/s.
It is physically equivalent to a newly-drilled Well lined with mud-cake, or an unperforated
cased Well. The Pressures can be compared with formation tester measurements.
An Observation Point differs from a "Well" in the following ways:
A Well can be assigned Surface Flow Rates, a Storage Coefficient and Skin Factor;
an Observation Point is passive.
Even with no Surface Production, a Well allows cross-flow between Layers via the
wellbore when Pressure Differences occur. Cross-flow cannot occur at an
Observation Point.
Users may see differences between the Pressures computed at a Shut-In Well, and at an
Observation Point with the same co-ordinates.
Example Application:
Computed Observation Point Pressure Data will be named automatically according to the
Point Number and Layer in a data file group called Observation (e.g. Obs 1 Layer 2).
The illustration above shows the Data File/Column List area from the Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog after an Advanced Simulation run to Match the Gauge Data from a test
being modeled as a Two-Layer Reservoir:
Pressure #1, is measured Gauge Data.
Sim P, is simulated Well Pressure.
Sim Q Total, is the simulated Total Sandface Flow Rate.
Sim Q#1 and Sim Q#2, are simulated Sandface Flow Rates for each of the two
Layers.
439
The Observation group consists of the computed Layer Pressures at two remote
Observation Points.
440
PanSystem
Advanced Simulation/PanFlow Rate Simulation

Progress Sub-Dialog - (Calculating Advanced Simulation)
General:
This sub-dialog shows the progress of the Advanced Simulation or PanFlow Rate
Simulation calculation process. There are only two function buttons:
OK: Select this button to return to the current plot.
Stop: Select this button to terminate the Simulation; the Response generated to
the termination point will be retained.
441
PanFlow Rate Simulation Dialog
General:
PanFlow determines the Sandface Flow Rate from the Wellbore Pressure for a specified
Reservoir and Boundary Model. The Wellbore Pressure is therefore an input, while
Sandface Flow Rate is the output.
This Simulation of Flow Rate from Flowing Pressure can be used to:
Generate missing Production Rates where Pressure Data are available.
Corroborate or enhance Flow Rate Data provided for the Rate History of a Build-Up.
This will allow an improved re-analysis of the Build-Up data, and a consistent
Analysis of the Flowing Periods (Reference 68).
Estimate Flow Rate from/into Layers as part of the Analysis of a Multi-Layered Test
(MLT), using Pressure Gauge and Spinner Flow Meter (Reference 67).
PanFlow is effectively the inverse of Advanced Simulation, which derives the Wellbore
Pressure from the Surface Production Rate. PanFlow has the same Multi-Layer, mixed
Reservoir Model and Boundary Model capabilities as Advanced Simulation, but for a
Single-Well only.
Note that PanFlow computes the Sandface Flow Rates (i.e. converted to standard
conditions), which will differ from Surface Rates during the Storage-Dominated
period.
The full capabilities of PanFlow Rate Simulation are covered in greater detail within
Advanced Simulation Overview.
Well area:
Input Datafile/Column Name: The Pressure Response in each Well is
computed according to user-defined Surface Rates. The Surface Rate
Column Names are displayed here for each Well in the Reservoir. Normally,
there will be no choice, but in some cases, the nominal Surface Rates (i.e.
Test Rate) and a measured Downhole (i.e. Spinner) Rate may be available
for a particular well test. Select the appropriate Column Name for each Well
from the drop-down list.
Output Datafile Name: Enter the Output Data file name in this field. This is
picked up automatically when the Rate Column is selected. The Simulated
Data will be written to this file.
Output Column Names (Names button): Select this option to generate the
Simulated Column Names sub-dialog. PanFlow will generate the Wellbore
Pressure with a default name Sim P. It will also generate the Sandface Rate
from each Layer (i.e. in or out) and the Total Rate (i.e. the sum of the
Sandface Rates from all Layers). The default Names will be Sim Q Total,
Sim Q#1, Sim Q#2, etc. If users wish to change these, select the button
and enter new Names.
442
PanSystem
The Sim Q Total Rate will be identical to the Surface Rate, except during
the Storage-Dominated period. For a Single-Layer Model, Sim Q Total will be
identical to Sim Q#1.
Layer area:
Solution Model: Users can ignore this area unless they wish to supply an
alternative Response function to one or more Layers. Select the required
Solution Model (*.TCX) file/s from the drop-down list.
Speed Option area:
This selection determines the speed and precision of the computation. Speed is
traded-off against the detail with which Rate Variations are treated (economy of
superposition). Selecting "1" is slowest but most accurate, "4" is fastest but may
introduce errors, particularly during the Storage-Dominated period. Higher speeds
are recommended for trial runs and may prove quite adequate. Gas Wells with
Storage and Non-Darcy Skin often need the slowest speed, "1" to obtain good
Results.
m(p) and B Layer: Select the Layer m(p) table to use from the drop-down
list. Ignore this if there is only one Layer or if the Fluid Type is Water or Oil
(i.e. Single-Phase or Multi-Phase (Perrine) Method). For Gas and
Condensate Fluid Types or Oil (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure), if there are
several Layers with different Fluid Properties, users must select which set of
Pseudo-Pressure tables and other Fluid Properties to use in the Simulation
(i.e. no mixing of Pseudo-Properties is possible).
Gauge Details button: This is not enabled for PanFlow Rate Simulation.
Start Pressures button: This button generates the Start Pressures sub-dialog. The
sub-dialog allows users to alter Start Pressures without leaving Simulation Mode.
These Pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common datum (i.e. there is
no hydrostatic difference between Layers). The initial condition of the system (i.e.
at time zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-steps. The Layer
Pressure of each Layer (i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in Dataprep) is therefore
important.
Since PanFlow is driven by the Wellbore Pressure Column, there is no option to

specify Initial Wellbore Pressure.
Observation Points button: This is not enabled for PanFlow Rate Simulation.
Implementation:
When this dialog is initialized, select OK to start the Simulation. The Simulation Progress
sub-dialog will be displayed. Let the Simulation run to the end, then select OK in the
sub-dialog. To terminate the Simulation before the end, select Stop in the sub-dialog;
the Response generated to that point will be retained and the remaining time-steps will
be assigned zero rates.
Once the Simulation has finished, users will be returned to the plot screen. Since Flow
Rates cannot be plotted in the Analysis section, to view the calculated Flow Rate/s, select
the Gauge Data option from the Dataprep menu, to generate the Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog and select/plot them (refer also to Data Edit Plot Overview).
443

Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Names button from the Well area in either
the Advanced Simulation or PanFlow Rate Simulation dialogs. Use this option to check
and/or edit the Names applied to the Simulated Pressure and/or Flow Rate data.
For Advanced Simulation:
This will generate:
The Wellbore Pressure with a default name Sim P.
The Total Rate (i.e. the sum of the Sandface Flow Rates from all Layers), with a
default Name of Sim Q Total.
The Sandface Flow Rate from each Layer (i.e. in or out), with default Names of Sim
Q#1, Sim Q#2, etc.
If users wish to change these Names, highlight the relevant field/s and enter new
Name/s.
Sim Q Total will be identical to the Surface Rate except during the Storage-
Dominated period. For a Single-Layer Model, Sim Q Total will be identical to Sim
Q#1.
For PanFlow Rate Simulation:
This will generate:
The Total Rate (i.e. the sum of the Sandface Flow Rates from all Layers), with a
default Name of PanFlow Q Total.
The Sandface Flow Rate from each Layers (i.e. in or out), with default Names of
PanFlow Q#1, PanFlow Q#2, etc.
If users wish to change these Names, highlight the relevant field/s and enter new
Name/s.
PanFlow Q Total will be identical to the Surface Rate except during the Storage-
Dominated period. For a Single-Layer Model, PanFlow Q Total will be identical to
PanFlow Q#1.
In either case (i.e. Advanced Simulation or PanFlow Rate Simulation), if Names are
entered that are already in use, a warning will be issued when the computation is
about to be started.
444
PanSystem

Start Pressures/Rates Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Start Pressures button from either the
Advanced Simulation or PanFlow Rate Simulation dialogs. Use this option to alter Start
Pressures without leaving Simulation Mode.
For Advanced Simulation:
These Pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common datum (i.e. there is no
hydrostatic difference between Layers). The initial condition of the system (i.e. at time
zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-steps. The Layer Pressure of each
Layer (i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in Dataprep) and the Initial Wellbore Pressure in
each Well (i.e. set-up via Rate Changes in Dataprep) are therefore important.
Users are allowed to have an independent Start Pressure for each Well and Layer and
alterations may be made to the existing values if required.
For PanFlow Rate Simulation:
These Pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common datum (i.e. there is no
hydrostatic difference between Layers). The initial condition of the system (i.e. at time
zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-steps. The Layer Pressure of each
layer (i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in Dataprep) is therefore important.
Since PanFlow is driven by the Wellbore Pressure Column, there is no option to

specify Initial Wellbore Pressure.
Users are allowed to have an independent Start Pressure for each Layer and alterations
may be made to the existing values if required. The Initial Wellbore and Layer Pressure/s
and Rate/s will be updated elsewhere in the program with any changes made here.
In either case (i.e. Advanced Simulation or PanFlow Rate Simulation), note that if a
Wellbore Pressure is set lower than a Layer Pressure, the computations will kick-
off under-balanced, and there will be an initial Wellbore Fill-Up period.
445
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh)
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Menu Options
General:
The Numerical Simulation option from the PanSystem Simulate menu gives access to a
further three sub-menu options that utilize PanMesh. This is a companion program to
PanSystem which generates a Finite-Element Mesh to describe the Well and Reservoir,
then calculates the Pressure Response. The Simulation can be "played" in sequence to
display the Pressure Transient as a series of color "maps" within the Reservoir. The
Pressure Transient is then transferred to PanSystem to be compared with measured
Pressure data or saved as a Type Curve.
The PanMesh Graphical Interface and program functionality are fully described in
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Graphical Interface.
Sub-Menu Options:
The three sub-menu options and their functionality are described below:
PanMesh: New Run: This option generates the Numerical Simulation Control dialog
where users enter the required Simulation Time for a new run. On OK from this
dialog, PanMesh is invoked to run a new Simulation based on the Geological Model
configured in PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical). PanMesh generates a
dimensionless Pressure Response for a Constant-Rate Drawdown. This is written
to a file with extension (*.TCX) and passed back to PanSystem, where it is
convolved with Wellbore Storage and the actual Test Rate Schedule to produce the
Real-Time and Pressure Response for a Welltest.
PanMesh Replay: This option first generates a File Open dialog, where users select
and import an existing PanMesh Simulation in (*.HST) History File format. On
selecting Open from this dialog, PanMesh is invoked to import results from the
selected (i.e. existing) Simulation (provided it has been saved and stored in
(*.HST) History File format). Users can review the dimensionless Pressure
Response, replay the Pressure Visualisation and generate the Pressure Response
versus Time at any (x, y, z) co-ordinate point in the Reservoir for Interference
Testing.
From Existing TCX File: This option first generates the Advanced Simulation Control
dialog, where users can pick-up any existing dimensionless, Constant-Rate
Drawdown response generated by PanMesh. This is stored in the form of a file with
extension (*.TCX) and can be convolved with Wellbore Storage and a user-defined
Flow Rate Schedule to produce the Real-Time and Pressure Response for a Welltest.
This process is performed automatically during the final stages of PanMesh: New
Run, but there may be occasions where it is necessary to re-generate the Welltest
Response for a model without re-running the Numerical Simulation in PanMesh
(e.g. Pressure Responses for different Rate Schedules and Wellbore Storage
446
PanSystem
values, can be produced using the same base (*.TCX) response file as a starting
point).
447
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Graphical Interface
General:
The PanMesh Graphical Interface is used to perform and display the Numerical
Simulation, using data initialized in PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical). It can be
accessed by selecting one of the three sub-menu options from the Simulate menu that
are situated under the Numerical Simulation option:
PanMesh: New Run
PanMesh Replay
From Existing TCX File
Screen Description and Operational Instructions:
The PanMesh Graphical Interface has seven salient features, described in the following
section. For information on a specific part of the PanMesh Graphical Interface, short-cut
links to these sections are provided below:
3-D Reservoir Visualization Window (main graphical window within interface)
View Control Panels (right-hand side of interface)
PanMesh Toolbar Buttons (along top of interface)
PanMesh Main Menu Bar (along top of interface)
Mesh Edit Pop-Up Menu (right mouse-click in 3-D Reservoir Visualization Window)
Graphing Window (displayed during/after running a Numerical Simulation)
Status Bar (along bottom of interface)
3-D Reservoir Visualization Window:
This is the main 3-D Visualization Window for the Reservoir and the image is initially in
Top View with a Solid Model when PanMesh is entered. Free Axis Rotation of the
Reservoir image can be accomplished by left-clicking on the image, holding the mouse
button down (the cursor will change to a globe symbol), then moving the mouse in the
direction of required rotation. An Axis Triad, showing the current orientation of the
Reservoir Mesh X-, Y- and Z-axes is also displayed at the bottom right corner of the
Visualization Window.
448
PanSystem
3-D View with Free Axis Rotation mode indicated by globe cursor symbol
and Axis Triad at bottom right
View Control Panels:
These elements of the interface are used to adjust the positioning,
scale and rotation of the 3-D Reservoir Image. They are situated down
the right- hand side of the dialog in four groups and are described from
top to bottom:
View Controls: These buttons are used to switch static view points for the Reservoir Image betw
View Centering
the(C+) Control:
following Thistobutton
actions occur:is used to center a selected point of the Reservoir
Center the Reservoir Image around the
selected point by Panning the image.
Set the selected point as the new focal point
for the Visualization Window, relative to which the Zoom speed
is controlled and about which the view can be rotated.
Master Zoom/Pan/Rotate Controls: These
buttons control the movement function of the Reservoir Image
and operate in conjunction with the left mouse button (also the
middle mouse button and/or wheel mouse where available):
Zoom: Click and drag the left mouse button
upwards over the Visualization Window to Zoom-In and
downwards to Zoom-Out to/from the current focal point. If
users have a wheel mouse, the wheel rotation can also be used
to invoke a similar Zoom response in all modes (i.e. even if
449
the Pan or Rotate buttons are currently selected). The cursor changes
from an arrow symbol into a magnifying glass symbol whilst Zooming.
Pan: Click and drag the left mouse button across the Visualization Window
to pan the Reservoir image in any direction. If users have a three button
mouse (or wheel mouse), the middle button can also be used to invoke a
similar Pan response in all modes (i.e. even if Zoom or Rotate are
currently selected). The cursor changes from an arrow symbol into a
crossed arrow symbol whilst Panning.
Rotate: Click and drag the left mouse button around within the
Visualization Window for Free Axis Rotation of the Reservoir Image in any
direction. The cursor changes from an arrow symbol into a globe symbol
during Rotation.
In all cases, the Reset button will return the Reservoir Image to the position and
orientation it occupied before any of these three button settings were applied.
Special Views: These buttons can be used to select specific views for the
Reservoir Image:
View Completions Only: Select this button to display the Completion

Zone/s in elevation. This may involve a combination of Zoom-In, Pan and
Rotation operations, depending on the current status of the Visualization
Window. Use the Reset button and/or the View buttons to restore the
previous view. Also refer to the Flow % button (described below).
Zoom to Flow Plane: This button is only enabled after a Numerical

Simulation has been run. When activated, it Zooms the current view into
the Reservoir Image to view the Flow Plane, regardless of where it is
positioned. For information on other Flow Plane Controls, refer to the Data
View Controls dialog.
Plan View of Isosurface: This button is only enabled after a

Numerical Simulation has been run and the Isosurface option has either
been selected on the PanMesh Toolbar or from the Data View Menu on the
Main Menu Bar. When activated, it Zooms the current view into the
Reservoir Image to view the Isosurface in Plan View.
Plan of Flow in Reservoir: This button positions the Flow Plane such
that it is horizontal and centred at the mid-point of the completions and
covering the entire extent of the reservoir in plan. This gives the user a
good idea of the overall flow pattern in the reservoir.
View Saver: The central Camera button is used to take a "snapshot" of the
current View displayed in the Visualization Window; everything required to
recreate the captured View is Saved (e.g. Cut Plane and Flow Plane settings - both
described below) and stored in the History File (described below), allowing any
captured Views to be recalled. In addition, even in Review Mode (i.e. reviewing a
History File - described below), new Views can be Saved and Added to the
existing History File.
Saved Views can be assigned appropriate names via the Edit View Title sub-dialog
and can either be recalled to the View Window (or deleted) from the Saved Views
dialog; these can be accessed via the View Menu (i.e. View Management/Edit Title
and View Management/View List sub-menu options respectively). The Saved
450
PanSystem
Views dialog can also be generated with the Manage Views button (described
below). The four buttons surrounding the Camera button are initially grayed-out
(i.e. no Views have been saved), but when Saved Views are present, these
buttons contain arrow icons and can also be used to recall Saved Views to the
View Window:
Previous View (upper left): Provided the current View is one of those
from the Saved View list, this button is used to recall the previous View in
the list - once the first View from the list is displayed, this button is
grayed-out.
Next View (upper right): Provided the current View is one of those
from the Saved View list, this is used to recall the next View from the
Saved View list - once the last View from the list is displayed, this button
is grayed-out.
First View (lower left): Provided the current View is one of those from
the Saved View list, this is used to recall the first View from the Saved
View list - once the first View from the list is displayed, this button is
grayed-out.
Last View (lower right): Provided the current View is one of those
from the Saved View list, this is used to recall the last View from the
Saved View list - once the last View from the list is displayed, this button
is grayed-out.
Manage Views: Select this button to generate the Saved Views dialog; this
can be used to select (Apply) previously Saved Views for display in the
Visualization Window, Delete any selected or all Saved Views that are no
longer required and/or to Edit the selected View Title text.
Flow %: This button is only enabled after a Numerical Simulation has been
performed. When activated, it can be used to view/hide the Flow into any of the
Completion Zones, by switching the Flow Field on/off. A similar functionality is also
available via the Show Flow Field option on the PanMesh Toolbar or from the Data
View Control Menu on the Main Menu Bar. In addition, this button also generates a
View Flow into Completions dialog, where users can select different parts of the
Completion Zone, and/or individual Completion Zones to view.
The purpose of this dialog box is twofold:

1. To give the user information in regard the relative flows into completions,
2. To allow the user to easily view the flow patterns into the completions.
In the main window of this dialog box the completions are listed in order from the
top down. The basic information given is the length of the completion, along with
the position of the completion from the entry point of the well bore (or the heel in
the horizontal case). Then the overall area of the completion as a % of the full
open area and the % of the overall flow that is flowing into that completion. NB:
Sometimes the two values in each column may not sum to exactly 100%. This
discrepancy is due to rounding and can be ignored.
Error %
The value that appears under the Error % reflects the difference between the
flow applied to the model and the total flow through the completions as
determined from the pressure gradients. This information is displayed to help the
user decide if the mesh resolution needs to be increased (and another analysis
451
performed see notes on the Flow Analysis option) in the case where the user is
looking closely at flow patterns around the completions. In the case shown the
default mesh pattern results in pretty accurate flows, but this is not always the
case. NB: It is noteworthy that a relatively high Error % (in flow) e.g. 30% -
does not necessarily reflect a high % error in the pressure calculations
(particularly at the well face, as per the type curve).
Layer Volumes: This is a simple dialog box that displays the following information
relating to each layer:
1. The porous volume of that layer (displayed in ft3 or m3 depending on the units
chosen),
2. The % of the overall porous volume that it represents,
3. The Total Bulk Volume of the reservoir,
4. The average porosity.
It is noteworthy that these values can be awkward to calculate by other means,
but that the very nature of the finite element modeling approach makes it
considerably easier.
Data View Controls: Select this button to generate the Data View Controls dialog;
this is used to select settings and set controls for the following Data Views:
Cut Plane: This tool is available before and after a Numerical Simulation
has been performed. When the Cut Plane tool is selected on the PanMesh
Toolbar an additional Plane Orientation button is made available below the
Data View Controls button.
If this button is selected, a blue colored positioning tool is introduced

into the Visualization Window. This tool can then be used in
conjunction with the Pan and Rotate controls (described above), to position
the Cut Plane using the left mouse button (the captured tool axis will
change color to red when clicked and dragged to a new position):
A more precise positioning facility is available in the Data View Controls
452
PanSystem
dialog (Cut Plane tab); this uses the keyboard arrow keys for Rotation and
Translation.
Flow Plane: This tool is only available after a Numerical Simulation has
been performed. When the Flow Plane tool is selected an additional Plane
Orientation button is made available below the Data View Controls button.
If this button is selected, a green colored positioning tool is introduced

into the Visualization Window. This tool can then be used in
conjunction with the Pan and Rotate controls (described above), to
position the Flow Plane using the left mouse button (the captured tool axis
will change color to red when clicked and dragged to a new position):
The Flow Plane can also be resized manually by left-clicking and dragging
one of the spheres displayed at each corner of the Flow Plane (indicated by
the red colored sphere at bottom right corner in the example illustrated
below):
453
A more precise positioning/resizing facility is available in the Data View

Controls tabbed dialog (Flow Plane tab); this uses the keyboard arrow keys
for Rotation, Translation, Panning and Resizing in smaller increments.
Toolbar Button Options:
The PanMesh Toolbar contains the most commonly used functions of PanMesh and it
appears in three different modes in relation to functions that can be performed before,
during and after Numerical Simulation. Most of these button functions are also available
as menu options on the Main Menu Bar and the Mesh Edit Pop-Up Menu (both described
below). The three different toolbar modes are illustrated below and the button functions
are described thereafter:
Before Numerical Simulation
During Numerical Simulation
After Numerical Simulation (Color Contour and Point Selection)
Button Functionality
Reset Clipping Range Automatically: This option is selected by default.
This means that the Reservoir will not disappear when users Zoom-
Out. However, details in a close up view may disappear when
Zooming-In (in this case, users can select the Reset Near Plane option
to correct this. Note that this action will also de-select the Reset
Clipping Range Automatically option).
Select this text to view/hide additional information on Clipping Planes.
Items that are rendered/drawn within the Perspective View Window,
such as the Reservoir Image and associated features (e.g. Wellbore,
Flow Planes, Stream Tubes, etc.), will only be displayed if they lie
within the Near and Far Clipping Planes (which are a set distance from
the "viewer"). The default distance to the Near Clipping Plane is
automatically set at a minimum 10% of the distance to the Far
Clipping Plane. This means that for a Reservoir Image 1000 meters
wide, the "viewer" cannot get closer than 100 meters to the features
lying within the Reservoir Image; if users attempt to Zoom-In closer,
all features lying between the Near Clipping Plane and the "viewer" will
be Clipped-Out of the image (i.e. ignored). This situation applies
when the Reset Clipping Range Automatically option is selected (i.e.
default setting).
Reset Near Plane: If users wish to examine features lying within the
Reservoir Image in extreme close-up, they must select the Reset Near
Plane option (the Reset Clipping Range Automatically option is de-
selected automatically as described above); this Resets the Near
Clipping Plane distance to a fixed distance from the "viewer" (i.e. the
Far Clipping Plane setting remains on automatic). The Near Clipping
454
PanSystem
Plane Distance is a function of the Wellbore Radius (i.e. equal by

default).
The Reset Near Plane feature is best used for Zooming-In to

examine internal features of the Reservoir Image. If users try to
Zoom-Out further than one of the default image positions (i.e.
Top View, Front View or Side View), the Reservoir Image will
disappear from the Perspective View Window.
Show/Hide Outline: Select this option to display the Reservoir Mesh
Outline (i.e. the peripheral Wire Frame lines) for the Reservoir Image.
Wire Frame View: Select this option to display the Reservoir Mesh as
Wire Frame components. The Solid Model View (described below) can
also be de-selected to improve the Mesh clarity. Additional options are
available in the Main Menu Bar (described below), to change the
background color.
Solid Model View: Select this option to display the Reservoir Image
and any component Layers as solid colors (default viewing option).
Any Regions with different Material Properties will be assigned
different colors.
This option can be used separately or in conjunction with the Wire
Frame View option (described above). However, the Wire Frame View
may be difficult to distinguish against the Solid Model View at certain
viewing angles or with low-contrast color schemes.
Toggle Cut Plane On/Off: Select this option to display the last
position and orientation of the Cut Plane. Then adjust the Orientation,
Rotation or Translation (i.e. in incremental steps) and the Relative
Position of a Cut Plane within the Reservoir Image.
To return to the default Vertical Cut orientation, click the top

button on the Cut Plane Control View tab.
Users can select and set Orientations using the controls within the Data
View Controls dialog (Cut Plane tab), activated via the Data View
Controls button.
Go: This option is used to start the Numerical Simulation and launch
the Graphing Window (described below). Once the Numerical
Simulation is started, additional buttons appear on the PanMesh
Toolbar (as illustrated above), but only the Color Contour button
(described below), can be used during the Numerical Simulation. After
Numerical Simulation is completed, the Go tool is disabled.
Color Contour: This option is only available during and after
Numerical Simulation and is used to visualize the progression of the
Pressure Disturbance out from the Well in the Visualization Window. A
Color Contour display is superimposed on the Reservoir Image.
This button also enables the Color Scale Key and upper and lower Scale
Marker Bars (i.e. blue and red horizontal lines) on the Graphing
Window (described below), which define the span of the Color
Contouring for the Dimensionless Pressure Response (Pd).
455
Isosurface: This option is only available after Numerical Simulation

and allows users to display surfaces of uniform Pressure within the
Reservoir Image as a 3-D visualization. The Pressure value
corresponds to the minimum Pressure (i.e. red line) on the Graphing
Window. The Time and Pressure value of the Isosurface (i.e. as
displayed in the Perspective View Window), is controlled by the
Graphing Window in a similar manner to the Color Contour facility
(described above).
This Data View Control is a qualitative aid to the user to get a rough
idea of the radius of investigation of the pressure transient. By
default it corresponds to a surface of uniform dimensionless pressure
(Pd) of 0.1. This value can be changed by the user using the Graph
window. It corresponds to the lower pressure represented in the colour
legend (red).
Flow Arrows: This option is only available after Numerical
Simulation and activates the Flow Plane Controls on the View Control
Panels (described above); these are used to display, then adjust the
Orientation, Rotation or Translation (i.e. in incremental steps), Relative
Position and Size of a Flow Plane within the Reservoir Image. Users
can also select and set other Orientations using the controls within the
Data View Controls dialog (Flow Plane tab), activated via the Data View
Controls button.
Select a Point: This option is only available after Numerical
Simulation. The Numerical Simulation has created a Pressure v Time
record for every Mesh Node in the model. The response at the Well is
displayed in the main Graphing Window (i.e. at co-ordinates as per
user co-ordinates). However, with this option, users can also define
the Co-ordinates of another selected Point in the Reservoir (although
not necessarily at a Mesh Node), and generate a (Pd) versus (td)
response for it. This can subsequently be converted into a real
Pressure versus Time record, for an Interference Test in PanSystem.
The point to be selected can be chosen in one of two ways:

1. With the Graphing Window in focus, click on the Pressure at a
Point (P+) button. A dialog box appears in which the coordinates
of the desired point can be entered accurately.
2. If the exact coordinates of the point to be selected are not
known, then put the Visualization Window in focus and chose the
Pressure at a Point (P+) option from the toolbar. This time the
point can be selected by simply clicking in the Visualization
Window in the approximate area of interest; this will generate a
Selected Point Graphing Window (the current X, Y, Z co-ordinates
of the Selected Point will be displayed in the Window Title Bar). If
you wish to then enter more accurate coordinates for this
selected point, either make the Graphing Window in focus and
use method 1, or double-click on the Selected Point (i.e. green-
colored sphere) in the Visualization Window to generate the Enter
the Co-ordinates dialog directly. Specific X, Y, Z co-ordinates (i.e.
derived from the Reservoir Model defined earlier in Dataprep
(Numerical) Reservoir Geometry), must be input in the Enter the
456
PanSystem
Co-ordinates dialog for a Selected Point lying within the

Reservoir. Pay particular attention to the Z-axis co-ordinate to
ensure the Selected Point is within the Mesh and not outside or
on the surface; a warning may be issued otherwise.
By holding CTRL and clicking the P+ button (when the

Visualization Window is in focus), the user can continually click
different points for which the second graph is generated. This
feature is turned off by re-clicking P+ button
A point within the reservoir (not on one of the exterior solid surfaces)
can be selected by employing this option in along the surface of a
r;cut plane.
Users may have forgotten the co-ordinate system they defined in

PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical). It is not possible to
use the Dataprep menu options in PanSystem to review these co-
ordinates unless PanMesh is shut-down. To work around this,
start a second PanSystem session, open the same (*.PAN) file
using the Well and Reservoir (Numerical) option and view it
there. Remember to shut-down this second session of
PanSystem before continuing.
After entering the required X, Y, Z co-ordinates and selecting OK, a
new Graphing Window will appear showing the dimensionless,
Constant-Rate Drawdown Pressure Response and derivative at the
specified point. The Point for which this second (Pd) versus (td)
graph has been created is also represented on the Perspective View
Window as a green-colored sphere with a radius equal to the Wellbore
Radius (Rw).
If users click on Close Window (i.e. "X" symbol) in the top right
corner of the new graph, a "Save As (*TCX) File?" prompt is
generated for the point data. If users want to convert this into a
real pressure versus time response in PanSystem, they should
answer Yes at the prompt, to save the dimensionless response to
a (*.TCX) file. Enter a name for the file in the File Save As dialog
that appears next. This data will be saved to the current Type-
Curve folder (typcurv) by default. Users will then be returned to
the original Graphing Window containing the response at the
Well.
Stream Tube: This option is only available after Numerical

Simulation and when a point has been selected as described above. If
the Selected Point is in a suitable location and the Stream Tube option
is selected, the Stream Tube will be displayed on the Visualization
Window. The Stream Tube can be toggled on and off using this toolbar
option.
Show Color Bar: This option is only enabled (and made available)
during and after Numerical Simulation by selecting the Color Contour
option (described above). It is used to add a Color Contour display
(i.e. Dimensionless Pressure Response (Pd) Legend) to the Reservoir
457
Image displayed in the Perspective View. This can be used to enhance

the interpretation of any Perspective Views that are Printed or Saved to
file.
The values indicated in the Legend are the minimum (i.e. red
line) and maximum (i.e. blue line) Dimensionless Pressure
Values from the Graphing Window Color Scale; thus gray, which
represents Pressures below the lower Pressure Display Value
and white, which represents Pressures above the upper
Pressure Display Value, are not included in the Color Bar for the
Perspective View.
The minimum Dimensionless Pressure Value (i.e. red line) can

be controlled in the Graphing Window by either using the
Up/Down arrow keys or by left-clicking and dragging on the line.
Similarly, the maximum Dimensionless Pressure Value (i.e.
blue line) can be controlled by either using the Shift + Up/Down
arrow keys or by left-clicking and dragging on the line. This also
adjusts the scaling in the Perspective View.
Show Title: This option is used to display/hide the Title of the
Perspective View (i.e. as displayed in the Visualization Window Title
Bar). The Title is added below the Reservoir Image and can be Printed
with the View or Copied for Pasting into another application (e.g.
Word).
The Title text can also be edited via the Enter the New View Title
sub-dialog (i.e. generated by the View/View Management/Edit
Title sub-menu option).
Axes/Triad Control: This option can be used to enhance control and
interpretation of the Visualization Window. This control is displayed by
default in the bottom right corner of the Visualization Window (it can be
switched-off by de-selecting this option on the PanMesh Toolbar). This
feature allows users to interpret the orientation of the view that is
currently being displayed. In addition, users can control the view
orientation by clicking on the Axes of the Triad (e.g. left-clicking on the
X-axis will cause the Perspective View to reorient itself parallel to that
axis without Zooming-Out. Holding CTRL and left-clicking on an axis
will cause the reorientation followed by a Zoom-Out, until the extents
of the Reservoir Image are visible).
Print: This option allows users to Print the contents of the currently
selected window (e.g. current Reservoir Image from the Perspective
View Window, graph of Dimensionless Pressure (Pd) versus
Dimensionless Time (td) from the Graphing Window after Numerical
Simulation, etc.). The button generates a standard Windows File Print
dialog.
The same functionality is available from the keyboard with the

Ctrl + P keys.
458
PanSystem
The Print facility is available for both the Sandface Plot of (Pd) vs
(Td) and the Selected Co-ordinates Plot of (Pd) vs (Td) generated
with the Select a Point (P+) option. Ensure the required
window is selected before Printing.
Copy View: This option allows users to Copy the current Reservoir
Image from the Perspective View Window for Pasting into another
application (e.g. Word).
The same functionality is available from the keyboard with the

Ctrl + C keys.
About: This option is available at all times and provides users with
PanMesh version and copyright information.
For help on data input to the Numerical Simulation facility, refer to the
Help topic for Well and Reservoir (Numerical).
For help on Numerical Simulation Options, refer to the Help topic for
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Menu Options.
Main Menu Bar:
This provides optional menu access to PanMesh user-defined functions which are
arranged into three menu items - View, Data View Controls and Help. The most
commonly used menu functions are also available as Toolbar Button Options or can be
activated from the View Control Panels (described earlier). Some additional options are
also available:
View: This menu item provides a number of options and sub-menu options
relating to the overall view in the 3-D Reservoir Visualization Window:
Perspective: Provides an alternative method of activating the Top, Front and
Side View controls, and Reset options for Zoom, Pan and Rotate, previously
described in View Control Panels.
Reservoir: Provides an alternative method of activating three PanMesh
Toolbar options and one of the View Control Panel options (i.e. Outline, Wire
Frame, Solid Model and View Completions - all relating to the Perspective
View).
View Management: Provides the Save View , First View, Previous View,
Next View and Last View options previously described in the View Saver
section of View Control Panels for capturing Reservoir Images from and/or
recalling saved Reservoir Images to the Perspective View Window. The Edit
Title option generates an Enter the New View Title sub-dialog, where users
can enter a new Description or Title for the current Perspective View
Window. Any Saved Views can either be recalled to the Perspective View
Window and edited or deleted from the Saved Views dialog, which is
generated by selecting the View List sub-menu option.
The Output to File option generates a standard Windows Save As dialog
where users can Save any Views that have been set-up in a Views (*.vws)
file format. These Views (*.vws) files can subsequently be Read In to any
other PanMesh session (i.e. with same Camera Angles, etc. used). This is a
useful feature for comparing a set of Analyses from a Batch Run (e.g. users
can closely examine the first Analysis in the series, then set-up all the Views
459
and Controls required. If this set of Views is then Saved As (*.vws), users
can subsequently Read In these saved settings to any other Data View
Control session and examine the other Analyses in the series using the same
set-up).
Similarly, the Read In Views from File option generates a standard Windows
File Open dialog where users can Read In any Views that have been set-up
and Saved As a Views (*.vws) file format using the Output Views to File
option (described above).
Toggle Background Colour: Allows users to switch the background colour
from Black to Light Blue and vice-versa. This is useful when operating in
Wire Frame View, which is easier to discern against a light blue background.
Show Title: This option is used to display/hide the Title of the Perspective
View (i.e. as displayed in the Perspective View Window Title Bar). The Title
is added below the Reservoir Image and can be Printed with the View or
Copied for Pasting into another application (e.g. Word document, etc.).
The Title text can be edited via the Enter the New View Title sub-
dialog (i.e. generated from the View/View Management/Edit Title
sub-menu option).
Show Color Bar: This option is only enabled (and made available) during
and after Numerical Simulation by selecting the Color Contour option
(described above in PanMesh Toolbar Options). It is used to add a Color
Contour display (i.e. Dimensionless Pressure Response (Pd) Legend) to the
Reservoir Image displayed in the Perspective View. This can be used to
enhance the interpretation of any Perspective Views that are Printed or
Saved to file (refer to the Show Color Bar option in PanMesh Toolbar Options
for more details).
Show Axes: Provides an alternative method of activating/de-activating the
Axes Triad in the Perspective View (refer to the Axes/Triad Control option in
PanMesh Toolbar Options for more details).
Set Transparency: Generates a Slider Control that allows users to set the
degree of Transparency or Opacity for the Reservoir Image; the Slider
Control can also be generated from the right mouse-click Visualization
Window Pop-Up Menu (described below). Move the Slider to the right
(Opacity), to increase the color density of the Reservoir Image, or move to
the left (Transparency), to decrease the color density of the Reservoir
Image.
The appearance of the Wire Frame is not affected by this tool.

Clipping Planes: Provides an alternative method of activating/de-activating
the Reset Clipping Range Automatically and Reset Near Plane toolbar
options. Items that are rendered/drawn within the Perspective View
Window, such as the Reservoir Image and associated features (e.g.
Wellbore, Flow Planes, Stream Tubes, etc.), will only be displayed if they lie
within the Near and Far Clipping Planes (which are a set distance from the
"viewer"). The default distance to the Near Clipping Plane is automatically
set at a minimum 10% of the distance to the Far Clipping Plane. This
means that for a Reservoir Image 1000 meters wide, the "viewer" cannot
get closer than 100 meters to the features lying within the Reservoir Image;
if users attempt to Zoom-In closer, all features lying between the Near
460
PanSystem
Clipping Plane and the "viewer" will be Clipped-Out of the image (i.e.
ignored). This situation applies when the sub-menu option Reset Clipping
Range Automatically is checked (i.e. default setting).
If users wish to examine features lying within the Reservoir Image in
extreme close-up, they must uncheck the Reset Clipping Range
Automatically sub-menu option, then check the Reset Near Plane sub-menu
option; this Resets the Near Clipping Plane distance to a fixed distance from
the "viewer" (i.e. the Far Clipping Plane setting remains on automatic). The
Near Clipping Plane Distance is a function of the Wellbore Radius (i.e. equal
by default).
The Reset Near Plane feature is best used for Zooming-In to examine
internal features. If users try to Zoom-Out further than one of the
default image positions (i.e. Top View, Front View or Side View), the
Reservoir Image will disappear from the Perspective View Window.
Print: Provides an alternative method of activating the Print option,
previously described in PanMesh Toolbar Button Options.
Copy: Provides an alternative method of activating the Copy View option,
previously described in PanMesh Toolbar Button Options.
Toolbars checkbox: If this option is checked, the Perspective View Window
and Graphing Window toolbars will be displayed. If this option is
unchecked, both of these toolbars will be hidden.
Data View Controls: Select this option to generate the Data View Controls
tabbed dialog; this is used to select settings and set controls for the Cut
Plane, Flow Plane and the Stream Tube.
Status Bar checkbox: If this option is checked, the Status Bar will be
displayed at the base of the PanMesh Window. If this option is unchecked,
the Status Bar will be hidden.
Data View Controls: This menu item provides access to the Data View Controls
used in the Visualization Window. Most of the following menu options are not
available until during or after the Numerical Simulation (i.e. those marked with an
asterisk*):
Cut Plane: Provides an alternative method of activating the Vertical Cut
View option, previously described in PanMesh Toolbar Button Options. The
Cut Plane can be adjusted via the Data View Controls tabbed dialog; this is
used to select settings and set controls for the Cut Plane, Flow Plane and the
Stream Tube. This dialog can be generated via the Data View Controls
button or the View/ Data View Controls menu option.
Pressure*: This has two sub-menu options:
Show Color Contours*: This provides an alternative method of
activating the Color Contour option, previously described in PanMesh
Toolbar Button Options.
Select a Point*: This provides an alternative method of activating/de-
activating the Select a Point option, previously described in PanMesh
Toolbar Button Options.
Isosurface*: This provides an alternative method of activating/de-activating
the Isosurface option, previously described in PanMesh Toolbar Button
Options.
461
Flow*: These sub-menu options allow Flow Vectors to be superimposed on

the Reservoir Image. Currently the Flow Vectors are only shown for those
elements in the immediate vicinity of the Wellbore.
Show Flow Field*: This provides an optional method of activating the
Flow Arrows option from the PanMesh Toolbar and previously
described in Toolbar Button Options.
Show Flow Direction Only*: This is an additional feature that only
displays the Flow Direction and ignores the Flow Amplitude when
this option is checked.
Show Flows in Reservoir*: This option positions the Flow Plane such
that it is horizontal and centred at the mid-point of the completions
and covering the entire extent of the reservoir in plan. This gives the
user a good idea of the overall flow pattern in the reservoir.
Show Flow %*: This option opens the Flow % dialog box.
Reduce Flow Roundoff Error*: This In addition to the lower order of
accuracy, the flow patterns in the reservoir are not calculated for all
time steps by default. This is because the calculation is a complex,
CPU intensive process and would significantly increase the simulation
time if it was done during the simulation. Instead, by default, it is
done only for the time steps that are being viewed. However, this
approach means that there can be significant round off error in
their calculation. Whereas this is generally not significant in terms of
the flow plane visualization (except at late times) it can result in
erratic stream tube patterns. To eliminate this behavior use Data
View Controls -> Flow -> Reduce Flow Round off Error.
Stream Tube*: Provides an alternative method of activating/de-activating
the Stream Tube option, previously described in PanMesh Toolbar Options.
Help: The About option provides the PanMesh version number and copyright
details. The PanMesh Graphical Interface option generates this specific Help topic.
Visualization Window Pop-Up Menu:
By clicking the right-hand mouse button anywhere in the 3-D Reservoir Visualization
Window, a pop-up menu is generated with the following options:
Edit Mesh: This option gives users access to the Edit Mesh dialog, which can be
used to alter the density of the Mesh used for the Numerical Simulation. This
option is only available before Numerical Simulation has been performed.
Mesh Details: This option generates an information sub-dialog that displays the
number of Nodes and Elements in the current Mesh, in addition to the Reservoir
Volume and the Pore Volume of the Reservoir Image.
Edit View Title: This option generates the Enter the New View Title dialog
(alternatively, select the View/View Management/Edit Title option from the Main
Menu Bar described earlier). This dialog can be used to enter a new Description or
Title for the current Perspective View Window.
To show/hide the Title, either use the Title tool (previously described in
PanMesh Toolbar Options), or select the View/Show Title option from the
Main Menu Bar (also described earlier)
Manage Views: This option generates the Saved Views dialog (alternatively, select
the View/View Management/View List option from the Main Menu Bar (described
462
PanSystem
earlier)). This dialog is used to recall previously Saved Views to the Perspective
View Window, Edit the View Title of a previously Saved Perspective View or delete
Perspective Views that are no longer required.
Toggle Background Color: This provides an alternative method of activating the
View/Toggle Background Color option under the Main Menu Bar (described earlier).
This feature allows users to switch the background colour from Black to White and
vice-versa.
Set Transparency: Generates a Slider Control that allows users to set the degree of
Transparency or Opacity for the Reservoir Image; the Slider Control can also be
generated from the View/Set Transparency option under the Main Menu Bar
(described earlier). Move the Slider to the right (Opacity), to increase the color
density of the Reservoir Image, or move to the left (Transparency), to decrease
the color density of the Reservoir Image.
The appearance of the Wire Frame is not affected by this tool.

Show Axes checkbox: Provides an alternative method of activating/de-activating
the Axes Triad in the Perspective View (refer to the Axes/Triad Control option in
PanMesh Toolbar Options for more details).
Metric Co-ordinates checkbox: If this checkbox is checked, the current X, Y, Z co-
ordinates of the Selected Point will be displayed in the Selected Point Graphing
Window Title Bar in Meters. If this checkbox is unchecked, these X, Y, Z co-
ordinates will be displayed in Feet. The same criteria applies in the Enter the Co-
ordinates dialog, where there is also an option to toggle between the two units
systems.
Data View Controls: Select this option to generate the Data View Controls tabbed
dialog; this is used to select settings and set controls for the Cut Plane, Flow Plane
and the Stream Tube.
Graphing Window (only displayed during Numerical Simulation):
The Go button on the PanMesh Toolbar, starts the Numerical Simulation and generates
the Graphing Window. This window shows a Dimensionless (Pd) versus (td) response
with derivative at the Sandface. This is computed for a Constant-Rate Drawdown
without Wellbore Storage (Cs) or Turbulent, Non-Darcy Skin Factor (D). The response
does include the Darcy Skin Factor (S), if present. Results will subsequently be
convolved with Wellbore Storage and the actual Test Rate Schedule after returning to
PanSystem to produce the Real-Time and Pressure Response for the Well Test under
consideration.
There will be a period of several seconds (or tens of seconds for a complex Mesh),
before any data appears on the graph. The computing time is displayed in the
Status Bar at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen at the end of the Numerical
Simulation.
The Graphing Window shows the progression of the Numerical Simulation as the
calculations are performed. The scale is automatically adjusted on the graph to
accommodate the calculated plot lines. By default the (Pd) and (dPd/dlogtd - spline fit)
plot lines are shown on the graphing area. Users may change this setting by calling up
the Graph Pop-Up menu (described below), with a right mouse-click anywhere in the
Graphing Window:
Graphing Window Pop-Up Menu:
463
Stop: This menu option is only enabled during Numerical Simulation and
can be used to terminate the Numerical Simulation.
Pause: This menu option is only enabled during Numerical Simulation can
be used to temporarily Pause the Numerical Simulation. Selecting the
button again will re-start the Numerical Simulation.
Properties: Control of the graphical presentation (i.e. plotted lines) is
provided by the following sub-menu options. The raw (Pd/td) data are
spaced according to PanMesh's internal time-stepping regime, which is not
optimal for use in PanSystem. The Output Spline option (checked by
default), optimizes the spacing of the output data when it is saved to a
(*.TCX) file. Lines currently plotted on the graph are indicated by a Tick
Mark next to each plot option:
Edit Graph Area: This generates the Change Graph Area sub-dialog
for applying axis re-scaling (if required).
The Change Graph Area sub-dialog can also be generated by double

left-clicking outside the Graphing Window. If users double left-click
anywhere inside the Graphing Window, the Edit Number of Points
sub-dialog will be generated instead.
Edit Graph Title: This generates the Enter New Graph Title sub-
dialog where users can apply a new Title for the Graphing Window (if
required).
Show (Pd) checkbox: This is checked by default.
Show (dPd/dlogtd) checkbox: This will plot the raw derivative when
checked.
Show spline (dPd/dlogtd) checkbox: This is the default presentation
for the smoothed derivative.
Output Spline checkbox: This option automatically converts the
output data that would be saved to a (*.TCX) file, to provide an
optimum spacing of data points when viewed in a Log Time Plot.
PanMesh calculates the optimum spacing by determining the Spline
Curve generated by the original data, then resolving this to the X-
axis for the equidistant number of data points requested in the Edit
Number of Points sub-dialog.
Print Orientation Landscape checkbox: If this option is checked, the
Graphing Window will be printed in Landscape Orientation. If this
option is unchecked, the Graphing Window will be printed in Portrait
Orientation.
Timer: This displays the elapsed time since the start of the Numerical
Simulation, or the total calculation time after the Numerical Simulation has
ended. This information is also displayed in the Status Bar after the
Numerical Simulation has ended.
Save As TCX File: The Save As TCX File option generates a standard
Windows Save As dialog and is used to make a copy of the (*.TCX) file
under a different name for future use. When the Graphing Window is
closed, the dimensionless PanMesh response is automatically written to a file
called PANMESH.TCX in the Type-Curve folder (typcurv). This will be used
by PanSystem to generate the Real-Time and Pressure Well Test response
464
PanSystem
on exiting PanMesh. This PANMESH.TCX file will be overwritten by the

next PanMesh Numerical Simulation that is performed.
The same Save As facility is available in PanSystem on the File menu under
Save PanMesh Calc, or alternatively, use the My Computer or Windows
Explorer facilities to copy and rename the PANMESH.TCX file.
Overlay - Import TCX: This feature facilitates overlaying another TCX file
on top of the file generated by the current run. Only TCX files generated by
PanMesh version 3.3 or higher can be imported using this feature. This
feature can be useful for comparing the results of different PanMesh runs.
After the Numerical Simulation calculations are completed, users may exit PanMesh and
return to PanSystem by clicking on Close Window (i.e. "X" symbol) in the top right corner
of the PanMesh Graphical Interface. However, before exiting, users may wish to Review
the Pressure or Flow Distribution at different times of the Numerical Simulation. In this
case, select the Pressure/Show Color Contours option from the Data View Control Menu,
or select the Color Contour option from the PanMesh Toolbar, to display the Graphing
Window in Review Mode:
Graphing Window in Review Mode: The Graphing Window now includes a Color
Scale Key on the right, and upper and lower Scale Marker Bars (i.e. blue and red
lines), which define the span of the color contouring for (Pd). The color scale can be
adjusted in a number of ways:
Left-click on either the lower (red) or upper (blue) limit, then drag and release.
This will result in non-rounded (arbitrary) limits (if the Color Bar is turned on in
the Visualisation Window, the displayed values will reflect this).
Left-click on the top or bottom of the color bar itself in the Graphing window,
then drag and release and the limits can be changed to any arbitrary value.
Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to change the lower value (red) to the next
rounded (in logarithmic scale) value.
Use SHIFT + UP or DOWN to change the upper value (blue) to the next rounded
(in logarithmic scale) value.
For the latter two options, ensure the Graphing Window has the focus.
The edge of the red area in the Reservoir Image is the outer limit of the Pressure
Disturbance. The value of (Pd) at the edge is determined by the position of the red
marker bar on the graph. If users set the red marker bar at (Pd = 0.1), the edge
corresponds to the classical Radius of Investigation for a Homogeneous Reservoir.
The blue marker bar affects the coloration closer to the Well, where the
Dimensionless Pressure Drop is bigger.
Users should experiment with the color scaling to achieve the best results.
Remember that the first half-dozen log cycles of (td) correspond to a very small
Depth of Investigation, and no coloration will be visible unless users Zoom-In on
the Wellbore region. A good way to achieve this is to use the View Completions
option from the View Control Panels; this will apply a good Zoom-In on the
Wellbore region. Use the Zoom feature from the View Control Panels area of the
Graphic Interface to adjust the viewing distance.
Review Simulation: When the Numerical Simulation is complete, a third Marker
Bar (vertical and green), appears on the right-hand side of the graph area. By
465
selecting and dragging this bar to the left/right (or using the left/right arrow keys),
users can Replay the Pressure propagation against Dimensionless Time.
Status Bar:
This is situated at the base of the PanMesh Graphical Interface and provides users with
summary information relating to the preparation, execution and completion of the
current Numerical Simulation (e.g. Current Status, Estimated End Time for Simulation,
Total Elapsed Simulation Time, etc.).
Saving Numerical Simulation Data:
When the Numerical Simulation has finished, users have a number of options for saving
results:
History File:
On exiting PanMesh (or on closing the Graphing Window) users will be issued with the
following prompt:
"Do you wish to save the Simulation History File?". This is optional.
The History File (*.HST), contains a step-by-step record of the Numerical Simulation,
including Pressures at all Nodes in the Reservoir. This can be used for future replay of
the Dimensionless Wellbore Response, the Color Pressure Visualisation, and generation of
Interference Test Responses, without having to re-compute the Numerical Simulation
itself.
These files are large (i.e. several to many megabytes) and should only be saved if
they will be needed later (e.g. for the final, best match to a Well Test). A regular
clear-out, compression or transfer to CD of (*.HST) files is advisable if they are
being saved frequently and/or in large numbers.
Selecting No will close PanMesh and return users to PanSystem.
Selecting Yes will open a standard Windows File Save As dialog for the History File,
with extension (*.HST). The default directory will be the PanSystem Data folder.
After entering a suitable filename and saving, PanMesh will close and users will be
returned to PanSystem.
Real-Time and Pressure Response:
When PanMesh is closed, the Dimensionless Response is automatically written to a file
called PANMESH.TCX in the Type-Curve folder (typcurv). This will be used by PanSystem
to generate the Real-Time and Pressure Well Test Response. This PANMESH.TCX file will
be overwritten by the next PanMesh Numerical Simulation that is run.
Before closing PanMesh, the Save As TCX File option on the Graphing Window Pop-
Up Menu (described earlier), can be used to make a copy of the file under a
different name. There is also an option to make a back-up of the file in
PanSystem on the File menu using the Save PanMesh Calc option, or alternatively,
use My Computer or the Windows Explorer facilities to copy and re-name the file.
The Saved (*.TCX) file can be re-used to generate a Real-Time and Pressure Response
for a specific case without going back into PanMesh.
PanSystem will convolve the Dimensionless Response from PanMesh with the selected
Wellbore Storage Model (Cs), the Rate Schedule (and for Gas or Condensate, the Non-
Darcy Skin Factor (D)). This is achieved with the Advanced Simulation facility, using
analytically-derived, Dimensionless Response Functions. PanSystem will rapidly progress
through the time-steps of the Rate Schedule to produce a full Well Test Response:
466
PanSystem
If users were in the Analysis section of PanSystem with a diagnostic plot displayed
on-screen when PanMesh: New Run was invoked, they will find themselves
situated back in the same plot, with the PanMesh-generated response overlaid on
the Well Test data. The Simulated curve will be present on any diagnostic plot that
is subsequently selected. To remove it, select the Overlay Pressure option from
the Edit menu and switch-off the Show Overlaid Pressure option in the generated
dialog (or select an alternative overlay, if there is a choice).
If users were not in the Analysis section of PanSystem (e.g. designing a Well Test),
they will be taken to the Test Overview Plot, with their Simulated Test displayed. If
a Master Pressure Column is present (e.g. an existing Well Test), this will also be
plotted.
The Simulated Pressure Channel will be called FEM P and two Sandface Flow Rate
columns - FEM Q Total and FEM Q#1 - will also be created.
To make additional PanMesh runs (e.g. to refine a History Match), without
overwriting the current FEM P data, either:
Re-name FEM P via the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog from the
Dataprep menu. Select a data file, then the Edit button to generate a Gauge
Data Edit dialog, highlight FEM P, then select the New button to generate a
Define New Data File dialog. Select a column and re-name the file, before
re-running PanMesh.
Give the new data a different name at the Duplicate Column Names prompt
after running PanMesh (as described below).
Unless users are particularly interested in the Sandface Flow Rates - FEM Q Total
and FEM Q#1, they can either be deleted with the Select Data File to Delete facility
(i.e. accessed via the Delete button in the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog),
or just let them be overwritten each time.
PanSystem Prompts/Dialogs Encountered After Leaving PanMesh 3-D Numerical
Simulation:
These will vary according to the way users exit from PanMesh, but the following will
generally apply:
Duplicate Column Names: This warning will be issued when users close PanMesh
directly by clicking on Close Window (i.e. "X" symbol) in the top right corner of the
PanMesh Graphical Interface and select No to the prompt "Do you wish to Save the
Simulation History file?". Selecting OK in this warning dialog will overwrite these
columns of data with duplicate filenames. Selecting Cancel will generate the
Simulated Column Names sub-dialog, where alternative column filenames can be
specified.
Advanced Simulation Control dialog: Selecting OK in the Simulated Column
Names sub-dialog, will let users proceed with the Advanced Simulation
Calculations. Refer to the Help topic on Advanced Simulation Control, for further
details of the options and controls available within this dialog.
Calculating Advanced Simulation: Selecting OK in the Advanced Simulation
Control dialog will generate this information dialog, telling the user about the
number of calculation steps involved and the current calculation status. When all
the steps have been completed, select OK to close the dialog. The Advanced
Simulation will convolve the Rate data and Wellbore Storage with the Constant Rate
Dimensionless Solution generated by PanMesh.
467
If the Numerical Simulation was commenced from a diagnostic plot in

Analysis, users will be returned to the same plot with the Simulated
Pressure data overlaid.
If the Numerical Simulation was commenced from the DataPrep Gauge Data
(TPR) Preparation dialog, users will find the new FEM P Pressure data (or an
alternative name if it was changed) listed in the Data File /Column List
section of the dialog. Users may Save, Plot, Analyze or use this data as an
Overlay in a similar manner to other Pressure data.
For additional information on this Graphical Interface, refer to the . Alternatively,

select this link to access a series of PanMesh Tutorial Examples.
468
PanSystem
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) View Flow into Completions Dialog
General:
This dialog can be generated after a Numerical Simulation has been performed, by first
selecting the View Completions button, then selecting the Flow button from the Stock
Views section of the View Control Panels in the PanMesh Graphical Interface. Users can
choose to:
View the Flow into any Completion Zone.
Select different viewing positions for the selected Completion Zone.
Within this list dialog, users can chose to view the flow into any Completion Zone, by
selecting the required Completion Zone from the displayed list (i.e. by double-clicking on
an appropriated row or highlighting a row then selecting the Apply button).
The following parameters are displayed for each Completion Zone:
Completion: Completion Zones are Numbered in order from the Heel.
Length: The Length of each Completion Zone.
Position: The Distance from the Heel to each Completion Zone.
For Length and Position, the display units are the same as those selected for the
Master View (i.e. Feet or Meters).
Area: The Percentage of overall Completion Area attributed to each individual
Completion Zone.
Flow: The Percentage of overall Flow attributed to each individual Completion
Zone.
Three different views can be set-up for the selected Completion Zone using the radio
buttons at the top right corner of the dialog:
Top: The view is centered on the Top of the selected Completion Zone (i.e.
nearest to the Heel).
Centred: The view is centered on the Middle of the selected Completion Zone.
Bottom: The view is centered on the Bottom of the selected Completion Zone (i.e.
farthest from the Heel).
In each case, when the Apply button is selected, the Flow Plane is automatically
moved, Sized and Oriented for the selected Completion Zone. A Zoom-In is also
performed automatically to the selected Completion Zone.
The Error % given is an indication of the accuracy of the Flow into the Completions
(using the calculated Pressure Gradient) compared to the Applied Flow. Obviously, the
accuracy is greater when the Error % value is smaller, since the value is calculated as:
Error % = 100 x (Calculated Flow - Applied Flow)/Applied Flow
The Flow into each Completion Zone can be estimated (and the sum of all the
Flows compared to the Applied Flow). Note that an Error in this estimation does
not reflect an equivalent Error in the Pressure Calculation. It is rather related to
469
the size of the elements around the open Completion Zones and their ability (given
the linear interpolation used for Flow over each element) to mimic the Flow Field.
If users want to try and get a qualitative feel for the Flow in the Reservoir, an
extra Flow Analysis checkbox option is available in the Edit Mesh dialog; if this
option is selected, PanMesh adds elements into the Mesh. This Flow Analysis
option should be used in conjunction with the Superfine Mesh options.
470
PanSystem
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Data View Controls Dialog
General:
This tabbed dialog can be generated from the PanMesh Graphical Interface after
Numerical Simulation has been performed, by selecting the Data View Controls button
from the View Control Panels; it can be used to adjust the settings that affect the
appearance of any Cut Plane, Flow Plane and Stream Tube displayed in the Perspective
View.
The dialog is comprised of three tabs, described as follows:
Cut Plane tab:
A Cut Plane is a vertical, horizontal or angled slice through the Reservoir Image. These
control elements of the interface are only enabled when the Cut Plane toolbar or menu
option is selected in the PanMesh Graphical Interface; the controls are used to adjust the
Orientation, Rotation or Translation (i.e. in incremental steps) and the Relative Position of
a Cut Plane within the Reservoir Image. When the Cut Plane option is selected, the Solid
Model View option is also selected automatically (if not already selected); this enables
users to visualize the Cut Plane more easily.
A Cut Plane can potentially be placed at any Position/Orientation within the Reservoir
Image, but as a starting point, three Cut Plane options are provided; these can be
orientated parallel to the Wellbore Axis or the Cartesian Axes (X, Y or Z), depending on
whether the Around Well or Lock Point checkbox has been checked (as described below).
The Cut Plane controls are situated down the left-hand side of the tab and are described
from top to bottom:
(From left to right, Cut Plane tools for X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis respectively)
If the Reservoir Image is in Top View (default setting), the X-axis cut is made vertically
from left to right, the Y-axis cut is made vertically from top to bottom. For a Slant or
Horizontal Well, the cut is oriented along the azimuth of the Well Trajectory. For a truly
Vertical Well, the cut is made vertically through the Wellbore Axis.
The Vertical Cuts are useful for inspecting the Meshing in the plane of a Vertical or Slant
Well. If Color Visualization is also used, it permits users to see the early part of the
propagation of the Pressure Disturbance out from the Well during the Numerical
Simulation, by removing the portion of the Reservoir Image between the viewer and the
Well.
The Z-axis cut is made in a horizontal plane and is best viewed when the Reservoir Image
is in Front View or Side View. For Horizontal Wells a cut is made through the Reservoir
Image in the plane of the Well (for a Vertical Well it simply cuts across the bottom Layer
of Mesh elements, which is not usually of much use).
The Horizontal Cut is useful for inspecting the Meshing in the plane of a Horizontal Well.
If Color Visualization is also used, it permits users to see the early part of the
propagation of the Pressure Disturbance out from the Well during the Numerical
Simulation, by removing that part of the Reservoir Image which overlies the Well.
Rotate radio button and Degree Slider: When the Rotate radio button is selected,
the upper Slider Control is used to set the increment for Rotation of the Cut Plane
471
(i.e. in 1 increments from 1 up to 15) around a Fixed Point. The Rotation

function is controlled by the keyboard arrow keys (i.e. Left, Right, Up and Down as
required). Movement is free-form, so users can Rotate the Cut Plane to any 3-D
aspect within the Perspective View Window.
Translate radio button and Distance Slider: When the Translate radio button is
selected, the lower Slider Control is used to set the increment for Translation
movement of the Cut Plane (i.e. in logarithmic increments from 1cm up to
1000m). The Translation function (i.e. movement of the Cut Plane
upwards/downwards or backwards/forwards), is controlled by the Up/Down
keyboard arrow keys only (i.e. Up to move the Cut Plane upwards/forwards and
Down to move the Cut Plane downwards/backwards as required).
Around Well: This checkbox is used to set whether the Rotation of the Cut Plane is
relative to the Wellbore Axis or the Cartesian Co-ordinate System (i.e. X, Y, Z).
This option also forces the Cut Plane Orientation buttons to orient the Cut Plane
relative to the Wellbore Axis. The position of a Cut Plane is defined by a Known
Point (i.e. the Cut Plane center), and its outward Normal.
Lock Centre: When this checkbox is checked, use of the Cut Plane Orientation
buttons sets the Cut Plane Orientation to the default settings (i.e. orientated
parallel to the Cartesian Axes (X, Y or Z)). However, the Known Point (i.e. the Cut
Plane center), is left unaltered.
The settings of this control can be Saved using the View Saver facility, and stored in the
History File. Perspective Views can also be Added to existing History Files.
In the PanMesh Graphical Interface, a mouse-operated Cut Plane adjustment tool is

situated next to a similar Flow Plane adjustment tool (i.e. beneath the Data View
Controls button on the View Control Panels. If both of these Data View tools are
currently selected, both tools will be visible. Users can toggle between the Cut
Plane and Flow Plane adjustment tools by left-clicking on the appropriate control on
the View Control Panels.
Flow Plane tab:
These control elements of the interface are only enabled after Numerical Simulation has
been performed and when the Flow Arrows/Flow Plane option has been selected in the
PanMesh Graphical Interface; they are used to adjust the Orientation, Rotation or
Translation (i.e. in incremental steps), Relative Position and Size of a Flow Plane within
the Reservoir Image. A Flow Plane is a rectangular/planar surface that can be positioned
at any Position/Orientation within the Reservoir Image; it is used to display Fluid Flow
Vectors that are calculated at the Node Points of the Mesh and interpolated on a Regular
Grid.
A Flow Plane can potentially be placed at any Position/Orientation within the Reservoir
Image, but as a starting point, three Flow Plane options are provided; these can be
orientated parallel to the Wellbore Axis or Cartesian Axes (X, Y or Z), depending on
whether the Around Well or Lock Point checkbox has been checked (as described below).
The Flow Plane controls are situated down the left-hand side of the tab and are described
from top to bottom:
(From left to right, Flow Plane tools for X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis respectively)
If the Reservoir Image is in Top View (default setting), the X-axis Flow Plane runs
vertically from left to right on the Reservoir Image, the Y-axis Flow Plane runs vertically
472
PanSystem
from top to bottom on the Reservoir Image. The Z-axis Flow Plane is disposed
horizontally and is best viewed when the Reservoir Image is in Front View or Side View.
In a large Reservoir Image, it may be difficult to see the Flow Plane initially and users
are recommended to either Zoom-In on the Wellbore area or use the View Completions
button to focus in on the Flow Plane. Users can then Resize the Flow Plane to suit their
Reservoir Model and viewing requirements.
Rotate radio button and Degree Slider: When the Rotate radio button is selected,
the upper Slider control is used to set the increment for rotation of the Flow Plane
(i.e. in 1 increments from 1 up to 15) around a fixed point. The Rotation
function is controlled by the keyboard arrow keys (i.e. Left, Right, Up and Down as
required). Movement is free-form, so users can Rotate the Flow Plane to any 3-D
aspect within the Perspective View Window.
Translate, Pan and Resize radio buttons and Distance Slider: When any of these
three radio buttons are selected, the lower Slider control is used to set the
increment for movement of the Flow Plane (i.e. in logarithmic increments from
1cm up to 1000m).
The Translation function allows the Flow Plane to be moved backwards/forwards
when the X-axis or Y-axis tool is selected or upwards/downwards when the Z-axis
tool is selected). Movement is controlled by the up/down keyboard arrow keys
only (i.e. Up to move the Flow Plane up/forwards and Down to move the Flow
Plane down/backwards as required).
The Pan function allows the Flow Plane to be moved along its own Axes (i.e. Flow
Plane can slide along the 3-D plane of which it is formed). When the X-axis or Y-
axis tools are selected, the Flow Plane can be moved vertically upwards/downwards
with the Up/Down keyboard arrow keys and backwards/forwards with the Left/Right
keyboard arrow keys. When the Z-axis tool is selected, the Flow Plane can be
moved horizontally backwards/forwards in the X- and Y-directions with the
Left/Right and Up/Down keyboard keys respectively.
The Resize function allows the Flow Plane to be increased/reduced in area.
Irrespective of whether the X-axis, Y-axis or Z-axis tools are selected, the Flow
Plane can be increased in Width/Length/Height about its center with the Up/Right
keyboard arrow keys and reduced in Width/Length/Height about its center with the
Down/Left keyboard arrow keys.
A mouse click and drag Resize method is also available via the Flow Plane
adjustment tool in the View Control Panels of the PanMesh Graphical Interface.
Around Well: This checkbox is used to set whether the rotation of the Flow Plane is
relative to the Wellbore Axis or the Cartesian Co-ordinate System (X, Y, Z). This
option also forces the Flow Plane Orientation tools to orient the Flow Plane relative
to the Wellbore Axis. The position of a Flow Plane is defined by a Known Point (i.e.
the Flow Plane center), and its outward Normal.
Lock Settings: When this checkbox is checked, use of the Flow Plane Orientation
tools will set the Flow Plane Orientation to the default settings (i.e. orientated
parallel to the Cartesian Axes (X, Y or Z)). However, the Known Point (i.e. the Flow
Plane center), is left unaltered.
Flow Plane Settings can be saved using the View Saver facility, and will be stored in
the History File.
473
In the PanMesh Graphical Interface, a mouse-operated Flow Plane adjustment tool

is situated next to a similar Cut Plane adjustment tool (i.e. beneath the Data View
Controls button on the View Control Panels. If both of these Data View tools are
currently selected, both tools will be visible. Users can toggle between the Cut
Plane and Flow Plane adjustment tools by left-clicking on the appropriate control on
the View Control Panels.
Settings: This button generates the Flow Plane Settings sub-dialog; this contains a
number of Slider adjusters and checkboxes that are used to:
Select the Flow Arrow Resolution in the direction of the two Planar Axes (i.e.
the Number of Flow Arrows that will be displayed within the area of the Flow
Plane in each direction). If the Lock Resolution checkbox is also checked
and the Flow Plane is subsequently Resized, the Number of Flow Arrows in
each direction will remain unchanged following the Resize process.
Select the Relative Scaling of the Flow Arrows. This facility allows users to
make a qualitative assessment of Fluid Flux in the Reservoir surrounding
the Wellbore. This is disabled when in Direction Only mode.
The Average Flux is the Flow Rate divided by the Areas of open section on
the Wellbore (i.e. 2 x Rw x (completion lengths)). At a Scaling of 1.0,
Fluid Flux of average magnitude has an Arrow Length of Wellbore Radius
(Rw) and can be considered as being "to scale". The Length of the Flow
Arrows (L), is given by:
L = (q/qAv) x Rw x Scale
Where:
L = Flow Arrow Length
q = Flux at a given point
qAv = Average Flux
Rw = Wellbore Radius
Examples of use are provided below:
If the Scaling is initially set to 1.0, a Flow Arrow of Length equal to the
Wellbore Diameter (i.e. 2 x Rw), represents a Fluid Flux at that point of
magnitude (2 x qAv)/1.0.
If the Scaling is altered to 0.2, a Fluid Flux equal to qAv is now represented
by an Arrow of magnitude 0.2 x Rw.
At the same Scaling (i.e. 0.2), a Flow Arrow of Length equal to the Wellbore
Diameter (i.e. 2 x Rw), represents a Fluid Flux at that point of magnitude (2 x
qAv)/0.2 = 10 x qAv (i.e. ten times the Average Flux).
In situations where extremely high Fluxes occur, this Scaling facility can be
used to reduce the Flow Arrow Length on a relative basis, to visualize areas
of Influx more effectively.
Select the Number of Sides that will be displayed on the Flow Arrowheads
(e.g. fewer Sides provides a flatter, 2-D appearance, but is faster to
process/render, whereas more Sides provides a greater 3-D appearance,
but is slower to process/render).
474
PanSystem
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Flow Plane Settings Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated from the Flow Plane tab of the Data View Controls dialog
after Numerical Simulation has been performed, by selecting the Settings button; it is
used to adjust the settings that affect the appearance of any Cut Plane, Flow Plane and
Stream Tube displayed in the Perspective View.
elect this button to generate the Flow Plane Settings sub-dialog; this is used to
Resolution Axes 1 and 2: The Flow Plane is a grid of points at which Flow
Arrows are interpolated from the Flow Field (i.e. calculated using the
Pressure Field and Material Properties). PanMesh allows a grid of up to 50 x
50 points and these two Slider Controls are used to select how many Flow
Arrows will be displayed in the direction of the two perpendicular (planar)
axes of the Flow Plane.
Scaling: This Slider Control is used to select the relative Scaling of the Flow
Arrows, enabling users to make a qualitative assessment of Fluid Flux in
the Reservoir surrounding the Wellbore.
The Average Flux is the Flow Rate divided by the Areas of open section on
the Wellbore (i.e. 2 x Rw x (completion lengths)). At a Scaling of 1.0, Fluid Flux
of average magnitude has an Arrow Length of Wellbore Radius (Rw) and can
be considered as being "to scale". The Length (L) of the Flow Arrows is given
by:
L = (q/qAv) x Rw x Scale
Where:
L = Flow Arrows Length
q = Flux at a given point
qAv = Average Flux
Rw = Wellbore Radius
Examples of use are provided below:
If the Scaling is initially set to 1.0, a Flow Arrow Length equal to the
Wellbore diameter (i.e. 2 x Rw), represents a Fluid Flux at that point
of magnitude (2 x qAv)/1.0.
If the Scaling is altered to 0.2, a Fluid Flux equal to qAv is now
represented by an Flow Arrow of magnitude 0.2 x Rw.
At the same Scaling (i.e. 0.2), a Flow Arrow Length equal to the
Wellbore diameter (i.e. 2 x Rw), represents a Fluid Flux at that point
of magnitude (2 x qAv)/0.2 = 10 x qAv (i.e. ten times the Average
Flux).
In situations where extremely high Fluxes occur, this Scaling facility can be
used to reduce the Flow Arrow Length on a relative basis, to visualize areas
of influx more effectively.
Arrow Heads: This Slider Control is used to select the number of Sides that
will be displayed on the Flow Arrow Heads (e.g. fewer Sides provides a
flatter, 2-D appearance, but is faster to process/render, whereas more
Sides provides a greater 3-D appearance, but is slower to process/render).
475
Lock Resolution checkbox: If the Lock Resolution checkbox is checked and

the Flow Plane is subsequently Resized, the number of Flow Arrows in each
direction will remain unchanged following the Resize process.
Show Direction Only checkbox: This checkbox is used to override any Arrow
Scaling settings in that Flow Arrows are all displayed at the same Scale and
merely indicate the Flow Direction rather than the Flux Magnitude.
This facility can also be toggled on/off by using the Ctrl + D keyboard keys.
Reset button: This button is used to Reset the current Flow Plane Settings
to the default values and the Flow Plane orientation to the default setting
(i.e. X-axis button).
Cancel button: Closes the sub-dialog without accepting any edits and
returns users to the Perspective View Window.
OK button: Closes the sub-dialog accepting any edits and returns users to
the Perspective View Window.
476
PanSystem
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Saved Views Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when the View List sub-menu option is selected from the View
Management option on the PanMesh View menu or the Manage Views button is selected
on the View Control Panels; it can be used to:
Select and Apply one of the Saved Views listed in this dialog for display in the
Perspective View Window.
Edit any of the Titles (i.e. names) currently applied to Saved Views.
Delete any of the Saved Views listed in this dialog.
These Saved Views represent everything required to recreate a Reservoir Image

as recorded in the Perspective View Window using the Camera button from the
View Saver section of PanMesh View Controls.
Saved View List/Selection Field: This field lists all the Reservoir Image Views from
the Perspective View Window that have been Saved to the History File. To load any
of these Views into the Perspective View Window, either double-click on the
required View Title or select/highlight the required View Title, then select the Apply
button. In either case, the selected View will be displayed in the Perspective View
Window.
Edit: Select this button to generate the Edit the View Title sub-dialog; it can be
used to Edit any of the selected Titles (i.e. names) assigned to saved Perspective
Views. Up to 200 alphanumeric characters can be used.
Delete: Select one of the Perspective Views listed in the Saved View List/Selection
Field, then select this button to permanently delete the selected Perspective
View.
Delete All: Select this button to permanently delete all of the listed Perspective
Views in the dialog.
Apply button: Select one of the Perspective Views listed in the Saved View
List/Selection Field, then select this button to display it in the 3-D Reservoir
Perspective View Window (which is running in the background). The same
functionality is available by double left-clicking on the selected Perspective View
in the list.
Up/Down: Use these buttons to move any selected Perspective View either Up or
Down the displayed list as required.
Close button: Select this button to Close the Saved Views dialog.
Save Views Relative To...: This option allows the user to anchor a view (that is, the
camera position, the view control positions such as the flow plane, etc.) to a point
other than the origin. This may be useful in situations where the user is doing a
series of analyses. For example, if the user is considering the effect of varying the
well bore position (or the completion position/pattern) and has a view showing a
particular pattern around one of the tips, it may be useful to save the views relative
to the first tip and export them so that they can be read in and applied to the
second analysis. The use of heel in this dialog box refers to the point of entry of the
477
well bore into the reservoir for the vertical/inclined type scenarios and the heal for
horizontal cases.
These options are explained in the .
478
PanSystem
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Edit the View Title Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when the Edit button is selected in the Saved Views dialog; it
can be used to Edit any of the selected Titles (i.e. names) assigned to saved Perspective
Views.
A similar sub-dialog is displayed when users select the Edit View Title option from
the Mesh Edit Pop-Up Menu or the Edit Title sub-menu option from View
Management under the View Menu, but in these cases the sub-dialog is entitled
Enter the New View Title and any Title edits are only applied to the current
Perspective View.
Entry/Editing Field (alphanumeric): Either select and highlight the entire entry or
part of the alphanumeric entry as appropriate, then edit or enter text/numerals to
describe the currently selected Saved View. The default entry is Perspective View
#(number). Each View is numbered consecutively as it is Saved.
OK button: Select this button to apply any changes and/or exit from the sub-
dialog.
Cancel button: Select this button to exit from the sub-dialog without applying
any changes.
479
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Enter the New View/Graph Title Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when users either select:
The Edit View Title option from the Mesh Edit Pop-Up Menu or the View/View
Management/Edit Title sub-menu option from the PanMesh Main Menu.
The Properties/Edit Graph Title option from the Graphing Window Pop-Up Menu.
it can be used to Enter a new Title/Name for the current Perspective View or Graphing
Window (i.e. assign a Title other than the default one), or Edit the existing Title/Name
assigned to the current Perspective View or Graphing Window.
A similar sub-dialog is displayed when the Edit button is selected in the Saved
Views dialog, but in this case the sub-dialog is entitled Edit the View Title and any
Title edits are only applied to the selected Perspective View Title within the Saved
View.
Entry/Editing Field (alphanumeric): Either select and highlight the entire entry or
part of the alphanumeric entry as appropriate, then edit or enter text/numerals to
describe the current Perspective View Title. The default entry is Perspective View
#(number). For the Graphing Window, the default entry is textual.
OK button: Select this button to apply any changes and/or exit from the sub-
dialog.
Cancel button: Select this button to exit from the sub-dialog without applying
any changes.
480
PanSystem
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Enter the Co-ordinates Dialog
General:
This dialog can be generated in a number of ways, after a Numerical Simulation has been
performed:
Click in the Graphing Window to activate the Graphing Window Menu and either
select the Select a Point (P+) toolbar option or Data View Controls/P+ Select a
Point menu option to generate this dialog.
Choose the Select a Point (P+) option, then click in the Visualization Window in the
approximate area of interest; this will generate a Selected Point Graphing Window
(the current X, Y, Z co-ordinates of the Selected Point will be displayed in the
Window Title Bar). Next, click in the Selected Point Graphing Window to activate
the Graphing Window Menu and either select the P+ (Select a Point) toolbar option
or Data View Controls/P+ Select a Point menu option to generate this dialog.
Alternatively, after generating a Selected Point (as described above), double-click
on the Selected Point (i.e. green-colored sphere) in the Visualization Window to
generate this dialog directly.
The Simulation has created a Pressure versus Time record for every Mesh Node in the
Model. The response at the Well is displayed on the initial Graphing Window. With the
Select a Point facility, users can define the Co-ordinates of any other Point in the
Reservoir (i.e. not necessarily at a Mesh Node) and generate a (Pd) versus (td) response
for it. This can subsequently be converted into a real Pressure versus Time record for an
Interference Test in PanSystem.
The dialog is comprised of an information field, three data entry fields, a unit selection
section and two function buttons, described as follows:
Information Field: This is to remind users that the Z-Co-ordinate is positive
downwards.
X-, Y- and Z-Co-ordinate: Enter the X-, Y- and Z-Co-ordinates for the point of
interest. Remember that Z is positive downwards. PanMesh issues a warning if
the point does not lie within the Reservoir.
The exact Well Position is not recognised as a valid Point.

Units section: Select the required co-ordinate unit system from either Feet or
Metres.
Users may not remember the co-ordinate system they defined in the PanSystem
Well and Reservoir (Numerical) section of the program. It is not possible to open
this section of the program (i.e. via the Dataprep menu in PanSystem), to review
the co-ordinates unless PanMesh is first shut-down. To avoid this situation, start a
second PanSystem session, then open the same (*.PAN) file and view it there.
Remember to shut-down this session of PanSystem before continuing.
After selecting OK, a new Graphing Window will appear showing the Dimensionless,
Constant-Rate Drawdown Pressure Response and Derivative at the specified Point.
481
If users click on Close Window (i.e. "X" symbol) in the top right corner of the new
Graphing Window, a "Save As (*TCX) File?" prompt is generated for the point data. If
users want to convert this into a real Pressure versus Time Response in PanSystem, they
should answer Yes at the prompt, to save the Dimensionless Response to a (*.TCX) file.
Enter a name for the file in the File Save As dialog that appears next. This data will be
saved to the current Type-Curve folder (typcurv) by default. Users will then be returned
to the original Graphing Window containing the response at the Well.
482
PanSystem
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Edit Mesh Dialog
General:
This dialog can only be generated in PanMesh before Numerical Simulation is performed,
by right-clicking anywhere in the 3-D Reservoir Visualization Window to activate the
Mesh Edit Pop-Up Menu, then selecting the Edit Mesh menu option. The dialog can be
used to alter the density of the Mesh used for the Numerical Simulation and can
(optionally) be used to activate Flow Analysis for the View Completions option (also refer
to View Flow into Completions dialog for more details).
The dialog is comprised of three or four selection sections (i.e. depending on the number
of regions present) and two function buttons, described as follows:
Wellbore section: This increases the number of Elements along the Wellbore, but
only if the Well is partially-completed. The Mesh Refinement occurs over the non-
open sections, with increased fining as the open sections are approached. The
degree of Mesh Refinement is at a maximum close to the Well and decreases with
radial distance away from the Well. This improves the modeling of Flow
Convergence and produces a better Early-Time Response.
Radial section: This boosts the number of Elements in the Radial direction in the
Region containing the Well by increasing the density of the Mesh rings. This might
improve the response to a Boundary or Internal Fault close to the Well.
Polygons section: This section only appears for a model with more than one
Region (refer to the Help topic for Using Regions and Defining Areal Heterogeneities
for more details). It boosts the number of Elements in the Regions (i.e. Polygons)
not containing the Well. A Region closer to the Well will be given more Mesh
Refinement than a Region farther from the Well. This might improve the Mid- or
Late-Time Response in a heterogeneous Reservoir.
For the three sections listed above, the progression from Coarse, through Medium
and Fine, to Superfine, increases the number of Elements in the Mesh.
Anisotropy: For a Vertical Well, this extends some of the Wellbore Vertical
Refinement (described above), out through the Reservoir instead of dissipating it
away from the Well. This may improve Early-Time Response in a partially-
completed Well in an anisotropic Reservoir.
This section has no effect with Horizontal Wells.

Flow Analysis: Although the primary aim is accurate calculation of the Pressure
Transient (specifically at the open Completion Zones), the Pressure field can also be
used (in conjunction with the Material Properties) to estimate the Flow at any Point
in the Reservoir (via the Flow Plane and Stream Tube options). Additionally, with
the View Flow into Completions option, the Flow into each Completion can be
estimated (and the sum of all the Flows compared to the applied Flow). For users
who wish to get a qualitative feel for the Flow in the Reservoir, this option can be
used to add Elements. To get the best r;feel for the Flow Regime, use this option
in conjunction with the Superfine options from the Wellbore and Radial sections
(described above).
483
The default settings can be accepted for most purposes. If users suspect that a
response could be improved by Mesh Refinement, try increasing the appropriate default
by one step. A finer Mesh will incur an increased computation time, and may or may not
produce a more accurate response. If the response is significantly different, it would
suggest that an improvement has been achieved and it might even be worth investigating
the possibilities of going one step further in refinement, but this should not normally be
necessary.
484
PanSystem
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Change Graph Area Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by right-clicking anywhere within the PanMesh Graphing
Window and selecting the Properties/Graph Area option from the pop-up menu; it is used
for applying Axis Re-scaling (if required).
This sub-dialog can also be generated by double left-clicking on the Plot Axes
within the Graphing Window.
Minimum td: On (horizontal) X-axis next to origin. Enter a suitable number or
accept the default setting.
Minimum Pd: On (vertical) Y-axis next to origin. Enter a suitable number or accept
the default setting.
Maximum td: On right-hand end of (horizontal) X-axis. Enter a suitable number or
Maximum Pd: On upper-most end of (vertical) Y-axis. Enter a suitable number or
Graph scales are adjusted by setting the minimum and maximum limits for Dimensionless
Pressure (Pd) and Dimensionless Time (td).
The raw (Pd/td) data are spaced according to the internal time-stepping regime within
PanMesh, which is not optimal for use in PanSystem. The Output Spline option from the
Graphing Window Pop-Up Menu (which is on by default), is used to optimize the spacing
of the output data when it is saved to a (*.TCX) file.
485
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Edit Number of Points Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by double left-clicking anywhere inside the Graph within
the PanMesh Graphing Window. This option automatically converts the output data that
would be saved to a (*.TCX) file, to provide an optimum spacing of data points when
viewed on a Log Time Axis. PanMesh calculates the optimum spacing by determining the
Spline Curve generated by the original data, then resolving this to the X-axis for the
equidistant number of data points requested by the user in this sub-dialog.
The Output Spline option from the Graphing Window Pop-Up Menu (which is on by
default), is used to optimize the spacing of the output data when it is saved to a (*.TCX)
file. When selected it is used to define the number of points calculated in the (*.TCX) file.
As mentioned above, this sub-dialog can be generated by double left-clicking

anywhere within the Graphing Window, except on the Plot Axes. If users double
left-click on the Plot Axes, the Change Graph Area sub-dialog will be generated
instead.
The sub-dialog is comprised of a single data entry field and two function buttons.
Normally, the default setting for the Number of Points will provide a smooth output result
for the (Pd) versus (td) plot.
The default Number of Points interpolated from the Spline is equal to five times the
Number of Time Stations in the analysis; this is implemented once the Numerical
Simulation has ended.
If the results are unacceptable (e.g. too noisy), try increasing the number (i.e. up to
5001), until a smoother plot is obtained.
486
PanSystem
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Simulated Column Names Sub-Dialog
General:
If users already have a Column called FEM P (or Flow Rate Columns with the default
names) in the file from a previous PanMesh Simulation, a data overwrite warning will be
issued after closing PanMesh and before the PanSystem calculations begin. If users
want to perform more PanMesh runs (e.g. to refine a History Match), and do not want to
overwrite the current FEM P data, they can either:
Re-name FEM P via the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog from the Dataprep
menu. Select a data file, then the Edit button to generate a Gauge Data Edit
dialog, highlight FEM P, then select the New button to generate a Define New Data
File dialog. Select a Column and re-name the file, before re-running PanMesh.
Give the new data a different name at the Duplicate Column Names prompt after
running PanMesh (described below).
Unless users are particularly interested in the Sandface Rates - FEM Q total and FEM
Q#1, they can either be deleted with the Select Data File to Delete facility (i.e. accessed
via the Delete button in the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog), or just let them be
overwritten each time.
In the latter case from above, the Duplicate Column Names warning will be issued when
users close PanMesh directly by clicking on Close Window (i.e. "X" symbol) in the top
right corner of the PanMesh Graphical Interface and select No to the prompt "Do you wish
to save the Simulation History File?".
Selecting OK in this warning dialog will overwrite these columns of data with
duplicate filenames.
Selecting Cancel will generate the Simulated Column Names sub-dialog, where
alternative column filenames can be specified.
Pressure/Total Rate section: Change the name of the Pressure Column and the
Total Rate (i.e. if required).
Layer Rate Columns section: Change the name of the Layer Rate Column/s (i.e. if
required).
Select OK to accept any changes and generate the Advanced Simulation Control dialog
(no further changes are required). The PanSystem Advanced Simulation calculations will
now take place - Pressure and Sandface Rate Columns will be created with these new
names.
Select Cancel to ignore any changes (i.e. overwrite existing Columns) and generate
the Advanced Simulation Control dialog (no further changes are required). The
PanSystem Advanced Simulation calculations will now take place - Pressure and Sandface
Rate Columns with the same names will be created, overwriting the existing ones.
487
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) New Run
General:
This is the first of three sub-menu options from the Simulate menu, situated under the
Numerical Simulation option:
PanMesh: New Run
PanMesh Replay
These three options give access to the PanMesh graphical interface which is fully
described in Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Graphical Interface.
The PanMesh: New Run option first generates the Numerical Simulation Control dialog
where users enter the required simulation time for a new run. On OK from this dialog,
PanMesh is invoked to run a new Simulation based on the geological model configured in
PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical). PanMesh generates a Dimensionless
Pressure Response for a Constant-Rate Drawdown. This is written to a file with extension
(*.TCX) and passed back to PanSystem, where it is convolved with Wellbore Storage and
the actual Test Rate Schedule to produce the Real-Time and Pressure Response for a Well
Test.
A typical workflow for Numerical Simulation using the PanMesh: New Run option is
presented as follows:
Duration of Simulation: The Numerical Simulation Control dialog will request the
Duration of the Numerical Simulation. This will default to the Total Duration of the
selected Well Test to be Simulated, including all Rate History (e.g. a 24-hour build-
up which follows a 240-hour flowing period, will require a Simulation spanning 264
hours). The default time may be increased if required, although this is usually
unnecessary. If the time is reduced, there is a risk of generating a Dimensionless
Response that does not cover enough time. Selecting OK will then invoke the
PanMesh 3-D Numerical Simulator (refer to Numerical Simulation (PanMesh)
Graphical Interface).
Reservoir Image and Mesh: A few seconds will elapse while PanMesh constructs
the Finite Element Mesh for the selected Reservoir Model. A 3-D display of the
Reservoir will then appear in the Reservoir Viewing Window, with the Reservoir
Image initially displayed in Plan View. To view the Mesh, switch off the Solid Model
View button on thePanMesh Toolbar and switch on the Wire Frame View button.
Starting the Numerical Simulation: To start the Numerical Simulation, select
the Go button on the PanMesh Toolbar. This initiates the Numerical Simulation and
generates the Graphing Window. The Graphing Window will show the
Dimensionless (Pd) versus (td) Response with derivative at the Sandface, computed
for a Constant-Rate Drawdown. The response includes the Darcy Skin Factor (S), if
this is present.
Wellbore Storage (Cs), Turbulent Skin Factor (D) and the true Flow Rate Schedule,
will be convolved into the response on returning to PanSystem.
488
PanSystem
There will be a period of several seconds (or tens of seconds for a complex Mesh)
before any data will appear on the Graph. The traces will jump forward over
successive time segments as the calculations progress. Simple models will take a
few tens of seconds to compute, complex models (or models where users have
refined the Meshing) will take minutes or hours, depending on their complexity and
the configuration of the computer. The Status Bar will provide an estimate of End
Time (this is based on the Time taken for each of the key numerical steps
performed during the Numerical Simulation and is revised as the Numerical
Simulation progresses).
During a Numerical Simulation it is possible to switch the focus between the
Graphing Window and the 3-D Reservoir Viewing Window and use any of the
facilities which are enabled (e.g. the 3-D Pressure Visualisation facility can be
switched-on during the Simulation to show the progress of the Pressure
Disturbance through the Reservoir, by selecting the Color Contour option on the
PanMesh Toolbar or the Pressure/Show Color Contours option from the Data View
Controls menu item.
After the Numerical Simulation: When the Numerical Simulation has finished,
users have a range of options:
1. Close PanMesh and return to PanSystem to generate the Real Time/Pressure
Well Test Response.
This is the normal course of action.

2. Save a "History File" in (*.HST) format. This is a step-by-step record of the
Simulation, including Pressures at all Nodes in the Reservoir for future replay of the
Dimensionless Wellbore Response, the Color Pressure Visualization, and generation of
Interference Test Responses, without having to re-compute the Simulation.
3. Compute the Pressure at any Point in the Reservoir, display it in dimensionless form
and, optionally, save it to file. Use a variety of Data View Controls to analyze Flow in the
Reservoir and in the vicinity of Completion Zones. Capture and manage a number of
different Perspective Views (and associated settings), for subsequent recall.
4. Close the Graphing Window, leaving just the Reservoir Viewing Window. From
here, the Mesh can be edited and the Simulation re-launched.
5. Right-click in the Graphing Window to access the Graphing Window Pop-Up Menu.
From this menu, users can change the Graph and derivative presentations and/or save
their Dimensionless Well Response as a Type-Curve file in (*.TCX) format.
6. Invoke the Pressure Visualization and Replay the propagation of the Pressure
Disturbance out into the Reservoir.
Generating the Real Pressure versus Time Response: If users do not want to
use any of the options mentioned above, close PanMesh directly by clicking on
Close Window (i.e. "X" symbol) in the top right corner of the PanMesh Graphical
Interface.
There will be a prompt to Save the Simulation as a History File with extension
(*.HST), in the program Data folder. This is an optional step, but worthwhile if the
Simulation took a long time to run, as it allows subsequent access to certain replay
facilities without having to re-run the Simulation from scratch.
Note that these (*.HST) files are large, and should be routinely zipped or cleared
out if they start to accumulate.
489
Users will now be returned to PanSystem. The Constant-Rate Response from

PanMesh is convolved with Wellbore Storage (Cs) and Rate History (and for Gas or
Condensate, Non-Darcy Skin Factor (D)), to produce the Well Test Response.
If users were in the Analysis section with a diagnostic plot on the screen when
PanMesh: New Run was invoked, they will find themselves back on the same plot,
with the PanMesh-generated response overlaid on the Well Test data.
The simulated curve will be present on any diagnostic plot that is viewed. To
remove it, select the Overlay Pressure option from the Edit menu and uncheck the
Show Overlaid Pressure checkbox or select an alternative overlay if there is a
choice.
If users were not in the Analysis section (e.g. designing a Well Test), they will be
taken to the Test Overview Plot, with their simulated test displayed. If a Master
Pressure Column is also present (e.g. an existing Well Test), this will also be
plotted.
The simulated pressure channel will be called FEM P and two Sandface Flow Rate
Columns - FEM Q total and FEM Q#1 - will also be created.
To make additional PanMesh runs (e.g. to refine a history match), without
Dataprep menu. Select the Edit button to generate a Select Data File to Edit
dialog, highlight FEM P, then select the New button to generate a Define
New Data File dialog. Select a Column and re-name the file, before re-
running PanMesh.
Give the new data a different name at the Duplicate Column Names prompt
after running PanMesh (refer to the Help topic for Numerical Simulation
(PanMesh) Graphical Interface for more information about this prompt).
Unless users are particularly interested in the Sandface Rates - FEM Q total and
FEM Q#1, they can either be deleted with the Select Data File to Delete facility (i.e.
accessed via the Delete button in the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog), or just
let them be overwritten each time.
490
PanSystem
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Control Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when the PanMesh: New Run sub-menu option is selected via the
Numerical Simulation option on the PanSystem Simulate menu.
Simulation Time: The program requests the number of Hours duration the
simulation is intended to replicate. This time can extend to a maximum of
99,999,999 hours. If users are running the simulation from a diagnostic plot,
PanMesh will use the Total Test Duration in the Rate Changes Table from the
Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog (accessed from the Dataprep menu).
If users are running the Test Design facility, it will use the Total Test Duration from
the Test Design Table. The default value can be edited if required, but it should
always be at least as long as the Duration of the Test Sequence being Simulated.
The dialog will default to the Total Duration of the Well Test being Simulated,
including all Rate History, thus a 24-hour Build-Up which follows a 240-hour
Flowing Period will require a Simulation spanning 264 hours. The default Time can
be increased if required, though there is normally no need to do this. However, if
the Time is reduced, users risk generating a Dimensionless Response that does
not cover enough Time.
Selecting OK will then take users into the PanMesh 3-D Numerical Simulation Interface.
491
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Replay
General:
This is the second of three sub-menu options from the PanSystem Simulate menu,
situated under the Numerical Simulation option:
PanMesh: New Run
PanMesh Replay
These three options give access to the PanMesh Graphical Interface which is fully
The PanMesh Replay option first generates a File Open dialog, where users select and
import an existing PanMesh simulation in (*.HST) History File format. On selecting Open
from this dialog, PanMesh is invoked to import results from the selected (i.e. existing)
Simulation (provided it has been Saved and stored in (*.HST) History File format).
Users should have the appropriate (*.PAN) file open in PanSystem before selecting
PanMesh Replay.
In Replay Mode it is possible to:
Re-display the Dimensionless Pressure Response at the Well.
Save the Dimensionless Pressure Response at the Well as a (*.TCX) file (users may
have lost or overwritten the one from the original Simulation).
Replay the Pressure Visualization.
Generate the Dimensionless Pressure Response versus Time at any (X, Y, Z) co-
ordinate in the Reservoir for Interference Testing Purposes.
Generate the Real-Time/Pressure Well Test Response for the Well and/or Selected
Points in the Reservoir on returning to PanSystem.
A typical workflow for Numerical Simulation using the PanMesh Replay option is presented
as follows:
Opening the History File: Users should have the appropriate (*.PAN) file open in
PanSystem before selecting PanMesh Replay.
Select PanMesh Replay and select the required History File stored in (*.HST) format
from the standard Windows File Open dialog that appears. This dialog defaults to
the PanSystem Data directory.
If users forget to open the associated (*.PAN) file in PanSystem, a warning is

issued that no Flow Rate data is available.
The Replay Mode: Once the History File has been loaded, PanMesh is invoked,
with the 3-D Reservoir Viewing Window and Graphing Window open. The (Pd)
versus (td) response at the Well will be displayed.
492
PanSystem
PanMesh is now in the same status as if a Simulation has just been run. However,
in Replay Mode users cannot re-launch the Numerical Simulation; this must be
done using the PanMesh: New Run option from the PanSystem Simulate menu.
Saving the Dimensionless Pressure Response for a Well as a TCX File (with
User-Specified Name): When PanMesh is closed, users will be prompted to make
a named save. To do this without closing PanMesh, right-click on the graph to
generate the Graphing Window Pop-Up Menu. When the Graphing Window is
closed, the Dimensionless PanMesh Response is automatically written to a file called
PANMESH.TCX in the Type-Curve folder (typcurv). This will subsequently be used
by PanSystem to generate the Real-Time and Pressure Well Test Response when
users exit PanMesh. This PANMESH.TCX file will be overwritten by the next
PanMesh Simulation that is made. Use the Save As TCX File option on the Graphing
Window Pop-Up Menu to make a copy of the file under a different name, for future
use. The same facility is also available in PanSystem from the File menu under
Save PanMesh Calc, or alternatively, use either the My Computer or Windows
Explorer facilities to copy and re-name the file.
Replaying the Pressure Visualisation: Either activate the Color Contour button
from the PanMesh Toolbar or the Pressure/Show Color Contour option from the
Data View Control menu item, to apply Color Contouring within the 3-D Reservoir
Viewing Window and Graphing Window.
Generating and Saving the Dimensionless Pressure Response Versus Time
at any Point (X, Y, Z) in the Reservoir: Either activate the Select a Point button
from the PanMesh Toolbar or the Pressure/Select a Point option from the Data View
Control menu item, then left-click on an appropriate part of the Reservoir Image to
generate the Selected Point (i.e. green-colored sphere). Double left-click on the
Selected Point to generate the Enter the Co-ordinates dialog. Edit the (X, Y, Z)
co-ordinates if required, then select OK, to generate a new Graphing Window
showing the Dimensionless, Constant-Rate Drawdown Pressure Response and
Derivative at the Selected Point.
Generating the Real Time/Pressure Response for the Well: Close PanMesh
directly by clicking on Close Window (i.e. "X" symbol) in the top right corner of the
PanMesh Graphical Interface. There will be a prompt to Save the Simulation as a
History File with extension (*.HST), in the program Data folder. This is an
optional step, but worthwhile if the Simulation took a long time to run, as it allows
subsequent access to certain Replay facilities without having to re-run the
Simulation from scratch.
Note that these (*.HST) files are large, and should be routinely zipped or cleared
out if they start to accumulate.
As described above, the Dimensionless Response is automatically written to a file
called PANMESH.TCX in the Type-Curve folder (typcurv). This will be used by
PanSystem to generate the Real Time and Pressure Well Test Response.
Users will now be returned to PanSystem. The Dimensionless Response from
PanMesh is convolved with Wellbore Storage (Cs) and Rate History (and for Gas or
Condensate, Non-Darcy Skin Factor (D)), to produce the Well Test Response. The
Advanced Simulation facility is used for this purpose.
If users were in the Analysis section with a diagnostic plot on the screen
when PanMesh: New Run was invoked, they will find themselves back on
the same plot, with the PanMesh-generated response overlaid on the Well
Test data.
493
The simulated curve will be present on any diagnostic plot that is viewed. To
remove it, select the Overlay Pressure option from the Edit menu and
uncheck the Show Overlaid Pressure checkbox or select an alternative
overlay if there is a choice.
If users were not in the Analysis section (e.g. designing a test), they will be
taken to the Test Overview Plot, with their Simulated Test displayed. If a
Master Pressure Column is also present (e.g. an existing Well Test), this
will also be plotted.
The Simulated Pressure Channel will be called FEM P and two Sandface Flow
Rate Columns - FEM Q total and FEM Q#1 - will also be created.
To make additional PanMesh runs (e.g. to refine a History Match), without
Dataprep menu. Select the Edit button to generate a Select Data File
to Edit dialog, highlight FEM P, then select the New button to
generate a Define New Data File dialog. Select a Column and re-
name the file, before re-running PanMesh.
Give the new data a different name at the Duplicate Column Names
prompt after running PanMesh (refer to the Help topic for Numerical
Simulation (PanMesh) Graphical Interface for more information about
this prompt).
Unless users are particularly interested in the Sandface Rates - FEM Q total
and FEM Q#1, they can either be deleted with the Select Data File to Delete
facility (i.e. accessed via the Delete button in the Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog), or just let them be overwritten each time.
Generating the Real Time/Pressure Response for a Point or Points in the
Reservoir on Returning to PanSystem: Generate and Save the Dimensionless
Response at the Point/s as described above using the Select a Point facility.
Options are available in PanMesh to Save the Wellbore Response as a (*.TCX) file
with a user selected name, and to Save the Response at any Point in the Reservoir.
These (*.TCX) files can be used to generate Real-Time/Pressure Responses at the
Wellbore and at the Selected Point/s, using the From TCX File option on the
Simulate menu. This option may be used for a number of reasons:
To re-generate the Wellbore Response because the FEM P data (created
when the original PanMesh Numerical Simulation was run), has been
accidentally deleted.
To re-generate the Wellbore Response using a different Wellbore Storage
Model, Rate Schedule (or for Gas and Condensate, a different Rate-
Dependent Skin Coefficient (D)). The original (*.TCX) file is still valid,
provided users do not alter the Layer or Fluid parameters.
Users have saved (*.TCX) files representing pressures at points in the
reservoir for an interference test.
Close PanMesh directly by clicking on Close Window (i.e. "X" symbol) in the top
right corner of the PanMesh Graphical Interface. On exiting PanMesh, users are
returned to PanSystem where the Real Time/Pressure Response for the Well is
generated as described above.
If Dimensionless Pressure Responses have been created at Points in the Reservoir
and saved as (*.TCX) files, these Real-Time/Pressure Responses can be generated
494
PanSystem
by using the From TCX File option on the Simulate menu. This generates an
Advanced Simulation Control dialog. Select the (*.TCX) file for Pressure at a Point
in the Solution Model area of the dialog. The Names button should also be used to
give the Pressure Channel a useful name such as PPoint#1, to avoid confusion
later. The selected Pressure data can subsequently be viewed and compared with
others on the Data Edit Plot, or Overlaid on a diagnostic plot of the Wellbore
Response.
495
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) From TCX File
General:
This is the third of three sub-menu options from the Simulate Menu, situated under the
Numerical Simulation option:
PanMesh: New Run
PanMesh Replay
These three options give access to the PanMesh graphical interface which is fully
The From Existing TCX File option first generates an Advanced Simulation Control dialog,
where users can select the required (*.TCX) file from the Solution Model area of the
dialog. The Names button should also be used to assign the selected channel a useful
name, to avoid confusion later. The selected data can subsequently be viewed and
compared with others on the Data Edit Plot, or overlaid on a diagnostic plot of the
wellbore response.
Generating TCX Files:
When PanMesh is closed, the dimensionless response is automatically written to a file
called PANMESH.TCX in the Type-Curve folder (typcurv). This is immediately convolved
with wellbore storage (Cs) and the actual test rate schedule by PanSystem to produce the
real-time and pressure response for the welltest. For gas and condensate fluid types, the
rate-dependent, Non-Darcy Skin (D) is also added at this stage. This PANMESH.TCX file
will be overwritten by the next PanMesh simulation that is run.
Before closing PanMesh, the Save As TCX File option on the Graphing Window Pop-
Up Menu, can be used to make a copy of the file under a different name. There is
also an option to make a back-up of the file in PanSystem on the File Menu using
the Save PanMesh Calc option, or alternatively, use My Computer or the Windows
Explorer facilities to copy and re-name the file.
The saved (*.TCX) file can be re-used to generate a real-time and pressure response for
a specific case without going back into PanMesh.
These options are available in PanMesh to save the wellbore response as a (*.TCX) file
with a user selected name, and to save the response at any point in the reservoir.
These (*.TCX) files can be used to generate real-time/pressure responses at the wellbore
and at the selected observation point/s, using the From TCX File option on the Simulate
Menu. This option may be used for a number of reasons:
To re-generate the wellbore response because the FEM P data (created when the
original PanMesh simulation was run), has been accidentally deleted .
To re-generate the wellbore response using a different wellbore storage model, a
different rate schedule (or for gas and condensate, a different rate-dependent skin
coefficient (D)). The original (*.TCX) file is still valid, provided users do not alter
the layer or fluid parameters.
Users have saved (*.TCX) files representing pressures at points in the reservoir for
an interference test.
496
PanSystem
Layer, Well and Fluid Parameters:

Ensure the appropriate (*.PAN) file is open; the Material Properties specified in the
PanSystem Well and Reservoir (Numerical) section will be used to convert the
dimensionless times and pressures into real values, and these should be the same ones
used when PanMesh was originally run to generate this (*.TCX) file.
Generating the Well Test Response at the Well:
The generation of a pressure response from dimensionless (*.TCX) files uses the existing
Advanced Simulation facility. When users select the From Existing TCX File option from
the Simulate Menu, they are directed to what is essentially the Advanced Simulation
Control dialog.
Normally, all users need to do here is select the appropriate (*.TCX) file (and optionally,
specify a name for the output channel using the Names button).
If users do not have a back-up (*.TCX) of the dimensionless wellbore response and the
existing PANMESH.TCX is not the file for the current reservoir model, the dimensionless
response will have to be re-generated using PanMesh: New Run or PanMesh: Replay,
provided a saved History File (*.HST) is available.
Select the appropriate (*.TCX) file to use, then select OK. The pressure response will be
created as a channel called Sim P, along with two rate channels Sim Q Total and Sim
Q#1. The Names button from the Advanced Simulation Control dialog can be used to
change the channel names if desired, or they can be changed later in the Gauge Data
(TPR) Preparation dialog (accessed from the Dataprep Menu), using the Edit button to
generate a Select Data File to Edit dialog.
Generating the Welltest Response at a Remote Point:
This can only be achieved if the Select a Point facility has been used in PanMesh and the
dimensionless response has been saved as a (*.TCX) file.
Follow exactly the same procedure outlined above for Generating the Welltest Response
at the Well, but select the (*.TCX) file for pressure at a point in the Solution Model area
of the dialog. The Names button should also be used to give the pressure channel a
useful name such as PPoint#1, to avoid confusion later. The selected pressure data can
subsequently be viewed and compared with others on the Data Edit Plot, or overlaid on a
diagnostic plot of the wellbore response:
Overlay of Pressure at a Point (solid) on Semi-Log Plot of Wellbore Pressure
497
Advanced Simulation
Advanced Simulation - Overview
General:
This facility is available by selecting the Advanced Simulation option from the Simulate
Menu. Basic program functionality is described in the Advanced Simulation Help topic.
PanSystem Advanced Simulation is used to generate the Wellbore Pressure Response to a
specified Surface Flow Rate Schedule, for a specified Reservoir and Boundary description.
Like Quick Match, Advanced Simulation produces a Pressure Response that can be
displayed on screen and compared with Gauge Data, but it is more flexible and provides a
number of additional features as outlined below. If these are not required, use Quick
Match.
The reservoir model is not restricted to a single-well or single-layer, so multi-layer effects
(i.e. up to 5 layers) and interference from other wells (i.e. up to 5 wells) can be included.
Different boundary geometries can be modelled in each layer (i.e. using up to 16,000
image wells per layer).
The characteristics of the pressure gauge (i.e. resolution, noise and drift) can be included
in the simulated pressure response using the Gauge Details button from the Advanced
Simulation dialog (this facility is also available via the Configure menu).
Unlike the Quick Match option, where the simulated data are for display only, Advanced
Simulation data are written to new data channels and can be saved to disk for future use
just like any other gauge data. They can also be converted to dimensionless form as
Type-Curves.
The Advanced Simulation facility can be used for:
History Matching: Matching the simulated data to gauge data in an existing
(*.PAN) file. The Flow Rate would be the same as the rate sequence used for the
well test being analyzed. The objective would be to verify that the current reservoir
model is capable of replicating the measured gauge response.
Welltest Design: The Flow Rate would be an intended or tentative rate sequence
for a well test that has not yet been performed. The objective would be to examine
the computed response with a view to optimizing the test design (i.e. Flow Rates,
duration of flow periods, sensitivity to different variables, etc.).
The output from Advanced Simulation includes:
Flowing pressure in each well.
Total downhole Flow Rate in each well.
Downhole Flow Rates from each layer in each well.
Layer pressures at selected Observation Points in the reservoir.
498
PanSystem
Advanced Simulation - Data Preparation
General:
To run Advanced Simulation, the following input data are required:
Well Parameters, per Well.
Layer Parameters, including the Reservoir Flow Model and associated Model
Parameters (i.e. k, S, etc.), per Layer.
Image Wells for any Boundaries, per Layer.
Fluid Parameters, per Layer.
Surface Flow Rate Schedule to drive the Simulation, per Well.
Initial Wellbore and Layer Pressures, per Well and per Layer.
These are all normally entered in the Dataprep area of the program via the Gauge Data
(TPR) Preparation dialog, but some are accessible outside of Dataprep by direct edit of
the model parameters using the Model option from the Analysis menu (refer to the Select
Analysis Model dialog).
Also required are:
Simulation control parameters.
Positions of Observation Points (optional).
These are specified in the Advanced Simulation Control dialog.
Well Data:
For initialization of the well data, refer to the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical)
dialog. If more than one well is to be configured, they must all be vertical (including
slant) or all horizontal. The choice of this orientation is reflected in the reservoir flow
models available (via the Flow Model section of the Layer Parameters dialog).
The Principal Well is the "well of main interest" - normally the well in which the test has
been, or will be, run. The Principal Well co-ordinates are (0, 0). All other wells are
considered to be "interfering" wells, and their coordinate locations are referenced to (0,
0). The time-steps used for response computation are defined for the Principal Well, and
the rate schedules for any other wells are sampled against these time-steps.
Layer Data:
For initialization of the Layer Data, refer to the Layer Control section of the Well and
Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. If more than one Layer is to be configured,
each Layer can have its own characteristics.
A flow model must be selected for each layer (i.e. Free Model is not allowed), and the
relevant model parameters entered.
The current set of flow models assumes no vertical communication within the reservoir
between the defined layers. However, cross-flow in the wellbore will be faithfully
reproduced by Advanced Simulation where it occurs.
Vertical communication between layers is implicit within the dual-porosity (i.e. "two layer"
block model) and dual-permeability models - refer to the Select Analysis Model dialog.
In both cases, a second layer is implicit in the model parameters , and and does
not have to be defined as a separate layer. Thus, if Layer 3 in Dataprep is assigned the
dual-permeability flow model, it will behave as if it were two layers with internal cross-
flow.
499
For horizontal well models and others that develop pseudo-radial flow at late time,
note that the skin factor entered should be the true (i.e. mechanical) skin (S), not
the pseudo-radial skin. The term (S) always refers to the true skin at the wellbore.
Layer Boundaries:
For initialization of the Layer Boundaries, refer to the Boundary Model dialog and
Boundary Parameters sub-dialog (accessed via the Well and Reservoir Description
(Analytical) dialog). Also refer to the Boundary Type dialog (accessed via the Simulate
menu). If more than one layer has been configured, each layer can either have its own
boundaries or be infinite acting.
For reservoir models other than radial homogeneous, the computation of boundary effects
in Advanced Simulation is strictly valid only if the boundaries are far enough from the well
for pseudo-radial flow to have developed by the time the first boundary is encountered.
This is because the signals from the image wells are modelled as radial homogeneous
(exponential integral function).
For example, when modeling boundaries with one of the vertical fracture models, the
response should have reached pseudo-radial flow (i.e. it should be out of linear flow)
before the effect of any boundary appears. This requires that the nearest boundary be
approximately two fracture half-lengths (~2Xf) away from the well. If the boundary is
positioned too close, so that boundary effects appear during linear fracture flow, the
computed boundary response will not be valid.
This applies equally to horizontal well models. Any boundaries should be approximately
one well length (~ Lw) away from any point in the wellbore.
The Estimated Test Duration (entered in the sub-dialog of the same name), should
include the entire test sequence (e.g. do not exclude the flowing period just because the
primary interest is directed towards the build-up; a 24 hour shut-in following a 1,000
hour drawdown constitutes a 1,024 hours test duration. The test duration controls the
number of image wells generated. If the duration is underestimated, the late-time
simulated response will be wrong).
Do not forget to re-calculate the Image Wells if a Boundary Geometry is altered,

the Test Duration is extended (or reduced), or the Reservoir Properties are altered.
Fluid Parameters:
For initialization of the Fluid Parameters refer to the Well and Reservoir Description
(Analytical) dialog and the relevant Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs for Oil, Gas and
Condensate. Only one type of fluid is allowed for all layers configured in the reservoir.
However, within the selected fluid type, each layer can have different fluid parameters.
The only restriction is in the use of pseudo-pressure tables - only one table can be used
for all layers in the simulation. If an m(p) table has been computed for each layer, users
will be able to select which one to use, via the Advanced Simulation Control dialog.
Flow Rates:
The Simulation is driven by the surface Flow Rate schedule of the Principal Well. This
may consist of a single flowing period or a sequence of Flow Rates including shut-ins.
The rate sequence is divided into a number of time-steps, and a computation is
performed at each step. More time-steps will produce a more detailed pressure response,
but will entail a longer total computation time.
If interfering wells are configured (i.e. more than one well is present), they may each be
assigned their own independent surface rate schedule. These rate sequences will be
500
PanSystem
"digitized" at the Principal Well time-steps, so that all computations can be performed at
these times.
All simulated well pressure responses will therefore be output at a common set of times.
The Principal Well surface rate data and time-steps can be input in two ways:
For Test Design, users type in the desired rate sequence and specify the
computation time steps (refer to Edit Test Design dialog).
For History Matching, where users have already loaded and set-up well test data for
analysis, they can use the surface rate schedule already specified in the Rate
Changes Table. There is no need to type in any more data.
In this case, the time-steps for computation will correspond to the gauge clock
times. Computations are not made during flow periods that do not have Gauge
Data readings (e.g. any rate history prior to positioning the gauge), but
superposition effects from these periods will be correctly modelled provided they
have been specified in the Rate Changes Table.
If gauge data readings are erratically spaced (e.g. gaps, too many points, etc.),
users may prefer to generate a better looking response with regular spacings, by
using the Test Design facility in the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog. It is still
possible to import the Rate Schedule from the Rate Changes Table, but users will
be able to specify their own time-steps with regular logarithmic or linear spacing
instead of using the gauge clock times.
501
Advanced Simulation - History Matching
Flow Rates for History Matching:

For history matching to an existing well test data set, the Test Design option from the
Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog can be used, but since the surface rate sequence
has already been specified in the Rate Changes Table, users can let Advanced Simulation
pick this up, and use the gauge clock times for the computation time-steps (i.e. assuming
users have already set-up the Gauge Data File for analysis - if not, refer to Gauge Data
(TPR) Preparation).
In this case, no pressure computations can be made during flow periods that do not have
gauge data points (e.g. any rate history prior to positioning the gauge), but superposition
effects from these periods will be correctly modelled provided they have been specified in
the Rate Changes Table.
Principal Well:
The well tested is by definition, the Principal Well. The Principal Well surface rate data
appears in the Rate Changes Table (i.e. initialised when the test periods are defined prior
to performing the analysis of the data). There are three ways to approach the question
of Flow Rates for the Principal Well. The first option is the most likely:
1. If the Test Design facility (refer to Edit Test Design dialog) in the Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog is not going to be used to create the surface rate column to
drive Advanced Simulation, no further action is required for the Principal Well. A
temporary rate column to drive Advanced Simulation will be created automatically
from the Rate Changes Table. This happens (invisibly) on entering Analysis, and
this temporary rate is used by Advanced Simulation subsequently.
Users should always go into Analysis first when they leave Dataprep, then into
Advanced Simulation.
2. Alternatively, a rate column can be created via the Calculate Rate (Q) button from
the Dataprep Toolbar, then used to drive Advanced Simulation, but this is not generally
necessary. Use the Step Rate Option from the Create a Rate Column dialog, if this option
is utilized.
3. If the Test Design facility is used, the Transfer button in the Edit Test Design dialog,
can be used to copy over the Rate Changes Table times and rates - all users have to do
then is specify the time-stepping.
This facility is useful if Advanced Simulation is to be used for history matching
against gauge data, but instead of letting PanSystem use the gauge clock times for
response generation, users can specify the time-steps. This might be the preferred
option if the gauge clock times are irregularly spaced (i.e. using Test Design will
provide a regular spacing), or there may be too many points (i.e. users can control
the number of steps using Test Design).
However, the pressure column generated via Test Design is assigned to a different
file name and cannot be overlaid directly with the gauge data on any of the
diagnostic plots. Users can compare data on the Data Edit Plot, but to do this on a
diagnostic plot, the simulated pressures must first be copied and re-sampled into
the Gauge Data file using the Copy, Resample a Column to Create a New Column
button from the Dataprep Toolbar.
502
PanSystem
Other Wells (if any):

If users wish to include the interfering effects of other wells, initialise these wells and
their parameters if this has not already been done (refer to Well Data section in Advanced
Simulation - Data Preparation).
In the Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog, select an interfering well (i.e. if
there is more than one) from the drop-down list in the Well to Edit section. Either enter
new times and Flow Rates for each well independently, or use the time-steps created for
the principal well and just enter the different Flow Rates.
Select the Test Design button, to generate a Confirm sub-dialog, with the message - "Do
you wish to use the Principal Well Times?". It is faster to select the No option at the
prompt and type in the rate schedule without using the principal well times.
Implementation Example:
Data Input:
The Advanced Simulation Control dialog as it would appear for a single-well/single-layer
history match is illustrated below:
Well area:
Input Datafile/Column Name: The pressure response in each well is computed
according to the surface rates specified by the user. The surface rate column
names are displayed here for each well in the reservoir. In the above example, the
Flow Rate column is the temporary one automatically created from the Rate
Changes Table on entry into Analysis (refer to Flow Rates for History Matching
above).
If there is a choice of rate data names available for any well, users can select the
appropriate one from the pull-down menu. Normally there would be no choice.
Output Datafile Name: The names indicate the data file names under which the
simulated data columns will be grouped for each well.
Output Column Names (Names button): Select this button and enter names (max
15 characters) for the simulated flowing pressure, total downhole Flow Rate and
individual layer Flow Rates, or leave the default names.
Layer area:
503
Solution Model area: Ignore this area unless an alternative response function to one
or more layers is to be supplied. The supplied dimensionless response function for
the selected flow model is displayed - FINWBR is the finite wellbore radius solution
for radial flow in a homogeneous medium.
The response functions available for the particular reservoir flow model assigned to
each layer can be listed via the drop-down menu, and can be re-assigned if a choice
exists. If users want to change the flow model (for history matching to gauge
data), they need to select the Model option on the Analysis menu and use the
Select Analysis Model dialog.
These response functions are dimensionless tables supplied with PanSystem, with
the extension (*.TCX). They have the same format as the Type-Curve files (refer
to Type-Curve File for details) and are stored in the Type-Curve Directory. This
enables alternative user-supplied solutions to be used in Advanced Simulation
(refer to Advanced Simulation - Generating Type-Curves).
Speed Option area: The speed option determines the speed of the computation.
Speed is traded off against the detail with which rate variations are treated by
superposition.
m(p) Layer: Ignore this if there is only one layer and/or an oil or water fluid type.
For gas and condensate fluid types, if there are several layers with different fluid
properties, users must select which pseudo-pressure table to use in the simulation
(no mixing of pseudo-properties is possible).
Gauge Details: If required, the effects of pressure gauge characteristics (e.g.
resolution, noise and/or drift), can be included in the simulated response.
Observation Points button: An Observation Point is a remote point defined in the
reservoir at coordinates (x, y), at which pressure will be calculated. Up to 5 points
can be specified. Where there are several layers, a pressure is calculated at each
point in each layer.
Start Pressures button: This allows users to alter Start Pressures without leaving
Simulation Mode. These pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common
datum (i.e. there is no hydrostatic difference between layers). The initial condition
of the system (i.e. at time zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-
steps. The Layer Pressure of each layer (i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in
Dataprep) and the Initial Wellbore Pressure in each well (i.e. set-up via Rate
Changes in Dataprep) are therefore important.
Simulated Response:
After the calculation run, the simulated pressures and Flow Rates exist as data channels
which are accessible for edit, analysis, etc., just like any real gauge data.
The following data columns will have been created, using the names specified in the
Advanced Simulation Control dialog:
Wellbore pressure and total downhole Flow Rate (i.e. at standard conditions) in
each well.
Sandface Flow Rate (i.e. at standard conditions) for each layer in each well.
Layer pressure in each layer at each Observation Point (if any).
The simplest (and quickest) application of the simulated data is the Pressure Overlay for
History Matching, created via the Overlay Pressure dialog (refer also to the comments
on the manipulation of data under Advanced Simulation - Well Test Design; these apply
504
PanSystem
equally to data generated for History Matching, if users wish to go further than the
Pressure Overlay).
Once the pressure response has been generated, the most straightforward use to which it
can be put is to overlay it with available gauge data for comparison. This is the History
Matching aspect of Advanced Simulation, and assumes, that users have well test data
already set-up for Analysis.
Since the simulated pressure exists as a data column, it could be plotted along with field
data in Dataprep. However, to avoid leaving the Analysis/Simulate environment, it is
preferable to select Plot on the Analysis menu. Select a test period and go to a suitable
diagnostic plot, or stay in Test Overview Plot.
505
Advanced Simulation - Well Test Design
Flow Rates for Test Design:

For well test design, users specify the rate sequence to be used for each well via the Test
Design button from the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog. Firstly, select a well (i.e. if
there is more than one) from the drop-down list in the Well to Edit section.
The subsequent procedure depends on whether the selected well is the Principal Well or
not.
Principal Well:
Select a well to be Principal Well, then select the Test Design button to generate the Edit
Test Design dialog and enter Flow Rate data for the Principal Well.
506
PanSystem
Once the Test Design has been edited, select OK to generate a Test Design sub-dialog.
Fill in a name for the internal Data File that will be created (i.e. default name TEST
DESIGN) and for the Rate Column (i.e. default name Test Rate).
The Initial Wellbore Pressure is defaulted to the pressure of Layer 1, specified in the Layer
Parameters dialog, but can be changed if desired.
507
This is a Wellbore Pressure - if different from the Layer Pressure/s, Advanced

Simulation will compute production (if under-balanced) or injection (if over-
balanced) during the early time-steps.
On selecting OK from the Test Design sub-dialog, this will create a surface rate channel
with rate values at each of the time-steps chosen (e.g. 50 logarithmically spaced). This is
what will drive Advanced Simulation. If this surface rate data is subsequently plotted, the
time-steps will be visible. These time-steps can be viewed or edited via the Edit button in
the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog, in the same way as any other data columns.
Other Wells:
If multiple wells are present, users can either enter new times and Flow Rates for each
well independently, or use the time-steps created for the Principal Well and just enter
different Flow Rates. Proceed as follows:
Select an interfering well (i.e. one that is not the Principal Well) from the drop-down list
in the Well to Edit section, then select the Test Design button, to generate a Confirm sub-
dialog, with the message - "Do you wish to use the Principal Well Times?". By selecting
the No option (i.e. recommended and default option), a Test Design sub-dialog is
generated for user input of Test Design Data Names.
The surface rate data for Well 2 has been given the name Well 2 Qsurf in the Rate
Column for this example. The Data File name has defaulted to TEST DESIGN and the
Initial Wellbore Pressure has also defaulted to the pressure of Layer 1, but both can be
changed if desired (e.g. TEST DESIGN2). On selecting OK, an Edit Test Design sub-dialog
is generated.
Enter the surface rate schedule for Well 2 (assumed to start at time = zero). In this
example, the well will be producing at 7.5 MMscf/day for 50 hours (i.e. the duration of the
period to be simulated at Well 1). Select OK.
508
PanSystem
After selecting the Test Design button, if users answer Yes in the confirmation
dialog (i.e. only recommended if a rate is to be entered at every time-step), a sub-
dialog will prompt for data names and initial wellbore pressure in the same way as
for answering No. The Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing sub-dialog that appears
next is also the same as for answering No, except that all the time-steps of the
Principal Well are listed. Type in the interfering well rates (i.e. where non-zero) at
each time (the Function button option can be used for block entries of the same
rate value).
This is obviously the more tedious approach and would not normally be used. Both
approaches will result in the creation of a surface rate column for the well called TEST
DESIGN2:Well2 Qsurf, in the Data File/Column List section of the Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog.
Regardless of which entry mode used (i.e. Yes or No), the surface rate schedule for
interfering wells will be sampled only at the time-steps of the Principal Well for simulation
purposes. The No option is the quickest way of entering data and can be used in most
situations.
If the well, layer, fluid and boundary parameters have already been set-up, proceed to
the Advanced Simulation option under the Simulate menu option.
Implementation Example:
Data Input:
The Advanced Simulation Control dialog as it would appear for a two-well/three-layer
reservoir Test Design is illustrated below:
509
Well area:
Input Datafile/Column Name: The pressure response in each well is computed
according to the surface rates specified by the user. The surface rate column
names are displayed here for each well in the reservoir. In the above example, the
surface rate for Well-1 is Test Rate, and for Well-2 is Well2 Qsurf, set-up using the
Test Design option as described earlier.
If there is a choice of rate data names available for any well, users can select the
appropriate one from the pull-down menu. Normally there would be no choice.
Output Datafile Name: The names indicate the data file names under which the
simulated data columns will be grouped for each well. For example, in illustration
above, the simulated response for Well 1 will appear as extra columns under the
TEST DESIGN file name. This name cannot be edited. The simulated response for
Well 2 will appear as columns of data under the new file name SIMULATED that will
be created for Well 2. This name can be edited.
Output Column Names (Names button): Select this button and enter names (max
15 characters) for the simulated flowing pressure, total downhole Flow Rate and
individual layer Flow Rates, or leave the default names.
Layer area:
Solution Model area: Ignore this area unless an alternative response function to one
or more layers is to be supplied. The supplied dimensionless response function for
the selected flow model is displayed - FINWBR is the finite wellbore radius solution
for radial flow in a homogeneous medium applied to Layers 1 and 3, and INFCON is
infinite conductivity, vertical fracture solution applied to Layer 2.
The response functions available for the particular reservoir flow model assigned to
each layer can be listed via the drop-down menu, and can be re-assigned if a choice
exists. If users want to change the flow model (for history matching to gauge
data), they need to select the Model option on the Analysis menu and use the
Select Analysis Model dialog.
These response functions are dimensionless tables supplied with PanSystem, with
the extension (*.TCX). They have the same format as the Type-Curve files (refer
to Type-Curve File for details) and are stored in the Type-Curve Directory. This
510
PanSystem
enables alternative user-supplied solutions to be used in Advanced Simulation

(refer to Advanced Simulation - Generating Type-Curves).
Speed Option area: The speed option determines the speed of the computation.
Speed is traded off against the detail with which rate variations are treated by
superposition.
m(p) Layer: Ignore this if there is only one layer and/or an oil or water fluid type.
For gas and condensate fluid types, if there are several layers with different fluid
properties, users must select which pseudo-pressure table to use in the simulation
(no mixing of pseudo-properties is possible).
Gauge Details: If required, the effects of pressure gauge characteristics (e.g.
resolution, noise and/or drift), can be included in the simulated response.
Observation Points button: An Observation Point is a remote point defined in the
reservoir at coordinates (x, y), at which pressure will be calculated. Up to 5 points
can be specified. Where there are several layers, a pressure is calculated at each
point in each layer.
Start Pressures button: This allows users to alter Start Pressures without leaving
Simulation Mode. These pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common
datum (i.e. there is no hydrostatic difference between layers). The initial condition
of the system (i.e. at time zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-
steps. The Layer Pressure of each layer (i.e. set-up via Layer Parameters in
Dataprep) and the Initial Wellbore Pressure in each well (i.e. set-up via Rate
Changes in Dataprep) are therefore important.
Simulated Response:
After the calculation run, the simulated pressures and Flow Rates exist as data channels
which are accessible for edit, analysis, etc., just like any real gauge data.
The following data columns will have been created, using the names specified in the
Advanced Simulation Control dialog:
Wellbore pressure and total downhole Flow Rate (i.e. at standard conditions) in
each well.
Sandface Flow Rate (i.e. at standard conditions) for each layer in each well.
Layer pressure in each layer at each Observation Point (if any).
511
In this example illustrated for Well 1:

The file Test Rate is the name given to the input surface rate schedule that drove
the simulation. Well pressure and associated Flow Rate columns are all grouped
under the file name TEST DESIGN.
The file Sim P, is the simulated flowing pressure response, default name. Similarly,
the file Sim Q Total, is the simulated total downhole Flow Rate for the well (i.e. as
would be observed above the top perforations). The consecutive files Sim Q#1,
Sim Q#2, etc., are the sandface Flow Rates from each layer. All Flow Rates are at
standard conditions and grouped under the file name SIMULATED.
The consecutive files Obs 1 Layer 1, Obs 1 Layer 2, etc., are the pressures
calculated in each layer at the co-ordinates of the Observation Point #1 (refer to
Advanced Simulation Observation Points sub-dialog). They are grouped under the
file name Observation.
The Well 2 data follows a similar format, except:
The file Well 2 Qsurf is the name given to the input surface rate schedule that drove
the simulation. Well pressure and associated Flow Rate columns are all grouped
under the file name TEST DESIGN2.
All the simulation data (e.g. Sim P, etc.), for Well 2 are distinct from the analogous
data for Well 1.
There is no observation data for Well 2.
Inspection of Simulated Data:
Once the simulated data channels have been created in Advanced Simulation, they have
the same status as real gauge data and can be treated in the same way. All aspects of
the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog are applicable. To examine the overall test
response versus time, select the appropriate well, highlight the data to be plotted and
include it in the List to Plot (e.g. Well 1, Sim P), then select the Plot button. Data can be
inspected and edited using the DataPrep Toolbar and Data Edit Plot options.
512
PanSystem
Analysis of Simulated Data:

Data can also be analyzed on the diagnostic plots.
Single- Well, Single-Layer: If new data has been generated using Test Design, the
Rate Changes Table will be set up automatically and users can proceed directly with
Analysis. Select the Plot option from the Analysis menu and proceed as usual. This
greatly speeds-up the process of generation and inspection.
Multi-Well, Multi-Layer: In more complex situations with several wells and/or
layers, some selections may have to be made before going into Analysis:
If more than one well is present, first select the one to be analyzed. Using
the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog, select the well for analysis in the
Well to Edit section.
Select the Data File (group name), Pressure and Rate columns to be
analyzed in the Master Data File/Columns section (i.e. there will be a choice
if users have kept more than one run of simulated data).
In this example, the total downhole rate Sim Q Total, could have been chosen
instead of the surface rate Test Rate. The selection of downhole rate enables
users to correct for wellbore storage effects and other sources of rate
variation.
If the pressure data for a particular layer in a multi-layer reservoir is to be
analyzed, rather than the whole system, select the corresponding downhole
rate column name (e.g. Sim Q#1 for Layer 1).
If users wish to analyze the response of a multi-layer system as a single
composite unit, it is necessary to create a composite layer with average
properties using the Create Composite sub-dialog from the Well and Reservoir
Description (Analytical) dialog, then return to the Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog and select the surface rate Test Rate or total downhole
rate Sim Q Total, for use in the analysis of the simulated flowing pressure
response Sim P.
Now select OK and select the Plot option from the Analysis menu.
For a multi-well or multi-layer configuration, the Analysis Selection dialog is
generated.
Ensure that the appropriate well and layer are selected for analysis. They
should be consistent with the response data selected (e.g. the pressures and
rates for Layer 3, at stage 2 above). If the wrong well/layer are selected,
the wrong set of layer and fluid parameters will be used in the analysis of
the selected pressure data.
513
Remember that if one layer is being analyzed, the Flow Rate for that layer
should be used, not the total well rate (refer to stage 2 instructions).
Refer to Analysis Plot Overview to proceed.
514
PanSystem
Advanced Simulation - Generating Type-Curves
General:
The data displayed on a Log-Log Plot can be exported in dimensionless Type-Curve
format This process is described in the Help topic for TC (Type Curve) Export dialog.
If a pressure response is generated with Advanced Simulation, it can be saved in
dimensionless form by first preparing it for Analysis (refer to Analysis of Simulated Data
in Advanced Simulation - Well Test Design), then displaying it on the Log-Log Plot.
The TC (Type Curve) Export option from the Analysis menu, lists the available Type-Curve
file extensions for the particular flow model concerned (refer to the PanSystem File
Structures - Type-Curve File for details of the file format).
Creating Type-Curves:
With this facility users can create their own Type-Curves from Advanced Simulation (e.g.
for bounded or multi-layered reservoirs). Once created, they are available in the Type-
Curve directory (typcurv) for use in Type-Curve Analysis via the User-Selected Type-
Curve option in the Select Type Curve dialog. When this option is selected and users OK
from the Select Type Curve dialog, a File Open sub-dialog is generated to select suitable
curves from the Type-Curve directory (typcurv).
Creating a Solution Model:
The (*.TCX) export format is only available for the radial homogeneous flow model and is
represented by a table of dimensionless time (Td) and dimensionless pressure (Pd) values
in Type-Curve format (refer to Type-Curve File for details of the file structure) that can be
picked up from the Type-Curve directory (typcurv) by Advanced Simulation and used as
an alternative flow model within the Solution Model area of the Advanced Simulation
Control dialog. The (*.TCX) files are all constant rate drawdown responses; build-ups,
etc. are handled by superposition.
Example:
A constant-rate drawdown, bounded reservoir response is generated with Advanced
Simulation (e.g. a closed reservoir needing a large number of image wells), then saved as
a (*.TCX) file called BOUND1.
An alphanumeric curve label is inserted at the prompt (i.e. maximum of 15 characters).
The response function is saved to the Type-Curve directory (typcurv). For any
subsequent runs, the image wells can be eliminated and this alternative model can be
used by selecting the new (*.TCX) file name within the Solution Model area of the
Advanced Simulation Control dialog.
The image wells are no longer needed because the boundaries are now implicit in the flow
model, so they must be cancelled in theBoundary Parameters sub-dialog (accessed from
the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog), by setting the boundary model to
Infinitely Acting. Computation time is then reduced dramatically.
In this particular example, the substitution will be valid provided the permeability is not
changed, since this would alter the dimensionless time at which the boundary response
would be observed.
Hints for Generating (*.TCX) Files:
For those who wish to use this facility for generating a custom response function with
Advanced Simulation, some guidelines are provided below to ensure good results:
515
Using the Test Design facility (i.e. described in Advanced Simulation - Well Test Design),
set-up an Advanced Simulation for a constant-rate drawdown and follow these steps:
1. The duration of this drawdown period should greatly exceed the total duration of
the test that will subsequently be simulated (e.g. 106 hours). The 50
logarithmically-spaced steps (default setting) are usually adequate. The Flow Rate
is irrelevant because the pressure response will be saved in dimensionless form -
use a "typical" value.
2. Use the correct permeability, porosity, etc. It is advisable to set the wellbore
storage coefficient (Cs) and skin factors (S and D), to zero so that the (*.TCX) file
represents the "clean" base response. Any desired (Cs), (S) and (D), can be
imposed during the subsequent simulation runs with the (*.TCX) file.
3. The (*.TCX) export facility is currently only available for the radial homogeneous
flow model. To save a (*.TCX) file from a different flow model, generate the
response using the desired model, then switch to radial homogeneous before
selecting the TC (Type Curve) Export option from the Analysis menu
4. When using the (*.TCX) response file for subsequent Advanced Simulation runs,
remember that the image wells are no longer required for the boundaries, so
cancel them in theBoundary Parameters sub-dialog (accessed from the Well and
Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog), by setting the boundary model to
Infinitely Acting.
5. Although the (*.TCX) file has been generated for a constant-rate drawdown, it can
be used for any subsequent flow sequence and superposition will be correctly
modelled.
6. If boundaries have been included in the (*.TCX) response, do not change
parameters (k), (), () or (Ct) when the response is used, as this will invalidate
the characteristic length (L) of the boundary geometry.
7. Since the (*.TCX) file has to be saved as a radial homogeneous model (refer to step
3), it follows that in order to be able to pick it up within the Solution Model area of
the Advanced Simulation Control dialog, the layer must be configured as radial
homogeneous.
8. A (*.TCX) file can be generated for each layer in a multi-layered reservoir by
making a base run of Advanced Simulation for each layer separately (i.e. one at a
time). The multi-layered system can then be modelled by configuring all layers and
specifying the appropriate (*.TCX) file for each one in the Solution Model area of
the Advanced Simulation Control dialog.
516
PanSystem
PanSystem Deliverability Menu Index
The following menu options can be used to enter the Deliverability section of the program
where IPR calculations and plots can be performed for producers and injectors:
IPR: A number of different IPR dialogs and plots can be generated, depending on:
The fluid model type selected (i.e. oil, water, gas or condensate).
The analysis data that is available for the currently loaded model (i.e. LIT
Analysis, C&n Analysis, etc.).
Whether the well is an injector (i.e. Injectivity IPR curve plotted) or a
producer (i.e. Deliverability IPR curve plotted).
PanSystem also provides two methods for calculating the IPR of a reservoir:
Fitting to Measured Test Point Data.
Semi-Theoretical Derivation using results from transient welltest analysis
(i.e. k and S) and extended drawdown analysis
Forecasting: This facility is used to set-up and provide forecasts of well production
rate versus time once the deliverability characteristics of the well have been
determined. All reservoir and boundary models which may be defined in
PanSystem are available in the forecasting model, with the exception of:
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary.
Commingled Layers.
The Forecasting option is not available for Injection Wells.
517
Deliverability Menu
IPR Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Overview
General:
A number of different IPR dialogs and plots can be generated when users select the IPR
option from the Deliverability menu, depending on:
The fluid model type selected (i.e. oil, water, gas or condensate).
The analysis data that is available for the currently loaded model (i.e. LIT Analysis,
C&n Analysis, etc.).
Whether the well is an injector (i.e. Injectivity IPR curve plotted) or a producer (i.e.
Deliverability IPR curve plotted).
PanSystem also provides two methods for calculating the IPR of a reservoir:
Fitting to Measured Test Point Data:
For oil and water fluid types, the program fits the Vgel IPR relation to
measured flowing pressures and rates (i.e. up to three Test Point
measurements are allowed).
For gas and condensate fluid types, the IPR curve is computed either:
Using the Darcy (B) and Non-Darcy (F) flow coefficients estimated by
an LIT Analysis of measured flowing pressures and rates,
or
Using the C-coefficient and n-exponent obtained from a simplified
C&n Analysis of measured data.
Semi-Theoretical Derivation:
This is performed using results from transient well test analysis (i.e. k and S) and
extended drawdown analysis (i.e. A and CA):
For oil and water fluid types, the Productivity Index (J), is calculated from
the semi-steady-state inflow equation and the Vgel IPR relation applied.
For gas and condensate fluid types:
LIT: The Darcy flow coefficient (B), is calculated from the semi-
steady state inflow equation, the Non-Darcy flow coefficient (F), is
derived from a rate versus skin analysis of transient well test data.
The IPR curve is then calculated,
or
C&n: The Stabilized Deliverability, is estimated from a theoretical
stabilized flow rate.
For more specific details about plot types and analysis functions available within the
Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Screen, refer to the Help topic for the Deliverability
Toolbar.
Fluid-Specific Screen Dialogs:
The following dialogs are generated to perform oil, water, gas and condensate
deliverability or injectivity calculations. At the top of each dialog there is an Injection
Well checkbox that allows users to plot an injectivity curve (i.e. pressure increasing with
518
PanSystem
rate), for all fluid types. This checkbox should be checked for injection well
calculations and unchecked for production well calculations.
Note that if the Injection Well checkbox is checked in any of the IPR dialogs,
Production Forecasting is disallowed (i.e. the Production Forecasting option is
disabled in the Deliverability menu).
Deliverability/Injectivity - Oil or Water: When users select the IPR
menu option and the fluid type is oil or water, the Deliverability/Injectivity Plot
screen is displayed in conjunction with the Transient and Welltest
Deliverability/Injectivity Results dialog. This is where the necessary data are
assembled and the Deliverability/Injectivity calculations are performed. The IPR
can either be calculated from the results of transient and extended drawdown
analysis, or from production test data.
The dialog is comprised of three main data input/editing sections, described as
follows:
Layer Parameters section: This information is derived from the Well and
Reservoir Description (Analytical) section and will also contain any diagnostic
plot results confirmed by users with the Cnf button during Analysis. The
Dietz Shape Factor (CA) and Drainage Area (A) may have been confirmed
from the Cartesian Plot analysis of an extended drawdown. Edit this data as
required.
For an injection well, the Bubble Point (Pb) data input field should be
disabled (i.e. oil will be treated with a straight-line IPR).
Transient Well Test Data section: The Permeability (k) and Darcy Skin
(S) are also supplied from the reservoir description (and confirmed from
Semi-Log or Type-Curve analysis). Edit this data as required. The
Productivity Index (J), can be computed from the pseudo-steady-state inflow
equation and the AOF from the Vgel relationship.
The AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow) calculation is carried out at Pwf = 14.7
psia. Note that the AOF calculation facility is not enabled if the Injection
Well checkbox is checked and an Injectivity Index (J), is computed instead
of a Productivity Index (J). For Transient Well Test Data, the IPR line is
plotted up to P = 2 x P(layer) or 10,000 psia, whichever is greater.
Production/Injection Test Data section: This is an optional section that
allows entry of up to three Test Points (i.e. either measured flowing
pressure/rate pairs for production or measured injection pressure/rate pairs
for injection). A Vgel Curve may be fitted through the point/s, and the
Productivity Index (J) and AOF computed (i.e. for Deliverability). If only one
Test Point is entered, the IPR curve will be fitted through that point and the
prevailing Layer Pressure. If two or three Test Points are specified, a best-fit
will be created through them and the prevailing Layer Pressure is not
included in the fit. Instead, an extrapolation is made to zero rate and an
Estimated Shut-in Pressure is calculated. This value can then be used to
revise the Layer Pressure if appropriate.
519
of a Productivity Index (J), from a straight-line fit of J = Qinj/{Pwf -

P(layer)}. Each Injection IPR is a straight-line plotted upwards from (0,
P(layer)), using Qinj = J.(Pwf - P(layer)). For Test Point Data, the IPR line is
plotted up to P = 2 x (estimated shut-in pressure) or 10,000 psia, whichever
is greater.
Deliverability/Injectivity - Gas or Condensate: When users select
the IPR menu option and the fluid type is gas or condensate, the
Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen is displayed in conjunction with the Transient
Well Test and LIT Results dialog. This is where the necessary data are assembled
and the Deliverability/Injectivity calculations are performed. The Deliverability can
either be calculated from the results of transient and extended drawdown analysis,
or from production test data, using the LIT or simplified C&n methods.
No attempt is made to model the effects of liquid dropout in the case of a

retrograde condensate - flow is assumed to be single-phase gas.
The dialog is comprised of three main data sections, but will vary in appearance and
functionality depending on the calculation method that is adopted. These dialogs
are described as follows:
Transient Well Test and LIT Calculations: If a C&n Analysis has not
been performed, the dialog is entitled Transient Well Test and LIT Results
and contains the following data sections:
Layer Parameters section: This information is supplied from the
reservoir description, which will contain any diagnostic plot results
confirmed by users with the Cnf button during Analysis. The Dietz
Shape Factor (CA) and Drainage Area (A) may have been confirmed
from the Cartesian Plot analysis of an extended drawdown. Edit this
data as required.
Transient Well Test Data section: The Permeability (k), Darcy
Skin (S) and Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), are also supplied from
the reservoir description (and perhaps confirmed from a Semi-Log
and Multi-Rate S versus Q Analysis). Edit this data as required. The
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), may be computed from the pseudo-
steady-state inflow equation, the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient
(D), from (F) and (k), and the AOF from (F) and (B).
The AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow) calculation is carried out at Pwf =

14.7 psia. Note that the AOF calculation facility is not enabled if the
Injection Well checkbox is checked.
LIT Analysis Data section: The Darcy Flow Coefficient (B) and
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), can be confirmed values from the LIT
Analysis of a multi-rate test. Edit this data if required.
If an LIT Analysis has not been performed in PanSystem, but users
have values for the (B) and (F) coefficients, check the Include LIT
Analysis Data checkbox and type in the values.
If an LIT Analysis has been performed in PanSystem, the Rate-
Dependent Skin Coefficient (D), can be computed from (F) and (k), and
the AOF from (F) and (B).
520
PanSystem
This final part of this section is only active if users have performed
an LIT Analysis.

Injection Well checkbox is checked. The Injection IPR is a curved-
line plotted upwards from (0, P(layer)), using the deliverability
equation m(p) = BQinj + F(Qinj)2. The IPR line is plotted up to P = 2
x P(layer) or 10,000 psia, whichever is greater. The final flowing
pressures from the three selected injection periods should also be
displayed on the Injectivity LIT Plot options.
C&n Method: If a C&n Analysis has been performed, the dialog is entitled
C&n Results and contains the following data sections:
Layer Parameters section: This information is supplied from the
reservoir description, which will contain any diagnostic plot results
confirmed by users with the Cnf button during Analysis (e.g. of a
build-up test). The Dietz Shape Factor (CA) will default to a value of
31.62 and the Drainage Area (A) will default to 640 acres (i.e. equal
to 259 ha or 1 section spacing), if they are not initialised. Edit this
data as required.
Extended Data section: The C&n coefficients are derived from the
C&n Analysis (i.e. if confirmed). Edit this data as required. Users
can also compute the AOF.

Stabilized Data section: The Stabilized Flowing Pressure is the
pressure recorded at the end of the extended flow period (or the last
extended flow period in the case of a flow-after-flow test). Edit this
data if required. Users can compute the theoretical Stabilized Flow
Rate corresponding to this flowing pressure, from the pseudo-steady-
state inflow equation using (k), (S), (A) and (CA). The Stabilized C-
coefficient is then calculated from this flowrate using the n-
coefficient, and the Stabilized AOF.

The C&n Results - Additional Data sub-dialog is generated by
selecting the More Results button. The Radius of Investigation may
be computed for the extended flowing point. The Time to
Stabilization is the theoretical time at which the Stabilized Flow Rate
will be attained.
The Injection IPR is a curved-line plotted upwards from (0, P(layer)),

using the deliverability equation Qinj = C.(p2)n. The IPR line is
plotted up to P = 2 x P(layer) or 10,000 psia, whichever is greater.
The final flowing pressures from the three selected injection periods
521
should be displayed on the IPR curve in the Injectivity Extended Lin

and Extended Log Plot options. The stabilized flowing pressure/rate
point should be displayed on the IPR curve in the Injectivity
Stabilized Lin and Stabilized Log Plot options.
Plotting Multiple IPR Calculations:
PanSystem allows up to five IPR calculations to be overlaid on the same plot. This
is useful when users wish to compare a number of possible scenarios (e.g. different
skin factors).
At the bottom right of each dialog there is a checkbox with a number and two green
arrows. This allows users to navigate between the various IPR calculations to be
defined and used. The default dialog page is page 0, with the additional IPR dialog
pages numbered 1 to 4.
To include a page of calculated IPR data in a Deliverability/Injectivity Plot, select
the relevant page number and check the checkbox.
When users select OK from any of these main dialogs the Deliverability/Injectivity
Plot Screen is displayed in conjunction with the Deliverability Toolbar.
522
PanSystem
IPR Transient Well Test Deliverability/Injectivity Results

(Oil/Water) Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when users select the IPR option from the Deliverability menu
and the current fluid type is oil or water. The Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen is
displayed in conjunction with this dialog, which is used to perform the IPR calculations for
oil deliverability or water injectivity, using results derived from transient welltest and
extended drawdown analysis, or from production test data. Where both sets of data are
available, this allows users to check for consistency of the reservoir parameters.
PanSystem allows up to five IPR calculations to be overlaid on a single plot. This allows a
range of possible scenarios to be compared (e.g. different skin factors).
The dialog is comprised of three data entry/edit sections with associated checkboxes, four
function buttons and a page scrolling/selection facility to allow multiple IPR calculations to
be performed and/or included on the IPR plot (i.e. up to a maximum of five). The generic
dialog for production or injection wells is described as follows:
Injection Well checkbox: This should only be checked if an injection well is
under consideration.
disabled in the Deliverability menu). This selection also enables textual and
computational changes within some of the sections described below:
Reservoir Description (Analytical) section and will also contain any diagnostic plot
results confirmed by users with the Cnf button during Analysis. If a checkbox is
checked, the associated parameter will always be re-set to the current confirmed
value whenever the IPR dialog box is re-entered or the Calculate button is selected.
To preserve a different value during sensitivity calculations, uncheck the checkbox
to prevent the value being re-set.
Layer Pressure P(layer): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Bubble Point Pressure (Pb): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Dietz Shape Factor (CA): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Drainage Area (A): Accept, enter or edit as required.
For an injection well, the Bubble Point (Pb) data input field should be
disabled (i.e. oil will be treated with a straight-line IPR).
Transient Welltest Data section: This section requires the Horizontal
Permeability (k) and the Skin Factor (S), derived from the Well and Reservoir
Description (Analytical) section (and confirmed from Semi-Log or Type-Curve
analysis). The Productivity Index (J), can be computed from the pseudo-steady-
state inflow equation and the AOF from the Vgel relationship. The inflow equation
used for the IPR assumes semi-steady-state radial flow. For some reservoir models
(e.g. radial homogeneous and dual-porosity), the skin factor and permeability can
be transferred directly from the confirmed values in the Model Parameters section
523
(i.e. derived from diagnostic plot analysis, etc.), since they already correspond to
radial flow.
For other models with a pseudo-radial component (e.g. partial penetration,
horizontal well, etc.) the equivalent Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr), must be
calculated from the mechanical Skin Factor (S), stored in Model Parameters. The
Model Parameters button (described below), is used for this purpose and is only
enabled when a pseudo-radial component is present.
If a checkbox is checked, the associated parameter will always be re-set to the
current confirmed value whenever the IPR dialog box is re-entered or the Calculate
button is selected. To preserve a different value during sensitivity calculations,
uncheck the checkbox to prevent the value being re-set.
Permeability (k): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Skin (S): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Productivity/Injectivity Index (J): This is a dialog-specific calculation
performed for producer (Productivity Index) or injector (Injectivity Index),
using the Calculate button (described below).
AOF: This information is only available for producers and not enabled if the
of a Productivity Index (J).
Production/Injection Test Data section: This is an optional section that allows
entry of up to three Test Points (i.e. either measured flowing pressure/rate pairs for
production or measured injection pressure/rate pairs for injection). A Vgel Curve
may be fitted through the point/s, and the Productivity Index (J) and AOF computed
(i.e. for Deliverability). If only one Test Point is entered, the IPR curve will be fitted
through that point and the prevailing Layer Pressure. If two or three Test Points
are specified, a best-fit will be created through them and the prevailing Layer
Pressure is not included in the fit. Instead, an extrapolation is made to zero rate
and an Estimated Shut-in Pressure is calculated. This value can then be used to
revise the Layer Pressure if appropriate.
Test Point 1 Flowing/Injection Pressure: Enter the pressure for the first test
point.
Test Point 1 Flow/Injection Rate: Enter the rate for the first test point.
Test Point 2 Flowing/Injection Pressure: Enter the pressure for the second
test point.
Test Point 2 Flow/Injection Rate: Enter the rate for the second test point.
Test Point 3 Flowing/Injection Pressure: Enter the pressure for the third test
point.
Test Point 3 Flow/Injection Rate: Enter the rate for the third test point.
Estimated Shut-In Pressure: Calculated as described above.
Productivity/Injectivity Index (J): Calculated as described below.
Injection Well checkbox is checked. Calculated as described below.
524
PanSystem
Calculate button: Select this button to calculate the Productivity/Injectivity

Index and the AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow) from the Vgel relationship using the
Transient Welltest Data.
The AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow) calculation is carried out at Pwf = 14.7 psia. For
reservoirs below bubble point, (J) is the slope of the IPR at lim|Q ->0|. Note that
the AOF calculation facility is not enabled if the Injection Well checkbox is checked
and an Injectivity Index (J), is computed instead of a Productivity Index (J).
Page Scrolling/Selection Facility: This is situated at the bottom right corner of
the dialog and is comprised of a checkbox with a number and two green arrows.
This allows users to scroll between each IPR calculation that is to be defined and
used. The default dialog page is page 0 and the additional IPR dialog pages are
numbered 1 to 4. To include a page of calculated data on the IPR plot, select the
required page number and check the associated checkbox.
Model Parameters button: For other models with a pseudo-radial component
(e.g. partial penetration, horizontal well, etc.) the equivalent Pseudo-Radial Skin
Factor (Spr), must be calculated from the mechanical Skin Factor (S), stored in the
Model Parameters section, using other relevant parameters (e.g. penetration ratio,
well length, etc.), as appropriate for the current model. Additionally, for the dual-
permeability and radial composite models, the permeability is converted to full
thickness or outer region permeability respectively. Select the Model Parameters
button to generate a Deliverability/Injectivity Model Parameters sub-dialog for
viewing or editing the Layer Parameters involved in these conversions.
525
IPR Transient Well Test and LIT Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog
General:
and the current fluid type is gas or condensate. An LIT Analysis may also have been
performed. The Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen is displayed in conjunction with this
dialog, which is used to perform the IPR calculations for gas/condensate deliverability or
injectivity, using results derived from transient well test and extended drawdown
analysis, production test data, using the LIT (i.e. if an LIT Analysis has been performed).
For retrograde condensate fluid types, all surface production figures refer to
separator gas. However, the fluid will be modelled as a single-phase "rich" or
"wet" gas in the reservoir, unless the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option has been
selected in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. The Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure option will model liquid dropout below dew-point and the
associated multi-phase relative permeability effects.
The dialog is comprised of three data entry/edit sections with associated checkboxes, four
be performed and/or included on the IPR plot (i.e. up to a maximum of five).
If an LIT Analysis has not been performed, the bottom section of the dialog will be
disabled.
The generic dialog for production or injection wells is described as follows:
Dietz Shape Factor (CA): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Drainage Area (A): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Transient Well Test Data section: This section requires the Horizontal
Permeability (k), the Skin Factor (S) and the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D),
derived from the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) section (and confirmed
526
PanSystem
from Semi-Log or Type-Curve analysis). The Productivity Index (J), can be

computed from the pseudo-steady-state inflow equation and the AOF from the
Vgel relationship. The inflow equation used for the IPR assumes semi-steady-
state radial flow. For some reservoir models (e.g. radial homogeneous and dual-
porosity), the skin factor and permeability can be transferred directly from the
confirmed values in the Model Parameters section (i.e. derived from diagnostic plot
analysis, etc.), since they already correspond to radial flow.
For other models with a pseudo-radial component (e.g. partial penetration,
horizontal well, etc.) the equivalent pseudo-radial skin terms (Spr) and (Dpr), must
be calculated from the mechanical skin (S), and the rate-dependent skin coefficient
(D), stored in Model Parameters. The Model Parameters button (described below),
is used for this purpose and is only enabled when a pseudo-radial component is
present.
If a checkbox is checked, the associated parameter will always be re-set to the
current confirmed value whenever the IPR dialog box is re-entered or the Calculate
button is selected. To preserve a different value during sensitivity calculations,
uncheck the checkbox to prevent the value being re-set.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B): Calculated as described below.
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): Calculated as described below.
Well checkbox is checked.
Include LIT Analysis Data: To include LIT data, check the checkbox.
LIT Analysis Data section: This is an optional section, activated by checking the
checkbox described above. If the checkbox is already activated, the Non-Darcy
Flow Coefficient (F) and Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), will be confirmed values from
the LIT Analysis of a multi-rate test (i.e. if this type of analysis has been
performed). If an LIT Analysis has not been performed in PanSystem, but users
have values for the (B) and (F) coefficients, check the checkbox and type in the
values.
Note that the pseudo-radial nomenclatures (Bpr) and (Fpr) replace (B) and (F) for
consistency with the transient section for those models where this is relevant.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): Calculated as described below.
Calculate button: Select this button to compute the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B)
from the pseudo-steady state inflow equation, the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient
527
(D) from (F) and (k), and the AOF from (F) and (B), using the values obtained from
the transient well test data.
The Calculate facility will also compute the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D)
from (F) and (k), and the AOF from (F) and (B), using the values obtained from the
LIT Analysis.
As each dialog page produces an independent set of data, the Calculate button
must be selected for each page once users are satisfied with the entered data.
Always select Calculate if any data has been changed.
The AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow) calculation is carried out at Pwf = 14.7 psia.
Note that the AOF calculation facility is not enabled if the Injection Well checkbox
is checked.
(e.g. partial penetration, horizontal well, etc.) the equivalent pseudo-radial skin
terms (Spr) and (Dpr), must be calculated from the mechanical skin (S), and the
rate-dependent skin coefficient (D), stored in the Model Parameters section, using
other relevant parameters (e.g. penetration ratio, well length, etc.), as appropriate
for the current model. Additionally, for the dual-permeability and radial composite
models, the permeability is converted to full thickness or outer region permeability
respectively. Select the Model Parameters button to generate a
Deliverability/Injectivity Model Parameters sub-dialog for viewing or editing the
Layer Parameters involved in these conversions.
528
PanSystem
IPR C& Results (Gas/Condensate) Dialog
General:
and the current fluid type is gas or condensate and a C&n Analysis has been performed.
The Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen is displayed in conjunction with this dialog,
which is used to perform the IPR calculations for gas/condensate deliverability or
injectivity, using results derived from transient well test and C&n Analysis data.
The dialog is comprised of three data entry/edit sections with associated checkboxes, five
be performed and/or included on the IPR plot (i.e. up to a maximum of five).
The generic dialog for production or injection wells is described as follows:
Dietz Shape Factor (CA): Accept, enter or edit as required (i.e. defaults to
31.62 if not initialized).
Drainage Area (A): Accept, enter or edit as required (i.e. defaults to 640
acres (= 259 ha or 1 section spacing) if not initialized).
Extended Data section: The C&n coefficients are derived from the C&n Analysis
(i.e. if confirmed by users with the Cnf button during Analysis).
529
C-coefficient: Derived from a simplified C&n Analysis of measured data.

n-coefficient: Derived from a simplified C&n Analysis of measured data.
Well checkbox is checked.
Stabilized Data section:
Stabilized Flowing/Injection Pressure: This is the pressure recorded at the
end of the extended flow/injection period (or the last extended flow/injection
period in the case of a flow-after-flow test).
Stabilized Flow/Injection Rate: This is computed from the Stabilised
Flowing/Injection Pressure, from the pseudo-steady-state inflow equation
using (k), (S), (A) and (CA).
Stabilized C-coefficient: This is computed from the Stabilised Flow/Injection
Rate.
Stabilized AOF: This information is only available for producers and not
enabled if the Injection Well checkbox is checked. Calculated as described
below.
Calculate button: Selecting Calculate will compute the theoretical Stabilised
Flow/Injection Rate corresponding to this Flowing/Injection Pressure, from the
pseudo-steady state inflow equation using (k), (S), (A) and (CA). The Stabilised C-
coefficient is then calculated from this flow/injection rate using the n-coefficient,
then the Stabilised AOF (i.e. for producers only).
As each dialog page produces an independent set of data, the Calculate button
must be selected for each page once users are satisfied with the entered data.
Always select Calculate if any data has been changed.
The AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow) calculation is carried out at Pwf = 14.7 psia.
Note that the AOF calculation facility is not enabled if the Injection Well checkbox
is checked.
530
PanSystem
More Results button: The C&n Results - Additional Data sub-dialog is generated
by selecting the More Results button. In the sub-dialog, each overlying Calculation
section has a corresponding individual additional results screen. The Radius of
Investigation may be computed for the extended flowing point. The Time to
Stabilisation is the theoretical time at which the Stabilised Flow Rate will be
attained.
531
IPR C&n Results - Additional Data Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when users select the More Results button from the C&n
Results (Gas/Condensate) dialog. The Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen is displayed in
conjunction with this dialog, which is used to perform the IPR calculations for
gas/condensate deliverability or injectivity, using results derived from transient well test
and C&n Analysis data.
The dialog is comprised of three data entry/edit sections with one associated checkbox for
Skin (S), four function buttons. The generic dialog for production or injection wells is
Layer Parameters section:
Flow Capacity (kh): Accept, enter or edit as required.
Permeability (k): Accept, enter or edit as required. This value is derived
from the C&n Results dialog.
Skin (S): Accept, enter or edit as required. This value is derived from the
C&n Results dialog. If the checkbox is checked, the associated parameter
will always be re-set to the current confirmed value whenever the IPR
dialog box is re-entered or the Calculate button is selected. To preserve a
different value during sensitivity calculations, uncheck the checkbox to
prevent the value being re-set.
Skin Pressure Loss: This represents the pressure loss due to skin effects.
Accept, enter or edit as required.
Extended Data section:
Flow Efficiency: Accept, enter or edit as required.
Damage Ratio: Accept, enter or edit as required.
Stabilized Data section:
Radius of Investigation: This is computed for the extended flowing point.
Accept, enter or edit as required.
Time to Stabilization: This is the theoretical time at which the Stabilized
Flow Rate will be attained. Accept, enter or edit as required.
Stabilized Flow Rate: Accept, enter or edit as required. This value is
derived from the C&n Results dialog.
Calculate button: This button will re-calculate all other items in response to a
change in the entries for Permeability (k) and Skin (S) in this sub-dialog.
Users would not normally edit this screen as it should remain consistent with the
previous one.
532
PanSystem
533
IPR Model Parameters Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Model Parameters button from any of the
IPR Results dialogs.
This button is only enabled when a pseudo-radial component is present.

The inflow equation used for the IPR in Deliverability assumes semi-steady-state radial
flow. For some reservoir models (i.e. radial homogeneous and dual-porosity):
Oil IPR: The skin factor (S), and permeability (k), are required
Gas and Condensate IPR: The permeability (k), skin factor (S), and the rate-
dependent skin coefficient (D), are required.
These can be transferred directly from the confirmed values in the Model Parameters (i.e.
derived from diagnostic plot analysis, etc.), since they already correspond to radial flow.
For other models (e.g. partial penetration, horizontal well, etc.):
Oil IPR: The equivalent pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr), must be calculated from
the mechanical skin (S), stored in Model Parameters.
Gas and Condensate IPR: The equivalent pseudo-radial skin terms (Spr) and (Dpr),
must be calculated from the mechanical skin (S), and the rate-dependent skin
coefficient (D), stored in Model Parameters.
These calculations use other relevant parameters (e.g. perforation top distance (htop),
well length (Lw), etc.), as appropriate for the current model (refer to the Model
Parameters dialog for a full definition of these parameters in relation to the different well
models).
Additionally, for the dual-permeability and radial composite models, the permeability is
converted to full thickness or outer region permeability respectively.
This sub-dialog facilitates quick access for viewing, entering and/or editing the
parameters involved in these conversions. After entering and/or editing data in this sub-
dialog, select OK to calculate the pseudo-radial components, which will subsequently
appear in the Transient Well Test Data section of the current IPR Results dialog.
Users should uncheck the checkboxes in the Transient Well Test Data area of the
current IPR Results dialog to preserve pseudo-radial component values different
from the calculated ones.
534
PanSystem
Production Forecasting Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when users select the Forecasting option from the Deliverability
menu. The Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen is displayed in conjunction with this
dialog. For details of the Deliverability/Injectivity Plot screen button functions refer to the
Help topic for the Deliverability Toolbar.
If the Injection Well checkbox is checked in any of the IPR dialogs, Production
Forecasting is disallowed (i.e. the Production Forecasting option is disabled in the
Deliverability menu).
This facility is used to set-up and provide forecasts of well production rate versus time
once the deliverability characteristics of the well have been determined. In infinite or
partially-bounded reservoirs or drainage areas, the forecast shows the effect of changing
reservoir flow regimes and the response to boundaries. For closed systems, pressure
depletion and changing gas compressibility are modelled for long-term forecasting,
through transient, transitional and semi-steady or steady-state flow regimes. An option
is also provided to perform the forecast with constant fluid compressibility if required.
The forecasting facility is available for oil, gas and condensate systems.
All reservoir and boundary models which may be defined in PanSystem are available in
the forecasting model, with the exception of:
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary
Commingled Layers
The dialog is comprised of two data entry/edit sections, two selection areas and four
Time/Step section: The first section of this dialog is used to define the time
period of the forecast, calculation steps involved and the time-stepping regime that
will be employed.
Start/End: For Logarithmic Stepping, enter a Start time for the first time
step. Since flow rates are high initially, this should be a small value (e.g. in
the order of a few hours), to avoid material balance errors in closed
systems. Also enter the desired End time for the forecast.
No. of Steps: The calculations will be more accurate the more time steps
that are used. PanSystem defaults to a value of 50 steps. For closed
boundary configurations, greater precision will be obtained in the material
balance calculation if a larger number of steps is used.
535
Between 50-100 steps are recommended for trial runs, then 200-500 steps
or more for final runs (up to a maximum of 1050 steps).
Time Units: Select from the options of hours, days, months and years. This
will automatically adjust the entered End figure to the corresponding
quantity of the respective Time Unit.
A r;month is defined as 30.437 days (i.e. 365.25 days/12 months).

Linear/Logarithmic Stepping: There are two time-stepping regimes to
choose from:
Linear Stepping uses equally spaced time-steps.
Logarithmic Stepping uses logarithmically spaced steps starting from
a specified Start time (i.e. the time of the first step). This is the
default setting and is usually better, owing to the high and rapidly
changing production rates at the beginning.
Rate/Pressure/VFP section: This section deals with the production rates and
pressures.
Contract Rate: This represents the contracted maximum production rate. If
the rate is left at zero, then the forecasting calculations ignore this field.
Minimum Production Rate: This is the rate at which the production should
terminate during the forecast.
Simulate a constant rate production by setting the Contract Rate and the
Minimum Rate to the same value.
Two options are available for entering flowing pressure:
Constant BHP: If this option is selected, enter a Constant Bottom Hole
Pressure in the data entry field next to the checkfield.
Constant THP: This option is used for Tubing-Controlled production. This
option requires the import of a VFP Format Flowing Pressure File, and the
selection of a Top Hole Pressure value from this source. When this option is
checked, the three following dialog items are enabled:
VFP File Import button: To select a VFP Table, first select the
Constant THP option, then select this button. This will generate a
standard Windows File Open dialog where a valid (*.VFP) file can be
selected. After the table has been imported, select a Top Hole
Pressure value to base the forecast on (i.e. if more than one value is
present in the file).
WellFlo creates VFP Tables in its VFP File for Eclipse sub-menu option
via the Analysis - Export to Simulator menu options. Forecasting will
respect single well tables created in this way, or Eclipse VFP Tables
generated by other products, provided that the selected sensitivities
for creating the VFP Table are restricted to the values for 1) Flow
Rates, 2) Surface Pressures (Tubing-Head or Separator).
The table must be generated using the single value of Water-Cut

and GOR specified in PanSystem Fluid Parameters. Since PanSystem
only operates with a single fixed WCT and GOR, if multiple Water-
536
PanSystem
Cut and/or GOR values are used, the VFP Table will be read
incorrectly. For example, if users specify ten THP values in the VFP
File, PanSystem will read the first ten lines of BHP values and
ignore the rest. If there is only one Water-Cut and one GOR value,
these ten lines will correspond to the ten THP values. However, if
users specify several Water-Cut and GOR values, the first ten lines
will all correspond to the first THP with the various combinations of
Water-Cut and GOR. An example is given below:
--PRODUCTION WELL VFP TABLE 1

VFPPROD
1 5000.0 'LIQ' 'WCT' 'GOR' 'THP' ' ' 'FIELD' 'BHP' /
'LIQ' must be entered for Oil Wells, 'OIL' is not accepted. Do not
enter comment or blank lines before the first line or after the
VFPPROD line.
Current File: The first time a VFP Table is imported, PanSystem will
try to determine the nature of the Units (i.e. Metric Units or Oilfield
Units). The information is then displayed in this information field and
PanSystem assumes that this will be the default VFP Unit System for
subsequent PanSystem sessions.
Users may change the default setting in the Pansys31.ini folder by

opening the Windows Registry Editor (i.e. via Start/Run/Regedit
commands in Windows), then selecting
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Configuration and
editing the line, vfp-units = 0 for Oilfield Units or vfp-units = 1 for
Metric Units, (for more details on editing the Pansys31.ini folder,
refer to the Windows Registry).
The vfp-units entry will only appear in the Windows Registry after a
VFP Table has been imported for the first time. Consequently, this
particular Registry entry can only be used to set the default VFP Unit
System for subsequent VFP Table imports into PanSystem.
THP Units: Enter a Top Hole Pressure value to base the forecast on.
The current units system setting is displayed next to the data entry
field (e.g. psia).
Warning: The Registry Editor should always be used with great

care and there are three very important points to remember:
1. There is no undo option available in the Registry - if a key folder is
deleted accidentally it is permanently gone.
2. When the Registry is edited, all changes are saved instantly - there
is no option to r;re-load the Registry if something has been done
incorrectly.
3. Users will never know if they have done something wrong - there are
no warning pop-up dialogs to inform users of mistakes, errors, etc.
The Registry Editor will allow users to wipe everything clean
without supplying a warning.
537
Windows 95, 98, 2000, NT and XP all have a simple Registry back-up
mechanism that is quite reliable, but users should never rely on this
alone. Always remember to make a back-up of the Registry. The back-
up and restore methods will vary depending on the version of Windows
that is being used - consult the Registry Editor Help menu for version-
specific details of these methods.
For additional information relating to the Registry and the operations
that can be performed in the Registry Editor, users should also refer to:
The Registry Editor Help menu.
The dedicated website guide for the Windows Registry
accessed from the following URLs, http://
registry.winguides.com/ or http://www.regedit.com/.
Analysis/Data selection area: This section is used to specify the source of the
deliverability data. There are three options for gas and condensate systems, and
one for oil, as described below:
The Full Analysis and LIT options use pseudo-pressure and require a valid p
versus m(p) table and p//Ct table to be present in the relevant Fluid
Parameters sub-dialog of the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical)
dialog.
Full Analysis: This option uses the theoretical radial inflow equation to
compute the inflow characteristics of the well and drainage area. All phases
of transient flow, through semi-infinite acting (i.e. if boundaries are
present), to semi-steady or steady- state (i.e. where a closed system is
involved), are modelled analytically.
For gas and condensate wells this requires valid p versus m(p) and p//Ct
tables (refer to the relevant Fluid Parameters sub-dialogs from the Well and
Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog for Oil, Gas and Condensate). The
analytical form of the deliverability equation is used, and this requires the
entry of a valid set of model parameters. These parameters will depend on
the selected Boundary Model. This is the only option available for oil wells.
Please ensure that the mandatory parameters in the relevant Fluid

Parameters dialog (especially Ct), are consistent with these tables.
On selecting OK from this dialog, if users have selected any Boundary Model
except Infinitely Acting they will be presented with options relating to the
selected boundary model. All options allow no-flow boundaries and some
geometries can include constant pressure boundaries (i.e. where specifically
stated, or where a Boundary Parameters button appears as part of the dialog.
On selecting OK from the boundary dialog/s, or if the well is Infinitely Acting,
a Forecasting sub-dialog is generated. The values for Permeability (K), Darcy
Skin (S) and Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D), will default to the currently
confirmed values. However, these values can be edited if required. The
Start and End times are provided for information only and cannot be edited
on this sub-dialog.
Note, as in Quick Match, the skin terms (S) and (D), relate to the true or
mechanical skin factors at the wellbore.
538
PanSystem
Selecting the Calculate button will generate the forecast which can be
previewed behind the Forecasting sub-dialog. When completed, users can
either select the OK/Confirm button to accept the forecast, or the Cancel
button to ignore the forecast preview, or modify the model parameters and
select Calculate again.
Four plots are available for the forecast.
LIT Analysis: This option (for gas and condensate only), uses the (B) and
(F) coefficients derived from an LIT Analysis. This again requires valid p
versus m(p) and p//Ct tables.

LIT forecasting is applicable to wells which have attained semi-steady, or
steady-state flow. The forecast uses the following deliverability equation:
m(p) = BQ + FQ 2
Where (B) is the Darcy Flow Coefficient and (F) is the Non-Darcy or Turbulant
Flow Coefficient.
Because the (B) and (F) coefficients relate to semi-steady-state flow,
transient behaviour is not modelled in the production forecast. Flow is
assumed to be semi-steady-state from the beginning.
On selecting OK from this Production Forecasting dialog, an LIT Analysis
Forecasting sub-dialog is generated. The values for Layer Pressure (P_lay),
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), are all defaulted
to values which exist if a previous LIT Analysis has been performed. These
values can be edited if required. The Start and End times are displayed for
information only and cannot be edited on this sub-dialog.
previewed behind this dialog. When completed, users can either select the
OK/Confirm button to accept the forecast, or the Cancel button to ignore the
forecast preview, or modify the model parameters and select Calculate again.
Forecasting then displays the same plot and data export options as for the
Full Analysis option described above.
C&n Analysis: This option (for gas and condensate only), uses the
coefficients of the "simplified" C&n method, and no transient behaviour is
modelled.
Although the C&n method does not require an m(p) table it does require a
p//Ct table to model the change in compressibility with pressure.

C&n forecasting is applicable to wells which have attained semi-steady, or
steady-state flow. The forecast uses the following deliverability equation:
Q = C(p2)n
Where C and n are the coefficient and exponent derived from a C&n Analysis
On selecting OK from this Production Forecasting dialog, a C&n Analysis
Forecasting sub-dialog is generated. The values for Layer Pressure (P_lay),
539
C-coefficient (C), n-exponent (n), are all defaulted to values which exist if a
previous C&n Analysis has been performed. These values can be edited if
required. The Start and End times are provided for information only and
cannot be edited on this sub-dialog.
previewed behind this dialog. When completed, users can either select the
OK/Confirm button to accept the forecast, or the Cancel button to ignore the
forecast preview, or modify the model parameters and select Calculate again.
Forecasting then displays the same plot and data export options as for the
Full Analysis option described above.
Field Wide Trend selection area: This facility is used to apply an adjustment to
the material balance of the field. Select this button to generate the Fieldwide Trend
sub-dialog.
The sub-dialog has single data entry field. Enter a positive value to superpose a
declining field-wide pressure trend (depletion), or a negative value for an increasing
trend (pressure maintenance).
Select OK to apply the adjustment and return to the main Production Forecasting
dialog.
This correction is only activated for the Closed System Boundary Models.
540
PanSystem
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Menu
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Plot Overview
General:
The PDA facility is accessed via the Plot sub-menu option under the PDA main menu item.
The PDA facility is only available for a Closed System Boundary Model; this can be
selected from either the Boundary Model dialog in Dataprep (Analytical) or the
Select Analysis Model dialog in Analysis.
It is not necessary to select a Test Period (or Periods) to use the ECR facility, since
PanSystem will always process the entire dataset.
For the Agarwal-Gardner Type-Curve options users must select a Test Period (or
Periods) for Analysis. To Group Test Periods, hold down the Shift key, then left-
click and scroll through the required Periods within the Ruler Bar above the Plot and
release the mouse button; multiple Test Periods will now appear as a single Test
Period. To revert back to the individual Test Periods, simply hold down the Shift
key and apply a mouse-click to the Ruler Bar. Ensure that the last selected Test
Period is not a Build-Up, since PDA only deals with Flowing Data.
It is possible to group ALL Test Periods without having to drag the cursor through
them, by holding down the Ctrl key and right-clicking in any Test Period in the ruler
bar. All of the periods will be grouped automatically. Note that if the last period is
a buildup it will not be included in the group. To revert back to the individual Test
Periods, hold down the Ctrl key and apply a right mouse-click to the Ruler Bar.
Pressure Decline Analysis (PDA), involves the Analysis of long-term Flowing Pressure
and Production Data to derive estimates for:
Original Hydrocarbons in Place (i.e. OOIP or OGIP)
Reservoir Quality (k, S, Spr, etc.)
Reservoir Area (A)
Dietz Shape Factor (CA)
Fracture Effectiveness (Sf , Xf )
A Boundary Analysis can also be performed using Derivative Matching to get the
Reservoir Geometry if the data are good enough (e.g. channel identification, etc.).
PanSystem has to deal with large quantities of data with this PDA facility (i.e. from
Permanent Downhole Gauges (PDGs), Wellhead Gauges, etc.). In particular, masses of
Flow Rate data over an extended period, that will need to be prepared for use with the
Pressure data. This Flow Rate data will probably come from daily reports, but may also
come from high sampling rate Multi-Phase Flowmeters. Data quality may be poor,
especially the Flow Rate data, so manual data editing may be required prior to using this
facility.
Special Analysis techniques are required for this type of long-term Production Data; which
can effectively be treated as Extended Drawdowns with Rate fluctuations and Shut-Ins.
The Data Preparation requirements for PDA are described in the following sections.
Data Preparation Requirements:
541
The Flow Rate data are usually acquired on a separate clock and must be synchronized
with the Pressure data. Some Rate Averaging may be required to remove unnecessary
detail, but Cumulative Production must be respected. The input data may in fact be
Cumulative Production instead of Flow Rates. There may also be missing data. Refer to
Rate Data Averaging dialog and Edit Rate Changes dialog for details of how these issues
can be resolved.
Long-term Pressure Data may have come from Wellhead/Xmas Tree Pressure Gauge
measurements (with the probability of a low sampling rate (hourly/daily) and poor
quality measurements from low technology gauges). This Gauge Data can be converted
to Bottom Hole Pressure (BHP); refer to Wellhead to BHP Conversion for details of how
this conversion is performed.
Behavioral filtering may be required to check the quality of Flow Rate data by Simulation
(i.e. using PanFlow). After performing a first-pass PDA run, fill-in any gaps, correct
inconsistencies, then repeat the PDA.
Also refer to the Troubleshooting section below for more hints and tips for using the
PDA facility.
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Plot Features:
Once the long-term production data has been prepared and plotted on the PDA Plot, the
following tools are available for data analysis:
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate): This tool is used to correct the measured
Pressure record (Extended Drawdown) to an Equivalent Constant Rate Bounded
System response, which is then relatively straightforward to analyze.
Users enter known Reservoir Model Parameters (e.g. Permeability (k), Skin (S),
etc.), then Calculate the ECR Pressure, to generate scaled-down Cartesian and Log-
Log Preview Plots of ECR Pressure versus Equivalent Constant Rate (ECR) Time.
The ECR Pressure can be further analyzed as a Constant Rate Test on a full-size
Cartesian Plot or any of the other PanSystem diagnostic plots using the
conventional Analysis Toolbar tools for point selection and line-fitting.
Agarwal-Gardner Type-Curves (AGTC) (Reference 80): These tools use a
combination of transient Type-Curves and Decline Curves to evaluate transient
Reservoir Parameters (i.e. k, S, etc.) and Original Hydrocarbons in Place (i.e.
OOIP or OGIP) from long-term Production Data. Three tools are available:
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Time Type-Curves
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Pressure Decline Plot
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Type-Curves
Type-Curves are currently available for the Radial Homogeneous and Infinite
Conductivity Fracture Models.
The only requirement for using these curves is a Closed System Boundary Model.
Although the actual Boundary Geometry is not an input, these curves were derived
for a Well positioned at the center of a square Reservoir (i.e. L1=L2=L3=L4 in
PanSystem Geometry terms), so they will only Match this type of Reservoir
Geometry exactly in terms of shape. The Drainage Area may still be computed
accurately for more eccentric Reservoir shapes and Well positions, but at the
expense of the Permeability, Skin or Xf estimates.
542
PanSystem
If users have high quality Transient data from the early stages of the
Production History, a good Match should be obtained on the left-hand side of
the data before the effects of Boundaries are realized. In other cases, the
Permeability should be obtained from other methods. High quality Transient
data can also be analyzed by the usual methods in PanSystem to obtain a
reasonable estimate of Permeability which can subsequently be used as a
guide in the AGTC Matching process. The Quick Match option can also be
used to define the dimensions of the Boundary Geometry if required.
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) Troubleshooting Section:
1. What happens if the wrong Layer Pressure is used?
The value entered for the Layer Pressure is important.
If the wrong Layer Pressure (Pi) is used, the converted ECR Pressure will still be
correct. The Cartesian Plot will also look okay. However, the Log-Log Plot will not
be okay, because its Y-axis uses p = (PECR - Po), where Po = Player. The Dietz Shape
Factor (CA) value calculated from the Cartesian Plot will also be wrong, because it
too depends on Po = Player. No adjustment of Po is available in the ECR facility itself,
since it does not directly affect the data processing. When analyzing the ECR data
with the Cartesian, Log-Log or other diagnostic plots, the Change T0 tool from the
Analysis Toolbar can be used to adjust Po.
2. What happens if the wrong transient parameters (e.g. Permeability, etc.)
are used?
The transient parts of the data will not be smoothed out correctly, but the
corrected data will still be useable, unless the input parameters are well outside a
suitable range of values. The Cartesian Plot should still be capable of giving a
reasonable estimate of the Drainage Area (A).
3. What can be done about glitches in the ECR converted data?
For a bad Flow Rate: Using the small Cartesian Plot overlay, click on the
Pressure data anywhere in the glitch. The corresponding Flow Period will be
highlighted in green on the main PDA Plot.
Next, double left-click in the green-colored Flow Period on the main PDA Plot,
to generate an Enter New Rate dialog; enter a new Flow Rate value,
Calculate and wait for the new Corrected Pressure value. Adjust the Flow
Rate until the Corrected Pressure looks okay. Next, select OK to keep the
new Flow Rate, or select Cancel to return to the original Flow Rate value.
Note that Cancel requires a few seconds while the ECR Plot for the original
Flow Rate value is restored.
For the wrong Input Parameters: The Transient Input Parameters can be
adjusted and any number of ECR calculations can be performed until a
satisfactory result is obtained. Within reason, Input Parameters that are
outside a suitable range of values will affect the transient portions of the
data (after the Rate Changes) much more than the overall Semi-Steady-
State trend (e.g. the ECR method is not overly sensitive to a wrong
Permeability or Skin value).
Also refer to Point 6 below.
4. What results can be derived from an ECR Analysis of the data?
543
After an ECR calculation has been performed, users end up with an Equivalent
Constant Rate Drawdown test, which can be analyzed by the conventional methods
that are available within PanSystem:
The Analyse ECR Pressure button takes users straight to a Cartesian Plot,
where a line can be fitted to get Drainage Area (A), OOIP or OGIP and Dietz
Shape Factor (CA). If users then go to Deliverability, they can calculate and
plot the IPR.
The Log-Log Plot (and other diagnostic plots) can be used to analyze the
Boundary Geometry, since the Derivative will show all the classical and not-
so-classical Boundary Responses. Use the line-fitting, Quick Match and Auto
Match facilities within PanSystem to achieve this in the usual way.
5. Where is the ECR data stored?
The ECR data is stored as a Pressure and Flow Rate Channel in an internal file
called EPS_ECR. This can be seen in the Data File/Column List section of the
Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog after an ECR Analysis has been
performed. The Flow Rate is the Reference or Average Rate (Qref), defined by:
where:
t0 is the start of the test
tf is the end of the test
The Time base is the Equivalent Constant Rate Time (tECR), defined by:
(i.e. Cumulative Production Reference Rate)

6. Why is the ECR data sometimes spikey and steppy?
This can result from bad Flow Rate data or using the wrong Input Parameters, as
discussed in Point 3 above. In addition, the use of Equivalent Constant Rate Time,
is strictly valid for Semi-Steady-State behaviour. The Transient data does not line-
up correctly.
7. What is done about the Build-Ups?
The Equivalent Constant Rate Time stops dead during a Build-Up; this would make
for messy plots. For this reason, all Build-Up data is automatically identified and
eliminated from the plots used in the ECR method (i.e. identified by zero rate in
the Rate Changes table).
8. What if the Skin Factor changes over a long period of Production?
The ECR method assumes a constant Skin Factor (Radial Homogeneous Model) or
Fracture Half-Length over the entire period under study. If the Skin Factor varies
with Time (e.g. Formation Clean-Up, Gravel Pack degradation, etc.), the converted
ECR data may be erratic, or may contain an additional trend caused by the Skin
variations.
In the case of Gas Wells with Rate-Dependent Skin, the Turbulent Skin term (D) is
an input to the ECR processing and will be accounted for.
9. What about interference from other Wells?
544
PanSystem
The Pressure Extrapolation (Pext) tool from the Analysis Toolbar which is used to
back out interference trends can be applied to the converted ECR data. The
correction is approximate, since it will be using ECR Time (tECR) rather than Real
Time. To set the Pressure Extrapolation correction, users need to Exit PDA Mode
and select the Pressure Extrapolation (Pext) tool from the Analysis Toolbar. The
ECR Plot headings will be amended automatically to show that the correction has
been applied.
AG TC (Agarwal-Gardner Type-Curve) Troubleshooting Section:
1. What happens if the wrong Layer Pressure is used?
The Y-axis of the AG Type-Curves involves P = Pwf - Po (or m(Po)), where Po is the
Initial Pressure (normally the Layer Pressure). The value entered for Po will
therefore affect the shape of the data when plotted. The Change T0 tool from the
Analysis Toolbar can be used on any of the AG Type-Curve Plots to adjust Po.
2. What if the Reservoir or Drainage Area Geometry is not a Well centred in a
Square?
The original publication (Reference 80) assumed a Well in the middle of a Circular
Area. In PanSystem the AG Type-Curves have been generated for a Well in the
middle of a Square Area, which makes a very small difference in the associated
Dietz Shape Factor (CA). If the actual Reservoir or Drainage Area Geometry is
different from this:
The shape of the data will be affected, as closer Boundaries are seen
before more distant ones, until Semi-Steady-State is finally attained.
It may be possible to get a reasonable estimate of the Drainage Area (A),
depending on the extent to which the shape distortion affects a user's
assessment of the lateral Match Position. Likewise, the Permeability
estimate will depend on how users position the Type-Curves vertically.
The difference in Shape Factors will appear as an error in the Skin Factor
(S), or the Fracture Half-Length (Xf).
3. What if the Skin Factor changes over a long period of Production?
The Type-Curves assume a constant Skin Factor (Radial Homogeneous Model) or
Fracture Half-Length. If the Skin Factor varies with Time (e.g. Formation Clean-Up,
Gravel Pack degradation, etc.), the Flowing Data will not Match a single Type-Curve
over a long Time Period and may cross several Type-Curves. A possible approach
in this case is to analyze the data in shorter sections (i.e. to Group only some of
the Test Periods).
In the case of Gas Wells, the Type-Curves do not allow for Rate-Dependent
(Turbulent) Skin. In this case, if Flow Rates vary significantly, the data will trend
off-curve. The Skin Factor (S) derived for a Radial Homogeneous Model will
represent the Total Skin (S + DQ) corresponding to the Flowing Period that best
Matches the selected Match Curve.
4. What about interference from other Wells?
No allowance is made for interference effects from other Wells. The Pressure
Extrapolation (Pext) tool from the Analysis Toolbar which is used to back out
interference trends has not yet been implemented in the AG TC facility.
545
Enter New Rate Dialog
General:
This dialog can be generated after an ECR Calculation has been performed. To facilitate
the identification of "rogue" Flow Rates causing anomalies in the ECR Pressure Curve,
users can click on a "rogue" Data Point on the Cartesian Preview Plot, and the offending
Flow Period is highlighted in a green color on the main PDA Plot. If users double left-
click on a green-colored Flow Period, this dialog is generated.
Current Rate: This current Flow Rate is retained internally until the OK button is
selected, in which case the new Flow Rate value entered in the underlying field and
the new calculated ECR Pressure is applied.
New Rate: Enter a new Flow Rate in this field if required (i.e. smaller values than
the current value will have the strongest effect).
Calculate ECR Pressure: Select this button to calculate a new ECR Pressure; the
new Cartesian and Log-Log Preview Plots will be generated and the green-colored
Flow Rate will subsequently appear at its new value.
OK: Applies the new Flow Rate entered in the New Rate field and retains the new
calculated ECR Pressure. The new Flow Rate will be stored in the Rate Changes
Table.
Cancel: Select this button to reinstate the original Flow Rate value from the
Current Rate field; this requires PanSystem to perform a further calculation to
restore the original ECR Pressure.
Shut-Ins are excluded from the ECR process, so users will not be able to select
and highlight these periods.
546
PanSystem
Reporting Menu
PanSystem Report Menu Overview
General:
PanSystem has an extensive reporting facility enabling users to create clear,
comprehensive and finished reports quickly and easily. The various PanSystem reporting
options listed under the Report menu item are described below under the Report Output
section.
Users may also export a keyworded report file (including gauge data) using the Pressure
ASCII Standard (PAS) format specified by the Alberta Energy and Utilities Board (EUB),
using the EUB Report menu option. The two reporting options listed under this menu
item are described below under EUB Reports.
PanSystem Reports:
The PanSystem Report pertains to the plots and results of the test period currently being
analyzed.
If there are several test periods, make a report for each one, separately.
The current report format settings are saved to the (*.PAN) file using the File Save or File
Save As menu options and can be recovered when the file is loaded.
PanSystem Reports are comprised of the following items, described in relation to the
Report menu options:
Report Cover Page: This can be used to give introductory information about the
report, such as analyst's name, company, well name, field name, test date, etc.
Any relevant remarks can also be added and/or edited via an Edit Remarks facility
(refer to the Help topic for Report Cover Page for more details).
Configure Report/Templates: Users can create report templates with this
facility, similar to pre-defined report formats in database programs. To print a
report, all users need to do is select the correct template, then print. PanSystem
provides default system templates that can be used for printing reports and as a
basis for creating custom templates (refer to the Help topic for Configure Report for
more details). In a report template, the following items are defined:
The sections the report will contain (e.g. Input Data, Analysis Results,
Deliverability Results).
The fields within each section.
Page layout settings (e.g. header, logo, footer, etc.).
Input Data: This includes the Dataprep Gauge Data and Well and Reservoir
Description parameters (e.g. gauge data, rate history, fluid parameters, layer
parameters, layer boundary parameters, layer model data, pseudo-pressure and
gas property tables, etc.).
Analysis Results: The diagnostic plots and results calculated from well data
Analysis.
Deliverability Results: The results calculated using the Deliverability menu
options. Deliverability Plots can also be included.
Report Output: There are two sub-menu options available for printing with this
selection:
547
Print Report: This option generates the Print Report Options dialog that
allows users to specify whether the report will be sent to a Text File in
(*.RPT) format or sent directly to the currently selected Printer.
Export to Word: This option generates a standard Windows Save As
WordDoc dialog that allows users to save the report to a MS Word (*.DOC)
file, with graphics embedded. After naming the document and saving it to
the required folder, users are supplied with a prompt to view the document.
After accepting the prompt, MS Word is opened and the report contents can
be viewed.
Quick Report Template Options: The quickest way to print a report is to select one of
the eight supplied report templates listed under the lower half of the Report menu. These
EPS-supplied templates appear in alphabetical order with Windows NT and 2000, but not
with Windows 95 or 98.
This assumes that users are familiar with what each of the templates will produce:
ANALYSIS: This reports the data relevant to the analysis of a particular test period
(i.e. plot/s, results, time functions, etc.), for all plots analyzed so far.
br: customer template, supplied as part of the installation.
COMPLETE: This reports full results for Data Input, Analysis and Deliverability (i.e. if
present). Output = INPUT + ANALYSIS + DELIVER.
DELIVER: This reports the results of Deliverability analysis
INPUT: This reports the Data Edit Plot and the complete set of Input Data for the
Well and Layer.
QUICK This reports a reduced set of results for Data Input, Analysis and
Deliverability (i.e. if present). Output = QUICKINP + QUICKANL + DELIVER.
QUICKANL This reports a reduced set of data relevant to the analysis of a particular
test period, for all plots analyzed so far.
QUICKINP This reports a reduced set of Input Data for the Well and Layer.
Other custom templates can be created, saved and added as required via the Configure
Report menu option.
EUB Reports:
This menu option is available for the export of well test data and reports in the Pressure
ASCII Standard (PAS) format defined by the Alberta Energy and Utilities Board (EUB) of
Canada in their Draft Guide 52 Electronic Capture of Well Test Data dated June 1998
and revised January 1999.
Submission of test data in (PAS) format became mandatory on 1-March-1999.

Users should refer to Section 16 of Guide 52 (January 1999) and ensure that they
meet the EUB system and security requirements before submitting (PAS) files to
them for certification. Currently, PanSystem uses version 4.0 of the PAS format.
Reports offered under this menu option:
TRG.PAS - (Transient Gauge Test): This is used to report transient well tests
(i.e. build-ups, fall-offs, etc.). This facility allows the import of gauge, well and
reservoir data from a (PAS) file into PanSystem for analysis, and the export of data
and results for submission to the EUB (for a suggested procedure on data
preparation, refer to the Help topic for TRG.PAS Hints). Select this menu item to
generate the tabbed dialog for EUB Electronic Reporting (TRG.PAS) and export the
report file and data in (PAS) format.
548
PanSystem
The (PAS) files contain Input and Analysis data and, in the case of the (TRG.PAS), the
gauge time, pressure and temperature data used in the analysis, plus Gauge Data from
up to 2 other gauges.
All relevant data present in PanSystem can be transferred automatically into the (PAS)
file. Additional data must be typed in. PanSystem can also import well test and
supporting data from a (TRG.PAS) format file supplied from another source.
Data formats are checked for correctness by PanSystem when the (PAS) file is saved to
disk, and users will be warned if any mandatory items are missing. Provided all
mandatory items have been entered, and all Numerical data meets the required
consistency checks run by the EUB, the (PAS) file will be certified upon submission.
Apart from checking the format, PanSystem does not validate any of the data
entered by the user.
549
Report Cover
Report Cover Page Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Report Cover Page option from the Report menu.
It is used to enter well and test details that users wish to appear on the first page of
their report, plus any additional remarks to be added. The Report Cover Page can also be
configured to transfer data into an EUB (TRG PAS) Report as described below.
Normally, this dialog is used to enter introductory information about the report (e.g. field
name, well name, test date, gauge number, etc.). The dialog is comprised of a editable
list field (on left), containing default subject settings, a corresponding information entry
list field (on right) and three function buttons, as described below:
List Fields: The 16 subject entries in the left-hand side of the Cover Page can be
entered/edited here. Any applied changes can be saved with the (*.PAN) file and
will be invoked any time that the saved file is recalled.
The original default settings will appear for any new file being set-up. Users may
change the default settings permanently for new files by editing the contents of the
Pansys31.ini folder contained in the Windows Registry. Open the Windows Registry
Editor (i.e. via Start/Run/Regedit commands in Windows), then select
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Description. The editing process
is described below under Customising the Cover Page for EUB (TRG PAS) File
Export. When a (*.PAN) file is subsequently recalled, these new settings will take
precedence over the defaults.
If users wish to apply changes to the Registry settings, they should exercise great
care - if the instructions outlined below are not carried out exactly as described,
the (*.PAN) file may not work properly - please refer to the warning note at the
end of this Help topic.
The right-hand side of the Cover Page is for related information corresponding to
the subjects listed on the left-hand side of the dialog and to the test data being
analyzed. Information can be entered/edited here. Users can type up to about 60
characters per line for a 10-pitch font like Arial (refer to the Fonts option from the
Configure menu for more information). This information is saved with the test data
and results to the (*.PAN) file.
Edit Remarks button: Select this button to generate the Edit Remarks sub-dialog
that allows users to enter a further summary and/or remarks section about the test
(e.g. interesting features, problems, type of analysis applied, etc.), which can be
printed at the beginning of the report.
These two blocks of information need to be validated for inclusion in the final
report, so ensure that the Include Cover Page and Include Remarks checkboxes in
the Cover Page section of the Report Edit Layout sub-dialog are checked (default
setting).
Customizing the Cover Page for EUB (TRG PAS) File Export:
These extra instructions are intended for use with the TRG.PAS sub-menu option,
accessed via the EUB Report option on the Report menu.
550
PanSystem
To transfer some or all of the information on the report Cover Page to the (PAS) file,
users need to enter the appropriate data mnemonic, enclosed in square brackets,
anywhere on the left-hand side of the cover page. The Transfer Values from PanSystem
to Report button in the EUB Electronic Reporting (TRG PAS) dialog, will check for the
presence of a mnemonic and transfer the data entered on the right-hand side of the cover
page to the appropriate field in the (PAS) file.
To modify the left-hand side permanently for all new (*.PAN) files, copy the text below
and paste it over the existing information contained in the Windows Registry under the
entry:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Description
prompt1=Analyst name
prompt2=Company [COMP]
prompt3=Well ID [UWI]
prompt4=License Number [WLIC]
prompt5=Formation [FORM]
prompt6=Test Start Date/Time [STRT]
prompt7=Test Type [TTNC]
prompt8=Depth Reference - MSL
prompt9=Gauge Type [GTYP]
prompt10=Gauge Number [GSER]
prompt11=Gauge Depth (Measured)
prompt12=Gauge Depth (TVD) [SDGA]
prompt13=Formation Top (log) [TTOPL]
prompt14=Formation Bottom (log) [TBASL]
prompt15=Perforated interval top (log)
prompt16=Perforated interval bottom (log)
Other mnemonics that can be used are:
Formation Top (TVD) [TTOPT]
Formation Bottom (TVD) [TBAST]
(e.g. these could replace [TTOPL] and [TBASL], or be used at prompt15 and prompt16
instead of the perforated intervals).
The text can be modified in any of the above lines, or their order re-arranged.
Users can place the mnemonic anywhere in the line - it does not have to be at the
end, but it MUST be enclosed in square brackets [ ] to be recognised during the
Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report process. The 13 mnemonics cited
above are currently the only ones that can be transferred from the cover page into
an EUB (TRG PAS) report.
Changes in the Pansys31.ini folder are only effective for new files. To modify the cover
page in an existing (*.PAN) file, re-type the left-hand side of the cover page and save
the file. Alternatively:
Copy the following 16 lines (i.e. including the 15 line breaks to make 31 lines in
total), from Analyst Name down to Perforated Interval Bottom.
551
Open the (*.PAN) file in a text editor (e.g. Wordpad) and locate the section
pertaining to the cover page, starting with Analyst Name (i.e. unless this has been
changed) and ending with Perforated Interval Bottom.
Paste the new text over this section, being careful not to introduce any extra line
breaks. If the line breaks already contain data, copy/paste the 16 text lines
individually to avoid obliterating the existing data.
As with the Registry Editor, if users wish to apply changes to an existing (*.PAN)
file, they should exercise great care - if these instructions are not carried out
exactly as described, the (*.PAN) file may not work properly.
Analyst name
Company [COMP]
Well ID [UWI]
License Number [WLIC]
Formation [FORM]
Test Start Date/Time [STRT]
Test Type [TTNC]
Depth Reference - MSL
Gauge Type [GTYP]
Gauge Number [GSER]
Gauge Depth (Measured)
Gauge Depth (TVD) [SDGA]
Formation Top (log) [TTOPL]
Formation Bottom (log) [TBASL]
Perforated interval top (log)
Perforated interval bottom (log)
Warning: The Registry Editor should always be used with great care and there
are three very important points to remember:
1. There is no undo option available in the Registry - if a key folder is deleted
accidentally it is permanently gone.
2. When the Registry is edited, all changes are saved instantly - there is no option
to r;re-load the Registry if something has been done incorrectly.
3. Users will never know if they have done something wrong - there are no warning
pop-up dialogs to inform users of mistakes, errors, etc. The Registry Editor will
allow users to wipe everything clean without supplying a warning.
Windows 95, 98, 2000, XP and NT all have a simple Registry back-up mechanism that is
quite reliable, but users should never rely on this alone; always remember to make a
back-up of the Registry. The back-up and restore methods will vary depending on the
version of Windows that is being used - consult the Registry Editor Help menu for
version-specific details of these methods.
For additional information relating to the Registry and the operations that can be
performed in the Registry Editor, users should also refer to:
552
PanSystem
The dedicated Website guide for the Windows Registry accessed from the following
URLs, http://registry.winguides.com/ or http://www.regedit.com/.
553
Report Configure
Configure Report Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Configure Report option from the Report menu.
Use this option to customize a report format based on one of the existing templates
(these can be selected from the lower half of the Report menu). Users can include (or
exclude) sections and edit them in the same way as when a new template is created. The
original report template remains intact unless the new template is saved with the same
name. Once the report has been configured it can also be printed from this dialog.
The dialog is comprised of a selection area, an information area and ten function buttons,
Sections area: Check the appropriate checkboxes to specify the sections to be
included in the report. Choose from the following sections:
Input Data (Includes the Well and Reservoir Properties, Tables of Fluid
Properties, Numerical Data, Data Edit Plots, PVT Plots, etc.).
Analysis Results (Includes the Test Overview Plot, Type Curve Details,
Quick Match Results, Model Results, Description Box, etc.).
Deliverability Results (Includes a range of Plots, such as the IPR,
Production Rate, Average Reservoir Pressure and BHFP, etc. There are also
options to include the Description Box and Deliverability Data).
Select the corresponding Edit buttons to generate an associated sub-dialog for each
section and choose the required items for inclusion in the report , using another
series of checkboxes.
A different sub-dialog is generated for each section (refer to Edit Input, Edit
Analysis and Edit Deliverability for more information).
Edit Layout button: Select this button to generate the Edit Report Layout sub-
dialog. This sub-dialog is used to activate/de-activate items connected with the
report layout (e.g. Cover Page, Remarks, Header and Footer).
Load Template button: Select this button to generate a standard Windows File
Open dialog. The eight EPS template files (and any template files previously
created by users), will be displayed as icons in the viewing field and are designated
as Report Template Files (*.TPL). Select a Report Template File by left-clicking on
the required icon so that the name appears in the File Name field, then select Open.
The selected template is now loaded and can be used to print reports using the
Print button option described below.
Save Template button: Select this button to save a modified/edited Report
Template File under another name. A standard Windows File Save As dialog is
generated. Enter a new name for the template in the File Name field, ensuring it
has the extension (.TPL), then select Save. By default it will be saved to the
Reports folder.
Section Sizes area: This area displays the number of pages that will be contained
in each report section. This will vary if the information for inclusion in each section
554
PanSystem
is amended or edited and when the Format button is selected following any
changes, the page numbers will be updated accordingly.
Format button: This button formats the current report for printing. The new
section sizes (i.e. in terms of number of pages), will be displayed in the Section
Sizes area described above.
Print button: Select this button to print the current report.
If any of the settings have changed since the last Format, or no Format has been
performed, then an Automatic Format will be applied by PanSystem.
Customising a Template:
To customize a template and print with it:
Start from an existing template, use the Load Template button as described above.
Specify the sections to be included by checking the appropriate checkboxes in the
Sections area.
Generate the sub-dialogs for each chosen section by selecting the appropriate Edit
button:
Input Edit
Analysis Edit
Deliverability Edit
Within the selected sub-dialogs, choose the Plots, Tables, Description Boxes,
Headers, etc., that are to be included or excluded in each section.
If the new configuration is formatted with the Format button, the number of pages
in each section will be displayed in the Section Sizes area.
Save the template to an appropriate (or the default) folder with the Save Template
button.
Users may also print the report from here with the Print button (this button will also
apply an Automatic Format if formatting has not been performed already).
555
Edit Input Report Section Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when users select the Edit button associated with the Input
Data entry in the Sections area of the Configure Report dialog. Use this sub-dialog to
alter the report Input Data configuration. Each checkbox can be checked to include (or
unchecked to exclude) items from the current report template.
The sub-dialog is comprised of four selection areas and four function buttons, described
as follows:
Analytical Input area: Check the input data items from the Well and Reservoir
(Analytical) section of PanSystem to be included in the report.
The Include Quick Match Data item will be grayed-out (i.e. disabled), if a Quick
Match has not been performed on an Analysis Plot. When enabled, this item will
list the most recent set of simulated data generated by Quick Match. To obtain a
listing for an entire test sequence rather than a test period, perform a Quick Match
on the Test Overview Plot, then print the report.
Numerical Input area: Check the checkbox to include input data from the Well
and Reservoir (Numerical) section of PanSystem in the report.
Edit Numerical button: Select this button to generate the Numerical
Reporting Options sub-dialog and edit the numerical input data topics to be
included or excluded from the report.
A Numerical Simulation must have been performed or an existing Numerical

Simulation file opened, before this area becomes active.
Data Edit Plot area: Check the Include Data Edit Plot checkbox to include this
plot from Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR) in the report.
This area is only enabled if the Data Edit Plot is currently displayed on the screen.
Users can also Include Description Box and Include Marker Text (refer to Mark
Points for details of these markers), from this plot if required, by checking the
additional checkboxes in this area.
PVT Plots area: Select and highlight the required PVT plot from the list field, then
either check the Selected checkbox to include (or the Not Selected checkbox to
exclude) the plot in the report. Plots must be added or removed on an individual
basis and inclusion is indicated by the addition of the text "(Included)", next to the
plot title in the list field.
This area is only enabled when PVT plots have been generated to account for the
non-linear behaviour of gas/condensates or multi-phase fluid components (e.g.
gas/oil/water).
Single-Phase Pseudo-Pressure - m(p), and Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure - m'(p),
are used to illustrate the non-linear behaviour caused by the variation of gas
volume (Z) and viscosity (g) with pressure.
556
PanSystem
Two multi-phase options are available in the Well and Reservoir (Analytical) section
of PanSystem:
For oil there is a simplified multi-phase approach, Multi-Phase Perrine
Method to handle oil produced with water and/or gas in the reservoir.
For oil, gas and condensate, the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method
provides a more rigorous treatment of multi-phase flow which includes
relative permeability effects.
These single- and multi-phase options require PVT tables and/or plots to be
generated (e.g. p//z, /Ct, m(p), m'(p), etc.).
Master TPR button: Select this button to generate an Edit Report Data File
Section sub-dialog. This will include a listing (versus clock time), of selected
Columns from the Gauge Data file, and a summary of the rate changes.
557
Numerical Reporting Options Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Edit Numerical button option within the
Numerical Input area of the Edit Input Report Section sub-dialog. It is used to edit the
Numerical Input data topics to be included or excluded from the report.
The sub-dialog is comprised of a list of annotated checkboxes and two function buttons.
Check the relevant checkbox to include (or uncheck to exclude) Numerical Input data
topics from the Well and Reservoir (Numerical) section of PanSystem in the report (i.e.
PanMesh data preparation within PanSystem).
If a checkbox is grayed-out, the associated topic is unavailable.
558
PanSystem
Edit Report Data File Section Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Master TPR button in the Edit Input Report
Section sub-dialog. The sub-dialog includes a listing (versus clock time), of selected
Columns from the Gauge Data File/s. It is used to select the Well, associated Gauge Data
File/s and Columns from the Gauge Data File/s, to be included as part of the Input Data
for reporting purposes.
The dialog is comprised of two selection areas and a text input section, described as
follows:
Select Well and TPR: Using the drop-down menu, select the required Well (i.e. if
several are listed) and Gauge Data File (i.e. if there are several files available for
the selected well).
Normally, users will leave the default well and "master" file name selected in this
sub-dialog, as this is the data set used in Analysis.
Select Column/s to be Printed: Users should select and highlight each of the
Columns (i.e. data channels) required for the report. To de-select, apply a left
mouse-click.
Time is always listed in the report.

Comments: This is a text input section where users can include any notes or
comments they may find useful.
If users try to OK from the sub-dialog with no Columns (i.e. data channels)
selected, they will be presented with a Rate Changes Table listing. A reminder will
appear in this case.
559
Edit Report Analysis Section Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when users select the Edit button associated with the
Analysis Results entry in the Sections area of the Configure Report dialog. Use this sub-
dialog to alter the report Analysis Results configuration. Each checkbox can be checked
to include (or unchecked to exclude) items from the current report template.
The sub-dialog is comprised of two selection areas and two function buttons, described as
follows:
Select Plot area: This area lists all of the plots that have been analyzed so far
(i.e. for a particular test period). Select and highlight the required plot from the list
field, then either check the Selected checkbox to include (or the Not Selected
checkbox to exclude) the plot in the report. Plots must be added or removed on an
individual basis and inclusion is indicated by the addition of the text "(Included)",
next to the plot title in the list field.
Each plot is individually configurable, so it can be given unique settings in the

Topics to Include area described below.
Topics to Include area: This area is used in conjunction with the currently
selected plot in the Select Plot area described above. Check the data items to be
included in the report for each selected plot in turn. Most of these items are self-
explanatory, but the less-obvious ones are described below:
Include Transformed Data: This will include a listing of the x- and y-axis
values of the plotted Gauge Data (e.g. time and pressure, superposition
function versus rate normalised pseudo-pressure, etc., depending on the
plot. The derivative is also listed for a Log-Log Plot).
Include Simulated Data: This will include a listing of the x- and y-axis
values of the plotted simulated data (if any) generated by Quick Match.
Include Time Marks: A few diagnostic plots use time markers to estimate a
reservoir parameter (e.g. time-to-end-of-bilinear-flow on the fourth-root
time Bilinear Flow Plot).
Include Auto-Match Statistics: This option is only enabled if users have
performed an Auto Match on the selected plot, then displayed the
Confidence Intervals sub-dialog by selecting the Confidence button in the
Matching Progress Sub-Dialog at the end of the regression. If this item is
checked, the report will include the table of confidence intervals for each
parameter, and the correlation parameters.
560
PanSystem
Edit Report Deliverability Section Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when users select the Edit button associated with the
Deliverability Results entry in the Sections area of the Configure Report dialog. Use this
sub-dialog to alter the report Deliverability Results configuration. Each checkbox can be
checked to include (or unchecked to exclude) items from the current report template.
The sub-dialog is comprised of two selection areas and two function buttons, described as
follows:
Select Plot area: This area lists all of the IPR and/or Forecasting plots that have
been analyzed so far (i.e. for a particular test period). Select and highlight the
required plot from the list field, then either check the Selected checkbox to include
(or the Not Selected checkbox to exclude) the plot in the report. Plots must be
added or removed on an individual basis and inclusion is indicated by the addition
of the text "(Included)", next to the plot title in the list field.
Each plot is individually configurable, so it can be given unique settings in the

Topics to Include area described below.
Topics to Include area: This area is used in conjunction with the currently
selected plot in the Select Plot area described above. Check the data items to be
included in the report for each selected plot in turn. Two items are available:
Description Box: Check this checkbox to include the commented description
box beneath the plot (i.e. this assumes that users have already added a
comment box; if not, refer to Edit Description for details on adding this box
to a plot).
Deliverability Data: Check this checkbox to include tabulated input data (i.e.
data previously entered via the Deliverability menu options), constraints and
results (e.g. Deliverability/Injectivity data from the IPR menu options and/or
Production Constraints, Forecasting Parameters and Forecasting Results
from the Forecasting menu option).
561
Edit Report Layout Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when users select the Edit Layout button in the Sections area
of the Configure Report dialog. Use this sub-dialog to alter the Report Layout
configuration. Each checkbox can be checked to include (or unchecked to exclude) items
from the current Report Template.
The sub-dialog is comprised of three selection areas and four function buttons, described
as follows:
Cover Page area: Check these checkboxes to include Cover Page and Remarks
sections in the Report. The contents of these pages can be viewed and/or edited by
selecting the Edit Cover Page and Edit Remarks buttons respectively. The dialogs
generated by the Edit buttons in this dialog can also be accessed via the Report
Cover Page option on the Report menu.
Report Header area: Users can insert their own Report Header in these data
entry fields. Modify the text if required (i.e. maximum 3 lines). The modified
Header can be saved to the Report Template for use with other files in the future
and users just need to load the relevant Report Template next time. The Header is
saved to the (*.PAN) file, and will appear next time that file is loaded, regardless of
current program settings. To modify it in future, either edit within this dialog or
load an appropriate (i.e. different or more suitable) Report Template.
If users check the Include Header checkbox, the Header will appear across the top
of every page, with the EPS logo on the left. The EPS logo is stored in black and
white form as LOGO.BMP in the Reports folder (i.e. created under the PanSystem
run directory during installation) and will be loaded automatically. A colored
version is supplied as EPSCOL.BMP and this should be re-named LOGO.BMP if users
want PanSystem to insert this one instead.
Company Logo: Users can insert their own company logo on the right-hand
side of the header. Copy the logo as a (*.BMP) Windows bit-map file (e.g.
CLIENT.BMP), into the Reports folder created under the PanSystem run
directory during installation. Ensure that the Show Logo checkbox is
checked. If users want to display their logo, but not the EPS one, they can
either:
Re-name their logo LOGO.BMP instead of CLIENT.BMP, to replace the
EPS logo on the left.
Delete the EPS logo file LOGO.BMP, but keep their logo file as
CLIENT.BMP to display it on the right.
The aspect ratio of the logo will be respected provided it does not exceed
2:1, otherwise it will be re-scaled to fit. Ensure that an empty border area is
not present around the logo, as this will be included, making the actual logo
smaller.
Remember that complex colored logos will use up printer memory and may
prevent hard copy from being output correctly, particularly from LaserJet
printers.
562
PanSystem
Check the Show Date checkbox to display the analysis date at the top right corner
of each page in the report.
Report Footer area: Check the checkboxes for any of the Footer components
required for the Report, and edit the Footer text if required (i.e. maximum 1 line).
Uncheck all of the checkboxes to hide the Footer.
Refer also to Page Set-Up Codes for details of how the Header and Footer sections
of Report pages can be set-up to have the current Date and Time embedded.
To save any new layout as a Report Template, OK from this sub-dialog to return to
the Configure Report dialog, then use the Save Template button to save the newly-
defined Report Template to the Reports folder.
563
EUB Reports
564
PanSystem
EUB Electronic Reporting TRG.PAS
TRG PAS Hints for Data Preparation and Export

Method of Preparing Data in PanSystem for the TRG PAS Reporting Facility:
An example PanSystem file (TRGEX1.PAN) and associated (PAS) file (TRG40EX1.PAS) are
provided as part of the installation and can be found in the PanSystem Data and Reports
folders respectively.
Select the supplied CANSI (PAS EXPORT) units system. This has fluid densities
(RDOIL, RDGAS and RDWTR) in grm/cm3. All the other units in the CANSI system
are compatible with (PAS) units.
Users should ensure that they select the CANSI (PAS EXPORT) units system, not
the CANSI unit system.
Load the (*PAN) file if one exists, or import the required Gauge Data and set-up
data within PanSystem, in the usual way.
If the Gauge Data are provided in (PAS) format, users should import them via the
EUB Electronic Reporting TRG.PAS dialog using the Open Existing (PAS) File button,
then the Transfer Values from Report to PanSystem button.
It is possible to import (PAS) format Gauge Data with the Gauge Data File Import
facility in the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog, treating the (PAS) file as a
(TPR) file and using the Space/Tab delimited option in spreadsheet mode, but this
is less straightforward than direct import via the EUB Electronic Reporting TRG.PAS
dialog and transfer to PanSystem.
The Well, Layer and Fluid Parameters sections of PanSystem should be correctly
initialized in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog, and a build-up
analysis performed. Users may enter the Well ID and Formation Name in the Well
and Layer Parameters sections for transfer to the (UWI) and (FORM) mnemonics
respectively.
If some minor modifications are applied to the format of the Report Cover Page,
some data normally entered here can be transferred to the (PAS) file.
If users are importing Gauge Data via the Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation
dialog, if the gauge times are in decimal hours, ensure that the first data point
corresponds to actual clock time (e.g. if the gauge started recording at 16:30, the
first data point must be at 16.5000 hours - apply a time-shift if necessary).
Assuming that users are analyzing a build-up or fall-off test, when defining the Rate
Changes on the Data Edit Plot, position the Rate Change denoting the end of the
build-up exactly on the last good build-up pressure (i.e. avoid any noise and end-
effects). This value will be transferred to (PRGA) - pressure at stop depth, when
data is transferred from PanSystem to the (PAS) file. It is assumed to be the last
value in the Rate Changes Table.
Users can change it later if required, but (PRGA) is a critical edit, so ensure it
corresponds to one of the measured pressure points, or the (PAS) file will not be
certified.
Annotate events on the Data Edit Plot if required, using the Mark Points facility from
the Edit menu. Any remarks entered as Marker Text will be transferred into the
(GCOM) comments column of the data table, at the corresponding data point. This
565
facility is useful for marking the time of gauge on bottom, well shut-in, last useful
build-up pressure, gauge off bottom, problems, etc.
While operating in the Data Edit Plot, users will need to take note of the gauge on
bottom (GONB) and gauge off bottom (GOFB) dates and times for manual entry
into the (PAS) editor (i.e. they are not transferred automatically). This can be
performed most conveniently as follows:
Set the time format in the Gauge Data - Edit dialog to DD:HH:MM:SS. If
users have imported dates, note the date in the first line, corresponding to
DD=00.
Return to the Data Edit Plot, select the pressure points corresponding to
gauge on bottom and gauge off bottom, then select the Mark Points facility
from the Edit menu.
The exact times of each marked point will be displayed in DD:HH:MM:SS in
the Marker Text dialog from the Edit menu, and all users have to do is work
out the date/s. Remember to note these down for future entry in the (PAS)
editor.
The (GONB) and (GOFB) do not have to correspond to exact data points, but this is
the most convenient method. Users do not need to note down any other
information.
Enter the EUB Electronic Reporting TRG.PAS dialog. The tabbed pages of the (PAS)
export facility have been arranged in the order they appear in the (PAS) file.
Users must go to the Gauge Data 1 page to select the gauge data to be included,
before selecting the Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report button. Failure to
do this will result in no gauge data being written to the PAS file. If there is more
than one gauge (max 3), use the additional Gauge Data pages.
After transfer, check the data and fill in the missing mandatory items and any
others required for reporting purposes.
566
PanSystem
EUB Electronic Reporting TRG-PAS Version Tabbed Dialog

General:
This tabbed dialog is generated by selecting the TRG.PAS sub-menu option from the EUB
Report menu option under the Report menu. This is the entry dialog of the TRG PAS file
editor (i.e. used for Transient Gauge Test Digital Data reporting).
Before entering this dialog, users should have selected the supplied CANSI (PAS EXPORT)
units system. This has fluid densities (RDOIL, RDGAS and RDWTR) in grm/cm3. All the
other units in the CANSI system are compatible with (PAS) units.
The mandatory items are displayed in red, optional items are displayed in black and
mandatory/optional (i.e. depending on the situation) are displayed in blue. The PAS
file will be rejected by the EUB certification process if any mandatory items are missing.
PanSystem checks number formats and for the absence of any mandatory items when
users save the PAS file, but it does not check for the numerical consistency of the data
entered.
The tabbed pages of the TRG PAS export facility have been arranged in the order they
appear in the PAS file:
Version
Well Information
Test Data
AOF/IPR Results Summary
Pressure Results Summary
Analysis Input Parameters
Gauge 1, 2, 3
There are two ways to set-up data for the PAS file, depending mainly on how the Gauge
Data is going to be imported:
Import the Gauge Data (TPR) into PanSystem and enter well and reservoir
parameters, etc. via the various Dataprep menus, perhaps perform an Analysis,
then transfer this data into the PAS report. Type in any missing data within the
PAS editor under the relevant tab. This process is described in Transfer Values
from PanSystem to Report below.
Open an existing PAS report file (e.g. a file containing Gauge Data submitted by a
service company, or one that has been worked on previously), then type in any
missing data under the relevant tab. Optionally, users can transfer parameters
from PanSystem (i.e. if any have been entered there), to fill in any gaps. This
process is described in Transfer Values from Report to PanSystem below.
A procedure is outlined in the Help topic TRG PAS Hints for Data Preparation and Export.
This first tabbed dialog provides the basic control for the report and is comprised of two
main areas with seven function buttons, described as follows:
Type/Unit/Version: The latest PAS format identification appears in the upper
area of the dialog. PanSystem has automatically picked up a template
567
(TRG40.EUB) stored in the Reports folder, containing the textual part of the PAS
file, with the data fields blank. It is based on the most recent documentation
supplied by the EUB, and EPS will endeavour to keep the supplied template up to
date. Some minor changes (e.g. change of number/character format, change of
mandatory/optional status, etc.), can be accommodated by simply editing the
template with a text editor.
Currently, PanSystem uses version 4.0 of the PAS format.

The lower area of the dialog is comprised mainly of function buttons:
Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report button: If users have opened a
(*.PAN) file, or set up data in the Dataprep section of PanSystem, this button is
used to automatically populate part of the PAS file.
Users must go to the Gauge Data 1 page to select the gauge data to be included,
before selecting the Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report button. Failure to
do this will result in no gauge data being written to the PAS file. If there is more
than one gauge (max 3), use the additional Gauge Data pages.
The following data can be transferred from PanSystem:
Well, reservoir and fluid properties - via Well and Reservoir (Analytical).
Gauge Data (i.e. time, pressure, temperature, marker text) - via Gauge
Data (TPR)Preparation.
Analysis results - via Analysis menu.
Cover Page information. If users customarily enter information in the
standard PanSystem Report Cover Page, they will be able to transfer up to
13 PAS mnemonics related to well, gauge and formation into the PAS file if
they make some minor changes to the Report Cover Page format. Once set-
up, this will reduce the amount of duplicated typing required to fill in future
PAS files. This process is described in the Help topic for the Report Cover
Page.
The Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report facility can be used any number of
times. If a number is already present within a field in the PAS editor and the
PanSystem value being transferred is different, users will be warned and given the
choice of overwriting or not.
Should the data be incomplete, PanSystem will warn users of any deficiencies in the
transferred data, with an Incomplete Data warning
When the data has been transferred successfully, a Transfer Complete message is
displayed.
Mandatory items not available in PanSystem must be typed in.

Transfer Values from Report to PanSystem button: Once a TRG.PAS format
file has been opened with the EUB Report option from the Report menu, this button
allows users to transfer any well test and supporting data into PanSystem itself.
Once transferred, the data can be edited, analyzed, etc. in PanSystem, just like
any other well test data, and subsequently transferred back into the PAS file if
desired.
Incoming data will overwrite any existing PanSystem data without warning. Null
entries in the PAS file will appear as zeroes in PanSystem (e.g. if the PAS file does
not have an entry for layer thickness and users type a value in the Layer
568
PanSystem
Parameters dialog within Dataprep, it will be overwritten by zero when this button
is selected).
Users should always open and transfer the PAS file data first, before entering any
additional data into PanSystem.
Save PAS File button: A standard Windows Save As dialog is generated, allowing
users to record a new name for the report, or select an existing file name. The PAS
file is written to disk (i.e. in the Reports folder by default) when this button is
selected. PanSystem checks the report prior to a save, and if there are entries
missing from the mandatory data fields users are informed with a File Not Yet
Complete message. Users may save, then continue editing, re-save and so on.
When the file is saved:
Data formats are checked for consistency with EUB certification
requirements (e.g. if users have entered two characters in a [CHAR 1]
format field, only the first character will be written to file. If users have
entered 1273 for a depth which should have a [NUM 5.5] format, it will be
written as 1273.00000. If users have entered 65.352 in a [NUM 3.2] field, it
will be rounded to 65.35).
All lower case characters are converted to upper case.
Alpha characters entered in numeric fields are ignored.
To view these changes, simply read the file in again (i.e. using the Open Existing
PAS File button, described below), or open the file outside PanSystem using a text
editor or spreadsheet program.
Open Existing PAS File button: This allows users to open a PAS file from a
standard Windows File Open dialog, that points to the default Reports folder. Use
this button to reload a PAS file that has been worked on previously, or one which
has been provided from another source, and view or continue editing it.
This option should be used if Gauge Data has been supplied in PAS format from a
service company.
As all of the PAS reports use the same file extension, the Open Existing PAS File
command checks to see if the selected report is in the correct format (Type is TRG).
If the format is not correct then an error message is displayed and the open is
aborted.
Additional blank or comment lines are permissible anywhere in a PAS file provided
they commence with a # sign. The first valid line in the file must be the
~VERSION, TYPE... line.
Clear and Load PAS 4.0 Template: This button will clear the data from memory
for the currently loaded PAS file, and reload the default template file
(TRG40EX1.PAS) into memory.
Find button: This button and the associated Find Mnemonic field allows users to
search through all the TRG reporting tabs in the dialog to locate a report entry.
This is particularly useful if users have a few records to add to a file. To locate a
specific mnemonic (e.g. PRGA), it is only necessary to enter a part of it (e.g. PRG).
569
If the mnemonic occurs in more than one place (e.g. GSER), or for partial
searches, users will only be supplied with the first occurrence of the target
mnemonic.
Close button: The Close button on the dialog background is used to exit the EUB
Electronic Reporting dialog. Users will be prompted to save a PAS file if they have
not already done so. All current PAS data will remain in memory until PanSystem
exits, a new .PAS file is loaded, or the Clear and Load PAS 4.0 Template button is
pressed.
All transferred data can be inspected in the PAS file editor except the Data Tables (i.e.
Production Summary, Gauges, Acoustic, and Inline). To inspect the original Gauge Data,
users should select the Gauge Data option from the Dataprep menu to generate the
Gauge Data (TPR)Preparation dialog, or save the PAS file and read it with an external text
editor or spreadsheet program. To inspect the other data tables, the PAS file will need to
be inspected in a text editor.
Users should check over the transferred data, fill in the rest of the mandatory data and
any optional data they may want to enter, before making the final save.
570
PanSystem
EUB Electronic Reporting TRG-PAS Well Information Tabbed Dialog

General:
Report menu option under the Report menu, then selecting the Well Information tab.
This is the Well Information entry dialog for the TRG PAS file editor.
entered.
Version
Well Information
Test Data
Gauge 1, 2, 3
This dialog is comprised of a column of data entry fields (and a single function button),
most of which are self-explanatory; entries that require further explanation are described
below:
UWI (unique well identifier): This must already exist on the EUB system. As
per EUB Guide 19, the format for UWI in Alberta is 1XX/99-99-999-99W9/9 (e.g.
100/03-12-067-08W6/0).
DRILLEG (drilling leg): This is used to define (in conjunction with the UWI) the
bottom of a specific hole. Its values range from 01-09 and cannot be 00 or NULL.
WLIC (well license number): The WLIC must match the license number for this
UWI on the EUB system. The format for license numbers is X 9999999 X. The
alpha characters are only used if reporting a test on an old well with this type of
license number. However, using the full license number as above will not cause a
file to be rejected.
FORM (formation name): The name may differ from the EUB pool definitions and
will not be checked against them. The layer name can be transferred from the
entry in PanSystem Layer Parameters dialog, or from the Report Cover Page dialog.
WSFL (well fluid status at test date): For a well that has not produced yet, use
the WSFL code for the dominant fluid expected to be recovered (i.e. most likely 01
Crude Oil or 02 Gas, from the table of codes presented below). This code is
required for use in EUB programs, but will only be checked to ensure it is a valid
code and not edited against actual fluid production.
01 Crude Oil 07 Brine 11 Air
02 Gas 08 Waste 13 Carbon Dioxide
571
05 Undesignated 09 Solvent 15 Nitrogen

06 Water 10 Steam 16 Liquid Petroleum Gas
(LPG)
17 Crude
Bitumen
WTYP (well type indicator):
V = Vertical wellbore
D = Deviated wellbore
H = Horizontal wellbore
Note that if WTYP = H, the HZFL item (i.e. horizontal well length in
formation), must be non-zero in the Analysis tabbed dialog.
PACKER (Packer Indicator Flag):
Y = Yes, there is packer present in the well.
N = No, there is no packer in the well.
TULD (Tubing in well):
Y = Yes, there is tubing in the well.
N = No, there is no tubing in the well.
AFLO (Flow Path):
A = Annular
C = Casing
T = Tubing
B = both casing and tubing
TUBS (Production tubing inside diameter): Mandatory, if [TULD] (Tubing in
well) = (Y)es and [AFLO] (Flow Path) = (T)ubing or (B)oth. If present, must be <
[PTOD] (Outside diameter of production tubing).
PCID (Inside diameter of production casing):
Must be between 0 and 350 specified in millimeters
PTOD (Outside diameter of production casing):
Must be between 0 and 350 specified in millimeters
pressed.
572
PanSystem
EUB Electronic Reporting TRG-PAS Test Data Tabbed Dialog

General:
Report menu option under the Report menu, then selecting the Test Data tab. This is the
Test Data entry dialog for the TRG PAS file editor.
entered.
Version
Well Information
Test Data
Gauge 1, 2, 3
below:
PRPS (test purpose - EUB required survey?): As specified in Guide 40, users
must submit all tests conducted, even if the test was conducted for internal
company use. Tests that are not intended to fulfil any requirements, if marked as
PRPS = N, will be accepted for information purposes only and will not be edited.
They will just be checked to ensure that:
The license number matches the unique well identifier UWI.
The test date is valid.
All information is readable.
All mandatory elements contain valid data.
The EUB Guide 52 recommends that if such tests meet all the certification criteria,
they will be flagged as required tests (i.e. PRPS = Y) anyway, and can then be
recognised by the EUB should the need arise in the future.
Y = yes
573
N = no
SERCO (Service Company Code):
The code for the service or wireline company conducting the test.
H2SIND (Hydrogen Sulfide indicator):
Indicates the presence of hydrogen sulfide in the well.
INTRP (Test interpretation indicator):
Indicates whether or not transient analysis or test interpretation was
performed
TTOPL (test interval top at log depth): Must be > 0.0
TBASL (test interval base at log depth): Must be > 0.0 and > TTOPL.
TTOPT (test interval top at TVD (KB)): Must be > 0.0
TBAST (test interval base at TVD (KB)): Must be > 0.0 and > TTOPT.
FTDT (final test date): Must be > spud date and current date or abandoned
date.
TUPS (Initial tubing pressure):
Initial tubing pressure (kPaa): For Build-Ups tests, the pressure at end of
flow period (prior to shut-in). For drawdown tests, the static pressure prior
to flow
CSPS (Initial casing pressure):
Initial casing pressure (kPaa): For Build-Ups tests, the pressure at end of
flow period (prior to shut-in). For drawdown tests, the static pressure prior
to flow
FTUPS (Final tubing pressure):
Final tubing pressure (kPaa): For Build-Ups tests, the pressure at end of
shut-in period. For drawdown tests, the final pressure at the end of the
drawdown poriod
FCSPS (Initial casing pressure):
Final casing pressure (kPaa): For Build-Ups tests, the pressure at end of
shut-in period (prior to shut-in). For drawdown tests, the final pressure at
the end of the drawdown poriod
PFWH (Final flowing wellhead pressure):
The final flowing pressure at the wellhead, measures in kPaa
TSUR (Surface temperature):
The temperature measured at the wellhead during operations
pressed.
574
PanSystem
EUB Electronic Reporting TRG-PAS Results Summary Tabbed Dialog

General:
Report menu option under the Report menu, then selecting the Results Summary tab.
This is the Results Summary dialog for the TRG PAS file editor.
entered.
Version
Well Information
Test Data
Results Summary
Gauge 1, 2 and 3
Analysis
below:
The PAS file for a transient pressure test must either include Analysis, or the raw
data must reflect a stabilised reservoir pressure. Files not passing these edits will
be rejected, with a message indicating that Analysis is required.
SDGA (gauge stop depth): The TVD below KB.
GRSD (representative pressure gradient): Average pressure gradient (kPa/m)
between gauge stop depth (PRGA) and mid-perforation depth (MPP).
PRGA (pressure at stop depth): The last, or representative, pressure measured
at gauge stop depth (SDGA). This is required by the EUB as a stabilised reservoir
pressure estimate and is mandatory.
This is a critical edit and must correspond exactly to one of the pressures in the
Gauge 1 (i.e. source gauge) data table section of the PAS file. If the EUB program
cannot match the exact value reported in RESULTS SUMMARY [PRGA] to a
pressure point in the Gauge 1 data table, the file will be rejected.
575
The difference in pressure over the 6 hours prior to this value must be 12 kPa
(i.e. 2 kPa per hour as defined in section 5.1 of Guide 40). If a pressure reading
cannot be found at 6 hours prior to PRGA, the edit will look for the next previous
reading and determine if the 2 kPa/hr limit has been met.
The pressure in the last entry in the DataprepRate Changes Table will be
transferred to PRGA. This is supposed to be the best final shut-in pressure
estimate. While preparing the Gauge Data in Dataprep it is therefore important to
mark the end of the test at the last good quality pressure reading. It is assumed to
be the last value in the Rate Changes Table. It is possible to overtype the
transferred data in the PAS editor, but ensure that the new value corresponds to a
measured pressure.
PMPP (representative bottom hole pressure): The last measured, calculated,
or most representative pressure (PRGA), corrected to mid-perforation depth (MPP)
using gradient (GRSD).
TRES (reservoir temperature): This can be transferred from the PanSystem
Layer Temperature specified in the Layer Parameters dialog.
not already done so. All current PAS data will then be cleared from the EUB Report
section.
576
PanSystem
EUB Electronic Reporting TRG-PAS Gauge 1, 2, 3 Tabbed Dialogs

General:
Report menu option under the Report menu, then selecting the Gauge 1, 2 or 3 tabs
respectively. This is the Gauge Data selection and/or entry dialog for the TRG PAS file
editor.
entered.
Version
Well Information
Test Data
Gauge 1, 2, 3
This dialog is comprised of a checkbox, two selection areas, a column of data entry fields
and a single function button; features that require further explanation are described
below:
Include Gauge: Check this checkbox to include the requisite gauge. In most
cases, Gauge 1 should be the most representative gauge and is assumed to be the
one used for the analysis and test summaries, if several gauges were run. The
analysis results will be written out to the ANALYSIS - INTERPRETATION (1) section
of the PAS file when users Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report within the
TRG PAS Version tabbed dialog.
Supplementary Gauges 2 and 3 may be included in the file, using the additional
tabbed dialogs if required, but since PanSystem only stores one analysis at any
given time, it is not possible to include any associated results in the PAS file, unless
it is edited externally. The gauge numbers represented in GAUGE (n) are not
intended to indicate the sequence of gauges in the run.
PanSystem Pressure Channel to Use: Select an appropriate pressure channel to
match the selected gauge from the drop-down menu.
577
PanSystem Temperature Channel to Use: Select an appropriate temperature

channel to match the selected gauge from the drop-down menu.
The following instructions apply to any of the gauges:
Entering Data in the PAS file for the First Time:
To make the most of the Gauge Data transfer facility, users should refer to the Help topic
TRG PAS Hints for Data Preparation and Export before proceeding.
If the Gauge Data already exists in PAS format, refer to Opening and Editing an
Existing PAS File described below.
If the data has been imported into PanSystem using Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation, proceed as follows:
Check the Include Gauge checkbox.
Select the PanSystem Pressure Channel to Use and PanSystem Temperature
Channel to Use, from the respective drop down menus.
Users cannot view the Gauge Data Table itself in the PAS editor. To inspect the
table, the PAS file has to be saved, then read with an external text editor.
Opening and Editing an Existing PAS File:
If the Gauge Data already exists in PAS format, it can be imported directly into the EUB
TRG PAS Reporting section. Any other data in the PAS file will also be imported.
After selecting the Open Existing PAS File button in the TRG PAS Version tabbed dialog
(and providing a Gauge Data Table was already present in the PAS file), when users
select the Gauge 1 tabbed dialog they will see the Include Gauge checkbox is already
checked, but the pressure and temperature channel fields will contain the text Not Used.
In this status, the gauge selections are not linked to any particular data sets.
If a (*.PAN) file is not loaded, these settings can be left at Not Used, then edit the
PAS file and save it without disturbing the associated Gauge Data Table.
If a (*.PAN) file is loaded, users can either:
Leave the setting at Not Used, then edit the PAS file, and save it without
disturbing the associated Gauge Data Table.
Re-select the gauge pressure and temperature channels by name. From this
point on, any time the Transfer from PanSystem button is used in the TRG
PAS Version tabbed dialog, the Gauge Data Table in the PAS file will be
updated, because a link has been established into the (*.PAN) file.
Electronic Reporting dialog. Users will be prompted to save a PAS file if they have not
already done so. All current PAS data will then be cleared from the EUB Report section.
578
PanSystem
EUB Electronic Reporting TRG-PAS Analysis Tabbed Dialog

General:
Report menu option under the Report menu, then selecting the Analysis tab. This is the
Analysis data entry dialog for the TRG PAS file editor.
entered.
Version
Well Information
Test Data
Results Summary
Gauge 1, 2 and 3
Analysis
below:
Gauge 1 is assumed to be the one used for the analysis. The analysis results will be
written out to the ANALYSIS - INTERPRETATION (1) section of the PAS file when users
Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report within the TRG PAS Version tabbed dialog.
Supplementary Gauges 2 and 3 may be included in the file, using the additional tabbed
dialogs if required, but since PanSystem only stores one analysis at any given time, it is
not possible to include any associated results in the PAS file, unless it is edited externally.
All the Analysis parameters are optional, with the exception of HZFL and PAVG or
PEXTR, which are mandatory under certain conditions.
HZFL (horizontal well length in formation): This must be non-zero if WTYP =
H (horizontal) in WELL INFORMATION. It can be blank or zero for the other WTYP
settings.
Analysis is mandatory for PAS-TRG only if TTYP (test type) = 04, 05, 06, 08 and
PRPS (test purpose) = Y in the Test Data tabbed dialog. In this case, the minimum
Analysis simply means that either:
579
PAVG (average reservoir pressure at mid-perf depth): This must be > 0.0,
or
PEXTR (extrapolated/false pressure (p*) at mid-perf depth): This must be
> 0.0.
Note that these pressures are specified at mid-perforation depth, not at gauge
depth.
The current Layer Pressure in the Layer Parameters dialog will be transferred to the
PAVG field on Transfer from PanSystem. There is no direct transfer of PEXTR from
PanSystem; use the PAVG value, then delete PAVG, if this is more appropriate.
The EUB Guide 52 considers PAVG to be the more reliable estimate of actual
reservoir pressure and recommends the use of this parameter wherever possible.
The PEXTR parameter can be used for initial pressure tests, and tests where the
difference between the last measured/calculated pressure and the extrapolated
pressure is very small.
Note that if the last measured/calculated pressure is below minimum operating

pressure (MOP), PEXTR is not acceptable to indicate that the reservoir pressure is
above MOP. Users may be asked to shut-in their well until a test clearly indicates
a measured pressure above MOP.
For very prolific wells, where there is not 6 hours of build-up time, but the pressure
has stabilized, report the stabilized pressure as PAVG to pass edit, otherwise the file
will be rejected if analysis is not included. Use a comment line (starting with #) to
explain.
not already done so. All current PAS data will then be cleared from the EUB Report
section.
Non-Critical Edit:
If analysis results are present, the following check is used to identify cases where
reservoir pressure estimates differ markedly from the last measured pressure PRGA in the
Results Summary tabbed dialog. If the condition is not met, the PAS file will not be
rejected, but users may be asked to validate their analysis.
PAVG (average reservoir pressure): If PAVG > 0, then (PAVG - PRGA) must be
0.3(PRGA).
PEXTR (extrapolated reservoir pressure): If PAVG is absent, and if PEXTR > 0,
then (PEXTR - PRGA) must be 0.3(PRGA).
580
PanSystem
EUB Electronic Reporting AOF.PAS
EUB Electronic Reporting TRG-PAS AOF/IPR Results Summary Tabbed Dialog

General:
Report menu option under the Report menu, then selecting the AOF / IPR Results
Summary tab. This is the AOF/IPR Results Summary dialog for the TRG PAS file editor.
the CANSI unit system
entered.
Version
Well Information
Test Data
Gauge 1, 2, 3
below:
AOFTY (AOF Type): The type of absolute open flow test.
01 Single-Point (AOF) 02 Multi-Point (AOF)

31 AOF Wellhead Only (not 32 AOF Theoretical Multi-Point
calculated to bottomhole conditions)
41 IPR (Oil well only)
581
SGPTAU (Single point authorization): The authorization number to indicate

EUB approval to conduct a single-point AOF with potential expected to exceed 300
103m3/d
AIN (Inline AOF Indicator): Indicates if an inline AOF test was done. Requires a
separate PRD.PAS document when submitting to the EUB
LIT (Lit Analysis flag): The indicator showing whether or not Lamilnat-Inertial-
Turbulent Flow Analysis was done
QGLM (Last Measured Gas Rate): The last measured or extended flow rate
QGST (Stabilized gas rate): The calculated stabilized flow rate at final test
conditions per Regulatory Requirements; measured in 103m3/d.
NSF (Inverse slope at sandface): This entry can be null depending on AOFTY,
and requires SGPTAU numbers from the EUB
AOFEXT (Extended sandface AOF): Extended Transient Sandface AOF Potential
(103m3/d)
AOFSF (Stabilized sandface AOF): Stabilized Sandface AOF Potential (103m3/d)
NWH (Inverse slope at wellhead): Wellhead inverse slope r;n should be
between 0.5 and 1.0
AOFWEX (Extended Wellhead AOF): Extended Transient Wellhead AOF
Potential (103m3/d)
AOFWH (Stabilized Wellhead AOF): Stabilized Transient Wellhead AOF Potential
(103m3/d)
QOLM (Last measured oil rate): Mandatory for IPR tests, measured in 103m3/d
QOST (Stabilized Oil Rate): Calculate Stabilized flow rate at final test conditions
per Guide 40; measured in m3/d
IPRST (Stabilized Oil IPR): Stabilized inflow performance rate for oil well,
measured in m3/d
IPRMAX (Maximum Oil IPR): Maximum inflow performance rate for oil well,
measured in m3/d
PFSF (Stabilized flowing sandface pressure): Can be null for AOFTY 31,
otherwise must be valid.
LMPFSF (Last measured flowing sandface pressure): Can be null for AOFTY
31, otherwise must be valid.
PFWH (Stabilized flowing wellhead pressure): Can be null for AOFTY 31,
otherwise must be valid.
WPRE (Static wellhead pressure): Can be null for AOFTY 31, otherwise must be
valid.
LMPFWH (Last measured flowing wellhead pressure): Can be null for AOFTY
31, otherwise must be valid.
PAVG (Average pressure of reservoir at mid-point of perforations): Can be
null for AOFTY 31, otherwise must be valid.
AOFC (AOF comment): Freeform comment field for user input/notes.
pressed.
582
PanSystem
Report Print
Print Report Options Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when users select the Print Report sub-menu option from the
Report Output option under the Report menu item. It allows users to specify whether the
report will be sent to a text file or a printer.
This refers to a report defined in the current report configuration (i.e. the last
template that was used to print from, or the last one customized by the user). If
users are uncertain about the current report configuration, refer to the Report
Configure option to check, then either use the current configuration or change it as
required.
The dialog is comprised of a single selection area entitled Options, with two choices:
Print Report to Text File: Select this option, to generate a standard Windows File
Save As dialog, allowing users to save the report file with default extension (*.RPT).
This option will list the text content of the report in ASCII format to the sub-
directory. From here, the text can be included in a word processor document.
This is a useful way of exporting data from PanSystem for transfer to other
applications, since it is organised in an easily readable format and the data items
are clearly identified. Tables such as Pressure versus m(p) can be copied to a
spreadsheet editor, while selected input or output parameters can be extracted by
writing a suitable utility to locate and read them.
Note that graphics will not be written to the file.

Print Report to Selected Printer: Select this option to send to the currently selected
printer, a box showing the status of the printer appears on the screen while the plot
and/or hard copy is being printed.
583
Save As Word Doc File Sub-Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when users select the Export to Word Document sub-menu
option from the Report Output option under the Report menu item. It allows users to
save the report to an MS Word (*.DOC) file with graphics embedded.
If users do not have MS Word, this facility cannot be used. It is not possible to
specify an alternative program.
This is a standard Windows Save As dialog, described as follows:
Save In: Select a suitable folder using the drop-down menu system to browse for a
folder, or accept the default setting (i.e. PanSystem/Reports)
File Name: Enter a suitable report filename in this data entry field with the
extension (*.DOC).
Save As Type: Accept the default document file setting (*.DOC).
After naming the document and saving it to the required folder with the Save button,
users are supplied with a prompt to view the document. After selecting Yes to the
prompt, MS Word is opened and the Report contents can be viewed, edited, printed,
saved and re-formatted (i.e. plot re-sizing, page number insertion, application of
headers/footers, etc.).
This option writes the same items to file as are normally printed directly via the
alternative Print Report menu option. To ensure that the generated Word report will have
the required content check the settings in Configure Report. Typically, a report may
contain:
Table of contents (i.e. created by Word, not by PanSystem).
Cover Page with remarks, header and footer options (i.e. text, date, page
numbers).
Input Data and plots, including:
Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR),
Well and Reservoir (Analytical),
Well and Reservoir (Numerical)
Analysis Data and plots.
Deliverability Data and plots.
If users select No to the prompt, the Report file is saved automatically to the specified
folder.
584
PanSystem
PanSystem Configure Menu Index
General:
This menu allows users to carry out the following tasks:
Define the directories where PanSystem stores and looks for files.
Specify whether the last file used is to be opened automatically when PanSystem is
loaded.
Specify if PanSystem will prompt users to save the current file when they leave
PanSystem.
Select, create and edit the units system PanSystem uses.
Define how a gauge behaves within PanSystem.
Define how the plots are to be displayed on the screen.
Specify the fonts PanSystem uses to display information on the screen and in
reports.
Menu Options:
The menu options available under the Configure menu item include the following:
General: Define the directories where PanSystem stores and looks for files, specify
if PanSystem will automatically load the last file used, specify if PanSystem will
prompt users to save the current file when they exit the program, enable the
regular auto-save option and specify the default Page Set-Up for printing individual
plots.
Units: Select the units system PanSystem will use. Create and edit custom units
systems.
Gauge Details: Use this section to specify the technical characteristics of the
pressure gauge, and where to use them in PanSystem. This is optional - real gauge
characteristics may be ignored if required.
Graphs: Use this option to specify how plots appear on the screen. Many of the
selected settings are written to the Graphing folder in the Pansys31.ini file in the
Windows Registry, and become the standard defaults used by PanSystem.
Fonts: Use this option to set the fonts PanSystem uses to display information on
the screen and to print reports. PanSystem already has default fonts specified.
Users can select their own fonts and save these as the new defaults.
585
Configure Menu
586
PanSystem
General
General Configuration Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the General option from the Configure menu item
and is used to do the following:
Define the directories where PanSystem stores and looks for files.
Specify if PanSystem will automatically load the last file used.
Specify if PanSystem will prompt users to save the current file when they exit the
program.
Define the default fluid type for new files.
Enable the regular Auto-Save option
Specify the default Page Set-Up for printing individual plots.
The dialog is comprised of five selection areas (one containing six browse buttons) and
two function buttons, described as follows:
Directories area: This area lists the main directories used within PanSystem:
Data: Location of main data files (e.g. *.PAN, *.PTL, *.TPR, *.DAT, *.SEA,
etc.).
Type-Curve: Location of type-curve files used in Analysis (e.g. *.TCB,
*.TCL, etc.), and of flow model response curves (*.TCX) used by Advanced
Simulation.
Report: Location of report-related and report template files used in Report
(e.g. *.EUB, *.PAS, *.TPL and *.BMP for reporting logos).
Paging: This is important for large file handling if the data cannot be stored
in high memory; PanSystem stores the data on disk in a quick-access paging
directory and subsequently moves chunks (i.e. "pages") of the data into
memory as they are required. It is also the destination of the Auto-save file.
V-1.8 Data: Location of V-1.80 PanSystem files.
Customer Model: This is where customer-supplied reservoir models can be
stored in the form of DLL files. There is a facility in PanSystem for users to
implement their own reservoir models and these can be fully integrated into
the Analysis and Simulation (i.e. Quick Match, Auto and Advanced
Simulation) functions of the program by means of a DLL link. This enables
the code defining a model to remain external to PanSystem and to be
modified, or new models added at any time. Several new models using the
DLL link are supplied with PanSystem. For details of the format required to
integrate custom flow models, please contact your EPS representative, or
the Edinburgh office directly.
The path names are set-up when PanSystem is installed. These will be the default
directories that appear during File Open and Save As operations. Users can change
the path name temporarily when opening or saving a file. To make a permanent
change, enter the new path name/s here, or select the browse button situated to
the right of the text entry field; this generates a Browse for Folder dialog where
users can graphically select a new directory path.
587
Miscellaneous area: This area offers three options for file loading and saving:
Check the Auto-Load option to open the last file that was worked on (i.e.
during the previous session) each time PanSystem is started-up again.
Check the Prompt for File Save option to receive a reminder to save data
(i.e. if it has not been done already) before closing the current PanSystem
session (default setting).
Check the Auto-Save option to write the current data to a back-up file on
disk at the specified time interval (i.e. enter a suitable time interval in the
Every...mins field). The back-up file has the extension (*.BAK) and the
same name as the (*.PAN) file that is being working on. If a file name has
not yet been assigned by the user (i.e. "Untitled"), the back-up file will be
called PANSYS.BAK.
Select the Default fluid type. The default setting is Oil. Change this if you
wish PanSystem to start new files with an alternative fluid type.
Reporting: This area is used to define the default report destination (i.e. printer or
text file). This can be altered at the time of outputting the report if desired (also
refer to the Report Output option on the Report menu).
Page Set-Up Definition: This area defines the configuration of hard-copy plots
(i.e. size, contents, etc.), output as single pages via File Print. These can also be
altered via File Page Setup. This area is split into two sub-areas:
Print Contents: This selection area is used to configure the contents of
printed output. Select the required output by checking the required
checkboxes:
Plot: This will print the screen plot, with line/s, legend and results
box (i.e. if present). If only this box is ticked, nothing else will
appear on the page.
Header/Footer: Allows users to include text that will be printed at
the top and bottom of the page, outside the plot frame. The contents
of the header and footer are configured via the Report menu under
Configure Report using the Edit Layout button option and can include
a company logo.
Model Results: Lists the results obtained from line-fitting (which
appear in the results box in the plot area), in a framed area beneath
the plot, using a full textual description of parameters (e.g.
"Permeability" instead of "k").
Quick Match: Lists the parameters used for Quick Match response
generation. These may not necessarily be the same as the Model
Results from line-fitting.
Line Results: Lists the statistical parameters (e.g. slope, intercept,
etc.), associated with any lines drawn on the plot (refer to the Line
Results button option in Analysis).
Size: This selection area is used to select how the plot is printed on the
page. The following alternatives exist:
Screen Size: This prints the plot at the current screen size and
aspect ratio, subject to margin constraints. Results and description
boxes, if enabled, are printed beneath the plot.
Fit to Page: This sizes the plot to be as large as possible within the
margins, while retaining the same aspect ratio as the screen plot
588
PanSystem
(default setting). Results and description boxes, if enabled, are

printed beneath the plot.
Full Page: The aspect ratio is adjusted to fill the page out to the
margins. Results and description boxes, if enabled, are printed on a
separate page.
With the exception of the margins and plot sizing, these settings are
global, and will apply to all plots and all files. The margins and plot
size settings apply to all plots, but are file-specific (i.e. they are
saved to file).
589
Units
Unit Systems Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Units option from the Configure menu item and
is used to do the following:
Select the Unit Systems that PanSystem will use.
Create and edit a customized Unit Systems.
PanSystem provides the following standard Unit Systems:
Oilfield with psi absolute (OILFABS): STP = 14.7 psia, 60F
Oilfield with psi gauge (OILFGAG): STP = 0 psig, 60F
SI for Canada (CANSI): STP = 101.325 kPa, 15C
SI for Norway (NORSI): STP = 1.01325 barsa, 15C
SI for Germany (GERMSI): STP = 1.01325 barsa, 0C
SI for Hungary (HUNGSI): STP = 0.101325 MPa, 15C
SI for Brazil (PETROSI): STP = 1.0332 kgf/cm2, 20C
SI for Austria (abs) (OMVABS): STP = 1.01325 bar, 0C
SI for Austria (gauge) (OMVGAU): STP = 0 bar-g, 0C
SI for Shell (LIBRA[SI]): STP = 101325 Pa, 273.16K
Field SI for Shell (LIBRA[FIELD SI]): STP = 1.01325 bar, 273.16K
Imperial for Shell (LIBRA[IMPERIAL]): STP = 14.696 psi, 519.67R
SI for Canada (CANSI) [PAS Export]: STP = 101.325 kPa, 15C
These EPS-supplied Unit Systems can be used as a basis for creating customized Units
Systems.
WFT CANSI, etc: The units systms prefixed by WFT are the units systems listed
above modified for conventional wireline formation tester (WFT) use with flowrates
in cm3/sec.
The dialog is comprised of a selection area, an information area and six function buttons
Units Systems area: This selection area lists all of the currently available Unit
Systems. The current Units System is highlighted. A selection from this list will
force PanSystem to use a new Units System or will provide the user with a new
base system for customization.
The EPS-supplied Units Systems cannot be customized directly. Instead, users

must save them under a new name before they can apply any changes.
Information area: This area displays the summary details for each Units System.
When a new system is created, the summary details can be viewed by highlighting
the new system with a left mouse-click. There are two main features:
Created By: This is an information field containing the name of the Units
System creator.
590
PanSystem
Comments: The three information fields contain up to three lines of

description for the current Units System.
Create button: Use this option to create a copy of an existing Units System under
a new name. It can then be used as a basis for customization. When this button is
selected, a New Unit System Based On sub-dialog is generated.
View button: Use this option to view the units and conversion factors for each
parameter in the highlighted system. When this button is selected, a Units Detail
sub-dialog is generated.
Edit Button: Use this option to edit a user-defined Units System. When this
button is selected, an Edit Units System sub-dialog is generated.
None of the EPS-supplied systems can be edited directly, only the copies of
supplied systems.
Delete button: Use this option to delete a previously created Unit System. Before
selecting this button, select/highlight a Unit System to be deleted in the Unit
Systems area.
None of the EPS-supplied systems can be deleted, only the copies.
591
New Unit System Based On/Edit Unit System Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Create button (i.e. for new Unit System) or
Edit button (i.e. for existing user-generated Unit System) within the Configure Unit
Systems dialog. Use this dialog to create a new Unit System based on an existing one or
to edit the details for an existing user-generated Unit System. Users can either change
the units for a whole class of parameters (e.g. all pressures), or change the units for
individual parameters (e.g. some pressures). These units can be selected from the
supplied alternatives, or users can define new ones.
This sub-dialog has a single entry/editing section and two function buttons. The
entry/edit fields are described as follows:
Units System: Enter or edit the name of the new Units System to be created.
Created By: This is an information field which allows users to enter or edit their
name.
Comments: These entry/edit fields allow users to supply up to three lines of
description for the new Units System to be created.
On OK from this sub-dialog, the Unit Classes sub-dialog is generated, where users can
edit the existing Unit Systems for a range of different parameters (e.g. pressure, rate,
temperature, etc.).
592
PanSystem
Unit Classes Sub-Dialog
General:
This editing sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Create button within the Unit
Systems dialog to generate the New Unit System Based On sub-dialog, then selecting OK.
It can also be generated by selecting the Edit button within the Unit Systems dialog to
generate the Edit Unit System sub-dialog, then selecting OK. This editing sub-dialog lists
the various classes of units.
This sub-dialog is comprised of a selection area and four function buttons, described as
follows:
Selection area: This area allows users to make a global change to an entire unit
class (e.g. all parameters with the units of pressure). The various classes of units
are listed. To change the units for an entire class, select the drop-down menu for
the appropriate class and select a new unit from the list. This will save users from
having to switch the units of every parameter in that class individually on a
subsequent screen.
For example, to select meters for all depths, select the drop-down menu to the
right-hand side of the Length box and highlight/select "m" from the list. The
selected unit will be applied to all the parameters in that class (i.e. for this example
of Length, it will be applied to layer thickness, distance to boundary, well length,
etc.).
New Unit: This button generates the Create New Unit sub-dialog. Use this option
to create a user-defined unit and apply it to a unit class.
Units Detail: This button generates the Units Detail sub-dialog. Use this option to
change the units for individual parameters (rather than an entire class). For
instance, continuing with the Length example above, users may only want some of
the parameters with the units of length to be in "m". In this additional sub-dialog,
users can set the parameters they want to "ft" or some other suitable system.
593
Create New Unit Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the New Unit button within the Unit Classes sub-
dialog and allows users to:
Create a user-defined unit and apply it to a unit class.
Enter/edit the shift and multiply values of an existing unit type.
The sub-dialog is comprised of two data entry/edit sections and two function buttons,
Unit Name section: This is a descriptive name for the new unit type which will be
displayed next to relevant data entry fields within PanSystem (e.g. F, psia).
Conversion Factors section: The two data entry fields within this section instruct
PanSystem how to change between an internal unit type and a user-defined type.
All parameters are converted internally by PanSystem into Oilfield Absolute Units.
Units conversions are defined by means of the Shifts and Multipliers required to
correct and/or convert the number in "internal" units to the correct number in
"user" units. The conversion relationship is described by the following equation:
User Unit = (Internal Unit + Shift) x Multiplier
Shift: This item is required when a correction factor needs to be applied
(e.g. gauge pressure to absolute pressure).
Multiply: This item represents the actual conversion factor.
Enter the new name, and the required shift and multiplier values to correct and/or
convert the PanSystem internal unit to a new, user-defined unit.
For example, if a user wants the Length class unit "meters" to appear as "mtl" instead of
the supplied form "m". The new Unit Name can be typed in as mt. If the shift is set at 0,
and the multiplier is set at 0.3048 the following conversion will apply:
mt = ft x 0.3048 (where "ft" represents the current internal unit).
The new user-defined unit is applied to all parameters that are in that class (in this case,
layer thickness, distance to boundary, well length, etc., are all in the Length class).
594
PanSystem
Units Detail Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is either generated by selecting the Units Detail button within the Unit
Classes sub-dialog or the View button in the Unit Systems dialog (i.e. viewing option),
and allows users to change or view respectively, the units for individual parameters (i.e.
rather than an entire class).
For example, users may only want some of the parameters with the Units of Length to be
in Meters (m). With this facility, users can set any other parameters they require to be in
Feet (ft), Centimetres (cm), or any other unit.
The sub-dialog is comprised of a selection area, an editing/information area and four
Unit Title/User Unit area: Select individual parameters within this list field by
highlighting with a left mouse-click. When a parameter is selected, the current
User Unit will also be displayed in the editing field within the Current User Unit
area.
Current User Unit area: This editing field is used to choose an alternative Unit
System for the currently-selected User Unit. Use the drop-down menu and
highlight an appropriate system.
If this sub-dialog is generated with the View button in the Unit Systems dialog, this
area can only be viewed - it cannot be edited unless it has been generated by
selecting the Units Detail button within the Unit Classes sub-dialog (i.e. during the
course of defining a new Unit System).
New Unit button: Use this button to create a new user-defined unit for a
selected parameter. Highlight the parameter with a left mouse-click, then select
the New Unit button to generate a Create New Unit sub-dialog.
The button is disabled if this sub-dialog is generated with the View button in the
Unit Systems dialog.
Edit Unit button: Use this button to edit an existing user-defined unit. Highlight
the parameter with a left mouse-click, then select the Edit Unit button to generate a
Create New Unit sub-dialog.
The EPS-supplied units cannot be edited - only user-defined units can be edited.
The button is also disabled if this sub-dialog is generated with the View button in
the Unit Systems dialog.
595
Gauge
Gauge Details Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Gauge Details option from the Configure menu
item and is used to specify the technical characteristics of the Pressure Gauge, and where
to use them in PanSystem.
This is an optional step - real Gauge Characteristics may be ignored if desired.

Use this dialog to:
Specify the Radius of Investigation.
Superpose Gauge Characteristics on simulated data in Advanced Simulation to
generate more realistic pressure responses.
The settings are saved with the (*.PAN) file.
The dialog is comprised of two selection/data input areas and two function buttons,
Radius of Investigation area: Users may choose how the Radius of Investigation
(Rinv) should be calculated. The (Rinv) parameter is displayed in the status bar
beneath the diagnostic plots for any position of the mouse pointer. Maximum
(Rinv) for the test is an output from the Semi-Log Plot in Analysis and appears in
the results box after a line-fit to the Radial Flow portion of the data.
Use Classical Calculation: This option determines the Radius of Investigation
(Rinv) using the classical equation (refer to PanSystem Equations for
details), and assumes a Gauge with perfect resolution and no Drift or
Noise.
Use Gauge Resolution and Noise: This option allows users to take the Gauge
Resolution and Noise characteristics into account (refer to PanSystem
Equations for details). If this option is selected, the Base Rinv on 'n' Times
(resolution+noise) input field is activated (described below), and users
should enter a value for the Gauge Resolution and/or Noise in the Advanced
Simulation Effects area of the dialog (described below).
Base Rinv on 'n' Times (resolution+noise): The decision that an anomaly in
the pressure trend on a diagnostic plot does or does not represent a
heterogeneity is subjective. One user might want to see a deviation from
the Radial Flow line by, say, two times the Gauge Resolution at a certain
time on a Semi-Log Plot, to be certain it represents an anomaly at a certain
distance, another might feel happier with four times the Gauge Resolution.
The calculation of Radius of Investigation (Rinv) must take this criterion into
account. Values of n from 2 to 4 appear to be quite reasonable. If users
include Noise in the Gauge details, this too is incorporated in the
computation.
Note that this refers to the detection of an anomaly at a distance Rinv, not
characterization of the anomaly as a fault, change of kh, etc. This would
require about another log cycle of testing time.
596
PanSystem
Maximum Rinv: To limit the Build-Up by the preceding flowing period of

duration (Tp), check this checkbox to impose the popular, (but not
universally held opinion) that the Radius of Investigation (Rinv) of a Build-
Up cannot exceed that attained by (Tp).
This feature is switched-off by default.

Advanced Simulation Effects area: This is where users can specify the Pressure
Gauge characteristics:
To use options in this area for the calculation of Radius of
Investigation (Rinv), enter values for Resolution and/or Noise. There
is no need to check the checkboxes in this case.
To use options in this area for simulating the Pressure Response with
Advanced Simulation, check the checkboxes for the effects to be
included, and enter values.
Gauge Type: This field is linked to a data file containing a list of Gauge
Types and their characteristics.
The file is called GAUGES.TXT and resides in the main PanSystem directory.
It is in ASCII format and can be edited (i.e. externally), so users can add
their own Gauge Types and data as required. The basic file comes with the
generic Gauge Types (e.g. quartz crystal, quartz capacitance, etc.) and
typical values for resolution.
If particular Gauge Types are used more frequently, it is worth entering

them in this file. However, remember to update the number at the top of
the file to reflect the increased number of Gauges.
If a Gauge Type is selected from the list, the associated parameters for that
Gauge will appear in the Drift, Resolution and Noise fields. These parameters
may be overtyped if required. Alternatively, leave the entry as Not Specified
and type in values.
Include Gauge Drift: Enter the expected Gauge Drift (i.e. positive for
downward drift) and check the checkbox to include it in Advanced
Simulation.
Include Gauge Resolution: Enter the Gauge Resolution and check the
checkbox to include it in Advanced Simulation, or leave the checkbox
unchecked if it is only required for calculating Radius of Investigation (Rinv).
Note that the data transmission system may have poorer resolution than
the Gauge itself.
Include Noise: Enter the maximum Noise Amplitude and check the
checkbox to include it in Advanced Simulation, or leave the checkbox
unchecked if it is only required for calculating Radius of Investigation(Rinv).
Any Noise is considered to have a uniform probability distribution between
plus/minus the amplitude value specified.
Add Noise BEFORE Resolution: If the Include Gauge Resolution and Include
Noise checkboxes have both been checked, users have the additional option
of Adding Noise BEFORE Resolution in the Advanced Simulation calculations.
This feature is disabled by default and noise is assumed to originate after
the sensor (e.g. in the data transmission system). The appearance of the
597
simulated pressure is radically different if the Noise is introduced before

resolution.
598
PanSystem
Graphs
Graphing Configuration Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Graphs option from the Configure menu item
and is used to specify how graphs/plots appear on the screen.
The Graphing settings selected by users are written to the Windows Registry under
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Graphing. When a new (*.PAN) file is
subsequently created, these new settings will take precedence over the defaults. These
settings can be applied in two different ways:
Using the main Edit menu while displaying a particular plot, to select the X-
Axis, Y-Axis, Legend and Results menu options. Users can then alter some of these
settings in the dialogs that are generated with these options. The corresponding
settings are updated automatically in the Configure section of PanSystem.
Similarly, by selecting a plot to be configured in this Graphing Configuration dialog
and altering settings. The corresponding settings are updated automatically in the
Edit section of PanSystem, related to plot display.
Users should experiment with the Graphing settings using this dialog or the Edit menu
(while displaying a particular plot), to create an interface that best suits their
requirements.
care - please refer to the warning note at the end of this Help topic.
The dialog is comprised of three selection areas (one containing four sub-sections) and
two function buttons, described as follows:
Plot Specific area: This area is used to configure items specifically related to the
selected plot. Each plot can be configured on an individual basis:
Plot: Select the plot to be configured using the Plot drop-down menu.
Title Color: Select the color for the selected plot title using the drop-down
menu.
X-Axis Data: Show or hide the grid, scales, labels, date and/or ticks on the
X-axis (i.e. when these checkboxes are enabled), by checking or unchecking
the appropriate checkboxes (i.e. global setting, plot type specific).
The Date option is only available for the Data Edit and Test Overview plots.
Rounding Scale Axis: Invoke X-axis scale rounding. This partially
overrides the Min and Max values specified earlier, since the Round
option selects Min and Max values so the tick values will be round
numbers, taking into account the range covered by the data (i.e.
global setting, plot type specific).
Logarithmic Axis Display: This option is only available for plots with
logarithmic axes (e.g. Log-Log Plot).
599
Tick Count: Choose the spacing between the X-axis grid lines (i.e.
automatically sets the axis numbering (i.e. global setting, plot type
specific).
The Ticks option is not enabled for logarithmic scaling.

Color: Change the X-axis display Colour (i.e. global setting, plot type
specific), using the drop-down menu.
Time Format: Select a suitable Time Format for the X-axis label (e.g.
hours, dd.mm.hh.ss, etc.), where appropriate. If date information
has been imported with gauge data, this option permits the date to
be plotted on the time axis of the Data Edit Plot and Test Overview
(e.g. (DATE)hh:mm:ss time format).
This option is only available for the Data Edit and Test Overview
plots.
Y-Axis Data: Show or hide the grid, scales, labels and/or ticks on the Y-axis
(i.e. when these checkboxes are enabled), by checking or unchecking the
appropriate checkboxes (i.e. global setting, plot type specific).
Rounding Scale Axis: Invoke Y-axis scale rounding. This partially
overrides the Min and Max values specified earlier, since the Round
option selects Min and Max values so the tick values will be round
numbers, taking into account the range covered by the data (i.e.
global setting, plot type specific).
Logarithmic Axis Display: This option is only available for plots with
logarithmic axes (e.g. Log-Log Plot).
Tick Count: Choose the spacing between the Y-axis grid lines (i.e.
automatically sets the axis numbering (i.e. global setting, plot type
specific).
The Ticks option is not enabled for logarithmic scaling.

Color: Change the Y-axis display Colour (i.e. global setting, plot type
specific), using the drop-down menu.
Legend area: Use this area to:
Choose the position that the plot Legend box will occupy on the selected plot
(check one of the four options).
Choose the box frame and text Color from the drop-down menu and menu
scroll bar.
Results area: Use this area to:
Choose the position that the plot Results box will occupy on the selected plot
(check one of the four options).
Choose the box frame and text Color from the drop-down menu and menu
scroll bar.
600
PanSystem
The dedicated Website guide for the Windows Registry accessed from the URLs
http://registry.winguides.com/ or http://www.regedit.com/.
601
Fonts
Font Definition Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Fonts option from the Configure menu item and
is used to specify the fonts that PanSystem uses to display information on the screen and
print reports.
Although PanSystem already has default fonts specified, users can specify their own fonts
and save these as the new defaults. The Font settings selected by users are written to
the Windows Registry under HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Fonts.
When a new (*.PAN) file is subsequently created, these new settings will take
precedence over the defaults.
care - please refer to the warning note at the end of this Help topic.
This dialog is comprised of a selection button area and four additional function buttons,
Font Definition: To change the fonts for any of the display items or the report,
select the appropriate button:
Results/Legend Font: Use this option to set the font face and size for the
Results and Legend boxes for plots, both on-screen and in the report.
Title Font: Use this option to set the font face and size for the Title for plots,
both on-screen and in the report.
X-Axis Label Font: Use this option to set the font face and size for the X-
Axis Label for plots, both on-screen and in the report.
Y-Axis Label Font: Use this option to set the font face and size for the Y-
Axis Label for plots, both on-screen and in the report.
Axis Scales Font: Use this option to set the font face and size for the Axes
Scales for plots, both on-screen and in the report.
Report Font: Use this option to set the font face and base size for the
report.
In each of these six cases a standard Windows Font sub-dialog is generated,

that allows users to select an appropriate Font, Font Style, Font Size and
Script from a series of drop-down menus.
Save As Defaults: Use this button option to save any changes applied above as
the default settings for PanSystem.
Restore Defaults: Use this button option to restore the PanSystem default
settings for all the above items.
602
PanSystem

603
PanWizard
What Next? Dialog
General:
This is an on-screen help system designed for those who are just starting with
PanSystem, or who have forgotten what they learned last time they used it. If the
PanWizard is enabled, a series of screens (i.e. the "Wizards") will guide users step-by-
step through Importing Data, Data Preparation and into Analysis. Each Wizard starts
with:
"What Next?"
The Wizards are intended to be brief, concise and quickly/easily assimilated; an
alternative to the more detailed On-Line Help.
Further Help is available from each of the Wizard dialogs should it be required.
To follow the PanWizard path through Data Importation, Preparation and Analysis, select
the Next>> button on the PanWizard dialog.
To leave PanWizard at any stage, select Quit.
To go back a step, click <<Back.
When users select the Next>> button on some Wizards, they will move to a PanSystem
dialog. In this case, the Wizard will appear as an icon.
If users want to re-display the Wizard (e.g. to read the instructions again), just double-
click on the icon.
604
PanSystem
Run on System Start-Up?
General:
For users who are reasonably familiar with PanSystem and do not want to be guided by
the Wizards, switch-off (i.e. uncheck) the Run on System Start-Up? option from the
PanWizard menu, then select the Quit button. That will switch-off the PanWizard for
subsequent sessions of PanSystem unless this option is re-checked at some point. If
users wish to enable the Wizards for subsequent sessions from start-up, they should
switch-on (i.e. check) this menu item.
If assistance from the Wizards is only required at a certain stage for a particular
PanSystem function, select the required option from the PanWizard menu item for step-
by-step assistance (e.g. Enter Gauge Data, Test Design, etc.). Options may be enabled
or disabled (grey), depending on the current status of the program (e.g. Analysis will only
be accessible if data has been prepared correctly).
To proceed with the Wizards, click the Next>> button on the PanWizard dialog.
See also:
What Next?
605
Initialization - Load File Dialog
General:
This is the first Wizard that users will encounter when they start a new PanSystem
session and select the What Next? option. Users are given two options for data
entry/import:
Raw Gauge Data: If users have a raw Gauge Data File (*.TPR) to load, select
Next>>. This path will work through the loading of the raw data and the
initialization of fluid, well and reservoir parameters. Users will create a system file
(*.PAN), which can then be analyzed.
(*.PAN) System File: If users already have a formatted system file (*.PAN), such
as one of the supplied example files, select the Load PAN File button in the dialog.
They will then be able to check the input data or proceed with an Analysis. Once
the file has been loaded, select the What Next? option from the PanWizard menu
item to proceed.
To follow the PanWizard path through Data Preparation and Analysis stages, select the
Next>> button on each of the subsequent PanWizard dialogs. To leave PanWizard at any
stage, select Quit. To go back a step, select <<Back.
When users select the Next>> button on some Wizards, they will move to a PanSystem
dialog. In this case, the Wizard will appear as an icon.
If users want to re-display the Wizard (e.g. to read the instructions again), just double-
click on the icon.
606
PanSystem
Model Selection Dialog
General:
Although the use of the various Wizards is intended to be self-explanatory, an overview of
the Wizard for model selection is presented here, to highlight the salient features of what
users may find to be a very useful option.
The Model Selection Wizard is designed to be used in conjunction with the Log-Log Plot
during Analysis.
A picture of the current Log-Log Plot is displayed on the left-half of the dialog. A library
of characteristic derivative shapes is presented in the right-half of the dialog to help
users identify the model. This is divided into Reservoir Flow Models and Boundary
Models. The full library of derivatives is displayed regardless of any flow regime
markers that may have been placed on the plot.
Use the up/down arrows to the right of the Reservoir Flow Model area to browse the
selection of reservoir derivative shapes. If users select any particular one, a text
description will appear in the Selected Reservoir Flow Model area at lower left.
Similarly, users can scroll through the possible Boundary Models.
Users can select the OK button at any time to exit the Wizard.
Set Model button: If users identify a tentative model and wish to proceed with
parameter estimation, select this button. An information box will appear confirming
the choices.
607
Select OK to proceed. The inner (reservoir) and outer (boundaries) models will be
set automatically within PanSystem, so there is no need to go into the Analysis
Model section of the program to set them.
If users select Cancel, they will be returned to the Wizard dialog.
Suggest Models button: This button generates a Suggest Models dialog that serves
the same purpose as the Model Selection screen described above. Users can
(optionally) make their model selection here by highlighting the desired choices,
then selecting the Set Model button described above.
608
PanSystem
Suggest Model Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Suggest Models button within the PanWizard
Model Selection dialog. It is designed to provide users with a short-list of possible model
types. This short-list will respect any flow regimes users may have defined on the Log-
Log Plot (e.g. if users have marked a Radial Flow period followed by Linear Flow, the
Boundary Model list will be restricted to those geometries that can include Linear Flow. A
Linear Flow period preceding Radial Flow will restrict the list of reservoir Flow Models to
the Vertical Fracture Set).
Users can (if required) browse available models from the two lists and display their
pressure derivatives using the More Details button and/or make their choice of models
here, then proceed to Analysis, using the Set Model button.
Further selection criteria are provided in the Questions area. Selecting No to any of these
queries will remove the appropriate (or rather, the inappropriate) models from the list.
The Close button will return users to the main PanWizard Model Selection dialog.
The More Details button generates a dialog containing pictures of the derivative shapes
for any reservoir Flow Model and Boundary Model that users may highlight in the lists.
Where several different derivative shapes are possible, up/down arrows will appear in a
scroll-bar. The OK button will return users to the Suggest Models dialog.
609
Quit Dialog
General:
If at any time users select the Quit button to exit from Wizard mode, they will be given
two checking options as explained below:
Keep Current State of System: Leaves the PanWizard system of dialogs and
retains any new data and settings which have been entered during the current
Wizard session.
Discard All New Data: Leaves the PanWizard system of dialogs and discards all of
the data and settings entered during the current Wizard session.
Selecting Cancel simply returns users to the last Wizard.
610
PanSystem
PanSystem Help Menu Index
General:
These menu options generate the following Help information:
Index: Displays the main Help index for PanSystem menu options.
Keyboard: Displays the Keyboard index.
Commands: Displays Commands index.
Procedures: Displays Procedures index.
Screen Regions: Displays Screen Regions index.
Glossary: Displays Glossary index.
Using Help: Displays Help on Using the PanSystem On-Line HTML Help.
About PanSystem: Displays the EPS Copyright and PanSystem Version information.
611
Help Menu
General Index
General:
There are several ways to access the on-line HTML Help in PanSystem:
Hitting the F1 key when a menu item is highlighted, or when a screen dialog is
selected (i.e. context-sensitive help).
Selecting the SHIFT and F1keys simultaneously, gives users the option to access
Help on graphic screen regions (e.g. menu bar, toolbar, plot legend, axes, etc.). A
large question mark appears beside the mouse pointer when this is active. Place
the cursor with question mark over the item of interest then select the F1 key
again; a Help topic relating to the selected item will then be generated.
Using one of the Help options on the main PanSystem menu bar to access:
Short indexes (i.e. hyperlinks) to Help topics that relate to specific functions
within PanSystem.
Information on Using the PanSystem On-Line HTML Help.
Help Indexes for PanSystem Menu Items:
Select any of these links below to access an index of options and explanation of each
PanSystem menu item with hyperlinks to individual Help topics:
File Menu Index
Edit Menu Index
Dataprep Menu Index
Analysis Menu Index
Simulate Menu Index
Deliverability Menu Index
Configure Menu Index
The PanWizard menu item is not included since it is an interactive product with
step-by-step guidance for the user.
Help Indexes for PanSystem Commands:
Windows System Commands Index
Toolbar Commands Index
Help Indexes for Screen Regions:
General Windows Screen Regions Index
PanSystem-Specific Screen Regions Index
Graphing Index
Help Indexes for Procedures:
Printing Procedures
Windows Procedures
Graphing-Specific Procedures
Keyboard Procedures
612
PanSystem
Keyboard Procedures Index
General:
Select one of the following links to open up a Help topic related to each item:
PanSystem and Windows Keys
Graphing Specific Keys
Switching to Another Application
613
Commands Index
To get Help on the Commands available in the application, select one of the following
links:
PanSystem and Windows Commands
Toolbar-Specific Commands
614
PanSystem
Procedures Index
To get Help on the Procedural aspects of the application, select one of the following links:
Printing Procedures
Windows Procedures
Graphing-Specific Procedures
615
Screen Regions Help Index
To get Help on the Screen Regions within the application, select one of the following
links:
General Windows Screen Regions
PanSystem-Specific Screen Regions
Graphing-Specific Screen Regions
616
PanSystem
Glossary
Definitions of Terms
EPS Copyright
EPS Address
617
Using the PanSystem On-Line HTML Help
General:
The PanSystem On-Line HTML Help system is designed to open in Microsoft's HTML Help
Viewer and is best viewed with the Window's Verdana Font (which is included with
Internet Explorer 4.x or later and is also available as a free download from Microsoft's
web site).
The Help Viewer features a split pane window and functional menu bar comprising:
Tabbed dialogs for search and navigation situated along the top of the left-hand
pane of the viewer; certain areas of these tabs have left and right mouse-click
operated features. This pane may be partially compressed on opening the viewer
and can be viewed fully by clicking and dragging the pane edge to the right-hand
side to uncover the remaining tabs.
Help topic dialogs contained in the right-hand pane of the viewer, with additional
left and right mouse-click operated features.
Upper menu bar containing functional buttons, left and right mouse-click operated
features.
Accessing and Using Help:
To access the context-sensitive On-Line HTML Help within any of the PanSystem dialog
windows, either select the Help button (where available) or the F1 key and the Help
viewer will be activated.
If the Shift key is held down and F1 is pressed, the mouse cursor turns into a query
pointer:
This pointer can now be placed over the screen region on which users wish to receive
Help information, then the left mouse button can be clicked; this will present users with a
description of the screen region.
Where the topic text refers to dialog windows, data input parameters, selection buttons
and menu items within PanSystem, the text appears in italics. Important notes are
outlined in blue with blue text and tips are outlined in orange with blue text for increased
visibility (as illustrated below).
Notes:
Tips:
Individual Help features are explained below:
Help Viewer: This can be maximized or re-sized to suit the individual user by
using the buttons situated at the top right-hand corner as described below:
Effect: Action:
Minimize viewer Left mouse-click on Minimize icon
Maximize viewer Left mouse-click on Maximize icon
618
PanSystem
Left mouse-click on Restore icon

Restore viewer
to default size
Close viewer Left mouse-click on Close icon
Manually re-size Place the mouse pointer over the edge of

viewer any viewer pane so it turns into a line with
arrows on each end:
to resize viewer horizontally
to resize vertically
Click and drag with the left mouse button

depressed - up, down, left or right. On
release, the window will be re-sized.
Left-Hand Pane and Tabs: This pane can be activated or de-activated by
selecting the Show/Hide icons respectively from the top left corner of the upper
menu bar. This pane may be partially compressed when the Help is opened and
can be widened by clicking and dragging the pane edge to the right-hand side to
uncover the remaining tabs. The following left-hand tabs are available:
Contents: This tab displays the Help file table of contents as a list of book
icons (i.e. broad Help subject areas) and topic icons (i.e. specific Help files).
A closed book has an adjacent (+) sign and is opened by clicking on a book
icon or the (+) sign. Conversely, an open book has an adjacent (-) sign and
is closed by either clicking on the book icon or the (-) sign. Books contain
individual topics that are opened by selecting and clicking on the topic icon to
display the textual contents in the right-hand pane of the viewer.
Index: This tab displays a multi-level list of keywords and keyword phrases.
These terms are associated with Help topics and are intended to direct the
user to specific topics. Keywords are cross-referenced with synonyms to
provide different ways of finding the desired information.
To locate, open and view a topic in the right-hand pane of the viewer, type in
a search word or phrase into the Index data field; the list will be searched
619
alphabetically and a related keyword entry will be highlighted. If the

highlighted keyword is appropriate to the search, select the Display button at
the base of the Index tab to display a range of available Help topics for the
selected keyword. A Topics Found dialog window will be opened and an
appropriate topic item can then be selected from the displayed list.
Search: This tab allows the user to search for words and locate topics
containing these words. A full-text search scans the text in all topics to find
matches; searches are not case-sensitive. There are also options to search
previous results, match against similar words and only search topic titles by
checking one of the selection fields at the base of this tab. When the search
is completed, a list of topics is displayed and the user can select specific
topics to view.
To perform a search, type a word or phrase into the data entry field. Phrases
can be partitioned using Boolean operators (i.e. AND, OR, NEAR, NOT)
accessed from the right arrow drop-down menu. Examples of Boolean
searches are given in the table below:
Search For: Example: Results:

Both terms in well AND Topics containing both the
the same topic permeability words "well" and
"permeability".
Either term in a Corey OR Topics containing either the
topic permeability word "Corey" or the word
"permeability" or both.
First term fractional flow Topics containing the words
without the NOT Corey "fractional flow", but not the
second term word "Corey".
Both terms in migration NEAR Topics containing the word
the same topic, fractional flow "migration" within eight
close together words of the words
"fractional flow".
Previous searches can also be viewed or re-selected from the down arrow
drop-down menu. Check any of the additional search parameters required
(i.e. use previous results, match similar words and/or search titles only), then
select the List Topics button to initiate search and display. Topics are listed
by Title, Location and Rank. Select and highlight the desired title from the list
and select the Display button to view a topic in the right-hand pane of the
viewer. Search keywords will be highlighted in the text.
To find a specific word or phrase within a Help topic, the Microsoft Internet
Explorer Find on Page facility can also be used; this is invoked by pressing
the Ctrl + F keys on the keyboard, whilst the mouse cursor is located in the
topic concerned:
620
PanSystem
Favorites: This tab allows the user to store a list of favorite or most
frequently used Help topics, providing a faster method of access to these
topics. The list can be updated by adding or subtracting topics as follows:
Locate a topic using one of the methods described above and display
it in the right-hand pane of the viewer. The topic title will also be
displayed in the Current Topic data field within the left-hand pane.
Once the desired topic is displayed in the right-hand pane, add the
topic by either selecting the Add button or right-clicking in the Topics
frame of the left-hand pane, then selecting Add from the pop-up
menu; the selected topic will then appear in the favourite Topics list.
Continue this process to build up a list of favorites.
To remove any of these topics, select/highlight the topic for removal
in the Topics frame of the left-hand pane, then either select the
Remove button or right-click on the selected/highlighted topic, then
select Remove from the pop-up menu.
Additional Right Mouse-Click Functionality for this tab is described in

more detail below.
Right-Hand Pane: This pane displays the contents of a selected topic, including
text, tables and images. The user can navigate within a topic by:
Selecting internal textual hyperlinks to a sub-topic within a main topic (e.g.
bookmarks, pop-ups).
Scrolling, where the complete contents of a topic cannot be fitted into the
viewer.
Users can also navigate between topics by:
Selecting external textual hyperlinks to other related or non-related topics
(e.g. MS PowerPoint HTML presentations, external URLs).
Utilising left-hand pane navigational features described above to select,
locate and view other topics.
Using the upper menu bar Back and Forward buttons to move between
successive topics in a navigation sequence.
Using a browse sequence within the upper menu bar to jump between topics
in a fixed navigation sequence.
Topic text links are identified by italics and underlining. On a color monitor the
text link color is blue for a first-time selection; once a text-link has been used
621
during a Help session, the text link color will change to purple to identify
previously visited links to the user.
Upper Menu Bar Items: These encompass viewer pane, navigation and printing
functions; each are operated by left mouse-click and are described from left to right
as follows:
Show/Hide: This Show menu item is used to de-compress the left viewer
pane. Once the pane appears, the Show menu item changes to Hide and
the pane edge can be clicked and dragged to the right, to reveal the tabbed
dialog within. The pane can be re-compressed by selecting (e.g. to
maximize the area available for viewing topics).
Locate: When this button is activated, the left-hand pane of the viewer
window is refreshed as a Contents tab and the structural location of the
current topic (contained in the right-hand pane of the viewer window) is
indicated by being highlighted in dark blue. If the user is already operating
in the Contents tab, but the books are closed, selecting the Locate button
will open the book containing the current topic and indicate the structural
position as already described.
Back/Forward: Similar to a web browser, the HTML Help Viewer includes
Back and Forward buttons that allow the user to either return to the
previously viewed topic or go to the topic that was displayed prior to going
back.
Refresh: Use this button to refresh the current Help Topic pane in the same
manner as a web browser.
Print: Selection of this button opens a standard Windows Print dialog
window, where the user can define printer options and printing formats
before printing a selected Help Topic.
EPS Website: Select this button to hyperlink to the EPS Website home page.
It will be generated within the Help Topic pane.
EPS Product Support: Select this button to hyperlink to the EPS Website e-
Support Center page. It will be generated within the Help Topic pane. In
addition to general support, this area contains:
Latest updates and downloads for all EPS products.
Knowledge Base articles (i.e. FAQ's and product-specific information).
Latest news about EPS products.
This is an access-controlled area, but customers with a valid maintenance

contract should already have or will be issued with a Username and
Password to access the e-Support Center when they contact: eSupport@e-
petroleumservices.com
Right Mouse-Click Functionality: Different mouse functions are available
depending on whether the user is operating in the upper menu bar and left-hand
viewer pane or the right-hand viewer pane as described below:
Upper Menu Bar and Left-Hand Viewer Pane: The following drop-down menu
items are available when right-clicking in these two window areas:
Print: Select to open a Print Topics dialog window. The user can
choose to print the current topic or print all topics and sub-topics
contained under the currently selected heading.
622
PanSystem
Jump to URL: Select to open a Jump to URL dialog window. This

indicates the user's current website address or URL (Uniform
Resource Locator) for information currently displayed in the right-
hand viewer pane. An additional data field is available for entering a
URL address to which users may wish to navigate (e.g.
http://www.e-petroleumservices.com). Either type the URL
information in manually or paste in previously copied information by
right-clicking in the data entry field and selecting the Paste pop-up
menu option. Select OK in the sub-dialog and the selected URL is
displayed in the right-hand viewer pane.
Index, Search and Favorites tabs: The following drop-down menu items are
available under certain conditions when right-clicking in a data entry field:
Undo: Used to revert text in a data entry field to its last state before
any editing was applied. This item is only enabled once text has
been entered during a Help session.
Cut: Used to Cut any selected text from a data entry field to the
ClipBoard. This item is only enabled if a text selection is made.
Copy: Used to Copy any selected text from a data entry field to the
ClipBoard. This item is only enabled if a text selection is made.
Paste: Used to Paste any previously copied text from the ClipBoard
into a data entry field. This item is only enabled if previously copied
text is available for Pasting.
Delete: Used to Delete any selected text from a data entry field.
This item is only enabled if a text selection is made.
Select All: Used to select/highlight all text within a data entry field
(e.g. to subsequently Copy). This item is only enabled once text has
been entered during a Help session.
Favorites tab: The following drop-down menu items are only enabled once
a list of Favorites has been created and a right-click selection is made on
one of the list entries:
Display: Select/highlight one of the entries, then select this menu
item or the Display button to display the selected Help topic in the
right-hand pane.
Add: If users navigate to a Help topic they wish to store as a
Favorite (e.g. using the Contents, Index or Search tabs), then select
the Favorite tab, this topic name will be displayed in the Current
Topic field and can be added to the Favorites list, by either right-
clicking in the Topics field and selecting this menu item or selecting
the Add button.
Remove: Select/highlight one of the entries displayed in the Topics
field, then select this menu item or the Remove button to delete the
selected Help topic from the Favorites list.
Rename: Select/highlight one of the entries displayed in the Topics
field, then select this menu item to highlight the topic name and
enter a new Favorites list name for the topic.
Right-Hand Viewer Pane: The following drop-down menu items are available
when right-clicking in this window area:
623
Back/Forward: These items have the same functionality as the upper

menu bar items allowing the user to either return to the previously
viewed topic or go to the topic that was displayed prior to going back.
Select All: Selects everything contained within the current Help
topic. The keyboard controls Ctrl-C can then be used to copy the
selected contents of the topic and Ctrl-V to paste them into another
application. Once a selection has been made, there is also a right-
click Copy option available as a pop-up menu option.
View Source: Opens a Windows notepad file containing the HTML
source code for the current Help topic.
Print: This item has the same functionality as the upper menu bar
item and selection of this button opens a standard Print dialog
window, where the user can define printer options and printing
formats before printing the current Help topic.
Refresh: Refreshes the current Help topic in the viewer window.
Properties: Opens a properties dialog window that displays the file
properties for the current Help topic.
624
PanSystem
About PanSystem Dialog
This dialog tells users about the current version of PanSystem they are running. This
information is required by EPS's Product Support in the event of any problems being
encountered by users of the software.
The copyright information about the current PanSystem program is displayed here.
625
Printing
General:
PanSystem has a number of options available to print the currently displayed plot to hard
copy or file, along with any additional information selected under Page Setup from the
File menu or the Configure menu.
To capture the plot for use in a word processor or graphics package, use the Copy option
from the Edit menu (or the Windows Alt + Print Screen keyboard command), to transfer
the plot window to the Clipboard. From here it is available for pasting into other
applications.
To print a full report of results and other data, use the Print Report option from the
Report menu.
Users have the choice of:
Printing the plot and text to a selected printer. With this option, a printer status
dialog appears on the screen while the plot is being printed.
Saving just the results content (if enabled) to an ASCII text file. A standard
Windows File Save As dialog is generated to save a file with default extension
(*.RPT).
Saving to an MS Word (*.DOC) file with graphics embedded. A standard Windows
File Save As dialog is generated to save a file with default extension (*.DOC).
Also refer to:
File Menu - Print
File Menu - Page Setup
File Menu - Printer Setup
File Menu - Page Setup Codes
Report Menu - Print Report
Report Menu - Save As WordDoc File
Configure Menu - General Configuration
General Help - Printing Procedures
626
PanSystem
Context-Sensitive Help
Context-sensitive on-line Help can be accessed in PanSystem by the following methods:

Hitting the F1 key when a menu item is highlighted, or when a particular screen
dialog is selected (i.e. is highlighted or has the focus).
Selecting the SHIFT and F1keys simultaneously, gives users the option to access
Help on graphic screen regions (e.g. menu bar, toolbar, plot legend, axes, etc.). A
large question mark appears beside the mouse pointer when this is active. Place
the cursor with question mark over the item of interest then select the F1 key again
- a Help topic relating to the selected item will then be generated.
Captions or "Tool Tips" are generated when users move the cursor over a button in
any of the Toolbars used within PanSystem. These captions help to identify the
button's function.
PanWizard is an interactive on-screen Help system designed for those who are just
starting with PanSystem, or who have forgotten exactly what to do since they last
used it. If PanWizard is switched on, a series of Help screens or "Wizards" will
guide users step-by-step through Data Preparation and into Analysis.
627
PanSystem Windows System Commands
The following commands are used to perform Windows system management tasks.
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu:
Close: Closes the current application.
Maximize: Maximizes the current application window.
Minimize: Minimizes the current application window.
Move: Moves the current application window.
Restore: Restores the current application window.
Size: Re-sizes the current application window.
628
PanSystem
Windows System Commands
System Close
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu, then select Close to shut-
down the current window. This is equivalent to selecting the Exit option from the File
menu.
629
System Maximize
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu, then select Maximize to
expand the application window to the full size of the screen.
630
PanSystem
System Minimize
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu, then Minimize, to shrink
the application window to an icon. Select the icon to restore.
631
System Move
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu. This displays a four-
headed arrow that can be used with the arrow keys to re-position an application window.
This command is unavailable if the window is enlarged to maximum size.
632
PanSystem
System Restore
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu, then Restore to return a
fully-enlarged application window to the previous size, or enlarge a window to full screen.
633
System Size
Functionality:
Select Alt+Space keys to activate the Windows system menu. This displays a four-
headed arrow that can be used with the arrow keys to change the size of an application
window.
This command is unavailable if the window is enlarged to maximum size.
634
PanSystem
PanSystem and PanMesh Toolbar Commands

General:
PanSystem and PanMesh use Toolbars for selecting a range of Graphical/Diagnostic Plot
options. These function-specific Toolbars are generated on selection of the appropriate
menu command as listed below:
Dataprep Toolbar
Analysis Toolbar
PDA Plot Toolbar
Deliverability Toolbar
PanMesh Toolbar
Toolbar Help can be invoked for any of these Toolbars by positioning the
mouse cursor over the Toolbar then pressing Shift and F1 keys to invoke the
query pointer:
left-click this query pointer on the Toolbar to generate context-sensitive

Help.
Tooltips:
The identity and actions of the Toolbar Tools can be viewed by passing the mouse cursor
over the button without clicking as illustrated below:
Illustration of Tooltips on the Analysis Toolbar
635
Toolbar Specific Commands
PanSystem Dataprep Toolbar
General:
Before using any of the tool functions on the Toolbar it is necessary to plot the data on
screen. This is controlled by the List to Plot section of the Pressure and Rate Data
Preparation dialog.
The tools are arranged in groups from left to right (number of buttons associated with
each group indicated in brackets), as follows:
Zoom (2): In and Out.
Data Reduction (6): Delete, Reduce, Initialise, Undo, Confirm and Number of
Points.
Data Patching (3): Copy & Paste Block, Copy Resample & Paste Column and Copy
& Resample to New Column.
Gauge Quality (2): Shift and Differences.
Rate Change (4): Exact Cursor Point, Nearest Data Point, Intersect Lines and Auto
Flow Period.
Flowrate (2): Generate Flow Rate Column, Ungroup Flow Periods.
Tidal Filter (3): Mode, Lag and Apply.
Most of the tools operate by selecting points or ranges of data, then operating the
relevant tool button. In a typical workflow, users will:
Point the cursor at individual points on the plot and select them by clicking the
left mouse button. The points subsequently change to a square shape and become
filled. If too many points or the wrong points are selected, use the Esc key to
deselect points (i.e. clear the current selection of points), and start again.
Select ranges of data by holding down the left mouse button and dragging a box
round the points to be included. Release the mouse button to select the data
surrounded by the box.
Select Rate Changes by holding down the keyboard Ctrl key and applying a left
mouse click on the Ruler Bar (i.e. lower half), at the required position/s. Move the
position/s by dragging with the mouse if necessary.
Similarly, select Test Periods by applying a left mouse click on the Ruler Bar (i.e.
upper half), above the plot. A group of consecutive Test Periods can be selected
by holding down the Shift key, then holding down the left mouse button and
dragging the cursor over each successive Test Period (e.g. for a Flow-After-Flow
(FAF) Test). To select all test periods, hold down the Ctrl key and left-click in the
ruler bar. Discrete (i.e. non-consecutive) Test Periods cannot be selected.
The toolbar functions do not operate in an identical manner with regard to data
selection, reflecting the different functionality that is available. Users need to be
aware of these differences as they use the tools.
For example:
636
PanSystem
Some functions, such as Delete Data, affect the whole row of data associated
with the selected point. The Time data and all entries in the row corresponding to
the Data Point are deleted, whether these are plotted or not.
Other functions, such as Copy, Resample & Paste, only affect the selected Data
Columns. Un-plotted data is not changed.
Another type of function actually changes the "mode" of the program, and only
accepts certain mouse actions (e.g. to define Rate Changes exactly where the
mouse cursor lies). The action is denoted by each function.
Toolbar Help can be invoked at any time by positioning the mouse cursor
over the Toolbar then pressing Shift and F1 keys to invoke the query pointer:
left-click this query pointer on the Toolbar to generate this context-

sensitive Help.
Dataprep Toolbar Icons and Functionality:
The following tools are available on the Dataprep Toolbar:
Zoom In: Enlarge a selected area of the current Graph/Plot.
Zoom Normal: Reset the selected area of the current Graph/Plot to default size.
Delete: Delete the selected data.
Data Reduction and Smoothing: Reduce the number of Data Points and Smooth data.
Initialise: Initialize all deletion and reduction operations.
Undo: Undo last deletion or reduction.
Confirm: Confirm deleted and reduced operations.
Number: Display number of Data Points.
Copy & Paste Block: Copy and paste Block Data with Time.
Copy, Resample & Paste: Copy, resample and paste from a Data Column.
Copy & Resample to New Column: Copy and resample to new Data Column.
Shift: Shift data in Time and/or Signal.
Difference: Calculate difference between two Data Columns.
Exact: Set exact point for Flow Period definition.
Nearest: Set nearest point for Flow Period definition.
Define: Define point for Flow Period definition.
Auto Flow Period: Automatically generate Flow Periods.
Create Rate: Calculate Flow Rate.
Ungroup Flow Periods: Ungroup Flow Periods in selected Test Period.
637
Tidal Mode: Switch Tidal Mode on/off.
Tidal Lag: Calculate Tidal Lag.
Tidal Filter: Apply Tidal Filter.
638
PanSystem
Dataprep
Zoom In
Functionality:
Click and drag a box around an area of interest, then use Zoom In to expand the selected
part of the Graph/Plot (i.e. within the box) for easier editing.
Acts on: The area within the dragged box (also refer to Zoom Normal).
639
Zoom Normal
Functionality:
Use Zoom Normal to change a Zoomed plot back to normal size (i.e. re-set to the scales
it had when it was first plotted).
Acts on: The whole plot (refer also to Zoom In).
640
PanSystem
Delete
Functionality:
Use Delete to remove selected point/s, a line fitted to a plot or a selected area on the
plot.
Deleting Points:
Selections can be made on an individual or grouped basis:
Select point/s with the mouse. Selected point/s become squares.
Click and drag to draw a box with the mouse pointer, holding down the left
mouse button. The area and/or points within the box will be selected.
Users cannot delete data points in Analysis. To delete a data point users
must go to Dataprep Gauge Data and delete the point on the Data Edit Plot.
The Delete function erases all measured data associated with a deleted point (e.g. if
users delete a Pressure point, the Flow Rate, Temperature and any other Gauge
reading at the same Clock Time will also be deleted).
Deleting Lines: Select the line by holding down the Ctrl key or the right mouse
button and clicking on the line, then select the Delete button or the Del key on your
keyboard.
Acts on: The selected line, a dragged box and any selected points. Multiple files are
allowed.
641
Data Reduction and Smoothing Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use the Data Reduction and Smoothing facility to reduce the number of points in the file
or in a selected portion of the file, and to smooth out noise. Oscillations induced by tidal
effects can often be more effectively removed using this facility than by using the Tidal
Filter.
Acts on: Three possibilities:
Click and drag to draw a box with the mouse pointer, holding down the left mouse
button, and then reduce/smooth the data contained within the box.
Select a single test period (i.e. if any have been defined), by selecting the upper
half of the ruler bar above the plot, or several contiguous test periods by holding
down the SHIFT key and sliding the mouse pointer over the test periods required,
then reduce/smooth the data.
Do not select or draw anything, and then reduce/smooth the entire data set.
When this button option is selected the Enter Reduction/Smoothing Details dialog is
generated. Users may elect to:
Reduce the data.
Smooth the data.
Both, in which case it will Smooth then Reduce.
The Enter Reduction/Smoothing Details dialog is comprised four data entry/selection
areas, with two associated checkboxes and three function buttons, described as follows:
Reduce Data checkbox: Check/uncheck this checkbox to activate/de-activate the
Data Reduction areas of the dialog.
Reduction Type area (upper and lower selection area): These two areas are
inter-dependent and entry fields in the lower area will alter in accordance with
selections made in the upper area.
Keep every nth point: In the lower selection area, users will need to specify
a value for n (e.g. keep every 5th point).
Delete every nth point: In the lower selection area, users will need to
specify a value for n (e.g. delete every 5th point).
Resample by delta signal: This requires a Signal Column to be selected
using the drop-down menu in the lower selection area. Enter the Delta
Signal value in the lower selection area (e.g. if users enter 0.1 psi for a
Signal Column = Pressure, starting from the first data point in the selected
portion of the plot (if any), the re-sampling filter will only retain points at a
spacing of 0.1 psi, or the next nearest to that if there is no point at the
exact spacing). The first and last points in the reduction interval are always
retained. This filter allows the user to keep data when the signal is greater
than their input value or remove the data when the signal is greater than
their input value.
642
PanSystem
Resample by delta time: In the lower selection area, enter the Delta Time
that the data will be re-sampled at (e.g. if users enter 0.01 hrs for Delta
Time, starting from the first data point in the plot (or a selected portion of
the plot), the re-sampling filter will only retain points at a spacing of 0.01
hrs, or the next nearest to that if there is no point at the exact time). The
first and last points in the reduction interval are always retained.
Resample to n points per log cycle: In the lower selection area, enter the
number of Points per Log Cycle of time that are to be kept. This will
produce logarithmically-spaced data. If users have defined several flow
periods and they do not select any particular one, the logarithmic filter will
sweep through the entire test, but will re-start the spacing logic at each rate
change, thereby giving a useful logarithmic spacing in each period.
Alternatively, individual periods may be selected for reduction. The first and
last points in the reduction interval are always retained.
Dual logarithmic and nth point reduction: This will apply Resample to n
points per log cycle reduction and Keep every nth point reduction in
parallel, and combine the points remaining from each. The first and last
points in the reduction interval are always retained. In the lower selection
area, enter values for the nth point to keep and Points per log cycle, as
described above.
Outlier Removal: The data set will be reduced by a statistical averaging
algorithm and any data that falls outside of a normal range on either side of
the mean will be eliminated. This facility should generally be used at least
once to clean up noisy data, as the range becomes narrower with each pass.
Wavelet Reduction: The data set will be reduced by applying a spline based
wavelet algorithm to remove noisy data points. Select the desired
percentage of data to keep, and select the Signal column from the drop-
down list. Rate data and pressure data can be reduced by wavelet reduction.
A reduced output file name can be maintained to keep the original data prior
to reduction.
Reduced Output File: A new reduced data set will be created, leaving the
original data set intact in case users wish to return to it. A default prefix
RD1, will be added to the file name. When users return to the Pressure and
Rate Data Preparation dialog, they will see the new file containing the
reduced data columns.
The action of deleting does not actually remove any data points from
memory, it simply flags them so that they are not displayed. This makes it
possible to quickly undo any deletions (by removing the flags). Deletion can
be made permanent with the Cnf button (confirm), in which case the data
points are removed from memory.
Users can quickly restore the points deleted by the very last reduction
operation by clicking the Undo button on the Dataprep Toolbar. To restore
the points deleted by all the reduction operations performed on the selected
file, file (since the last time Cnf was used) select the Initialise button on
the Dataprep Toolbar.
Since these deletion algorithms create a parallel reduced dataset prefixed by

RD1, etc, remember that your original data can still be found intact in the
Data File/Column window of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog.
643
Smooth Data checkbox: Check/uncheck this checkbox to activate/de-activate

the Data Smoothing areas of the dialog.
Smoothing time increases with the square of the number of points to be Smoothed
(e.g. if it takes (typically) 10 seconds to process 10,000 points, it will take 40
seconds to do 20,000). If more than 10,000 data points are to be Smoothed, and
a Data Reduction has just been performed, the deleted points can be cleared from
memory using the Cnf (Confirm) button to speed up the Smoothing operation. If
not, Smoothing time will be the same as for the pre-reduction data setset, as
PanSystem will still have to work through all of the data points held in memory,
whether they are to be included in the smoothing or not.
Smoothing Type area (upper and lower selection area): The purpose of the
smoothing option is to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of one or several selected
time series (e.g. pressure, rate, temperature, etc.). The smoothing algorithm is a
local linear estimator based on nearest neighbours, (i.e. a smoothed estimate of the
data is constructed by local linear regression about each point in the time series).
Loess - local regression fit: The smoothing algorithm is a local linear
estimator based on nearest neighbours, (i.e. a smoothed estimate of the
data is constructed by local linear regression about each point in the time
series by fitting simple models (polynomials) to localized subsets of the
data).
The degree of smoothing is controlled by:
Window span: This defines the number of points to be used in the
regression and is expressed as a fraction of the total number of points
in the dataset to be smoothed (in the selected test period, zoom box,
or the entire test). It is recommended to start with 0.1 (ie: 10%).
(Suppose there are N=500 points and the window span is 0.1. The
number of nearest neighbour points to be used in the filter will be
calculated as 500 x 0.1 = 50)
Moving Average: The Loess technique is computationally heavy, and will be
time-consuming when dealing with large data sets. Moving Average is a
simplistic, and therefore faster, smoothing algorithm.
A simple arithmetic average is calculated for every point in the series by
taking the sum of N points on either side and then dividing by (2N+1). N is
the user entry for the number of points.
The degree of smoothing is controlled by:
Number of points before and after: the number of points to be used is
directly specified
Flow period percentage: the number of points is defined as a fraction of
the total number in each flow period. The actual number used will
therefore vary according to the number in the flow period being
smoothed.
These two smoothing options share some additional control parameters:
Weight Basis: There are two options available:
Linear Time: The weight shape profile (see below) is defined in real
time (ti-tn) about the central point at tn.
Log Time: The weight shape profile (see below) is defined in
logarithmic time (logti-logtn) about the central point at tn.
644
PanSystem
With high density data acquisition, users will probably not see much
difference between the two methods. The Log Time option is recommended
for a logarithmically (or delta-p) sampled gauge, where the raw data will
appear fairly evenly spaced in log time.
Weighting Shape: For the Loess method, each point in the averaging group
of Mspan is multiplied by a weight (w), for the local least-squares estimate.
Points further from the current data point are assigned less weight than
points nearer to it. The functions used for calculating the weights are:
Peaked: This discriminates strongly against points (ti) not
immediately adjacent to the current point (tn).
Distributed: The weighting is more evenly distributed over the Mspan
group, with a less severe discrimination against the remoter points.
Weight shape is fixed at Distributed for the Moving average option.
Minimize End Effect: This attempts to reduce any artificial end-effects that
result from smoothing. These are most easily seen on the Log-Log Plot as
kicks at the end of the derivative. The end effect minimization gradually
reduces the number of nearest neighbours from Mspan towards 1 as the
end of the data set is approached. This is done in reverse at the start of
the data set, where the number of nearest neighbours is increased from 1
initially.
Columns to Smooth: Choose one or more columns from the list of available
data. PanSystem will assign default prefixes to the smoothed output
columns (e.g. if the input column is called Pressure, the default smoothed
output will be SM1 Pressure. A second smoothing operation on Pressure will
create a default output column SM2 Pressure, and so on. Note that a
second smoothing operation on SM1 Pressure will create a default output
column SM1 SM1 Pressure). Users may alter the output names via the
Names button if required.
Creating a new data column for the smoothed data means that the
unsmoothed data still exists and can be recovered if necessary. The
Initialise and Undo buttons from the Dataprep Toolbar mentioned in the
Reduction Type area above, do NOT remove the effects of smoothing.
Smoothed Output Column Names: This button opens the Smoothed Column
Names sub-dialog, where users can edit the names of the smoothed data.
By default, PanSystem renames the data columns by prefixing them with
SMn as described above in Columns to Smooth, (where n = the incremental
saved smoothing number).
645
Smoothed Column Names Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated by selecting the Names button in the Smoothing Type area
of the Enter Reduction and Smoothing Details dialog. In this sub-dialog, users can edit
the Names of the smoothed data. By default PanSystem re-names the data columns by
prefixing them with SMn, (where n = the incremental saved smoothing number).
This sub-dialog is comprised of a table field with two columns:
Original Column: This displays the original name of the data column.
Smoothed Column: Users can edit the name of the smoothed data column in this
field.
646
PanSystem
Initialize
Functionality:
Use Initialize to undo all Data Deletions and Reductions. If users have also selected the
Confirm Data Reduction button, PanSystem will initialise the data as it was when last
confirmed, restoring all changes made since then. PanSystem writes the reduced data
set to a new file, so the original data does in fact remain intact in a separate file (refer to
the Help topic on Data Reduction and Smoothing), should users need to return to it.
Acts on: All plotted files.
647
Undo
Functionality:
Use Undo to undo the last Data Deletion or Reduction carried out. The last data Shift also
will be undone. Users can lock in a Shift with the Confirm button if they do not wish it to
be undone when the Undo button is used subsequently to restore reduced or deleted
data. To recover data removed in earlier Data Reductions, users will need to re-initialize
the data using the Initialize button option. Initialize does not operate on shifted data.
When the user selects a subset of data to shift by zooming in on a part of the screen,
where no data can be found, or selects the wrong data channel (temperature instead of
pressure), an error message appears advising the user to change his selection.
648
PanSystem
Confirm Data Reduction Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
The Data Reduction, Deletion and Shift buttons actually only tag the selected data
internally for possible erasure; the points are still retrievable by using the Undo and
Initialize buttons. Use Confirm to provide (reduction, shift or deletion) validation on the
data to a permanent state.
Deleted data will be removed by this operation. Neither the Initialize nor Undo
buttons will be able to restore data to the previous state once the Confirm
operation has been accepted. However, PanSystem writes the Reduced Data to a
new file, so the original data does remain intact in a separate file (refer to the Help
topic for Data Reduction and Smoothing) and can be recovered easily should users
need to return to it.
If users are working with more than 160,000 points, and have re-sampled to less than
this, PanSystem will automatically try to transfer the Reduced Data set to memory on
selecting Confirm. If users do not have sufficient memory, Windows will page from disk
as necessary.
Subsequent editing operations become considerably faster once the data are in memory.
649
Number of Points Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use Number to display the number of non-deleted data points in a selection.

The Number of Points information dialog displays the number of non-deleted points in the
currently selected test period/s or the total number of non-deleted points, if a test period
is not selected.
Acts on: The selected flow period or the whole data if no flow period is selected. Only
works with one file plotted.
650
PanSystem
Copy and Paste Block of Data (incl. Time) Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use Copy and Paste Block of Data (incl. Time) to copy selected data from one file to the
corresponding columns of another file.
This tool provides the same functionality as the Append facility from the Pressure
and Rate Data Preparation dialog.
All data columns, including times will be copied over, obliterating any data
already present in the corresponding section of the target file.
This option can also be used to copy and paste onto the beginning or end of the target
file.
If the source file has fewer columns of data than the target file, the missing data will be
pasted in as zeroes. If it has more columns than the target, the extra columns will not
be copied over.
Acts on: An area defined by a click and drag box (i.e. all data in the time interval
spanned by the box).
The operation is only enabled when two files are plotted. The target file for the
patch is the file that has been selected as "Master" data file. The source file for the
data is the other plotted file. The source data is left intact in the source file, since
it is copied, not cut.
The following procedure should be adopted:
Before using the Copy and Paste Block of Data (incl. Time) facility, select the
target data file to receive the paste as the "Master" data file (refer to the Help topic
for Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation).
Plot the "Master" data file and the file to be used as the source for the paste (it is
sufficient just to plot pressures, there is no need to plot everything, since all the
other data will be copied over).
Select the time range to be copied and pasted by clicking and dragging a box
around it. If a box is not drawn, the entire plotted time interval will be used.
Now select the Copy and Paste Block of Data (incl. Time) facility. A Select Columns
to Append (or Copy and Paste) sub-dialog will be generated.
The columns of the "Master" file are listed on the right-hand side (i.e. the target) -
these are non-editable. The columns of the source file are listed by corresponding
type on the left-hand side (e.g. pressure alongside pressure, rate alongside rate,
etc.).
Where there is a choice of source data columns of a particular type, select one from
the drop- down menu (e.g. the source file may have several columns of Rate Data
that could be pasted into the Rate Column of the target file). If users do not want
to transfer data, select ZERO OUT, and zeroes will be patched in. Where there is no
corresponding type in the source file, only ZERO OUT will be available.
651
Time is always pasted across, replacing the times in the corresponding interval of
the target file.
Select OK, to copy and paste the selected data to the target file.
652
PanSystem
Copy, Re-sample, and Paste from a Single Column Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
This function copies a single column of data from one file into the corresponding column
in another file. If the times of the two sets of data are not identical, then the incoming
data are re-sampled (i.e. by linear interpolation) at the times in the target file.
Acts on: An area defined by a click and drag box (i.e. all data in the time interval
spanned by the box).
The operation is only enabled when two files are plotted. The target file for the
paste is the file that has been selected as "Master" data file. The source file for the
data is a second plotted file. Data in the selected column in the target file are
replaced by the incoming data, which will be re-sampled to match the target file
times. Other data in the target file are not affected. The source data is left intact
in the source file, since it is copied, not cut.
Before using the Copy, Re-sample and Paste from Single Column facility, select the
target data file to receive the paste as the "Master" data file (refer to the Help topic
for Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation).
Plot the two data columns to be used in the operation (i.e. the target data column
is in the "Master" file and the source data column is in the other file).
Select the time range to be copied and pasted by clicking and dragging a box
around it. If a box is not drawn, the entire plotted time interval will be used.
Now select the Copy, Re-sample and Paste from Single Column facility. A Select
Column to Copy, Re-sample and Paste dialog will be generated.
The plotted columns of the "Master" data file are listed on the right-hand side of the
dialog under Paste Into. Select the target data column, if more than one has been
plotted, using the drop-down menu. The source column/s of the corresponding
type are listed on the left-hand side of the dialog under Copy From (e.g. pressure
alongside pressure, rate alongside rate, etc.). Select the source data column, if
more than one has been plotted, using the drop-down menu.
Select OK, to copy and paste the selected data to the target file.
653
Copy and Re-sample Entire Column to New Column Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
This function copies values of a single column from one file into a new column in another
file. If the times of the two files are not the same, then the incoming data are re-
sampled (i.e. by linear interpolation) at the times in the target file.
Acts on: The whole time-span of the "Master" data file. The target file for paste is the
"Master" data file.
The operation is only enabled when data from the target and source files are
plotted. Other data in the target file are not affected. The source data is left
intact in the source file, since it is being Copied, not Cut.
Before using the Copy and Re-sample Entire Column to New Column facility, select
the target data file to receive the paste as the "Master" data file (refer to the Help
topic for Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation).
Plot the source data column, and any column from the "Master" data file (i.e.
target), so that both files are on-screen. Since the "new" target data column does
not yet exist, something else must be plotted from the target file.
There is no need to click and drag to draw a box; the entire target file time interval
will be used.
Now select the Copy and Re-sample Entire Column to New Column facility. A Select
Column to Copy, Re-sample and Create dialog will be generated.
The plotted column/s of the source data file are listed on the left-hand side of the
dialog under Copy From. Select the source data column, if more than one has been
plotted using the drop-down menu. Type a name for the new data column to be
created in the target file, under Create New Column.
Select OK, to create the new column in the target file.
654
PanSystem
Shift Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use Shift to shift selected data. This can be done in three ways:
By time.
By signal value.
By both the above.
Users can shift an entire dataset or a portion of it. The shift can be made graphically by
clicking and dragging the data, or the exact shift values can be typed in.
Acts on: Any plotted column can be selected for shifting. The whole dataset of the
selected column or a portion of it can be shifted. A box can be clicked and dragged
around a portion of the data to mark it. Users tell the program if they want to limit the
shift to the boxed-in data, or apply it to the whole column of data. If time is shifted,
then all columns in the file are shifted by the same amount (i.e. so they remain
synchronized in time).
Generate the Data Edit Plot, and include the column to be shifted.
If users only want to shift a portion of the data, they should click and drag to draw
a box around the required portion, otherwise the whole data set will be shifted.
If a large number of points are plotted and users want to shift them all, the process
can be speeded up by drawing a box around a small portion of the data (e.g. some
correlatable event). The box can then be manoeuvred to the correct position quite
rapidly (i.e. reduced re-draw time), then a shift can be automatically applied to the
rest of the data.
Select the Shift button to generate the Select Shift Stream dialog.
If users have drawn a box round a portion of the data, they can elect to shift just
this portion by checking the Shift Only Data Within Box checkbox option at the
bottom left of the dialog. Otherwise, the shift will be applied to the whole dataset.
Select the shifting option from the central left area of the dialog:
Shift Time Only: The value (i.e. signal) of the data stays the same, but
users can move it (i.e. horizontally shift) with respect to time.
Shift Signal Only: The time stays the same, but users can increase or
decrease (i.e. vertically shift) the value (i.e. signal).
Shift Both Time and Signal: Data can be moved in any direction.
Select the Column to Shift from the drop-down menu at the top of the dialog.
Remember that time-shifts will be applied to all columns in the same file.
If users want to shift the data graphically by dragging it, they may proceed to the
next step at this stage. To shift by a known amount, check the Type in Value/s
checkbox and enter the Time and/or Signal shift manually in the activated data
entry fields.
Select OK.
655
If users have typed in the shift parameters, the plot will be re-drawn with the
shift/s in place.
If users are performing a graphical shift, left-click and drag the data until it is in the
required position. Note the following points:
The cursor changes to a double- or four-headed arrow to indicate the
permitted directions of shifting.
The cumulative shift/s relative to the starting position are shown in the
status bar below the plot during the current shift session.
The ESC key cancels the current shift and exits shift mode, so nothing is
changed.
The Shift button stays depressed and no other command or button can be
used until the button is released at the end of the shift.
When the data shifting operation has been completed, select the Shift button again
to switch-off the facility.
The last shift can be undone using the Undo (U) button. The Initialize (I) button
does not act on shifted data.
To confirm the shift (and clear the ghost trace of the pre-shift data), click the
Confirm (Cnf) button. Note that you will not be able to "Undo" after confirming.
656
PanSystem
Difference Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use Difference to create a third column of data by taking the difference between two
existing columns of data.
Acts on: The two columns of data must be plotted. They may be in the same file or in
different files, but must be of the same type (e.g. both pressures). If users take the
difference between pressure PA contained in File A and PB contained in File B:
Difference = PA - PB
and the Difference data column will be created in File A.
Plot the two columns to be differenced (other data columns may be plotted as well).
Select the Difference button. The Select Columns to Difference dialog is generated,
allowing users to choose the columns they want to difference and to enter the name
of the new column.
Select the columns to be differenced. The difference column will be written in the
file selected in the left-hand Data File/Column field. The right-hand Data
File/Column field will only contain columns of the same type as the left-hand Data
File/Column field.
Enter a name for the new difference column in the New Column field.
Select OK. The difference column will be plotted on the screen. The difference
column will also appear in the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, where it
can also be edited just like any other data.
657
Exact Point Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use Exact Point for Flow Period Definition, to define the Rate Changes at the start and
end of the different flow periods.
This function marks a Rate Change at the exact cursor position, whether it
coincides with a data point or not. To pick an exact data point, use the Nearest
Point facility.
PanSystem stores the co-ordinates in the Rate Changes Table for use in Analysis.
Once entered, the rates are plotted as a step profile on the Data Edit Plot. The events
are marked by arrows in the Ruler Bar and dashed vertical lines on the Plot.
Acts on: This facility only acts on the selected "Master" file for the well. This tool can
only be used with a single data file plotted, and this must be the "Master" file.
With the appropriate "Master" data file plotted, select the Exact Point button. It will
normally be de-activated after a Rate Change event has been chosen.
If users wish to mark several Rate Changes, select and hold down the CTRL key
while selecting the Exact Point button with the left mouse button.
Alternatively, select the Exact Point button with the right mouse button; this will
lock the facility on. Select the button again to de-activate it.
Users can read the co-ordinates of the cursor in the status bar.
When users left click the mouse at a position on the plot, a Rate Change dialog is
generated showing the co-ordinates of that position (these co-ordinates will also be
displayed in the status bar). These values can be confirmed or edited as required.
Users will probably need to type in a flow rate, but if a rate column is present in
the "Master" data file, the nearest value to the selected time will appear in the
dialog.
Select OK to confirm and the rate change co-ordinates will be transferred to the
Rate Change Table. The event is also marked by an arrow on the Ruler Bar above
the plot.
Select Delete to abort the pick not Cancel.
Users can also access the Rate Changes dialog for editing using the Ruler Bar by
holding down the Ctrl key and left clicking the rate change marker arrow on the
bottom half of the toolbar. Flow periods can also be defined by text entry using the
Edit Rate Changes facility in the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog.
Users can see the rate changes if they select Plot Rate Changes from the Edit
menu.
658
PanSystem
Nearest Point Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use Nearest Point for Flow Period Definition, to define the Rate Changes at the start and
end of the different flow periods.
This function marks a Rate Change at the pressure data point nearest to the
cursor position. Otherwise, this button performs the same function as the Exact
Point for Flow Period Definition button.
PanSystem stores the co-ordinates in the Rate Changes Table for use in Analysis.
Once entered, the rates are plotted as a step profile on the Data Edit Plot. The events
are marked by arrows in the ruler bar and dashed vertical lines on the plot.
With the appropriate "Master" data file plotted, select the Nearest Point button. It
will normally be de-activated after a Rate Change event has been chosen.
If users wish to mark several Rate Changes, select and hold down the CTRL key
while selecting the Nearest Point button with the left mouse button.
Alternatively, select the Nearest Point button with the right mouse button; this will
lock the facility on. Select the button again to de-activate it.
Users can read the co-ordinates of the cursor in the status bar.
When users left click the mouse at a position on the plot, a Rate Change dialog is
generated showing the co-ordinates of that position (these co-ordinates will also be
displayed in the status bar). These values can be confirmed or edited as required.
Users will probably need to type in a flow rate, but if a rate column is present in
the "Master" data file, the nearest value to the selected time will appear in the
dialog.
Select OK to confirm and the rate change co-ordinates will be transferred to the
Rate Change Table. The event is also marked by an arrow on the Ruler Bar above
the plot.
Select Delete to abort the pick not Cancel.
menu.
659
Define Point Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use Define Point from Intersection to define the Rate Changes at the start and end of the
different flow periods. This function marks a Rate Change at the intersection of two lines
which are fitted through four points, two on either side of the rate change.
Plot the "Master" data file columns that are required.
Select four points, two on either side of where the Rate Change occurs.
If some points are already selected, de-select them first with the Esc key, then
select four new points.
Select the Define Point from Intersection button. Two lines will be fitted through
the points, and an intersection will be calculated. The Rate Change dialog will also
appear. Enter a value for the Rate and select OK.
Users may also right-click on the lines, then move them by left-clicking and
dragging the appropriate handles (i.e. black squares) if they wish to revise the
position of the Rate Change. Select the Define Point from Intersection button again
and OK to confirm the new position.
Select Delete to erase the event, not Cancel.
The lines will disappear when users left-click anywhere in the plot area.
The event is now marked by an arrow on the Ruler Bar above the plot, and the rate
change co-ordinates will be transferred to the Rate Changes Table. If four points
straddling an existing Rate Change were chosen, a new rate change is not
introduced; instead the existing one is shifted to the new intersection.
menu.
660
PanSystem
Auto Flow Period Generation Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
This facility is used to invoke an automatic pick of the Rate Change Times from the
pressure change events. Where a "Master" Rate Channel is available, the measured rate
values will be picked up at the event times too. Any existing Rate Changes will be
deleted unless a zoom box has been drawn first, in which case the automatic pick facility
will only operate within the box, leaving any existing Rate Changes lying outside the box
untouched.
Acts on: The Rate Changes can be picked from:
The entire test (any existing Rate Change markers will be cleared).
A portion in the zoom box (any existing rate changes outside the zoom box will be
retained, any inside the zoom box will be deleted).
Within an existing Flow Period or Test Period, if highlighted in the Ruler Bar. This
takes priority over a zoom box, if both are present.
When the button is selected, an Automatic Flow Period Generation dialog is
generated in which the user can select two criteria:
Pressure Gradient Threshold: This represents the minimum ratio of
slopes required to qualify as a potential Rate Change event. Referring to
the diagram below, at data point (j), the forward difference slope to point
(j+1) is compared with the backward difference slope to point (j-1).
If the absolute of the ratio (or of the inverse ratio), exceeds the specified
value, then point (j) qualifies as a potential r;event, subject to the noise
check described below. A default value of 5 is a good starting point, but the
best value will depend on the data. The slope ratio has the advantage of
being, to some extent, normalized for any test, and is also independent of
units.
Noise Threshold: If point (j) has been identified as a potential event from
the slope ratio criterion described above, it is necessary to check the
difference between pressures (Pj) and (Pj+2), to see if a r;significant
pressure change ensues. This distinguishes between a minor wobble or
noise (i.e. small pressure change) and a real Rate Change (i.e. large
661
pressure change). If |(Pj - Pj+2)| exceeds the noise threshold, point (j) is
marked as a Rate Change.
The Noise Threshold criterion works best when there is a large change in
pressure between the Rate Change point and the next Data Point, as is
often the case. It works less well when there is a high sampling rate and
the pressure changes slowly.
In addition to handling genuine gauge and background noise, the Noise
Threshold can be used to discriminate against minor wobbles in the pressure
record caused by wellbore effects, surface activities, etc. The user should
inspect the test data to get a feel for what is, or is not considered to be a
significant pressure change.
Once a Rate Change has been identified, the automatic pick facility is disabled until
the slope ratio falls below the specified value again. This is necessary to prevent
spurious picks from occurring, though it may occasionally cause genuine changes to
be skipped.
It is unlikely with real data, that the auto pick algorithm will correctly identify every
genuine rate change and ignore every occurrence of noise. The sort of Rate
Change where a relatively shallow slope (i.e. late drawdown or build-up) suddenly
steepens is easily picked out by the slope ratio test as illustrated below:
In this example below, the red colored point passes the slope test; providing the
pressure change two points ahead of it exceeds the specified threshold, it will be
picked as a Rate Change. Some of the earlier noisy points pass the slope test, but
fail the noise test:
Increasing the noise threshold will eventually prevent the red colored point from
being selected, and closely sampled data (i.e. where P is small), with a lot of
noise, will not produce good results.
662
PanSystem
If a drawdown is shut-in early while it is still steep, this will result in a Rate Change
with a large negative slope (i.e. drawdown), suddenly becoming a large positive
slope (i.e. build-up).
This produces an absolute slope ratio close to 1, which will probably fail the slope
test, so an obvious event is missed. Any Rate Changes that are missed can either
be picked manually, or the relevant portion of the test data can be boxed-off and
the slope ratio reduced until the Rate Change is recognized.
663
Create Rate Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use Create Rate to create a Rate column from the defined Rate Changes. This is not
mandatory. PanSystem requires a Rate column for use in Analysis and Advanced
Simulation, but if users have not imported a Rate column, and do not create one,
PanSystem will use a temporary one derived automatically from the Rate Changes Table
when users enter Analysis.
Acts on: The Rate Changes associated with the "Master" file for the well. This tool can
only be used when the "Master" data file is plotted and Rate Changes have been
identified (i.e. using either the Exact Point, Nearest Point or Define Point facilities).
A new Rate column is created in the "Master" data file, with Flow Rates computed using
one of three methods described below. In all three cases, a Flow Rate value is computed
at each clock time (i.e. every Pressure reading will now have a Flow Rate associated
with it).
With the appropriate "Master" data file plotted, select the Create Rate button to
generate the Create Rate Column dialog, which allows users to select the method
by which Flow Rates will be computed. The dialog is described as follows:
Interpolation Type area: This area contains three selection options:
Step-Rate: Creates a step profile between the Rate Change marks,
using the specified Time and Flow Rate at each change.
Piece-Wise Linear: Creates a ramp or chord between the Rate
Change marks, using the specified Time and Flow Rate at each
change (i.e. a quick method of "filling-in" a slowly changing Flow
Rate).
dP/dT (Wellbore Storage): Calculates from dP/dT and the Wellbore
Storage Coefficient (Cs). This will replicate the theoretical Downhole
or Sandface Flow Rate at standard conditions.
For Oil, the Sandface Rate is represented by:
where:
Qo(t) = Surface Oil Rate from the Rate Changes Table at Time (t).
Cs = Wellbore Storage Coefficient
The same equation is used for Water, with the appropriate fluid-specific
parameters (i.e. qw, Bw, etc.).
Note that for Multi-Phase Flow (with the Perrine or Multi-Phase

Pseudo-Pressure options enabled), Cs should represent the Total
Wellbore Storage Coefficient for the Oil and Water phases
664
PanSystem
combined. However, the computed Flow Rate is the Oil Flow Rate,
since PanSystem always works with the Principal Phase Flow Rates
(i.e. Oil in the case of Oil/Water flow).
In Multi-Phase (Oil + Water) Flow, the Oil Flow Rate is computed from
dp/dt using a Storage Coefficient (Cso) for the Oil Fraction in the
equation above; this is given by (Reference 106):
where:
fw = Surface Water-Cut
Cs = Input Total Wellbore Storage Coefficient.
For Gas or Condensate, Pseudo-Pressure m(p) is used instead of
Pressure (p), and the Sandface Flow Rate is represented by:
where:
Qg(t) measured in MMscf/day, is the surface Gas Rate from the Rate
Changes Table at time (t).
Cs (bbls/psi) is the "initial" Wellbore Storage Coefficient defined as Cs =
Vcgi, with V being the Wellbore Volume (bbls) and cgi being the Gas
Compressibility (psi -1 ) at Reservoir Pressure and Temperature T ' (R).
(t) is Real Time or (optionally) Pseudo-Time.
Users must set up their Fluid Parameters and Pseudo-Pressure Data

in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog before using
this facility for a Gas or Condensate Well Test.
Target Column Name: Enter the new Rate Column Name in this field.
For the Step-Rate and Piece-Wise Linear options, the computed rate will appear
immediately on the plot.
For the dP/dT (Wellbore Storage) option with Oil or Water fluid type, a dP/dT
Parameters sub-dialog is generated:
Enter the Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) and appropriate Volume Factor
(i.e. Bo or Bw), then select OK. The computed Flow Rate will appear
For the dP/dT (Wellbore Storage) option with a Gas or Condensate fluid type, a Gas
Flow Rate sub-dialog is generated:
Enter the Initial Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) or the Wellbore Volume
(V). These fields are linked by the relationship Cs = Vcgi, as described
above. After selecting OK, the computed Flow Rate will appear
There is an additional option to use Pseudo-Time (i.e. instead of Real Time)
in dm(p)/dt for Drawdowns and/or Build-Ups, to cater for the various
schools of thought on the use of Pseudo-Time.
665
Agarwal's original reference (Reference 41), recommended Pseudo-Time for

Build-Ups only. PanSystem will respect the user's choice here as it runs
through the test sequence. Any Test Period with a non-zero Flow Rate will
be considered as a Drawdown, and any with zero Flow Rate as a Build-Up.
666
PanSystem
Ungroup Flow Periods
Functionality:
Use Ungroup Flow Periods to reverse the grouping of contiguous Flow Periods made by
the Group Flow Periods button.
Acts on: The selected Test Period.
Operational Procedure:
Select the Test Period to be ungrouped by left-clicking it on the upper part of the
Ruler Bar, then select the Ungroup Flow Periods button.
The Rate Change marker arrows in the lower half of the Ruler Bar define the Flow
Periods, the lines in the upper half of the Ruler Bar define the Test Periods.
667
Tidal Filter Mode Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use Tidal Filter Mode to enter this specific mode on the Data Edit Plot. If there is more
than one pressure record plotted on the screen, a dialog will prompt users to select
which column the Tidal Filter is to act on. If users receive this Column to Filter dialog,
they need to select the column to be filtered.
Before using this facility, users must first have entered a Tide Table using one of
the Tide Data options from the Dataprep menu.
If users select the Tidal filter Mode button, the pressure and tidal data will be
displayed on the Data Edit Plot; all other buttons are de-activated in this mode,
except for the Tidal Lag button. In the following example, the tide signal is
derived from maritime tide tables:
Normally, users will need a finer plotting scale in order to be able to synchronize
the two data sets. De-select the Tidal Filter Mode button. On the Data Edit Plot,
click and drag a box with two opposite corners positioned on the data. One of the
diagonals of the box should follow the trend of the pressure data as illustrated
below:
668
PanSystem
Do not click the Zoom In button after this procedure, select the Tidal Filter Mode
button again.
A zoomed display will appear, but the diagonal trend across the zoom box will have
been backed out. If the box was drawn carefully, the test data will be rotated more
or less to the horizontal, making it easier to compare with the tidal waveform:
The next step is to estimate the time lag between the two curves. This is achieved
with the Tidal Lag button.
669
Tidal Lag
Functionality:
The Tidal Lag facility is used to estimate the Time Lag between the two curves (i.e. the
peaks on the Gauge Data will be a fraction of an hour later than the Tide Table peaks).
Note that before using this facility, users must first have entered a Tide Table
using one of the Tide Data options from the Dataprep menu, then synchronized the
pressure and tidal data curves on the Data Edit Plot, using the Tidal Filter Mode
facility.
On the zoomed plot created with the Tidal Filter Mode facility, select a correlatable
point on a Tide Table peak or trough, and the corresponding peak or trough on the
test data, as illustrated below:
Select the Tidal Lag button and the time-lag will be reported in a Tidal Filter dialog.
On selecting OK from this dialog, the tidal waveform is re-drawn shifted by this
amount. It should now be synchronised with the features in the test data.
This exercise can be repeated until a satisfactory match is obtained. The
cumulative time-lag will be reported each time.
The next step is to shift and re-scale the data using the Tidal Filter button.
670
PanSystem
Tidal Filter Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
This facility is used to apply Tidal Gain and/or filtering to the plotted Tidal Data.
When the Tidal Filter button is activated, an Apply Tidal Filter dialog is generated. This
dialog reports the:
Time-Lag: Enter the value for Tidal Time-Lag in this field. This is an estimate of
the Time-Lag between the two curves (i.e. the peaks on the gauge data will be a
fraction of an hour later than the tide table peaks). Existing values are derived
from the time-lag calculation performed with the Tidal Lag facility.
Gain: Enter the value for Tidal Gain in this field. This is a first approximation for
the scaling factor needed to match the raw tide heights or pressures against the
tidal oscillations they have caused in the test data.
These fields can both be edited. The Gain should be adjusted by trial and error for best
results.
The dialog also has four function buttons that allow users to:
Re-Plot Without Filtering: This button is optional; it re-draws the plot with the tidal
waveform shifted by the Time-Lag amount, and re-scaled by the Gain, but without
filtering the data. This enables users to compare the two curves and decide if any
further Time-Lag or Gain adjustments are required.
The Time-Lag and Gain are both cumulative values. If users try the filter with a
Gain of 0.5, then once more with 0.4, the overall effect is that of the 0.4 setting,
not 0.5 x 0.4 = 0.2.
Apply Filter to Data: Use this button to perform the filtering operation, and check
the results on the zoomed plot.
Recover Original Data: This button will remove all filtering effects.
Cancel: This button will close the dialog without applying the Tidal Filter.
When the zoomed region looks satisfactory, select the Tidal Filter Mode button. The
filtered pressure will be saved as a new data column with the default name FILTERED
PRESSURE. A Save Tidal Filtered Data dialog allows users to change this name if
required.
If the Tidal Signal is still noisy, exit the Tidal Filter Mode, plot the Tidal Data on the
Data Edit Plot and select the Data Reduction and Smoothing button to improve the
signal quality.
671
Save Tidal Filtered Data Sub-Dialog
General:
This sub-dialog is generated when users select the Tidal Filter Mode button after
performing a Tidal Filtering operation with the Tidal Filter button. It allows users to save
the filtered tidal data under a new column name, thus preserving the original data.
Selecting OK will plot the raw and filtered data for the entire test.
Selecting Cancel will nullify the filtering and just re-plot the original data.
672
PanSystem
PanSystem Analysis Toolbar
General:
The following tools are available on the Analysis Toolbar.
Toolbar Help can be invoked at any time by positioning the mouse cursor over the
Toolbar then pressing Shift and F1 keys to invoke the query pointer:
left-click this query pointer on the Toolbar to generate this context-sensitive

Help.
Analysis Toolbar Icons and Functionality:
Zoom in: Enlarge a selected area of the current Graph/Plot.
Zoom out: Reset the selected area of the current Graph/Plot to default size.
Delete: Delete the current line.
Time Function: Change the Time Superposition Function.
Test Overview: Select the Test Overview Plot.
Cartesian: Select the Cartesian Plot.
Semi-Log: Select the Semi-Log Plot.
Linear: Select the Linear Plot.
Bilinear: Select the Bilinear Plot.
Spherical: Select the Spherical Plot.
Log-Log: Select the Log-Log Plot.
Type Curve: Select the Type-Curve Plot.
SvQ: Select the Skin v Flow Rate Plot.
Tile: Tile the selected plots.
Point Selection: Point selection for Auto Match.
LIT: Select the LIT Plot.
C&n: Select the C&n Plot.
Flow Regime: Define Flow Regimes.
Confirm Results: Confirm Results.
Change T0: Change T0.
673
Line Results: Display Line Results for selected line.
Zero Slope Line: Fit Zero Slope line.
Unit Slope Line: Fit Unit Slope line.
Half Slope Line: Fit Half Slope line.
Quarter Slope Line: Fit Quarter Slope line.
Negative Half Slope Line: Fit Negative Half Slope line.
Floating Line: Fit Floating Line.
Average Line: Calculate Average of selected lines.
Change Line Type: Change Line Type.
Fit Line: Fit line through Marked Points.
Known Slope Line: Fit Known Slope line.
Parallel Line: Fit Parallel line/s.
Derivative Selection: Show or hide Derivatives and Derivative Smoothing for Log-Log
Plot.
Time Mark: Add Time Marks.
Smoothing: Change Derivative Smoothing Constant.
Type-Curve Match: Perform Type-Curve Matching.
Type-Curve Next: Go to next stage of Type-Curve Matching.
Type-Curve Previous: Return to previous stage of Type-Curve Matching.
Type-Curve Pd: Show or hide the Pd/Derivative Type-Curve.
Type-Curve Force: Force the Type-Curve Parameter.
Pressure Extrapolation: Change the Extrapolated Pressure.
674
PanSystem
Analysis
Zoom In
Functionality:
675
Zoom Normal
Functionality:
676
PanSystem
Delete
Functionality:
Use Delete to remove selected point/s, a line fitted to a plot or a selected area on the
plot.
Deleting Points:
Selections can be made on an individual or grouped basis:
Select point/s with the mouse. Selected point/s become squares.
Click and drag to draw a box with the mouse pointer, holding down the left
mouse button. The area and/or points within the box will be selected.
Users cannot delete data points in Analysis. To delete a data point users
must go to Dataprep Gauge Data and delete the point on the Data Edit Plot.
The Delete function erases all measured data associated with a deleted point (e.g. if
users delete a Pressure point, the Flow Rate, Temperature and any other Gauge
reading at the same Clock Time will also be deleted).
Deleting Lines: Select the line by holding down the Ctrl key or the right mouse
button and clicking on the line, then select the Delete button or the Del key on your
keyboard.
Acts on: The selected line, a dragged box and any selected points. Multiple files are
allowed.
677
Time Function Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
The Time Function button is enabled on the diagnostic and Type-Curve Plots for:
Constant Rate Tests that have a Flow Rate History (i.e. everything except the first
(Constant Rate) Drawdown in a Test sequence).
Varying Rate Tests set-up with a Column of Varying Flow Rate data (i.e. a Varying
Flow Rate Column is currently selected as the "Master" Flow Rate Column in the
Master Data File/Columns section of the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog).
This Toolbar option is disabled on the Test Overview Plot.

Use this option to invoke the various Time Functions that can be applied to a diagnostic
plot. These functions account for the effects of the Flow Rate History of the well test and
any Rate Variations during the well test.
On selection of the Tf button, the Select Time Function dialog is generated. It has a
variable number of selection and/or checkbox options available, depending on the type of
Test Period and Rate Column that are currently selected, as described below:
History options:
No History: This option ignores any History and simply generates plots using
Elapsed Time.
Use Constant Rate History: This option uses an approximation in the case of
Multiple-Rate History. In the case of a Build-Up or Fall-Off Test, the last Flow Rate
before Shut-In is used with an "effective" Producing Time:
Tp(eff) = Total Volume Produced Last Rate Before Shut-In.
Use Full History: This option uses a theoretically rigorous, generalized
Superposition Function for any Multiple-Rate History.
Time Function options:
These Time Function options are mutually exclusive.

Use Horner: For Build-Up Tests, the previous options that use History can be
formulated as "Horner" (i.e. checked) or "Not-Horner" (i.e. unchecked). Although
the true Horner Time Function applies to Build-Ups or Fall-Offs following a single
Constant Flow Rate or Injection period, the term is used here more generally to
denote a particular formulation of the Superposition Function for Multi-Rate Tests
(refer also to Semi-Log Plot (Gas) or Semi-Log Plot (Oil) for more details). The
"Not-Horner" mode corresponds to the Agarwal formulation of an Equivalent
Drawdown Time.
In the simple case of a Build-Up Test preceded by a single Constant Flow Rate
period, the "No History" option produces a conventional MDH Plot (Reference 2 and
3), the "Use History" option produces a plot of Pressure versus Agarwal Equivalent
Time (Reference 4), and the "Use History + Horner" option produces a Horner Plot
678
PanSystem
(Reference 2 and 3). The corresponding, more complex, Superposition Functions

are computed for Build-Up Tests with Multiple-Rate Histories (refer also to Semi-
Log Plot (Gas) or Semi-Log Plot (Oil) for more details).
dP/dQ With Elapsed Time (RPI Method - (Reference 95)): This option is only
present in PanSystem for a Drawdown Test that either has a Variable Rate History
or a Varying Rate during the Test.
If the first Drawdown (no History) is selected as a Test Period and a Varying Rate
Column is selected as the "Master" Flow Rate Column in the Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog, a simplified dialog will appear with only this option and the Use
Varying Rate During Test (default) option available. Selecting this option then OK
will produce a dP/dQ versus Elapsed Time Plot.
This RPI option remains activated for all plots once enabled (i.e. checked); it
must be unchecked to disable.
The term "Reciprocal Productivity Index" (RPI) was first coined by J. W. Crafton
(Reference 95). It is the Rate Normalized Pressure dP/dQ (which has the units of a
reciprocal PI), but Crafton recommended plotting versus Elapsed Time in the case
of noisy production data, where the use of the standard superposition theory might
produce an erratic Time Function.
If a Drawdown Test Period with Rate History and (optionally) a Varying Flow Rate
during the Test is selected (e.g. second, third, fourth, etc. Flowing Periods), the
three History button options (described above) are made available in conjunction
with this checkbox option and the Reference Back to Initial Pressure checkbox
option.
With this option, any diagnostic plot that normally uses an Equivalent Time Function
(i.e. Log-Log, Semi-Log, Square-Root, Fourth-Root, Spherical and Type-Curve), will
use Elapsed Time (i.e. as if it were being plotted with the No History option
selected). For example, the Square-Root Plot will be P/Q versus Square-Root
(t) instead of P/Q versus Square-Root Equivalent Time Function.
Use Varying Rate During Test: This option is only available when the Flow Rate
varies during the Test Period itself, and the Gauge Data includes a Column of
Varying Flow Rate data which has been selected as the "Master" Flow Rate Column
in the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog. A dP/dQ versus Equivalent Time Plot
will be produced.
This option is enabled (i.e. checked) by default if the "Master" Flow Rate Column is
varying. If disabled (i.e. unchecked), it will remain off for all plots generated for
the currently selected Test Period. However, if a different Test Period is selected,
this option is re-enabled.
For the first Drawdown Test Period, where there is no History, a simplified dialog
will appear with only this option (i.e. default) and the RPI Method option available.
For subsequent Drawdowns, it is implicit in the Use Constant Rate History and Use
Full History options described above.
When enabled (i.e. checked), the option modifies the Superposition Function to
include the effect of any Flow Rate Variations during the Test. Switching this
option off (i.e. unchecked), will cause the Superposition Function to ignore Flow
Rate variations during the Test and assume a constant Surface Rate read from the
Rate Changes Table (or if the Test Period consists of several Rate Changes, it will
use the last Flow Rate value entered in the table for that Test Period).
679
For example, in the case of a Build-Up or Drawdown Test with a constant Surface
Rate, (but with Downhole Flowmeter data available and selected as the "Master"
Flow Rate Column), leaving this option enabled (i.e. checked), would tend to
correct out the Wellbore Storage (i.e. Afterflow) effects by using the Flowmeter
data. Switching this option off (i.e. unchecked), would leave the Wellbore Storage
effects in place because the nominal constant Surface Rate would be used.
Reference Back to Initial Pressure: This option is only available for Flowing Periods
(i.e. Drawdowns) other than the very first one.
This checkbox option is only enabled when either the Use Constant Rate History or
Use Full History option has been selected, and is off by default.
Normally, the default Use Full History generalized Superposition Function and the Y-
axis plot values are computed relative to the T0, P0, Q0 values in the Rate Changes
Table at the start of the Test Period being analyzed. This checkbox option will
reference the Superposition Function and Y-axis values back to the very start of
the Rate History; the T0, P0, Q0 at the first entry in the Rate Changes Table
(where P0 = pi , Q0 = 0). This requires that (pi) be known accurately, as this
affects the Y-axis plot values.
The disadvantage of this approach is that (pi) is often not known accurately (e.g.
the start of a Drill Stem Test - DST is often messy). The attraction of not using
this option is that the Superposition plots use the Pressure/s at the start of the
selected Test Period/s, not (pi). These are more likely to be known accurately.
The results from the two approaches should be close (i.e. provided the (pi) value is
good), since both are derived from theory; the plots just look different.
This option is particularly useful for Multi-Rate Gas Well Test Analysis, where the
use of the default generalized Superposition Function in previous versions of
PanSystem caused some confusion regarding Non-Darcy Skin Analysis and the SvQ
Plot.
680
PanSystem
Test Overview Plot
Functionality:
This is used to plot the entire record of Pressure and Flow Rate against Time so users can
select the test or tests they wish to analyze. The Test Overview Plot can also be
generated by selecting the Plot option from the Analysis menu. By default, the Test
Overview Plot displays the "Master" Pressure and Rate Channel plus the Rate Changes,
presented as a step profile, based on the Rate Changes Table (the same as in the Data
Edit Plot).
By extending the x-axis scale to the left, any Rate Changes that occurred before the
Pressure data were recorded can also be displayed.
The Rate Changes display can be switched on/off via the Plot Rate Changes option on the
Edit menu. The status of the Rate Changes (on or off) is saved to file.
Choose the Test Period/s to be analyzed before proceeding to the diagnostic plots and
Type-Curves. The selection procedure is described below.
Test Period Selection: Before selecting a diagnostic plot button, users must
select the Test Period they wish to analyze by left-clicking (once) in the Ruler Bar
above the Test Overview Plot. Left-click it again to de-select.
Consecutive Flow Periods can be grouped into a single Test Period by holding down
the Shift key, then holding down the left mouse button and dragging the cursor
over each successive Flow Period (e.g. for a Flow-After-Flow (FAF) Test). The
grouped Flow Periods will then be treated as a single test in Analysis. The
individual markers will be replaced by start and end markers. To revert back to the
individual Flow Periods, simply hold down the Shift key and apply a mouse-click to
the Ruler Bar.
It is possible to group ALL Flow Periods without having to drag the cursor through
them, by holding down the Ctrl key and right-clicking in any Flow Period in the ruler
bar. All of the periods will be grouped automatically. Note that if the last period is
a buildup it will not be included in the group. To revert back to the individual Flow
Periods, hold down the Shift key and apply a left mouse-click to the Ruler Bar.
681
Discrete (i.e. non-consecutive) Test Periods can be selected by holding down the
Ctrl key, then left-clicking on the required Test Periods. Multiple Flowing and/or
Shut-In Periods can then be analyzed together.
During or after analysis of a selected test or tests, if users need to work on other
tests, they should return to the Test Overview Plot to make a new selection.
If users try to invoke a diagnostic plot with an invalid test, the error message: "The
Test Period selected is not valid for Analysis", will appear on the Test Overview
Plot. The error message also lists five possible things that may be causing
problems. The selected Test Period will not be considered valid if:
1. It contains only one Pressure Point or no Pressure Points.
2. It is a Build-Up or a Fall-Off Test (i.e. it has a zero Flow Rate), but it has no
Rate History. At least one Flow Period should be defined prior to the selected
Period (see point 3). Check the Rate Changes Table.
3. It is a Build-Up or a Fall-Off Test (i.e. it has a zero Flow Rate), and there is a
Flow Period (or there are Flow Periods) defined before the Shut-In, but the
Flow Period immediately before it has a zero Flow Rate. A Build-Up or Fall-Off
Test must have a Flowing Period with a non-zero Flow Rate immediately prior
to Shut-In (and the Flow Rate should be negative (Injection) for a Fall-Off
Test). Again, check the Rate Changes Table.
4a. It is a Build-Up and the Start Pressure (P0 in the Rate Changes Table) is
greater than the last measured Gauge Pressure in that particular Test Period
(e.g. a spuriously low Pressure measurement); PanSystem compares the
Pressure entered in the Rate Changes Table at the start of the Shut-In Period
(P0), with the last Gauge Pressure in the Test Period.
If the end of the Period has been wrongly identified, or if there is noisy data, it
is possible for the last Pressure to be less than P0. This is considered to be
invalid for a Build-Up Test.
4b. It is a Fall-Off Test and the Start Pressure (P0 in the Rate Changes Table) is
less than the last measured Gauge Pressure in that particular Test Period (e.g.
a spuriously high Pressure measurement).
The comments from point 4a also apply here, except that a final Gauge
Pressure greater than P0 would be considered as invalid for a Fall-Off Test.
5. It consists of grouped Flow Periods with non-zero Flow Rates, but the last
Flow Rate is zero.
If a Test Period is made up of a group of Flow Periods, some of which are non-
zero, then the final Flow Period must not have a zero Flow Rate. The Flow
Periods should be ungrouped, then regrouped without the offending final Flow
Period.
Marking Events: Users may also wish to take the opportunity to affix numbered
event markers to certain data points whilst operating in this plot.
Note that data or test periods cannot be edited on this plot; users must return to
Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation in Dataprep.
No analysis can be performed on this plot, but the Simulate menu options Quick
Match and Auto Match can be used to history match the whole test.
The Test Overview Plot is the only plot that allows for regression on the Initial
Pressure (pi).
682
PanSystem
For additional details about the plot, refer to the Help topic for Analysis Plot
Overview.
683
Cartesian Plot
Functionality:
This option produces a plot of Pressure versus Elapsed Time for the Test Period/s selected
from the Test Overview Plot.
Results Derived from Line Fitting:
Model Line Position Calculated Results
All models Early storage-dominated Wellbore storage
data (unit slope on Log-Log coefficient (Cs).
Plot) Dimensionless storage
coefficient (Cd).
Wellbore volume (V),
for gas wells.
Boundary Model = Late data in semi-steady- Drainage area (A).
Closed System state flow regime (i.e. Reserves volume
flowing period only). (Voil) or (Vgas).
Dietz shape factor
(CA), flowing period
only.
Boundary Model = Late data in semi-steady- Drainage area (A),
Two- state flow regime for first inner compartment.
Compartment compartment (i.e. flowing Dietz shape factor
period, or build-up with (CA).
Slider Extrapolation).
Connected pore
volume* (V1 = hA),
inner compartment.
Boundary Model = Late data in semi-steady- Connected pore
Two- state flow regime for volume* (V2), outer
Compartment second compartment (i.e. compartment.
flowing period, or build-up Total connected pore
with Slider Extrapolation). volume* (V1+V2).
Effective
transmissibility (Teff),
from intersection.
Boundary Model = Late data in semi-steady- Connected pore
Two- state flow regime for first volume* (V2), outer
Compartment compartment (i.e. build-up compartment.
test only, without Slider Total connected pore
Extrapolation). volume* (V1+V2).
684
PanSystem
Active Probe End of steady state flow Horizontal radial

model (Wireline permeability
Formation Tester)
*Note that the volumes V1 and V2 are total connected pore volumes at reservoir
conditions, not hydrocarbon volumes.
685
Semi-Log Plot
Functionality:
This option displays the selected Test Period/s as a plot of Pressure versus Log10 of Time.
A Rate-Normalised Pressure and a Logarithmic Superposition Function may also be used,
depending on the nature of the test and the time function previously selected with the
Time Function button.
Results Derived From Line Fitting to the Radial Flow Portion/s:
For Vertical Wells:
Radial Radial flow portion Radial permeability (k),
homogeneous vertical well.
True Darcy Skin Factor (S).
Initial pressure (Pi),
(extrapolated P* or calculated
Pcalc).
Boundary model = Radial flow portion Average reservoir pressure
closed system (MBH), assumes semi-
steady-state drawdown.
Boundary model = Single or Radial permeability (k).

single fault or two intersecting fault True Darcy Skin Factor (S).
intersecting at 90 radial flow
Distance to boundary (from
intersection).
(extrapolated or calculated).
Vertical fracture Late pseudo-radial Radial permeability (k).
flow Pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr).
Dual-porosity Early fracture No calculation
system radial flow
Dual-porosity Total system radial Radial permeability (k), for

flow fracture system.
Dual-porosity Transition period Storativity ratio (), (from
686
PanSystem
separation from early fracture

system line).
Interporosity flow coefficient
(), (from intersection with
total system line).
Dual permeability Early radial flow Radial permeability (k), (Layer
(first layer) 1)
Dual permeability Total system radial Interporosity flow coefficient
flow (both layers) (), (from intersection with
early radial flow line).
Permeability-thickness ratio
(), (from ratio of slopes).
Radial composite Inner region radial Radial permeability (k), (inner
flow region)
Radial composite Outer region radial Radial permeability (k), (outer
flow region).
Pseudo-radial skin factor (Spr),
(outer region).
Outer/inner mobility ratio (M),
(from ratio of slopes).
Radial distance to discontinuity
(Lrad), (from intersection of
the two lines).
Partial penetration Radial flow at Radial permeability (k), (from
(including gas perforations h(perf))
cap/aquifer) True Darcy Skin Factor (S).
Partial penetration Full thickness radial Radial permeability (k), (from

(including gas flow h)
cap/aquifer) Pseudo-radial skin (Spr),
(includes convergence)
For Horizontal Wells:

Radial homogeneous Early vertical radial Average vertical radial
687
or dual-porosity flow permeability k(bar).

True Darcy Skin Factor
(S).
Radial homogeneous Hemi-radial flow Average vertical radial

or dual-porosity permeability k(bar).
True Darcy Skin Factor
(S).
Radial homogeneous Late horizontal radial Radial permeability (k).
or dual-porosity flow Pseudo-radial skin factor
(Spr), (includes
convergence, etc.).
Vertical permeability (kz),
from k(bar).
Boundary model = Single or intersecting Radial permeability (k).
single fault or two fault radial flow Pseudo-radial skin factor
intersecting at 90 (Spr).
Distance to boundary
(from intersection with
late radial flow line).
Initial pressure (P*)
extrapolated or (Pi)
calculated.
With History and Use Horner options enabled (i.e. refer to Time Function Facility),
the line will be extrapolated to (P*), at Infinite Time (i.e. Superposition Function =
1.0). With the Use Horner option disabled, the Initial Layer Pressure (Pi), will be
calculated by backwards superposition and is displayed as (Pcalc).
P* and Pcalc both represent the Initial Layer Pressure (Pi), at the start of the Rate
History, assuming an infinite Reservoir. If the Well Test has detected Boundaries
or other heterogeneities (i.e. the Reservoir is not Infinitely Radial), care should be
taken in attaching any physical meaning to this Pressure if the line has been fitted
to the early Radial Flow portion of the data.
Where Boundaries are evident, the better estimate of Initial Pressure can be
obtained by fitting a line to the last well-developed Flow Regime, using the
diagnostic plot appropriate for that particular Flow Regime (e.g. for a single fault
(i.e. Hemi-Radial Flow), the Radial Flow Plot (Horner or Agarwal) should be used;
for a channel (i.e. Linear Flow), the Linear Flow Plot should be used, etc.).
For the special treatment of Turbulent Flow (i.e. Non-Darcy Skin) effects in Gas and
Condensate Wells, refer to SvQ (Skin versus Flowrate) Plot and Tutorial 3: Gas Well
DST and Deliverability.
688
PanSystem
Linear Flow Plot
Functionality:
This option displays the selected Test Period/s as a plot of Pressure versus the Square-
Root of Time. Rate-Normalized Pressure and a Square-Root Superposition Function may
also be used, depending on the nature of the test and the time function previously
selected with the Time Function button.
Results Derived From Line Fitting to the Linear Flow Portion:
For Vertical Wells:
Vertical fracture Fracture linear Fracture half-length (Xf).
flow Pseudo-radial skin factor
(Spr).
Initial pressure (P*),
extrapolated.
Fracture face skin (Sf # refer
to Note 1 below), (infinite
conductivity and uniform flux
fractures).
or
Dimensionless fracture
conductivity (Fcd # refer to
Note 1 below), (finite
conductivity fracture).
Boundary model = Reservoir linear Channel width (W).
parallel faults flow Distance to nearest
boundary (L1).
Convergence skin (Sconv).
Boundary model = Hemi-linear flow Channel width (W).
U-shaped faults

All models Linear flow Effective well length (Lw)
through layer and convergence skin
(Sconv), (normal option)
or
Horizontal permeability (k)
689
and true skin factor (S #

refer to Note 2 below).
Initial pressure (Pi)
(extrapolated P* or
calculated Pcalc).
Boundary model = Reservoir linear Channel width (W).
parallel faults flow Distance to nearest
boundary (L1).
Convergence skin (Sconv).
Boundary model = Hemi-linear flow Channel width (W).
U-shaped faults
#1: When a Linear Flow Plot is used in Analysis, the line fitting and calculation
option can either be used to calculate the Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity
(Fcd) and Fracture Conductivity (Kfw), by setting VertFrac-FinCond = 1 (default),
or remove the calculations and only display Extrapolated Pressure (P*), by setting
VertFrac-FinCond = 0. Users should change the default setting in the Pansys31.ini
folder by opening the Windows Registry Editor (i.e. via Start/Run/Regedit
commands in Windows), then selecting
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Configuration. (for more details
on editing the Pansys31.ini folder, refer to the Windows Registry).
#2: For the True Skin Factor (S) calculation option, if (Lw) and (Kz) are known,
users should change the default setting in the Pansys31.ini folder by opening the
Windows Registry Editor (i.e. via Start/Run/Regedit commands in Windows), then
selecting HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys31.ini/Configuration and
setting HLLC_K_L = 1, (for more details on editing the Pansys31.ini folder, refer to
the Windows Registry).
2. When the Registry is edited, all changes are saved instantly - there is no option to
r;re-load the Registry if something has been done incorrectly.
pop-up dialogs to inform users of mistakes, errors, etc. The Registry Editor will allow
users to wipe everything clean without supplying a warning.
quite reliable, but users should never rely on this alone. Always remember to make a
690
PanSystem
The dedicated website guide for the Windows Registry accessed from the following
URLs, http:// registry.winguides.com/ or http://www.regedit.com/.
691
Bilinear Flow Plot
Functionality:
This option displays the selected Test Period/s as a plot of Pressure versus Fourth-Root of
Time. Rate-Normalised Pressure and a Fourth-Root Superposition Function may also be
used, depending on the nature of the test and the time function previously selected with
the Time Function button.
Results Derived From Line Fitting to the Bilinear Flow Portion:
For Vertical Wells:
Finite Fracture Bilinear Fracture conductivity (kfw)
conductivity, flow and dimensionless fracture
vertical fracture conductivity (Fcd).
Pseudo-radial skin factor
(Spr).
Initial pressure (P*),
(extrapolated)
Finite Time to end of Fracture half-length (Xf).
conductivity, Bilinear flow on line Fracture conductivity (kfw)
vertical fracture and dimensionless fracture
conductivity (Fcd).
(Spr).
If not already established (e.g. from the Linear (square-root) Plot), the fracture half-
length (Xf), can be estimated by marking a data point at the end of the straight line
through the Bilinear flow portion (refer to the Help topic for Time Mark for more details).
692
PanSystem
Spherical Flow Plot
Functionality:
This option displays the selected Test Period/s as a plot of Pressure versus 1/Square-Root
of Time. Rate-Normalized Pressure and a 1/Square-Root Superposition Function may also
be used, depending on the nature of the test and the time function previously selected
with the Time Function button.
Results Derived From Line Fitting to the Spherical Flow Portion:
For Vertical Wells:
Partial penetration Spherical Flow Vertical permeability
(including gas (kz).
cap/aquifer)
693
Log-Log Plot
Functionality:
This option displays the selected Test Period/s as a plot of Log10 Delta-Pressure (and the
derivative) versus Log10 of Elapsed Time. Rate-Normalized Delta-Pressure and a
Logarithmic Superposition Function may also be used, depending on the nature of the
test and the time function previously selected with the Time Function button.
The Use Horner option available under the Time Function facility has no effect on
this plot.
Line Fitting: On the Log-Log Plot it is possible to fit lines of specified slopes,
corresponding to the theoretical behaviour of the derivative in different flow regimes.
Users can select an existing line at any time (i.e. press the Ctrl key and left click on the
line, or right click on the line to activate the "grab-handles") and:
Delete it (refer to Delete).
Move it (by clicking and dragging the grab-handles).
Change the Line Type (refer to Change Line Type).
The main objective is to identify flow regimes from the derivative. However, in certain
cases, results are calculated from the position of the line (for an explanation of these line-
fitting tools, refer to the Help topic for Analysis Plot Overview).
For Vertical and Horizontal Wells:
Model Line Position (Unit Calculated Results
Slope)
Wellbore storage Early storage-dominated Wellbore storage
data coefficient (Cs).
Dimensionless storage
coefficient (Cd).
Wellbore volume (V), (gas
wells).
Model Line Position (Zero Calculated Results
Slope)
Radial Early vertical radial flow Average vertical radial
homogeneous or permeability k(bar).
dual-porosity True Darcy skin factor
(S).
Radial Hemi-radial flow Average vertical radial
homogeneous or permeability k(bar).
dual-porosity
694
PanSystem
True Darcy skin factor

(S).
Radial Late horizontal radial flow Radial permeability (k).

homogeneous or Pseudo-radial skin factor
dual-porosity (Spr).
Boundary model Single or intersecting Radial permeability (k).
= single fault or fault, radial flow Pseudo-radial skin factor
two faults (Spr).
intersecting at
90
For Vertical Wells:

Slope)
Radial Radial flow portion Radial permeability (k).
homogeneous True Darcy skin factor
(S).
Boundary model Single or intersecting Radial permeability (k).
= single fault or fault, radial flow
two faults
intersecting at
90
Vertical fracture Late pseudo-radial flow Radial permeability (k).
(Spr).
Dual-porosity Fracture system radial No calculation
flow
Dual-porosity System radial flow Radial permeability (k),
(of fracture system).
(S).
Interporosity flow
coefficient ()* (see note
below).
Dual-porosity Transition to system Storativity ratio ()**
radial flow (see note below).
Dual- Radial flow (first layer) Radial permeability (k), of

permeability first layer.
(S).
Dual- Total system radial flow The kh ratio (K), if radial
permeability (both layers) flow line has been set.
695
Radial composite Inner region radial flow Radial permeability (k),

(inner region).
(S).
Radial composite Outer region radial flow Outer/inner mobility ratio
(M), if inner region line
has been set.
Partial Radial flow at Radial permeability (kp),
penetration perforations (from h(perf)).
(including gas True Darcy skin factor
cap/aquifer) (S).
Partial Full thickness radial flow Radial permeability (k),

penetration (from h).
(including gas Pseudo-radial skin factor
cap/aquifer) (Spr).
*Interporosity Flow Coefficient, (): Position a Zero-Slope line for System Radial
Flow, and define the Transition to System Radial Flow Regime (i.e. using the Flow
Regime (FR) button). The value for (), is computed from the time at the end of
the flow regime.
**Storativity Ratio, (): Position a Zero-Slope line for System Radial Flow, and
define the Transition to System Radial Flow Regime (i.e. using the Flow Regime
(FR) button). A new Zero-Slope line will appear through the minimum of the data
within this Flow Regime. The value for (), is calculated from the relative positions
of the two lines. Move the line if necessary. Alternatively, do not fit the Flow
Regime, but select the Zero-Slope Line button (i.e. for Transition) and position it at
the bottom of the derivative trough.
Types of Derivative: In addition to the conventional log-based derivative, users
can display derivatives based on other functions of time via the Derivative Selection
(T') button. This can be useful in identifying reservoir flow regimes other than
radial. The derivative types available are:
Linear time-base for Pseudo-Steady-State Flow.
Square-Root time-base for Linear Flow.
Fourth-Root time-base for Bilinear Flow.
Derivative Smoothing: This can also be applied through the Derivative Selection
(T') button, which allows users to smooth each derivative.
Marking Flow Regimes: Having identified flow regimes, users may (optionally)
mark them with the Flow Regime Definition (FR) button facility. These markers will
be carried through from plot to plot to aid in line-fitting.
For Wireline Formation Tests:

Slope)
696
PanSystem
Probe/Probe Radial flow Radial permeability (k)

active
Probe/Probe - Radial flow Radial permeability (k)

OBS
Packer/probe Radial flow Radial permeability (k)

Obs*
Dual- Radial flow Radial permeability (k).

Permeability
Obs**
*The 'Packer/Probe Active' model function is fulfilled by the standard 'Partial penetration'
model.
**The 'Dual-permeability Active' model function is fulfilled by the standard 'Dual
permeability' model.
697
Type-Curve Plot
Functionality:
This option displays one selected Test Period/s as a plot of Log10 Delta-Pressure (and the
derivative) versus Log10 of Elapsed Time. Rate-Normalised Delta-Pressure and a
Logarithmic Superposition Function may also be used, depending on the nature of the
test and the time function previously selected with the Time Function button.
Sets of Type-Curves are supplied with PanSystem for all flow models and a number of
boundary configurations. For each model, there is a "Default" set of curves and for some
models there are additional curve sets which may be accessed via a User-Selected Type-
Curve option (the full list of available Type-Curve files are presented in Type-Curve File
Structures).
Model Curve Set Comments

Radial RADHOMOG Medium range Cde2S
homogeneous RADHI High range Cde2S
RADLO Low range Cde2S
Radial RADCOMP M(inner) < M(outer) and M(inner) >
composite GASDRIVE M(outer), =1
Inner region gas, outer region liquid:
M(inner) >> M(outer), = 0.01
Partial MPARTPEN Perforations in middle
penetration TPARTPEN Perforations at top (or bottom)
Gas TGASCAP Perforations at bottom (gas cap) or

cap/aquifer top (aquifer)
MGASCAP Perforations in middle
Slug test SLUG Range of Cde2S

+ large Individual curves
selection
Boundaries FAULTS Default set
+ large Variety of boundary geometries
selection
The table shows only those models which have a choice of supplied Type-Curves
available through the User-Selected Type-Curve option. The default curve set name is in
bold text. All other models automatically pick up a default curve set.
Users may also use their own Type-Curves via the User-Selected Type-Curve option.
These can be generated in PanSystem (refer to the Help topic for TC (Type-Curve)
698
PanSystem
Export) or created externally, provided they are correctly formatted Type-Curve files
(refer to Type-Curve File Structures for details).
For a description of the tools used in Type-Curve analysis, refer to the Help topic
for Analysis Plot Overview).
699
SvQ (Skin versus Flow Rate) Plot
Functionality:
This plot is used to calculate the True Darcy Skin Factor (S), and True Rate-Dependent
Skin Coefficient (D), from estimates of the Total Skin Factor (S + DQ), at two or more
flow rates. The Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), derived from (D) and the Permeability
(k), will also be displayed in the Results Box on the plot.
This button is enabled for oil, gas or condensate if the following conditions are respected:
A vertical well, radial homogeneous reservoir flow model or any horizontal well
model has been selected (refer to Model Parameters dialog).
The Analysis menu option Non-Darcy Skin Analysis is switched on.
A Semi-Log analysis of at least two test periods at different flow rates has been
completed, so that at least two total skins are available to plot. These test periods
can be all flowing or all shut-in. The analysis must have been performed on the
radial flow portion of the data for a vertical well or on the vertical radial flow
portion for a horizontal well.
When users select the SvQ button, a plot of Total Skin versus Normalised Flow Rate is
generated. Fit a line through the points and select the Skin Analysis line definition when
the Define Line dialog appears.
The SvQ Plot takes on two forms, depending on how the radial flow plot analysis was
performed:
If the Reference Back to Initial Pressure option was enabled under the Time
Function (Tf) button facility, the plot axes will be:
x-axis: Surface Flow Rate (Qj)
y-axis: Total Skin (S + DQj )
If the Reference Back to Initial Pressure option was disabled under the Time
Function (Tf) button facility, the plot axes are defined differently, owing to the
nature of the generalized superposition function for the Semi-Log Plot analysis:
x-axis: Normalized Flow Rate (Qnorm)
y-axis: Normalized Total Skin (S + DQnorm )
The Normalised Flowrate is defined as:
Where (Qj), is the flow rate during the flow period in question, and (Qj-1), is the flow rate
during the preceding flow period.
For a producing well, the (Qnorm) term simplifies to:
(Qj-1), if users are analyzing the build-up periods of an isochronal test (because
Qj = 0)
700
PanSystem
(Qj), if users are analyzing the flowing periods of an isochronal test (because Qj-
1 = 0)
(Qj + Qj-1), if users are analyzing the flowing periods of a flow-after-flow test
(because Qj and Qj-1 are both non-zero).
For build-ups and isochronal flowing periods, there are no surprises. For a flow-after-flow
test, however, the data will not plot at the expected flow rate value (Qj), but at (Qj + Qj-
1). The corresponding Normalised Total Skin = (S + D(Qj + Qj-1)), rather than (S +
DQj).
These are simply two theoretically valid approaches to the same problem. The (S) and
(D) values derived from the intercept and slope of the line will be correct by either
method.
The disadvantage of the Reference Back to Initial Pressure approach for the Semi-
Log Plot analysis (i.e. to derive Total Skins), is that the Initial Pressure (pi), is often
not known accurately (e.g. the start of a Drill Stem Test - DST is often messy).
By not enabling the Reference Back to Initial Pressure option, the Semi-Log Plot
only requires the pressure at the start of each flow period, not (pi). These likely
to be known accurately.
Note that for condensate wells, the flow rates plotted are the in-situ "wet-stream"
or rich gas rates, not the separator gas rates. If the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure
Method is being used, the rates are "equivalent" rates. These contain a gas mass
fraction correction which is required by the theory of the method.
701
Tile
Functionality:
Use this option at any time for simultaneous display of the last four plots studied (or
fewer if four plots have not been generated). The plots will include any fitted lines, but
will not show the Results Boxes. Alternatively, hold down the Ctrl key and click on up to
4 plot buttons from the tool-bar, then select the Tile button.
The tiled screen cannot be printed directly from PanSystem, but can be pasted to the
Windows Clipboard with the PrintScrn key for pasting into a word processor or graphics
program.
To return to the screen displayed before tiling, press Esc or click the right mouse button
anywhere in the display.
702
PanSystem
Point Selection
Functionality:
This tool allows users to select a number of points automatically from any of the Analysis
Plot types, for use in Auto Match. If users click and drag to draw a box on a portion of
the plot before clicking the icon, they will enter Windowed Point Selection mode. If users
do not draw a box, they will enter Global Point Selection mode.
Users can select points by mixing both methods and can always select additional points
with the mouse pointer. Generally speaking, the regression will be more effective if more
points are used. It is particularly important to cover the storage-dominated portion in
detail. However, more points will also entail slower regression. Around 20-30 points are
usually adequate.
Global Point Selection: This option selects points from the entire dataset. Select
the Point Selection button without drawing a box.
Windowed Point Selection: This option allows users to localise the point selection to
an area of the plot by drawing a box before selecting the Point Selection button.
This option can be used to select or de-select points in the box area, or change
their weighting.
703
Global Point Selection Dialog
General:
This dialog is used to select points from the entire dataset and is generated by selecting
the Point Selection button without drawing a box.
The dialog is comprised of a selection area, an information/input area and two function
buttons, described as follows:
Selection Type area: Users may choose point spacing on a Logarithmic or Linear
basis:
Logarithmic: If the data spans M log cycles of time and users want to select
n points, the selection routine will pick (n/M) points per cycle, spaced
logarithmically in time. This gives a fairly even spacing of points on a Log-
Log Plot or Semi-Log Plot, and is the recommended choice. The first and
last points are always picked.
Linear: If users select n points, and there are N points in the dataset, the
selection routine will pick every (n/N)th point. The first and last points are
always picked. The appearance of the selected points will depend on how
they were sampled during acquisition and subsequent filtering.
Points information/input area:
Points on Current Plot: This represents the total number of points displayed
on the current plot.
Points Available for Selection: This will be up to 500 (or the number on the
current plot if smaller) minus one point for each entry in the Rate Changes
Table prior to the test being analyzed (this is because Auto Match must
include the rate history). If users have a very detailed Rate Changes Table,
they may not be able to pick enough points for Auto Match; in this case, the
rate history should be simplified.
Maximum Required Number of Points: Enter the number of points required
for the regression in this data entry field. Around 20 to 30 are usually
adequate for Auto Match, but the number cannot exceed 500.
Select the OK button to continue. The plot will then be generated with the selected
points highlighted. The points selected by this method are assigned medium weighting
for the auto-regression. Users can change the weighting of individual points or groups of
points as explained under Windowed Point Selection.
Users can de-select a highlighted point by clicking on it. Should users wish to de-
select all the highlighted points, select the Esc key. A warning message will be
displayed, but note that selecting OK from this warning does not delete the points,
it merely de-selects them.
704
PanSystem
Windowed Point Selection Dialog
General:
This dialog is used to localize the point selection to an area of the plot by drawing a box
before selecting the Point Selection button. Use this option to select or de-select
(remove) points in the box area, or change their weighting.
The dialog is comprised of a selection area, a weighting selection area (with associated
buttons), a data entry field and two function buttons, described as follows:
Selection area: Three choices are available:

De-select: This option allows users to remove selected points within the
drawn box.
Select and Weight: This allows users to select a number of points in the box
and specify their Weighting.
Re-weight: If users have drawn the box around points that have already
been selected (and weighted), their weighting can be altered with this option
by selecting a different Weighting button to be applied (as described below).
Users can select and weight a single point or alter the weighting of a selected
point, by clicking on it while pressing the up (= high) or down (= low) arrow
keys from the keyboard. For medium weighting, do not use the arrow keys.
Weighting: These buttons determine the importance of the points in the auto
regression (refer to Auto Match for more details).
Maximum Number of Selected Points: Users can select up to, but not exceeding
500 points.
Ten points selected with High Weighting

Select the OK button to continue. The points are selected using the linear method
described in Auto Match and are marked differently depending on their weight status:
705
LIT Plot
Functionality:
This option performs the "Laminar-Inertial-Turbulent" analysis of multi-rate test data to

derive the Darcy (laminar) and Non-Darcy (turbulent) flow coefficients (B) and (F),
respectively (referred to in some references as (a) and (b)) in the Deliverability
relationship represented by:
(References 1, 20 and 32)

The pressure-squared (p2) or pressure (p) approximations can be used instead of pseudo-
pressure m(p); the equation is modified accordingly.
The LIT button is only enabled if:
The fluid type selected is Gas or Condensate (refer to Well and Reservoir
Description (Analytical)).
Users have selected at least two flowing periods from the Test Overview Plot.
Select the LIT button and a Test Period Type dialog will be generated to choose between
an LIT Isochronal test or an LIT Flow-after-Flow test.
The LIT facility treats the data differently for each of these options, so ensure
that the correct type of test is selected. A brief description is given below.
Flow-after-Flow Test: This is a series of extended flowing periods, each flowed
to stabilization.
After selecting this type of test in the Test Period Type dialog, then entering
data in the LIT Flow-after-Flow dialog. On selecting OK in this second
dialog, the LIT Plot is generated (i.e. plotting just the final flowing
pressures).
x-axis: Q
y-axis:
Fit a line through the data points, then select Extended Flow in the Define
Line dialog that is generated.
The Results Box will display the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), (from the
intercept at Q = 0) and Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), (from the slope) and
the AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow).
Note that for LIT theory to be valid, the flowing periods of a Flow-after-Flow Test
should all have been flowed to stabilization (i.e. steady or semi-steady state).
Isochronal Test: A conventional isochronal test consists of a series of transient
flowing periods of equal duration separated by build-ups, with an extended flowing
period to stabilization, usually at the end.
706
PanSystem
data in the LIT Isochronal dialog. On selecting OK in this second dialog, the
LIT Plot is generated. (i.e. plotting just the end pressures).
x-axis: Q
y-axis:
Them(p) for all Transient Flowing Points is calculated relative to the

preceding final shut-in pressure (i.e. "Start Pressure"). The m(p) for the
Extended Flow Point is calculated relative to the "Layer Pressure" and should
plot above the transient data.
Fit a line through the transient data points first, then select Free Model Line
in the Define Line dialog that is generated.
Now fit a parallel line through the extended flow point, this time choosing
the Extended Flow option in the Define Line dialog that is generated. To fit a
parallel line exactly through the extended point, select the extended point,
then select the Parallel Line button.
The Results Box will display the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), (from the
intercept at Q = 0) and Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), (from the slope) and
the AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow).
If users have entered times in the Times into Drawdown area of the LIT
Isochronal dialog, a set of transient data will be plotted for each time value.
Each set should be in a linear trend, with all trends roughly parallel. Fit a
line through each dataset (i.e. all defined as Free Model Line). Use the
Average Line button to produce a single line whose slope is the average of
the lines that have been fitted. Position this line through the extended flow
point.
To fit the Average Line exactly through the extended point, select the
extended point, then select the Average Line button.
In both cases, use the Plot option from the Deliverability menu to produce the
Deliverability and logarithmic AOF plots for the test.
Dealing with Single-Point and Four-Point Tests:
The preceding description of LIT analysis assumes that users have loaded a complete
gauge recording of the entire test sequence. If only the final flowing pressures have
been used, proceed as follows:
1. In the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog, type in the end-point flowing pressures
and flowrates via the Edit option. Include the initial pressure if available.
2. Plot the data on the Data Edit Plot, and pick the rate change events using the
Nearest Point button from the Dataprep Toolbar. This creates the Rate Change
Table and is quicker than typing it.
3. Edit the Rate Changes Table, and insert the time of the start of the first flowing
period, and initial pressure (if not already entered as Gauge Data). Use the Layer
Pressure if no initial gauge pressure reading is available.
4. Initialise the necessary layer, well and fluid parameters in Well and Reservoir
Description (Analytical), including the Layer Pressure. A Pseudo-Pressure Table
may be required for LIT analysis.
5. Perform the LIT analysis as described above.
707
LIT Plot for a Flow-After-Flow (four-point) test
708
PanSystem
Test Period Type Dialog
General:
This dialog is used to select the type of analysis to be performed for an LIT Plot or C&N
Plot. The fields are described as follows:
Test Type: Two types of test type are available:
Flow-after-Flow: This type of test involves a series of extended flowing
periods, each of which should be flowed to stabilization.
Note that for LIT theory to be valid, the flowing periods of a Flow-after-Flow
Test should all have been flowed to stabilization (i.e. steady or semi-steady
state).
Isochronal: A conventional isochronal test consists of a series of transient
flowing periods of equal duration separated by build-ups, with an extended
flowing period to stabilization, usually at the end. The shut-in periods
should all have been allowed to "stabilize" (i.e. isochronal test), or should all
be of the same duration as the flowing periods (i.e. modified isochronal
test).
709
LIT Flow-After-Flow Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when users have selected the LIT Plot button and the Flow-after-
Flow option in the Test Period Type dialog. Use this option to perform a Flow-after-Flow
(FAF) analysis. A Flow-after-Flow test is a series of extended flowing periods, each
flowed to stabilization.
The dialog is comprised of an information/input field, selection area, a table field and two
Layer Pressure: Read from Layer Parameters in reservoir description. It can only
be altered temporarily in this dialog.
Pressure Type selection area: Choose from two options:
Sandface Pressures: Pressures measured at the sandface. This option
determines the plot header and has no influence on the calculations.
Wellhead Pressures: Pressures measured at the wellhead. This option
Test Data Table field: The Duration, Start Pressure and Rate values are read in
from the Rate Change Table within Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation. The End
Pressures are the final flowing pressures read from the "Master" Gauge Data
pressure column initialized within Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation.
Any changes made on this screen will therefore be temporary, and will be overwritten
by the original data (which is read in each time users return to the plotting screen).
Select OK and the LIT Plot is generated (with just the final flowing pressures plotted).
710
PanSystem
LIT Isochronal Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when users have selected the LIT Plot button and the Isochronal
option in the Test Period Type dialog. Use this option to perform an LIT Isochronal
analysis. A conventional isochronal test consists of a series of transient flowing periods of
equal duration separated by build-ups, with an extended flowing period to stabilization,
usually at the end. The shut-in periods should all have been allowed to "stabilize" (i.e.
isochronal test), or should all be of the same duration as the flowing periods (i.e.
modified isochronal test).
The dialog is comprised of a checkbox, an information/input field, selection area, two
table fields and two function buttons, described as follows:
Test Data Table field: Enter the values for test period Duration, Start Pressure, End
Pressure, Flow Rate and Test Period Type in the relevant fields.
The selected periods should be identified as Drawdown, Build-up or Extended

drawdown. Ensure that these have been correctly assigned and edit if necessary.
The extended flowing pressure is treated differently from the others (as described
below). Users can make temporary changes on this screen. It is not mandatory to
include build-up periods in the test selection on the Test Overview Plot.
Extended Drawdown Available: Check this box if there is an extended drawdown in
the analysis. If this box is checked, the program will search for the presence of an
Extended flowing period. If this box is not checked the program will not search.
Time into Drawdown Table field: This can be left blank, or times can be entered:
If blank, the LIT Plot will only display the End Pressures.
If users enter time values it will also display the Flowing Pressure read from
the Gauge Data at that elapsed time in each drawdown (times entered here
should therefore lie between zero and the shortest of the Durations). This
would ideally produce a series of roughly parallel trends on the plot, the idea
being that the radius of investigation is the same for all drawdowns at a
particular time value.
Note that for condensate wells, the flow rates plotted are the in situ r;wet-stream
Method is being used, the rates are r;equivalent rates. These contain a gas mass
Select OK and the LIT Plot is generated (with just the end pressures plotted).
711
C&n Plot
Functionality:
This option applies the empirical C&n method to the analysis of multiple rate test data, to
derive a C-coefficient and an n-exponent describing laminar and turbulent flow through
the empirical deliverability equation:
Where,
The value of (p) should be the current (i.e. average) layer pressure. There is no
pseudo-pressure version of this relationship; it is only formulated in terms of
pressure-squared (p2).
The button is only enabled if:
The fluid type selected is Gas or Condensate (refer to Well and Reservoir
Description (Analytical)).
Users have selected at least two flowing periods from the Test Overview Plot.
Select the C&n button and a Test Period Type dialog will be generated to choose between
a C&n Isochronal test or a C&n Flow-after-Flow test.
As with the LIT Plot button, the data are treated differently for each of these
options, so ensure that the correct type of test is selected. A brief description is
given below:
Flow-after-Flow Test: This is a series of extended flowing periods, each flowed
to stabilization.
data in the C&n Flow-after-Flow dialog. On selecting OK in this second
dialog, the C&n Plot is generated (i.e. plotting just the final flowing
pressures).
x-axis: Q
y-axis: p2
(on logarithmic scales)
Fit a line through the data points, then select Extended Flow in the Define
Line dialog that is generated.
The Results Box will display the C-coefficient (from the intercept at Q = 1),
the n-exponent (from the slope) and the AOF.
If users want to impose a line corresponding to a pre-determined value of n
and make it pass exactly through a selected point, click on the point, then
select the Known Slope Line button. This would be mandatory for a single-
point test.
712
PanSystem
Isochronal Test: A conventional isochronal test consists of a series of transient

flowing periods of equal duration separated by build-ups, with an extended flowing
period to stabilization, usually at the end.
The C&n Isochronal dialog is similar to the LIT Isochronal dialog, except that there
is no Times into Drawdown area present.
data in the C&n Isochronal dialog. On selecting OK in this second dialog, the
C&n Plot is generated. (i.e. plotting just the end pressures).
x-axis: Q
y-axis: p2
(on logarithmic scales)
The (p2) term for all transient flowing points is calculated relative to the
preceding final shut-in pressure (i.e. "start pressure"). The (p2) term for
the extended flow point is calculated relative to the "layer pressure", and
should plot above the transient data.
Fit a line through the transient data points first, then select Free Model Line
in the Define Line dialog that is generated.
Now fit a parallel line through the extended flow point, this time choosing
the Extended Flow option in the Define Line dialog that is generated. To fit a
parallel line exactly through the extended point, select the extended point,
then select the Parallel Line button.
The Results Box will display the C-coefficient (from the intercept at Q = 1),
the n-exponent (from the slope) and the AOF.
In both cases, use the Plot option from the Deliverability menu to produce the
Deliverability and logarithmic AOF plots for the test.
Dealing with Single-Point and Four-Point Tests:
The preceding description of C&n analysis assumes that users have loaded a complete
gauge recording of the entire test sequence. If only the final flowing pressures have been
used, proceed as follows:
1. In the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog, enter the end-point flowing pressures
and flow rates via the Edit option. Include the initial pressure if available.
2. Plot the data on the Data Edit Plot, and pick the rate change events using the
Nearest Point button from the Dataprep Toolbar. This creates the Rate Change
Table and is quicker than typing it.
713
Rate Change Events for a Four-Point Test

3. Edit the Rate Changes Table, and insert the time of the start of the first flowing
period, and initial pressure (if not already entered as Gauge Data). Use the Layer Pressure
if no initial gauge pressure reading is available.
4. Initialise the necessary layer, well and fluid parameters in Well and Reservoir
Description (Analytical), including the Layer Pressure. A Pseudo-Pressure Table is not
required for C&n analysis.
5. Perform the C&n analysis as described above.
714
PanSystem
C&n FAF Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when users have selected the C&n Plot button and the Flow-
after-Flow option in the Test Period Type dialog. Use this option to perform a Flow-after-
Flow (FAF) analysis. A Flow-after-Flow test is a series of extended flowing periods, each
flowed to stabilization.
The dialog is comprised of an information/input field, selection area, a table field and two
Test Data Table field: The Duration, Start Pressure and Rate values are read in
from the Rate Change Table within Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation. The End
Pressures are the final flowing pressures read from the "Master" Gauge Data
pressure column initialized within Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation.
Any changes made on this screen will therefore be temporary, and will be overwritten
by the original data (which is read in each time users return to the plotting screen).
Select OK and the C&n Plot is generated (with just the final flowing pressures plotted).
715
C&n Isochronal Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when users have selected the C&n Plot button and the Isochronal
option in the Test Period Type dialog. Use this option to perform an C&n Isochronal
analysis. A conventional isochronal test consists of a series of transient flowing periods of
equal duration separated by build-ups, with an extended flowing period to stabilization,
usually at the end. The shut-in periods should all have been allowed to "stabilize" (i.e.
isochronal test), or should all be of the same duration as the flowing periods (i.e.
modified isochronal test).
The dialog is comprised of a checkbox, an information/input field, selection area, two
table fields and two function buttons, described as follows:
Test Data Table field: Enter the values for test period Duration, Start Pressure, End
Pressure, Flow Rate and Test Period Type in the relevant fields.
The selected periods should be identified as Drawdown, Build-up or Extended

drawdown. Ensure that these have been correctly assigned and edit if necessary.
The extended flowing pressure is treated differently from the others (as described
below). Users can make temporary changes on this screen. It is not mandatory to
include build-up periods in the test selection on the Test Overview Plot.
Extended Drawdown Available: Check this box if there is an extended drawdown in
the analysis. If this box is checked, the program will search for the presence of an
Extended flowing period. If this box is not checked the program will not search.
Note that for condensate wells, the flow rates plotted are the in situ r;wet-stream
Method is being used, the rates are r;equivalent rates. These contain a gas mass
Select OK and the C&n Plot is generated (with just the end pressures plotted).
716
PanSystem
Flow Regime Definition Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
This is an optional facility which allows users to identify and mark flow regimes on a
diagnostic plot, based on a visual inspection of the data. This would normally be done
using the Log-Log Plot derivative, but the option is available on all of the diagnostic plots.
The selection of flow regimes available varies with the reservoir flow and boundary
models chosen.
Once assigned, the information is carried through from plot to plot to facilitate line fitting
to the correct portions of data.
The flow regime limits are not attached to data points, but are defined in terms of time
axis values. The algorithm for transforming the marker times from one time axis function
to another (e.g. switching from a logarithmic to a square-root superposition plot), has
been significantly improved from V-2.3 onwards and it should no longer be necessary to
re-adjust the marker positions between different plots.
When this button is selected, a vertical dashed line appears on the screen and while the
cursor is positioned in the plot window, it changes to a double-ended arrow. Drag this
line to the start of an identifiable flow regime and left-click the mouse; this line is then
fixed. A second dashed line now appears. Position this line at the end of the flow regime
and left-click the mouse.
A Define Flow Regime dialog is now generated to allow users to select the type of flow
regime. A colored bar appears at the top of the plot between the dotted lines. The color
depends on the flow regime selected (e.g. red for wellbore storage, green for radial flow).
Users will now find the same dashed lines and colored bars in the appropriate positions
on all of the other diagnostic plots.
To Move: The limits of a flow regime can be shifted at any time by left-clicking on
either of the small arrows at each end of the colored bar and dragging.
To Delete: If users double-click on the colored bar, an Edit Flow Regime dialog is
generated. This displays the flow regime type. If required, the flow regime marker
can be removed with the Delete button.
To Line Fit: If users left-click once on the colored bar, then select the Fit Line
button, a line will be fitted automatically through the data points lying within the
selected flow regime.
717
Confirm Results
Functionality:
This button allows the reservoir description to be built-up and continually revised as the
analysis proceeds.
When users Confirm the results derived by fitting lines or matching curves to the data on
a plot, they write these values to a permanent record in the reservoir description (i.e.
permanent until users choose to update them with a subsequent confirm).
The confirmed parameter set can be accessed at any time via the Model option from the
Analysis menu or via the Layer Parameters button in the Well and Reservoir Description
(Analytical) option from the Dataprep menu.
718
PanSystem
Change T0 Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use this button to change the start time or start pressure of the Test Period selected for
analysis (single period only). Normally, this change should only be required if the start
values declared in the Edit Rate Changes area of Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation, need to
be "fine-tuned" (e.g. to produce a better unit slope on the Log-Log Plot).
The dialog has only two entry fields and two function buttons, described as follows:
T0: Enter the new initial value for time in this field.
P0: Enter the new initial value for pressure in this field.
On selecting OK, the original start values in the Rate Changes Table are overwritten by
these new ones.
719
Line Results Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
This option displays a detailed list of the results associated with a line on the plot. The
line must first be selected by holding down the Ctrl key or right-mouse button, then left-
clicking with the mouse, before selecting the Line Results button.
In addition to slope, intercept at x = 0 and line-fit details, other parameters may be
displayed depending on the plot and flow model (e.g. the y-axis value at t = 1 hour).
No interpretation results are displayed; these all appear in the Model Results Box on the
plot.
If the "free model" option is used when a line is fitted, the generated Line Results dialog
will include some reference results (e.g. k, S, etc.), computed as if for the infinite-acting
radial homogeneous flow model.
When users select this option a Line Results information dialog is generated. This
contains the following results:
Results for a line fitted through the radial flow portion of the data on a Semi-Log
Plot (i.e. line position details only).
Results for a line fitted through the same portion of the data but as a "free model"
line (i.e. line position details plus reference interpretation).
720
PanSystem
Zero Slope Line
Functionality:
Use this option to fit a zero-slope (horizontal) line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log
Plot to identify flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to a radial flow
regime. The table contained in the Help topic for Analysis Plot - Define Line, shows that
for certain flow and boundary models, the radial permeability (k) and skin (S), can be
calculated from the line position.
For any other derivative types (refer to the Help topic for the Derivative Selection (T')
button), the horizontal portion of the data corresponds to the following flow regimes:
Derivative Type Has Zero Slope
During...
Linear time derivative Wellbore storage
Pseudo-steady-
state flow
Log time derivative Radial flow
Square-root time derivative Linear flow
Fourth-root time derivative Bilinear flow
1/(square-root time Spherical flow
derivative)
If users have already selected a reservoir flow model and/or boundary model a
Define Line dialog is generated when this button is selected, if the particular line
slope corresponds to a valid flow regime; otherwise the line is drawn immediately.
721
Unit Slope Line
Functionality:
Use this option to fit a unit-slope line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log Plot to
identify flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to wellbore
storage (i.e. early data), or to pseudo-steady-state flow (i.e. late data, closed rectangle
boundary model).
Derivative Type Has Unit Slope During...
Log time Wellbore storage
derivative Pseudo-steady-state
flow
Users can move the line at any time by selecting it (i.e. use the Ctrl key and left-click on
the line or right-click with the mouse button), then dragging the centre grab-handle (i.e.
black square at the center of the line).
722
PanSystem
Half Slope Line
Functionality:
Use this option to fit a half-slope line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log Plot to
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to a linear flow
regime in a vertical fracture (i.e. in the early part of the data), parallel faults boundary
model (i.e. late data) or linear flow towards the wellbore (i.e. horizontal well).
Derivative Type Has Half Slope During...
Log time Fracture linear flow
derivative Reservoir linear flow
Linear flow through layer
(horizontal well)
723
Quarter Slope Line
Functionality:
Use this option to fit a quarter-slope line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log Plot to
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to a bilinear flow
regime in a vertical fracture with finite conductivity.
Derivative Type Has Quarter Slope
During...
Log time derivative Fracture bilinear flow
724
PanSystem
Negative Half Slope Line
Functionality:
Use this option to fit a negative half-slope line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log Plot
to identify flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to the spherical
flow regime in a partially-penetrated reservoir model (i.e. transition from near-well radial
flow to full-thickness radial flow with a penetration ratio < 0.1).
Derivative Type Has Negative Half Slope
During...
Log time (Hemi-) Spherical flow
derivative
725
Floating Line
Functionality:
Use this option to fit a line of unspecified slope to the derivative curve of the Log-Log
Plot to identify flow regimes or trends. This line can assume any gradient and any
position on the plot.
The line is initially displayed with a gradient = 1. To alter this gradient, left-click on the
end handles (i.e. the black boxes situated at either end of the line), with the cursor and
drag the line up or down to a new angle. To shift the entire line up or down, grab the
center handle.
Users can move the line at any subsequent time by selecting it (i.e. use the Ctrl key and
left-click on the line or right-click with the mouse button), then dragging the grab-
handles as described above.
No flow regime definition is associated with this line.
726
PanSystem
Analysis Toolbar
Functionality:
Use this option to display a line whose slope is the average of the existing lines drawn
on the plot.
When this button is selected, the lines will disappear and a single line of Average Slope
will be drawn. Move it to the desired position by left-clicking and dragging the centre
grab-handle (i.e. black box).
If users select a (single) point before using this tool, the line will be drawn exactly
through that point. This is a useful facility for the LIT Plot and C&n Plot extended flowing
points.
727
Change Line Type
Functionality:
Use this option to change the definition of an existing line (i.e. to change the identity of
flow regime to which the associated test data belongs). This may cause an alteration to
the results belonging to that line (if any).
Select the line by pressing the Ctrl key and left-clicking on the line or right-clicking on the
line, then select the Change Line Type button.
A Define Line dialog is generated, showing the possible line types for the current model.
Choose the new line definition. A warning will be issued if another line of this type is
present.
728
PanSystem
Fit Line
Functionality:
This option will fit a line by a least squares regression through all the data between two
selected points. Choose two points and select the button.
It is important that only two points are selected. A point can be de-selected by clicking
on it again or all points can be de-selected by selecting the Esc key.
729
Known Slope Line Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use this option to fit a line of specified slope to the plot.

When this button is selected a Known Line dialog is generated, allowing users to enter the
slope of the line to fit. The default line slope will be that of the currently selected line (or
1.0 if none is selected).
Enter a value as necessary. On selecting OK, the line appears on the plot.
Define Line dialog is generated if the particular line slope corresponds to a valid
flow regime; otherwise the line is drawn immediately.
The line can be moved around using the centre handle (i.e. black box).
through that point.
730
PanSystem
Known Line Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when users select the Known Slope Line button from the Analysis
Toolbar to fit a line of specified slope to the current plot.
The dialog has a single data entry field entitled Line Slope. The default Line Slope will be
that of the last line fitted (or 1.0 if none has been fitted). Enter a value as necessary.
On selecting OK, the line appears on the plot.
Define Line dialog is generated if the particular line slope corresponds to a valid
flow regime; otherwise the line is drawn immediately.
through that point.
731
Parallel Line
Functionality:
Use this option to draw a line parallel to an existing line.

An existing line must first be selected by holding down the Ctrl key and left-clicking it or
right-clicking it with the mouse. The grab-handles will appear (i.e. black boxes).
Select this button and the parallel line will be drawn.
through that point.
732
PanSystem
Derivative Selection Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use this option to:

Select/de-select derivative types for display on the Log-Log Plot.
Alter the degree of smoothing of a derivative.
When this option is selected, a Derivative Selection dialog is generated allowing users to:
Check the derivatives they wish to display.
Edit the smoothing constants for each derivative.
Derivatives: Five derivatives are available:
SSS: Check to display Semi-Steady-State derivative.
Radial: Check to display Radial derivative.
Linear: Check to display Linear derivative.
Bilinear: Check to display Bilinear derivative.
Spherical: Check to display Spherical derivative.
Smoothing Constants: Enter the derivative Smoothing Constant for each
derivative selected (i.e. checked). A smaller number = less smoothing applied in
these fields. As a guide:
0.0 = no smoothing
0.01 = very light smoothing
0.1 = moderate smoothing
0.5 = heavy smoothing
Be careful with the choice of smoothing constant for the Non-Radial derivatives;
normally the value will have to be kept small (i.e. < 0.03), to avoid a "dog-leg" at
late time (also refer to the Help topic for Smoothing (L) button). The different
derivatives are computed as listed below:
Derivative Type Formulation Has Zero Slope
During...
SSS (semi-steady- dp/d(t) Wellbore storage
state) Semi-steady-
"Primary Derivative" state flow
Radial dp/d(logt)* Radial flow
Linear dp/d (t) Linear flow
Bilinear dp/d (4t) Bilinear flow
Spherical dp/d (1/t) Spherical flow
733
* The actual formulation is dp/d(time function).
dp is not necessarily dp but really d(pressure function).

In the case of multi-rate tests, the elapsed time (t), is replaced by the appropriate
equivalent time superposition function (refer to the Time Function (Tf) button).
Refer to Zero Slope Line button, for information on the behaviour of the different
derivative types.
Plot Against Elapsed Time: This is only active for build-up (or fall-off) tests (i.e.
single or multiple). It allows users to plot the pressure and derivative against logt
instead of log (equivalent time). The derivative is still calculated using equivalent
time, but will be plotted against elapsed time. This display has the effect of
eliminating the data compression that sometimes occurs at late time when plotting
with equivalent time (i.e. short flowing time/long shut-in time) and restores detail.
Remove End-Effect: This option terminates the smoothing when the leading edge
of the smoothing window reaches the end of the data. This truncates the derivative
and need only be switched on if the end of the derivative appears noisy. The larger
the smoothing constant (refer to the Help topic for Smoothing (L) button), the more
the derivative will be truncated.
734
PanSystem
Time Mark Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
This option is only enabled if the Reservoir Model is Vertical Fracture: Finite Conductivity
and the Bilinear Plot is displayed.
Use this option to mark the point at which the data leaves the straight line (i.e. bilinear
flow) trend. An estimate of the Fracture Half-Length (xf),will be computed, and the
Fracture Conductivity (kfw) (and Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity - Fcd) re-computed
accordingly.
When this button is selected, the cursor changes to a cross-hair. If users click on a
point on the plot, a Define Time Mark dialog is generated to show the type of Time Marks
available (currently the only one available is the End of Bilinear Flow).
Select the type of Time Mark to be placed on the plot. The Define Time Mark dialog
contains a single-data selection field:
Time Mark Type: Select the type of Time Mark from the list box.
If users then select OK, the data-point nearest the cross-hair is marked with an asterisk
and it is flagged by a T marker directly above it in the Ruler Bar. An Fcd Range dialog is
also generated to allow users to select the Fcd Range.
The (xf) and (Fcd) terms are re-computed differently for each range. Try each one and
look for an Fcd consistent with the range selected (i.e. if Fcd computes as 9.2 for the
range 1.6 to 3.0, it should be ignored and another range tried).
Only one Time Mark is allowed at a time. It can be deleted by double-clicking on the T in
the ruler bar and selecting the Delete button in the Edit Time Mark dialog.
735
Fcd Range Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated after a time mark has been selected with the Time Mark (T*)
button (which only enabled if the reservoir model is Vertical fracture: Finite Conductivity
and the Bilinear Plot is displayed).
The Time Mark facility is used to mark the point at which the data leaves the straight line
(i.e. bilinear flow) trend. An estimate of the Fracture Half-Length (xf),will be computed,
and the fracture conductivity (kfw) (and Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity - Fcd) re-
computed accordingly.
The dialog is comprised of a single selection area with three range choices. The (xf) and
(Fcd) terms are re-computed differently for each range.
Select the Fcd Range applicable at the end of bilinear flow.
Try each one and look for an Fcd consistent with the range selected (i.e. if Fcd computes
as 9.2 for the range 1.6 to 3.0, it should be ignored and another range tried).
736
PanSystem
Edit Time Mark Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated after a Time Mark has been selected by double-clicking on the T
marker in the Ruler Bar.
The Time Mark facility is used to mark the point at which the data leaves the straight line
(i.e. bilinear flow) trend. An estimate of the Fracture Half-Length (xf),will be computed,
and the fracture conductivity (kfw) (and Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity - Fcd) re-
computed accordingly.
The dialog contains an information area relating to the selected Time Mark Type. Delete
the selected Time Mark by clicking the Delete button.
737
Select Type-Curve Match
Functionality:
Use this option to display dimensionless Type-Curves on the Type-Curve Plot. In

PanSystem, Type-Curves are supplied for each Reservoir Flow Model and a number of
Boundary configurations. In addition, users can display Type-Curves that may have been
generated within earlier versions of PanSystem, or from some external source (i.e.
provided they are correctly formatted).
When this option is selected, the button stays "depressed" and a Select Type-Curve
dialog is generated.
The dialog is comprised of an information field, two selection areas, two selection option
fields and two function buttons, described as follows:
Model: This information field displays the currently selected flow model.
Type-Curve Method: Select the method to use. This field usually contains only
one option, although a few reservoir models offer alternative methods of analysis.
For example, the Homogeneous Reservoir Model can be analyzed by the Td/Cd
Wellbore Storage Type-Curve Method (References 11 and 34), or by the McKinley
Type-Curves (Reference 38).
Type-Curve Starting Stage: Select the first stage to match on. There may be
one or two stages for the main match (depending on the reservoir model) and a
boundary stage.
Each "stage" involves bringing on a different set of curves:
Early/middle time analysis (storage, near reservoir). Users would normally
start with this stage, but it is not mandatory.
Middle/late time analysis.
The Boundary stage is for (optional) late time boundary analysis. Users may
start with this stage if desired.
Default Type-Curves: Check this box to select the default type-curve set supplied
for the current reservoir model. This set will be displayed on selecting OK from the
dialog.
User Selected Type Curves: Check this box to select a user-supplied family of
Type-Curves for this matching stage. This option generates the Type Curve File
dialog for importing user-supplied curves. Alternative curve sets (i.e. covering
different ranges or geometries) supplied for some flow models are listed (refer to
Type-Curve Plot). Users may generate their own Type-Curves for inclusion here,
either via the Type-Curve Export option (refer to TC (Type-Curve) Export option
from the Analysis menu), or from an external source (for details of the Type-Curve
file format, refer to Type-Curve File Structure).
If this latter box is checked and users select OK, the Type Curve File dialog will be
generated. This is a standard Windows File Open dialog.
738
PanSystem
On selecting OK, the selected or default type-curves are displayed on the Type-Curve
Plot. A typical Matching procedure is outlined below:
1. Click and grab the curves with the mouse and drag them to where a good match is
achieved.
2. If users already have a preferred value for the radial permeability (k), the pressure
match can be fixed using the Type-Curve Force (Fpar) button. In this case, the
curves can only be moved sideways.
3. If the Match button is selected again, PanSystem attempts to identify the nearest
curve to the data, the Verify Selected Nearest Curve dialog is generated and the
curve number is displayed with its associated identifier (i.e. a number or text label).
Depending on the data quality and the nature of the response, it may or may not
be the right curve.
Enter the Nearest Curve number if necessary; they are numbered from bottom to
top (drag the box to one side by grabbing the title bar if it is in the way). Update
the Curve Value by pressing the Tab key (optional).
On selecting OK, the Match Results Box will be displayed, containing the results for
that particular stage.
4. Having completed a matching stage, users can now proceed to the next stage (i.e.
select the Next button), go back to the beginning (i.e. select the Previous button), or break
out of the Type-Curve section and select a different plot.
739
Type-Curve File Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated when the User-Selected Type-Curves option is selected in the
Type-Curve Match dialog, then OK is selected. This is a standard Windows File Open
dialog that allows users to pick the Type-Curve file to use for this stage of the Type-Curve
Analysis. The Files area lists all the Type-Curves with the appropriate extension present
in the specified Type-Curves folder. The file extension pertains to the reservoir model
and the chosen Type-Curve Method.
The dialog fields are described as follows:
File Name: Type in the name of the file to be opened, or enter a new file or path
specification.
Files: List of all the files in the current directory that match the specification typed
into the File Name edit box. Select the file to be opened from this list box.
Directories: List of all the directories and drives available. Browse and select the
directory or drive to be changed to from this area.
Refer also to:
Type-Curve Plot
740
PanSystem
Type-Curve Choose Zwd Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated for a horizontal well model in Analysis, when users have selected
Type-Curve Match, then Select Type-Curve. It allows users to enter the Dimensionless
Well Offset (Zwd) for horizontal well Type-Curve Matching.
The dialog has a single data selection field and two function buttons, described as follows:
Zwd: The average dimensionless vertical distance (zw/h) of the well axis from the
upper or lower boundary (i.e. no-flow/no-flow models), or from the no-flow
boundary (i.e. no-flow/constant pressure models).
0 < ZWd < 1.0.
(Refer to the Horizontal Well Flow Models section in the Model Parameters Help
topic for applicability).
Select an appropriate value for Zwd from the list field, then select OK to apply and
draw the Type-Curves.
741
Type-Curve Next/Confirm Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
This button is enabled when users have completed a Matching stage (refer to Type-Curve
Match), provided there is another stage to follow. PanSystem retains the nearest curve
from the previous stage, and loads the Type-Curve set for the next stage.
Grab the curves with the mouse and drag them to where a good Match is achieved.
Now select the Match button to close the match. The Verify Selected Nearest Curve
dialog will be generated to allow users to confirm or change the nearest curve. Edit as
required, select OK, and the results obtained from the stage will be added to the list in
the Results Box.
The Verify Selected Nearest Curve dialog contains a single data entry/edit field, an
information field and two function buttons described as follows:
PanSystem has attempted to identify the nearest curve to the data, and the curve
number is displayed with its associated identifier (a number or text label). Depending on
the data quality and the nature of the response, it may or may not be the correct curve.
The ordering of the curves is displayed on the dialog:
Nearest Curve: Enter the number of the correct (i.e. nearest Match) Type-Curve in
this field. The Type-Curve identifier will be updated automatically.
Curve Value: This represents the value or text string associated with the Type-
Curve (refer to Type-Curve File for more details).
742
PanSystem
Type-Curve Previous
Functionality:
This button is enabled when users have completed a Matching stage; it returns users
back to the previous stage of Matching, removing all curves and results associated with
the later stage.
If users are in the first stage of a Match (i.e. first set of curves on-screen), they will be
returned to the initial Type-Curve screen, containing just the Gauge Pressure and
Derivative data. This will enable users to start the Match process again (e.g. with a
different selection of Type-Curves).
Also Refer to:
Type-Curve Plot
743
Type-Curve Pd Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use this option to display/hide the Pd curve or its derivative curve on the Type-Curve
Plot. It is not possible to hide both curves simultaneously.
When this button is selected a Select Pd Curve Display dialog is generated. Check the
selection box or boxes to display, uncheck to hide.
The dialog is comprised of two check fields and two function buttons, described as
follows:
Show Pd Curves: Check this checkbox to have the Pd curves visible.
Show Derivative Curves: Check this checkbox to have the derivative curves
visible.
744
PanSystem
Smoothing Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
This option allows users to change the Derivative Smoothing Constant (References 30 and
34) in the Type-Curve Match facility. It is only enabled prior to loading the Type-Curves
(i.e. when the pressure and derivative data are first displayed. When this button is
selected a Change Smoothing Constant dialog is generated, displaying the currently used
smoothing constant.
The dialog is comprised of a data entry/edit field, a checkbox and two function buttons,
Smoothing Constant: Enter a value for the smoothing constant value in this field.
A smaller number = less smoothing. As a guide:
0.0 = no smoothing
0.01 = very light smoothing
0.1 = moderate smoothing
0.5 = heavy smoothing
For the logarithmic derivative, the default of L = 0.07 represents a smoothing
window spanning a time tj.eL (~7% ) on either side of a data point at time tj, so
for a point at t = 10 hours, the window extends from approximately 9.3 hours to
10.7 hours.
Plot Against Elapsed Time: This is only active for build-up (or fall-off) tests. It
allows users to plot the pressure and derivative against logt instead of log
equivalent time. The derivative will still be calculated using superposition, but will
be plotted against elapsed time. This display has the effect of eliminating the data
compression that sometimes occurs at late time when plotting with equivalent time,
and restores detail.
745
Type-Curve Force Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
This option allows users to impose a fixed value on a parameter (i.e. usually (k), Radial
Permeability) during the first stages of a Type-Curve Match. The position of the Type-
Curves will then be fixed in the vertical and horizontal direction at the appropriate
Pressure-Match position. To move the type curve, use the spin buttons to change the
values of the parameter, and click Apply or OK.
When users select this button, an Enter Value for Force Parameter dialog is generated,
allowing users to enter a value for the parameter. The default value will be the current
confirmed value in Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) (or zero if not yet
initialized).
The dialog is comprised of a single data entry field and two function buttons, described as
follows:
Parameter X: This data entry field will vary with the Type-Curves being used but
will carry the name of an appropriate parameter (e.g. Permeability, Drainage Area,
etc.). Either increment the current value up/down with the toggles, or enter a
specific value and select the Apply button. When a parameter is forced, the type-
curves are repositioned in the X- or Y-axis direction so that the match position
corresponds to the new value. For example, adjusting permeability k will reposition
the curves in the Y-axis direction.
746
PanSystem
Pressure Extrapolation Dialog
General:
This dialog is generated by selecting the Pressure Extrapolation option from the
PanSystem Analysis menu. It can be used to compensate for a Pressure Variation in the
Reservoir and to back-out a Pressure Trend from well test data:
When a global Pressure Trend induced by interference from Injection or Producing
Wells needs to be removed from the Gauge Data so that a Transient Analysis can
be performed
When the Gauge Pressure has to be corrected for the effects of the Flowing History
of the Well rather than use Superposition Theory to function the Time (i.e. the
principle of the Slider Method - Reference 19).

Type area: Select the Type of Extrapolation trend to be applied, from the five
choices. Each selection requires a different set of Parameters to be defined in the
underlying section. The table below illustrates the specific Parameters required for
each Flow Type selection:
Type selection Parameters required

None Not used
Semi-Steady-State Linear Rate of Pressure
Flow Change
Radial Flow Logarithmic Pressure
Trend
Test
Linear Flow Square-Root Pressure
Trend
747
Test
Bilinear Flow Fourth-Root Pressure
Trend
Test
Parameters section: With reference to the Flow Type area and the table above,
enter the appropriate Parameters in the data entry fields, when they are enabled:
Rate of Pressure Change: This Trend can be estimated from a plot (i.e. with
an appropriate Time axis) of the data at the tail end of the preceding Test
Period if available. To generate this for a Gas well test, remember to change
the Pressure Transformation option to Pressure, otherwise the Trend will be
measured in m(p)/day and not pressure/day.
Elapsed Time to Start of Test: The Logarithmic, Square-Root and Fourth-
Root Pressure Trend options require this additional input. The preceding
Trend is attributed to an assumed Single Constant Rate Period (use the
Effective (Tp) for a Build-Up, where Tp(eff) = Total Volume Produced last
Flow Rate before Shut-In). Unlike the Linear Extrapolation, the size of the
correction applied to the Test data depends on how long these Trends
existed before the Test Period under Analysis.
Note that a positive data entry indicates a Pressure Trend declining with Time,
and a negative data entry indicates a Pressure Trend increasing with Time.
Use (Extrapolation) area: Choose the Type of Extrapolation to be used from the
two available choices, to either represent Rate History Effects for the same Well or
Interference Effects from other Wells.
Extrapolation to Model Rate History: This replicates the Slider Method
(Reference 19) to account for the effects of Rate History by Desuperposition.
The selected Trend (i.e. identified from the preceding Test Period data), is
added to the Gauge Data when plotted. Since this correction accounts for
Rate History, the "No History" option should be selected under the Time-
Function (Tf) tool. The correction is also applied to any Quick Match or
Advanced Simulation data which are plotted.
Extrapolation to Model Interference Effects: In this case, only the Gauge
Data are corrected with the Extrapolation Trend, to Plot the pure response
cleaned of any Interference Effects. Any Well Rate History pertaining to the
Test should be respected by retaining the default Time-Function (Tf) setting
of "Use History". There is no Pressure Correction applied to any Quick
Match or Advanced Simulation data which are plotted, since these already
represent the pure response.
If a different Test Period is subsequently analyzed, remember to switch the

Pressure Extrapolation facility off or change the Parameter/s as appropriate.
748
PanSystem
Pressure Decline Analysis (PDA) Toolbar
General:
The PDA facility is accessed via the Plot sub-menu option under the PDA main menu item.
The PDA facility is only available for a Closed System Boundary Model; this can be
selected from either the Boundary Model dialog in Dataprep (Analytical) or the
Select Analysis Model dialog in Analysis.
PanSystem will always process the entire dataset.
For the Agarwal-Gardner Type-Curve options users must select a Test Period (or
Periods) for Analysis. To Group Test Periods, hold down the Shift key, then left-
click and scroll through the required Periods within the Ruler Bar above the Plot and
release the mouse button; multiple Test Periods will now appear as a single Test
Period. Ensure that the last selected Test Period is not a Build-Up, since PDA only
deals with Flowing Data.

Help.
PDA Plot Toolbar Icons and Functionality:
The following tools are available on the PDA Plot Toolbar:
Zoom Normal: Reset the Zoomed area of the current Graph/Plot to

default size.
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) Method: Generate the ECR Parameters
dialog (used to enter Reservoir Model Parameters and calculate the
Equivalent Constant Rate (ECR) Pressure, the response of the Reservoir to
an Equivalent Constant Rate Drawdown.
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Time Type-Curves: Generate Agarwal-Gardener
Type-Curves for Pressure-Normalized Rate (Q/p) versus Material Balance
Time (Np/Q)
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Pressure Decline Plot: Generate a plot
of Pressure-Normalized Rate (Q/p) versus Normalized Cumulative
Production (Np/p).
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Type-Curves: Generate Agarwal-
Gardener Type-Curves for Dimensionless Rate (1/PWD) versus
Dimensionless Cumulative Production (QDA).
749
The AG-RC TC tool is only available after users have Confirmed

(Cnf) the Drainage Area (A) and Permeability (k) using one of the
other PDA Type-Curve tools.
Exit PDA Mode: Exit from the PDA Mode of PanSystem and return to the
Analysis Mode Test Overview Plot.
750
PanSystem
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis)
Zoom In
Functionality:
751
Zoom Normal
Functionality:
752
PanSystem
ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) Facility/ECR Parameters Dialog
Functionality:
PanSystem will always process the entire dataset. The only requirement for
using ECR is the selection of a Closed System Boundary Model.
This facility is used for the Analysis of long-term Production Data. Selection of this tool
option on the PDA Toolbar generates a Test Overview type of plot (Production Decline
Analysis) displaying Pressure and Rate Changes from the Rate Changes Table. An ECR
Parameters dialog displays the relevant Transient Model Parameters (minus any
Boundary parameters).
The measured Pressure record is corrected to an Equivalent Constant Rate response.
The method does not require knowledge of the Boundaries, but some knowledge of the
Reservoir Model Parameters is required (i.e. Permeability (k), Skin (S), etc.); for
example, this information might be derived from a Build-Up Test.
Conventional Constant Rate Analysis is then possible to derive the Connected Pore
Volume, Second Cell Support, etc. The only difference is that an Equivalent Constant
Rate (ECR) Time is used instead of Real Time for the diagnostic plots. A Boundary
Analysis using Derivative Matching can also be performed to derive the Reservoir
Geometry if the data are good enough.
When the Plot option is selected from the PDA Menu, a Production Decline Analysis
plot is generated (i.e. a Test Overview type plot) with Pressure and Step Rate
Schedule.
Select the ECR button to generate an ECR Parameters dialog; this is similar to the
Quick Match input dialog and displays the transient Model Parameters that are
relevant to the currently selected Reservoir Model, but no Boundaries, regardless
of what is currently selected in PanSystem as a Boundary Model. Enter the relevant
Model Parameters (which would normally have been derived from a Transient
Analysis).
PanSystem will issue a prompt if no Model Parameters are entered or insufficient

data has been entered.
Select the Calculate ECR Pressure button to:
Compute the ECR Pressure.
Display ECR Pressure versus ECR Time on Cartesian and Log-Log Preview
Plots. Equivalent Constant Rate Time (tECR) is defined as:
(i.e. at any Time (t), tECR is the Cumulative Production Reference Constant
Rate (Qref)).
753
Where Qref is defined as:
t0 is the Start of the Test and tf is the End of the Test.
With the above definitions of tECR and Qref, tECR = tf at the end of the Test, so
although the Time Scale gets distorted during the Test, the overall Test
Duration is the same.
Cartesian (PDA) and Log-Log (PDA) Preview Plots are generated automatically in
Reduced windows as an overlay on the PDA Plot. These two plots display ECR
Pressure versus Equivalent Constant Rate (ECR) Time; these plots are for
reference only and have no controls. However, they can be moved, minimized,
maximized, etc. Any Smoothing on the Log-Log Preview Plot is applied in terms of
what was previously selected by users in Analysis when a Log-Log Plot was last
generated.
To facilitate the identification of "rogue" Flow Rates causing anomalies in the ECR
Pressure Curve, users can click on a "rogue" Data Point on the Cartesian Preview
Plot, whereupon the offending Flow Period is highlighted in a green color on the
main PDA Plot. If users double-click on a green-colored Flow Period, the Enter New
Rate dialog is generated. Enter a new Flow Rate if required (i.e. smaller values
than the current value will have the strongest effect) and select the Calculate
button to calculate a new ECR Pressure and a new Cartesian Preview Plot. The
green-colored Flow Rate trace will subsequently appear at its new value. Flow
Rates can be adjusted in this trial and error manner to improve the ECR Pressure
trend.
The Current Rate in the Enter New Rate dialog is retained internally until the OK
button is selected, in which case the new Flow Rate value and ECR Pressure is
applied. Select Cancel to reinstate the original Flow Rate value; this requires
PanSystem to perform a further back calculation to restore the original ECR
Pressure, so it may take some time for the Production Decline Analysis Plot to be
refreshed.
Shut-Ins are eliminated automatically from the ECR process, so users will not
be able to select and highlight these periods.
Select the Analyze ECR Pressure button to transfer into Analysis Mode and generate
a full-scale Cartesian Plot of the ECR Pressure which can be fitted with a Closed
System, Pseudo-Steady-State line (i.e. for late Flowing Period data in Semi-
Steady-State flow regime), to yield Reservoir Area (A), Equivalent Circular Radius
(R), Original Hydrocarbons in Place and Dietz Shape Factor (Ca). Some (or all) of
these Model Parameters can be Confirmed (Cnf), where appropriate.
This ECR data has a Constant Flow Rate (Qref).

The Log-Log Plot and other diagnostic plots are available from the Analysis Toolbar,
with full line-fit capabilities (i.e. to confirm Unit Slope behaviour, estimate Reservoir
Area (A), etc).
A Quick Match simulation can also be run with Boundaries included on Cartesian,
Log-Log and other diagnostic plots. This requires users to define the dimensions of
754
PanSystem
the Closed System; these should be consistent with the Reservoir Area (A) that
has just been calculated.
The ECR Data are written to a new file EPS_ECR, which is listed in the Data
File/Column List section of the Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog. This file
contains the ECR Pressure, Reference Constant Rate (Qref), and ECR Time (tECR).
If users attempt to perform subsequent ECR runs, a duplicate Column Name

warning is issued; users are either given the option of overwriting the existing
ECR data or having the duplicate Columns renamed automatically.
Exit from PDA Mode with the Exit PDA toolbar button.
755
Functionality:
This tool is only available after users have Confirmed (Cnf) the Drainage Area (A)
and Permeability (k) using one of the other PDA Type-Curve tools.
Before selecting this button, users must also select a Test Period (or Grouped Test
Periods) for Analysis.
To Group consecutive Periods into a single Period for Analysis, hold down the Shift key,
then left-click and scroll through the required Periods within the Ruler Bar above the Plot
and release the mouse button; multiple Test Periods will now appear as a single Test
Period.
Ensure that the last selected Test Period is not a Build-Up.

To Ungroup a Grouped Test Period, select the Shift key, then click on the Grouped Period
within the Ruler Bar and the individual Test Periods will be displayed once more.
After selecting a Test Period (or Grouped Test Periods), select this button to generate a
plot (i.e. Log-Log type) of either:
Oil Fluid Type: Dimensionless (Pressure-Normalized) Rate (1/PD) versus
Dimensionless Cumulative Production (QDA), defined as:
where:
Pore Volume (PV) = hA ft3
Gas Fluid Type: Dimensionless Rate (1/PD) versus Dimensionless Cumulative
Production (QDA), defined as:
where:
If an estimate of Permeability (k) does not yet exist in the Model Parameters, users
will be prompted for a value upon entering the plot (this is required for the Y-axis).
If users enter a bad value at this point, the Y-axis values of the data will be
wrong, and this will lead to a poor estimate of Skin Factor (S), or Fracture Half-
Length (Xf). However, the data should still lead towards QDA = 0.159 on the X-axis,
so a good estimate of Area (A) and Hydrocarbon Volume will be possible.
Once a Dimensionless Type-Curve Plot has been generated, some of the Analysis Toolbar
tools are made available and users should perform the following steps:
756
PanSystem
Oil Wells:
Since this Type-Curve Plot has the data plotted in dimensionless form, it will be
overlaid in the same place as the Type-Curves, hence no Type-Curve movement is
allowed. Simply accept or enter the appropriate Type-Curve Number into the Verify
Selected Nearest Curve dialog, then OK.
Remember that these curves are numbered from bottom to top.

The data should fit in with the trend lines for different values of External Boundary
Radius/Wellbore Radius (re/rw), or more correctly, (re/rwa), where:
These lines all converge to QDA = 1/2 = 0.159. If the data points do not conform
to a trend-line, the Drainage Area (A) should be adjusted (refer to the Force
Parameter (Fpar) tool for details).
From the Curve Match, the Skin (S) term can be extracted from the Wellbore
Radius (rwa) term, since the Drainage Area (A) and consequently, the External
Boundary Radius (re) are already known. The Permeability (k), can now be
calculated from the Productivity Index (J) and Skin (S) terms (i.e. assuming that CA
= 30.88), where:
(STB/day)
In the case of a Fractured Well, each Type-Curve corresponds to a different value
of Size of Drainage Area/Fracture Half-Length (Xe/Xf). The Xe parameter is derived
from the Drainage Area (A = 4Xe2 for a square 2Xe by 2Xe). The Xf parameter is
then computed from the Type-Curve Match value Xe/Xf . By converting Xf to an
equivalent Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr), the Permeability (k) can be obtained from the
Productivity Index (J).
The Skin (S) term is replaced by Pseudo-Radial Skin (Spr) in the above equation.
Fine tuning of the Drainage Area (A), can be performed with the Force Parameter (F
par) tool. The data are transformed in the X-axis direction according to the value
of Pore Volume (PV) corresponding to the current Drainage Area (A). The
measured data should conform to a trend line converging on QDA = 0.159 if the
Drainage Area (A) is correct.
Once the Type-Curve Match process has been completed, use the Confirm (Cnf)
tool to save the selected Model Parameter Results, then select the Test Overview
tool, to return to the Production Decline Analysis Plot.
Gas Wells:
757
calculated from the Gas Semi-Steady-State Productivity Index (J) and Skin (S)
terms (i.e. assuming that CA = 30.88), where:
(MMscf/day/psi2/cP(*1E-6))
Gas Semi-Steady-State Productivity Index (Jg).
758
PanSystem
Agarwal-Gardner Rate-Cumulative Pressure Decline Plot
Functionality:
Before selecting this button, users must select a Test Period (or Periods) for
Analysis. A Closed System Boundary Model must also have been selected.
Period.

plot (i.e. Cartesian type) of either:
Pressure-Normalized Rate (Q/p) versus Normalized Cumulative Production
(Np/p), for an Oil Fluid Type.
Pseudo-Pressure-Normalized Rate (Qg/m(p)) versus Normalized Cumulative
Production (Npa/m(p)), for a Gas Fluid Type.
These terms are fully defined below and in Reference 80.
For a Gas Well, users will be prompted for an initial estimate of the Reservoir or Drainage
Area (A), if this parameter does not already exist in the file. This parameter will
subsequently be refined by the Type-Curve Analysis.
Once a plot has been generated, some of the Analysis Toolbar tools are made available
and users should perform the following steps:
Oil Wells:
Select two points on the Semi-Steady-State portion of the plot, then use the Best
Fit Line tool to perform a line-fit on the Cartesian Plot of Q/p versus Np/p. Any
of the other line-fitting tools from the toolbar may be used.
It may be necessary to change the Axis Scaling or to Zoom-In on the data to

perform this line fit more effectively.
Select the Closed System PSS Flow option on the Define Line dialog and OK.
The Semi-Steady-State portion of the plot should be a straight line with slope:
and Y-axis intercept = Productivity Index (J).
759
The Model Results displayed on the plot are Productivity Index (J), Drainage Area
(A) and OOIP (from the Pore Volume).
The Permeability (k) cannot be derived from this plot, only the Productivity Index
(J).
Once the Line Fitting process has been completed, use the Confirm (Cnf) tool to
save the selected Model Parameter Results, then select the Test Overview tool, to
return to the Production Decline Analysis Plot.
Gas Wells:
Select two points on the Semi-Steady-State portion of the plot, then use the Best
Fit Line tool to perform a line-fit on the Cartesian Plot of Qg/m(p) versus
Npa/m(p), where the Pseudo-Cumulative Production (Npa) term is defined as:
(MMscf)
Select the Closed System PSS Flow option on the Define Line dialog and OK.
The Semi-Steady-State portion of the plot should be a straight line with slope:
and Y-axis intercept = Gas Semi-Steady-State Productivity Index (Jg).

The term Cta is a Pseudo-Total Compressibility, given as:
The Model Results displayed on the plot are Gas Semi-Steady-State Productivity
Index (Jg), Drainage Area (A) and OGIP (from the Pore Volume).
Once the Line Fitting process has been completed, use the Confirm (Cnf) tool to
save the selected Model Parameter Results (the Y-axis values of the data points will
be recalculated to account for the new Area (i.e. Pore Volume), so users may
notice a small shift in the positions of the points after Confirming), then select the
Test Overview tool, to return to the Production Decline Analysis Plot.
760
PanSystem
Functionality:
This tool is only available after users have Confirmed (Cnf) the Drainage Area (A)
and Permeability (k) using one of the other PDA Type-Curve tools.
Before selecting this button, users must also select a Test Period (or Grouped Test
Periods) for Analysis.
Period.

plot (i.e. Log-Log type) of either:
Oil Fluid Type: Dimensionless (Pressure-Normalized) Rate (1/PD) versus
Dimensionless Cumulative Production (QDA), defined as:
where:
Gas Fluid Type: Dimensionless Rate (1/PD) versus Dimensionless Cumulative
Production (QDA), defined as:
where:
If an estimate of Permeability (k) does not yet exist in the Model Parameters, users
will be prompted for a value upon entering the plot (this is required for the Y-axis).
If users enter a bad value at this point, the Y-axis values of the data will be
wrong, and this will lead to a poor estimate of Skin Factor (S), or Fracture Half-
Length (Xf). However, the data should still lead towards QDA = 0.159 on the X-axis,
so a good estimate of Area (A) and Hydrocarbon Volume will be possible.
Once a Dimensionless Type-Curve Plot has been generated, some of the Analysis Toolbar
tools are made available and users should perform the following steps:
761
Oil Wells:

calculated from the Productivity Index (J) and Skin (S) terms (i.e. assuming that CA
= 30.88), where:
(STB/day)
Productivity Index (J).
Gas Wells:
762
PanSystem
calculated from the Gas Semi-Steady-State Productivity Index (J) and Skin (S)
terms (i.e. assuming that CA = 30.88), where:
(MMscf/day/psi2/cP(*1E-6))
Gas Semi-Steady-State Productivity Index (Jg).
763
Exit PDA Mode
Functionality:
If users are currently in PDA Mode with a Production Decline Analysis Plot and the PDA
Toolbar displayed, this button can be used to Exit from PDA Mode directly and return to
the Analysis Mode Test Overview Plot.
764
PanSystem
Deliverability Toolbar
General:
The following tools are available on the Deliverability Toolbar. The button availability on
this Toolbar depends on the Fluid Type (and in the case of Gas/Condensate, on whether
an LIT or C&N Analysis has been performed).

Help.
Deliverability Toolbar Icons and Functionality:
IPR Mode:
For Oil/Water:
IPR: View the Injectivity/Deliverability Results.
Transient Linear: Select the Transient Linear Plot.
Test Data Linear: Select the Test Data Linear Plot.
Transient/Test Data Linear: Select the Transient/Test Data Linear Plot.
For Gas/Condensate (i.e. if an LIT Analysis has been performed):
Transient Linear: Select the Transient Linear Plot.
Transient Log-Log: Select the Transient Log-Log Plot.
LIT Linear: Select the LIT Linear Plot.
LIT Log-Log: Select the LIT Log-Log Plot.
Transient/LIT Linear: Select the Transient/LIT Linear Plot.
Transient/LIT Log-Log: Select the Transient/LIT Log-Log Plot.
765
For Gas/Condensate (i.e. if a C&n Analysis has been performed):
Extended Linear: Select the Extended Linear Plot.
Extended Log-Log: Select the Extended Log-Log Plot.
Stabilised Linear: Select the Stabilized Linear Plot.
Stabilised Log-Log: Select the Stabilized Log-Log Plot.
Extended/Stabilised Linear: Select the Extended/Stabilized Linear Plot.
Extended/Stabilised Log-Log: Select the Extended/Stabilized Log-Log Plot.
Forecasting Mode:
Production Forecasting Plot Toolbar:
Return to the Production Forecasting dialog.
Plot of Gas Flow Rate against Time.
Plot of Gas Flow Rate and Cumulative Gas Production against Time.
Plot of Average Reservoir Pressure and Cumulative Gas Production against Time.
Plot of Average Reservoir Pressure and Bottom Hole Flowing Pressure against Time.
Export and Save Forecast Results as a (*.TPR) file.
766
PanSystem
Deliverability
Zoom In
Functionality:
767
Zoom Normal
Functionality:
768
PanSystem
IPR Results Facility/Dialog
Functionality:
Use this option to return to the Deliverability/Injectivity Results dialog from the
Deliverability/Injectivity plotting screen.
A different dialog will be generated, depending on whether the Fluid Type is Oil/Water or
Gas/Condensate, and in the latter case, on whether the Deliverability analysis was
performed on an LIT or C&n basis.
Screen Dialogs:
The following dialogs can be generated with this facility:
When the Fluid Type is Oil/Water, this button re-generates the Transient Welltest
Deliverability/Injectivity Results dialog. This is where the necessary data are
assembled and the calculations performed for an Oil/Water system. The
Deliverability/Injectivity can be calculated from the results of Transient Well Test
and Extended Drawdown analysis, or from Production/Injection test data. Where
both sets of data are available, users can check for consistency of the Reservoir
Parameters.
When the Fluid Type is Gas/Condensate, this button either re-generates the
Transient Welltest & LIT Results dialog (i.e. for an LIT analysis), or the C&n Results
dialog (i.e. for a C&n analysis). This is where the necessary data are assembled
and the calculations performed for a Gas/Condensate system. The
Deliverability/Injectivity can be calculated from the results of Transient Well Test
and Extended Drawdown analysis, or from Production/Injection test data, using the
LIT or simplified C&n methods.
769
Transient Linear Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability Plot created using the Transient Test Data
method, on Linear axes.
This option is available for Oil/Water and Gas/Condensate Fluid Types (i.e. LIT
analysis only).
770
PanSystem
Test Data Linear Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability Plot created using the Test Point Data
method. The Test Points will also be plotted on Linear axes.
This option is only available for Oil/Water Fluid Types.
771
Transient/Test Data Linear Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display both the Transient Linear Plot and Test Data Linear Plot
simultaneously on a single Deliverability Plot with Linear axes.
This option is only available for Oil/Water Fluid Types.
772
PanSystem
Transient Log-Log Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability (AOF) Plot created using the Transient Well
Test Data method, on Log-Log axes.
This option is only available for Gas/Condensate Fluid Types where an LIT analysis
has been performed.
773
LIT Linear Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability Plot created using the LIT Analysis Data
method, on Linear axes. The Extended Flow Point/s will also be plotted.
has been performed.
774
PanSystem
LIT Log-Log Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability (AOF) Plot created using the LIT Analysis Data
method, on Log-Log axes. The Extended Flowing Point/s will also be plotted.
has been performed.
775
Transient/LIT Linear Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Transient Linear Plot and LIT Linear Plot created with the
LIT Analysis Data method simultaneously, on a single Deliverability Plot with Linear
axes. The Extended Flowing Point/s will also be plotted.
has been performed.
776
PanSystem
Transient/LIT Log-Log Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability (AOF) Plots created using the Transient Log-
Log and LIT Log-Log Analysis Data methods, simultaneously on Log-Log axes. The
Extended Flowing Point/s will also be plotted. A solid red line indicates Layer Pressure
and AOF (LIT).
has been performed.
777
Extended Linear Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability Plot created using the Extended Flow data,
on Linear axes. The measured Extended Flowing Point/s will also be included.
This option is only available for Gas/Condensate Fluid Types where a C&n analysis
has been performed.
778
PanSystem
Extended Log-Log Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability (AOF) Plot created using the Extended Flow
data, on Log-Log axes. The measured Extended Flowing Point/s will also be included.
has been performed.
779
Stabilized Linear Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability Plot created using the Stabilized Flow data, on
Linear axes. The calculated Stabilized Flowing Point will also be included.
has been performed.
780
PanSystem
Stabilized Log-Log Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability (AOF) Plot created using the Stabilized Flow
data, on Log-Log axes. The calculated Stabilized Flowing Point will also be included.
has been performed.
781
Extended/Stabilized Linear Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability Plots created using the Extended Linear and
Stabilized Linear data, simultaneously on Linear axes. The Extended Flowing Pressure/s
(i.e. diamond-shaped icons) and calculated Stabilized Point (i.e. square-shaped icon) will
be plotted.
has been performed.
782
PanSystem
Extended/Stabilized Log-Log Plot
Functionality:
Use this button to display the Deliverability (AOF) Plots created using the Extended Log-
Log and Stabilized Log-Log data simultaneously, on Log-Log axes. The Extended Flowing
Point/s (i.e. diamond-shaped icons) and calculated Stabilized Point (i.e. square-shaped
icon) will be plotted. A solid red line indicates Layer Pressure and Stabilized AOF.
has been performed.
783
Production Forecasting
Functionality:
This button is only enabled when users are operating in Forecasting mode within
Deliverability. Select this button to return to the Production Forecasting dialog from the
Production Forecasting plotting screen.
784
PanSystem
Flow Rate v Time Plot
Functionality:
Deliverability. The plot shows the Production Forecast plotted as Flow Rate versus Time.
785
Flow Rate and Cumulative Production v Time Plot
Functionality:
Deliverability. This plots the Flow Rate and the Cumulative Production versus Time.
786
PanSystem
Average Reservoir Pressure and Cumulative Production v Time Plot
Functionality:
Deliverability. This plots the Average Reservoir Pressure and Cumulative Production
versus Time.
Note that the Reservoir Pressure will only decline if a Closed System Boundary
Model, with no Constant Pressure Boundaries is being used. It will remain
constant for any other Boundary Configuration.
787
Average Reservoir Pressure and BHFP v Time Plot
Functionality:
Deliverability. This plot shows the values for Average Reservoir Pressure and Bottom
Hole Flowing Pressure plotted against Time.
788
PanSystem
Export and Save Forecast Results as TPR
Functionality:
Deliverability. This option allows users to Export and Save Forecast Results as a (*.TPR)
file. The data will be written in Columns as displayed in the table below:
Time Flowing Bottom Production Average Cumulative

Hole Pressure Rate Reservoir Production
Pressure
Users can Import any, or all, of the Production Forecast results into Dataprep for further
plotting or analysis.
Selecting the Export button will generate a standard Windows Save As dialog where users
can assign a filename and path to the Production Forecast results file. The file is saved as
a default (*.TPR) Gauge File (i.e. Time, Pressure and Rate).
789
Screen Regions
PanSystem General Windows Screen Regions Index

General:
The standard Windows screen region commands used within PanSystem are listed below.
Select one of the links for more specific information:
Application/Window Exit Box
Maximize Box
Menu Bar
Minimize Box
Restore Box
Scroll Bars
Title Bar
Window Border
790
PanSystem
PanSystem and Windows Screen Regions
Application/Window Exit Box
Functionality:
This box is situated in the top right corner of most windows and dialogs. It has the same
effect as selecting System Close.
791
Maximize Box
Functionality:
This is the box situated in the top right corner of most windows that are not currently
displayed full-screen. When selected, by clicking it with the mouse, it has the same effect
as selecting System Maximize.
792
PanSystem
Menu Bar
Functionality:
This is where the top level menu options are displayed for the program. For more details
on these options, refer to PanSystem Menus and Windows Commands Index.
793
Minimize Box
Functionality:
This box is situated in the top right of most windows, immediately to the left of the
Maximize Box or Restore Box, depending on the current screen status. When selected,
by clicking it with the mouse, it has the same effect as selecting System Minimize and the
current window will be reduced to a small icon on the status bar.
794
PanSystem
Restore Box
Functionality:
This box is situated in the top right corner of all windows that are displayed full-screen.
When selected, by clicking it with the mouse, it has the same effect as selecting System
Restore.
795
Scroll Bars
Functionality:
The various editors within PanSystem have scroll bars. A vertical scroll bar is made up as
follows:
Line Up icon. Clicking on this icon moves the image up by a small amount.
Page Up icon. Clicking on this space moves the image up by one page.
Position Marker. Clicking/dragging this icon moves the image to the position that it is
released at.
Page Down icon. Clicking here moves the image down by one page - a screenful.
Line Down icon. Clicking here moves the image down by a small amount.
A horizontal scroll bar operates in the same way, just replace Up with Left, and
Down with Right in the above explanation.
796
PanSystem
Title Bar
Functionality:
The Title Bar situated along the top of the main window and all sub-windows, tells users
the name/version of the PanSystem program that they are running (i.e. main window)
and the name of the currently loaded file (i.e. when a file is loaded).
797
Window Border
Functionality:
The Window Border appears on PanSystem programs when they are not maximized.
When the Window Border is active, the window can also be moved around by clicking
and dragging the Title Bar. The window can also be re-sized by clicking and dragging at
the lower right corner of the window (the cursor will change to a double-headed diagonal
arrow - expand or reduce the window in the direction of the arrow).
Also refer to:
Sizing a Window.
798
PanSystem
PanSystem Specific Screen Regions Index

General:
PanSystem Plot Window
PanSystem Toolbar Window
PanSystem Ruler Window
PanSystem Menu Help Window
PanSystem Status Bar Window
799
PanSystem Specific Screen Regions
Plot Window
Functionality:
This main screen provides a graphical display of the data for editing or analyzing.
The example below was generated by opening an existing (*.PAN) file, then selecting the
plot option from the Analysis menu. The data can be viewed on different types of Time
axis to distinguish different Flow Regimes (e.g. Logarithmic Time axis for Radial Flow, or a
Square Root Time axis for Linear Flow).
Users can also choose from a selection of Time Functions to allow for Superposition
effects. The range of the axes can also be modified to adjust the horizontal and vertical
scaling of the plot.
For more information on specific plots, refer to:

Data Edit Plot Overview - (Dataprep Menu, Gauge Data (TPR) option)
PVT Match Plot - (Dataprep Menu, Well and Reservoir (Analytical) option)
PanSystem - PanMesh Overview - (Dataprep Menu, Well and Reservoir (Numerical)
option)
Test Overview Plot - (Analysis Menu)
IPR/Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Overview - (Deliverability Menu)
800
PanSystem
Also refer to Plot Annotation
801
Toolbar Windows
Functionality:
This window contains a number of iconic buttons that provide a range of plotting or
calculation functions for the current mode of operation when they are activated. Different
Toolbars are displayed depending on whether users are currently operating in:
Dataprep
Analysis
PDA
Deliverability
PanMesh
Select any of these links above to access further information on these specific Toolbars
and the functionality associated with them.
802
PanSystem
Ruler Bar
Functionality:
The Ruler Bar is situated between the Toolbar Window and above the Plot Window. It has
a slightly different appearance depending on whether users are in the Dataprep or
Analysis plotting mode:
Dataprep Plots:
In this mode, the Ruler Bar is used to select Rate Changes and Test Periods and to edit
Rate Changes. TheFlow Periods are also displayed. These are briefly described below:
Rate Changes: Where a Flow Rate Change occurs (lower part of Ruler Bar).
Flow Periods: The Periods between Flow Rate Changes (lower part of Ruler Bar).
Test Periods: The Periods to be analyzed. These are the same as the Flow
Periods, unless any contiguous Flow Periods have been grouped into a single Test
Period (upper part of Ruler Bar).
Users can perform the following actions on the Ruler Bar:

Select a Rate Change for editing, by clicking the right mouse button or holding
down the Ctrl key whilst clicking with the left mouse button on the Rate Change
Marker arrow. This generates the Rate Change dialog and users can then edit the
co-ordinates of the Rate Change, or delete it.
Move a Rate Change time by clicking on the marker and dragging it along the Ruler
Bar. If users keep the cursor on the Ruler Bar it will only change the time.
Change the pressure associated with a Rate Change by clicking the marker and
whilst keeping the left button depressed, dragging the cursor down the vertical
dashed line to the desired (Pressure) position. Users can also change the time by
moving sideways.
Select a single Test Period for Data Reduction,Smoothing or Number Count. Click in
the top half of the bar to highlight it.
Select several contiguous Test Periods for Grouping. Hold down the Shift key whilst
dragging the cursor across the Periods to be grouped, in the upper half of the Ruler
Bar. On releasing the mouse button, the selected periods will be grouped into a
single Test Period. To revert back to the individual Test Periods, simply hold down
the Shift key and apply a left mouse-click (left or right) to the upper part of the
Ruler Bar.
Select all the Test Periods for Grouping. Hold down the Ctrl key and right-click in
the upper part of the ruler bar. This will group all of the Test Periods into a single
period. (Note that if the very last period is a buildup, it will be excluded from the
803
grouping.) To revert back to the individual Test Periods, hold down the Ctrl key
and right-click again in the upper part of the Ruler Bar.
Select a Test Period for Test Type Classification. Double-click on the Test Period to
generate a Test Period Classification dialog, which allows the Test Period to be
classified. The default classification is Normal, but users can also select
Interference or Slug Test types.
Analysis Plots:
The Ruler Bar does not have a lower part in this mode.
Test Overview Plot: Test Periods can still be selected for analysis by left-clicking in the
ruler bar. Multiple test periods can be selected by holding down the Ctrl key and left-
clicking. They do not have to be contiguous. Test periods can be grouped into single
periods, and ungrouped, as described in the previous section for the Data Edit plot. Once
Test Periods have been selected, the various diagnostic plots can be accessed.
Diagnostic plots: In Analysis, the Ruler Bar is also used to display Flow Regimes and Time
Markers.
The Flow Regime button from theAnalysis Toolbar is an optional facility which allows users
to identify and Mark the Flow Regimes on a diagnostic plot, based on an inspection of the
data. This would normally be performed using the Log-Log Plot derivatives, but the
facility is available on all of the diagnostic plots. The types of Flow Regimes available will
vary in accordance with the Reservoir Flow and Boundary Models that have been
selected:
Users can perform the following actions on this type of Ruler Bar:
Move a Flow Regime by clicking on either end of the Flow Regime and dragging.
Note that the program will stop users from overlapping Flow Regimes.
Select a Flow Regime by clicking once between the two ends of the Flow Regime
(i.e. colored bar). The Flow Regime will become cross-hatched on the Ruler Bar
once it is selected. If the Fit Line button is used from the Analysis Toolbar and the
selected Flow Regime has a valid line associated with it, a line will be drawn
through all the data bounded by the selected Flow Regime.
804
PanSystem
Edit the Flow Regime by double-clicking between the two ends of the Flow Regime.
An Edit Flow Regime dialog is generated that will allow users to delete the Flow
Regime.
If the Reservoir Model is Vertical Fracture:Finite Conductivity and the Bilinear Flow
Plot is displayed, the Time Mark button from the Analysis Toolbar can be used to
Mark the point at which the data leaves the straight line (i.e. Bilinear Flow) trend.
This Time Marker can be subsequently edited on the Ruler Bar by double-clicking
on the T mark. An Edit Time Mark dialog is generated that will allow users to delete
the Time Marker.
Note that it is not possible to Edit Data or Test Periods on the Test Overview Plot.
Users must return to Dataprep to do this as described above.
805
Menu Help Windows
Functionality:
These windows provide Help text about the PanSystem menu items when they are
selected from the main PanSystem Menu bar. For more details on the various Help
features that are available within PanSystem, including the interactive PanWizard, refer to
the Help Index.
Tooltips (i.e. small information boxes) and drop-down menus are also available for the
various Toolbar buttons and main menu items respectively by placing the cursor over the
item of interest.
806
PanSystem
Status Bar Window
Functionality:
This window is situated at the base of the Plot Window and displays:
The current version of PanSystem being used.

Instructions for accessing the on-line Help (i.e. context sensitive and applicable to
most dialogs).
The currently selected Unit System.
If the View Co-ordinates option is switched on, it will also display the co-ordinates
of the plot relating to the current cursor position.
If a line is being moved, it will display the Slope and Intercept of that line.
807
PanSystem Graphing Index

General:
Graphing Graph
Graphing Title
Graphing Legend
Graphing Results
Graphing X Axis
Graphing Y Axis
Graphing R Axis
Graphing T Axis
808
PanSystem
Graphing Specific Screen Regions
Graphs/Plots
General:
This refers to the part of the Graph/Plot showing the data (also refer to Plot Window).
There are various options available for users to specify how Graphs/Plots appear on the
screen for both screen viewing and printing:
Datasets option from the Edit menu.
Graphs option from the Configure menu.
809
Graphing Title
General:
This part of the graph displays the Title of the graph or plot (i.e. situated at the top of the
graph or plot). Double left-click on the Title text to generate the Edit Title dialog. In this
dialog users can:
Alter the Title text.
Change the Title color.
Switch-off the Title.
810
PanSystem
Graphing Legend
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the Legend. This lists the symbols used for plotting
each Dataset so users can identify them more easily. This is particularly useful in the
Dataprep Data Edit Plot and in many of the Analysis Plots when displaying more than one
Test Period.
Double-click on the Legend to generate the Edit Legend dialog. In this dialog users can:
Edit the color of the Legend box.
Switch-off the Legend box.
Click and drag the Legend box with the mouse cursor to move it to another location.
811
Graphing Results
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the Results of any interpretation. This is only used
on the Analysis Plots. It will also display any line Results relating to the plot. If Quick
Match data is displayed then the Results box will display the Quick Match Results.
On the Type-Curve Plot the Results box will always display the Type-Curve Results plus
any model parameters not already calculated by the Match facility. Double-click on the
Results box to generate the Edit Results dialog. In this dialog users can:
Edit the color of the Results box.
Switch-off the Results box.
Show/hide Match traces.
Delete/keep Quick Match traces.
Click and drag the Results box with the mouse cursor to move it to another location.
812
PanSystem
Graphing X-Axis
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the X-axis of the graph (i.e. bottom axis). Double-
click on this area to edit the axis or use the Edit/Axes menu. An Edit X-Axis dialog is
generated where users can alter:
Minimum and maximum values of the axis scale.
Label text and color.
Time format (Data Edit Plot and Test Overview only).
Optional date display (Data Edit Plot and Test Overview only).
Number of divisions (i.e. spacing between grid lines); not enabled for Log scaling.
Scale setting (locked or unlocked.
Whether the grid, scales, label and ticks are displayed or not.
If the axis is logarithmic, whether the values are displayed in logarithmic or linear
space.
813
Graphing Y-Axis
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the Y-axis of the graph (i.e. left-hand side of
graph/plot). Double-click on this area to edit the axis, or use the Edit/Axes menu. An
Edit Y-Axis dialog is generated where users can alter:
Number of divisions (i.e. spacing between grid lines); not enabled for Log scaling.
Scale setting (locked or unlocked).
If the axis is logarithmic, whether the values are displayed in logarithmic or linear
space.
814
PanSystem
Graphing R-Axis
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the R-axis of the graph (i.e. right-hand side of
graph/plot). Double-click on this area to edit the axis. An Edit R-Axis dialog is generated
where users can alter:
Number of divisions (i.e. spacing between grid lines or tick marks).
Scale setting (locked or unlocked).
Whether the scales, label or ticks are displayed or not.
815
Graphing T-Axis
General:
This part of the graph or plot displays the T-axis of the graph (i.e. top of graph/plot).
Double-click on this area to edit the axis. An Edit T-Axis dialog is generated where users
can alter:
816
PanSystem
Printing, Windows and Graphing Procedures
817
Printing and Windows Procedures
Printing Procedures Index
General:
Printing the Screen
Setting up a Printer
Setting up the Page Layout
818
PanSystem
Printing Procedures
Printing the Screen
Instructions:
To print the currently displayed screen (i.e. graph, plot, etc.):
1. Choose the Print option from the File menu.
2. Select the number of copies required.
3. Choose OK.
4. If line or model results have been selected for printing in Page Setup, a further
Print Report Options dialog is generated where users can choose whether to print to
a Printer or to a File.
See also:
Printing Help
819
Setting-Up a Printer
Instructions:
To set-up a printer:
1. Choose Print Setup option from the File menu.
2. Select a suitable printer to use from the available list or browse for a Network
printer.
3. (Optional - choose Properties and Advanced to set-up advanced printer options in
further sub-dialogs).
4. Select the options required and select OK from any sub-dialogs (if used) and the
main dialog.
See also:
Printing Help
820
PanSystem
Setting-Up The Page Layout
Instructions:
To set up the page layout:
1. Choose Page Setup from the File menu.
2. Select the contents of the print-out. This may include the Plot, Quick Match, Model
Results, Line Results and Header/Footer. The text for the header and footer is
entered by selecting the Configure Report option from the Report menu, then
selecting the Edit Layout button in the Sections area of the Configure Report dialog.
3. Choose the margin sizes.
4. Choose the size for the screen images (i.e. plots/graphs).
5. Choose OK.
See also:
Printing Help
821
Windows Procedures Index
General:
Closing a Window
Maximizing a Window
Minimizing a Window
Moving a Window
Restoring a Window
Sizing a Window
822
PanSystem
Windows Procedures
Closing a Window
Instructions:
Four different methods can be employed to close a PanSystem window:
1. Select the Application/Window Exit Box at the top right of the window.
2. Select Close from the application control menu.
3. Select File Exit from the PanSystem menu bar.
4. Select Alt+F4 on the keyboard.
If any data has been altered within PanSystem, when users try to close the program,
they will be prompted to save the data.
823
Maximizing a Window
Instructions:
To maximize a PanSystem window use one of two methods:
1. Choose Maximize from the application control menu.
2. Click the Maximize Box with the mouse.
824
PanSystem
Minimizing a Window
Instructions:
To minimize a PanSystem window use one of two methods:
1. Choose Minimize from the application control menu.
2. Click the Minimize Box with the mouse.
825
Moving a Window
Instructions:
To move a PanSystem window use one of these methods described below:
Choose Move from the application control menu.
Use the arrow keys to move the window to the desired location.
Select the Enter key when the window is positioned in the required position.
To abort the move, select the Esc key instead of the Enter key.
Click and drag the Window Title Bar with the mouse. To abort the move, press Esc
before you release the mouse button. Note that this method will not work on
windows that are full-screen.
826
PanSystem
Restoring a Window
Instructions:
To restore a PanSystem window use one of these two methods:
1. Choose Restore from the application control menu.
2. Click the Restore Box with the mouse.
827
Sizing a Window
Instructions:
To size a PanSystem window use one of these two methods:
1. Choose Size from the application control menu.
Select an arrow key to select the window side to be sized.
Use the arrow keys to size the window to what is required.
Select Enter when the window is at the size required. To abort the sizing
operation, select the Esc key instead of the Enter key.
2. Click and drag the Window Border with the mouse. To abort the sizing operation,
select the Esc key before releasing the mouse button.
828
PanSystem
Graphing Specific Procedures Index

General:
Adding and Removing the Co-ordinates Display
Adding the Description
Adding and Removing the Legend
Adding and Removing the Title
Altering the Appearance of the Axes
Altering the Appearance of the Dataset/s
Altering the Description of the Graph/s
Altering the Appearance of the Legend
Altering the Appearance of the Title
Plot Annotation
Zooming In and Out
829
Graphing Specific Procedures
Adding and Removing the Co-ordinates
Instructions:
To add the Co-ordinates to a graph or plot:
Select the View Co-ordinates option from the Edit menu; ensure that the option has
a check mark next to it.
To remove the coordinates from a graph or plot:
Select the View Co-ordinates option from the Edit menu; ensure that the option has
no check mark next to it.
830
PanSystem
Instructions:
To add the Description to a graph or plot (for reporting purposes only - the description
will not be applied to the on-screen graph or plot):
1. Select the Description option from the Edit menu.
2. Enter text in the edit field.
3. Select a specific color if required.
4. Select OK.
See also:
Altering the Appearance of the Description
831
Instructions:
To add the Legend to a graph or plot:
1. Select the Legend option from the Edit menu.
2. Check the Show Legend checkbox.
4. Select OK.
To remove the Legend from a graph or plot:
1. Select the Legend option from the Edit menu or, double-click on the Legend itself.
2. Uncheck the Show Legend checkbox.
3. Select OK.
See also:
832
PanSystem
Instructions:
To add the Title to a graph or plot:
1. Select the Title option from the Edit menu.
2. Check the Show Title checkbox.
4. Select OK.
To remove the Title from a graph or plot:
1. Select the Title option from the Edit menu or, double-click on the Title itself.
2. Uncheck the Show Title checkbox.
3. Select OK.
See also:
833
Altering the Appearance of the Axes
Instructions:
To alter the Appearance of the Axes:
1. Select from the X-Axis, Y-Axis, R-Axis or T-Axis sub-menu options from the Axes
option on the Edit menu or double-click on the appropriate axis.
2. Enter values for the axis range in the Min Value and Max Value entry fields.
3. Enter a label for the axis in the Label entry field.
4. Select a color for the axis from the Color drop-down menu.
5. Select a time format for the axis (i.e. where enabled) from the Time Format drop-
down menu.
6. Enter the number of ticks on the axis in the Ticks entry field (i.e. where enabled).
7. Check or uncheck the Show Grid, Show Scales, Round, Lock Scales, Show Label,
Show Ticks Logarithmic and Show Date checkboxes as appropriate for the specific
axis.
8. Select OK.
834
PanSystem
Altering the Appearance of the Dataset
Instructions:
To alter the Appearance of the Dataset:
1. Select the Dataset option from the Edit menu.
2. Select the specific dataset to be altered in the Dataset Style drop-down menu.
3. Select whether the dataset will be displayed as Lines, Points or Hidden (e.g. to
temporarily hide the dataset).
4. If Points are selected, select the Point Style, Symbol Weight and Color.
5. If Lines are selected, select the Line Thickness, Style, Symbol Weight and Color.
6. Select OK.
835
Altering the Appearance of the Description
Instructions:
To alter the Appearance of the Description:
1. Select the Description option from the Edit menu.
2. Select a color for the Description from the Color drop-down list.
3. Select OK.
See also:
836
PanSystem
Instructions:
To alter the Appearance of the Legend:
1. Select Legend from the Edit menu or double-click on the Legend Box.
2. Select a color for the Legend from the Color drop-down list.
3. Select OK.
See also:
837
Instructions:
To alter the Appearance of the Title:
1. Select Title from the Edit menu or double-click on the Title Box.
2. Select a color for the Title from the Color drop-down list.
3. Enter or edit the Title for the graph or plot in the Title text entry field.
4. Select OK.
See also:
838
PanSystem
Plot Annotation
Instructions:
This feature supplements the Mark Points facility from the Edit Menu. However, the
annotation in this case is unique to the plot onto which it is inserted (e.g. plot annotation
applied to the Semi-Log Plot will not appear on the Log-Log Plot - use the Mark Points
option for this).
Press the Ctrl key and right-click the mouse button to activate a text box, then enter text
as required. Press the Esc key to exit the text box and return to the plot; the text will
appear on the plot (i.e. without the box) and can be moved around by left-clicking and
dragging. Other features are summarized below:
Re-enter the box to edit text by double left-clicking on the text.
Delete the box and text by double left-clicking on the text, highlight text, then
press Esc.
Edit font size, color, etc., by right-clicking on the text (text box mode), or double
right-clicking on the text (plot mode), to generate a font editing dialog.
839
Zooming In and Out
Instructions:
To Zoom In on a region of the graph or plot:
1. Select the region to Zoom In on by clicking and dragging a box around the area of
interest with the mouse cursor. On releasing the mouse a rectangular box is
displayed to delineate the selected area.
2. Select the Zoom In button from the toolbar.
To Zoom Out and return to the Normal (i.e. default) size on the graph or plot:
1. Select the Zoom Normal button from the toolbar.
840
PanSystem
Keyboard Procedures Index
General:
Graphing Specific Keys
841
Keyboard Procedures

Instructions:
The following keyboard commands can be used instead of (or in addition to) mouse
operated commands:
The Alt key is used to activate the main PanSystem menu. Each menu item is
assigned an underlined first letter that is used to select that particular menu item.
When the Alt key is initially selected, the File menu item has the focus (i.e. the
menu item is "active"); users can move the focus to other menu items using the
arrow keys (e.g. to select the View Co-ordinates option from the Edit menu, select
the Alt key, then select the E key to activate the Edit menu, then finally select the V
key to activate/de-activate the View Co-ordinates facility).
The Alt+F4 keys are used to close PanSystem in a similar manner to the Exit
command from the File menu or Close command from the System menu. A
Confirm prompt is issued to users asking if they wish to save their current data. On
accepting the prompt, PanSystem will be closed down.
The Alt+Space keys are used to activate the Windows System Menu which can be
used to perform simple windows-related tasks (e.g. minimize, maximize, size, etc.).
The Ctrl+Escape keys are used to switch to another application. A Windows task
bar is generated to allow users to select another program or file to switch to (e.g.
Excel, Word document, etc.). Refer also to Windows system Switch To.
The F1 key can be used in any screen dialog to display the Context-Sensitive Help
for that dialog.
The Shift+F1 keys are used to activate the PanSystem or Graphing Screen Regions
Help. A large question mark is displayed with the cursor; direct the cursor at the
area or item of interest, then click the mouse to access this Help.
842
PanSystem
Graphing Keys
Instructions:
The following keyboard commands can be used instead of (or in addition to) mouse
operated commands for the Toolbars, Ruler Bar and Graphing area:
Toolbars:
On the Dataprep Toolbar, if users select the Ctrl key before they select the Nearest
Point or Exact Point Toolbar buttons, the selected button will remain active until
the button is selected again. This allows users to select a series of rate changes
without having to select the Nearest Point or Exact Point button each time.
On the Analysis Toolbars, if users select the Ctrl key while selecting a number of
plot options from the Toolbar, the buttons will be selected although the system will
not display the plot immediately. However, if users then select the Tile Toolbar
button, all the selected plots will be displayed. To revert to the original screen
view, select the Esc button.
Ruler Bar (Dataprep):
Select the Ctrl key and click on the arrow to edit the values associated with the
Rate Change.
Click and drag the arrow icon along the Ruler Bar to graphically edit the time.
Click and drag the arrow icon along the Ruler Bar to graphically edit the time of
the Rate Change.
Click and drag the arrow icon across the graph area to graphically edit the time
and pressure of the Rate Change.
Select the Shift key and drag across the top half of the Ruler Bar to select one or
more Test Periods together. Upon releasing the mouse button, they will be
grouped into a single test period. To ungroup, either click in the grouped period
and select the Ungroup Flow Periods button, or Shift+left-click.
Double click on the top half of the Ruler Bar to edit the Test Period.
Ruler Bar (Analysis):
Using the Ruler Bar on the Test Overview Plot, consecutive Flow Periods can be
grouped into a single Test Period by holding down the Shift key, then holding down
the left mouse button and dragging the cursor over each successive Test Period
(e.g. for a Flow-After-Flow (FAF) Test). The grouped Flow Periods will then be
treated as a single test in Analysis. The individual markers will be replaced by
start and end markers. To revert back to the individual Test Periods, simply hold
down the Shift key and apply a mouse-click to the Ruler Bar.
Discrete (i.e. non-consecutive) Test Periods can be selected by holding down the
Ctrl key, then left-clicking on the required Test Periods. Multiple Flowing and/or
Shut-In Periods can then be analyzed together as individual tests overlain.
Click and drag the ends of Flow Regimes to move them.
Click in the Flow Regime area to select a Flow Regime. This will allow users to fit a
line through the data bounded by the Flow Regime using the Fit Line toolbar button.
Double click in the Flow Regimes area to edit the Flow Regime.
Double click on the Time Mark (i.e. T icon), to edit the Time Mark.
843
Graph area:
Click on or near a point to select it.
Click and drag to draw a zoom box (refer also to Zooming In and Out).
Select the Ctrl key and click on or near a line to select it.
If users are in Match mode in Type-Curve Matching, click and drag to move the
Type-Curves. Alternatively, use the arrow keys to move the Type-Curves. If users
select the Ctrl key while using the arrow keys this will allow smaller movements for
fine-tuning the fit.
If users are in Shift mode in Dataprep then click and drag to apply the shift. If a
zoom box has been marked then click and drag within the zoom box area.
Click and drag over the Legend Box or Results Box area to move them.
Double-click over the Legend Box or Results Box area to edit them.
Double-click on the X-axis, Y-axis, R-axis, T-axis, or Title areas to edit them.
844
PanSystem

Instructions:
To switch to another application, you can use one of five methods:
1. Select a new application with the Start command in Windows (i.e. situated in the
bottom left-hand corner of the screen).
2. Choose another active application, by clicking on the application icon within the
status bar (i.e. situated along the lower part of the screen).
3. Press Ctrl+Esc on the keyboard to activate the Windows Start menu.
4. Press Alt+Tab on the keyboard to switch to the previous application used.
5. Press Alt+Esc on the keyboard to switch to the previous application used.
Methods 1, 2 and 3 take users through the Windows interface where they can
select the application to switch to directly or indirectly. Methods 4 and 5 take users
directly to the previous application used.
845
PanSystem Glossary
Definition of PanSystem Terms

General Information:
Dataprep: Gauge Data Preparation consists of several steps:
Importing columns of data from raw Gauge Data file/s into PanSystem.
Quality-control of the raw data (e.g. visual inspection, comparison of
Gauges, differencing, etc.).
Selecting the Gauge Data file/s or data column/s to be analyzed.
Editing of Gauge Data (e.g. with shifts, copy and paste, data
reduction/smoothing, etc.).
Exporting of edited columns of Gauge Data to a new Gauge Data file.
Identifying and entering flow Rate Changes within the test.
Averaging long-term Production Rate or Cumulative Data.
Applying Tidal Corrections.
Converting THP to BHP.
The raw Gauge Data files are ASCII files which contain the Time (T), Pressure (P)
and optionally Rate (R) data used in Analysis. The files may contain other data, but
only the T/P/R data are used in Analysis. Users can import other columns of data
for editing, plotting and inclusion in Reports. The Time and Rate Data can be
Imported for incorporation into the Test Rate Schedule.
The Well and Reservoir Description can either be initialized via the Well and
Reservoir Description (Analytical) for Analysis, Simulation, etc. in PanSystem or the
Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) for Numerical Simulation in PanMesh.
Analysis: There are two principal methods of Analysis:
Line Fitting to specialised diagnostic plots.
Curve Matching using Type-Curves supplied with the program or curves
generated on-screen, or by simulation using Quick Match.
From these two methods Flow Regimes can be identified and the various Well and
Reservoir parameters derived. During Analysis, results from any particular plot
can, if desired, be transferred to the Reservoir Description (i.e. Model Parameters)
set using the Confirm toolbar option. In this way, the Reservoir Description can be
built up and continually updated as the Analysis proceeds. Up to six different
Interpretation Models can be stored in a single (*.PAN) file. The latest status of
every plot invoked (i.e. lines fitted, results, Flow Regimes, etc.) is written to the
(*.PAN) file by the File Save or File Save As options. Subsequent recall of the file
will reinstate all plots so that the Analysis can be resumed from where it was left
off. If users have more than one Pressure and/or Flow Rate channel to choose from
(e.g. two Pressure Gauges were run), they can change their selection at any time
by returning to Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation and selecting a different
Column Name in the Master File/Columns section.
Quick Match Simulation: This is an on-screen, Single-Well, Single-Layer
Pressure Response generation to validate the Model and Parameters derived from
Analysis. When users select OK/Confirm, the generated data for Quick Match are
written to Model Parameters.
846
PanSystem
Auto Match Simulation: This is Parameter Optimization by non-linear

regression to obtain the Parameter Set that best Matches the plotted test data (i.e.
Pressure or Derivative).
Advanced Simulation: This is Pressure Response Generation with more
advanced features than are available in Quick Match (e.g. Multiple Wells, Multiple
Layers, etc.). The Advanced simulated data are written to file.
Numerical Simulation: The Well and Reservoir Description is initialized via
the Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) sub-menu option from the
PanSystem Dataprep Menu. The actual Numerical Simulation is performed within
PanMesh; this is accessed via the Numerical sub-menu option from the PanSystem
Simulate Menu. The PanSystem Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) Mode
introduces:
3-D Reservoir Geometry, Internal Boundaries (up to 100 Nodes).
Material and Fluid Properties per Region/Layer (up to 99 Regions per Layer).
No limit to the number of Layers.
Description of Well Completion (Deviation, Azimuth, up to six Open
Intervals), for a single Well.
Deliverability: PanSystem provides the following two methods for calculating
the Deliverability/Injectivity of a Reservoir:
Fitting to measured Test Point Data.
Semi-theoretical derivation using the Semi-Steady-State inflow equation.
Using the fitting to measured Test Point Data method for Oil and Water Fluid Types
involves the program fitting the Vgel IPR relation to up to three measured
flowing/injection Pressures and Rates. For Gas and Condensate Fluid Types, the
Deliverability curve is computed either using the Darcy (B) and Non-Darcy (F) Flow
Coefficients estimated by an LIT Analysis of measured flowing/injection Pressures
and Rates, or using the C-coefficient and n-exponent obtained from a simplified
C&n Analysis of measured data.
For semi-theoretical derivation using results from Transient Well Test Analysis (k,
S) and Extended Drawdown Analysis (A, CA), for Oil and Water Fluid Types, the
Productivity Index (J) is calculated from the semi-steady-state inflow equation, and
the Vgel IPR relation applied. For Gas and Condensate Fluid Types using the LIT
Method, the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B), is calculated from the semi-steady-state
inflow equation and the Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), is derived from a Rate
versus Skin analysis of Transient Well Test Data to allow the Deliverability curve to
be calculated. For the C&n Method the "stabilized deliverability" is estimated from
a theoretical stabilized Flow Rate, derived from the C-coefficient and n-exponent.
Production Forecasting: For Oil, a semi-theoretical approach is used. For
Gas, a theoretical approach is used (e.g. LIT and C&n). This predicts Flow Rate
versus Time for the current Reservoir Model (i.e. Infinite, Semi-Infinite or Closed
System), assuming constant Bottom-Hole Flowing Pressure (BHFP), or constant
Wellhead Pressure (in which case, an Eclipse-compatible VFP File must be Imported
to model the Tubing Performance).
File: The data used by the program is stored in a number of files. Every file must
have a name which will allow the operating system to refer to it. There are
different types of file, each storing different types of information.
PanSystem uses the following types of files (default extensions in brackets):
847
Gauge Data files (*.TPR)

System files (*.PAN or *.PAX for pre-PanSystem V-2.4)
Tide Table files (*.SEA)
Report files (*.RPT)
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure files (*.PSP)
Pressure-Z-Viscosity file (*.PIC)
The file extensions (*.TPR, *.PAN, etc.), are default file extensions used in
PanSystem. Users may assign their own extensions if desired.
Well: Up to five Wells can be defined in PanSystem (Analytical). Select and
define in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog. Each Well can have
up to 20 independent data files stored with it (e.g. 20 separate tests, or 20 sets of
Gauge Data on the same test), and each can be plotted, edited and Analyzed.
A single Well can be defined in PanSystem (Numerical), with a description of the
Well Completion (i.e. Deviation, Azimuth and up to six Open Intervals). This can be
defined via the Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) dialog.
Data Files: The Time, Pressure, Rate (i.e. TPR) and any other Gauge Data held
internally by PanSystem under a file name. Up to 20 files can be held at any time
for each Well. There can be up to 100 Columns (= channels) in each file, and
there may be more than one Pressure and Rate Column. All data files are saved for
all Wells to the PanSystem data file. The Gauge Data can be edited via the Gauge
Data option on the Dataprep menu.
Master Data File: The data file selected for Analysis. The selected Master File
is also used as the Time base for certain data editing functions where other Gauges
are involved (if present).
System Data File: The data file which PanSystem writes to disk (*.PAN),
which contains all input Gauge Data, Fluid and Reservoir Description, etc., plus
Analysis Results. The System File may contain Gauge Data from several different
raw "data files" if more than one was Imported. If several Wells have been
configured, the "data files" for all Wells are saved to the one System File.
Column: The term used for a Channel (sequence, stream) of data in a data file
(e.g. the "time column" is the Gauge clock record for the well test and the
"Pressure Column" is comprised of the associated Pressure readings). They appear
as Columns when listed on-screen.
Master Pressure and Rate Columns: The selected Columns of data in
the Master Data File, with which Analysis will be performed. The selected Master
Pressure also has a special status on the Data Edit Plot in certain data editing
functions involving other Gauges.
Users can select different Master Pressure and Rate Columns if there are several to
choose from in a given Master Data File. PanSystem Analysis requires a Rate value
to accompany each Time-Pressure pair. Generally, the Gauge record will not
include simultaneously recorded Rates (i.e. unless a Flow Meter was run), so there
will not be a Rate Column as such. In this case, PanSystem will create a Rate
Column automatically, by digitizing the manually entered Rate Change data.
Select in the Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR) Preparation dialog.
Users can also create a Rate Column from the Data Edit Plot, but this is not usually
necessary except for special applications.
848
PanSystem
Rate Changes: These are events where the surface Flow Rate changes. This
includes Rate History (i.e. prior to a test, perhaps before the Gauge started
recording), and major Rate variations during a test or sequence of tests. Users
may have up to 2000 lines in the table. Associated with a Rate Change event are:
The Time.
The Flow Rate leading up to the Rate Change.
The Pressure (not always required).
Edit from the Edit Rate Changes dialog, or on the plot. The Rate Changes will be
marked as arrows along the lower half of the Ruler Bar on the Data Edit Plot.
When a particular Test Period is being analyzed, PanSystem computes superposition
for the period up to the start of that Test Period by referring to the Rate Changes
Table. Superposition during the test being analyzed is computed from the rates in
the Master Rate column.
Flow Periods: Are the time intervals between Rate Changes. They are the
spaces between the Rate Change arrows along the lower half of the Ruler Bar.
Test Periods: Are time intervals, spanning one or several Flow Periods, on
which analysis will be performed. The Test Periods are marked as tick marks along
the upper half of the Ruler Bar on the Data Edit Plot. These can be edited on the
plot. Each Flow Period defined in Dataprep automatically becomes a Test Period in
Analysis. Users may group several Flow Periods into a single Test Period (refer to
the Ruler Bar Help topic for more details).
The Test Periods are classified as Normal, Slug or Interference. Select a Test
Period by clicking in the Ruler Bar over the plot. Edit the Test Type by double-
clicking on the Test Period in the Ruler Bar.
Rate Column: Values of Flow Rate sampled at the Gauge clock times.
PanSystem Analysis requires a Rate value to accompany each Time-Pressure pair.
Generally, the Gauge record will not include simultaneously recorded Rates (i.e.
unless a Flow Meter was run), so there will not be a Rate Column as such. In this
case, PanSystem will create a Rate Column automatically, by digitizing the
manually entered Rate Change data. Select in the Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR)
Preparation dialog.
Users can also create a Rate Column from the Data Edit Plot, but this is not usually
necessary except for special applications.
849
EPS Copyright
General Information:
This program is the copyright July 2005 of eProduction Solutions, Inc.
All rights reserved.
This software is licensed for use under Terms and Conditions in a Software License
Agreement between eProduction Solutions and the software user. Use of the
software outside of the terms of this Agreement is illegal.
850
PanSystem
EPS Address
Contact Information:
United Kingdom (Head Office): EPS's product support services are
subject to EPS's prices, terms and
Edinburgh Petroleum Services Ltd., conditions in place at the time the
Research Park, service is used.
Riccarton,
Edinburgh,
Scotland
United Kingdom
EH14 4AP
Tel: (0)131-449-4536
Fax: (0)131-449-5123
China: Malaysia:
Weatherford/EPS Ltd., EPS Malaysia,
Room B1101, 11/F, Hanwei Plaza, c/o Weatherford Solutions Sdn Bhd,
No. 7 Guanghua Road, 12th Floor, West Wing Rohas Perkasa,
Chaoyang District, No. 8, Jalan Perak,
Beijing 100004, 50450 Kuala Lumpur,
CHINA MALAYSIA
Tel: (00)86 10 6561 9009 (ext. 210) Tel: (00)603 2168 6000
Fax: (00)86 10 6561 5868 Fax: (00)603 2162 2000
REGIONAL SUPPORT REGIONAL SUPPORT
asia.support@e-petroleumservices.com asia.support@e-petroleumservices.com
Mexico: Middle East:

EPS Mexico, EPS Middle East
Edinburgh Petroleum Services de Mexico Weatherford Oil Tools Middle East Ltd.
S.A. de C.V., 1st Floor, 4th Interchange,
Jose Mart No. 101 Oficina 309, 3er Piso, Sheikh Zayed Road,
Fraccionamiento Lidia Esther, Plot No: 373 440, Al Barsha, Dubai
Villahermosa, P.O. Box 4627
Tabasco, Dubai
86040, United Arab Emirates
MEXICO
Tel: +9714 312 5000
851
Tel 1: (00)52 993 312 1709 Fax: +9714 340 9142

Tel 2: (00)52 993 312 6258 Mobile: +97150 550 1459
Tel 3: (00)52 993 312 6365
Fax 1: (00)52 993 312 1724 REGIONAL SUPPORT
Fax 2: (00)52 993 312 1727 support@e-petroleumservices.com
REGIONAL SUPPORT
epsa.support@e-petroleumservices.com
USA:
Venezuela:
EPS Americas Inc.,
EPS Venezuela,
15995 North Barkers Landing,
Final Calle la Fila,
Suite 275,
Edificio Dvida,
Houston,
Apto. 4-3,
Texas 77079,
Altoprado,
USA
Caracas,
VENEZUELA
Tel: (00)1 832 201 4200
Fax: (00)1 832 201 4300
Tel: (00)58 212 977 3196
REGIONAL SUPPORT
Fax: (00)58 212 977 3196
REGIONAL SUPPORT
First dial the International Access Code (e.g. 00 in most of Europe and 011 in the
USA), then the country code, +nn, for the country required. When phoning within
the UK to the UK (Head Office) number do not dial the country code, but instead
dial 0131.
852
PanSystem
PanSystem Technical Information
853
PanSystem Dietz Shape Factor Models
Dietz Shape Factors
General:
Each Well within a Reservoir operating under Pseudo-Steady-State conditions will assume
a fixed Drainage Boundary or Area denoted by (A). However, the fundamental Radial
Diffusivity Equation for Semi-Steady-State inflow can only be applied to Wells producing
from the center of a circular Drainage Area.
Dietz Shape Factors (Reference 76), denoted by (CA), were introduced into the inflow
equation to account for:
Drainage Area Shape (i.e. Pseudo-Steady-State inflow performance of Wells with an
irregularly-shaped Drainage Area).
Well Position (i.e. relative Well Positioning within an irregularly-shaped Drainage
Area in regard to Boundary Effects).
Derivation of Dietz Shape Factor (CA):
For a Well operating under Pseudo-Steady-State conditions, the Volume drained by each
Well is directly proportional to the Well's Production Rate (Reference 1). In this case, it is
possible to make a reasonable estimate for the Shape of a Reservoir by:
Estimating the Volume being drained by each Well.
Using this Volume and average Reservoir Thickness around the Well to derive the
Drainage Area (A).
Using structural maps of the Reservoir (if available), to model potential Reservoir
Geometry and obtain an estimate of the Drainage Area Shape.
Consulting the Dietz Shape Factor Chart (Reference 1 and Reference 77) to
determine the Shape Factor (CA), for a given Drainage Area Aspect Ratio, Drainage
Area Shape and Well Position.
For irregular shapes that cannot be matched exactly, interpolation between shapes may
be necessary to derive a value of (CA). Common Shape Factors for a range of Reservoir
Geometries are illustrated below with their respective values for (ln CA) and (CA). The
third column of numbers represents the Dimensionless Time Group (tDA) = kt/c, where
(t) is the time during which the Well has been producing at a reasonably Steady-State of
production. Unless the calculated value of (tDA) for a given geometry exceeds the
corresponding value presented below, the Well is not producing under Semi-Steady-State
conditions and the Dietz Shape Factors cannot be used:
The three numbers that appear after each model are:

1. ln CA
2. CA
3. Stabilized conditions for kt > cA
854
PanSystem
855
PanSystem Derivative Diagnostic Library
Closed Reservoir Compartments
Nomenclature:
p Logarithmic Derivative
t Elapsed Time in a Drawdown
t Elapsed (Shut-In) Time in a Build-Up
t e
Agarwal Equivalent Drawdown Time for a Build-Up
ETR Early Time Region

MTR Middle Time Region
LTR Late Time Region
0s Derivative Plateau
1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
-1/2s Negative Half Slope
-1s Negative Unit Slope
CRD Constant Rate Drawdown
InfCon Infinite Conductivity
FinCon Finite Conductivity
W Channel Width
L Distance to Nearest Boundary
Lw Horizontal Well Length
BUD Build-Up using Desuperposition (Slider Method)
BU-MDH Build-Up without Superposition or Desuperposition
BUF Build-Up functioned with Agarwal Equivalent Time
CPUB Constant Pressure Upper Boundary
CPLB Constant Pressure Lower Boundary
PRF Pseudo-Radial Flow
IWS Ideal Wellbore Storage
NWS Non-Ideal Wellbore Storage
Diagnostic/Model Diagrams:
856
PanSystem
857
Constant Pressure Boundaries
Nomenclature:
t e

1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width
858
PanSystem
859
Dual-Porosity and Dual-Permeability Systems
Nomenclature:
t e

1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width
860
PanSystem
861
Horizontal Wells
Nomenclature:
t e

1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width
862
PanSystem
863
Limited Entry and Radial Composite Systems
Nomenclature:
t e

1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width
864
PanSystem
865
Partially-Communicating Faults and Linear Composite Systems
Nomenclature:
t e

1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width
866
PanSystem
867
Semi-Infinite Sealing Fault System
Nomenclature:
t e

1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width
868
PanSystem
869
870
PanSystem
Vertical Fractured Well
Nomenclature:
t e

1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width
871
872
PanSystem
Wellbore Storage Overlay
Nomenclature:
t e

1/2s Half Slope
1/4s Quarter Slope
1s Unit Slope
W Channel Width
873
874
PanSystem
PanSystem Calculations
875
Oil Analysis
876
PanSystem
Oil Analysis (Radial Flow)
Log-Log Plot (Radial Flow)
General:
All equations are written in Oilfield Units.
Variable Rate equations assume a step-rate approximation.
For Injection/Fall-Off Tests, enter negative values for Flow Rate (qs).
The pressure derivative p' is calculated in the following manner:
Drawdown Test ("Constant Rate", "No History"),
Build-Up Test, ( "No History")
Build-Up Test ("Constant Rate History")
where te is the Agarwal equivalent time

All test types ("Full History")
where te is the Agarwal equivalent time function defined under

'Generalised Superposition Plot' in the section on the semi-log plot.
Log-Log Plot:
Storage Constant (Cs):
where P int is the value of P at 1 hour on the Unit Slope Line.

qs = Flow Rate at surface (or last Rate before Shut-In).
CD, the dimensionless Wellbore Storage Constant, is computed as:
Log-Log Plot Radial Permeability (k), is determined from a Zero-Slope Line by:
where p is the Y-axis position of the line.

For Plots with Rate-Normalized Pressure on the Y-axis, set qs = 1.0.
877
Skin Factor (S), is determined from the Zero-Slope Line using the general form of the
Skin Factor equations defined in the next topic for the Semi-Log Plot - general meaning
before setting the Time, or Time Function, to 1.0 to define an intercept.
For a Constant Rate Drawdown (compare against the Semi-Log Plot Skin Factor
equation):
The Average Delta-Pressure:
in the Radial Flow Regime portion of the data (i.e. defined by the Flow Regime Markers) is
used with the corresponding Average Time:
The term (m), is derived from the Y-axis position:
of the Zero-Slope Line:
Pseudo-radial Skin Factor (Spr): The skin factor S always refers to the true or
mechanical skin (damage skin) at the sandface. Models which develop pseudo-radial flow
at late time (vertically fractured well, partial penetration, horizontal well, etc) will display
a pseudo-radial skin Spr computed in a similar way to S, from the late radial flow data.
Other Calculations from the Log-Log Plot:
Dual-Porosity Model:
Storativity Ratio (), from the positions of the System Radial Flow and Transition to
System Radial Flow Zero-Slope lines. This is derived from a curve-fit relating the
value of () to the depth of the Derivative Trough (i.e. value of the Derivative at
the bottom of the Trough divided by the value of the Derivative in System Radial
Flow).
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient (), from the time t x at the end of the Transition to
System Radial Flow Regime:
For Semi-Steady-State Inter-Porosity Flow:
for all Matrix Geometries, where:
and (k) is the Permeability determined from the System Radial Flow Zero-
Slope Line.
For Transient Inter-Porosity Flow:
878
PanSystem
where:
C=1.67 for Cubic/Spherical Matrix Geometry,
C=2.0 for Cylindrical Geometry,
C=3.0 for Slab Geometry,
C=12.0 for Two Strata.
Vertical fracture models:

Fracture half-length:
where m = 2*(y-axis intercept of the half-slope line)

Fracture conductivity (kfw) (finite conductivity fracture):
where m = 4*(y-axis intercept of the quarter-slope line)

Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity (FCD) (finite conductivity fracture):
Wireline formation tester probe models(active and observation):

Vertical permeability(kz):
where k is the horizontal permeability

m = 2* y-axis intercept of the negative half-slope line if spherical flow, or
1* y-axis intercept of the negative half-slope line if hemi-spherical flow.
Note that a negative half-slope will be observed at an observation probe only
if it is very close to the active probe - say, <1 ft (0.3 m).
Parallel fault boundary model:

Reservoir width:
879
where m = 2*(y-axis intercept of half-slope line)
Closed system boundary model:

Drainage Area (A) (of total Connected Pore Volume):
(Acres)
where m*= y-axis intercept of the unit-slope line
Partial Penetration and Gas Cap/Aquifer models:

Vertical permeability (kz):
where k is the horizontal permeability

m = 2* y-axis intercept of the negative half-slope line (spherical flow).
880
PanSystem
Semi-Log Plot (Radial Flow)
General:
Semi-Log Plot:
Permeability and Skin:
Semi-Log Drawdown Plot ("Constant Rate", "No History")
This is a constant rate Drawdown Plot:
X-axis: log t
Radial Permeability
(k):
Skin Factor (S):
where:
Pint= intercept of line at t = 1 hr.
m = slope of line (i.e. negative for a Producer) per log10 cycle.
MDH (Miller, Dyes and Hutchinson) Plot (Build-Up Test, "Constant Rate", "No
History")
This is a constant rate Build-Up Plot without any Superposition:
X-axis: log t
Radial Permeability (k):
Skin Factor (S):
881
where:
Pint= intercept of line at t = 1 hr.
m = slope of line (i.e. positive for a Producer) per log10 cycle.
Horner Plot (Build-Up Test, "Constant Rate History" plus "Horner")
This is a constant rate Build-Up Plot with Horner Time Function:
X-axis:
Horner Function
Radial
Permeability
(k):
Skin Factor (S):
where:
p* = intercept of line at t = ,
m = slope of line (i.e. negative for a Producer) per log10 cycle.
If the Rate History consists of several flowing/shut-in periods, an Effective tp is
used:
where:
Qsj is the Flow Rate during the jth Flow Period of duration T , and Q
j n is the last
rate before shut-in.
Semi-Log Plot (Build-Up Test, "Constant Rate History" not "Horner")
This is a constant rate Build-Up Plot with the Agarwal Equivalent Time Function:
X-axis:
Log (Equivalent Time, (reference 4)
te)
Radial Permeability
(k):
882
PanSystem
Skin Factor (S):
where:
Pint= intercept of line at t e = 1 hrs.
If the Rate History consists of several flowing/shut-in periods, an Effective tp is
used (i.e. X-axis Superposition Function equation in table below).
Semi-Log Plot (Build-Up Test, "Full History" plus "Horner")
This is for a Build-Up with a Multi-Rate History, using a full Superposition Function:
X-axis:
Superposition Function
where:
tj, qj [j = 1 to N] pertain to the Rate Change
History prior to shut-in (Rate Change Table).
qN = last rate before shut-in (at t = 0)
(Rate Change Table).
Radial Permeability
(k):
Skin Factor (S):
where:
m = slope of line (negative for a Producer) per log cycle,
p* = intercept of line at t = ,
fr(t=0) = Drawdown Superposition Time Function value at: t = 0
Generalised Superposition Plot ("Full History" not "Horner")
883
This is for a Build-Up or Drawdown Test with a Multi-Rate History, using an

Equivalent Time Function based on work by Agarwal (Reference 4).
The Test Period to be analyzed starts at [TJ, p(TJ), q(TJ)].
What is plotted:
Y-axis:
Rate-Normalized
Pressure
X-axis:
Log (Equivalent Time,
te)
where:
Ti(i = 1, 2, .... M) are the Times of the Rate

Changes prior to the Data Point at t. (TM, qM) is
the last Rate Change before the Data Point at t.
These are read from the Rate Change Table up
to the start of the Test at TJ, then from the Rate
Column.
is a constant; the value of logte up to start of

the Test at t = TJ.
Radial Permeability (k):
Skin Factor (S):
where:
m = slope of line (positive for a Producer) per log cycle,
int = intercept of line at t e = 1 hr. (log function = 0).
Reference Back to Initial Pressure:
For a Variable Rate Drawdown Test starting at the beginning of the Rate Change
Table (e.g. a group of Flowing Periods which includes the very first one), or for
any Flowing Period with a Rate History where the Reference Back to Initial Pressure
option has been switched on (i.e. Tf tool), the Equivalent Time Function simplifies
with:
884
PanSystem
TJ = Ti, p(TJ) = pi, q(TJ) = 0), where pi is the Initial Pressure at Ti, the start of the
Rate History (i.e. first entry in the Rate Changes Table).
Other Calculations from the Semi-Log Plot:
Permeability and Skin Factor from a Single Fault Radial Flow Line:
Radial
Permeability
(k):
Skin Factor
(S):
where:
m = the slope of the line,
L = the distance to the boundary.
Calculated Initial Pressure pcalc:
The Calculated Initial Pressure pcalc appearing in the Results Box after a Semi-Log Line-Fit
is the theoretical Initial Pressure at the very start of the Rate History, assuming an
Infinite-Acting Reservoir.
For the Semi-Log Build-Up Plot using the Horner Time Function, it is replaced by an
Extrapolated Pressure p*, which has the same significance.
For the MDH Build-Up Plot ("No History"):
For the Build-Up Plot using (Agarwal) Equivalent Time ("Constant Rate History" with
"Horner" off):
For "Full History" Superposition Plots using Equivalent Time ("Horner" off for a
Build-Up, X-axis Log (Equivalent Time) equation):
Skin Pressure Drop:

For a Constant Rate History:
885
For a Variable Rate:
In this case, the Skin Pressure Drop is displayed as the Pressure Drop per unit of
Flow Rate (e.g. psi/STB/day).
Radius of Investigation:
Classical Equation (based on Distance from the Well at which Pd = 0.1
(reference2)):
Drawdowns:
where:
T is the Duration of the Flowing Period (i.e. for R invin the Results Box), or the
position of the mouse pointer (i.e. for Rinv displayed in the Status Bar beneath the
Plot).
For the Radial Composite model, the outer region permeability (equal to M*k) and
outer region porosity-compressibility product (equal to *(Ct), are used in the
above equations.
Build-Ups:
where:
t is the Duration of the Build-Up Period (i.e. for Rinv in the Results Box), or the
s
position of the mouse pointer (i.e. for Rinv displayed in the Status Bar beneath the
Plot). The actual Duration of the Build-Up Period is used (i.e. even if longer than
the Flowing Period) unless the Maximum Rinv in Build-Ups to be Limited by Tp facility
is switched-on in Configure Gauge Details (refer to Gauge Details), in which case,
Rinv is not allowed to exceed Rinv(ts = Tp).
Equation Incorporating Gauge Resolution and Noise:
To be able to say with confidence on a Semi-Log Plot that an anomaly exists at a
certain distance from the Well, users would need to see a change of slope that is
sufficiently well developed to convince them that it is real. In other words, the
Pressure would have to deviate from the Radial Flow Line by a certain amount
before the test ended. If the Gauge Resolution is pg, users might like to see a
Deviation of at least twice pg to be sure that there really is a new trend starting in
the data. This is a subjective criterion, so EPS provide the option in Configure
886
PanSystem
Gauge Details (refer to Gauge Details), to specify how many multiples of pg users
want to employ (i.e. default n=2).
The Radius of Investigation is estimated by solving the equation:
where:
TD is the Dimensionless Time (i.e. defined in Wellbore Storage Type-Curves) at
which Rinv is to be calculated,
RD is the Dimensionless Radius of Investigation (Rinv/Rw),
p is the Dimensionless Gauge Resolution (i.e. using PD calculation in
gD
Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations), with (pipwf) replaced by pg.

If users specify a value for Gauge Noise as well as Resolution in the Gauge Details
dialog, pg becomes the sum of these two amplitudes).
n is the multiple of pg required to ensure there is a change of trend.
Flow Efficiency:
For a Drawdown, pi is the Initial Pressure and pwf is the last Flowing Pressure.
For a Build-Up, pi is the calculated Initial Pressure, or the extrapolated Initial
Pressure p* and pwf = pws (t = 0), the last Flowing Pressure before shut-in.
Average Reservoir Pressure (Radial Flow Plot, Build-Ups only):
For the calculation of average Reservoir Pressure from p* by the MBH (Matthews,
Brons and Hazebroeck) Method, the Flow Period is assumed to have reached Semi-
Steady-State before shut-in. Use Quick Match for a more generally valid
calculation.
MBH Method:
where:
p* is the extrapolated or calculated Initial Pressure from the Build-Up Plot.
qs is the Flow-Rate at surface before shut-in and:
assuming tpDA > (tDA)sss (i.e. the straight line portion of the MBH curves).
(tDA)sss the Dimensionless Time to Semi-Steady-State Production, can be obtained
from most books on well test analysis (e.g. References 1, 2, 22, etc.).
tpDA the Dimensionless Producing Time, is defined as:
887
where:
CA = Dietz Shape Factor,
A = Drainage Area (acres).
The Multi-Phase Flow Correction, replacing the Oil Mobility term,
by the Total Mobility term,
is applied in the Multi-Phase Oil Fluid Type options.

Distance to a Linear Discontinuity (L):
For Horner and Build-Up Superposition Plots, PanSystem calculates:
where:
with x being the Horner or Superposition Time at the intersection.

It then finds tp / Rp2, the root of pp from the Ei-function, and
For all other plots (Time and Equivalent Time):
where:
the Intersection Time Tint = 10x
(where x is the value of the Logarithmic Time-Axis Function at intersection).
For the Radial Composite Model, the Outer Region Properties are used to compute the
distance.
The Multi-Phase Flow Correction, replacing the Oil Mobility term:
888
PanSystem
by the Total Mobility term:
(as defined by the Perrine Method equation), is applied in the Multi-Phase Oil Fluid Type
options.
Distance to a Radial Discontinuity (Lrad) (References 53, 54):
For the Radial Composite Model, the distance Lrad to the interface between the Inner and
Outer Regions is:
where Tint is the Time (or Equivalent Time) at the intersection of the Radial Flow Lines for
the Inner and Outer Regions.
M is the Outer/Inner Mobility Ratio:
and is the Outer/Inner Storativity Ratio:
Dual-Porosity Calculations:
Storativity Ratio:
From the early and late Radial Flow lines:
where:
Y is the Vertical Separation between the early/late parallel lines (for Superposition
Plots with p/q on the Y-axis, q = 1 in this equation).
s
889
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient:
For Pseudo-Steady-State Matrix Flow:
where:
Tint = middle/late line intersection time.
For Transient Matrix Flow:
The Multi-Phase Flow Correction, replacing the Oil Mobility term:
by the Total Mobility term:
(as defined by the Perrine Method equation), is applied in the Multi-Phase Oil Fluid Type
options.
Matrix Block Permeability/Height2:
For both models:
Where:
(km) = Matrix Permeability
(hb) = Block (i.e. full) Height
() is a Geometrical Coefficient for the Matrix Block Type
The terms h b
2
and AFD2 have the following values:
Block Model h b
2 AFD2
Cubes/Spheres 60 36
Rectangular Prisms/Cylinders 32 16
Slabs 12 4
Two-Layers (Vertical 12 1
Crossflow)
890
PanSystem
Semi-Log Plot (Multi-Phase Flow)
General:
In case of the Multi-Phase Oil Fluid Type options, all specified Flow Rates (i.e.
Gauge Data, Rate Changes) refer to the Oil Phase. Other phase Flow Rates are
Water-Cut and GORs.
Multi-Phase Flow:
Perrine Method (Reference 39):
When the Two-Phase or Three-Phase Flow logic is invoked, by switching-on the
Perrine Method, the Oil Mobility term:
is replaced by the Total Mobility term,
in the equations for S, p*, Rinv, etc. containing the Diffusivity Term.
where:
m = the slope of the line on the Semi-Log Plot and
qosc = Flow Rate of Oil at surface (STB),
qwsc = Flow Rate of Water at surface (= qosc * WOR) (STB),
qgsc = Flow Rate of Free Gas at surface (= qosc [Rsp - Rs]) (scf)
(i.e. that part of the Produced Gas which was Free Gas in the Reservoir).
The effective Permeability to each Phase is computed from the slope m of the
Radial Flow Line using the appropriate Phase Flow Rate and Fluid Properties.
Effective Permeability to Oil:
Effective Permeability to Water:
891
Effective Permeability to Gas:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient:

In the Log-Log Plot Storage equation for Cs from the Log-Log Plot Unit Slope, the
In-Situ Oil Flow Rate term qsBo is replaced by the total In-Situ Flow Rate:
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures (Reference 18):

When the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option is switched-on, Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressure Tables can be generated in PanSystem for rigorous modeling of Multi-
Phase effects and Fluid Property behaviour.
Tables can also be imported as a file from an external source. The *.PSP file
structure is described in Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (*.PSP) File. The Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure is defined by the equation in Definition of Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressure. The imported tables are converted for compatibility with the Analysis
logic existing in PanSystem.
Internally, PanSystem computes the End-Point Permeability to Oil (k=keffo(Swi)) from
the slope m of the Radial Flow Line. The Effective Permeabilities keffo, keffw and keffg at
the current saturation Sw are computed from this using the Relative
Permeabilities:
The Total Mobility:
is computed from the sum of the Phase Mobilities:
and replaces the Oil Mobility term:
in all equations (S, Rinv, etc.), containing the Diffusivity Term.
892
PanSystem
Semi-Log Plot (Pressure Extrapolation)
General:
Pressure Extrapolation Option:
All Recorded Pressures are corrected as follows before Plotting:
If the Extrapolation to Model Rate History option is switched-on in the Pressure
Extrapolation dialog, the correction will also be applied to the response generated
by Quick Match.
If Extrapolation to Model Interference Trend is switched-on, no correction is
applied to the response generated by Quick Match.
Linear Extrapolation:
where:
t is the Elapsed Time since the start of the test (hrs.),
m* is the Pressure Trend (psi/day) to be included (i.e. positive = declining).
Logarithmic Extrapolation:
where:
m** is the Logarithmic Pressure Trend (psi/log cycle) (i.e. positive = declining
pressure trend),
T is the Duration of the Pressure Trend prior to the start of the test (hrs.).
Square-Root Extrapolation:
where:
mrt is the Square Root Pressure Trend (psi/hr1/2) to be included (i.e. positive =
declining trend),
T is the Duration of the Square Root Trend prior to the start of the test (hrs.).
Fourth-Root Extrapolation:
893
where:
m4rt is the Fourth Root Pressure Trend (psi/hr1/4) to be included (i.e. positive =
declining trend),
T is the Duration of the Fourth Root Trend prior to the start of the test (hrs.).
894
PanSystem
Cartesian Plot (Oil Analysis, Radial Flow)
General:
Cartesian Plot:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs):
where:
m' is the slope of the line fitted to the early data (psi/hr).
Dimensionless Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cd):
Computed using the same equation as for the Log-Log Plot.
Closed System Boundary Model:
Drainage Area (A) (of total Connected Pore Volume):
(Acres)
where:
m* is the slope of the line (negative for Producers).
In the Multi-Phase Oil Fluid Type options, qsBo is replaced by the total Downhole
Rate:
(qoscBo + qwscBw + qgscBg)
Radius of Drainage (R):
Dietz Shape Factor (CA):
where:
is the slope of the Semi-Log Plot line,

int* = intercept of the Cartesian Plot line at t = 0.
895
Volume of Oil Reserves:
This Volume is reported at Standard Conditions.

Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model:
Drawdown Analysis option for Flowing Tests, and Build-Up Tests plotted using the
Slider Pressure Extrapolation Correction:
Drainage Area (A) (First Cell): The same as for Closed System Model
described above.
Dietz Shape Factor (CA): The same as for Closed System Model described
above.
First Cell Volume (V1) (total Connected Pore Volume):
Total Volume (Vtot) (total Connected Pore Volume of the Two Cells):
where:
m2* is the slope of the second (i.e. Total System) line.
Inter-Cell Transmissibility (Teff):
where:
tint is the Time (or Equivalent Time) of the intersection of the first cell and
Total System Lines,
V2 is the Volume of the second cell = Vtot V1.
Build-Up Analysis option, for Build-Up Tests plotted without the Slider Pressure
Extrapolation Correction:
Second Cell Volume (V2) (Connected Pore Volume):
where:
V' is computed from the slope of the line m* using the same equations as
those for the Closed System Boundary Model described earlier (i.e. for A and
R). V' is an intermediate term, and does not correspond to any physical
volume.
V1 is a user input unless derived from Drawdown Analysis.
896
PanSystem
Active probe (wireline formation tester):

A zero-slope line fitted to the late steady-state data (if observed) will yield
the horizontal radial permeability k, provided that an estimate of the vertical
permeability kz has already been made:
where:
, and rp is the probe radius.
, and pss is the steady state flowing pressure.
CFE is an internally-computed flow shape factor dependent on anisotropy
and the probe/wellbore radius ratio .
897
Deliverability
General:
The following IPR calculations are in terms of Oil Production Rate.
Calculation of J from Transient Test Data:
Productivity Index J (Semi-Steady-State Radial Flow):
where:
A is the Drainage Area (acres),
Spr is the Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor.
The Radial Flow Equation (illustrated above) requires a Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr) for
those models which do not exhibit radial flow at early time. This is calculated from the
True or Mechanical Skin Factor (S), that has been derived from well test analysis and is
displayed on the IPR input screen. The following conversions are used:
Radial Homogeneous: Spr = S
Dual Porosity: Spr = S
Vertical Fracture:
where:
(infinite conductivity)
(uniform flux)
rweff = function of Xf and FCD, (finite conductivity) (Figure 18, Reference 60).
Dual-Permeability:
where:
Sb is a Flow Convergence Skin due to the Vertical Permeability defined in reference
48.
is defined in Model Parameters - Flow Capacity Ratio.
For this model the "Full Thickness" Permeability is computed as:
898
PanSystem
and this is used in the Radial Flow equation (described earlier), instead of the k of
the Open Layer, since this is what is seen at Late Time.
Partial Penetration:
where:
is the Penetration Ratio,

Sconv is the Convergence or Limited Entry Skin (defined in Reference 61).
Radial Composite:
where:
M is the Outer/Inner Region Mobility Ratio defined in Model Parameters - Mobility
Ratio.
For this model, the Outer Region Permeability is computed as kpr = Mk, where k is
the Inner Region Permeability. The kpr term is used instead of k for the Productivity
Index (i.e. in the Radial Flow equation described earlier).
Horizontal Well Models:
The Radial Flow Deliverability equation can be used for Horizontal Wells if the
appropriate Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor is used:
where:
The first term on the right in the upper equation accounts for the Horizontal
Drainhole of Length Lw (Reference 62, Equation 8, for a single Open Interval).
A is the Anisotropy Coefficient:
The Permeability k is the Horizontal Permeability pertaining to late Pseudo-Radial

Flow.
899
St contains the Mechanical Skin Factor (S) and a term for Convergence towards the
Wellbore from Full Thickness Flow, and Anisotropy (References 62, 72).
The term rw is defined as:
and
The summation is defined in the references. It can be ignored if hD < 5.

Maximum Flow Potential [pres pb]:
where:
pb is the Bubble-Point Pressure (from Fluid Parameters),
qb = J[pres - pb] = Flow Rate at pwf = pb and
pres = current Layer Pressure.
Maximum Flow Potential [pres < pb]:
Calculation of J from Production Test Point Data:

1. Single Test Point [q1, p1] with pres > pb
If p1 pb:
If p1 < pb:
For Maximum Flow Potential (refer to the equation above for pres< pb).
2. Single Test Point [q1, p1] with pres pb
900
PanSystem
For Maximum Flow Potential (refer to the equation above for pres> pb).
3. Two or Three Test Points with pres > pb
PanSystem performs a least-squares fit, taking into account the Vgel Curvature of
the IPR below the Bubble-Point (using the Productivity Equations from Step 1
above), for Points 1, 2 and 3.
Then:
Estimated Shut-In Pressure = intercept of line at qs = 0.

The Maximum Flow Potential is calculated with the equation above for pres> pb, using
the Estimated Shut-In Pressure instead of pres.
4. Two or Three Test Points with pres pb
PanSystem calculates the best-fit value of J, keeping pres fixed, using the Vgel
equation (the Productivity Equation from Step 2 above) for Points 1, 2 and 3.
For Maximum Flow Potential (refer to the equation above for pres< pb).
Calculation of IPR Curve:
Flow Rates are calculated for values of pwf between 14.7 psia and pres, using the Vgel
relationship.
pres is replaced by the Estimated Shut-In Pressure for Case 3 in the previous
section.
1. pres > pb:
If pwf pb:
If pwf < pb:
where:
= Flow Rate at Bubble-Point pb
and qmax is defined in equation above for pres> pb.

2. pres < pb:
901
and qmax is defined in equation above for pres< pb.
902
PanSystem
Production Forecasting
General:
The Flow Rate is determined at each Time-Step tj by an Inflow/Outflow Analysis.
The Inflow Curve is computed at Time tj using the Pd(Td) function appropriate for the
selected Reservoir and Boundary Models.
The Outflow Curve is either the specified constant BHFP, or the BHFP versus Flow Rate
curve read from the VFP Flowing Pressure file. The actual Flow Rate and Flowing
Pressure at Time tj are determined by the intersection of the two curves. This is
repeated for each Time-Step, resulting in a declining Production Profile.
For Closed Systems with No-Flow Boundaries, the Layer Pressure p(tj) computed at each
Time-Step tj from the Cumulative Volume of Oil Np(tj) produced up to that point (i.e. no
Layer Pressure computation is made for Non-Closed Systems, nor for Closed Systems
with constant Pressure Boundaries, since there is no depletion).
To do this, the Material Balance Equation (Reference 1), for a Solution Gas Drive
Reservoir with no Water Influx and no Gas Cap, is solved for p(tj) by iteration:
where:
pt j = pi - p(tj) is the Total Depletion at Time tj,
Np(tj) is the Cumulative Volume of Oil Produced up to Time tj (at standard conditions),
the Initial Volume of Oil in Place (at standard conditions) is given by:
Rsi is the Initial Solution Gas/Oil Ratio,

Rs is the Solution Gas/Oil Ratio at current Layer Pressure,
Rsp is the Cumulative Produced Gas/Oil Ratio (= constant Producing Gas/Oil Ratio in
PanSystem),
Boi is the Initial Oil Volume Factor at Initial Pressure pi and Layer Temperature Ti.
Bo and Bg are the Oil and Gas Volume Factors at current Layer Pressure p(tj).
The Fluid Properties are re-evaluated at this new Average Layer Pressure p(tj) and used
in the inflow calculation for the next Time-Step tj+1. This yields the new Production Rate
at Time tj+1. The new Cumulative Production Np(tj+1) is then estimated, and the new
Average Layer Pressure p(tj+1) is recomputed, and so on...
903
Oil Analysis (Linear Flow)
Fracture Linear Flow
Square-Root Time Plot:

Fracture Half-Length:
where:
m is the slope of line.

qsBo is replaced by the total Downhole Rate.
Fracture Face Skin Factor Sf:
Constant Rate Drawdown:
where:
p = [p
int i - pint (t=0)] and pint (t=0) is the intercept of the Linear Flow line at
t=0.
Equivalent Square Root Time Plots:
where:
pint is the intercept of the line at Equivalent Time = 0. When the Y-axis is plotted as
p rather than p, the square bracket in the equation becomes just pint. In
addition, where the Y-axis is plotted as p/q, the qs term is set to 1.0.
Tandem Square-Root Plot:
904
PanSystem
where:
Sf is calculated from the Equivalent Square Root Time Plots equation (illustrated
above), with pint = p*, the intercept of the line at t = .
Computed Initial Pressure pcalc:
Constant Rate Build-Up, Square Root Time Plot:
where:
m is the slope of the line,
pint is the intercept of the line at t=0.
Finite Conductivity Fracture Model:
The dimensionless intercept is calculated:
intD must be > 0.

This is the same equation as for Sf (i.e. the Equivalent Square Root Time Plots
equation illustrated above), and the same definitions of pint exist for the different
plots.
A look-up table (Reference 24) is then used to find FCD and m1D for this particular
value of intD (m1D is the theoretical slope for the Linear Flow).
Fracture Half-Length is then re-computed from:
and
where:
m is the slope from the Square-Root Plot.
905

Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor Spr is calculated using the Pseudo-Radial Skin equation
for a Vertical Fracture from Deliverability.
906
PanSystem
Reservoir Linear Flow

Reservoir Width:
where:
m is the slope of the line on the Linear Flow Plot.

Flow Convergence Skin Factor Sconv:
where:
S is the True (Mechanical) Skin, and the Total Skin St is calculated from the line
fitted to the Square-Root Plot using either the Constant Rate Drawdown,
Equivalent Square Root Time or Tandem Square Root calculations for Fracture Face
Skin, depending on the Test Type.
In these equations, Sf is replaced by St, and Xf by:
Distance to Nearest Boundary (L) (Reference 42):
where:
Sconv is the Flow Convergence Skin Factor (from previous section).
If the condition:
907
is not met,
is set to zero.
Computed Initial Pressure pcalc:
Constant Rate Build-Up, Square-Root Time Plot:
where:
pint is the intercept at t = 0,
m is the slope of the line.
908
PanSystem
Oil Analysis (Bilinear Flow)
Reservoir Bilinear Flow
Fourth-Root Time Plot:

Fracture Conductivity (kfw):
where:

Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity FCD:
Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor Spr:
where:
rweff is obtained from a curve-fit of:
(Reference 23, Figure 14 or Reference 60, Figure 18)

Xf from Time-to-End-of-Bilinear-Flow (tebf):
For FCD > 3:
For FCD < 1.6:
909
where:
For 1.6 < FCD < 3, the equation
is solved by iteration on Xf as both
and
are functions of Xf.

910
PanSystem
Oil Analysis (Spherical Flow)
Reservoir Spherical Flow
1/Square Root Time Plot:

Partial Penetration Model:
Assuming Spherical Flow (i.e. Perforations at or near the middle of the Layer):
Vertical Permeability (kz), is given by:
where:
m is the slope of the line
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability
Gas-Cap/Aquifer Model:
Assuming Spherical Flow (i.e. Perforations at or near the middle of the Layer. kz is
computed from the above equation.
Observation probe (Wireline Formation Tester)

Assuming that the observation probe is close enough to the active probe to see
spherical flow, a spherical permeability (ksph) can be computed from:
where:
The vertical permeability (kz) is derived from the relationship:
where:
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability.
Active probe (Wireline Formation Tester)
The spherical permeability is computed from:
where:
m is the slope of the spherical flow line.
911
For hemispherical flow, the term 4m in the above equation becomes 2m', where
m is now the slope of the hemispherical flow line.
The vertical permeability (kz) is then derived from the relationship:
where:
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability.
The spherical flow damage skin factor Ssd is calculated from the intercept of the
spherical flow line as:
where:
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability
rp is the Probe radius
pint is the intercept of the spherical flow line
Ssphc and Ssphp are internally computed geometrical skin factors.
912
PanSystem
Oil Analysis (Horizontal Wells)
Semi-Log Plot (Horizontal Wells)
(References 47 and 52)

Semi-Log Plot:
The Average Vertical Radial Permeability (kbar) or (k), is calculated from:
where:
m is the slope of the early Vertical Radial Flow line,
Lw is the Effective Well Length.
For the Hemi-Radial Flow line, the 162.6 coefficient is doubled in the above
equation.
The Skin Factor (S), is calculated using the equation from Permeability and Skin
(refer to Radial Flow - Semi-Log Plot), appropriate to the Test Type, replacing k by
k. A small Anisotropy Correction (elliptical flow distribution around the wellbore) is
applied to this to obtain the True (Mechanical) Skin (S). If a late Pseudo-Radial
Flow Line has been fitted on the plot to obtain the Horizontal Permeability (k), (or
failing that, if a non-zero value for k exists in the Model Parameters), the Vertical
Permeability (kz) is calculated from:
and the Skin Estimate (Se) is corrected for Anisotropy by adding:
(Warren and Root - Reference 27)

where the Anisotropy (A) is given by:
It follows that the True (Mechanical) Skin (S) displayed in the Results Box is not
strictly correct until k and kz have been determined, although the error is small.
The Horizontal Radial Permeability (k), is calculated as:
where:
m is the slope of the late (Pseudo-) Radial Flow line.
If there is areal anisotropy, then assume:
913
The Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr), is calculated from the late (Pseudo-) Radial
Flow line using the equation from Permeability and Skin (refer to Radial Flow -
Semi-Log Plot), appropriate to the Test Type.
914
PanSystem
Log-Log Plot (Horizontal Wells)

Log-Log Plot:
Wellbore Storage Constants CS and CD are calculated from the equations described
in Log-Log Plot - Radial Flow for the Unit Slope line.
Average Vertical Radial Permeability (kbar) or (k), is calculated from the Zero-Slope
line (i.e. early data) by:
where:
p x is the Y-position of the line,
For the Hemi-Radial Flow case, the 0.5 on the right-hand side of the above
equation is replaced by 1.0.
Skin Factor (S), is determined from the Zero Slope line using the Skin Factor
equations defined in the Semi-Log Plot topic (refer to Radial Flow - Semi-Log Plot),
with k replaced by k. In these equations, the intercept term is read from the
delta-pressure at the start of the Vertical Radial Flow Regime as defined by the
Flow Regime Marker. The slope term m, is derived from the Vertical Radial
Permeability (k), using for instance, the Radial Permeability equation from Radial
Flow - Semi-Log Plot. A small Anisotropy Correction (elliptical flow distribution
around the wellbore) is applied to this to obtain the True (Mechanical) Skin (S). If
a late Pseudo-Radial Flow Line has been fitted on the plot to obtain the Horizontal
Permeability (k), (or failing that, if a non-zero value for k exists in the Model
Parameters), the Vertical Permeability (kz) is calculated from:

Horizontal Radial Permeability (k), is calculated from the Zero-Slope line (i.e. late
Pseudo-Radial data) by:
915
where:
px is the Y-position of the line.
For the Radial Flow at Single Fault case, the 0.5 on the right-hand side of the above
equation is replaced by 1.0.
Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr), is determined from the Zero Slope line (i.e. late
Pseudo-Radial data), using the Skin Factor equations defined in the Semi-Log Plot
topic (refer to Radial Flow - Semi-Log Plot). In these equations, the intercept
term is read from the delta-pressure at the start of the late Radial Flow Regime as
defined by the Flow Regime Marker. The slope term is derived from the Radial
Permeability (k), using for instance, the Radial Permeability equation from Radial
Flow - Semi-Log Plot.
916
PanSystem
Square Root Plot

Square Root Plot:
This plot may be used in either of two ways:
1. Estimation of Effective Well Length and Convergence Skin:
This is the default computation, invoked if the command line HLLC_K_L = 0 has
been added to the Configuration sub-folder of the Pansys31.ini folder (refer to The
Registry), or if the command line is absent (default).
The Effective Well Length (Lw), is calculated from:
where:
m is the slope of the line through the Linear Flow portion of the data.
The Convergence Skin (Sconv), is calculated from:
where:
S is the Mechanical Skin,
the Anisotropy Coefficient (A), is given by:
and St is obtained from the intercept of the line:
where:
p = [p - p (t=0)] for a Drawdown with no History, or p
int i int int = [pint(te=0)
p(t=0)] for an Equivalent Time Plot.
For a Build-Up using the tandem Square-Root function:
where:
S't is calculated using the earlier equation for St (above), with p int =
[p*p(t=0)].
2. Estimation of Radial Permeability and Mechanical Skin Factor:
917
If the command HLLC_K_L = 1 has been added to the Configuration sub-folder of

the Pansys31.ini folder (refer to The Registry), the slope m and intercept pint are
used to calculate the Radial Permeability (k) and Mechanical Skin (S), assuming a
knowledge of Lw, kz and zwd. This option is useful when the early Vertical Radial
Flow portion of the data is obscured or is of poor quality.
A Total Skin (St), is calculated from the intercept pint (i.e. the same way as in Option
1, using the first equation for St (above), with pint = [p*p(t=0)]). A Mechanical
Skin (S), is derived from this by:
where:
is a Skin Factor accounting for Flow Convergence and Anisotropy (Reference 62),
and the Anisotropy Coefficient (A), is given by:
918
PanSystem
Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis)
Plot Axes for Data
General:
The Type-Curve Plots are scaled in Real Terms, not Dimensionless Terms:
X-axis:
Constant Rate Drawdown and all Tests with No History option switched-
on:
X-axis = logt
Build-Up Tests with Constant Rate option switched-on:
X-axis = log[p/q]
All Tests with Full History option switched-on:
X-axis = Equivalent Time, as defined in Semi-Log Plot - Superposition
Function.
Y-axis:
Constant Rate Drawdown and all Tests with No History option switched-
on:
Y-axis = logp
All Tests with Full History option switched-on:
Y-axis = log[p/q]
Refer to Slug Test Type-Curves, for the Wellbore Fill-Up or Leak-Off Test,
which has a special Y-axis definition.
For Pressure Extrapolation options, the Pressure Data are modified, as

described in Semi-Log Plot (Pressure Extrapolation Option), before any Y-
axis functioning is performed.
Pressure Derivative:
Y-axis = log p'
The Pressure Derivative (p'), is calculated according to the Time Function as
follows:
No History:
Constant Rate History:
Full History:
919
Equivalent Time is as defined in Semi-Log Plot - Superposition Function.
Corresponding derivatives can be selected for Linear Time, Square-Root

Time and Fourth-Root Time dependence.
920
PanSystem
Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations
Permeability:
For data plotted as p on the Y-axis:
where:
For data plotted as (p/q) on the Y-axis:
921
Wellbore Storage Type-Curves
General:
[TD/CD] on X-axis (References 5 and 34):
where:
and
Storage Coefficient:

Each curve corresponds to a different value of CDe2S:
Varying Wellbore Storage Models:

Fair's Model (Reference 49):
where:
922
PanSystem
C is the Storage Amplitude (Phase Redistribution Parameter) in psi,

is the Storage Time Constant in hours,
qs is the Surface Flow Rate, and
qsf is the Instantaneous Sandface Flow Rate (at standard conditions).
The Storage Coefficient (Capp), observed at early Time (Unit Slope line), is
equivalent to:
Hegeman et al's Model (Reference 50):
Skin Pressure Drop:

For Constant Rate Tests:
For Varying Rate Tests:
where:
T is the Shut-In Time (Build-Up Analysis), or the Duration of the Flowing Period
(Drawdown Analysis).
923
Bounded System Type-Curves
General:
[TD/LD2] on X-axis:
where:
and TD is defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.

k is calculated by one of the two methods described in the topic for Homogeneous
Reservoir Calculations.
Characteristic Length (L), is calculated from the Time Match:
where:
L is the basic dimension that describes the Geometrical Configuration of the
Boundaries (e.g. L:2L for Parallel Faults). It is the Distance to the nearest
Boundary.
924
PanSystem
Slug Test Type-Curves
General:
[TD/CD] on X-axis for Wells open to atmospheric pressure on surface
(References 40):
TD and CD are defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.

Y-axis:
where:
pi is the Layer Pressure, and
po is the Initial Wellbore (Cushion) Pressure.
Permeability (k), is calculated from the Time Match:
Each curve corresponds to a different value of CDe2S.

S is calculated from the matched curve CDe2S parameter, (see the Oil Analysis
(Slug-Test Analysis), Ramey et al Type-Curves topic for details), using CD (as also
described in the Oil Analysis (Slug-Test Analysis), Ramey et al Type-Curves topic).
The Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), must be specified in the Well Model
Parameters as an input. For Fill-Up or Leak-Off with the Well open to the
atmosphere:
where:
d = Pipe ID (inches),
= Wellbore Fluid Density (g/cm ), and
3
= Average Well Deviation (degrees) over the Fill-Up/Leak-Off interval.
925
Fractured Well Type-Curves
General:
[TDxf] on X-axis (References 23, 24 and 25),
where:
Infinite Conductivity and Uniform Flux:

Fracture Half-Length (Xf):

Each curve represents a different value of CDxf:
CD is derived from the Match-Curve value:
and
Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr):
where:
926
PanSystem
for an Infinite Conductivity Fracture, or:
for a Uniform Flux Fracture.

Finite Conductivity - Cinco-Ley [TDxf] Type-Curves:
(Reference 23)
Permeability (k), is calculated by one of the methods described in the topic for
Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations.
Fracture Half-Length (Xf), is calculated as described in the previous section above.
Each Type-Curve corresponds to a different value of FCD:
where:
[FCD] match is the value of the Match Curve.
Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr):
Spr is calculated as described in the previous section above, with rweff from a curve-fit
of the relationship rweff/rw and FCD (presented in Reference 23).
Finite Conductivity - Wong, Harrington and Cinco-Ley Type-Curves:
Please see Reference 44 for a description of the Wellbore Storage and Fracture
Analysis.
927
Dual-Porosity Type-Curves
Pressure Match Method:

[TD/CD] on X-axis (References 28, 29), where TD and CD are defined in the topic for
Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
k, CD, CS and S are calculated as for the Homogeneous Model, using the value of
CDe2S on the late time (Total System) Match Curve (i.e. the Permeability equations
from Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations and the first four equations from the
General section of Wellbore Storage Type-Curves).
Storativity Ratio ():
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient ():

In the transition period Type-Curve set each curve represents a different value
of e2S:
Derivative Match Method:
on X-axis, where TD is defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage Type-

Curves.
Wellbore Storage Coefficient and Fracture System Permeability are determined from
the Match using the standard Wellbore Storage and Skin (TD/CD) Type-Curve set
(i.e. the Permeability equations from Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations and the
first four equations from the General section of Wellbore Storage Type-Curves).
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient ():
is calculated from the Dual-Porosity Derivative Type-Curve,
Time-Axis Match:
where:
928
PanSystem
() is a Geometrical Coefficient for the Matrix Block Type.


Storativity Ratio (), is the value on the Match Curve.
929
Ei Type-Curve
General:
[TD/RD2] on X-axis, where:
TD is defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.

R is the Inter-Well Distance for a Constant Rate Drawdown (qs), at the pulsing
Well.
Permeability (k), is calculated from the Pressure-Axis Match:
where PD is defined in the topic for Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations.

Porosity-Compressibility Product comes from the Time-Axis Match:
where R is the Inter-Well Distance (ft).
930
PanSystem
Dual-Permeability Type-Curves

General:
Only Layer 1 is assumed to be Producing.

Wellbore Storage Coefficient and Layer 1 (Producing) Permeability and Skin are
calculated from the Match using the standard Wellbore Storage and Skin (TD/CD)
Type-Curve set (i.e. the Permeability equations from Homogeneous Reservoir
Calculations and the first four equations from the General section of Wellbore
Storage Type-Curves). This assumes that Layer 1 Properties (h1, etc.) have been
specified in the Layer Parameters.

Derivative Type-Curves:
on X-axis, where TD is defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage Type-

Curves.
Inter-Layer Flow Coefficient:
is calculated from the Dual-Permeability Derivative Type-Curve,
Time-Axis Match:
In the definition of , the term kv/hv, represents the Vertical Conductivity (refer to
Interporosity Flow Coefficient in Model Parameters).
931
Each curve represents a different value of the Flow Capacity Ratio (), where:
The value is read from the late-time (Total System) Match Curve.
The Storativity Ratio (), given by:
must be obtained by iteration using the Simulate Quick Match or Auto Match
options.
932
PanSystem
Radial-Composite Type-Curves

General:
The Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Inner Region Permeability and Skin are calculated
from the Match using the standard Wellbore Storage and Skin (TD/CD) Type-Curve
set (i.e. the Permeability equations from Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations and
the first four equations from the General section of Wellbore Storage Type-Curves).

[TD/RD2] on X-axis where:
and TD is defined in the topic for Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.

Two Type-Curve sets are available:
1. Lower and Higher Mobility in Inner Region (default): RADCOMP.TCD
2. Gas Drive (Gas in Inner Region): GASDRIVE.TCD
Distance to Radial Discontinuity (Lrad):
This is determined from the Radial Composite Derivative Type-Curve [TD/RD2] Time-
Match:
933

Ratio of Outer to Inner Mobilities:
M is read from the late time (Outer Region Radial Flow) Match-Curve. Each curve
corresponds to a different value of M.
Outer/Inner Storativity Ratio:
must be obtained by iteration using the Simulate Quick Match or Auto Match
options.
934
PanSystem
Partial-Penetration and Gas-Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves
General:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Inner Region Permeability (kp) and True Skin (S) are
calculated from the Match using the standard Wellbore Storage and Skin (TD/CD)
Type-Curve set (i.e. the Permeability equations from Homogeneous Reservoir
Calculations and the first four equations from the General section of Wellbore
Storage Type-Curves), with a user-supplied value for the Perforated Interval Height
(hp).

TDZ on the X-axis, where:
where:
h is the full Layer Thickness, and
kz is the Vertical Permeability.
Two sets of Partial Penetration Type-Curves are available:
1. Perforations in Middle (default set): MPARTPEN.TCD
2. Perforations at Top/Bottom: TPARTPEN.TCD
Two sets of Gas-Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves are available:
1. Perforations at Top (Aquifer), or Perforations at Bottom (Gas-Cap) (default
set): TGASCAP.TCG
2. Perforations in Middle: MGASCAP.TCG
These two models are identical as far as Match calculations are concerned.
The Match for late time data uses a set of Derivative Type-Curves with TDZ on the
Time-axis.
Vertical Permeability (kz), is determined from the Time-Match (i.e. TDZ equation from
above).
935
Full-Thickness Radial Permeability (k), is calculated from the Y-axis Match (i.e. with
one of the Permeability equations from Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations), using
the full Layer Thickness (h).
Each Type-Curve corresponds to a different value of the Penetration Ratio:
The Penetration Ratio is obtained from the Match Curve, and the Effective
Perforated Length (hp) is computed from this.
The Inner Region Permeability (kp), is then re-calculated using this new hp value
(i.e. with one of the Permeability equations from Homogeneous Reservoir
Calculations).
936
PanSystem
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Type-Curves
Drawdown Method for Flowing Periods, and Build-Ups using the Slider Pressure
Extrapolation:
Effective Transmissibility (Teff), is calculated from the Y-axis Match:
First Cell Connected Pore Volume (V1), comes from this and the X-axis Match:
Second Cell Connected Pore Volume (V2), is then derived from the Match-Curve
value:
Build-Up Analysis Method for Build-Ups not using the Slider Pressure Extrapolation:
Effective Transmissibility (Teff), is calculated from the X-axis Match:
First Cell Connected Pore Volume (V1), comes from the Y-axis Match:
value:
937
Horizontal Well Type-Curves

General:
The Horizontal Well Stage 1 Type-Curves are defined in terms of a Dimensionless
Pressure (PDL) (and its Derivative), and a Dimensionless Time (TDH), given by:
where:
LW is the Effective Length of the Well,
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability, and
kz is the Vertical Permeability.
This differs slightly from the term TD(L/2) commonly used in published references
(References 47 and 48):
The Dimensionless Well Length (LWD), is defined as:
The Dimensionless Well Position (ZWD), is defined as:
where:
Z is the vertical distance from the Well to the Upper or Lower Boundary in a No-
Flow/No-Flow system, or to the No-Flow Boundary in a No-Flow/Constant Pressure
system.
Vertical Permeability (kz), is calculated from the Time-Match:
Radial Permeability (k), can then be obtained from the Y-axis Match:
938
PanSystem
In the Known Well Length option, the Effective Well Length (Lw), is specified by
the user, so the kr equation can be solved directly. The Well Position (Z), is
computed from the Match-Curve value (ZwD).
In the Unknown Well Length option, ZwD is specified by the user, and the Match-
Curve value of LWD has to be solved simultaneously with the kr equation to
determine kr and Lw:
For the Dual-Porosity Model, the parameters and are determined by iteration
using Simulate Quick Match or Auto Match.
In Stage 2, the Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) and True Skin Factor (S), are
calculated from the Match by using the standard Wellbore Storage and Skin
(TD/CD) Type-Curve set (i.e. the Permeability equations from Homogeneous
Reservoir Calculations and the first four equations from the General section of
Wellbore Storage Type-Curves).
939
Oil Analysis (Slug Test Analysis)
Pressure Integral Method
General:
This is a Slug Test Type with the Use Pressure Integral Method checkbox enabled in the
Test Period Classification dialog.
This uses the method proposed by Peres, Onur and Reynolds.
A Pressure Integral Function at Time (t) is defined as:
Eq. 1
where:
Eq. 2
pi = Initial (Layer) Pressure

pwf = Instantaneous Wellbore Pressure at Time (t)
I(p) has units of psi.hrs
Constant Rate Option:
This corresponds to the Type-Curve Matching part of the Analytical Procedures section of
the technical paper by Peres, Onur and Reynolds. It converts the Test Data to an
Equivalent Constant Surface Rate Test. The Wellbore Storage effects mask the Reservoir
Signal so the functioned data are really only amenable to Type-Curve Analysis.
The Time Function (Tf) dialog settings required for this are:
Use Varying Rate - disabled
dP/dQ versus Elapsed Time - disabled
The Integral Function I(p) can then be plotted versus Elapsed Time on all diagnostic
plots.
A virtual "Flow Rate" is computed internally as:
Eq. 3
where:
Po = Initial Wellbore (Cushion) Pressure
This is an internal computation which overrides any value users may have entered in the
Rate Changes Table.
The standard Analysis equations, described in the other topics for PanSystem Equations
(Oil Analysis), are then used to derive results from Line-Fits (i.e. slope and intercept) and
Type-Curve Matching.
Varying Rate Option:
940
PanSystem
This is the default option for Analysis, and corresponds to the Convolution part of the
Analytical Procedures section of the technical paper by Peres, Onur and Reynolds. It is
the optimum use of the Pressure Integral Method, because it corrects for Wellbore
Storage effects to reveal the Reservoir Signal. The functioned data are therefore
amenable to Line-Fitting on Diagnostic Plots, in addition to Type-Curve Analysis.
The Time Function (Tf) dialog settings are enabled as if for a Drawdown with a Varying
Rate. The default settings are:
Use Varying Rate - enabled
dP/dQ versus Elapsed Time - disabled
A virtual "Flow Rate" function is computed internally as:
Eq. 4
where:
Pwfj = Flowing Pressure at Time tj
qj = corresponding Instantaneous "Flow Rate"
Po = Initial Wellbore (Cushion) Pressure
PanSystem treats the Pressure Integral Function (Eq.1) as if it were the Pressure, and the
Rate Function (Eq.4) as the Flow Rate. The Superposition, etc. logic will process these to
produce the equivalent of the standard Rate-Normalized Pressure versus Equivalent Time
Diagnostic Plots.
The Y-axis will therefore appear as:
"I(dP)/(Pwf Po)" instead of "delta-P/delta-Q".
The units are (psi.hrs)/psi = hrs.

The X-axis is Equivalent Time, formulated from the standard equations, but using the
virtual "Flow Rates" computed with Eq. 4. This applies to Square-Root, Fourth-Root, etc.
Superposition in addition to Logarithmic.
The standard Analysis equations, described in the other topics for PanSystem Equations
(Oil Analysis), are then used to derive results from Line-Fits (i.e. slope and intercept) and
Type-Curve Matching.
Deconvolution Option:
Deconvolution is the third option described in the technical paper by Peres, Onur and
Reynolds.
This simply involves disabling the Superposition Function and using Elapsed Time, while
retaining Rate Normalization on the Y-axis. The Time Function (Tf) dialog settings
required for this are:
Use Varying Rate - disabled
dP/dQ versus Elapsed Time - enabled
The Y-axis will therefore appear as:
"I(dP)/(Pwf Po)"
The X-axis will be Elapsed Time instead of Equivalent Time.
941
Ramey et al Type-Curves
General:
This is a Slug Test Type with the Use Pressure Integral Method checkbox disabled in the
Test Period Classification dialog.
With this setting, the data should only be Analyzed using the Ramey, Agarwal and Martin
Type-Curves for a Radial Homogeneous Reservoir.
The X-axis uses Elapsed Time (log t).
The Y-axis function is:
where:
po = Initial Wellbore (Cushion) Pressure
where:
pwf is the Instantaneous Wellbore Pressure at Time (t).
Permeability (k) is derived from the X-axis (Time) Match:
Skin factor (S) is derived from the Match Curve Identifier (CDe2S):
where:
For a Slug Test, the Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) is given by:
where:
d = Pipe Inside Diameter or ID (inches)
= Wellbore Fluid Density (gm/cm ) 3
= Average Angle of Pipe Deviation (degrees) over the Fill-Up (or Leak-Off) Interval
(i.e. over the Length of Tubing along which the liquid movement occurs).
942
PanSystem
These parameters are all assumed to be constant for the duration of the Slug
Test.
Refer also to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Slug Test Type-Curves.
943
Oil Analysis (PanWizard Equations)
Testing Time Advisor
General:
Several useful calculations are made for Oil Well Tests in the PanWizard for Test Design,
in the Testing Time Advisor section:
Fluid Compression/Expansion:
(bbls/psi)
where:
Vwb is the Wellbore Volume (bbls), and
cwbf is the Average Compressibility of the Fluid in the Wellbore (psi-1).
Moving Liquid Column:
(bbls/psi)
where:
Awb is the Cross-Sectional Area of the Wellbore (ft2),
is the Density of the moving Wellbore Fluid, and
wbf
is the Average Angle of Deviation of the Well over the interval covered by the
Fluid Movement.
Time to End of Wellbore Storage:
This is twice the value in the classical equation (Reference 2), and is more
consistent with the behaviour of the Pressure Derivative. It gives a Time which is
about 60% longer than the 1% Afterflow criterion.
Cs is the Wellbore Storage Coefficient, and
St is the Total Skin (i.e. S + DQ) - (for a Gas or Condensate Well).
The equation tends to underestimate the Time when D > 0.
Time to Detect Closest Boundary:
This is the minimum Test Duration required in order to be able to discern with
some confidence a Change of Slope on the Semi-Log Plot, indicative of a
heterogeneity at a Distance (R) from the Well.
This is simply the Time required to be sure that there is a Change of Slope; it does
not allow time for the new trend to develop fully. In terms of the Log-Log Plot,
the Derivative will just start to leave the Zero-Slope Radial Flow line. In order to
characterize the heterogeneity (e.g. Single Fault, Change of kh, etc), at least
another Log Cycle of Test Time will be required.
944
PanSystem
The same equations as for Radius of Investigation are used (i.e. the equations
from the Radius of Investigation section of the Semi-Log Plot topic), but in this
case, the input is Distance, and the output is Time.
Time to Reach Semi-Steady-State:
This is the Time required to detect the Boundary farthest from the Well in a Closed
system. The same equations are used as for the Time to Detect Closest Boundary
(see above).
945
Gas Analysis
Overview
General:
The Gas Well Test Analysis equations are very similar to those used for Oil, with Pressure
optionally replaced by Pseudo-Pressure (m(p)) or Pressure-Squared (p2) (References 20
and 21), and Time optionally replaced by Pseudo-Time (t') (Reference 41). There is the
following correspondence between Plot Axes terms:
Oil Gas
p p
m (p)*1E-06
or p2* 1E-06
p p
m(p)* 1E-06
or p * 1E-06
2
t t or t'
t t or t'
The Pseudo-Pressure and Pressure-Squared Axes Units are divided by 1E06 for
display purposes (e.g. psi2/cP (*1E-06)). The slopes and intercepts reported on
these plots will also contain this factor, and therefore take the numerical values as
they appear on the plot.
The Pseudo-Time t', is the normalized form of the Pseudo-Time ta(p) defined in
Agarwal's paper (Reference 41):
where the constants gi and Cti are at reservoir conditions (i.e. in the Fluid Parameters
dialog; Check Pressure = Player and Check Temperature = Tlayer). This gives it the units of
hours rather than psi.hrs/cp.
Agarwal defined the un-normalized Pseudo-Time at Pressure Point ta(pn) as:
where:
946
PanSystem
In PanSystem, the integral and summation are performed at plotting time, from a table of
Pressure versus g(p) and Ct(p) prepared in the Fluid Parameters section of Dataprep.
Only equations for the m(p) option will be cited in most instances in this section; m(p) is
defined by the integral (Reference1):
For the p2 approximation, replace the Surface Gas Flow Rate (qsg) by:
and m(p) by p2 in all equations, unless otherwise stated.

For the p approximation, replace the Surface Gas Flow Rate (qsg) by:
and m(p) by p in all equations, unless otherwise stated.

Condensate Fluid Type:
For the analysis of Condensate Well Tests with the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option
switched-off, the Condensate is modeled in the Reservoir as a Single-Phase Wet Gas,
representing a recombination of the Separator Gas and associated Liquid Condensate,
assumed to be above the Dew-Point.
To this end, all input Separator Gas Flow Rates are converted internally to Wet Gas
Rates by multiplying by (1 + CGR x Vvap x 1E-6).
The term qsg in the Gas Analysis equations refers to this Wet Stream Rate for
Condensate Well Tests.
947
Gas Analysis (Radial Flow)
Log-Log Plot (Gas Analysis, Radial Flow)
Log-Log Plot:
Apparent Wellbore Volume (V):
where:
m(p) int is the value of m(p) at 1 hour (psi /cP),
2
qsg is the Gas Flow Rate at Surface (MMscf/day), and

T' is the Reservoir Temperature (R).
Dimensionless Storage Coefficient (CD):
where:
Twb is the Average Wellbore Temperature, and is assumed to be equal to the
Reservoir Temperature T' (R), so the two Temperatures cancel.
Storage Coefficient (Cs):
where:
Cgi is the Isothermal Gas Compressibility at Reservoir Conditions (Fluid Parameters
dialog).
Log-Log Plot Radial Permeability (k):
This is determined from a Zero-Slope line by (for the m(p) option):
where:
m(p) is the Y-axis position of the line,
T' is the Reservoir Temperature (R), and
qsg is the Gas Flow Rate at Surface (MMscf/day).
For plots with rate-normalized Pseudo-Pressure on the Y-axis, set qsg = 1.0 in the
equation.
Skin Factor (S):
This is determined from the Zero-Slope line using the "general" form of the Skin
Factor equations defined in Gas Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot.
948
PanSystem
The term "general" means before setting the Time, or Time Function, to 1.0 to
define an intercept (refer to the Skin Factor equation for the Oil Analysis Log-Log
Plot for an example).
Other Calculations from the Log-Log Plot:
Dual-Porosity Model:
Storativity Ratio (), from the positions of the System Radial Flow and Transition to
System Radial Flow Zero-Slope lines. This is derived from a curve-fit relating the
value of () to the depth of the Derivative Trough (i.e. value of the Derivative at
the bottom of the Trough divided by the value of the Derivative in System Radial
Flow).
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient (), from the time tx at the end of the Transition to
System Radial Flow Regime; this is described in Other Calculations from the Log-
Log Plot for an Oil Fluid Type.
949
Semi-Log Plot (Gas Analysis, Radial Flow)
General:
Permeability and Skin:
Please refer to Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot, for details on the
calculations performed for Semi-Log (Radial Flow) Plots. The following differences
should be noted:
1. Permeability (k), for the m(p) option:
where:
m is the slope of the line (per log10 cycle),
T' is the Reservoir Temperature (R),
qsg is the Gas Flow Rate at Surface (MMscf/day).
2. Permeability (k), for the p2 approximation option:
3. Permeability (k), for the Pressure (p) approximation option:
In each of the above three cases, for Superposition Plots where the Y-axis is
normalized with respect to Flow Rate, qsg is omitted from the equation.
4. Skin Factor (S):
In the equations for S (i.e. refer to Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot
for details), replace the Pressure terms (p) by Pseudo-Pressure (m(p)) or
Pressure-Squared (p2), o by gi and Ct by Cti.
For example, in the case of a generalized Superposition ("Full History"):
where:
int is the intercept of the line of slope m at fr = 0 (Equivalent Time = 1.0
hrs.), and
Other Calculations from the Semi-Log Plot:
950
PanSystem
Permeability and Skin Factor from Single Fault Radial Flow Line:
where:
m' is the slope of the line, and
L is the Distance to the Boundary.
Radius of Investigation (Rinv):
Refer to Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot.
Calculated Initial Pressure pcalc:
For the MDH Build-Up Plot ("No History"):
The corresponding Pressure pcalc is read from the Pseudo-Pressure Table.

For the p2 approximation:
and:
For the Build-Up Plot using (Agarwal) Equivalent Time ("Constant Rate
History", not "Horner"):
For Superposition Plots using Equivalent Time ("Full History", not "Horner"):
(also refer to Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot )
The corresponding Pressure pcalc is then read from the Pseudo-Pressure Table.
Skin Pressure Drop:
First compute:
951
and:
where p0 is the last Flowing Pressure (i.e. for a Drawdown) or Pressure at the
instant of shut-in (i.e. for a Build-Up), so that m(p)corr is the flowing Pseudo-
Pressure corrected for Skin (i.e. the value if Skin were zero).
pcorr, the Zero-Skin Flowing Pressure, is obtained from m(p)corr via the look-up table.
The Skin Pressure Drop is then:
A similar logic is applied in the p2 option, where:
and
pcorr is then:
and
A check is made that m(p)corr or (p2)corr are not negative.

Flow Efficiency FE:
where:
pwf is the flowing pressure at the end of the flowing period, and
m(p) skin is calculated with the equation in the Skin Pressure Drop section.
A similar definition applies to the p2 option - refer to the Note in the General section
of Gas Analysis Overview).
Average Reservoir Pressure PMBH:
For Build-Up Tests, when the Boundary Configuration is Closed System, an Average
Reservoir Pressure is calculated by the MBH (Matthew, Brons and Hazebroek)
952
PanSystem
Method described in Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot, with appropriate
modifications for Gas.
This is only valid if the preceding Drawdown has reached Semi-Steady-State.
For example, the MBH equation for p for a Gas Well becomes:
where:
m(p*) is the extrapolated or calculated Initial Pseudo-Pressure from the Semi-Log
line.
pDMBH is also defined in Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot.
p is then read from the p versus m(p) look-up table.
Multi-Phase Flow:
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures (Reference 18):
In case of the Multi-Phase Gas and Condensate Fluid Type options, all specified
Flow Rates (i.e. Gauge Data, Rate Changes) refer to the Separator Gas Phase.
Other Phase Flow Rates are computed from the Gas Flow Rate using WGR and
CGR.
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Tables can be generated in PanSystem for rigorous
modeling of multi-phase effects and fluid property behaviour.
Tables can also be imported as a file from an external source. The *.PSP file
structure is described in Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (*.PSP) File. The Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure is also defined in Definition of Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure. On
import, the Pseudo-Pressures are converted for compatibility with the m(p)
analysis logic existing in PanSystem.
Internally, PanSystem computes the End-Point Permeability to Gas (k=keffg(Swi)),
from the slope m of the Radial Flow Line. The Effective Permeabilities keffg, keffw and
keffo at the current saturation Sw are computed from this using the Relative
Permeabilities:
keffg = k.krg = keffg(Swi) x krg(Sw), etc.
The Total Mobility:
is computed from the sum of the Phase Mobilities:
and replaces the Gas Mobility term:
in all equations (i.e. Skin Factor, Rinv, etc.) containing the Diffusivity term.
953
Intersection Time Calculations:

Distance to Linear and Radial Discontinuities:
Refer to Oil Analysis Semi-Log Plot, and the definitions in the equations for PD and
L (Time and Equivalent Time).
Dual-Porosity Calculations:
Storativity:
where Y is the Vertical Separation (i.e. m(p)) between early and late Parallel
lines.
Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient:
Refer to Oil Analysis Semi-Log Plot and the related equations.
Matrix Block Permeability/Height2:
Refer to Oil Analysis Semi-Log Plot and the related equations.
Pressure Extrapolation Option:
Pressures are corrected as explained (refer to Oil Analysis (Pressure Extrapolation) Semi-
Log Plot), before converting to m(p) or p2 for the plots.
954
PanSystem
Cartesian Plot (Gas Analysis, Radial Flow)
Closed System Model:

Apparent Wellbore Volume V (bbls):
where:
m is the slope of the line fitted to the early data (psi2/cp/hr),
qsg is the Gas Flow Rate at Surface (MMscf/day),
T' is the Reservoir Temperature (R).
Dimensionless Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cd):
This is computed using the equation from the Log-Log Plot topic.
Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs):
This is also computed using the equation from the Log-Log Plot topic.
Drainage Area (A) - (acres):
where m* is the slope of the line (negative).

Radius of Drainage [rA]:
This is computed using the equation from the Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Cartesian
Plot.
where:
St = S + Dqsg [1E+03],
m(p)int = intercept of the line at t = 0, and
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model:

Drawdown Analysis Option:
For Flowing Tests, and Build-Up Tests plotted using the Slider Pressure
Extrapolation Correction:
Drainage area (A) - (First Cell):
955
Calculated in the same way as for Closed System Model above.

Calculated in the same way as for Closed System Model above.
Volume of Gas Reserves:
Bg is the Gas Volume Factor at initial conditions, and the Volume is

reported at standard conditions.
For the Condensate Fluid Type, Vgas is the Dry Gas Volume, obtained by
dividing the above equation by:
First Cell Volume (V1) (Total Connected Pore Volume (ft3)):
Total Volume (Vtot) (Total Connected Pore Volume of the Two Cells (ft3)):
where m2* is the slope of the second (Total System) line.

Inter-Cell Transmissibility (Teff):
where:
tint is the Time (or Equivalent Time) of the intersection of the First Cell and
Total System lines, and
V2 is the Volume of the Second Cell = Vtot V1.
Build-up Analysis Option:
For Build-Up Tests plotted without the Slider Pressure Extrapolation Correction:
Second Cell Volume (V2) (Connected Pore Volume (ft3)):
where:
V' is computed from the slope of the line m* using the Drainage Area (A)
equation from the Closed System Model section (above), and the First Cell
Volume (V1) equation from the Drawdown Analysis Option in this section. V'
is an intermediate term, and does not correspond to any physical Volume.
V1 is a user input unless derived from Drawdown Analysis.
956
PanSystem
Transient Analysis with Rate-Dependent Skin
Flow-After-Flow Tests:
Radial Flow Plot:
Y-axis:
where:
m(p) and q refer to the nth data point.
n
q = q - q where q is the Flow Rate at the nth data point, and

n n t=0 n
qt=0 is the Flow Rate at the start of the Flow Period.

X-axis:
Superposition Function ("Full History") fr defined in Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-
Log Plot.
For each line, the Permeability is calculated from the slope (Semi-Log Plot m(p)
Permeability option with qsg = 1), and the Total Skin Factor (St), from the Semi-Log
Plot - Skin option.
S versus Q Plot:
X-axis:
Normalized Flow Rate (MMscf/day):
Y-axis:
Normalized Total Skin St = S + DQjnorm
where:
qj is the Surface Flow Rate during Flow Period j,
qj-1 is the Flow Rate during the preceding Flow Period.
For the Flowing Periods of an Isochronal Test (where qj-1= 0), Qjnorm = qj.
For the Shut-In Periods of an Isochronal Test (where qj = 0), Qjnorm = qj-1.
For Flow-After-Flow Production Tests, where q is always positive (as opposed to
Injection Tests), Qnorm simplifies to:
This functioning of q is necessary because of the nature of the Superposition

Function used, and the fact that the Y-axis of the Semi-Log Plot is normalized with
respect to q, not q.
957
The alternative presentation provided when the Reference Back to Pi option is

switched-on under the Tf icon, plots True Total Skin St = S + DQj versus True
Flow Rate Qj in all cases.
Both methods are theoretically rigorous and should give the same answers for S
and D (i.e. provided the correct Initial Pressure (Pi) is used in the second
method).
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D):
D = m(1E+03) in (Mscf/day)-1
where m is the slope of the line.
Darcy Skin Factor (S):
S = intercept of line at Q or Qnorm = 0.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F):
in psi2/cp/(Mscf/day)2.
where:
T' is in R
Radial Flow Plot corrected for Rate-Dependence:
The Y-axis is now:
or, for the p2 analysis option:
or, for the Pressure (p) analysis option:
If a new line is fitted, k and S are calculated as for the first Radial Flow Plot.
The F and D Coefficients are retained from the second plot. If users
change F, the D term is re-computed from:
in (Mscf/day)-1.
Other Calculations:
Please refer to the sections following Other Calculations for Semi-Log Plots for
calculation of Skin Pressure Drop, etc.
Isochronal Tests:
The Drawdowns and Build-Ups are analyzed in the same way, using the same theory as
for the Flow-After-Flow Test described in the previous section.
958
PanSystem
Other Calculations:
Please refer to the sections following Other Calculations for Semi-Log Plots for
calculation of Skin Pressure Drop, etc.
959
Deliverability (Gas Analysis, Radial Flow)
General:
If users do not select the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method (refer to Well and
Reservoir Description (Analytical)/Fluid Type/Multi-Phase Options), Condensate Well Tests
are analyzed assuming a Single-Phase Wet Stream in the Reservoir. Therefore, for
Condensate Fluid Type, all Flow Rates in the following equations are "Wet Stream" Rates,
related to Separator Gas by:
qsg(wet) = qsg(sep)(1 + CGR x Vvap x (1E-6)) in MMcsf/day
PanSystem uses "Wet Stream" Rates internally. All computed Flow Rates (AOF,
Stabilized Rates, IPR) are declared as Separator Gas Rates; no such corrections
are necessary for Dry Gas Fluid Type.
C-and-n Plot:
Y-axis:
X-axis:
where:
psi is the Shut-In Pressure prior to each Flowing Period (Isochronal Test), or the
Initial Shut-In Pressure (Flow-After-Flow Test). For the final Extended Flow Period,
psi is the Layer Pressure. It is usually taken as p* from the final Build-Up, or some
other estimate of Reservoir Pressure.
n-exponent:
C-coefficient:
where:
int = value of p2
at qs= 1.0 MMscf/day.
Absolute Open Flow Potential:
where:
pres is the Layer Pressure.
C-and-n Deliverability Calculations:
The Extended Data C-coefficient, n-exponent and AOF are carried through from the
C-and-n Plot (Extended Flow Point) described in the preceding section.
960
PanSystem
The Stabilized Flow Rate is the theoretical Rate which would be attained if the Well
were to be flowed to stabilization (i.e. Semi-Steady-State) at the Stabilized Flowing
Pressure pwf(stab) (taken to be the last Flowing Pressure of the Extended Period):
where:
and A is the Drainage Area (acres).

Stabilized C-coefficient:
where:
n is the Extended Exponent.
Stabilised AOF:
This is obtained from the AOF equation in the previous section, using Cstab.
Total Skin Factor (St):
This is the current value from a previous Test Analysis (i.e. normally the Build-Up
following the Extended Flowing Period).
Skin Pressure Loss:
Firstly, compute:
where:
This corresponds to the slope (per log10 cycle) of the Build-Up Semi-Log Plot
following the Extended Flowing Period. Permeability (k), is carried through from
the Deliverability dialog.
The theoretical Flowing Pressure at zero Skin is then calculated:
where:
pwf(ext) is the Extended Flowing Pressure.
Then:
961
and:
Flow Efficiency:
where:
p2(S=0) is defined above, in the previous section.
Damage Ratio:
where:
t ext is the duration of the Extended Flowing Period.
Time to Stabilization:
The default value for A is 640 acres (259 ha), the area of 1 section.
Stabilized Flow Rate:
This is carried through from the Deliverability dialog (i.e. n-exponent from
previous section).
Deliverability Plots:
Flow Rates are calculated for values of Flowing Pressure between 14.7 psia and
Layer Pressure (pres):
using the current stabilized n-exponent, and the selected extended or

stabilised C-coefficient.
LIT Plot:
Y-axis:
, or
depending on the selected analysis method.
962
PanSystem
X-axis:
where:
qsg is the Gas Flow Rate for each Flowing Period,
m(p) = m(p ) - m(p si ),
wf
p = p - p ,
2 2
si
2
wf
p = p - p and
si wf
psi is the Shut-In Pressure prior to each Flowing Period (Isochronal Test), or the
Initial Shut-In Pressure (Flow-After-Flow Test). For the final Extended Flow Period,
psi is the Layer Pressure. It is usually taken as p* from the final Build-Up, or some
other estimate of Reservoir Pressure.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F):
For the p2 option, the slope is divided byz gi i
For the p option, the slope is divided by z /2p

gi i i
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B):
(in psi2/cp/Mscf/day)
For the p2 option, the intercept is first multiplied by 1/gizi in the above equation
For the p option, the intercept in the above equation is first multiplied by
(2E06)pi/gizi
Absolute Open Flow Potential:
The AOF is calculated as the root qsg of the Deliverability equation:
at pwf = 14.7 psia, multiplied by (1E03) for MMscf/day.

In p2 form:
In p form:
LIT Deliverability Calculations:

From Transient Test Results (Radial Flow Plot, etc.):
Darcy Flow Coefficient (B):
The Semi-Steady-State Radial Inflow equation is used:
963
(in psi2/cp/Mscf/day)
where:
A is the Drainage Area (acres),
k, Spr, A and CA are read from the Deliverability dialog.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F), Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D):
The D and F coefficients are related by the equation presented in Transient Analysis
with Rate-Dependent Skin.
AOF:
The AOF is calculated from the AOF equation described in the previous section at
pwf = 14.7 psia.
The Darcy Flow Coefficient (B) equation (presented above) requires a Pseudo-Radial
Skin Factor (Spr) for those models which do not exhibit Radial Flow at early time.
This is calculated from the True or Mechanical Skin Factor (S), that has been
derived from welltest analysis, and is displayed on the IPR dialog.
The conversions between S and Spr are listed after the Productivity Index (J)
equation in the Oil Deliverability section. For the Radial Homogeneous Model, Spr =
S.
Similar conversions are necessary for the Non-Darcy Skin Coefficients. Pseudo-
Radial Dpr is calculated from the True D derived from the welltest analysis as
follows. Dpr (and Fpr) are displayed on the IPR dialog. For the Radial Homogeneous
Model, Dpr = D.
For models where the late time Radial Flow corresponds to a Permeability or
Permeability Thickness which is different from the Layer Parameter k (i.e. Radial-
Composite, Dual-Permeability), a Pseudo-Radial kpr is also computed. For the
Radial-Homogeneous Model, kpr = k.
The following conversions are used for the Non-Darcy Skin Coefficients:
Radial-Homogeneous: Dpr = D
Dual-Porosity: Dpr = D
Vertical Fracture: Dpr = D
Dual-Permeability:
where the Flow Capacity Ratio () is defined in Model Parameters - Flow

Capacity Ratio.
For this model, the Full Thickness Permeability is computed as:
and this is used instead of k in the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B) equation
(presented above).
Partial-Penetration:
964
PanSystem
where:
Radial-Composite:
where M is the Outer/Inner Region Mobility Ratio defined in Model Parameters

- Mobility Ratio.
For this model, the Outer Region Permeability is computed as kpr = Mk, where
k is the Inner Region Permeability; kpr is used instead of k for the Productivity
Index in the Darcy Flow Coefficient (B) equation (presented above).
Horizontal Well Models:
where the Anisotropy Coefficient (A), is given by:
From Test Data (LIT Plot):

D is calculated from the value of F carried through from the LIT Plot, using the equation
presented in Transient Analysis with Rate-Dependent Skin (i.e. provided a value has been
entered for k in the Transient Welltest Data area).
AOF is calculated from AOF equation described in the previous section at pwf = 14.7 psia.
Deliverability Plots:
Flow Rates are calculated for values of pwf between 14.7 psia and the Layer Pressure (as
specified at the top of the Deliverability dialog). This is done by solving for the root qj of
the Deliverability AOF equation described in the previous section, for each Flowing
Pressure pj.
These are then plotted as pwf versus qsg on linear scales, or as:
965
Production Forecasting (Gas Analysis, Radial Flow)
Gas and Condensate Systems:

The Flow Rate is determined at each time-step tj by an inflow/outflow analysis. The
Inflow Curve is computed at time tj using the Pd(Td) function appropriate for the selected
Reservoir and Boundary Models. The Outflow Curve is either the specified constant
BHFP, or the BHFP versus Flow Rate Curve read from the VFP Flowing Pressure file. The
actual Flow Rate and Flowing Pressure at time tj are determined by the intersection of
the two curves. This is repeated for each time-step, resulting in a declining Production
Profile.
For Closed Systems with No-Flow Boundaries, the Layer Pressure p(tj), is re-computed
at each time-step tj from the Cumulative Volume of Produced Fluid Gp(tj) up to that point
(no Layer Pressure computation is made for Non-Closed Systems, nor for Closed
Systems with Constant Pressure Boundaries, since there is no depletion).
To do this, the material balance equation (assuming no Water Influx) is solved for p(tj)
by iteration.
where:
is the Total Depletion at time tj,

Gp(tj) is the Cumulative Volume of Gas Produced up to the time tj (at standard
conditions),
is the Initial Volume of Gas in Place (at standard conditions),

zi is the Initial z-factor, and
is the Initial Gas Volume Factor, both at Initial Pressure pi and Layer Temperature Ti.
Gas Properties are re-evaluated at this new Average Layer Pressure p(tj) and used in the
inflow calculation for the next time-step. This yields the Production Rate at time tj+1. The
new Cumulative Production Gp(tj+1) is then estimated, and the Average Layer Pressure
p(tj+1) recomputed, and so on...
For Condensate Systems, all calculations are performed with the "Wet Stream"
Flow Rates referred to in the opening paragraph of Gas Analysis (Radial Flow)
Deliverability. However, the displayed Production Rates and Cumulative
Production figures are for the Separator Gas.
966
PanSystem
Gas Analysis (Linear Flow)
Fracture Linear Flow

Fracture Half-Length:
with the usual modifications for p2 and p options.

m is the slope of the line on the Square-Root Plot.
For Superposition Plots with a Rate Normalized Y-axis, set qsg to 1.0 in the above
equation.
Fracture Face Skin Factor:
For all Square-Root Plots except the Tandem Square Root Plot:
where:
(int) = intercept m(p)int(t=0) of the line on the Square-Root Plot at zero value of
the Time Function.
For plots with m(p) on the Y-axis instead of m(p):
(int) = [m(p)int(t=0) m(p)t=0]
For Superposition Plots with a Rate-Normalized Y-axis, set qsg to 1.0 in the above
equation.
For the Tandem Square Root Build-Up Plot, refer to the relevant equation in Oil
Analysis (Linear Flow) Fracture Linear Flow.
Finite Conductivity Model (for Sf > 0):
For the Finite Conductivity Fracture Model, the line fitted to the Square-Root Plot is
treated in the way described in Oil Analysis (Linear Flow) Fracture Linear Flow.
The Dimensionless Intercept (intD) is defined by the same equations as for Sf also
described in Oil Analysis (Linear Flow) Fracture Linear Flow.
FCD, Xf and kfw are then calculated in the same way as for Oil as described in Oil
Analysis (Linear Flow) Fracture Linear Flow.
967
Reservoir Linear Flow
Square-root Time Plot

Reservoir Width:
with the usual modifications for p2 and p options.

m is the slope of the line on the Square-Root Plot.
For Superposition Plots with a Rate Normalized Y-axis, set qsg to 1.0 in the above
equation.
Flow Convergence Skin, Distance to Nearest Boundary, and computed Initial
Pressure are calculated as in Oil Analysis (Linear Flow) Reservoir Linear Flow.
968
PanSystem
Gas Analysis (Bilinear Flow)
Reservoir Bilinear Flow
Fourth-Root Time Plot:

where:
m is the slope of the line on the Fourth-Root Plot.
Calculations for FCD, S, and Xf from tebf are described in Oil Analysis (Bilinear Flow)
Reservoir Bilinear Flow.
969
Gas Analysis (Spherical Flow)
Reservoir Spherical Flow
1/Square-Root Time Plot:

Partial Penetration Model:
Assuming Spherical Flow (i.e. Perforations in the middle of the Layer):
Vertical Permeability (kz):
where:
k is the Horizontal Radial Permeability, and
Gas-Cap/Aquifer Model:
Assuming Hemi-Spherical Flow (i.e. Perforations at the top or bottom of the
Layer), and replace the 24.7 by (24.7 x 4) in the above equation.
970
PanSystem
Gas Analysis (Horizontal Wells)
Semi-Log Plot (Gas Analysis, Horizontal Wells)

General:
For the p2 option, replace qsg by qsggizi.
For the p option, replace qsg by qsggizi / 2pi.
Semi-Log Plot:
The Average Vertical Radial Permeability (kbar) or (k), is calculated from:
where:
m is the slope of the early Radial Flow line, and
For the Hemi-Radial Flow case, the 1637 coefficient is doubled in the above
equation.
The Skin Factor (S), is calculated using the appropriate equation from Oil Analysis
(Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot, according to the Test Type, replacing k by k. A small
Anisotropy Correction (elliptical flow distribution around the wellbore) is applied to
this to obtain the True (Mechanical) Skin (S). If a late Pseudo-Radial Flow Line has
been fitted on the plot to obtain the Horizontal Permeability (k), (or failing that, if a
non-zero value for k exists in the Model Parameters), the Vertical Permeability (kz)
is calculated from:

The Horizontal Radial Permeability (k), is calculated as:
where:
971
m is the slope of the late (Pseudo-) Radial Flow line,

h is the Layer Thickness, and
qsg is in MMscf/day.
If there is Areal Anisotropy, then:
The Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr), is calculated from the late Pseudo-Radial Flow
line using the appropriate equation from Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot,
according to the Test Type.
972
PanSystem
Log-Log Plot (Gas Analysis, Horizontal Wells)

General:
Log-Log Plot:
Apparent Wellbore Volume (V) and Wellbore Storage Constants (CS) and (CD) are
calculated by the first three equations from Gas Analysis (Radial Flow) Log-Log Plot
for the Unit Slope line.
The Average Vertical Radial Permeability kbar or (k), is calculated from the Zero-
Slope line (early data) by:
where:
p x is the Y-position of the line, and
For the Hemi-Radial Flow case, the 0.5 is replaced by 1.0 in the above
equation.
Skin Factor (S), is determined from the Zero Slope line using the Skin Factor
equations defined in Gas Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot, with k replaced by k.
In these equations, the "intercept" term is read from the Delta-Pressure at the
start of the Vertical Radial Flow Regime as defined by the Flow Regime Marker.
The "slope" term m, is derived from the Vertical Radial Permeability, using for
example, the Permeability for m(p) equation in Gas Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log
Plot. A small Anisotropy Correction (elliptical flow distribution around the wellbore)
is applied to this to obtain the True (Mechanical) Skin (S). If a late Pseudo-Radial
Flow Line has been fitted on the plot to obtain the Horizontal Permeability (k), (or
failing that, if a non-zero value for k exists in the Model Parameters), the Vertical
Permeability (kz) is calculated from:

973
Horizontal Radial Permeability (k), is calculated from the Zero-Slope line (late
Pseudo-Radial data) by:
where:
px is the Y-position of the line.
For the Radial Flow at Single Fault case, the 0.5 on the right is replaced by 1.0 in
the above equation.
The Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr), is determined from the Zero-Slope line (late
Pseudo-Radial data) using the Skin Factor equations defined in Gas Analysis (Radial
Flow) Semi-Log Plot. In these equations, the "intercept" term is read from the
Delta-Pressure at the start of the late Radial Flow Regime as defined by the Flow
Regime Marker. The "slope" term is derived from the Radial Permeability (k), using
for example, the Permeability for m(p) equation in Gas Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-
Log Plot.
974
PanSystem
Square-Root Plot (Gas Analysis, Horizontal Wells)

General:
Square-Root Plot:
This plot may be used in either of two ways:
1. Estimation of Effective Well Length and Convergence Skin:
This is the default computation, invoked if the command line HLLC_K_L = 0 has
been added to the Configuration sub-folder of the Pansys31.ini folder (refer to
Windows Registry), or if the command line is absent (default).
The Effective Well Length (Lw), is given by:
where:
m is the slope of the line through the Linear Flow portion of the data.
The Convergence Skin (Sconv), is calculated from:
where:
S is the Mechanical Skin.
St is obtained from the intercept of the line:
where:
m(p) int = [m(pi)-m(p)int(t=0) ] for a Drawdown with no History, or
m(p) int = [m(p)int(te=0) m(p)(t=0)] for an Equivalent Time Plot.
For a Build-Up using the Tandem Square-Root Function:
where:
St is calculated using the earlier equation for St (above) with:
m(p) int = [m(p*) m(p)(t=0)]
2. Estimation of Radial Permeability and Mechanical Skin Factor:
975
If the command HLLC_K_L = 1 has been added to the Configuration sub-folder of

the Pansys31.ini file (refer to The Registry), the slope m and intercept m(p)int are
used to calculate the Radial Permeability (k) and Mechanical Skin (S), assuming a
knowledge of Lw, kz and zwd. This option is useful when the early Vertical Radial
Flow portion of the data is obscured or is of poor quality.
A Total Skin (St), is calculated from the intercept m(p)int in the same way as in
Option 1 described above.
Mechanical Skin (S), is derived from this by:
where:
is a Skin Factor accounting for Flow Convergence and Anisotropy (Reference 62),
where the Anisotropy Coefficient (A), is given by:
976
PanSystem
Gas Analysis (Type Curve Analysis)
Plot Axes for Data
General:
Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Plot Axes for Data. The p and p terms are
replaced by m(p) or m(p), or their p2 equivalents, where appropriate.
977
Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations
General:
Permeability:
For Constant Rate Drawdowns and Build-Ups:
where:
qsg is the Flow Rate at Surface (Constant Rate Drawdown) or the last Rate before
Shut-In (Build-Up) in MMscf/day.
For Variable Rate Superposition Plots with a Rate Normalized Y-axis, set qsg = 1 in
the above equation, and for m(p)match read {m(p)/q}match.
978
PanSystem
Wellbore Storage Type-Curves
General:
X-axis:
[TD/CD], where:
TD and CD are defined in Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Wellbore Storage Type-
Curves.
Apparent Wellbore Volume:
From the Time-Match (i.e. Real, Pseudo or Equivalent Superposition Time):
where T'wb, the Average Wellbore Temperature, is assumed equal to the Reservoir
Temperature (T'), so the two Temperatures cancel.
Storage Coefficients:
CD: Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
CS: Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Wellbore Storage Type-Curves.
Skin Factor:
Skin Pressure Drop:

Refer to the equations in the Skin Pressure Drop section of Gas Analysis (Radial
Flow) Semi-Log Plot.
Refer to the Radius of Investigation section of Oil Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log
Plot.
979
Bounded System Type-Curves
General:
X-axis:
[TD/LD2], where:
and TD is defined in Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Wellbore Storage Type-

Curves.
Permeability:
This is computed from the equation for (k) in Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations.
Characteristic Length (L):
Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Bounded System Type-Curves.
980
PanSystem
Fractured Well Type-Curves
General:
X-axis:
[TDxf] (References 23, 24, 25).
TDxf is defined in Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Fractured Well Type-Curves.
Permeability:
Fracture Half-Length Xf:
Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Fractured Well Type-Curves.
Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor:
Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Fractured Well Type-Curves.
Fracture conductivity kfw and FCD:
Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Fractured Well Type-Curves for the
Time-Axis Match.
981
Dual-Porosity Type-Curves
General:
X-axis:
[TD/CD] or [TD/4]
Permeability:
Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Dual-Porosity Type Curves for the Time-
Axis Match.
982
PanSystem
Ei Type-Curves
General:
X-axis:
[TD/RD2]
Permeability:
Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Ei Type Curves for the Time-Axis Match.
983
Dual Permeability Type-Curves
General:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Permeability and Skin Factor:
These are calculated with the [TD/CD] Type-Curves using the equation for (k) from
Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations and the relevant equations from Wellbore
Storage Type-Curves.
Inter-Layer Flow Coefficient (), Flow Capacity Ratio () and Storativity
Ratio ():
These are calculated as described in Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Dual-
Permeability Type-Curves.
984
PanSystem
Radial Composite Type-Curves
General:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Inner Region Permeability and Skin Factor:
Distance to Discontinuity, Outer/Inner Region Mobility and Storativity
Ratios:
Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Radial Composite Type-Curves.
985
Partial-Penetration and Gas-Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves
General:
Wellbore Storage Coefficient, Near Wellbore Permeability and Skin Factor:
Vertical Permeability and Perforation Length (Penetration Ratio):
Refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Partial-Penetration and Gas Cap/Aquifer
Type-Curves.
986
PanSystem
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Type-Curves
Drawdown Method for Flowing Periods, and Build-Ups using the Slider Pressure
Extrapolation:
Effective Transmissibility (Teff), is calculated from the Y-axis Match:
First Cell Connected Pore Volume (V1), comes from this and the X-axis Match:
value:
Build-Up Analysis Method for Build-Ups not using the Slider Pressure Extrapolation:
Effective Transmissibility (Teff), is calculated from the X-axis Match:
First Cell Connected Pore Volume (V1), comes from the Y-axis Match:
value:
987
Horizontal Well Type-Curves
General:
Horizontal Well Type-Curve Analysis for Gas Wells is similar to that for Oil Analysis (Type-
Curve Analysis) Horizontal Well Type-Curves, with a few modifications:
The Dimensionless Y-axis (pDL) function is now defined as (for Pseudo-Pressure):
with qsg in MMscf/day.

The Dimensionless Time Function (TDH) is, as for Oil:
where t represents Real, Pseudo or Equivalent Superposition Time.

The Vertical Permeability (kz) is obtained from the Time Match:
Horizontal Permeability (k) is calculated from the Pressure Match:
For the p2 approximation option, replace qsg by qsggizi.

For the p approximation option, replace qsg by qsggizi / 2pi.
For other aspects of the Matching process, refer to Oil Analysis (Type-Curve
Analysis) Horizontal Well Type-Curves.
988
PanSystem
Gas Analysis (PanWizard Equations)
Testing Time Advisor
General:
Several useful calculations are made for Gas and Condensate Well Tests in the PanWizard
for Test Design, in the Testing Time Advisor and Flow Rate Advisor sections.
Testing Time Advisor:
Fluid Compression/Expansion:
(bbls/psi)
where:
Vwb is the Wellbore Volume (bbls), and
cwbf is the Average Compressibility of the Fluid in the Wellbore (psi-1).
Time to End of Wellbore Storage:
This is twice the value in the classical equation (Reference 2), and is more
consistent with the behaviour of the Pressure Derivative. It gives a time which is
about 60% longer than the "1% Afterflow" criterion. The Wellbore Storage
Coefficient (Cs) and the Gas Viscosity () are at initial conditions, and the Total
Skin (St) is given by (S + DQ). When the Turbulent Skin Effect is strong, the
computed time may be an underestimate.
Time to Detect Closest Boundary:
This is the minimum Test Duration required in order to be able to discern with
some confidence a change of slope on the Semi-Log Plot, indicative of a
heterogeneity at a Distance (R) from the Well.
This is simply the time required to be certain that there is a change of slope; it
does not allow time for the new trend to develop fully. In terms of the Log-Log
Plot, the Derivative will just start to leave the Zero-Slope Radial Flow line.
In order to characterize the heterogeneity (e.g. Single Fault, Change of kh, etc.),
at least another Log Cycle of Test Time will be required.
The same equations as those used for Radius of Investigation are applied (i.e. Oil
Analysis (Radial Flow) Semi-Log Plot), but in this case, the input is Distance, and
the output is Time.
Time to Reach Semi-Steady-State:
This is the Time required to detect the Boundary farthest from the Well in a Closed
System. The same equations as those used for the Time to Detect Closest
Boundary are applied (refer to previous section above).
989
Flow Rate Advisor
General:
Several useful calculations are made for Gas and Condensate Well Tests in the PanWizard
for Test Design, in the Flow Rate Advisor and Testing Time Advisor sections.
For Gas and Condensate Welltest Design, to assist in the appropriate choice of Flow Rate,
estimates can be obtained of the maximum safe Production Rate to avoid erosion of the
Tubing, and the minimum Production Rate to prevent the Well loading-up with liquid
(e.g. Condensed Water, Formation Water, Oil).
Maximum Recommended Flow Rate (Erosional Limit):
(MMscf/day)
where:
(ft/sec)
is the Threshold Erosional Velocity (Reference 69), and:
d is the ID of Tubing (inches),
Bg is the Gas Volume Factor (ft3/scf) calculated at the Layer Pressure and
Temperature specified in the PanWizard Flow Rate Limit dialog,
Ce is the Erosional Coefficient (default = 100),
is the Gas or Condensate Density (lbs/ft3) at the Layer Pressure and Temperature
g
specified in the PanWizard Flow Rate Limit dialog.

Minimum Recommended Flow Rate (Liquid Load-Up Limit):
(MMscf/day)
where:
990
PanSystem
is the Turner Critical Unloading Velocity (ft/sec) (Reference 70),

d is the ID of Tubing (inches),
Bg is the Gas Volume Factor (ft3/scf),
CTurner is the Turner Coefficient (default = 1.593 (Reference 71)),
is the Water Density (lbs/ft ),
L
3
is the Gas Density (lbs/ft ),

g
3
is the Gas/Liquid Interfacial Tension (dynes/cm).
All Fluid Properties are calculated at the Layer Pressure and Temperature specified
in the PanWizard Flow Rate Limit dialog.
991
PanSystem File Structures
PanSystem File Types
General:
With the introduction of 32-bit operating systems (Windows 95 and Windows NT) there
were cross-platform compatibility problems with *.PAN files. This problem was rectified in
PanSystem V-2.4, therefore the following rules for reading files will apply:
1. The 16- or 32-bit versions of V-2.4 or later will read any earlier 16-bit *.PAN files.
2. The 32-bit version of V-2.4 or later will read any earlier 32-bit *.PAN files.
3. The 16-bit version of V-2.4 or later will only read 16-bit versions of earlier *.PAN
files.
4. The *.PAX files of any version will be readable on either operating system
(Windows 3 or Windows 95/98/2000/NT/XP), irrespective of which operating
system the file was created on.
5. The Save As Previous option will generate a *.PAN ASCII file that can be read by
any previous version of PanSystem from V-3.0 onwards. Only data that was
available in V-3.0 will be saved, so data related to newer features will be lost.
6. Files from the DOS-based V-1.80 can be read into any version of PanSystem on
any platform.
While operating PanSystem users will work with different types of file. PanSystem uses
the following types of files (default extensions in brackets):
Gauge Data Files (*.TPR)
System Files (*.PAN or *.PAX pre-PanSystem V-2.4)
Tide Table Files (*.SEA).
Report Files (text only) (*.RPT)
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Files (*.PSP)
Pressure-z-Viscosity File (*.PIC).
Pressure ASCII Standard File (*.PAS) - (Canadian Energy and Utilities Board (EUB)
Keyword Standard).
The file extensions (*.TPR, *.PAN, etc.) are default file extensions used in
PanSystem. Users may, if they wish, assign their own extensions.
Gauge Data Files:
A Gauge Data File (*.TPR) contains the recorded Gauge Test Data. This will normally be
supplied on disk by the company that carried out the Welltest.
Up to 20 Columns of data can be read in via the Spreadsheet method, and 9 columns by
the Non-Spreadsheet method (refer to Open Data Files and Import Data Files for details).
Two of these must contain the Time and Pressure values, which are mandatory for
Analysis.
It is also possible to import Flow Rate data versus Time independently of the Pressure
data, if it exists as a separate record. Cumulative Production data can be used as an
alternative to Flow Rate data. An optional Flow Rate data Column may also be read in
for use in Analysis.
992
PanSystem
Other Columns of data (e.g. Temperature) will not be used in Analysis but users may still
want to import them into PanSystem for Editing, Reporting, Plotting, etc. Users may also
have another set of Pressure data in the same file, in which case they will be able to
compare two (or more) Gauge records, and analyze each in turn.
Users must tell PanSystem which type of Data is in which Column before importing the
file for Analysis.
Once the Data has been Imported, additional Columns can be created through Editing,
Smoothing, Copy/Pasting, up to a maximum of 100 Columns per file.
Section from a sample Gauge Data File containing Dates and missing entries (an ideal
candidate for the Fixed Column Widths Import mode)
To prepare the Gauge Data for Analysis, PanSystem's extensive Data Preparation facilities
in the Dataprep Menu can be used; users might wish to:
Reduce the Number of Data Points
Remove unwanted Data
Clean-Up noisy Data
Smooth noisy Data
Patch, Splice and Merge Data from more than one Gauge or File
Mark the beginning and end of different Flow Periods
Mark and annotate significant Events
By Reducing the Number of Data Points, the amount of memory required to store and
work with the file is also reduced, thus speeding-up plotting and calculation facilities.
Gauge Data File Requirements:
The data in the Gauge Data File must be arranged in Columns separated by spaces or
other valid de-limiters (refer to Open Data Files and Import Data Files for details of valid
delimiters). Various Import modes are available depending on the layout of the data.
993
A special Fixed Column Width mode can be used to Import Date information and/or
Columns containing missing data (as illustrated in the example above).
PanSystem can Import File Header information intact for display in the program. Both
import modes will respect the Header content and spurious data will only occur if a
Header is not identified as such. Header lines marked with an asterisk (*), are
automatically recognized as Header information and will be ignored; other lines
similarly marked (including lines of Gauge Data) will also be ignored.
Where practical (i.e. for small data files), before Importing a "raw" Gauge Data
File, use an editor and mark non-numeric fields with an asterisk (*) at the start of
each line. PanSystem will then completely ignore these commented fields when it
reads the Gauge Data. For large files, just let PanSystem read in the data and
then Edit in Dataprep if necessary.
System Files:
A System File contains all the information required to carry out Analysis, Test Design,
Simulation, Forecasting, etc. in PanSystem (Analytical Mode) and/or Numerical Simulation
using PanSystem (Numerical Mode) and PanMesh. This includes:
Description of each Well - up to five Wells.
Description of each Layer within the Reservoir (up to five Layers) and Boundaries
(per Layer).
Description of the Fluids within each Layer.
Edited Gauge Data; up to 100 Columns of data per file, up to 20 files per Well.
Each Well can be assigned its own data sets.
Record of screen Configuration settings (e.g. Plot Title, Axes Scales, Markers and
Annotation).
Pseudo-Pressure and Pseudo-Time Tables for each Layer (Gas Wells).
A record of the status of the Analysis on each Plot when the file was Saved (e.g.
Lines Fitted, Flow Regime Markers, Results). This allows users to Save the file and
then continue at a later time from where they left off previously.
Report Format.
PanSystem (Numerical Mode) introduces:
3-D Reservoir Geometry, Internal Boundaries (up to 100 Nodes).
Material and Fluid Properties per Region/Layer (up to 99 Regions per Layer).
No limit to the number of Layers.
Description of Well Completion (Deviation, Azimuth, up to six Open
Intervals), for a single Well.
All numerical data are written in Oilfield (Absolute) Units.

Tide Table Files (optional):
The Tide Table Files (*.SEA) contain details of the Local Tide Heights while the Welltest
was being recorded. PanSystem uses these as one way to Filter out the effects of the
Tide on the Welltest Data.
These files are in written in ASCII format from V-2.6 onwards. However, earlier
Binary files from 16-bit and 32-bit versions as far back as V-2.3 can still be read in.
994
PanSystem
Text-only Report File:

The File/Print and Report/Report Output/Print Report commands provide the option to
strip-out the textual content of a Report (i.e. no Graphics) and Save it in ASCII format
(*.RPT). The textual and graphical content of a Plot or Report can be saved in HPGL/2
or Encapsulated Postscript format by selecting an appropriate Printer Driver and Printing
to File (refer to Printing for more details).
Word Document Report File:
The Report/Report Output/Export to Word Document command allows users to Save the
Report to an MS Word (*.DOC) file with graphics embedded. This option writes the
same items to file as are normally printed directly via the alternative Report/Report
Output/Print Report menu option, except that in this case graphics are included. MS
Word can also be opened within PanSystem and the Report contents can be Viewed,
Edited, Printed, Saved and Re-formatted (i.e. Plot Re-sizing, Page Number insertion,
application of Headers/Footers, etc.).
If users do not have MS Word, this facility cannot be used. It is not possible to
specify an alternative program.
EUB Compliant (*.PAS) File:
PanSystem can output a *.PAS file conforming to the "Pressure ASCII Standard",
specified by the Canadian Energy and Utilities Board (EUB). The TRG.PAS format is
available.
Saving Files and File Extensions:
The file extensions *.TPR (Gauge Data Files), *.PAN (System Files), *.PAS (Pressure
ASCII Standard Files), *.SEA (Tide Table Files) and *.RPT (Report Text Files) are default
extensions used by PanSystem. Different extensions can be used if required. The
extension *.PAX, which was used in earlier versions for the ASCII alternative to the
*.PAN system file, is no longer available for Saving files. However, earlier *.PAX files
can still be read in.
995
Type-Curve File
Filename Extensions and Associated Models:

In the following list, the Dimensionless Time Function is stated for each Type-Curve,
along with the curve identifier in brackets [ ].
For a more extensive definition, please refer to the relevant Type-Curve topics in the
Pansystem Equations section of the Help (e.g. Oil Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Plot
Axes for Data or Gas Analysis (Type-Curve Analysis) Plot Axes for Data and subsequent
topics).
TCA: Dual-Permeability (Stage 2): TD/4 []
TCB: Bounded System Analysis: (all Models, Boundary Stage): TD/LD2 [Text:
Geometry Type].
Default set: Four different Fault Geometries: FAULTS.TCB
Many other configurations available.
TCC: Partial-Penetration (Stage 1): TDZ [hp/h]
Default set: Perforations in middle: MPARTPEN.TCC
Perforations at top/bottom: TPARTPEN.TCC
TCD: Radial Composite (Stage 2): TD/RD2 [Outer/Inner Mobility Ratio].
Lower Mobility Outer Region, = 1: TIGHTOUT.TCD
Default set: Lower Mobility Inner Region, = 1: TIGHTIN.TCD
Gas in Inner Region (Higher Mobility) and = 0.01: GASDRIVE.TCD
TCE: Interference Testing: TD/RD2 [none]
TCF: Vertical Fracture, Finite Conductivity (Cinco format) (Stage 1): TDxf [FCD]
TCG: Gas-Cap/Aquifer (Stage 1): TDZ [hp/h]
Default set: Perforations at top (Aquifer) or Perforations at bottom (Gas-Cap):
TGASCAP.TCG
Perforations in middle: MGASCAP.TCG
TCH: Homogeneous Radial: TD/CD [CDe2S]
Default set: Medium Range CDe2S: RADHOMOG.TCH
High Range CDe2S: RADHI.TCH
Low Range CDe2S: RADLO.TCH
TCI: Single Vertical Fracture (Infinite Conductivity) (Stage 1): TDxf [CDxf]
T*J: Horizontal Well (Radial Homogeneous with No-Flow upper and lower
Boundaries - Lw not known): TDH [LWD] (* represents value of ZWD - e.g. 5 for ZWD =
0.5)
TCK: Horizontal Well (Radial Homogeneous with No-Flow upper and lower
Boundaries - Lw known): TDH [ZWD]
TCL: Dual-Porosity Model - "Pressure Match" Method (Pseudo-Steady-State Matrix
Flow Model) (Stage 2): TD/CD [e2S]
996
PanSystem
TCM: Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model - "Drawdown Analysis"

Method: [V1/V2]
TCN: Dual-Porosity Model - "Derivative Match" Method: (Pseudo-Steady-State
Matrix Flow Model) (Stage 2): TD/4 []
TCO: Dual-Porosity Model - "Derivative Match" Method: (Transient Matrix Flow
Model) (Stage 2): TD/4 []
T*P: Horizontal Well (Radial Homogeneous with No-Flow and Constant Pressure
upper and lower Boundaries - Lw not known): TDH [LWD] (* represents value of ZWD
- e.g. 5 for ZWD = 0.5).
TCQ: Horizontal Well (Radial Homogeneous with No-Flow and Constant Pressure
upper and lower Boundaries - Lw known): TDH [ZWD]
TCR: Not used.
TCS: Wellbore Fill-Up (Slug Test), Homogeneous Radial Flow: TD/CD [CDe2S]
TCT: Not used.
TCU: Single Vertical Fracture (Uniform Flux) (Stage 1): TDxf [CDxf]
TCV: Single Vertical Fracture (Finite Conductivity) (Wong et al) (Stage-1): PDFCD
versus TDxfFCD2 [FCD] (Reference 44).
TCW: Single Vertical Fracture: (Finite Conductivity) (Wong-et al) (Stage-2):
PDFCD2/3CDxf1/3 versus TDxfFCD2/3CDxf4/3 [SD] (Reference 44).
TCX: Advanced Simulation PD-TD Look-Up Tables (PD versus TD) [text label]
TCY: McKinley Type-Curves - Homogeneous Radial Model: t versus P grp [T]
TCZ: Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Model - "Build-Up Analysis" Method:
[V1/V2]
File Structure:
imodel ncurv ntd jaxflag ideriv [integer flags]
td(1) [TD Values]

.
.
td(ntd)
lab(1) [First Curve PD Values]
pd(1,1,1)
.
.
pd(ntd,1,1)
lab(2) [Second Curve PD Values]
pd(2,1,1)
.
.
pd(ntd,1,1)
.
.
997
labval(ncurv) [Last Curve PD Values]

pd(1,ncurv,1)
.
.
pd(ntd,ncurv,1)
lab(1) [First Curve Derivatives]
dpd(1,1,2)
.
.
dpd(ntd,1,2)
lab(2) [Second Curve Derivatives]
.
.
lab(ncurv) [Last Curve Derivatives]
dpd(1,ncurv,2)
.
.
dpd(ntd,ncurv,2)
Definitions of Variables:
imodel (Model Identifier):
1 = Homogeneous Radial (TCH), Two-Cell Compartmentalized (TCM, TCZ)
2 = Single Vertical Fracture - Infinite Conductivity (TCI)
3 = Single Vertical Fracture - Uniform Flux (TCU)
4 = Not used
5 = Not used
6 = Interference Testing (TCE)
7 = Single Vertical Fracture - Finite Conductivity (TCF, TCW)
8 = Dual-Porosity - Pseudo-Steady-State Matrix Flow (TCL, TCN)
9 = Dual-Porosity - Transient Matrix Flow (TCO)
10 = Dual-Permeability (TCA)
101 = Wellbore Fill-Up (Slug Test): Radial Homogeneous (TCS)
109 = McKinley Type-Curves: Radial Homogeneous (TCY)
12 = Horizontal Well, Radial Homogeneous: No-Flow/No-Flow (TCJ)
13 = Horizontal Well, Radial Homogeneous: No-Flow/No-Flow (TCK)
14 = Horizontal Well, Radial Homogeneous: Constant Pressure/No-Flow (TCP)
15 = Horizontal Well, Radial Homogeneous: Constant Pressure/No-Flow (TCQ)
16 = Partially-Penetrated Radial Homogeneous (TCC)
17 = Radial Composite (TCD)
18 = Gas-Cap/Aquifer (TCG)
ncurv: Number of Curve Sets in file.
998
PanSystem
ntd: Number of TD Values in each Curve Set.

jaxflag: X-axis TD Function and Curve Label indicator.
0 = TD/CD [CDe2S Value on curve] (TCH); also general use (TCA, TCC, TCD, TCG,
TCL, TCM, TCY, TCZ)
1 = Not used
2 = Not used
3 = TD [user-defined Curve Label] (TCX)
4 = TD/LD2 [user-defined Curve Label] (TCB)
5 = TDxf [FCD Value on curve for Finite Conductivity (TCF), CDxf for Infinite
Conductivity and Uniform Flux (TCI, TCU)]
6 = TD/4 [ on curve] (TCN, TCO)
9 = TDxfFCDCDxf group [SD on curve] (TCW)
10 = TDH [LWD on curve] (T*J, T*P); [ZWD on curve] (TCK, TCQ)
ideriv: Indicates the presence/absence of Derivatives:
1 = no Derivatives present
2 = Derivatives are present
lab(i): Label to identify Curve (i); this is a Number or a Text String, depending on
the Type-Curve.
Earlier version software Type-Curve files did not contain the jaxflag and ideriv
indices, but they are still compatible with more recent versions of the software.
position of label values for P, P data curves
Where P = pressure curves; P= pressure derivative curves
Position of label values on P, P data curves
0- points are plotted on left side of the curve
1- points are plotted on right side of the curve
2- points are plotted on the extreme left side of the curve
3- points are plotted in the middle portion of the curve
Test case used to show the illustration Example03.pan (Radial homogenous and infinite
acting reservoir model)
Type curve used RADHOMOG.TCH
Curve Label: Cd e2s
a) Position of label values for P, P curves 3,1

Notation written in RADHOMOG.TCH type curve
1 13 51 0 2 Cd*e^2s, 3, 1
999
Type Curve Plot
r;3 on the type curve file - plotted curve label values in the middle portion on pressure
plot.
r;1 on the type curve file - plotted curve label values to the right side on pressure
derivative plot.
1000
PanSystem
Type Curve Plot (Zooom)
1001
*.PAN File
General:
The PanSystem data file can be saved or imported as a *.PAN file.
From V-2.4 onwards, all *.PAN files are in ASCII format, and can be viewed using a text
editor or spreadsheet. They are interchangeable between different platforms (e.g.
Windows 95/98/2000/XP/NT) within the limitations outlined in File Open. Prior to this
version, *.PAN files were in Binary format, and an ASCII format was available with the
extension *.PAX.
Details of the current *.PAN file structure can be obtained on request.
1002
PanSystem
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File
General:
For the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option (also refer to Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing),
users may import an externally-generated Pseudo-Pressure file as an alternative to using
the generation facility provided in the Fluid Parameters section of Data Prep Reservoir
Control (Analytical) dialog. The default file extension is *.PSP.
The Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure is defined below in the section Definition of Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure.
*.PSP File Structure:
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3 onwards:
where:
NA are real numbers (not used in PanSystem, but must be present in the first
three fields),
Fluid Type is the word Oil, Gas or Condensate,
osc, wsc, gsc are the Specific Gravities of Oil, Water (Water = 1.0) and Gas (Air =
1.0) at standard conditions,

, ,
oi wi gi are the Viscosities of Oil, Water and Gas (cP) at Layer P and T,
, ,
oi wi gi are the Densities of Oil, Water and Gas (gm/cm3) at Layer P and T,
P is the Layer Pressure (psia),
T is the Layer Temperature (F),
Vosc, Vwsc, Vgsc are the Fractional Volumetric Surface Flow Rates of Oil, Water and Gas
(vol/vol) at standard conditions,
zgi is the Gas Deviation Factor at Layer P and T,
So, Sw, Sg are the Saturations (decimal fractions) of Oil, Water and Gas at Layer P
and T,
kro, krw, krg are the Relative Permeabilities to Oil, Water and Gas (decimal
fractions) at Layer P and T, at Saturations So, Sw, Sg,
1003
Boi, Bwi, Bgi are the Volume Factors of Oil, Water and Gas at Layer Conditions
(vol/vol),
p1, p2, ... pj ... are the Pressures (from 14.7 psia to P(layer)).
(p ), (p ), ... (p ) ... are the corresponding Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures (from
1 2 j
0.0 to (P ). (layer)
Qmo(p1), etc., are the Oil Phase Mass Flow Rates,

Qmw(p1), etc., are the Water Phase Mass Flow Rates,
Qmg(p1), etc., are the Gas Phase Mass Flow Rates,
mph (p1), etc., are the Multi-Phase Viscosities,
Ch(p1), etc., are the Hydrocarbon Compressibilities,
z(p1), etc., are the Gas Deviation Factors.
Definition of Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure:
The Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure is defined as:
For Single-Phase and Two-Phase situations, the term/s representing the absent phase/s
are excluded, because the associated Relative Permeability tends to zero.
For Oil Fluid Type:
For Gas and Condensate Fluid Types:
Upon import into PanSystem, the appropriate conversions are applied to make the
Pseudo-Pressure compatible with the existing interpretation equations. For Oil (Multi-
Phase) Fluid Type, it is converted to Pressure (p) Units, for Gas or Condensate Fluid
Types to m(p) Units (psi2/cP).
1004
PanSystem
*.PIC (Pressure/z-Factor/Viscosity) File
File Structure:
[n = No. of lines in table]
[Gas Gravity][Standard Temperature][Standard Pressure][Reservoir Temperature]
[optional blank line]
p1 z1 1
p2 z2 2
p3 z3 3
...
...
pn zn
n
Items may be tab- or space-separated.

Example:
50
0.7 519.67 14.696 200.0
1000.0 0.9012 0.0252

1200.0 0.9084 0.0254
1300.0 0.9107 0.0256
1400.0 0.9116 0.0258
1500.0 0.9124 0.0260
etc.
1005
*.SEA Maritime Tide Table File
File Structure:
[18922 = Code Word]
[Local Time at 12:00 ST] [Test Start Time (Gauge)] [Test Start Time (Local)] [Mean Tide
Height]
t1 h1
t2 h2
...
...
tn-1 hn-1
tn hn
0 0
where:
tj = Time in decimal hours, hj = Tide Height - at high and low Tide Points only.
All times are cumulative decimal hours (e.g. 14:30:00 on the first day in the table is
14.500, 14:30:00 next day is 38.500, etc.).
The file may be space-delimited or tab-delimited. The final row of zeroes defines the
end of the file. There is a maximum of 100 lines.
Example:
18922
12.000000 0.000000 9.500000 3.608920
50.266666 1.968500
56.566666 4.921260
62.700001 2.624670
68.683334 4.921260
75.300003 2.296590
81.699997 4.593180
87.933334 2.952760
... ...
... ...
193.833328 4.921260
199.833328 1.968504
206.250000 5.249344
212.433334 1.968504
0.000000 0.000000
1006
PanSystem
PanSystem Test Period Analysis Workflows
Slug Test Analysis Workflow
General:
In a Slug Test, the Reservoir is initially Shut-In with a Downhole Valve. In the Wellbore,
a Pressure lower than Static Reservoir Pressure is established above the Valve by
partially filling the Tubing with a liquid column or "Cushion". The Well is open on
surface. When the Downhole Valve is opened, the Formation is suddenly subjected to
this Underbalanced Pressure, and flow is induced. As the Wellbore Fills-Up, the steadily
increasing Back-Pressure exerted by the rising liquid column causes the Flow Rate to
decrease. The Well will eventually die if there is not enough Formation Pressure to flow
to surface, as Wellbore Pressure approaches Layer Pressure.
The Fill-Up Period with the Well open on surface constitutes a "Slug Test".
If the Well is closed on surface during the Test, such that the Pressure at the top
of the liquid column is increasing due to compression of the air or gas above it,
this does not represent a Slug Test, and is classified as a "Closed Chamber Test".
This is a different response type, not covered by Slug Test Theory, although the
early part of such a Test (i.e. before compression becomes significant), may be
amenable to a Slug Test Analysis.
Slug Test Theory can also be applied to a "Leak-Off Test". In this case, the initial
Cushion Pressure is greater than Reservoir Pressure. When the Downhole Valve is
opened, the liquid column Leaks-Off into the Formation until Pressure balance is
achieved. The Well is open on surface.
Setting-Up a Slug Test for Analysis:
A suggested workflow is presented as follows with hyperlinks to relevant dialogs and/or
plots where data entry, selections, etc. are required:
1. Import Gauge Data, then proceed to Data Edit Plot and select the Start and End of
the required Test Period. Do not enter any Flow Rates. If the first Gauge Pressure
does not correspond exactly to the Start of the Test (i.e. Valve opened), enter
the correct Time and the Cushion Pressure
The Cushion Pressure is not usually seen by the Gauge and may have to be
estimated from the liquid column height.
2. Double-click on the Ruler Bar above the Data Edit Plot. Select the Slug Test Type
and enter the three required parameters as described in the Test Period Classification
dialog.
3. Leave the checkbox unchecked to use the Ramey, Agarwal and Martin Slug Test
Type-Curves or check the checkbox to use the Pressure Integral Method of Peres, Onur
and Reynolds. Users may return here at any time to change their selection.
4. Proceed to Analysis.
5. Optionally, inspect the Rate Changes Table. Users will find the following special
set-up for Slug Tests (i.e. performed automatically on exit from the Data Edit Plot):
Initial Pressure (i.e. Start of Slug Test) set to:
1007
Layer Pressure for the Ramey et al Type-Curve Method (i.e.

because the Initial Sandface Pressure, on the Formation side of the
Valve, is the Layer Pressure).
Zero for the Pressure Integral Method (i.e. a consequence of the
mathematics employed).
The Initial Pressure must be left at Layer Pressure if the Ramey et al

Type-Curve Method is being used, and at Zero if the Pressure Integral
Method is being used.
Flow Rate (i.e. second line of Slug Test) set to a nominal value of 1. Slug
Test Analysis does not require a Flow Rate here, but PanSystem requires a
non-zero value to permit entry into the Analysis section.
These values are set-up automatically, and do not normally need to be
edited.
If users decide to revise the Layer Pressure at some later stage, it should be
changed in the Layer Parameters dialog, which can be accessed via the
Analysis/Model, or Dataprep/Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) menu
options. If the Ramey et al Type-Curve Method is being used, update the
Initial Pressure in the Rate Changes Table accordingly, via the Change T0 icon
on the Ramey Type-Curve Plot, or by going to the table itself via Dataprep.
6. Ramey, Agarwal and Martin Type-Curve Method: In Analysis, go to the Type-Curve
section and bring up the Ramey Slug Test Type-Curve set. Shift the curves sideways (no
vertical movement is possible) to obtain a Type-Curve Match. Results include Permeability
(k), from the Time Match versus Td/Cd, and Skin (S), from the Match Curve Identifier.
The user-defined input values of Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs) and corresponding Cd
are also displayed.
Although the full range of Diagnostic Plots is accessible, no other Analysis is

possible in this particular Slug Test mode.
7. Peres, Onur and Reynolds Pressure Integral Method: This method converts the Slug
Test data to an Equivalent Constant Surface Rate Drawdown Test. The data can then be
Analyzed by all the conventional methods available for Drawdowns; users can also access
any of the Diagnostic Plots and Type-Curves appropriate for the Reservoir Model being
used.
Implementation of the Pressure Integral Method was sponsored by Petrobras.

The method can be applied to any Reservoir Model, and all Analysis methods are
valid (e.g. Log-Log, Semi-Log, Square-Root (including Superposition), etc.).
Proceed with Analysis in the usual way (e.g. Log-Log, Semi-Log Plots, etc). The
only difference from a conventional Welltest is that the Y-axis of these Diagnostic
Plots is the Pressure Integral Function instead of Pressure.
Note that P0 for the Integral Function is zero.

Time Function (Tf icon): When using the Pressure Integral Method, the
Integral Function replaces the Pressure, and the Pressure becomes the
equivalent of the Sandface Flow Rate. The functioned data therefore
resemble a Constant Surface Rate Drawdown Test with a measured
Sandface Flow Rate available.
1008
PanSystem
The Time Function (Tf) option is set by default to Use Varying Rate, so that
Convolution is used on the Diagnostic Plots (i.e. Rate-Normalized Pressure
versus Equivalent Time). With good data, users should see a Pressure and
Derivative Response free of any Wellbore Storage effects, and Line-Fit/Type-
Curve Analysis can be performed on the Diagnostic Plots appropriate for the
Reservoir Model selected, to obtain Reservoir Parameters. This corresponds
to the Convolution Methods section of the Peres, Onur and Reynolds technical
paper.
If users disable the Use Varying Rate During Test control, and enable the
dP/dQ with Elapsed Time control, they will be plotting Elapsed Time
(without Superposition) on the Time axis. This corresponds to the
Deconvolution Methods section of the Peres, Onur and Reynolds technical
paper.
If users disable the controls for Use Varying Rate During Test and dP/dQ
with Elapsed Time, the "Sandface Flow Rate" is ignored, and users have the
equivalent of a Constant Rate Drawdown Test with Wellbore Storage, as
discussed in the Type-Curve Matching section of the Peres, Onur and
Reynolds technical paper. This has no Rate Normalization and no
Superposition, and is really only amenable to Analysis using Type-Curves for
Wellbore Storage and Skin, such as the Type-Curves for a Radial
Homogeneous Reservoir with Wellbore Storage and Skin, since the Reservoir
Signal does not develop clearly without Convolution.
Build-Up Test Period After a Slug Test:
For a Shut-In Test following a Slug Test, the Wellbore Fill-Up Period constitutes the
history for the Build-Up Test. Since the Flow Rate during the Slug Test is continuously
decreasing, the Build-Up can only be correctly analyzed with the Varying Rate History
correctly configured. This workflow assumes that Pressure Data has been recorded
during the Fill-Up Period (necessary to calculate the Flow Rate).
To prepare the Shut-In data for Analysis, proceed as follows:
1. On the Data Edit Plot, pick the start and end of the Flowing Period before the
Shut-In. Leave the Rate values at zero. Do not pick the end of the Build-Up yet.
If the Slug Test Period has already been set-up for Analysis (refer to earlier
workflow), reset the Flow Rate at the end of the Slug Test to zero.
2. Compute Flow Rate#1 from dp/dt with the Create Rate (Q) tool, using the Wellbore
Storage Coefficient (Cs) value appropriate for the Flowing Period (Slug Test). The
computed Flow Rates for the Build-Up Period will be zero because the end of the
Build-Up was not picked.
3. The Test Type should be left as Normal in the Test Period Classification dialog.
4. In the Rate Changes Table, select the Pressure at the end of the Flowing Period (=
instant of Shut-In) and Copy {Ctrl-C} to store in the system memory (or write it
down).
5. Use the Transfer option to import Rate#1 into the table.
The Flow Rate calculated by the Create Rate (Q) tool, conforms to the default "Ends
of Rate Periods" format.
1009
6. Delete the bottom two lines in the table (i.e. these are the original user-defined
selections made for the start and end of the Flowing Period).
7. Now Delete all the lines for the Shut-In Period except the very first (= T0) and
last ones (= Tend). Next, Paste {Ctrl-V) the final Flowing Pressure into the penultimate
line (= T0), to include the Pressure (P0) at the start of the Build-Up.
The Rate Changes Table should now begin at the start of the Flowing Period, with a
large number of entries during the Flowing Period, an entry for the end of the
Flowing Period (= T0 for the Shut-In), followed by an entry for the end of the Shut-
In Period at Tend.
8. Delete any lines near the beginning of the Flowing Period containing any obviously
spurious Rate Values (i.e. Flow Rates computed from dp/dt are often noisy at the start).
Do not Delete the first line representing the start of the Slug Test Period. The
Flow Rate corresponding to the Start Time of the Slug Test should be zero. Check
that there are no spurious Flow Rates (e.g. zero) in the next few lines.
9. Exit from the Rate Changes Table dialog. Ensure the Master Rate Channel is set to
Rate Changes.
10. Perform Build-Up Analysis in the usual way. The plots will use Superposition based
on the Varying Rate History in the Rate Changes Table.
11. To Analyze the Slug Test Period, it will first be necessary to merge all the Wellbore
Fill-Up Flowing Periods into a single group. This is done on the Data Edit Plot as described
in the section on the Ruler Bar. This will define a single Slug Test that can be analyzed by
the Ramey Type-Curves or the Pressure Integral Method. Set up this Test Period as
explained above, in Setting-Up a Slug Test for Analysis.
Note that Grouping the Flowing Periods to define the Slug Test will not affect the
Analysis of the Shut-In Period, since the Flow Rate variations are still listed in the
Rate Changes Table.
1010
PanSystem
PanSystem Technical References
Technical References
General:
A list of technical references used within PanSystem is presented below; these references
also appear in the topics to which they are applicable:
1. Dake, L.P.: "Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering", Developments in Petroleum
Science, Vol. 8, Elsevier, 1981 and "The Practice of Reservoir Engineering",
Developments in Petroleum Science, Vol. 36, Elsevier, 1994.
2. Earlougher, R.C.: "Advances in Well Test Analysis", SPE monograph series, Vol. 5,
1977.
3. Matthews, C.S. and Russell, D.G.: "Pressure Build-Up and Flow Tests in Wells",
SPE monograph series Vol. 1, 1967.
4. Agarwal, R.G.: "A New Method to Account for Producing Time Effects when
Drawdown Type Curves are Used to Analyse Pressure Build-Up and Other Test
Data", paper SPE 9289, presented at the 55th Annual Fall Meeting of the SPE,
Dallas, Texas, Sept. 21-24 1980.
5. Gringarten, A.C., Bourdet, D.P., Landel, P.A. and Kniazeff, V.J.: "A Comparison
Between Different Skin and Wellbore Storage Type-Curves for Early-Time
Transient Analysis", paper SPE 8205, presented at the 54th Annual Fall Meeting of
the SPE, Las Vegas, Nevada, Sept. 23-26, 1979.
6. Earlougher, R.C. Jnr. and Kersch, K.M.: "Analysis of Short-Time Transient Test
Data by Type-Curve Matching", J. Pet. Tech. (July 1974) 793-800; Trans., AIME
257.
7. Agarwal, R.G., Al-Hussainy and Ramey, H.J.: "An Investigation of Wellbore
Storage and Skin Effect in Unsteady Liquid Flow: I Analytical Treatment", Soc. Pet.
Eng. J (Sept. 1970) 279-290; Trans., AIME 249.
8. Ramey, H.J. and Cobb, W.M.: "A General Pressure Build-Up Theory for a Well in a
Closed Drainage Area", J. Pet. Tech. (Dec. 1971) 1493-1505; Trans., AIME 251.
9. Van Everdingen, A.F. and Hurst, W.: "The Application of the Laplace
Transformation to Flow Problems in Reservoirs", Trans., AIME (1949) 186, 305-
324.
10. Cobb, W.M. and Smith, J.T.: "An Investigation of Pressure Build-Up Tests in
Bounded Reservoirs", paper SPE 5133, presented at the 49th Annual Fall Meeting
of the SPE-AIME, Houston, Texas, Oct. 6-9 1974 (an abridged version appears in
J. Pet. Tech., Aug. 1975, 991-996; Trans., AIME 259
11. Bourdet, D., Whittle, T.M., Douglas A.A. and Pirard, Y.M.: "A New Set of Type
Curves Simplifies Well Test Analysis". World Oil, (May 1983).
12. Stehfest, H.: "Algorithm 368, Numerical Inversion of Laplace Transforms",
(Communications of the ACM), Vol. 13, No.1 (Jan., 1970), 47-49.
13. (a) Meehan: "A Correlation for Water Compressibility", Pet. Eng., Nov 1980.
(b) Numbere, Brigham and Standing: "Correlations for Physical Properties of
Petroleum Reservoir Brines", Pet. Research Inst., Stanford Univ., Nov 1977.
(c) "Secondary Oil Recovery in the U.S.", API (1950) p.127 - Van Wingen.
1011
14. Ramey, H.J.: "Practical Use of Modern Well Test Analysis", paper SPE 5878
presented at the 46th Annual California Regional Meeting of the SPE-AIME, April 8-
9, 1976.
15. Stewart, G, Wittman, M.J, and Meunier, D.: "Afterflow Measurement and
Deconvolution in Well Test Analysis", paper SPE 12174, presented at the 58th
Annual Fall Meeting of the SPE-AIME, San Francisco, CA, Oct. 5-8 1983.
16. Hall, H.N: "Compressibility of Reservoir Rocks", Trans. AIME, 231.
17. Gold, D.K., McCain, W.D. Jnr., and Jennings, J.W.: "An Improved Method for the
Determination of the Reservoir-Gas Specific Gravity for Retrograde Gases",
J.Pet.Tech. (July, 1989), 747-752; and paper SPE 17310 Midland, Texas, (March
1988).
18. Raghavan, R.: "Well Test Analysis for Multiphase Flow", paper SPE 14098, Beijing,
(March 1986).
19. Slider, H.C.: "A Simplified Method of Pressure Build-Up Analysis for a Stabilised
Well", J. Pet. Tech. (Sept, 1971), 1155-1160; Trans. AIME 251.
20. Lee, J.W.: "Welltesting", SPE of AIME publication, 1982.
21. "Theory and Practice of the Testing of Gas Wells", Third Edition 1975, or Fourth
Edition 1979. Energy Resources Conservation Board, Calgary, Alberta, Canada.
22. Standing, M.B.: "Volumetric and Phase Behaviour of Oil Field Hydrocarbon
Systems", SPE 1977.
23. Cinco-Ley, H. and Samaniego, V.F.: "Transient Pressure Analysis for Fractured
Wells", J.Pet.Tech. (Sept, 1981), 1749-1766. Also SPE 7490 (Houston 1978).
24. Lee, W.J. and Holditch, S.A.: "Fracture Evaluation With Pressure Transient Testing
in Low-Permeability Gas Reservoirs", J. Pet. Tech. (Sept, 1981), 1776-1792. Also
SPE 9975 or 7929/7930 (Denver 1979).
25. Gringarten, A.C., Ramey, H.J. Jnr. and Raghaven, R.J.: "Unsteady State Pressure
Distributions Created by a Well With a Single Infinite-Conductivity Vertical
Fracture", J. Pet. Tech. (Aug, 1972), 347-360. Also Trans. AIME 257 and SPE 4051
(San Antonio, 1972).
26. Sheng-Tai Lee and Brockenbrough, J.: "A New Analytic Solution for Finite
Conductivity Vertical Fractures With Real Time and Laplace Space Parameter
Estimation", paper SPE 12013, presented at the 58th Annual Tech. Conf. and
Exhib, San Fransisco, CA, Oct. 5-8, 1983.
27. Warren, J.E. and Root, P.J.: "The Behaviour of Naturally Fractured Reservoirs",
SPE Journal, Sept. 1963.
28. Bourdet, D. and Gringarten, A.C.: "Determination of Fissure Volume and Block
Size in Fractured Reservoirs by Type-Curve Analysis". Paper SPE 9293 presented
at SPE Fall Meeting, Sept. 1980 (Dallas).
29. Bourdet, D. et al: "Interpreting Well Tests in Fractured Reservoirs", World Oil,
October 1983.
30. Clark, D.G. and Van Golf-Racht, T.D.: "Pressure-Derivative Approach to Transient
Test Analysis: A High-Permeability North Sea Reservoir Example", SPE Journal,
November 1985.
31. Wong, D.W. et al: "Pressure Transient Analysis in Finite Linear Reservoirs Using
Derivative and Conventional Techniques: Field Examples", paper SPE 15421
presented at SPE Fall Meeting, 1986 (New Orleans).
1012
PanSystem
32. Jones, L.G., Blount, E.M. and Glaze, C.E.: "Use of Short Term Multiple Rate Flow
Tests to Predict Performance of Wells Having Turbulence", paper SPE 6133
presented at SPE Fall Meeting, 1976.
33. Cinco-Ley, H. and Samaniego, V.F.: "Pressure Transient Analysis for Naturally
Fractured Reservoirs", paper SPE 11026 presented at SPE Fall Meeting 1982 (New
Orleans).
34. Bourdet, D., Ayoub, J.A. and Pirard, Y.M.: "Use of Pressure Derivative in Well Test
Interpretation", paper SPE 12777 presented at SPE California Regional Meeting,
April 1984 (Long Beach).
35. Sutton, R.P. and Farshad, F.F.: "Evaluation of Empirically Derived PVT Properties
for Gulf of Mexico Crude Oils", paper SPE 13172 presented at SPE Fall Meeting,
Houston, Sept. 1984.
36. Schmidt, G, and Wenzel, H.: "A Modified Van Der Waal Type Equation of State",
Chem. Eng. Sci. Vol 35 (1980) pp1503 - 1512.
37. Firoozabadi: "Reservoir Fluid Phase Behaviour and Volumetric Predictions with
Equations of State", JPT, April 1988.
38. McKinley, R.M.: "Wellbore Transmissibility from Afterflow-Dominated Pressure
Buildup Data", JPT, July 1971.
39. Perrine, R.L.: "Analysis of Pressure Buildup Curves", Drill. and Prod. Prac, API
(1956) 482-509. Also Ref.: 2, Section 2.11.
40. Ramey, Henry J. Jnr., Agarwal, Ram G. and Martin, I.: "Analysis of Slug Test or
DST Flow Period Data", J. Cdn. Pet. Tech. (July-Sept. 1975) 37-42.
41. Agarwal, R.G.: "Real Gas Pseudo-Time - A New Function for Pressure Buildup
Analysis of MHF Gas Wells", paper SPE 8279 presented at Las Vegas, Sept. 1979.
42. Yaxley, L.M.: "New Stabilized Inflow Equations for Rectangular and Wedge-
Shaped Drainage Systems including Horizontal Wells", paper SPE 17082.
43. Stewart, G. and Ascharsobbi, F.: "Welltest Interpretation for Naturally Fractured
Reservoirs", SPE 18173 presented in Houston, Oct. 1988.
44. Wong, D.W, Harrington, A.G. and Cinco-Ley, H.: "Application of the Pressure-
Derivative Function in the Pressure Transient Testing of Fractured Wells", SPEFE
Oct 1986; paper SPE 13056 presented Houston, Sept 1984.
45. Meunier, D., Kabir, C.S. and Wittman, M.J.: "Gas Well Test Analysis: The Use of
Normalised Pressure and Time Functions," paper SPE 13082 presented in Houston,
1984.
46. Ehlig-Economides, C. and Ayoub, J.A.: "Vertical Interference Testing Across a
Low-Permeability Zone", paper SPE 13251 presented in Houston, Sept 1984; also
SPEFE Oct 1986, pp 497-510.
47. Ozkan, E., Raghavan, R. and Joshi, S.D.: "Horizontal Well Pressure Analysis",
paper SPE 16378 presented in Ventura, April 1987 (+ supplement SPE 20271);
also SPEFE Dec 1989, pp 567-575.
48. Bourdet, D.: "Pressure Behaviour of Layered Reservoirs with Crossflow", paper
SPE 13628 presented in Bakersfield, March 1985.
49. Fair, W.B.: "Pressure Buildup Analysis With Wellbore Phase Redistribution", paper
SPE 8206 presented in Las Vegas, Sept 1979; also SPEJ April 1981, pp 259-269.
50. Hegeman, P.S., Halford, D.L. and Joseph, J.A.: "Well Test Analysis With Changing
Wellbore Storage", paper SPE 21829 presented in Denver, April 1991.
1013
51. Saleh, A.M. and Stewart, G.S.: "Interpretation of Gas Condensate Well Tests With
Field Examples", paper SPE 24719 presented in Washington, Oct. 1992.
52. Kui-Fu Du and Stewart, G.S.: "Transient Pressure Response of Horizontal Wells in
Layered and Naturally Fractured Reservoirs with Dual Porosity Behaviour", paper
SPE 24682 presented in Washington, Oct. 1992.
53. Odeh, A.S.: "Flow Test Analysis for a Well with Radial Discontinuity", JPT, Feb
1968.
54. Yeh and Agarwal: "Pressure Transient Analysis of Injection Wells in Reservoirs
with Multiple Fluid Banks", paper SPE 19775, San Antonio, Oct 1989.
55. Bunch, D. S., Gay, D. M. and Welsch R. E.: 1993. Algorithm 717. r;Subroutines
for maximum likelihood and quasi-likelihood estimation of parameters in non-
linear regression models. ACM Trans. Math. Softw., 19(1), 109-130.
56. Dennis, J. E., Gay, D. M. and Welsch R. E.: 1981b. ALGORITHM 573 NL2SOL.
r;An adaptive non-linear least-squares algorithm [E4]. ACM Trans. Math. Softw.,
7(3), 369-383.
57. Marquardt, D.W.: 1963, J. Soc. Ind. Appl. Math., Vol. 11, 431-441.
58. Corey, A.T.: r;The Interrelation Between Gas and Oil Relative Permeabilities.
Prod. Mon. 19, 38, 1954.
59. Furnival, S.R. and Baillie, J.M.: r;Successful Prediction of Condensate Wellbore
Behaviour Using an EoS Generated From Black Oil Data. Offshore European
Conference, Aberdeen, Sept. 1993: Paper SPE 26683.
60. Cinco-Ley, H. and Samaniego, V.F.: r;Transient Pressure Analysis: Finite
Conductivity Fracture Case Versus Damaged Fracture Case, paper SPE 10179
presented at San Antonio, October 1981.
61. Brons, F. and Marting, V.E.: r;The Effect of Restricted Fluid Entry on Well
Productivity, JPT, Feb 1961 (172-174).
62. Goode, P.A. and Kuchuk, F.J.: r;Inflow Performance of Horizontal Wells, paper
SPE 18300, or SPERE, Aug 91.
63. Jones, J.R. and Raghavan R.: r;Interpretation of Flowing Well Responses in Gas-
Condensate Wells, SPEFE, Sep 1988 (p. 578).
64. Raghavan, R., Wei Chun Chu and Jones, J.R.: r;Practical Considerations in the
Analysis of Gas-Condensate Well Tests, SPERE, June 1999 (p. 288).
65. Hemala, M.L.: r;Tidal Effects in Petroleum Well Testing, SPE 14607, presented
Singapore 1986.
66. Reynolds, A.C., Bratvold, R.B. and Ding, W.: r;Semi-Log Analysis of Gas Well
Drawdown and Buildup Data, SPEFE, Dec 1987 (p. 657) and SPE 13664 (1985).
67. Rapach, J.M., Jefferies, R., Guedroudj, A.H., Westaway, P.J.: r;Practical
Transient Multilayer Test Design, Implementation and Analysis of Gas Wells in the
North Sea Southern Basin, paper SPE 20534 (New Orleans Sept 1990).
68. Kabir, C.S.: r;Seeking Synergy Between Drawdown and Buildup Analyses,
SPEFE, June 1997 (p125) and paper SPE 30551 (Dallas, Oct 1995).
69. Salana, M.M. and Venkatesh,V.S.: r;Evaluation of API RP14E Erosional Velocity
Limitations for Offshore Gas Wells, OTC4485 (Houston, May 1983).
70. Turner, R.G.: r;Analysis and Prediction of Minimum Flow Rate for the Continuous
Removal of Liquids from Gas Wells, JPT, Nov. 1969.
1014
PanSystem
71. Coleman, S.B., Clay, H.B., McCurdy, D.G. and Norris III, H.L.: r;A New Look at
Predicting Gas-Well Load-Up, JPT, March 1991.
72. Kuchuk, F.J., Goode, P.A., Wilkinson,D.J. and Thambyanayagam, R,K,M.:
r;Pressure Transient Behavior of Horizontal Wells With and Without an Aquifer,
SPEFE March 1991, paper SPE 17413 (Long Beach, March 1988).
73. Gringarten, A.C. and Ramey, H.J.: r;The Use of Source and Green's Functions in
Solving Unsteady-Flow Problems in Reservoirs, SPEJ October 1973, paper SPE
3818.
74. Shaosong Xu and Lee, W.J.: r;Two-Phase Well Test Analysis of Gas Condensate
Reservoirs, paper SPE 56483 (Houston, October 1999).
75. Larsen, L.: r;A Simple Approach to Pressure Distributions in Geometric Shapes
By Images, paper SPE 10088 (San Antonio, October 1981).
76. Dietz D.N.: "Determination of Average Reservoir Pressure from Build-Up
Surveys", Trans. SPE of AIME, 234, pp. 955-59 (JPT, August 1965).
77. Earlougher R.C., Jr., Ramey H.J., Jr. et al: "Pressure Distribution in Rectangular
Reservoirs", pp. 199-208 (JPT, February 1968).
78. Brill, J.P. and Beggs, H.D.: "Two-Phase Flow in Pipes", University of Tulsa,
INTERCOMP Course, The Hague, 1974.
79. Palacio, J.C. and Blasingame, T.A.: "Decline Curve Analysis Using Type Curves -
Analysis of Gas Well Production Data", paper SPE 25909 (Denver 1993).
80. Agarwal, R.G., Gardner, D.C., Kleinsteiber, S.W. and Fussell, D.D.: "Analyzing
Well Production Data Using Combined Type-Curve and Decline-Curve Analysis
Concepts", paper SPE 57916 (revised July 1999, originally presented as SPE
49222, New Orleans, Sept 1998). Also SPERE&E 2 (5) Oct 1999.
81. Peneloux, A., Rauzy, E. and Freze R.: "A Consistent Correction for Redlich-Kwong-
Soave Volumes", J. Fluid Phase Equilibria, 8, 7-23 (1982).
82. Aasberg-Petersen, K., Stenby, E. and Fredenslund, A.: Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., 30
(1991) pps. 248- 254.
83. MacLeod, D.B.: "Relation Between Surface Tension and Density", Trans. Faraday
Society, 19, 38 (1923), and Sugden, S.: "The Variation of Surface Tension with
Temperature and some Related Functions", J. Chem Soc., 125, 32 (1924).
84. Petrosky, G.E. and Farshad, F.F.: "Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlations for
Gulf of Mexico Crude Oils", 68th Annual Technical Conference, Houston, Oct. 1993:
Paper SPE 26644.
85. Macary, S.M., El-Batanoney, M.H.: "Derivation of PVT Correlations for the Gulf of
Suez Crude Oils", Egyptian Petroleum Research Institute, Jan. 1993.
86. Beal, C.: "The Viscosity of Air, Water, Natural Gas, Crude Oil and its Associated
Gases at Oilfield Temperatures and Pressures", Trans. AIME, 165, 94-115, 1946.
87. Chew, J. and Connally, C.A.: "A Viscosity Correlation for Gas-Saturated Crude
Oils", Trans. AIME, 216, 23-25, 1959.
88. Beggs, H.D. and Robinson J.R.: "Estimating the Viscosity of Crude Oil Systems",
JPT, 27, 1140-1141, 1975.
89. Carr, N.L., Kobayashi, R. and Burrows, D.B.: "Viscosity of Hydrocarbon Gases
under Pressure". Trans AIME 201 (1954), pp 264-272.
90. Lee, A.L., Gonzalez, M.H. and Eakin, B.E.: "The Viscosity of Natural Gases". J. Pet.
Tech. 18 (1966), pp 997-1000.
1015
91. Glas, O.: "Generalized Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlations", JPT, 785-

795, May 1980.
92. Lasater, J.A.: "Bubble-Point Pressure Correlation", Trans. AIME, 213, 379-381,
1958.
93. Standing, M.B.: "A Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlation for Mixtures of
Californian Oils and Gases", Drill. and Prod. Prac., API, 275-285, 1947.
94. Vasquez, M. and Beggs, H.D.: "Correlations for Fluid Physical Property Prediction",
JPT, 968-970, June 1980.
95. Crafton, J.W. (Performance Sciences, Inc.): "Oil and Gas Well Evaluation Using
the Reciprocal Productivity Index Method", paper SPE 37409 presented at the SPE
Production Operations Symposium, held in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma, 9-11 March
1997.
96. Peres, A.M.M., Onur, M. and Reynolds, A.C.: "A New General Pressure Analysis
Procedure for Slug Tests"; paper SPE 18801, presented at the SPE California
Regional Meeting, Bakersfield, April 1989.
97. Peres, A.M.M., Onur, M. and Reynolds, A.C.: "New Methods for The Analysis of
Drillstem Test Data"; paper SPE 19843, presented at the 64th ACTE, San Antonio,
October 1989.
98. Al-Hussainy, R., Ramey, H.J. and Crawford, P.B.: "The Flow of Real Gases
Through Porous Media", JPT (May 1966) 624-636; Trans., AIME 237.
99. Goode, P.A. and Thambynayagam, R.K.M.: "Pressure Drawdown and Buildup
Analysis of Horizontal Wells in Anisotropic Media", SPE Formation Evaluation (Dec
1987) 683-697; paper SPE 14250 (Las Vegas, Sept 1985).
100. Streltsova-Adams, T.D.: "Pressure Drawdown in a Well With Limited Flow
Entry"; JPT Nov 1979; paper SPE 7486 (1979).
101. Satman, A., Eggenschwiler, M. and Ramey Jr., H.J.: "Interpretation of
Injection Well Pressure Transient Data In Thermal Oil Recovery", paper SPE 8908
(Log Angeles, April 9-11, 1980).
102. Cinco L.H., Samaniego V.F., Dominguez A.N.: "Transient Pressure Behavior
for a Well With a Finite-Conductivity Vertical Fracture"; paper SPE 6014 (New
Orleans, Oct. 3-6, 1976).
103. Corey, A.T.: "The Interrelation Between Gas and Oil Relative Permeabilities",
Prod. Mon. 19, 38, 1954.
104. Tjolsen, C.B.; Scheie, A. and Damsleth, E.: "A Study of the Correlation
between Relative Permeability, Air Permeability and Depositional Environment on
the Core-Plug Scale", paper presented at the Second European Core Analysis
Symposium, London, May 1991. Published in Advances in Core Evaluation II,
Reservoir Appraisal, P.F. Worthington and D. Longeron (eds.), Gordon and Breach,
London (1991), 169-183.
105. Honarpour, M.; Koederitz, L. and Harvey, A.H.: "Relative Permeability of
Petroleum Reservoirs", CRC Press Inc., Boca Raton, Florida, (1986).
106. Spinelli, V.D. and Peres, A.M.M.: "Analysis of Slug and Drillstem Tests
Under Water-Oil Two Phase Flow Conditions"; paper SPE 53934 (Caracas, April
1999).
107. Yaxley, L.M.: "Effect of a Partially Communicating Fault on Transient
Pressure Behaviour"; paper SPE 14311 and SPE Formation Evaluation pp. 590 -
598 (1987).
1016
PanSystem
108. Matthew, G. and Horne, R.N.: "Effects of External Boundaries on the

Recognition of Reservoir Pinch-Out Boundaries by Pressure Transient Analysis";
paper SPE 11141 and SPEJ (June 1985).
109. Bidaux, P., Whittle, T.M, Coveney, P.J., and Gringarten, A.C.; "Analysis of
Pressure and Rate Transient Data from Wells in Multi-Layered Reservoirs: Theory
and Application"; paper SPE 24679 and 67th SPE ATCE (1992), pp. 187-196.
110. Prasad, R. K.; "Pressure Transient Analysis in the Presence Of Two
Intersecting Boundaries"; paper SPE 4560 and JPT pp. 89 -96, (1975).
111. Larsen, L.; "Pressure Transient Behaviour of Reservoirs Forming a Pattern of
Coupled Linear Segments"; paper SPE 26459 (Houston, Oct. 1993).
112. Larsen, L.: r;Modeling and Analyzing Source and Interference Data from
Packer-Probe and Multiprobe Tests;, SPE 102698 (San Antonio 2006).
113. Goode, P.A. and Thambyanayagam, R.K.M.: r;Permeability Determination
with a Multiprobe Formation Tester; SPEFE Dec 1992.
1017
PanSystem Windows Registry
PanSystem - Windows Registry
PANSYS31.INI and the Registry:

The Registry is a hierarchical database utilized by the 32-bit versions of Microsoft
Windows including Windows 95, 98, 2000, XP and NT. It is used to store system settings
and options and also contains information and settings for all the hardware, software,
users and preferences of the PC.
When a user applies changes to Control Panel settings, File Associations, System Policies
or installed software, these changes are reflected and stored in the Registry.
The Registry has replaced all of the *.ini files that were present in Windows 3.x
applications. The data formerly contained in pansys2x.ini, etc. are now all contained
within the Registry, along with hundreds of other system settings. All Windows-specific
programs now store their initialization data within the Registry instead of within *.ini files
situated in the Windows folder.
The Registry cannot be viewed or edited with a normal editor - a Registry Editor program
included with Windows must be used:
regedit for Windows 95/98/2000/XP.
regedit32 for Windows NT 4/5.
To run this program, select the Start icon at the lower left of the Windows screen display,
then select Run to open a Run dialog. Follow the instructions and enter regedit or
regedit32 depending on the users system. The program can also be selected from the
drop-down list on the right-hand side of the dialog input field. This procedure will
generate the Registry Editor and if required, this can be added to the Start Menu or to the
Desktop for easier editing.
The Registry Editor is divided into two panes. The left pane contains a hierarchical tree
structure of keys (similar to Windows Explorer) and the right pane shows the String
Values for the currently selected branch. These String Values contain the actual
information stored in the Registry.
There are a number of main branches and each contains a specific portion of the
information stored in the Registry. For users of PanSystem, the most important branches
are:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER: This branch links to a section of HKEY_USERS
appropriate for the user currently logged onto the system.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE: This branch contains computer-specific information
about the type of hardware, software and other preferences on a given machine;
this information is used for everyone who logs onto the machine.
The PanSystem installation procedure automatically creates a sub-folder called
PANSYS31.INI within the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE branch of the Registry. This sub-folder
contains details of the PanSystem set-up, location of the executables, data file
directories, units system locations, etc. The current version number is included in the
sub-folder name, to avoid confusion with the settings from earlier versions.
Under normal operating circumstances, there will be no need to worry about the
PANSYS31.INI sub-folder, since any alterations made while running PanSystem (e.g., a
change of Data Directory or selecting a new Unit System) will be recorded
automatically to the sub-folder when users exit the program.
1018
PanSystem
Users may apply certain changes to their set-up that require changes to be applied in the
Registry sub-folders for PanSystem.
String Values that may need to be updated manually in PanSystem are listed below:
In the Configuration sub-folder of the Registry under HKEY_CURRENT_USER:
HLLC_K_L: This Registry entry applies to Horizontal Well Models using the line
fitting and calculation option with a Linear Flow Plot in Analysis. If the Effective
Well Length (Lw) and Vertical Permeability (Kz) terms are already known and users
wish to invoke the Mechanical (True) Skin Factor (S) calculation option, the Registry
default setting should be changed in the PANSYS31.INI sub-folder by setting
HLLC_K_L = 1. Conversely, to calculate the Effective Well Length (Lw) and
Convergence Skin (Sconv), leave HLLC_K_L = 0 (default). For more details, refer to
Analysis Toolbar Linear Flow Plot.
VertFract-FinCond: This Registry entry applies to Vertical Well Models using the
Vertical Fracture, Finite Conductivity option. When a Linear Flow Plot is used in
Analysis, the line fitting and calculation option can either be used to calculate the
Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity (FCD) and Fracture Conductivity (kfw), by setting
VertFrac-FinCond = 1 (default), or remove the calculations and only display
Extrapolated Pressure (P*), by setting VertFrac-FinCond = 0. For more details,
refer to Analysis Toolbar Linear Flow Plot.
vfp-units (VFP Table): The first time users import a VFP Table for Deliverability
Forecasting, PanSystem will try to determine the nature of the Units (e.g. Metric
Units or Oilfield Units). This information is then provided on the Current File line in
the Import dialog. PanSystem assumes that this will subsequently become the
default VFP Units setting. Users may change the default setting in the
Configuration folder by editing the line, vfp-units = 0 for Oilfield Units (default) or
vfp-units = 1 for Metric Units. For more details, refer to Deliverability Menu,
Production Forecasting dialog.
The vfp-units entry will only appear in the Windows Registry after a VFP Table has
been imported for the first time. Consequently, this particular Registry entry can
only be used to set the default VFP Unit System for subsequent VFP Table
imports into PanSystem.
Other Registry settings that users may wish to customize include:
Reporting
Graphs
Fonts
1019
1020
PanSystem
PanSystem Tutorials
1021
Tutorial 1: Dataprep Gauge Data (Gas Well)
PanSystem Tutorial Example 1
Dataprep Gauge Data (Gas Well)
Overview of Dataprep Workflow:

This example takes users through all the stages in the preparation of Gauge Data from
"raw" Gauge Data Files, typically imported from diskettes, to reduced, re-sampled,
quality-assured data streams with the Flow Periods and Test Periods defined, ready for
use in PanSystem's Analysis section.
The whole example works through the preparation of Gauge Data sequentially, using real
data in a typical workflow.
The alternative input of Gauge Data manually, and the input of the other types of data
required for Analysis, the Well and Reservoir Description data, is covered in Example 2:
Manual Data Entry.
In this example, users will learn how to:
Import raw ASCII files
Define the column and data formats within them
Append files sequentially
Plot Gauge Data and quality-control it by generating differences
Shift and paste data graphically
Edit data in spreadsheet style display
Build a composite data file with multiple gauges stored in it
Define the Flow Rates and Flow Periods graphically, and group Flow Periods into
Test Periods
Reduce data density
Delete, export and save files.
Files Required for this Example:
This example uses three raw Gauge Data files, two of which have the default extension
*.TPR (from Time, Pressure, Rate) files. The three files are:
TEST1.DAT
TEST2.TPR
TEST3.TPR
These are located in the PANSYS\DATA directory (or whatever name directory that users
may have installed PanSystem to).
Assume that these are service company files containing Gauge Data, that two
Gauges were run in the test, and that it is not known which file contains what
data.
Step 1: Importing Gauge Data Files
1022
PanSystem
Importing Gauge Data Files - Step 1
Selecting and Naming Files:

First, select the File New menu option to zero out any existing data.
Now select the appropriate Units System via Config Units. Users must select the same
Units as in the data file (Oilfield Absolute - OILFABS in this case). If users subsequently
want to work in different Units, they can change to a different system once the files
have been imported:
Unit Systems dialog

Then, as this is a Gas Well Test, select Gas as the Fluid Type in the Dataprep, Reservoir
1023
Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog

All Gauge Data control is accessed through the Dataprep Gauge Data menu command and
handled through one dialog - Pressure and Rate Data Preparation. The whole of this
example is based around use of this dialog together with the Dataprep Toolbar:
1024
PanSystem
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog

In the Data File section, only the New, Edit, Import and Test Design buttons are active at
this stage. For this example, select the Import button to proceed to the File Open dialog.
To import TEST1, users will have to select the All Files (*.*) option from the Files of Type
area to see the *.DAT files. When the dialog is first opened, only files with the default
extension *.TPR are displayed:
1025
Importing TEST1.DAT file via the File Open dialog

Ensure that the Spreadsheet Style checkbox is checked, then starting with TEST1.DAT,
double-click on the file name, or select/highlight then select the Open button to open the
data file, and proceed as follows.
Defining The Data Columns:
The next dialog that is generated allows users to specify what data is allocated to which
Column in the Gauge Data file. As it was decided to import using Spreadsheet Style (i.e.
default choice in the File Open dialog illustrated above), users will see the following Data
File dialog:
1026
PanSystem
Data File dialog (Spreadsheet Style)

With the Spreadsheet Style option, users are presented with a view of the data file with
PanSystem making a first guess at what the Columns are.
The Column Names and Gauge Type (Pressure, Rate, etc.) displayed will depend on what
was last set-up when using this option.
In the case of TEST1, users can see the structure is:
Time in Column #1, with format HH:MM:SS. If users page through the file they will
see that the 24-hour Update option is not required, as the hours counter is not re-
set to zero every 24 hrs.
Temperature in Column #2 (F)
Pressure in Column #3 (psia)
The data file was supplied with the comment lines in the header marked with an
asterisk (*). PanSystem automatically recognizes lines marked in this way as
header information and will already section-off this part of the file. In the
example, the Number of Lines in Header field contains the number 2, and the two
header lines appear in blue. Users may change this number to include any number
of lines as header information. In files where the header has not been tagged with
asterisks, this number should be defined by the users.
Comment Lines not partitioned off as header information will be read in as part of
the Gauge Data. Alpha characters are ignored. Numeric characters (e.g. Well
Number, Gauge Number, etc.), will be read in as if they were data, but are easily
identified as spurious points when the data is plotted, and can be deleted
graphically.
1027
If users feel they need to do some pre-editing before import, use a text editor
such as NotePad (small files only), WordPad (good with large files), or another
preferred editor.
Users will notice from the Data File dialog illustrated above, that the initial settings
correctly identify Time in the Column #1, but the format is in Hours. Select Column #1
(it will appear highlighted black), change the Time format by selecting hhhhh:mm:ss
from the drop-down Time Menu in the upper central part of the dialog. Notice that this
also enables the 24 hr Update option, which is not required for this example.
Next, select and highlight Column #2. From the drop-down Gauge Menu choose
Temperature and the Column Name should now change to Temperature #1 automatically.
Change this name if desired.
Finally, select and highlight Column #3. From the drop-down Gauge Menu choose
Pressure and the Column Name should now change to Pressure #1. Users should now
see the columns defined and named as illustrated below:
Data File dialog (Spreadsheet Style) after correctly defining Columns
Note how the internal default name for this data set (they are still called "files"
after being imported into the program) is the same as the "raw" file name (i.e.
TEST1 in this case). Users can change it if desired, in the File Name field at top
left.
Select the Import button and load TEST1.
1028
PanSystem
File Import Status dialog indicating successful data import

Repeat the procedure for TEST2.TPR and TEST3.TPR.
They are both simple two Column files, and that they have Time in Column #1
(format Hours), and Pressure in Column #2. Ensure that the correct Time format
is selected for these two *.TPR files (i.e. hhhhh.mm.ss was previously selected for
TEST1.DAT and Hours must be selected for TEST2.TPR and TEST3.TPR).
Step 2: Plotting and Appending Data
1029
Plotting and Appending Data - Step 2
Selecting and Plotting TPR Data:

Once the three files have been correctly imported, the TPR data are ready to be Plotted.
Select a Pressure Column in the Data File/Column List section of the Pressure and Rate
Data Preparation dialog, then either:
Select the Plot button to plot the selected Pressure Column on an individual basis,
or
Select the Add To List button to add the Pressure Column to the List to Plot section,
repeat for the other two Pressure Columns, then select the Plot button to Plot all of
the Pressure Columns listed in the List to Plot section, as illustrated below:
Selecting the three Pressure Columns to Plot

Now the following Data Edit Plot appears in PanSystem:
1030
PanSystem
It can be seen that the two Gauge records are present; TEST1, and one which has been
split between the two data files TEST2 and TEST3 (presumably a different Gauge was
used to record the latter part of the test).
First, TEST3 needs to be Appended to the end of TEST2; this can be performed with the
Append button in the Data Preparation dialog.
The Append facility can only deal with two selected files at once, so the TEST1: Pressure
file must be removed from the Selected Items area in the Data Preparation dialog by
selecting/highlighting, then using the Remove From List button. Next, the TEST2 file
must be set as the Master Data File (i.e. target file for the Append) as illustrated below:
1031
Selecting files for Append and setting TEST2 as the Master Data File
Now select the Append button to generate the Select Columns to Append (or Copy and
Paste) dialog. Accept the default settings as illustrated below and select OK to perform
the Append operation:
Users do not have to define Column Names since they are already defined by TEST2
(Master).
The TEST3 data will now be Appended to TEST2, but it will still appear as a separate
Column Name in the Data File/Column List and can now be Deleted if required:
1032
PanSystem
TEST3 has been Appended to TEST2, but still appears in the Data File/Column List
The two Gauge files for the whole test (i.e. TEST1 and TEST2), can now be examined.
Plot the two Pressures:
Plot of TEST1 and Appended TEST2
Step 3: Shifting Data
1033
Shifting Data - Step 3
Using the Toolbar - Shifting Data:

The first thing to note is that there is a big shift in clock times between the two channels.
This will be corrected using the Shift Tool from the Dataprep Toolbar:
Select this tool from the Dataprep Toolbar and in the ensuing dialog, select which Column
is to be shifted (i.e. TEST2) and also select Shift Time Only:
Select Shift Stream dialog

Click and Drag the data with the mouse until it looks about right (the TEST2 data appears
as a black line and the cursor changes to a double-headed arrow to indicate Shift Mode).
Users can also Zoom into the data at the start of a Flow Period in order to Shift at higher
resolution on a correlatable feature:
1034
PanSystem
Data Edit Plot after Shifting TEST2 data

A useful method for matching Times is by checking the Pressure Difference between one
data stream and the other. This is covered next.
Note that a precise Shift Value can be entered in the Shift dialog as an alternative
to dragging the data.
Step 4: Data Quality Generating Differences
1035
Data Quality Generating Differences - Step 4
Data Quality - Generating Differences:

First, PanSystem's Difference Tool can be used to check the precise alignment in Time of
the two Gauges:
Select this tool from the Dataprep Toolbar and accept the default Column Name (diff
#1):
Select Column to Difference dialog

Users should then be able to see the Difference (P) between the streams plotted as
illustrated below:
1036
PanSystem
Using Difference Tool to check Gauge Time Alignment

Users can quickly tell if there is a Time Shift as each sudden change in Pressure at a Rate
Change will create a spike in the Difference Curve, as seen here. The Shift process can
be repeated until the best match is obtained, at which point the Difference Curve
spikes should be minimal.
A constant Time-Shift is being assumed over the entire test. In particular, TEST3 has
been Appended to the end of TEST2 and it should not be assumed that they are
perfectly synchronized (however, they are in this example!). Users could Shift sections of
the data by different amounts if required, by drawing a box and shifting only the data in
the box.
Next, examine the Absolute Pressure Differences. Once users have the Times matched,
they will be able to use the Difference tool to quality-control the Gauges. Firstly, there is
noise during the second Drawdown. This can be seen (without having to use the
Difference tool) just by observing the raw data of TEST2; this will be dealt with in a
moment. Firstly, re-scale the right axis (Pressure Difference) by double-clicking on it and
expand the scale to say 30 to +30 psi:
1037
Editing the R-Axis scales

Now users can see something like the Data Edit Plot illustrated below.
This plot provides the following information:
1. Time alignment is still not quite perfect.
2. There is a random scatter between Gauges - this should not be greater than the
quoted resolution for the Gauges.
3. There is a systematic Pressure Difference of about 15 psi - this will correspond to
any Hydrostatic Difference between the Gauges (set at different Depths), plus
any absolute reading error.
4. There is a Drift or other Time-Dependant difference during the final Build-Up. This
may be due to Gauge Drift and/or Fluid Effects.
1038
PanSystem
Plot of increased Pressure Difference Scale to illustrate Gauge Differences

The Time Match can be refined further. Random noise at Gauge resolution has to be
tolerated.
The Absolute Difference needs careful examination. The Hydrostatic Difference should be
calculable from the expected Pressure Gradient of the Wellbore Fluid. In Single-Phase
Tests, it should be relatively constant (unless the Gauges are so far apart as to see
Frictional Pressure Drops, which are Rate-Dependent). In Multi-Phase Tests, this
Hydrostatic Difference may vary between Flowing and Shut-In as the composition of
the Flow Stream changes. In addition, there may be Fluid Segregation with moving
Fluid Contacts.
In PanSystem, users can import all types of data, such as Temperature, Fluid
Density, and surface-measured data such as Wellhead Pressure and
Temperature, etc. If users have unexplained Gauge behaviour, and have this type
of data available, this stage of the analysis is a good time to import it and try to
diagnose any spurious behaviour.
The Residual Difference after Hydrostatic Correction should not exceed the quoted
accuracy of the Gauges. There is no point in Shifting unexplained Gauge differences - it
is better to put both Gauge streams into the Master Data File (this process is discussed in
later stages), and perform the analysis with first one Gauge, then the other, which is very
easy in PanSystem. This will show the sensitivity of final results to unexplained Gauge
effects.
Users can Shift Gauge Data graphically, using the Shift Signal Only option. However, in
practice, users might prefer to introduce a known Hydrostatic Correction (down to
1039
Datum, or to one of the two Gauge Depths) by numerical editing - refer to the next stage
for details.
Step 5: Editing Data
1040
PanSystem
Editing Data - Step 5
Text Editing of Data:

Text editing of Gauge Data is available through the Edit button on the Pressure and Rate
Data Preparation dialog. Either select the data to be edited in the Data File/Column List
section first, then select the Edit button, or select the Edit button first, then select the
data in the Select Data File to Edit dialog. Then select OK to get to the Gauge Data Edit
spreadsheet.
Suppose it had been determined that TEST2 Gauge Pressure#1 needed a (-14.7) psi
Hydrostatic Shift to match the Datum of the TEST1 data:
1041
Gauge Data Edit dialog for TEST2

Users can apply this via the Function button (top right):
1042
PanSystem
Function Data dialog

Whilst working in the Gauge Data Edit dialog, use the Names button to change the
Column #2 (Pressure #1) Name to Gauge 2 (optional):
Edit Column Names dialog
Step 6: Copying Data from File to File
1043
Copying Data From File To File - Step 6
General:
Having performed all the Shifting described in previous Steps, decide if data is to be
Copied from Column to Column between the two files.
There are three tools which handle transfer of data from file to file in different ways:
Copy and Paste a whole block of data including the Time values (same as the
Append function)
Copy, Re-sample and Paste a single Column of data
Copy, Re-sample and Create a new Column of data
Obviously, to use a Copy function for data, users should ensure that all data are
calibrated (i.e. all the Shifting required to match data in both Time and Signal has been
performed).
Copy and Paste a Block of Data, Including Time:
Looking at the Data Edit Plot illustrated below (i.e. the same Plot that was generated
earlier), it can be seen that there is some noise in Gauge 2 (i.e. may also be labelled
Pressure #1 if users did not Rename during the previous Step) during the second Rate
of the Variable Rate Test:
Data Edit Plot for TEST1 and Appended TEST2 with Pressure Difference
1044
PanSystem
Suppose this was surface read-out data, and that the tool telemetry had failed
intermittently during this period (it can happen!). Then, all Columns of data from this
tool (i.e. probably Pressure, Temperature, and more if it was a PLT (Production Logging
Tool)) would be noisy.
In this case, the Copy and Paste Data Block (Including Time) tool would be used, to
replace the whole block of noisy data with a block from a different file:
The "target" file for Pasting into is always the Master Data File that users select in the
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog. In this case, it is necessary to set TEST2 as
the Master File (this was done earlier when the Append operation was performed):
TEST2 set as the Master Data File

Remove TEST1: dif#1 from the Selected Items field, then select the Plot button. Now,
draw a box around the range of Time to be replaced.
Note that it is the Time spanned by the box which is important; all data in that
Time-Span will be replaced, regardless of whether the box actually encloses it.
Select the Copy and Paste Data Block (Including Time) tool and users should see a similar
Data Edit screen to the illustration below. Select the Columns (here it is easy as there is
a one-to-one correspondence), and the block of data (all channels) will be Copied from
TEST1 and Pasted into TEST2, replacing any data originally present in that time range:
1045
Copy and Paste Block of Data Including Time (before Copy and Paste)
That is why it is called a Block Paste; PanSystem has Copied and Pasted all Columns
present in the Master Data File. Since TEST2 did not contain any Temperature data,
none will have been Copied across:
1046
PanSystem
Copy and Paste Block of Data Including Time (after Copy and Paste)
Copy, Re-sample and Paste Single Column of Data:
This tool differs from the previous one in that:

Only one selected Column is Copied and Pasted
The Times in the Target Column are retained. This requires that the incoming
data be Re-sampled at the Target Gauge Times. This is performed by linear
interpolation.
To see an example, Zoom-In to the start of the third Drawdown of the Variable Rate
Test. Users see a single point in TEST1 which does not appear in TEST2. First, set
TEST1 back as the Master File. Then Zoom-In on the area and draw a box around the
three points spanning the noise point to be re-sampled. Select the Copy, Re-sample and
Paste Single Column tool and complete the operation.
1047
Copy, Resample and Paste a Section of a Column (before Copy, Resample and Paste)
1048
PanSystem
Copy, Resample and Paste a Section of a Column (after Copy, Resample and Paste)
Re-sampling Data - Creating Composite TPR Stream:
This third tool option is the one required if users wish to be able to save and analyze
both Gauges in one common file with the same Time values. This also enables users to
switch Pressure Columns during the analysis.
TEST1 (the higher density sampling), will be kept as the Master File, then Re-sample
TEST2 Pressure values into a new Column in TEST1. File TEST1 will then contain both
Gauge records, the second one having been Re-sampled to Gauge #1 Times; in the two
illustrations below, the new Column is named Gauge #2b.
Copy, Resample and Create a New Column (before Copy, Resample and Create)
1049
Copy, Resample and Create a New Column (after Copy, Resample and Create)
Summary:
To re-cap, in this exercise users have:
Appended TEST3 record to the end of TEST2 to make up a complete test record.
Shifted TEST2 Times to match the TEST1 clock Times.
Shifted TEST2 Pressures to match the TEST1 Gauge.
Replaced some noisy data in TEST2 by clean data from the TEST1 Gauge.
Copied the modified TEST2 Gauge record into TEST1, Re-sampling it at TEST1
clock Times. TEST1 now contains both Gauge records.
Save the data via the File Save main menu command to create a system *.PAN file.
Users should either Save data frequently whilst working through the program (or use the
Auto-Save facility, which is set-up in the General Configuration dialog - generated via the
Config General main menu command).
Users could also save the data in ASCII format as a *.TPR file, using the Export button on
Step 7: Defining Flow Periods
1050
PanSystem
Defining Flow Periods - Step 7
General:
Having imported the Gauge Data files and performed quality control edits on the data,
users can now define the Flow Periods on the Master File, TEST1. There are three
graphical methods that can be employed for this purpose in PanSystem.
Only plot the primary Gauge Column (i.e. TEST1:Gauge #1).

Exact Coordinates:
Use the Mark Exact Point tool (illustrated above) for this purpose. Users should Zoom-In
to the first Rate Change (i.e. start of first Flowing Period) and Mark where they think
the Flow Period began; this does not necessarily have to correspond to a Data Point.
Exact Point for Flow Period definition

The Rate Change dialog that appears will display the co-ordinates of the exact position
that was Marked. As this is the start of the test, the Rate for this Rate Change should be
zero. On OK from the dialog, a Rate Change Marker is displayed on the Data Edit Plot,
with a cross-hair at the Mark Exact Point location.
1051
Data Edit Plot with Rate Change Marker displayed

Nearest Point:
Selecting this tool and clicking on the plot marks a Flow Rate Change at the Data Point
nearest to the cursor position. Zoom-In on the end of the first Flowing Period and click
the cursor near the last Flowing Data Point. Enter the Flow Rate in the dialog (12.25
MMscf/day in this case; users can edit the Rates later, if necessary).
1052
PanSystem
Nearest Point for Flow Period definition

This is the more efficient method if users have a high data density with Pressure readings
at the ends of the Test Periods. If not, users will have to "eye-ball" the spot with the
Mark Exact Point tool (described previously), or use the Intersecting Lines approach
(described next).
1053
Data Edit Plot with Rate Change and End of Flow Period Markers displayed
To speed up defining the remaining points, hold down the Ctrl key and click either of the
two preceding tools (or click them with the right mouse button), and the tool remains
active until users switch it off again.
Intersecting Lines:
This is the third method; start by clicking two points before and two after the Flow
Rate Change, then select the tool. The intersection of the two lines is taken as the Rate
Change.
1054
PanSystem
Intersecting Lines for Flow Period definition

Enter Flow Rates of 3, 6, 9 and 12 MMscf/day as Rates for the Flow-After-Flow test.
1055
Data Edit Plot with Flow Period Markers displayed

Rate History Prior To Test:
Users cannot enter Rate Changes graphically if there are no data points to select! In the
situation of a 10 hour Flow Period of 10 MMscf/day finishing 10 hours before the first
Drawdown in the Gauge record began. Proceed as follows.
Go to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, and select the Rate Changes button
in the Data File section. Users will see a spreadsheet version of the Rate Change data
they have entered so far. Select the Insert button and ask for two Rows before Row 1.
Enter the Times (negative Times are included here, as per the above information):
1056
PanSystem
Entering Rate Data prior to Test Record

When the Data Edit Plot is regenerated, it should appear something like the illustration
below. Users will also need to:
Expand the Time (i.e. X-axis) and the Gas Flow Rate (i.e. R-axis) scales to display
the full range of data. Use the Axes option from the main Edit menu and ensure
that the Round and Lock Scales options are unchecked before entering new
Min/Max Value settings and selecting OK.
Enable the Rate Schedule to display the Step-Rate Schedule from the Rate Changes
Table. Use the Plot Rate Schedule option from the main Edit menu.
1057
Final Pressure and Rate History Plot
To edit a Rate Change point via the Rate Change dialog, click on its Marker in the
Ruler Bar with the right mouse button, or use the left button whilst simultaneously
holding down the Ctrl key. To drag the Marker and re-position it manually, just
click on it with the left button and drag.
Save the data via File Save once again (the Rate Change data are not saved if the Export
option is used).
Step 8: Creating Flow Rate Column
1058
PanSystem
Creating Flow Rate Column - Step 8
(Optional Step):
If users want Rate History treated as a step function, as in the illustration below, they do
not need to create a special Flow Rate column using the Create Rate Column (Q) tool:
Users only need to use this tool if they require a generated Piece-Wise Linear or a P/T
Wellbore Storage-Derived Rate.
Final Pressure and Rate History Plot from Step 7
Step 9: Reducing Data
1059
Reducing Data - Step 9
General:
Users could reduce data density at any time, but it is easier once Flow Periods have been
defined, since it is possible to reduce one Period at a time - typically with logarithmic
sampling.
Point Deletion:
Just click and highlight the relevant Data Point/s, then select the Delete (trash can) tool:
The Esc key can be used to cancel any Data Point/s that are currently selected.
Block Deletion:
Click and drag a box around the relevant group of Data Points, then select the Delete
(trash can) tool:
Undoing Deletion:
Select the Undo Last Reduction or Deletion (U) tool to undo the last Delete/Reduce
action:
Select the Restore Initial Data (I) tool to undo all the Delete/Reduce actions:
Data Reduction:
Users can Reduce points based on:

All the points in a box (if a box has been drawn)
All the points in a Flow Period (if a Flow Period is selected - to select one, click the
upper Ruler Bar between two Rate Change Markers). This takes precedence over
the box method. Multiple Flow Periods can be selected for Reduction.
All the points on the screen (if no portion has been selected)
Once users have a range of points selected, select the Reduce tool and choose the
preferred method of Reduction (described in Enter Reduction/Smoothing Details).
Try these methods on the different Flow Periods. Use the Number (No.) tool to see how
many points there are in a selected Flow Period:
Deleted or Reduced data points are actually retained in memory and can be retrieved via
the Undo or Initialize buttons (described above), until the moment the Confirm (Cnf) tool
is activated:
1060
PanSystem
This permanently erases all deleted points from memory; Undo or Initialize
operations cannot be used after this point. This "clearing out" will speed up plotting of
large files.
If users have not selected the Confirm (Cnf) tool, they can retrieve the data with the
Initialize (I) tool. An alternative way of retrieving the data (and the only way if the
Confirm (Cnf) tool has been used!) is to load (i.e. File Open) the *.PAN file that should
have been Saved previously (or re-import the *.TPR file if users have Exported the
edited data).
Step 10: Grouping Flow Periods into Test Periods
1061
Grouping Flow Periods into Test Periods - Step 10
General:
Users will probably want to analyze the Flow-After-Flow test as one test, to get Rate-
Dependent Skin and Deliverability. To avoid having to click on all the Flow Periods
separately when selecting this test for analysis, they can be Grouped here. Hold down
the Shift key while dragging the mouse over the Ruler Bar Flow Periods for all four
Drawdown Rates:
The individual Flow Periods will then be displayed as a single Test Period on the Ruler
Bar. Flow periods can be ungrouped here with the Ungroup tool, or by holding down
the Shift key and left-clicking in the ruler bar.
Step 11: Saving Data to PanSystem Data File
1062
PanSystem
Saving Data to PanSystem Data File - Step 11
General:
The data set is now ready for Well and Reservoir parameter data entry, then Analysis. As
this is the end of this tutorial, the file can be saved at this stage.
Select File Save and enter a File Name and Directory Path. Default extension *.PAN.
Step 12: Exporting Gauge Data
1063
Exporting Gauge Data - Step 12
General:
If users would like to save TEST2 (which has already been worked on), in its present
state, go to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog and select the Export button to
generate the Export Data Files dialog:
Select the Data File to Export
Select the Column Numbers to Write to and Column Delimiter
Select the Time Format to Export
Give the file a name (e.g. TEST2MOD - default extension is *.TPR)
Select OK to Export the file
End of Tutorial 1
Go to Tutorial 2: Manual Data Entry (Oil Well)
1064
PanSystem
Tutorial 2: Manual Data Entry (Oil Well)
Manual Data Entry (Oil Well)
Overview of Manual Data Entry Workflow:

This example describes the procedures required for manually entering data into
PanSystem to perform an Analysis. Manual entry of Well and Reservoir data is always
required. Manual entry of Time-related Pressure and Rate Data is only required when
users do not have Gauge Data in ASCII files.
In this example users will:
Enter Well data
Enter Layer data
Enter Fluid data
Enter Pressure Gauge and Rate Data
For a Black Oil Fluid Type Well, once the data are set-up, users will:
Plot "raw" data
Analyze the test with Log-Log, specialist and Type-Curve methods
Simulate the test response to validate it.
It is assumed for the purposes of this example that the Oilfield Absolute (OILFABS)
Units System is selected via the Configuration Units menu option.
Step 1: Dataprep Well/Fluid/Layer Data Entry
1065
Dataprep Data Entry - Step 1
Well/Fluid/Layer Data Entry:

From the opening PanSystem screen select the Well and Reservoir Description
(Analytical) option from the Dataprep Menu to gain access to the data entry dialog for
Well, Fluid and Reservoir data.
The Reservoir Description dialog should now be displayed. When entering data it is useful
to bear in mind that the system has been set up to allow consistent data entry for all
data types. This means that within the various dialogs illustrated throughout this
example there are many fields which are not required if the user's objective is simply to
analyze a simple Pressure Transient test or sequence of tests.
The mandatory parameters which must be entered are highlighted in red. These fields
must be completed to allow the system to compute the required results such as
Permeability, Wellbore Storage, etc. PanSystem always checks for missing data.
Reservoir Description data entry dialog

The Reservoir Description dialog is split into four main sections and these will be reviewed
in turn.
Well Control:
1066
PanSystem
The Well Control area of the dialog allows users to define the Number the Wells in the
system and to select which Well they wish to edit. Data can then be entered/edited for
that particular Well. This facility is designed for setting up Multi-Well models for use with
the Advanced Simulation options, and allows the superposition of the effects of up to five
Wells for use in Designing or Analyzing Pulse/Interference tests.
For the purpose of Analyzing Welltest data from a single Well, the default selection
should be left as:
Well 1
P - Well 1; Active
The entry of the Well-specific data is accessed via the Well Parameters button which will
take users to the Well Parameters sub-dialog:
Well Parameters data entry sub-dialog

Only two items must be initialized for the Analysis of a single Well test:
Well Radius: Enter 0.29 ft in this field
Wellbore Storage Model: Leave this at the default "Classic" model. Users will be
able to select a different Model during Analysis if the data suggests they should.
The other fields are required for Advanced Simulation, which is not covered in this
example.
Select OK to close the sub-dialog.
Fluid Type:
In the Fluid Type area of the Reservoir Description dialog, ensure that the selection is set
to Oil (i.e. Single-Phase, since users will be dealing with a Single-Phase Oil Producer).
The Multi-Phase checkbox options must be left unchecked.
Principal Well Orientation:
1067
The Principal Well Orientation should be set to Vertical (= Vertical or Slant Well). This
selection will define subsequent options in Analysis, such as the Type-Curves that are
presented in Type-Curve Matching.
Layer Control:
The Layer Control area of the Reservoir Description dialog allows access to the rest of the
various data entry sub-dialogs in this section. Users can define up to five Layers, which
can be applied in Advanced Simulation to allow simulation of Multi-Layer Systems. For
this exercise the default setting should be retained at:
Layer 1
Layer 1; Active
Select the Layer Parameters button to access the Layer Parameters sub-dialog:
Layer Parameters data entry sub-dialog

Enter the values as shown in the above illustration:
Formation Thickness (107 ft)
Porosity (0.25 decimal fraction)
These are highlighted in red because they are mandatory.
The Layer Pressure field can either be left at zero or an estimate entered; it is not used in
Analysis and is actually one of the derived parameters. The Water Saturation, Gas
Saturation and Rock Compressibility fields are used in the calculation of Total
Compressibility (Ct), and can be left at zero if users intend to enter a value for Ct in Fluid
1068
PanSystem
Parameters (see the following section for details). The Total Compressibility field is not
editable on this sub-dialog and is presented for information only. This will be accessed
from the Fluid Parameters sub-dialog.
The bottom section of the Layer Parameters dialog allows users to select a Reservoir Flow
Model for use in the subsequent Analysis. This can be easily changed when Analyzing
data and is often unknown at this stage of data entry. It should now default to using
the Radial Homogeneous Model, a good starting point for the Analysis.
Users are now ready to proceed. The Model Parameters button provides access to the
parameters characterizing the selected Reservoir Flow Model; in the case of Radial
Homogeneous these are the Skin and Permeability. Since the object of the Analysis is to
derive these parameters there is no need to initialize them at this stage.
Select OK to return to the Reservoir Description dialog.
Fluid Parameters:
Now select the Fluid Parameters button to access the (Oil) Fluid Parameters sub-dialog:
Fluid Parameter data entry sub-dialog

Enter the values as shown in the above illustration:
Bo (1.06)
(2.5)
Ct (4.2E-6)
Only the mandatory (red) parameters have been entered for subsequent calculations to
be performed in PanSystem. It is possible to have PanSystem use Correlations to
calculate these values; in this case, the input data fields in the upper part of the Fluid
Parameter sub-dialog need to be populated with data and the Use Correlations checkbox
1069
option must also be checked. Users can select the Correlation they require, then select
the Calculate button to have the necessary values computed. The Water Saturation, Gas
Saturation and Rock Compressibility values must also be entered in the Layer Parameters
sub-dialog, if users require them to be used in the computation of Total Compressibility.
Once the mandatory Oil Fluid Parameters data have been entered, select OK to return to
the Reservoir Description dialog. Select OK again to return to the opening PanSystem
screen.
All the non Time-based data have now been entered.
Step 2: Dataprep Pressure and Rate Data Entry
1070
PanSystem
Dataprep Data Entry - Step 2
Pressure and Rate Data Entry

The next stage is to enter the Gauge data - Time, Pressure and Rate (if available).
Manual entry is going to be used in this case (i.e. Import from ASCII File was described
earlier in Example 1: Dataprep Gauge Data).
Select the Gauge Data option from the Dataprep Menu to gain access to this part of the
program. The Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog is now presented as illustrated
below:

Select the Edit button and then respond Yes when prompted with "No Data Files in this
Well - do you want to create one?". The Define New Data File sub-dialog that is
subsequently displayed, allows users to define the data Columns they wish to have in the
new Data File:
1071
Define New Data File sub-dialog

Column #1 is automatically defaulted to Time, and Column #2 to Pressure. Users have
no simultaneous Flow Rate data for this test, so click on the drop-down arrow under
Column Type for Column #3, (Temperature) and from the drop-down menu select "Not
Used".
The Data Column Name may be edited. Leave this at default "Pressure #1", or change it
if desired.
The Data File Name field can also be edited to define a Name for the new Data Set.
Users can leave this at the default NEW TPR, or enter something else. All data Columns
created in this file will be prefixed with this File Name for later identification.
If users know the number of lines of data they are going to enter, set the Number of
Rows to this figure if desired. Otherwise, leave it at 100 (or increase it if necessary) -
after entering data it will set itself automatically.
The sub-dialog should now appear as illustrated below:
1072
PanSystem
New Data File format specified

Select OK on this sub-dialog (and the subsequent warning dialog) to begin manually
entering the Pressure and Time data.
Select and highlight NEW TPR: Pressure #1 in the Data File/Column List area of the
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, then select the Edit button to access the Edit
NEW TPR sub-dialog illustrated below:
Edit New TPR data entry sub-dialog

The data to be entered are listed in the following table.
Note that while entering the data, once Line 16 is reached, the scroll bars to the
right of the table should be used to scroll down to new blank lines. This process is
repeated until the entire data set is entered.
If users wish to avoid having to enter the above data manually, the dataset is
supplied in file EX2.TPR with the PanSystem installation and can be Imported using
the techniques described in Example 1: Dataprep Gauge Data. Alternatively, users
can Copy and Paste the HTML data from this table into an Excel spreadsheet using
the Paste Special/HTML option, then Copy and Paste the Time and Pressure
columns into the Edit New TPR sub-dialog.
Enter the following data:
1073
Point Time Pressure

Number
1 0.0125 3096.55
2 0.025 3106.77
3 0.0375 3116.48
4 0.0583 3128.95
5 0.0833 3147.63
6 0.1208 3178.38
7 0.1625 3205.95
8 0.2125 3238.37
9 0.2917 3287.2
10 0.4167 3356.27
11 0.5417 3413.89
12 0.667 3466.26
13 0.8125 3518.62
14 1 3571.75
15 1.1875 3617.4
16 1.375 3652.85
17 1.625 3692.27
18 2 3732.22
19 2.5 3763.43
20 3.25 3794.06
21 4 3815.96
22 4.75 3823.69
23 5.5 3832.63
24 6.25 3838.93
25 7.75 3843.01
26 9.25 3847.51
27 10.75 3850.75
28 12.25 3853.51
29 13.75 3855.5
30 16 3857.98
31 18.25 3859.98
32 20.5 3861.48
33 23.25 3863.21
34 26.25 3864.48
1074
PanSystem
35 30 3865.73
Once the Edit New TPR sub-dialog has been populated, select OK to return to the
Step 3: Plotting Raw Data
1075
Plotting Raw Data - Step 3
Plotting Raw Data:

On returning to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, the NEW TPR Pressure
Data Column is listed in the Data File/Column List as illustrated below:
Pressure Data Column listed

To Plot the data just entered, select the Data Column by clicking on and highlighting NEW
TPR: Pressure #1 and select the Plot button to generate the Data Edit Plot as illustrated
below.
In order to complete the data entry, the Flow Rate History must also be entered. This
test is a Shut-In after a single Constant Rate Flowing Period. Several approaches are
available to do this in PanSystem, and in this example users will manually enter the Flow
Rate data directly into the Rate Changes Table.
1076
PanSystem
Data Edit Plot of Pressure Data

From the Data Edit Plot menu select the Gauge Data option from the Dataprep Menu, to
return to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, then select the Rate Changes
button to access the Edit Rate Changes sub-dialog for Rate Data entry. The sub-dialog is
illustrated below (with zero entries):
1077
Edit Rate Changes data entry sub-dialog

The table should be completed as described below:
Start of Flowing Period:
The first Time value is set at 15.33 hours. This is because there was a 15.33 hour
Flowing Period prior to the Pressure Build-Up, and the Build-Up starts at Clock Time
= 0.
The Rate at 15.33 hours was 0 (i.e. the Well was Shut-In before flowing).
The Initial Pressure at 15.33 hours is not required for the Analysis since users
do not have any Flowing Pressure data to analyze, and it can be left at zero, or a
value may be entered in if known (an estimate of Initial Pressure will be computed
as part of the Analysis).
Start of Shut-In:
The Rate at 0 hours was 174 STB/day (the end of the Flowing Period).
The last Flowing Pressure (3086.33 psi), at 0 hours, is important; it will be used
in the Build-Up Analysis (p on Log-Log Plot, computation of Skin (S), etc.).
End of Shut-In:
1078
PanSystem
The third line has Time set at 30 hours, marking the end of the Build-Up. The zero
Rate entry here means the Flow Rate was zero from the preceding Time (0 hours)
up to this Time (30 hours).
The final Shut-In Pressure is not essential to the table, since there is no ensuing
Test Period to analyze, but one may be entered if desired.
Edit Rate Changes data entry sub-dialog with example data entered
Select OK, then select the data Column NEW TPR: Pressure #1 and the Plot button to
display the data again. The Rate data that has been entered will now appear as a Step
Profile on the Data Edit Plot as illustrated below (there is a Plot Rate Changes option on
the Edit Menu which can be used to switch the data display on/off). Also, in this
illustration, the X-axis has been expanded to see the Rate Changes prior to the start of
the Shut-In data (use the Axes option from the Edit Menu and ensure that the Round and
Lock Scales options are unchecked before entering new Min/Max Value settings and
selecting OK).
Rate and Pressure Data displayed on Data Edit Plot
1079
It is possible to proceed directly to Analysis from this screen using the Analysis Menu.
Step 4: Analysis
1080
PanSystem
Analysis - Step 4
Now select the Plot option from the Analysis Menu to access the Test Overview Plot as
illustrated below:
Analysis - Test Overview Plot

This display is used to show the complete test sequence available for Analysis (in this
case, just a single Build-Up). Above the Plot Title is the Ruler Bar on which Markers are
used to separate the Test Periods. In order to analyze the Build-Up data, click the Test
Period between the Markers in the Ruler Bar. The selected Period should now be
highlighted in dark gray. Users can now create Plots with any of the diagnostic Plotting
Tools available in the Toolbar.
Log-Log Plot:
Select the Log-Log Plot tool by clicking on the Toolbar button:
The Plot illustrated below will be displayed:
1081
Log-Log Plot
Note that the Toolbar has changed to include various Tools for drawing lines and
other Analysis functions.
A quick look at the Derivative suggests that users are probably dealing with a simple
Radial Homogeneous Reservoir, with Wellbore Storage and Skin, so the current Flow
Model selection should be okay. Users will be able to change this at any time via the
Model option on the Analysis Menu.
Select the Flow Regime Definition (FR) tool to define any Flow Regimes which are
identifiable on the Plot:
After users click once on the Toolbar button a vertical dashed line will appear 'attached' to
the cursor. To mark the portion of the data that is dominated by Wellbore Storage, move
the line to the beginning of the data set (i.e. the start of Unit Slope) and click again to
lock the line position. A second vertical dashed line will now appear attached to the
cursor, and this can be moved to the end of the Period that is dominated by Wellbore
Storage (i.e. where the Derivative starts to level out - most, if not all, of this test is
dominated by Wellbore Storage). When users click again PanSystem will also display the
Define Flow Regime dialog (illustrated below):
1082
PanSystem
Log-Log Plot with Wellbore Storage

The dialog contains Flow Regime options defined by the currently selected Well and
Reservoir Flow Models and Boundary Conditions. Select OK to the current selection
(Wellbore Storage) and the area between the vertical lines will be identified with a red
section in the Ruler Bar. These colored Flow Regime Markers will be carried through to all
other Plots selected.
Repeat this exercise with the Flow Regime Definition (FR) tool and mark the data which is
approaching Radial Flow at the end of the Derivative; Radial Flow has not developed fully
by the end of this test.
If users have Autofit Lines switched-on (under the Analysis Menu) fitting these two Flow
Regimes will also cause the appropriate lines to be fitted to the data. If this feature is
switched-off select a Derivative point in early time dominated by Wellbore Storage by
clicking on it with the cursor, and select the Toolbar button for a Unit Slope Line:
Confirm that this is Wellbore Storage at the prompt, and a line of Unit Slope will be drawn
through the selected point with a Results Box providing values for the Real and
Dimensionless Storage Coefficients.
This can be repeated with the Zero Slope (Horizontal) Line tool:
This is applied to the data (almost) exhibiting Radial Flow and a calculation will be
performed for Permeability (this will be an upper limit since the late data are not quite
in Radial Flow). The Test Overview Plot should now appear as illustrated below:
1083
Note that users can move a line after placing it, by clicking on it with the right
mouse button, or by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking with the left mouse
button. The actual line is moved by holding down the mouse button with the
cursor positioned over the grab handle on the line.
Log-Log Plot with Analysis Results

Radial Flow Plot (Semi-Log):
Now select the toolbar button for a Semi-Log Plot.
Note that the Flow Regime Markers have been carried over from the Log-Log Plot; also
note that if Autofit Lines is switched-on, any relevant lines will be plotted on the Semi-Log
Plot already, otherwise users will need to add the Radial Flow Line manually. To do this
click on the green Radial Flow Regime section of the Ruler Bar. The Regime Marker
subsequently becomes cross-hatched.
Select the Best-Fit Line toolbar button:
A line will be fitted by least-squares through all the data points within that Flow Regime.
Permeability and Skin are calculated from this line. The Radial Flow (Horner) Plot should
now appear as illustrated below:
1084
PanSystem
Radial Flow (Horner) Plot

Confirm the Model parameters generated on the Radial Flow Plot to the system by using
the Confirm Results (Cnf) tool:
This will allow users to store the calculated values of Permeability, Skin and Extrapolated
Pressure in the Reservoir Model Parameters. When the Confirm Results (Cnf) tool is
selected the dialog illustrated below is generated:
Confirm Results dialog (Semi-Log Plot)

Users could also have "Confirmed" the calculated Wellbore Storage Coefficient on the Log-
Log Plot. Return to the Log-Log Plot and select the Confirm Results (Cnf) tool. The dialog
generated from this plot should be as illustrated below.
1085
Confirm Wellbore Storage Coefficient (and Permeability) dialog (Log-Log Plot)
Users may prefer to keep the Permeability they derived from the Semi-Log Plot, in
which case uncheck the Permeability checkbox (as illustrated above), to prevent
the Reservoir Model Parameters "store" from being updated.
Alternative Log-Log Display:
There is an alternative way of displaying Build-Up data on the Log-Log Plot which
removes the Data Compression that often occurs at the end of the test when the
"Equivalent Time" Superposition Function is used. This Data Compression often makes
the identification of Boundaries on the Derivative difficult.
Select the Derivative/Smoothing Constant tool:
Within the Derivative Selection dialog that is subsequently generated, check the Plot
Against Elapsed Time checkbox (as illustrated below):
Plot Against Elapsed Time option

The Derivative Values are still correctly computed using Superposition (as before), but
now they are plotted against Elapsed Time t.
1086
PanSystem
Note how the late portion of the Log-Log Plot has been expanded. This is very
useful when Boundaries are present.
Log-Log Plot still using Superposition, but plotting against Elapsed Time t
Step 5: Simulation
1087
Simulation - Step 5
Quick Match:
To determine that this Flow Model and combination of Model Parameters correctly
describes the Well and Reservoir, users should now generate a theoretical Pressure
Build-Up response and compare it to the measured data. This is done by selecting the
Quick Match option from the Simulate Menu. The Quick Match dialog will now be
generated (illustrated below), with the Model Parameters that were Confirmed from the
various Diagnostic Plots used earlier.
Quick Match dialog

These defaults should give a reasonable first estimate for the Model Parameters. Select
Calculate to start the Quick Match Simulation. When finished it will be plotted as a
continuous curve. The Log-Log Plot should now appear as illustrated below:
1088
PanSystem
Quick Match Simulation - first estimate

The Wellbore Storage Coefficient is good (i.e. Unit Slope portion), but the Permeability
seems to be too low (i.e. late portion of the Derivative is too high), a consequence of
fitting a line through data that were not in fully-developed Radial Flow.
In order to refine the Quick Match the Model Parameters may be adjusted and the
Simulation repeated until a better Match is achieved.
An improved Match can be obtained with the values:
Cs = 0.0093 bbl/psi
K = 12.2 mD
S = 9.2
Select the OK/Confirm button and uncheck the Replace Previous checkbox to see both
sets of traces displayed for comparison. The screen should now be as illustrated below:
1089
Quick Match Simulation - final result
The two lines that were manually fitted at an earlier stage have been deleted for
clarity. If users had left the Replace Previous checkbox checked, the original set
of traces would have been replaced with the improved set. If users wish to
delete the original set (or other Quick Match sets) after comparison, either
double-click on the Quick Match Results box displayed on the Plot or select the
Results option from the Edit Menu to generate the Edit Results dialog, where the
appropriate set/s of traces can be deleted.
Now check the Simulation on the other plots by clicking on the Cartesian and Radial Flow
Plot buttons:
1090
PanSystem
Cartesian Plot
1091
Radial Flow Plot
Note that the Simulated data can be seen on any of the plots by selecting Simulate
and Quick Match. The Radial Flow Plot will allow a more sensitive adjustment to
the Skin Factor (e.g. a value of 9.3 looks better).
Improved Match on Radial Flow Plot with adjusted Permeability value

The Quick Match Results box and Match set of traces can be switched-on/off using the
Edit Results dialog (illustrated below). Check/uncheck the Show Results checkbox to
display/hide the Quick Match Results box on the current plot and similarly, check/uncheck
the Show Match checkbox to display/hide the Quick Match Results (i.e. set of calculated
traces) on the plot.
1092
PanSystem
Edit Results dialog (with no additional Quick Match traces available)
As described earlier, each Quick Match will overwrite the original Model
Parameter data in the Quick Match Results box (and the associated set of traces on
the plot), with the currently used values, unless the Replace Previous checkbox is
unchecked on the Quick Match dialog. Up to four additional Quick Match data
sets can be stored and their associated set of traces displayed on the plot.
Automatic Matching:
As an alternative to manually adjusting the Quick Match parameters by trial and error,
users should try the Automatic Matching facility available on the Simulate Menu. Select
one of the diagnostic plots (e.g. Radial Flow Plot), then select Simulate Auto Match. The
Auto Match - Points Selection dialog will be generated; this explains that since no points
have been selected, PanSystem will select points automatically if users accept with OK
(users are also offered a range of other options, such as controlling point selection or
manually selecting points). In this case, the default setting will be accepted, so select OK
to proceed to the Automatic Matching dialog.
1093
Automatic Matching dialog

The initial values will be the most recently confirmed Model Parameter set. The Lower
and Upper Bounds are set by default. Change the Lower Bound of the Wellbore Storage
Coefficient (Cs) to zero to allow more freedom for the Regression (users might also like
to alter the initial values from what is already close to the best answer, to make it more
of a challenge). Set the Maximum Number of Iterations to 30 (this is usually sufficient).
Select OK to start the Regression and a Matching Progress sub-dialog is generated
(illustrated below), which allows users to monitor the calculation progress.
Matching Progress sub-dialog
1094
PanSystem
Observe the Goodness of Match indicator as the Regression proceeds. Users can Stop the
Regression before it terminates if they feel that it has got close enough. On OK from the
sub-dialog, the Quick Match routine will then generate a response based on the best set
of parameters found during the Regression.
Optimized Match obtained with Auto Match

The optimization gives a better overall Match to the data, at the expense of a slightly
poorer Match to the late portion, which is apparent on the Log-Log Plot Derivative:
1095
Log-Log Plot after Auto Match

Users could experiment by increasing the Weighting of the (nearly) Radial Flow points
(refer to Auto Match - Points Selection) to improve the Match.
Tiling Plots:
Selected plots can be "Tiled" for comparison using the Tile Selected Plots tool:
Users can either manually select up to four Diagnostic Plots required for Tiling by
holding down the Ctrl key, then left-clicking on the Toolbar buttons of the Plots to be
Tiled, or by right-clicking on the Toolbar buttons directly.
PanSystem remembers previous Diagnostic Plots that have been generated (i.e. for
the previous four plots), so if users select the Tile Selected Plots tool directly,
PanSystem will Tile the last few Plots that were generated previously without
having to select them manually.
In this case, manual selection will be used, so select the Toolbar buttons for the Log-Log,
Cartesian, Radial Flow and Test Overview Plots, then select the Tile Selected Plots tool.
The whole screen will now appear as illustrated below; this allows users to check at a
glance that the Simulation is consistent for all of the selected Diagnostic Plots.
1096
PanSystem
Tiled Plot of Auto Match Simulation Results
Use any alphanumeric key, the Esc key or the right mouse button to return to the
main PanSystem Analysis Plot display. Use the Print Scrn key to copy the Tiled Plot
to the Windows ClipBoard.
Step 6: Type-Curve Matching
1097
Type-Curve Matching - Step 6
Type-Curve Plot:
As an alternative (or a supplement) to Diagnostic Plot Analysis with line-fitting, there is a
Type-Curve Matching facility; this is accessed via the Type-Curve Plot (TC) tool:
The data will be re-plotted as a Log-Log Type-Curve Plot with the line-fitting Toolbar
buttons replaced with the Type-Curve Matching tools:
Type-Curve Plot
First, select the Type-Curve Match (M) tool:
Keep the defaults on the Select Type Curve dialog (illustrated below):
Td/Cd Method
Radial Homogeneous with Storage and Skin
Default Type-Curve
1098
PanSystem
Select OK and the plot will be presented with Drawdown Type-Curves displayed.
The Type-Curves can be moved over the data by clicking and dragging them with the
mouse until a Match is found. When close to the Match, the arrow keys can be used to
move the Type-Curves if preferred; coarse steps are applied when the keys are used
alone, and fine steps are applied when the Ctrl key is held down when the arrow key is
used:
1099
Type-Curve Matching process

Once the Type-Curves are matched, select the Type-Curve Match (M) tool again to
terminate Matching Mode. The Nearest Matching Curve Number (counting from bottom-
up) will be displayed along with the corresponding Curve Value (i.e. Curve #10, CDe2S =
1E10, or thereabouts, in this case).
Users can enter a different Number if they feel that PanSystem has not identified the
correct curve, (press the Tab key to update the identifier Value), then OK. The Match
Results for the Model Parameters are then computed from the Match and displayed on the
Type-Curve Plot, which should now appear as illustrated below:
1100
PanSystem
Final Type-Curve Match
Users should not forget to Confirm these Match Results with the Cnf tool if they
want to store them as the current Model Parameters.
The left (blue) and right (red) arrow buttons in the Type-Curve Matching Toolbar allow
users to either move to the next stage of Type-Curve Matching (or return to the
previous stage), depending on the selected Model:
In this case, clicking on the right arrow will move users to Type-Curves for Boundary
Analysis (not appropriate with this data); clicking on the left arrow will return users to
the Type-Curve Plot that was displayed prior to Matching.
End of Tutorial 2
Go to Tutorial 3: Gas Well DST and Deliverability
1101
Tutorial 3: Gas Well DST and Deliverability
Gas Well DST and Deliverability
Overview of Gas Test Analysis Workflow:

This example covers a complete Gas Well Drill Stem Test (DST), with an initial Flow and
Shut-In, a Flow-After-Flow (four-rate) Test for Darcy and Turbulent Skin Analysis, and a
final Shut-In.
The procedure to be followed is:
Analyze initial Build-Up to reach an Initial Reservoir Pressure estimate.
Analyze final Build-Up for Reservoir Parameter determination.
Analyze Flow-After-Flow Test for Darcy and Non-Darcy Skin Factors.
Verify and refine whole test sequence interpretation by History Matching.
Calculate Deliverability from this Transient Analysis.
Perform conventional LIT and simplified C-and-n analyses and Deliverability
calculations, perhaps for regulatory purposes.
Perform Production Forecasting.
The data file is supplied with the PanSystem software via File Open and is called:
TESTC.PAN
The original Gauge Data have already been Imported, Edited, and the Rate Change
Events picked graphically (as explained in Example 1: Dataprep - Gauge Data). All Well
and Reservoir data have been entered and the file saved as a *.PAN system file, ready for
Analysis.
If users would like to start from scratch, the "raw" Gauge Data can be imported
from TESTC.TPR.
This example will only review the Gas-Specific part of the Well and Reservoir Parameter
input. The rest of this type of input is covered in Example 2: Manual Data Entry (Oil
Well).
After using File Open to select TESTC.PAN, the file will be loaded with the whole Test
Sequence displayed as illustrated in the Test Overview Plot below:
1102
PanSystem
Test Overview Plot for TESTC.PAN

Select the Gauge Data option from the Dataprep Menu and OK on the warning message,
to generate the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog.
Select and highlight the Test C: Pressure 1 entry in the Data File/Column List area, then
select the Plot button to generate a Data Edit Plot as illustrated below (if necessary,
change the X-Axis Scaling using the Axes/X-Axis option from the Edit Menu and ensure
that the Round and Lock Scales options are unchecked before entering new Min/Max
Value (e.g. Min = 5 hours/Max = 50 hours) settings and selecting OK):
1103
Data Edit Plot for TESTC.PAN

The Surface Flow Rate Schedule for the test is listed in the Rate Changes Table, which
can be generated by selecting the Rate Changes button in the Data File section of the
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog (i.e. generated by the Gauge Data option on
the Dataprep Menu):
1104
PanSystem
Rate Changes Table from the Edit Rate Changes dialog showing the Rate Allocation for
the DST
Step 1: Gas Fluid Properties
1105
Gas Fluid Properties - Step 1
Checking and Setting-Up Fluid Properties:

This section only covers the differences between Oil Well Analysis and Gas Well Analysis.
The previous Tutorial Example, Manual Data Entry (Oil Well), dealt with the entry of the
Reservoir Parameters which are common to both Fluid Types.
Select the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) option from the Dataprep Menu, to
generate the Reservoir Description dialog. Ensure the Gas checkbox is checked in the
Fluid Type section (Tutorial Example 3 deals with a Dry Gas Producer).
Select the Layer Parameters button to generate the Layer Parameters dialog, then select
the Model Parameters button and note in the Model Parameters sub-dialog (i.e. Radial
Homogeneous) there is a Non-Darcy Skin Factor (D) present. All values are currently
zero because no Analysis has yet been performed. Select Cancel from this sub-dialog to
return to the Layer Parameters dialog; an estimate of the Layer Pressure has been
entered - in conjunction with Layer Temperature, it is a mandatory parameter for
Analysis of a Gas Welltest. Select OK from this dialog to return to the Reservoir
Description dialog.
The major differences lie within the Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog (accessed via the
Fluid Parameters button in the Layer Control section). The dialog appears as illustrated
below:
Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog

The Reference Gas Properties have been computed at Layer Pressure and Temperature.
The Use EoS checkbox is checked, meaning that these properties have been computed
1106
PanSystem
by an Equation of State using Gas Compositional Data. Users can compute at any
Pressure or Temperature to compare with laboratory PVT measurements, but must leave
this sub-dialog with values at Layer Conditions for Analysis of the Test Data.
A table of Pseudo-Pressures (m(p)) is required for the Pseudo-Pressure Analysis option
(users will be able to try the Pressure-Squared or Pressure approximations if desired,
when operating in the Analysis section). The Pseudo Tables have already been created
for this Example 3 file, but to see how they are calculated, users can try the following:
Select the Gas Composition button to generate the Gas Composition sub-dialog.
The Mole-Percentages of Non-Hydrocarbon "impurities" have been specified. These
will affect the calculations of Gas Properties to a small extent. Change Nitrogen %
to zero. Select the Normalize button to re-adjust the Mole Percentages to total
100%. Select the Calculate button to change the Gas Gravity:
Gas Composition sub-dialog after Normalize and Calculate

Return to the Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog, ensure the Use EoS checkbox is
checked and select the Calculate button; this recalculates the Gas Properties at
Layer Conditions:
1107
Gas Fluid Parameters sub-dialog after Calculate

Select the Pseudo Tables button to generate the Pseudo Table Editing sub-dialog,
then select the Calculate All button; this will calculate all three tables in one step.
Alternatively, select each table in turn and use the Calculate Table button:
Pseudo Table Editing sub-dialog
To ensure that the results will match the following Analysis process, reload the
TESTC.PAN file, before proceeding further (i.e. File New, then File Open
TESTC.PAN).
Step 2: Initial Build-Up Analysis
1108
PanSystem
Initial Build-Up Analysis - Step 2
Initial Pressure Estimate:

The purpose of Analyzing this Build-Up is to get an estimate for the Initial Reservoir
Pressure (Pi), from the Horner Extrapolated P*. Estimates of Reservoir Parameters can
also be obtained if the data are of good quality.
Users can perform their own Analysis of the Diagnostic Plots for this Build-Up. The EPS
interpretation was performed as follows:
Select the Plot option from the Analysis Menu; this displays the Test Overview Plot.
Click on the first Build-Up in the Ruler Bar.
Select the Log-Log Plot tool to generate a plot (as illustrated below). With the
AutoFit Lines option enabled on the Analysis Menu, use the Unit Slope and Zero
Slope tools to fit lines through the Wellbore Storage and Radial Flow regions
respectively. Finally, Mark the Flow Regimes using the Flow Regime (FR) tool and
the Ruler Bar (optional). A value of Cs = 0.0335 bbl/psi should be obtained.
Notice that Radial Flow has hardly had time to develop.
The use of these graphical tools was described earlier in Tutorial Example 2 -
Analysis).
Log-Log Plot of Initial Build-Up
1109
Now select the Radial Flow Plot (Horner) tool to generate a plot (as illustrated
below). By fitting a line through the (almost) Radial Flow portion of the data, the
following values can be obtained and are displayed in the Model Results box:
K = 2.5
S = 0.555
P* = 7235.64 psia
Radial Flow (Horner) Plot of Initial Build-Up

Finally, select the Type-Curve (TC) tool to look at the Type-Curve Plot. The data do
not Match any of the Radial Homogeneous Type-Curves; the Wellbore Storage is
probably non-ideal.
The extrapolated P* is quite a bit higher than the value used to compute the Fluid
Parameters (i.e. 7149 psia estimated from the early Gauge Data). If this P* was
felt to be more reliable, the Fluid Properties should be re-computed with the new
value. The original values have been kept for this Analysis.
Step 3: Final Build-Up Analysis
1110
PanSystem
Final Build-Up Analysis - Step 3
Evidence of Depletion:
The objective of this Analysis is to estimate Permeability and Total Skin Factor, and to
look for any evidence of Depletion from the extrapolated Pressure compared to that in
the Initial Build-Up.
Select the Test Overview Plot tool:
Click on the Final Build-Up period in the Ruler Bar, then select the Log-Log Plot and Semi-
Log Horner Plot tools to perform line fitting operations (as described in Step 2 for the
Initial Build-Up). The following points are important:
The Log-Log Plot (illustrated below) shows very little Wellbore Storage, and appears
to show a long period of Radial Flow. The Radial Flow regime has been Marked
(optional).
The Semi-Log Horner Plot straight line (illustrated below) gives the following
results:
K = 3.23
S = 0.011
P* = 6950 psia
1111
Radial Flow Plot for Final Build-Up
k and S are rather different from the values from the Initial Build-Up, but should
be of better quality. The lower P* might indicate Depletion. Use the Confirm
(Cnf) tool to store these values in the Reservoir Description.
Step 4: Flow-After-Flow Transient Analysis
1112
PanSystem
Flow-After-Flow Transient Analysis - Step 4
Skin Factors:
This Analysis is aimed at determining the Darcy Skin Factors (S) and Non-Darcy Skin
Factors (D).
Returning to the Test Overview Plot, click on the Ruler Bar with the right mouse button
to select the four sequential Flow Periods (or hold down the Ctrl key whilst clicking with
the left mouse button). This allows users to select all four rates for a single Analysis.
Select the Log-Log Plot tool:
Multi-Rate Drawdown Log-Log Plot

On the Log-Log Plot (illustrated above), reasonably clear Radial Flow is seen (bearing in
mind that these are all Drawdowns). The Zero Slope (Radial Flow) line has been moved
until its Permeability agrees with the Final Build-Up value of K = 3.23, for reference. The
Derivative/Smoothing (T') tool has also been used to increase the Derivative Smoothing
to 0.25 in this case. If necessary, adjust the Unit Slope line (i.e. until Cs = 0.0299
bbl/psi) and confirm the Wellbore Storage Coefficient from this plot with the Confirm
(Cnf) tool.
On the Semi-Log (Radial Flow) Plot (illustrated below), users could fit lines to all four
Drawdowns then average them to give a best overall estimate of Permeability.
However, in this case, users can impose the value from the Final Build-Up, as it is likely
1113
to be more reliable. Accordingly, use the line on the plot (or place one on the plot if none
exists) and adjust its gradient (by right-clicking on the line, then left-clicking and
dragging the "handles" at the ends of the line) until it gives K = 3.23 mD and fit it to one
of the Flow Periods (e.g. lowest Test TP1). Next, use the Parallel Line tool (i.e. three
times), to place three more lines at the same Permeability, one on each Test Period and
adjust each line as necessary.
Multi-Rate Drawdown Semi-Log Plot, with Parallel Lines

Now, the Rate-Dependent Skin calculations can be made. Enable the Non-Darcy Skin
Analysis option on the Analysis Menu. PanSystem will highlight each parallel line in turn
and ask users to confirm which Flowing Period it is associated with (users could have
enabled the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis option before fitting the lines, in which case they
would have been prompted to identify the parallel lines as each one was applied).
After confirming each line, the program now knows the Total Skin Factor associated with
each Flow Rate, so a Skin versus Flow Rate Plot (SvQ) (illustrated below) can now be
created with the SvQ tool. Select at least two points, then select the Best Fit Line tool to
fit through the points. In the Define Line dialog, select line type Skin Calculation. The
Model Results box on the plot shows:
S = 2.16
D = 1.98E-4 (Mscf/day)-1
F = 4.05 psi2/cp/(Mscf/day)2
Confirm these results to the Reservoir Description with the Confirm (Cnf) tool (users will
overwrite the S value previously Confirmed from the Horner Plot; this is appropriate
since the Horner Skin was a Total Skin which included both Darcy and Non-Darcy terms).
1114
PanSystem
Total Skin versus Normalized Flow Rate Plot

Owing to the nature of the "generalized" Superposition Function used for the Semi-Log
Plot in the Multi-Rate Drawdown Semi-Log Plot, with Parallel Lines (illustrated earlier),
both the Total Skin and the Flow Rate plotted here are "normalized" (i.e. they are not the
actual values but have been Functioned. This is explained in Skin versus Flow Rate Plot).
However, the S and D values derived from the plot are real values and can be used
without further correction. An alternative, "unnormalized" approach is described after
this section.
As a quality check, return to the Radial Flow Plot and enable the Correct For Rate
Dependency option in the Analysis Menu (if no Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F) value
appears in the Correct for Rate Dependency dialog, users forgot to Confirm (Cnf) the
Results of the SvQ Plot; return to the SvQ Plot and use the Cnf tool, then return to the
Radial Flow Plot and follow the previous instructions). Ensure that the Apply Rate
Dependency checkbox is checked, then OK (as illustrated below).
Correct for Rate Dependency dialog

If the Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient (F) is correct, the different Flowing Periods should all
plot out on one trend (as illustrated below), since the Rate-Dependency has now been
1115
backed-out (as per the Y-axis label). Users can also refine the Non-Darcy Flow
Coefficient (F) manually by re-plotting with different values to obtain the best results.
Rate-Dependency Correction - quality check

Using Generalized Superposition theory in the Multi-Rate Drawdown Semi-Log Plot, with
Parallel Lines (illustrated earlier), m(p) for each Flowing Period is computed with
reference to the Pressure at the start of that Flowing Period. This has certain practical
advantages, but the resulting SvQ Plot (i.e. the Total Skin versus Normalized Flow Rate
Plot illustrated earlier), uses normalized values of Total Skin and Flow Rate which
cannot be directly related to the true values.
Unnormalized Approach:
This is an alternative approach, where the more conventional Variable Rate Drawdown
Superposition Function is used and all Flowing Periods are referenced to the Initial
Pressure (Pi), at the start of the DST (refer to Skin versus Flow Rate Plot).
Select the Time Function (Tf) tool, check the Reference Back to Initial Pressure checkbox
in the subsequent Select Time Function dialog, then select OK.
Select Time Function dialog
1116
PanSystem
Initially disable the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis option from the Analysis Menu, then repeat
the Semi-Log Plot Analysis as described above. The Semi-Log Plot will look a little
different because the m(p) values for all four Flowing Periods are now computed
relative to the same Initial Pressure (Pi) - the Pressure entry (7149 psia) in the first line
of the Rate Changes Table, and the Time Function is modified accordingly.
Semi-Log Plot for the four Flowing Periods using alternative Superposition Function
referenced to Pi
Enable the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis option and repeat the SvQ Analysis and perform the
Rate-Dependent Skin calculations as before.
The Total Skin versus Flow Rate Plot now consists of points corresponding to the true
Flow Rates (i.e. 3.95, 6.6, 9.015 and 12.11 MMscf/day) rather than the normalized
values, with the corresponding true Total Skins.
1117
Total Skin versus Flow Rate Plot

The results are similar to those from the other method, with:
S = 2.32
D = 2.13E-4 (Mscf/day)-1
F = 4.35 psi2/cp/(Mscf/day)2
The weakness of this more conventional approach is that the Semi-Log Plot depends on
the choice of Initial Pressure (Pi), and this is often not known with certainty. The Total
Skins taken through to the SvQ Plot will differ slightly if a different Initial Pressure (Pi) is
used, resulting in different D and S estimates. Try changing the Initial Pressure (Pi) in
the Rate Change Table to the extrapolated P* from the Initial Build-Up (or any other
value) to see the effects of this change.
Step 5: Full Test Sequence History Match and Refinement
1118
PanSystem
Full Test Sequence History Match and Refinement - Step 5
Simulation:
The Permeability from the Final Build-Up has been confirmed, in conjunction with the
Darcy and Non-Darcy Skin Factors and Wellbore Storage Coefficient from the four-rate
Drawdown Analysis. An extrapolated Initial Pressure (P*) is available from both Build-
Ups and they are different (and also different from the Initial Pressure (Pi) read from
the Gauge record). It is necessary to look at the whole Test Sequence in order to
confirm the overall parameters and check what is happening to the Pressure.
The "Initial Pressure" value is the value in the Rate Changes Table at the start of the
Test. If users have a good static Initial Pressure reading, this could be entered here (the
example file was set-up using 7149 psia Gauge Pressure). The P* value from the Initial
Build-Up might be a better estimate (i.e. 7235 psia).
Select the Test Overview Plot, then select the initial Flowing Period in the Ruler Bar.
Now select Quick Match from the Simulate Menu. The current Pi value of 7149 psia will
be listed (if not, users have not selected the first Flowing Period). Calculate with this,
then try with Pi = 7235 and compare.
Using 7235 gives generated Pressures obviously too high at the end of the first Build-
Up, while the estimate of 7149 is better. The four-rate Flow-After-Flow Test is Matched
quite well, but the Wellbore Storage Coefficient appears to be too large. It looks like the
Flow Rate estimate for the initial Clean-Up Period is low. Neither Start Pressure
produces a Match for the Final Shut-In.
1119
History Match to complete DST using current Analysis and Pi = 7149 psia
1120
PanSystem
History Match to complete DST using current Analysis and Pi = 7235 psia
Estimating Pi:
Users could repeat the Quick Match Simulation with different Pi values until the final
Shut-In Pressure of the first Build-Up (a good tie-in point), is Matched. Instead, select
the first of the Flow-After-Flow Test Periods in the Ruler Bar (as illustrated below). The
next Quick Match will automatically shift the simulated response to go through the first
Pressure of the selected Flow Period (i.e. 6925.5 psia as specified in the Rate Change
Table), and will compute Pi. Set Wellbore Storage (Cs) = 0 to speed up the computation.
The computed Pi is 7157 psia.
History Match with revised Initial Pressure (Pi) and zero Wellbore Storage
It would be better to run subsequent Simulations with this Flowing Period highlighted so
as to anchor the response at a reliable Pressure. As users will see, the estimate of Pi
will change as the Model is modified, so starting it at an imposed Pi would prove
cumbersome.
The Match is now good except during the Final Build-Up (if the Initial Clean-Up data are
ignored; these have probably been assigned the wrong Rate, or are affected by
Hydrostatic Effects or a changing Skin Factor). There appears to be some Depletion, or
at least a noticeable Boundary Effect, at the Final Build-Up. Wellbore Storage does not
appear to be significant (the Build-Up was a downhole Shut-In).
Clearly, it is not possible to obtain a unique Boundary Geometry as no obvious
Boundaries are seen on the Derivative of any of the individual Test Periods - if there is a
Boundary, it lies outside the Radius of Investigation of the tests. Likely Boundaries would
have to be estimated, based on geological and geophysical information.
1121
To illustrate the principles involved, assume that the geologist says that a nearby fault is
a possibility. A few Quick Match runs on the Test Overview will establish that it would
have to be about 150 feet away from the Well in order to bring the Final Build-Up into
line.
Select the Model option from the Analysis Menu to generate the Select Analysis Model
dialog. Select the Single Fault Model in the Boundary Model section, then select the
Boundary Parameters button to generate the Single Fault sub-dialog; enter 150 ft. into
the entry field, ensure the No-Flow option is currently selected and OK from the sub-
dialog and the Select Analysis Model dialog. Perform a Quick Match (a Single Fault
prompt dialog will be generated to remind users of their selection) - OK on the prompt
and Calculate.
Note that it has not been necessary to postulate a Fully Closed System in order to
replicate the apparent "Depletion" observed in the Pressure behaviour - this may
keep users on good terms with the geologist. A small reduction in Non-Darcy Skin
Factor (D) to 2.0E-4 (MMscf/day)-1 is necessary to restore the Match during the
four-rate test (as illustrated below).
Final Match with a Boundary introduced

With this modification to the Model, the estimated Pi is now 7202 psia (from the Quick
Match Results box). Although this gives a good Match on linear Time scales (as
illustrated above), closer inspection of the Final Build-Up on a Log-Log Plot suggests that
the Model is not correct, because the simulated Derivative shows a Boundary response
before the end of the Test (i.e. the Fault is too close). A better Match to the slight
curvature of the Derivative can be obtained by putting the Boundary at 300 ft., but at this
distance, the Test Overview Match will suffer.
1122
PanSystem
Users can obtain reasonable Matches on the Test Overview Plot with a variety of
Boundary Configurations (the simplest possible configuration has been used in this case).
Each scenario will necessitate a small adjustment in Non-Darcy Skin Factor (D) and
perhaps Darcy Skin Factor (S), and will produce a different Pi estimate. Probably none
will Match both the Test Overview Plot and the Log-Log Final Build-Up, which suggests
that the Reservoir Model may be more complex, or that some other factor (such as
changing Hydrostatic Correction between Drawdown and Build-Up because of Liquid Fall-
Back) might be interfering.
Automatic Parameter Optimization:
Still with the first Flowing Period of the four-rate Test highlighted on the Test Overview
Plot, try Simulate Auto with the same Model, after selecting around 20 Points over the
entire Test. The Automatic Matching dialog is generated first - users can select the
parameters to be used and may also alter any of their upper/lower limits:
Automatic Matching dialog

The best results in this case can be obtained by selecting around 10-15 points over the
final Build-Up (good quality Radial Flow response), a few points at the very end of each
1123
Flowing Period (i.e. for the S and D parameters) and a few points at the end of the first
Build-Up (so that PanSystem can deal with the observed decrease in p* from the first to
the second Shut-In). Since the reported Rate during the Clean-Up is suspect, do not
pick any points here. If users find that Auto Match refuses to start, pick the very first
Pressure Point in this Flowing Period and try again.
Yet another set of parameters (i.e. a slight variation on the same theme) is obtained,
depending on the Points that users selected. In the illustration below, Wellbore Storage
has been allowed as a variable.
Parameter optimization with Auto Match
Step 6: Deliverability from Transient Analysis
1124
PanSystem
Deliverability From Transient Analysis - Step 6
Deliverability Analysis:
Having Confirmed all the Model Parameters to the Reservoir Description, either from
Quick Match or Auto Match, users can examine the Deliverability predicted for this Well.
On selecting the IPR option from the Deliverability Menu, users have a chance to alter the
Reservoir Parameters relevant to the Well Deliverability using the Transient Welltest and
LIT Results dialog (illustrated below).
Transient Welltest and LIT Results dialog

Users can opt not to have certain Model Parameters updated from the Analysis section by
unchecking the checkboxes relating to the individual Model Parameters. Users can also
have up to five IPR calculation pages made available with the checkbox and arrow feature
situated at the bottom right of the dialog; with the checkbox checked and the page
increment set, the individual calculations will be overlaid on the Deliverability Plot. In this
manner it is easy to compare a range of different Sensitivities.
1125
It could probably be concluded from the attempts at History Matching, that the Layer
Pressure should be higher. Enter a preferred value (in this case, the Pi estimate of 7202
psia derived from the previous Step 5 -Final Match with a Boundary Introduced, has been
used). Select the Calculate button. The estimated AOF (i.e. based on the theoretical
Semi-Steady-State Inflow equation described in Deliverability Analysis - Gas Wells) using
the parameters derived from Transient Pressure Test Analysis - is 12.19 MMscf/day for a
default Drainage Area of 640 acres.
Select OK to plot the Deliverability curve. Users can change between a Linear and
Logarithmic display, and re-edit the parameters if desired.
Step 7: Flow-After-Flow LIT Analysis
1126
PanSystem
Flow-After-Flow LIT Analysis - Step 7
LIT Analysis:
Returning to the Test Overview Plot (with the Plot option from the Analysis Menu or Test
Overview Plot tool), users can perform an LIT (Laminar-Inertial-Turbulent) Analysis using
the four Final Flowing Pressures. Select the four Flowing Periods (with the right mouse
button or Ctrl key and left mouse button) then select the LIT button.
Test Overview Plot with Select Test Type dialog

Choose Flow-After-Flow for the Test Type, then the LIT Analysis: Flow-After-Flow Test
dialog will appear.
1127
LIT Analysis dialog

This gives users the chance to review the Flowing Pressures and Rates from the Test
Periods that were defined in the Data Preparation phase. The revised Layer Pressure
should be used (i.e. the Pi estimate of 7202 psia derived from the earlier Step 5 -Final
Match with a Boundary Introduced). Select OK from this dialog and the Sandface LIT Plot
will be displayed (as illustrated below, but without a line fitted).
1128
PanSystem
Sandface LIT Analysis Plot

Place a line through the points using the Best-Fit Line tool (select the Extended Flow
option when prompted), and the Laminar and Turbulent Flow Coefficients (B) and (F), will
be calculated together with the AOF. This value of F compares favorably with that
obtained from the Transient SvQ Analysis. Again, users need to Confirm (Cnf) these
results to use them in Deliverability calculations (do not forget to do this!).
Select the IPR option from the Deliverability Menu. This time, the Transient Welltest and
LIT Results dialog contains both the Transient and LIT data.
Transient Welltest and LIT Results dialog with LIT Analysis Data included
The results are similar, but the theory-based AOF is significantly lower that the one
derived from actual flowing test measurements, due principally to a difference in the B-
coefficients. This might indicate that some of the Model Parameters need to be adjusted
in the theoretical model. Alternatively, the LIT Flowing Pressures did not correspond to
Semi-Steady-State flow because the Test Periods were too short (i.e. they were still
Transient); this would give an optimistic picture of the Well Productivity.
Assuming that some adjustment of the Model Parameters is required. As an example,
uncheck the Drainage Area checkbox and change the setting to 100 acres, then select
Calculate.
1129
Transient Welltest and LIT Results dialog after adjusting Drainage Area size
The agreement is greatly improved. Select OK to display the Sandface Deliverability Plot.
There are various ways of displaying these results for comparison. The illustration below
compares the Deliverability curves on Linear Axes (use the T/L LIN tool from the toolbar).
The four Final Flowing Pressures are also plotted (i.e. marked and identified with the
relevant number).
1130
PanSystem
Deliverability from LIT and Transient Results

The illustration below is the "alternative" AOF Plot on Log-Log Axes (use the T/L LOG tool
from the toolbar).
1131
AOF Plot from LIT and Transient Analyses; Log-Log presentation
Step 8: Flow-After-Flow C-and-n Analysis
1132
PanSystem
Flow-After-Flow C-and-n Analysis - Step 8
C-and-n Analysis:
Returning once again to the Test Overview Plot (with the Plot option from the Analysis
Menu or Test Overview Plot tool), users can perform a Deliverability Analysis by the
empirical C-and-n (or "simplified") method. Once more, select the four Flowing Periods
(with the right mouse button or the Ctrl key and left mouse button), then select the C+n
tool. Choose Flow-After-Flow for the Test Type, then the C&n Analysis: Flow-After-Flow
Test dialog will appear.
Enter the revised Layer Pressure if necessary (i.e. the Pi estimate of 7202 psia derived
from the earlier Step 5 -Final Match with a Boundary Introduced).
Sandface C&n Plot for the C-and-n or Simplified Analysis Method

Use the Best-Fit Line tool to fit a line through the four Flowing Points on the plot. The
AOF of about 13 MMscf/day is close to what was derived from the theoretical LIT
method; Confirm (Cnf) these results to use them in Deliverability calculations (do not
forget to do this!).
Select the IPR option from the Deliverability Menu. The C&n Results dialog contains both
the "Extended" Analysis (from the Sandface C-and-n Plot of the four Extended Flowing
Periods) and a section for "Stabilized" Analysis results. Select Calculate to compute the
1133
Stabilized Flow Rate at the last measured Flowing Pressure, the Stabilized C-coefficient
and the Stabilized AOF.
C&n Results dialog

Other relevant results are listed on an Additional Data sub-dialog accessed via the More
Results button.
1134
PanSystem
C&n Results - Additional Data dialog

The Deliverability Plot can be presented with Linear scaling (upper illustration below - use
the E/S LIN tool from the toolbar) or Logarithmic scaling (lower illustration below - use
the E/S LOG tool from the toolbar), with the four Extended Flowing Points (markers #1 -
4) and the Stabilized Point (marker #5):
1135
Deliverability Plot after C-and-n Analysis
AOF Plot after C-and-n Analysis
Step 9: Production Forecasting
1136
PanSystem
Production Forecasting - Step 9
Forecasting:
As well as doing Deliverability calculations, users may also use the Model Parameters they
have determined from the Analysis, to forecast Production Rates and average Layer
Pressures in the future.
Details of this facility are contained in the Help topic for the Production Forecasting
dialog, which is generated by selecting the Forecasting option from the Deliverability
Menu.
Production Forecasting dialog

It is shown here after entering the 5-year period (over which the Production Profile will be
investigated). In this case, 100 logarithmically-spaced steps have been selected.
The Contract Rate is set to 8 MMscf/day with a Bottomhole Pressure (BHP) of 1000 psia is
being maintained. (A more realistic Model could have been applied by importing a VHP
Table to model the Tubing Performance of the Well).
Selecting OK will show the Single Fault dialog normally associated with Quick Match
calculations. Select OK from this dialog to generate the Parameter Entry dialog (which
1137
should be familiar from Quick Match). Select the Calculate button and the Forecast will
be computed and plotted.
The Results are illustrated below, where users can see that the Contract Rate can only be
met for the first few months, before the Rate starts to decline.
Production Forecast Rate Profile

Obviously, this example is slightly simplistic. Normally, users would be interested in the
decline with Closed System Geometries.
In such cases, PanSystem will default to accounting for the change in Constant
Compressibility with declining Average Layer Pressure. This can be switched on or off
under the Pressure Transformation option (i.e. Material Balance Correction) on the main
Analysis Menu.
End of Tutorial 3
Go to Tutorial 4: Reporting
1138
PanSystem
Tutorial 4: Reporting
Reporting
Overview of Reporting Workflow:

This example takes users through all the stages in the process of generating a PanSystem
Report after having carried out an Analysis.
This example works through the Reporting process sequentially, using data in the order
that a typical user may follow. Also included are some hints and tips for getting the best
possible quality Report.
In this example, users will learn how to:
Set-up and change the Printer Settings
Alter the Font used for the Report
Make adjustments to the Data to be Reported
Change the information on the Front Page of the Report
Send a Report to a Printer
Export to a Word Document
Load and save Template settings
Create a Custom Template
Print a Report to a File
Generate a Text-Only Report
Files For This Example:
This example uses the PanSystem file:
EXAMPLE.PAN
This is located in the PANSYS\DATA directory (or whatever name directory that users may
have installed PanSystem to). Use the New option from the File Menu to clear any
existing data, then select the Open option from the File Menu to select and load this file.
Assume that an Analysis has already been performed and that Log-Log, Semi-Log and
Cartesian Plots have been used for the Analysis.
Step 1: Altering Printer Settings
1139
Altering Printer Settings - Step 1
Selecting a Printer:
First, select the Print Set-Up option from the File Menu to generate the Print Set-Up
dialog (illustrated below). This contains a drop-down list of the Printers that are currently
available to Windows (the actual Printers listed will vary depending on which Windows-
compatible Printers have been installed via the Control Panel settings on a user's PC or
Network).
Print Set-Up dialog

Using the drop-down menu associated with the Name field in the Printer section, select
the Printer which the Report is to be printed on. If users select OK at this point, this
designated Printer will be used for all Printed Output (i.e. including Plots).
If users want to alter or just simply check the current settings for this Printer then
proceed as follows.
Changing Printer Set-Up:
If users select the Properties button (or Options button, depending on the Printer Driver)
a sub-dialog will appear, the contents of which will depend on the selected Printer (all
Printers have their own settings which can be altered). The illustration below shows a
typical example for a Postscript Printer.
1140
PanSystem
Changing Printer settings via the Printer Properties sub-dialog

Once users are happy with the settings, select OK to store them and return to the Print
Set-Up dialog. Select OK again on the Print Set-Up dialog to confirm the choice of Printer
and settings.
Step 2: Changing the Report Font
1141
Changing the Report Font - Step 2
Selecting Fonts:
Once users have selected a particular Printer, they may also want to select the character
Font to be used for the Report (there is likely to be some variation in appearance between
Printers for a given Font Type, especially if the Printer does not have the selected Font
installed; in which case it will go for the nearest matching Font it can find).
To choose a new Report Font, select the Fonts option from the Configure Menu which will
generate the PanSystem Font Definition dialog (illustrated below).
PanSystem Font Definition dialog

Select the Report Font button to generate the Font sub-dialog illustrated below:
1142
PanSystem
Selecting a Report Font with the Font sub-dialog

The Font Name, Style and Size are displayed in the three list fields and a Sample of the
Font is displayed in the center of the sub-dialog. In the Font Name field the small symbol
on the left indicates the Font Type:
this symbol indicates that the Font is a supplied Printer Font.
this symbol indicates that the Font is a True Type Font which Windows can download
for the Printer to use.
If there is no symbol this signifies that the Font is a System Font. The Printer can usually
only replicate its own Printer Fonts exactly.
Users may find that they need to experiment with the Font Settings to get the best
results from their own Printer; typically a 10-point Font gives good results. If users select
one of the bigger Font Sizes, large Tables may end up overflowing the page; if smaller
Font Sizes are used, the Report may be too difficult to read.
In terms of resolution, smaller text is more readable in sans-serif typefaces such as

Verdana or Arial, but users may prefer to read a serif typeface such as Times or
Times New Roman.
Step 3: Configuring a Report
1143
Configuring a Report - Step 3
Changing the Report Content:

After selecting the Printer and Font, it is a good idea to check the content and size of the
Report to check that it does not contain unnecessary data and is not excessively large
(e.g. 50 page Reports with lots of illustrations can take a long time to print). To do this,
select the Configure Report option from the Report Menu to generate the Configure
Report dialog (illustrated below):
Configure Report dialog

Select the Format button to calculate the Size of the Report (this is subsequently
displayed in the Section Sizes area). If users want to change the content of any of the
sections then select the Edit button beside the appropriate section to be altered (i.e. in
the Sections area). This will generate an associated Edit dialog that allows users to omit
or include topics from within that section, as explained in the following links:
Edit Input Report Section
Edit Report Analysis Section
Edit report Deliverability Section
Edit Report Layout
For example, the Edit Report Analysis Section dialog allows users to change the items to
include for each Plot Type, or to omit Plots altogether (very handy if a particular Plot has
no useful results). The example dialog (illustrated below), shows an example of a Radial
1144
PanSystem
Flow Plot being omitted (it does not have the word Selected displayed beside it). For
each Plot, users can also select or exclude the Topics to Include in the Report.
Selecting Analysis data for Reporting

To alter the Report Header or Footer select the Edit Layout button from the Configure
Report dialog to generate the Edit Report Layout sub-dialog, where users can change the
Report Headings and select the items to be displayed in the Header or Footer:
1145
Edit Report Layout sub-dialog

When the Show Logo option is checked (default setting), the logo displayed in the top
left corner of the Report is the EPS company logo. However, this information is stored as
part of the file itself, so reading in EXAMPLE.PAN will replace the default settings (i.e. no
logo is displayed in this case). The logo is taken from a file LOGO.BMP stored in the
PANSYS\REPORTS directory (or whatever directory PanSystem has been installed to).
Users can substitute their own personal company logo by saving it in Windows Bitmap
(*.BMP) format as LOGO.BMP. Alternatively, keep the EPS company logo on the top left,
and display a personal company logo on the top right by saving it as CLIENT.BMP in the
same directory.
Changing the Cover Page:
The Front or Cover Page of the Report contains textual information on the Analysis. To
edit this information, select Edit Layout on the Configure Report dialog to generate the
Edit Report Layout sub-dialog (illustrated above), and after checking the Include Cover
Page checkbox, select the Edit Cover Page button to generate a further Report Cover
Page sub-dialog (this sub-dialog can also be accessed directly via the Report Cover Page
option from the main Report Menu):
Report Cover Page sub-dialog

The default field names on the left-hand side (i.e. Analyst Name, Company, etc.) are
specified in the Description sub-folder located below the Pansys31.ini folder in the
Windows Registry. If users change any of these entries in the sub-dialog, they will be
stored in the *.PAN file next time it is saved, and will take precedence on recall. To make
a permanent change to the defaults, edit the relevant section of the Windows Registry.
1146
PanSystem
If users want to include any other information, select the Edit Remarks button to
generate the Edit Remarks sub-dialog (this contains a large free-format edit field where
any other useful information can be entered). This will appear as part of the Front Page
of the Report (and subsequent pages if required).
Once users are happy with the information to be included, select OK to return to the
Configure Report dialog and select the Format button again to check the Size of the
edited Report. Users can also save these Report Settings as a Template for future use, as
described shortly in Using Report Templates.
Step 4: Printing a Report
1147
Printing a Report - Step 4
Report Output - Printing:

There are two ways to Print a Report:
1. Select the Print option from the Configure Report dialog.
2. Select the Report Output/Print Report sub-menu option from the main Report
Menu.
The first option has the advantage of allowing users to see the Size of the Report before
it has Printed, if the Format option is used (PanSystem will perform an automatic Format
if users have not done so).
The second option allows users to Print the Report directly to either a Text File or to the
selected Printer.
Both options allow users to abort the Printing process by selecting Cancel.
Step 5: Export to Word Document
1148
PanSystem
Export to Word Document - Step 5
Report Output - Export to Word:

This option is invoked by selecting the Report Output/Export to Word Document sub-
menu option from the main Report Menu.
This option generates a standard Windows Save As dialog that allows users to Save the
Report to a MS Word (*.DOC) file, with graphics embedded. After Naming the document
and Saving it to the required folder, users are supplied with a screen prompt to View the
document.
After accepting Yes to the prompt, MS Word is opened and the Report contents can be
Viewed, Edited, Printed, Saved and Re-formatted (i.e. Plot Re-sizing, Page Number
insertion, application of Headers/Footers, etc.). This option writes the same items to file
as are normally printed directly via the alternative Print Report menu option (described in
the previous section). To ensure that the generated Word Report will have the required
Content, check the settings in the Configure Report dialog.
Typically, a Report may contain:
Table of Contents (i.e. created by Word, not by PanSystem).
Cover Page with Remarks, Header and Footer options (i.e. Text, Date, Page
Numbers).
Input Data and Plots, including:
Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR).
Well and Reservoir (Analytical).
Well and Reservoir (Numerical).
Analysis Data and Plots.
Deliverability Data and Plots.
If users select No to the prompt, the Report File is saved automatically to the specified
folder (i.e. without opening MS Word or being Viewed).
Step 6: Using Report Templates
1149
Using Report Templates - Step 6
Report Output - Loading/Saving Templates:

PanSystem comes complete with a variety of pre-defined Report Templates. Templates
are used to define a Report Style, allowing different users to produce Standard Reports
which all have the same Layout and include the same Data (e.g. for a large team
project).
By default, PanSystem will load a Template called QUICK.TPL which will include a limited
sub-set of the available Data in the Report. The advantage of using this Template is that
it will Print quickly while still containing much of the Data.
To Load other Templates or Save Changes to a Template, select the Load Template
button on the Configure Report dialog. This generates an Open sub-dialog (illustrated
below) from which users can select from a range of other Templates. These EPS-supplied
Templates are described below. In a Report Template, the following items are defined:
Sections the Report will contain (i.e. Input Data, Analysis Results, Deliverability
Results).
Fields to be included within each Section.
Page Layout settings (e.g. Header, Logo, Footer, etc.).
Selecting a Template with the Open sub-dialog

To Load a Template, click on the Template Name in the list, then select Open (or double-
click on the Template Name).
After Loading a Template, users may wish to make changes as described above, using the
Edit and Edit Layout buttons on the Configure Report dialog. To Save a new user-defined
Template, select the Save Template button on the Configure Report dialog to generate a
Save As sub-dialog (illustrated below):
1150
PanSystem
Saving a New Template with the Save As sub-dialog

Enter a new File Name, and select Save.
If users have been editing an EPS-supplied Template and have not altered the File
Name, they will be asked to confirm if the existing Template is to be overwritten.
Any new Template Name will now appear in the list.
Template Options:
A list of all the available Report Templates is displayed under the Report Menu (these
appear in alphabetical order with Windows 2000, XP and NT, but not with Windows 95 or
98). The quickest way to Print a Report is to select one of the Templates.
This assumes users know what each of the Templates will produce (see below). EPS
supply eight generic Templates, and users may add their own customized Templates to
this list as described earlier.
When users select one of these Template options the Print Report dialog is generated
first, to allow users to specify a destination for the Report.
Generic Template List:
1151
The supplied report templates listed in the menu are:

1. ANALYSIS: Reports the data relevant to the Analysis of a particular Test Period
(e.g. Plot/s, Results, Time Functions, etc.) for all selected Plots that have been
Analyzed so far.
2. br: A Customer Template, supplied as part of the installation.
3. COMPLETE: Reports full Input, Analysis and Deliverability (if any) Results (=
INPUT + ANALYSIS + DELIVER).
4. DELIVER: Reports the Results of Deliverability Analysis.
5. INPUT: Reports the Data Edit Plot and the complete set of Input Data for the Well
and Layer.
6. QUICK: Reports a reduced set of Input, Analysis and Deliverability (if any)
Results (= QUICKINP + QUICKANL + DELIVER).
7. QUICKANL: Reports a reduced set of data relevant to the Analysis of a particular
Test Period, for all selected Plots that have been Analyzed so far.
8. QUICKINP: Reports a reduced set of Input Data for the Well and Layer.
As an example of the use of customized Templates, users might create a Custom

Template called m(p), for Reporting the Pseudo-Pressure Table, which would
subsequently appear in this drop-down list.
Step 7: Creating a Text-Only Report
1152
PanSystem
Creating a Text-Only Report - Step 7
Report Output - Text-Only Reports:

When users select the Print Report sub-menu option from the Report Menu, or the Print
button on the Configure Report dialog, they will be offered the choice of Printing directly
to the currently selected Printer, or of Saving the Textual components of the Report
(i.e. minus the Graphics) to an ASCII file.
Print Report dialog

In this case (illustrated above), a file with extension *.RPT, will be written to the current
PanSystem Reports sub-directory. From here, it can be incorporated into a Report
Document in a word processor.
Printing a Report to a File:
Users can also Save the entire Report, including Graphics, to a File. This is helpful if
users want to be able to reprint Reports at a later stage and do not want to have to go
through the process of loading the PanSystem Data File and Report Template to recreate
the Report.
By Printing to a File users can save all the necessary Printer information for Printing later.
Two file types can be created:
1. Encapsulated Postscript, using a Postscript Printer Driver.
2. HPGL/2, using an HP Plotter or compatible Printer Driver.
In general, the Postscript Option produces better results.

In order to Print to a File users must first install a Windows Printer Driver of the
appropriate type connected to FILE:
Switch to Windows Program Manager and select the Settings/Control Panel option
from the Start Menu. Double-click on the Printers folder. This will display a
Printers dialog with a list of currently installed Printers (i.e. the Printer Drivers that
users already have installed).
Double-click on Add to generate the Add Printer Wizard and follow the instructions
(or if there is no Printer Wizard, select the Driver to be used from the list of
available Drivers. This can be the same as one of the Printers users already have
connected to a Port, or a different one, but in either case it should be suitable for
the Printer that will eventually be used to Print the Report).
1153
Select the Printer Port as File: Print to File in the Add Printer Wizard, then select the
Printer and Printer Type and follow the remaining instructions before returning to
Control Panel (or if there is no Printer Wizard, once the Printer is in the list of
Installed Printers, click on Connect and select FILE: from the Ports list. Select OK,
then Close to return to Control Panel, which can then be closed - this process could
also be performed during the initial installation of the Printer Driver under
Windows 95/NT).
The new Printer can be set as the default at this stage in the Printers dialog, by
right-clicking on the Printer Name and selecting the Set as Default option from
the pop-up menu.
Go back to PanSystem and select the Print Set-Up option from the File Menu. Users
will notice that the new Printer has been added to the list, identified in the Printer
section as being on FILE: next to the Where: information field.
Postscript Printer Driver connected to FILE

Select this Printer, then select OK. In the illustration above, an HP LaserJet 4L/4ML
Postscript is connected for normal printing use, and has also been connected to FILE (i.e.
the FILE Port connection has been selected).
When users next Print a Report to this selected Printer, they will be prompted for a File
Name for the Report:
Print to File sub-dialog
1154
PanSystem
The Report will be written to the current PanSystem Report Directory, unless users
include a different path name. If a series of Reports are being generated, ensure they
are given different File Names or they will be overwritten.
A File Extension is optional, but the *RPT File Extension should be avoided, to
prevent confusion with the Text-Only files described in the previous section.
*.PS is recommended for Postscript files (e.g. C:\Reports\MYREP.PS)
*.HP is recommended for HPGL/2 files (e.g. C:\Reports\MYREP.HP)
These Reports can then be Printed by using the MS-DOS COPY, TYPE or PRINT commands
(e.g. to Print a Postscript File saved as MYREP.PS to a Postscript Printer connected to the
LPT3 Printer Port:
TYPE MYREP.PS > LPT3
or COPY MYREP.PS LPT3
or PRINT MYREP.PS
The PRINT command will spool the Printing, allowing users to do something else while
waiting for the Report/s to be Printed. Refer to the MS-DOS User Guide for more
information on these commands).
End of Tutorial 4
Go to Tutorial 5: Test Design
1155
Tutorial 5: Test Design
Test Design
Overview of Test Design Workflow:

In this example, users will learn how to set up PanSystem to Design a Welltest and
Interference Test.
In normal Analysis mode, users start with measured Pressure and Rate Data, and some
known Reservoir Parameters (h, , etc.). Users analyze this data to obtain the
unknown Reservoir Parameters (k, S, etc.). By contrast, in Test Design mode, users
start in the Advanced Simulation facility with a complete set of Reservoir Parameters
and a Pressure Response is generated with a specified Surface Flow Rate sequence for
the Test.
Users can then examine this generated Pressure Response to determine if the Test would
succeed in meeting its Design objectives, using all the available Analysis techniques.
At the end of this example, the use of Advanced Simulation will be demonstrated for
another purpose (i.e. History Matching to measured Test Data. This is useful in Multi-
Well and/or Multi-Layer situations, which cannot be handled by the Quick Match facility.
To Design a Well Test in PanSystem, users need to set-up the following information:
1. The Description of the Well/s, including Wellbore Storage
2. The Layer and Fluid Descriptions
3. The Flow Rates for the Test
4. The Advanced Simulation controls
Advanced Simulation is described in the following Help topics:
Edit Test Design covers the input of the Time and Surface Flow Rate Schedule
Advanced Simulation - Overview provides an overview of Advanced Simulation
Advanced Simulation Control covers the basic operation of Advanced Simulation
Once all the necessary data has been set-up, the Pressure Response of each Well in the
system, and the downhole Flow Rates from each Layer in each Well are calculated and
stored. Users can then proceed quickly to inspect the Simulated Test Data and ensure
that the Test Procedure being modeled is capable of providing the required Results (i.e.
assuming the Reservoir Description is correct).
Step 1: Setting-Up the Test Design Parameters
1156
PanSystem
Setting-Up the Test Design Parameters - Step 1
Objectives:
This example is a hypothetical Welltest in which the objectives are:
To measure Permeability and Skin Factor.
To determine what the Welltest would look like if:
There were communication to a nearby Well, or
A Fault identified by seismic maps were to be sealing.
If the former scenario applies, then what will the Signal Strength be at the other
Well after a reasonable period of Time?
If the latter scenario applies, then how long should the Test be run to determine
how far away the Fault is?
It has been decided to perform a single long Flow Period, followed by a Shut-In.
The following description assumes that the File New command has been used to re-
set all parameters to zero.
Entering the Wells:
Select the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) option from the Dataprep Menu to
generate the Reservoir Description dialog.
First, name and define the Wells. Use the Add Well button in the Reservoir Description
dialog to create the second Well. For clarity in this example, Well-1 and Well-2 have
been re-named "Flowing Well" and "Observation Well" respectively. Refer to the
illustration below for the relevant Well Control section of the dialog.
Well Control section of the Reservoir Description dialog

Simply overtype the default Well Names in the relevant entry fields.
Next, enter the Model Parameters for the two Wells. The "Principal Well" (or "Flowing
Well" in this case - pre-fixed with a letter "P", to indicate that it is designated as the
"Principal Well") is always at Co-ordinates (0,0). Select and highlight Flowing Well, then
select the Well Parameters button to generate the associated Well Parameters sub-dialog
(illustrated below), then enter the following parameters and OK to return to the Reservoir
Description dialog:
1157
Radius: 0.3 ft.

Wellbore Storage: Select the Wellbore Storage Model Parameters button to
generate the Classic Wellbore Storage Parameters sub-dialog (also illustrated
below) and enter 0.01 bbl/psi (i.e. estimated from Wellbore Volume and average
Fluid Compressibility, or experience of previous Welltests).
Well Parameters and Classic Wellbore Storage Parameters sub-dialogs for "Flowing Well"
Select and highlight "Observation Well", then select the Well Parameters button to
generate the associated Well Parameters sub-dialog (illustrated below), enter the
following Model Parameters, then OK to return to the Reservoir Description dialog:
Well Co-ordinates: The "Observation Well" is 2500 ft. away, so enter x = 2500, y =
0 (or any equivalent pair of Co-ordinates that put the Well 2500 ft. away).
Inter-Well Distance for Interference Test Analysis: 2500 ft (this is not required
for Pressure Response generation, but will be required for Interference Test Type-
Curve Analysis).
Well Radius and Storage Coefficient: These Model Parameters can be the same as
for "Flowing Well".
1158
PanSystem
Well Parameters and Classic Wellbore Storage Parameters sub-dialogs for "Observation
Well"
Entering Layer and Fluid Descriptions:
Enter the following Reservoir Parameters (i.e. based on existing knowledge of the
Reservoir) by selecting the Layer Parameters button in the Layer Control section to
generate the Layer Parameters sub-dialog (illustrated below):
Thickness: 25 ft.
Porosity: 0.20 decimal fraction
Layer Pressure: 4000 psia
Layer Temperature: 200 F
Next, set the Flow Model to "Radial Homogeneous", then select the Model Parameters
button to generate the Radial Homogeneous sub-dialog (also illustrated below) and enter
the following Model Parameters:
Permeability: 250 mD.
Skin Factor: 5 in the "Flowing Well", 0 in the "Observation Well".
1159
Layer Parameters and Radial Homogeneous sub-dialogs
Note how the Radial Homogeneous sub-dialog has space for two Skin Factors,
since two Wells have been defined (i.e. Well 2 = "Observation Well").
Select OK in both sub-dialogs to return to the Reservoir Description dialog; the Total
Compressibility will be entered directly into the Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog
(illustrated below), which is generated by selecting the Fluid Parameters button in the
Layer Control section. Enter the following mandatory data (obtained from PVT
measurements, etc.):
Oil Formation Volume Factor (Bo): 1.30 bbls/STB
Oil Viscosity (o): 2.50 cp.
Total Compressibility (Ct): 1.0E-5 psi-1.
1160
PanSystem
Oil Fluid Parameters sub-dialog

Naturally, users could calculate these Fluid Parameters from Production Data (if
available).
This sets up the Well and Reservoir Model for the Simulation. The first scenario is an
Interference Test and therefore, no Boundaries have been specified yet. Select OK and
return to the opening PanSystem screen.
Entering Flowrates for the Test:
Select the Gauge Data option from the Dataprep Menu to generate the Pressure and Rate
Data Preparation dialog. The "Principal Well" (or "Flowing Well") is the one which
PanSystem will use for the computation time-step definition, so this Well data must be
entered first.
Ensure that "Flowing Well" is selected in the Well to Edit field in the Pressure and
Rate Data Preparation dialog.
Now select the Test Design button to generate the Edit Test Design sub-dialog and enter
the Flowing and Shut-In Periods as shown in the illustration below:
1161
Upper part of the Edit Test Design sub-dialog

The Flowing Period runs from 0 to 400 hrs. and the Shut-In from 400 to 800 hrs. There
will be 50 Steps per Period, logarithmically-spaced with first step of 0.001 hours (i.e.
Format 2 - refer to Edit Test Design for details of all available Formats). Select OK to
generate the Test Design sub-dialog (illustrated below); the default name "Test Design",
will be kept for this data file. Ensure that 4000 psia is entered for the Initial Wellbore
Pressure, (i.e. there is to be no Under- or Overbalance at the start of the Test).
Test Design sub-dialog

Select OK to return to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog and a Rate Column
called "Test Rate" will be listed. This is the Rate Channel that will drive the Simulation.
1162
PanSystem
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog entries for "Flowing Well"
Now users need to enter Flow Rates for the "Observation Well". Select and highlight this
Well in the Well to Edit field in the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog before
selecting the Test Design button again.
This time, PanSystem asks if the Times of the "Principal Well" are to be used.
Respond with No (i.e. the default and recommended option); the Test Design sub-dialog
is generated.
1163
Enter names for the Data File (in this case, it has been called OBS WELL), and the Rate
Channel that are about to be created (e.g. Test Rate 2), or leave the default settings.
The default Initial Wellbore Pressure of 4000 psia is valid for this Well.
Select OK to generate the Edit OBS WELL sub-dialog and enter the Times and Rates of
the Flow Schedule for this Well, in the same manner as for the other Well (i.e. the
values at the Rate Changes).
Upper part of Edit OBS WELL sub-dialog

In this Test, the Well will be Shut-In for the duration of the Test. In fact, users could
leave the Time and Rate Data columns blank, since nothing will be happening. However,
it is more appropriate to enter a Time of 800 hrs. and leave the Test Rate at zero. In
this case, users have no choice over the Number of Steps or Format because these are
imposed by the "Principal Well".
When users select OK to return to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, a Rate
Column called Test Rate 2 in a Data File called OBS WELL will be listed (or whatever
names were selected by users).
1164
PanSystem
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog entries for "Observation Well"
Advanced Simulation Controls:
All the Well and Reservoir Data are now entered. Users can now go to the Advanced
Simulation option on the Simulate Menu to start the computation of the Pressure
Responses at the two Wells.
In this case, users can start the Simulation by selecting OK as soon as they generate the
Advanced Simulation Control dialog (illustrated below), because the default settings are
correct (there are no choices).
1165
Advanced Simulation Control dialog for a Two-Well, Single-Layer Model and Test Design
Select OK to run the Simulation over the 100 time-steps. A screen prompt provides
progress information.
Select OK at the end of the calculations and remember to Save the file!
Step 2: Analysis of the Simulated Responses
1166
PanSystem
Analysis of the Simulated Responses - Step 2
General:
After the Simulation has run, the data can be analyzed using the Diagnostic Plots, etc.,
just like any other Gauge Data.
Analyzing the Simulated Data - Principal Well:
Select the Gauge Data option from the Dataprep Menu and decide which Well is to be
examined first (the "Flowing Well" will be selected in this case).
Setting-up the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog for the Flowing Well
Note how PanSystem has given default Names to the Output Columns of
Simulated Pressure (Sim P), Total Sandface Rate (Sim Q Total) and Layer Sandface
Rates (Sim Q#1). Users could have specified different Names on the Advanced
Simulation Control dialog. Since there is only one Layer in this example, the two
Rate Columns will contain identical data.
Select Test Rate and Sim P from the Data File/Column List and use the Add to List button
to add these Columns to the List to Plot area. Use the Plot button to generate a Data Edit
Plot (illustrated below):
1167
Simulated Data for the Flowing Well
The Scaling has been altered on this Data Edit Plot to display the data more clearly.
Users can do this by either using the three Axes options from the Edit Menu or by
double-clicking on each Axis in turn (i.e. Y-, X- and R-axis) to generate the
appropriate Edit Axis dialog. The Dataset display can also be edited in a similar
manner by selecting the Dataset option from the Edit Menu. In this case, the X-
axis was rescaled to 0/1000 hours (Min/Max), the Y-axis was rescaled to
1500/5000 psia (Min/Max) and the R-axis was rescaled to 0/5000 STB/day
(Min/Max). The Plot Rate Schedule option was also switched-off on the Edit
Menu.
For real Gauge Data, users would have to identify the Rate Change Events to initialize
the Rate Change Table before they could analyze the Test. With Advanced Simulation,
the Rate Change Table is initialized automatically, so there is nothing to do here.
Users can now proceed directly to Analysis.
To verify the first Test Objective (i.e. measuring Permeability and Skin Factor in the
"Flowing Well"), select the Plot option from the Analysis Menu. The Analysis Selection
dialog prompts users to select a Well to Analyze - OK the existing selection of Flowing
Well.
1168
PanSystem
Select either Test Period on the Ruler Bar (the Build-Up would probably be used for this
purpose).
Users can now apply all the standard PanSystem Analysis techniques. It is easy to verify
that the input parameters are reproducible on Analysis Plots. In a real situation, users
would be interested in ensuring that they had run the Test long enough to get useful data
beyond the Wellbore Storage period, to check that the Pressure Drawdown was not
excessive, to see the Radius of Investigation, etc. Using the techniques described in
previous tutorial examples (i.e. line fitting to Log-Log and Semi-Log Plots, then
performing a Quick Match), results can be obtained as illustrated below. In this case, a
Log-Log Plot has been generated (for the Build-Up period) and fitted with Unit Slope and
Zero Slope lines, followed by Simulate/Quick Match:
Next, the "Observation Well" response will be analyzed, in order to see if the second Test
Objective can be met (i.e. ascertaining if Reservoir Continuity can be measured).
1169
Preparing the Simulated Data for Analysis - Observation Well:

The Drawdown portion of the "Observation Well" Pressure Response can be analyzed
using the Interference Test Type-Curve (i.e. the Build-Up portion cannot be analyzed).
Before performing Analysis, the Start and End of this Drawdown portion must be
Marked, the Pulsing Well Flow Rate also has to be specified, and the program has to be
set-up so that it will be analyzed as an Interference Test.
Return to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog and change the Well in the Well
to Edit field to "Observation Well".
Data File/Column List section of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog
Note that the Simulated Responses (i.e. Pressure and Sandface Flowrates) are also
listed as new Columns under the Data File name SIMULATED (users could have
specified different names on the Advanced Simulation Control dialog).
Select the two Simulated: Sim Q entries in the Data File/Column List section then select
the Delete button in the Data File section:
1170
PanSystem
Use the Select Data File to Delete sub-dialog to delete the Simulated Flow Rate (Sim Q)
entries (they are near-zero and of no use for this purpose). Select OK and return to the
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, which should appear as illustrated below:
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog after deleting Simulated Flow Rate (Sim Q)
entries
In the Master Data File/Columns section (bottom right), ensure that SIMULATED is
selected as the Data File Name (Sim P will be automatically selected as the Pressure
Column as it is the only one currently available):
Master Data File/Columns section of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog
As described earlier, use the Add to List and Plot buttons to create a Data Edit Plot of the
"Observation Well" Pressure Column (Sim P):
1171
Data Edit Plot of Simulated Data for the Observation Well
The Rate Change Table is not automatically initialized for this Well.
Use the Pick Nearest Data Point for Flow Definition tool to Mark the Rate Changes:
If this button is grayed-out (i.e. disabled), users have forgotten to select

SIMULATED and Sim P in the previous step!
In this case, the Flow Rates for "Flowing Well" will be entered into the Rate Change
dialog:
Click on the point at the Start of the Test with the Pick Nearest Data Point tool and
enter 0 for the Time (i.e. the first Simulated Point is at the first Time-Step, not
zero!) and 0 for the Flow Rate (i.e. the Test started from a Shut-In condition), then
OK from the dialog:
1172
PanSystem
Rate Change dialog for Marking the Start of Test

Select the tool again and click on the point at the End of the Flowing Period (users
can see where the spacing of the data suddenly closes up as the Shut-In Period at
the "Flowing Well" begins - use the Zoom-In tool if necessary, before picking the
data point). Enter 1000 STB/day for the Flow Rate. This is purely because, when
analyzing an Interference Test, PanSystem requires the Pulsing Well Rate, not the
actual "Observation Well" Rate (which is essentially zero) to be entered for the
Well:
Enter 400 hours for the Time if the correct point has not been selected exactly
(this will define the End of the Drawdown portion of the Interference Data suitable
for Type-Curve Analysis). Strictly speaking, the Flowing Period ends at 400 hours,
although the observed Interference Response continues to decline for some time
after this, before starting to rise.
The Pressure value is not important for the Flowing Period Analysis, but should be
3966.44 psia if users have picked the exact End of Flowing Period.
1173
Selecting the End of Flowing Period for the Observation Well

The Build-Up portion cannot be analyzed with the supplied Type-Curve, so it can
be ignored. Select the tool once more and Mark the End of Test with the Pick
Nearest Data Point tool if desired.
Rate Change dialog for Marking the End of Test

If users have Plot Rate Schedule enabled in the Edit Menu, they will now see the Surface
Rate (of the Pulsing Well) displayed on the Data Edit Plot (as illustrated below):
1174
PanSystem
Observation Well Data with Rate Schedule displayed
The Scaling has also been altered on this Data Edit Plot to display the data more
clearly, particularly for the Oil Flow Rate on the R-axis (right-hand), with the
Maximum Value increased to 1050 STB/day.
Finally, and most importantly, PanSystem must be told that this is an Interference
Test. Double-click the Flowing Test Period (in the top half of the Ruler Bar of the Data
Edit Plot), to generate the Test Period Classification dialog, and select Interference Test
as the Test Period Type.
1175
Test Period Classification dialog
If this step is not performed (i.e. it is left as a Normal Test), and users will not be
able to access the Interference Test Type-Curve.
Before leaving Dataprep, select the Rate Changes button in the Pressure and Rate Data
Preparation dialog and check the Rate Changes Table in the Edit Rate Changes sub-
dialog, which lists the Events that were selected and Marked on the Data Edit Plot:
Edit Rate Changes sub-dialog

Analyzing the Simulated Data - Observation Well:
Proceed to Analysis and Plot the data for the Observation Well:
1176
PanSystem
There is limited interpretation that can be done on Drawdown Interference Test Data.
The Type-Curve facility provides a single Ei Type-Curve for analyzing the Constant Rate
Drawdown Response.
Select the Flowing Period Interference Response (i.e. first period) by clicking in the Ruler
Bar, then select the TC (Type-Curve) tool:
A good Match should be obtained (there will be some distortion at the beginning owing
to the non-zero Wellbore Storage), which again confirms the input parameters:
Type Curve Plot before rescaling or Match

Now select the M (Match) tool:
Accept the default settings in the Select Type Curve dialog and select OK:
1177
Move the Type-Curve around (Zooming-In and Matching again more closely if necessary).
Once a satisfactory Type-Curve Match has been achieved, select the Match tool again to
generate the Verify Selected Nearest Curve dialog and select the OK button:
In the Type Curve Plot illustrated below, the Match has been made to the Pressure Data
(the SimP Derivative is either ignored, or can be hidden via the Datasets option on the
Edit Menu):
1178
PanSystem
Interference Type-Curve Match for the Flowing Period
Again, the Scaling of the Time (i.e. X-axis), has been altered to display the data
more clearly for the Type-Curve Match, by setting Min Value = 1.0 .
From the point of view of a Interference Test Design, users can see that a Signal Strength
of about 1 psi should be observed after 50 hours if the communication is perfect.
At this point users should consider how high the Gauge Resolution needs to be, and
whether the Signal Strength is adequate.
Much of the character of the Matched curve is at Delta Pressures less than 0.1 psi.
Depending on the Gauge characteristics, this work will probably confirm that Reservoir
Continuity could be verified by a shorter Test, although users might decide to increase
the Production Rate in the "Flowing Well".
Remember to Save the file!
Step 3: Changing the Test Design Model
1179
Changing the Test Design Model - Step 3
Introducing a Sealing Fault:

In the second part of this example, the Reservoir Model is changed for the Test Design, to
cover the use of some other features of the Advanced Simulation facility.
One of the Test Objectives was to be to determine whether or not there was a Sealing
Fault between the Wells. The previous Analysis investigated the Pressure Response if
there was no Sealing Fault. Now, add a Sealing Fault to the Model, generate the
Pressure Response, and compare the Results.
Assume that the Fault is situated between the two Wells, so the "Observation Well"
should be made Inactive. The Well descriptive data is retained (not deleted), ready for
use again later, but the Well itself will be ignored in the ensuing calculations.
Select "Observation Well" in the Reservoir Description (Analytical) dialog, and select the
Inactive button:
Well Control section of the Reservoir Description dialog

A Sealing Fault (No-Flow Boundary) will now be placed at 1250 ft. from the Active
"Flowing Well". Select the Layer Boundaries button in the Layer Control section of the
Reservoir Description dialog to generate the Boundary Parameters sub-dialog, then select
Single Fault from the drop-down menu:
1180
PanSystem
Now select the Boundary Parameters button to generate the Single Fault sub-dialog
(illustrated below) and enter the L1 Distance as 1250 ft. - retain the default No-Flow
setting. Select OK to return to the Boundary Model sub-dialog.
Single Fault sub-dialog

For Advanced Simulation purposes, Image Wells need to be generated to model Boundary
effects. Select the Calculate Image Wells button on the Boundary Model sub-dialog. The
Number of Image Wells per Active Well will subsequently be displayed in a screen
prompt; select OK to accept:
1181
Check the Image Well co-ordinates by selecting the Edit Image Wells button on the
Boundary Model sub-dialog:
The default position for a specified distance of 1250 ft is (0, 2500), placing the
Boundary south of the Test Well at (0, 0), if "south" is considered to be towards the
bottom of the screen. If users re-activated the "Observation Well", (which has been
placed arbitrarily at position (2500, 0)), its Pressure Response would include the effect of
this Fault to the south, by means of a second Image Well at (2500, 2500). Select OK
from all open sub-dialogs and the Reservoir Description dialog.
If users want to respect a specific geographical positioning (e.g. putting the

Boundary to the west rather than the south), they can Edit the Image Well co-
ordinates (i.e. to (2500, 0) for a west position), or leave things as they are and
rotate the NS axes relative to PanSystem's X-Y geometry.
PanSystem is now ready to Simulate different Pressure Responses corresponding to a
Sealing Fault between the Wells. Select the Advanced Simulation option from the
Simulate Menu to generate the Advanced Simulation Control dialog (illustrated below).
The "Observation Well" entry is now grayed-out (i.e. disabled) and is labeled as
Inactive.
Advanced Simulation Control dialog

When users select OK to start the Simulation, they will receive a warning message that
there is a Duplicate Column Name in the "Principal Well" Data File. This is because
1182
PanSystem
PanSystem's default File Names (i.e. Sim P, etc.), have already been used on the
previous Simulation run.
Users have the option to keep the same File Names and overwrite the existing
Simulated data with the new values, but in this case they should be kept for comparison,
so select Cancel to the warning message and enter different names in the Simulated
Column Names dialog when it is generated, as illustrated below:
Simulated Column Names dialog

Select OK from the Simulated Column Names dialog, then select OK in Advanced
Simulation Control to perform the Simulation calculations and these new Columns will be
created for "Flowing Well". A screen prompt provides progress information. Select OK at
the end of the calculations and remember to Save the file!
Step 4: Analyzing Multiple Test Design Scenarios
1183
Analyzing Multiple Test Design Scenarios - Step 4
Evaluating the Test Response Sensitivity to the Introduced Fault:

When users select the Gauge Data option from the Dataprep Menu, multiple Columns of
Pressure and Rate Data are now contained in the Data File/Column List section of the
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, distinguished by the Column Names that were
applied in the previous Step:

To evaluate the Sensitivity of the Test Response to the introduced Fault, plot the two
Pressure Curves for "Flowing Well":
1184
PanSystem
Data Edit Plot for Sim P and Sim P/fault

This Plot shows the Pressure Response to be strong, with a maximum of 36 psi
differential between the Fault and No-Fault responses.
Next, generate a Difference Column with the Difference tool:
and enter a Name for the New Column in the Select Columns to Difference dialog or
accept the default setting:
Select Columns to Difference dialog

Select OK to Plot the Difference Column, then return to the Pressure and Rate Data
Preparation dialog. In the Master Data File/Columns section of the dialog (bottom right),
change the Master Pressure Column to the response for the Single Fault scenario (i.e. Sim
P/fault).
1185
Users must not omit this step or they will be analyzing the No-Fault case again!
Changing the Master Pressure Column in the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog
Answer OK to the information prompt and the Rate Change Data will be re-set
automatically to reflect the new Pressures (i.e. the Flowing Pressure at 400 hours and
the Final Shut-In Pressure). Check the Rate Change Table to make sure (compare the
Pressures illustrated below with those from Step 2 for No- Fault).
Edit Rate Changes sub-dialog

Now proceed to Analysis, select the Build-Up on the Ruler Bar, then select the Log-Log
Plot tool.
The Log-Log Plot of the Build-Up with a Zero Slope line applied (Radial Flow), shows that
Permeability and Skin could still be determined, but the Fault could not be defined fully,
as the Double Slope (i.e. the higher Radial Flow Derivative line) is not well-developed.
1186
PanSystem
Analysis Log-Log Plot with Zero Slope Line (Radial Flow)

The Derivative upturn could be Matched by trial and error with Quick Match (or
automatically with Auto Match) and a reasonable estimate of the Boundary Distance
obtained, but if feasible, a longer Build-Up should be performed.
1187
Quick Match Results

Alternatively when the actual Test is run, based on the observations from Simulation of
the first scenario, an absence of any Signal at the "Observation Well" after
approximately 50 hours of flow could be taken to indicate no (or poor) communication.
Remember to Save the file!
Step 5: Changing the Test Design Sequence
1188
PanSystem
Changing the Design Test Sequence - Step 5
Altering the Flow Rate Schedule:

Finally, to alter the Flow Rate Schedule (e.g. to perform a longer Flow and Shut-In in this
case), select the Test Design button again. Give the new Test Design a new Name (i.e.
LONG TEST in this case), and enter the new Flow Period durations as before. This
creates a new Time/Pressure/Rate File within the system.
Edit Test Design sub-dialog with longer Flow and Shut-In periods
Alternatively, call the file TEST DESIGN again, and it will overwrite the previous data
set, including all the Simulated data.
This time, if users have chosen a new Name, when Advanced Simulation is performed to
generate the Pressure Response, there will be a choice of "Principal Well" Flow Rates to
drive the calculation. Select the required Rate Schedule by changing the Input Data
File:Column Name field to LONG TEST: Test Rate.
1189
Advanced Simulation Control dialog
Note that since a new Data File (i.e. LONG TEST) is being used, the default
Column Names to be generated (i.e. Sim P, etc.) will not conflict with the same
Names in the file called TEST DESIGN. Users can choose more pertinent Names if
desired.
Enter Analysis, create a Plot, select the Build-Up (i.e. second period) for a Log-Log Plot
and try a Zero Slope Line fit:
See if the second attempt has resulted in fully-developed Single Fault Radial Flow:
1190
PanSystem
Log-Log Plot for LONG TEST with Zero Slope Line fit
For comparison, try using the Best-Fit Line tool on the Radial Flow Plot:
1191
Semi-Log Plot for LONG TEST with Best-Fit Line

End of PanSystem Tutorial Section
1192
PanSystem
PanMesh Tutorials
1193
Tutorial 1: Well Near a Pinch-Out
PanMesh Tutorial Example 1
Well Near a Pinch-Out - Overview
General:
Data files to accompany the tutorials are supplied as part of the installation, and can be
located in the PanSystem data directory. In this case the file PM_ex1 pinchout.PAN is
required.
Well Near a Pinch-Out:
The following example describes the setting-up of a Reservoir with a wedge-shaped
cross-section, with the Well close to the pinch-out. PanMesh requires that all Sub-Layers
have a finite thickness at each Node, so the pinch-out is not modeled as a &rdquor;knife-
edge, but as a thin vertical Boundary 5 ft thick. The top surface of the Reservoir in this
example is horizontal, and the bottom surface is dipping at about 6. In general, the dip
of the planes defining the upper and lower surfaces of the Sub-Layer must not exceed
45 from horizontal - this means that the maximum pinch-out angle that could be
modeled would be 90 with the Reservoir top and bottom at maximum dip.
The aim is to simulate a long Constant-Rate Drawdown followed by a Shut-In period,
using the Test Design facility. Users may enter any Flowing/Shut-In sequence they
desire, using Test Design.
Example Set-Up:
This example explains how to set-up the Reservoir Model from scratch, and how to
generate the Simulated Pressure Response. Users will find a completed set-up, including
the simulated data, in the file PM_ex1 pinchout.PAN.
Rather than do all the work, users may prefer to look through the supplied file, check the
items described below, then open PanMesh to generate a Numerical Response for
comparison with the P#1 Pressure in the supplied file (which should be identical, provided
users do not change anything).
The first step when modeling any Reservoir is to set-up the PanSystem file in the normal
way, or to load an existing file. In this case, the Welltest Response will be investigated
for a long Production Period followed by a Shut-In Period, using the Test Design facility.
Select the Test Design button and enter a 1000 hr Drawdown Period at 200 STB/day, 50
Steps, Format 2, and a 100 hr Shut-In Period, 100 Steps, Format 2. For more
information about Test Design, refer to Dataprep Gauge Data Edit Test Design and
PanSystem Tutorial Example 5 (Test Design).
Step 1: PanMesh Dataprep
1194
PanSystem
PanMesh Dataprep - Step 1
Data Preparation:
Select the Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) option from the Dataprep Menu.
The Permeability is assumed to be Isotropic. Users may introduce Anisotropy (kx,

ky, kz) if they wish. The Mechanical Skin Factor is modeled with a Damaged Zone
Radius of 2 ft by default. Users may change this if required.
On the Reservoir Geometry tab, drag the origin of the red axis bars to the top left corner
of the Reservoir View area with the right mouse button, then scale the area to 10000 ft
in the X-axis (East) direction and 15000 ft in the Y-axis (South) direction. For this
example, a Rectangular Geometry will be used, so select the Rectangle button along the
top of the Scale Window. When the cursor is moved back to the Reservoir View area
users will see that the cursor has changed to a cross.
Click on the screen and the default Rectangle will be positioned centrally.
Presented below is a table of the X and Y co-ordinates that will be used for each Node:
Node 1 x=5000ft y=500ft

Table of Node Co-ordinates for Example 1
To move each Node to the exact positions required, the Nodes could be left-clicked and
dragged on this view using the co-ordinate display beneath the Reservoir View for
guidance. However, since the exact locations are noted, it is quicker to manually enter
the co-ordinates into the Node Parameters dialog.
Double-click on any one of the Nodes in the view area, and the Node Parameters dialog
will be generated as illustrated below:
1195
Node Parameters dialog

This dialog can also be accessed from the summary table below the Reservoir View area,
by double-clicking on the Node Number to be edited.
Users can now enter the relevant co-ordinates for the selected Node. Use the scroll
arrows beside the Node ID box to move to each of the other Nodes.
So far, the Reservoir has just been defined in Plan View. Now, the Layer cross-section
can be defined. In this example, only one Sub-Layer is being used; this is the default
setting, but check that the entry for Number of Sub-Layers is 1. Still operating within the
Node Parameters dialog, enter a Thickness of 500 ft for Node 1.
When users enter a value for the first Node, PanSystem will automatically assign this
value to all the Nodes. This saves additional typing if the Sub-Layer is of uniform
Thickness. However, in this case, the Thickness of Node 2 can be left at 500 ft, but the
Thickness of Node 3 and 4 must be edited to 5 ft. This defines a Rectangular Reservoir
with a wedge-shaped cross-section, where the Reservoir top is horizontal, but the bottom
is dipping at almost 6 to the east.
Users will notice in the summary table below the Reservoir View that Nodes 1, 2 and 3
have been assigned green tick marks. This indicates they are the three Nodes being used
to define the upper and lower surfaces of the Reservoir, and the Thickness at Node 4 is
not being used. Users can nominate any three Nodes for this purpose.
1196
PanSystem
Plan View of the Reservoir, with Node co-ordinates entered

Double left-click on the Reservoir View area anywhere outside the Reservoir to see the
structure as a 3-D image.
1197
3-D View of the Reservoir

Users can rotate the image with the {F5} and {F6} keys. Double left-clicking on the
Reservoir View will return users to the original Plan View.
Now select the Well Configuration tab. Set the Wellbore Radius to 0.276 ft. A vertical,
fully completed Well is being defined, so the only entries required are the X and Y co-
ordinates of the Well and the Open Interval. Enter the Well co-ordinates as (440, -5000).
Suppose the MD to the Reservoir Top at the Well is 8000 ft RKB. For a fully-perforated
interval, the Open Interval (MD) will be from 8000 ft to 8029 ft (approximately). The
exact Reservoir Base is at 8029.8 ft, and if users enter 8030 ft, then select OK, a
warning will be issued:
1198
PanSystem
Open Interval error

If users enter too large a value for the bottom of an Open Interval (or too small a
value for the top), PanSystem will simply correct them internally (i.e. it will "clip" the
Open Interval to conform to the Reservoir Top and/or Base).
Select the Wellbore Storage button to generate the Well Parameters dialog and select the
Classic Wellbore Storage Model from the drop-down menu. Next, select the Wellbore
Storage Model Parameters button to generate the Wellbore Storage Parameters sub-
dialog and enter a coefficient of 0.001 bbls/psi.
Select OK and return to the Reservoir Geometry tab and view the Reservoir structure in
3-D. Users will now see that the Well has been added (Node #0) with a white line
defining the Open Interval as illustrated below:
1199
Well definition
Now the Reservoir and Fluid Parameters can be entered via the Material Properties tab.
This is an Oil Producer, with a Reservoir Pressure of 5000 psia and Temperature of
200F. Also enter the following:
Formation Volume Factor Bo = 1.2 rb/STB
Viscosity o = 0.5 cP
Total Compressibility Ct = 8.2E-6 psi-1
Porosity = 0.36
All components of the Permeability k = 91 mD
Users may experiment with Areal and Vertical Anisotropy if desired:
The principal axis of the kx Permeability component is by default 90 from north
(which is in the direction of the easterly dipping lower surface in this case); this is
only significant if users are modeling Areal Anisotropy.
The kz Permeability component is perpendicular to the base of the Sub-Layer. This
is only significant if users are modeling Vertical Anisotropy.
For more information about modeling anisotropy, refer to Using Regions and
Defining Areal Heterogeneity.
Finally, enter a Skin Factor S = 2.3. The Skin is modeled as a finite damaged region
around the Well. The default Radius is 2 ft and the corresponding Permeability is 42.1
mD. This will change if the Radius is altered.
Step 2: Running PanMesh
1200
PanSystem
Running PanMesh - Step 2
Numerical Simulation:
Select OK from the PanMesh Data Preparation section, then select the Numerical
Simulation option PanMesh: New Run from the Simulate Menu. After the prompt
indicating the Number of Hours that the Numerical Simulation will be run for (1100 hrs in
this case), there will be a pause of several seconds while PanMesh starts-up and creates
the Reservoir Mesh.
The Reservoir is displayed in Solid Plan View. To view the Mesh itself, select the Wire
Frame View button and switch-off the Solid View button to generate the image illustrated
below:
Wire Frame View of the Mesh for the Pinch-Out Model

Users can rotate the image by left-clicking on the structure and holding the mouse button
down while moving the cursor. Users can also zoom-in, move and rotate the structure
using the cursor keys or the controls on the right hand side of the screen (for a full
description of all the controls that are available, refer to PanMesh Graphical Interface).
The Numerical Simulation is now ready to be run, so either select the Go button or select
Go from the Simulation Menu.
1201
Once the Simulation has finished (it should only take about 16 seconds on a Pentium
550), the Pressure Distribution can be investigated before exiting from PanMesh. Either
select the Color Contour button or select the Show Color Contours option from the Data
View Controls/Pressure sub-menu.
Color Visualization of the Pressure Propagation

By moving the vertical (green) Time Line on the Pd/Td Graph users can track the
Pressure Propagation on the 3-D image during the test.
PanMesh generates a Dimensionless Response for a Constant-Rate Drawdown. The slope
on the Derivative at the very beginning is a Half-Slope attributed to early Finite Wellbore
Radius behaviour (i.e. it is not Wellbore Storage, which is not modeled in PanMesh).
Following initial periods of Radial Flow through the Damaged Zone and the Reservoir, the
Derivative rises as the pinch-out Boundary to the west is felt. However, the increasing
Thickness of the Reservoir to the east causes the Derivative to drop down again and tend
towards a Negative Half-Slope. The effects of the outer Boundaries are then felt and a
Closed System Response (Unit Slope) is observed at the end of the test.
On closing PanMesh and returning to PanSystem, a Pressure Column called FEM P will be
created. This uses the Dimensionless Response from PanMesh, and convolves it with the
Wellbore Storage and the Welltest Rate Schedule (i.e. Drawdown + Build-Up) to produce
the Real-Time and Pressure Response.
If users have run PanMesh starting from the supplied PM_ex1 pinchout.PAN file, they
can compare the ready-made Response (P#1) with the Simulated Data (FEM P) on, for
example, the Log-Log Plot, using the Edit/Overlay Pressure facility. They should be
identical unless users have changed something. Select the extended Drawdown period
then the Log-Log Plot tool to produce a plot like the one illustrated below:
1202
PanSystem
Log-Log Plot of the Extended Drawdown Data for the Pinch-Out Model, showing the
Negative Half-Slope preceding the Semi-Steady-State Unit Slope
The Build-Up Derivative is very similar:
Log-Log Plot of the Build-Up, with the Analytical Quick Match Simulation (solid curve)
overlaid
1203
An Analytical Pinch-Out Model is available from the Analysis Model list for comparison.
The agreement is good (i.e. using Quick Match), provided the Distance to the pinch-out
is entered as 288 ft, which is the Distance to the theoretical point of convergence of the
Reservoir Top and Bottom surfaces, rather than the 240 ft to the actual Boundary.
The Analytical Model does not allow a Closed System, so the Late Time Responses will
start to diverge.
Users can experiment with alternative configurations of the Pinch-Out Model; say by
having the Top and Bottom surfaces dipping rather than just the Bottom, or perhaps
using two Layers and having the common Boundary horizontal, but the Top and Bottom
surfaces both angled.
Step 3: Additional PanMesh Runs
1204
PanSystem
Additional PanMesh Runs
Duplicate Names:
Once users have made the first PanMesh run, they will have a Pressure Column called
FEM P. Unless this is re-named, the next time users exit from PanMesh they will
receive a prompt, warning about Duplicate Column Names:
Duplicate (Pressure) Column Name warning

Users have the option to OK and overwrite the existing FEM P with the new one, or
Cancel, in which case they can specify an alternative Column Name (e.g. FEM P#2).
New Column Name for the new Simulated Pressure

This would let users compare the new Simulated data with the previous PanMesh Run.
The Rate Columns are not usually of interest. If users did not delete the Rate Columns
(i.e. FEM Q Total and FEM Q#1) from the previous PanMesh Run, the Duplicate Column
Name warning will apply to these Columns as well. Unless users want to compare
Sandface Rates, just let the new Columns overwrite the old ones.
Select OK on this dialog, and OK again on the next one, which does not need to be
altered.
Users will then be returned to the Log-Log Plot (or whatever plot was being used when
PanMesh was invoked) with the new Simulated Data overlaid.
Try these inputs for alternative Node Sand Layer Thicknesses:
1205
Node 1 x=5000ft y=500ft z =0ft layer 1=500ft layer 2=0

Table of suggested Node Properties #1 (Reservoir Top and Bottom dipping)
Node 1 x=5000ft y=500ft z =0ft layer 1=250ft layer 2=250ft

Table of suggested Node Properties #2 (two Sub-Layers)

End of Tutorial 1
Go to Tutorial 2: Two-Layered Reservoir (One Layer Perforated)
1206
PanSystem
Tutorial 2: Two-Layered Reservoir (One Layer Perforated)
Two-Layer Reservoir (One Perforated)
General:
located in the PanSystem data directory. In this case the file PM_ex2 dualperm.PAN is
required.
Model Description:
This example is a two-layered Rectangular Reservoir containing a Vertical Well completed
in the Upper Layer (i.e. Sub-Layer 1), with a Permeability of 91 mD. The Unperforated
Layer (i.e. Sub-Layer 2) has a lower Permeability and Porosity, and an Anisotropy Factor
of 0.05.
Check the numerical input data screens and note:
How the two Layers have been configured
The Well Completion
The different Material Properties assigned
The Skin Factor of 3 in Sub-Layer 1 has been modeled as a Damaged Zone Radius of 1 ft
and Permeability 27.3 mD. The small Damaged Zone Radius was chosen so that the
early Radial Flow in Sub-Layer 1 would not be obscured by Radial Flow in the Damaged
Zone.
The Simulation models the development of horizontal Radial Flow in the Producing Layer,
through a transition period of cross-flow between Layers within the Reservoir (from the
uncompleted Layer into the completed Layer), to horizontal Radial Flow in both
Layers. This is analogous to the classical r;Dual-Permeability Response. The system
finally goes into Semi-Steady-State as the outer Boundaries are reached.
While running PanMesh, note that on the Pd v Td Graph, what at first glance looks like a
Unit Slope and Wellbore Storage effect at early Time is in fact a Half-Slope corresponding
to the classical Finite Wellbore Radius response at small Td (where the analytical
logarithmic approximation is not valid), followed by Radial Flow in the Damaged Zone.
This portion occurs so early that it will not usually be visible in the real Pressure/Time
presentation in PanSystem. This Simulation took 3m 47s on a Pentium 550.
Switch-on the Color Contour option during or after Simulation. For best results, select
Side View and the Cut Plane button on the toolbar, with the Vertical Cut Plane option
selected from the controls on the right-hand side of the screen. Now Zoom-In until the
Reservoir cross-section fills about half the height of the Viewing Window. On the Graph,
set the red line at about Pd=1.0 and the blue line at Pd=100 and drag the green time-line
to the left. Now, as users move it to the right (i.e. by clicking and dragging or stepping
with the right arrow key), they will see the Pressure Disturbance propagate outwards
initially in the Producing Layer, then move downwards into the Tight Layer:
1207
Color Visualization, showing early Radial Flow in the Upper Layer

On exiting from PanMesh, save a History File (*.HST) so the Replay Mode can be used
later. On returning to PanSystem, the Real-Time/Pressure Response will be computed,
and will exist as a channel called FEM P. Users can delete the Sandface Rate Columns.
Select and Plot the FEM P Column from the Gauge Data/Pressure and Rate Data
Preparation dialog. Now, select Analysis Plot, then the Log-Log Plot tool and use the line
fitting tools (e.g. Zero Slope Line) and the Flow Regime FR tool to derive the Model
Results illustrated below:
1208
PanSystem
PanSystem Log-Log Plot of the Numerical Simulation

Radial Flow in the Perforated Layer occurs up to about 0.005 hrs elapsed time, after
which the Transition Response starts to develop. The Permeability and Skin derived from
this early portion are close to the input values. After Total System (i.e. Full Thickness)
Radial Flow, the Unit Slope on the Derivative at late time is caused by the Reservoir
Closure (Semi-Steady-State).
This particular response can be compared to the Analytical r;Dual-Permeability Model
using the following parameters (computed from the relevant equations for Vertical Well
Flow Models in the Layer Parameters dialog):
Theoretical Inter-Porosity Flow Coefficient () = 4.4E-7 using Layer 2 Effective Vertical
Conductivity Teff = 3kv2/h2
Storativity Ratio () = 0.56
Flow Capacity Ratio () = 0.614
(refer to Model Parameters for details of these specific parameters)
If users wish to experiment with this configuration, try:
Increasing/decreasing the Vertical Permeability in the Unperforated Layer
Increasing/decreasing the Porosity (or Total Compressibility) in the Unperforated
Layer
Changing kh in the Unperforated Layer
Increasing the Damaged Zone Radius (keep the same value for Skin S)
Perforating the second Layer
End of Tutorial 2
1209
Go to Tutorial 3: Horizontal Well in Single-Layered Reservoir
1210
PanSystem
Tutorial 3: Horizontal Well in a Single-Layered Reservoir
Horizontal Well in a Single-Layer Reservoir
General:
located in the PanSystem data directory. In this case the file PM_ex3
horizontalwell.PAN is required.
Model Description:
This example models a Horizontal Well with a 1000 ft open interval in a single Layer.
Data from a Drawdown test (P: Gauge #1) are available. Conventional Analysis of this
data has resulted in a set of parameters for the Simulation, which have already been set-
up in the file.
Inspect the input section to see how the Well and Reservoir have been configured. This is
not a particularly challenging example, and it can in fact be modeled analytically, but it is
useful to demonstrate the basic principles and to produce a familiar Response.
Display the Gauge Data on the Log-Log Plot, then select Simulate/Numerical
Simulation/PanMesh: New Run. View the Mesh by switching-off the Solid Model button,
and switching-on the Wire Frame button. Experiment with the Zoom settings and the
Horizontal and Vertical Cut Plane tools and try to locate the Well.
Select Go and PanMesh will generate the Dimensionless Response. Users will see all the
expected Flow Regimes (e.g. Vertical Radial, Linear (Half-Slope), and the onset of
Horizontal Radial). The default Simulation Time is too short to see Semi-Steady-State
flow. However, users can extend the default Simulation Time on entering PanMesh from
PanSystem.
For color visualization, try Side View, and select the Vertical Cut Plane button. This will
"cut" the Reservoir vertically across the Wellbore. Users should Zoom-In until they can
see the thickness of the Reservoir on a reasonable scale. Click on the Pd v Td Graph, and
set the red line at about Pd=0.01 and the blue line at about Pd=1, then pull the green
Time-line over to the left. Now step the Time-line to the right. Users will see Radial Flow
develop at the Wellbore as the marker moves along the flat portion of the Derivative. As
the red coloration reaches full Reservoir Thickness, Linear Flow starts to develop.
1211
Cross-section with Color Visualization, showing Vertical Radial Flow around the Wellbore
Now switch to Top View, and switch-off the Vertical Cut Plane. Users can now track the
Linear Flow Regime developing into Horizontal Radial Flow.
1212
PanSystem
Radial Flow Regime develops and propagates out into the Reservoir
Since this Simulation requires a long time to run (19 mins on a Pentium 550), it would be
a good idea to save a History File (*.HST), before leaving PanMesh, in case users want
to Replay the visualization. Users will be prompted for this when they close the Graph
Window or PanMesh itself. Users will then be returned to the Log-Log Plot with the
Simulated data overlaid on the Gauge Data. The Wellbore Storage has been convolved
with the Constant Rate Drawdown Simulation.
1213
PanSystem Log-Log Plot with Numerical Simulation (solid lines)

This simple model can also be Simulated Analytically; check the Analytical Input
Parameters and run Quick Match to compare the Analytical and Numerical solutions:
PanSystem Log-Log Plot with Numerical Simulation and Quick Match
1214
PanSystem
End of Tutorial 3
Go to Tutorial 4: Partially Completed Well
1215
Tutorial 4: Partially Completed Well
PanMesh Turorial Example 4
Partially-Completed Well
General:
located in the PanSystem data directory. In this case the file PM_ex4 partial
completion.PAN is required.
Model Description:
The supplied file has been set up to model a single Layer 100 ft thick, with a Vertical
Well Perforated over a 40 ft section. The Top of the Perforations is 30 ft below the
Reservoir Top. Users should refer to PanMesh Dataprep Well Configuration to see how
this has been achieved.
The file was configured to model a sequence of Flowing Periods and Shut-Ins using Flow
Rates specified in Test Design. It already contains a Simulated Response (P1) generated
with PanMesh, which can be used as a reference for users efforts. This data can be
inspected within Analysis in the usual way and a good match can be obtained by using
the Analytical Quick Match model.
If users re-run the Numerical Simulation in PanMesh, they will see that the Dimensionless
Derivative shows the early period of Radial Flow at the Perforations, followed by a period
of Spherical Flow (i.e. Negative Slope - not well-developed because the Penetration Ratio
is fairly large), then full thickness Radial Flow and finally, Semi-Steady-State flow as the
outer Boundaries are reached. The run takes 2m 30s on a Pentium 550.
1216
PanSystem
PanMesh visualization and Pd versus Td Graph for a partially-completed Well

In this example, the Skin Factor has been left at zero so that the early Radial Flow at the
Perforations portion can be seen clearly. If users add a Skin Factor, the Radial Flow in
the Damaged Region partially masks this portion.
Return to PanSystem Dataprep/Gauge Data and select the newly Simulated Pressure
Column (FEM P) as the Master Pressure Column. View the real Pressure Response on the
Data Edit Plot; users will see that the Constant Rate Drawdown Response generated by
PanMesh has been convolved with the Multiple-Rate sequence specified in Test Design.
In Analysis, select the first Flowing Period and go to the Log-Log Plot. The Derivative
shows that it just reaches the onset of Semi-Steady-State before the Well is Shut-In for
the first time.
If users analyze this data, they will find that the early portion (i.e. Radial Flow at the
Perforations) tends to slightly overestimate the Permeability derived from the line-fit
based on the Analytical Model.
1217
PanSystem Log-Log Plot of Numerical Simulation

The agreement with the Quick Match analytical response can be improved by increasing
the length of Perforated Interval from 40 ft to 41 ft. The Boundaries of the Drainage Area
cannot be modeled exactly with Quick Match, but a reasonable match to the overall
depletion during the test can be obtained by using an equivalent Square Geometry with
L = 4028 ft:
1218
PanSystem
PanSystem Log-Log Plot with Numerical Simulation and Quick Match

Some scenarios to experiment with are:
Add Wellbore Storage
Reduce the Vertical Permeability
Reduce the Length of the Open Interval
Position the Open Interval at the Top of the Layer
Give the Well some deviation from Vertical
Remember that each new run of PanMesh will by default, result in a real Pressure
Channel called FEM P in PanSystem. If users want to compare successive runs, avoid
overwriting the previous Pressures by taking the option to re-name the Pressure
Channel when returning from PanMesh to PanSystem. In this way, users can accumulate
a set of Simulated Pressure Columns (e.g. FEM P, FEM P1, FEM P2, etc.). On the Log-Log
Plot (or any other diagnostic plot), users can compare two Pressures by using the
Edit/Overlay Pressure option.
End of PanMesh Tutorial Section
1219
Product Support, Training and Consultancy
PanSystem Product Support, Training and Consultancy
EPS Product Support

Methods:
If users have a question about PanSystem, they should first consult the On-Line Help. If
users encounter any problems during the installation or subsequent running of this
program, support from EPS can be obtained by the following methods:
With internet access, select Contact Customer Support to link directly to head office
customer support via the EPS website.
Without internet access, contact details (i.e. address, telephone and fax) for the
nearest EPS international representative are supplied below.
Before Contacting EPS Product Support Services:
When calling, users should be at their computer with PanSystem running and the product
documentation at hand. Be prepared to supply the following information:
The version number of PanSystem being used (this can be obtained from the
Help/About PanSystem main menu option).
User machine specification (including memory) details.
The type of hardware being used, including operating system details and network
hardware.
The exact wording of any messages that appeared on the computer screen.
What happened and what operations were being performed when the problem
occurred.
What has been done to try and solve the problem.
Users should also prepare a copy of the PanSystem file with a description of the problem
(this can be zipped and e-mailed to EPS for analysis).
For Non-Program Related Problems and Queries
Our Product Support Service is designed to help users with problems relating to the
PanSystem program. If users are having difficulty with welltest analysis or design, EPS
also provide a full range of Product Training and Consulting Services.
1220
PanSystem
PanSystem Product Support, Training and Consultancy
EPS Product Training and Consulting Services

General:
EPS offer special product training and consulting services to help users take full
advantage of the power of the PanSystem program.
Training Courses:
EPS offer PanSystem user training courses, which can be either open courses held on EPS
premises, or alternatively can be held on site at the client's offices.
EPS also offer a range of basic, intermediate and advanced well-testing courses, again
either open or on-site. The course material is regularly updated and is presented using
state-of-the-art technology. Tailor made training courses can also be provided to meet
the exact needs of the client.
For further information or to reserve a place on one of the courses, select Contact EPS
Training to link directly to head office training via the EPS website or alternatively,
contact the EPS Training Co-ordinator at the address below:
Consultancy Services:
A wide variety of well test analysis and design consultancy services is available from EPS
in addition to a full range of consultancy services on all other areas of petroleum
engineering. For further details please contact the EPS Consulting Manager at the
address below.
Head Office:
To contact the head office, see the Web site: http://www.ep-
solutions.com/Contact_Us.htm
1221
Index
* Open Data Files 62
*.BMP 17 *.TPT 72
*.DIB 15 A
*.DOC 586 About PanSystem 1
*.EPS 17 Add Layer 134
*.GAS 14 Add Well 133
*.GIF 15 Adding Co-ordinates 832
*.HST 490, 494, 498 Adding Description 833
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) From Adding Legend 834
TCX File 498 Adding Title 835
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) New Additional Information (Advanced
Run 490 Simulation) 438
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Additional Information (PanFlow
Replay 494 Rate Simulation) 445
*.JPG 15 Address 853
*.OIL 14 Advanced Automatic Matching 433
*.PAN 1004 Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning 321
*.PAX 1004 Configuration Files 322
*.PIC 1007 Data Reduction 338
*.PRO 14 Denoising 332
*.PSP 1005 Event Detection 335
*.RPT 17, 1167, 1172 Interpolation 330
PanSystem File Print 17 Introduction 321
Tutorial 4 - Creating a Text-Only Outlier Removal 327
Report 1172
Output 340
Tutorial 4 - Printing a Report 1167
Preprocessing 323
*.SEA 1008
Screen Layout 323
*.TCX 490, 494, 498
Starting 321
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) From
TCX File 498 Tutorial 341
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) New Advanced Simulation 128, 168, 436,

Run 490 437, 441, 443, 446, 447, 500, 501,
504, 508, 517
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh)
Replay 494 Control Dialog 437
*.TIFF 15 Data Preparation 501
*.TPL 1169 Generating Type-Curves 517
*.TPR 62, 64 History Matching 504
Import Data Files 64 Observation Points 441

Overview 500
1223
PanSystem Analytical Boundary Model Pressure Transformation 407

168 Report Edit Report Analysis Section
PanSystem Analytical Wellbore Storage 562
Parameters 128 Select Analysis Model 395
Rate Simulation 436 Selection Dialog 394
Rate Simulation Column Names 446 Suggest Model 401
Rate Simulation Progress 443 Analysis Model 395
Rate Simulation Start Pressures/Rates Analysis Plot 358, 363
447
Define Line Dialog 363
Welltest Design 508
Overview 358
Advanced Simulation Effects (Gauge
Characteristics) 598 Analysis Selection 394
Agarwal (Equivalent Time) - Full History, Analytical 433, 436, 437, 441, 443, 446,
No Horner 886 447, 500, 501, 504, 508, 517
Agarwal (Equivalent Time) - Semi-Log, Advanced Simulation - Data

Constant Rate, Build-Up 884 Preparation 501
Agarwal (Equivalent Time) - Semi-Log, Advanced Simulation - Generating

Initial Pressure (Pcalc) 887 Type-Curves 517
Agarwal-Gardner 761 Advanced Simulation - History

Matching 504
PDA Toolbar Rate-Cumulative
Production Decline Plot 761 Advanced Simulation - Overview 500
Alpha (Geometrical Coefficient for Advanced Simulation - Welltest Design

Matrix Block Type) 146 508
Alter Units System 592 Simulate Advanced Automatic

Matching 433
Altering Axes 836
Simulate Advanced Simulation Control
Altering Co-ordinates 41 437
Altering Dataset 837 Simulate Advanced Simulation
Altering Description 838 Observation Points 441
Altering Legend 839 Simulate Advanced/PanFlow Rate
Altering Title 840 Simulation 436
Analysis 167, 356, 358, 394, 395, 401, Simulate Advanced/PanFlow Rate
402, 404, 407, 409, 413, 562, 581, Simulation Column Names 446
675, 749 Simulate Advanced/PanFlow Rate
Analysis Toolbar 675 Simulation Progress 443
Analytical Dual-Porosity Block Type Simulate Advanced/PanFlow Rate

167 Simulation Start Pressures/Rates 447
Autofit Lines 402 Analytical Reporting 558
Enter Model Parameter 413 Analytical Reservoir Description 121
EUB Reporting TRG PAS Analysis 581 ANG (Deviation Angle) 149
Menu Index 356 Annotation to Plots 841
Non-Darcy Skin Analysis 409 Append 52
Plot Overview 358 Aquifer Model 143
Pressure Extrapolation 404, 749 Area (A) in Quick Match 418
1224
Index
Areal Heterogeneity 292, 297, 298 Axes 836

PanMesh Data Prep Define Internal No- Axes/Triad (PanMesh Numerical
Flow Boundaries 292 Simulation) 460
PanMesh Data Prep Delete Areal Axial Adjustment 450, 454, 455
Region 297 Numerical Simulation (PanMesh)
PanMesh Data Prep Using Regions & Graphical Interface 450
Defining Areal Heterogeneity 298 Numerical Simulation (PanMesh)
Auto 428 Graphical
Auto Match 428, 431, 433, 434 Interface#Cut_Plane_on_Panel 454
Pressure/Derivative Weighting 430 Numerical Simulation (PanMesh)

Graphical
Simulate Advanced Automatic Interface#Flow_Plane_on_Panel
Matching 433 455
Simulate Auto Match - Points Selection Axis (R-, T-, X-, Y-) 33, 35, 37, 38
431
Edit R-Axis Dialog 38
Simulate Automatic Matching 428
Edit T-Axis Dialog 37
Simulate Matching Progress 434
Edit X-Axis Dialog 33
Autofit Lines 402
Edit Y-Axis Dialog 35
Auto-Load File 589
B
Automatic 428, 433, 434
Bg (Gas FVF) 123, 182, 216, 240
Simulate Advanced Automatic
Matching 433 Condensate Fluid Parameters 240
Simulate Automatic Matching 428 Gas Fluid Parameters 216
Simulate Matching Progress 434 Oil Fluid Parameters 182
Automatic Flow Period Selection 108 Well and Reservoir Description 123
Dataprep Gauge Data Edit Plot BHP 51, 88

Overview 108 Dataprep Gauge DataPreparation 51
Automatic Selection of Rate Changes 108 Dataprep Wellhead to BHP Conversion
Dataprep Gauge Data Edit Plot 88
Overview 108 Bilinear Flow 911, 971
Auto-Save File 589 Gas Analysis Reservoir Bi-Linear Flow
Auto-Scale 33, 35, 38 971
Edit R-Axis Dialog 38 Oil Analysis Reservoir Bi-Linear Flow

911
Edit X-Axis Dialog 33
Bilinear Flow Plot 694
Edit Y-Axis Dialog 35
Black Oil (Matching) 194, 196
Average Layer Pressure 417, 889
Matching Example 196
Oil Analysis (Radial Flow), Semi-
Log Plot 889 Black Oil Model 180, 186, 189, 191, 192,
193, 194
Simulate Quick Match 417
Analytical Black Oil Properties Check
Average Line 729 193
Averaging (Rate Data) 104, 113 Analytical Correction to Datum for Oil
Dataprep Rate Change 113 192
Dataprep Rate Data Averaging 104
1225
Analytical Match Black Oil Properties Water Fluid Parameters -

194 Calculated Properties 210
Analytical Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Bugs (Reporting) 1242
(Oil) 191 Build-Up Test Period After Slug Test
Analytical Oil Fluid Parameters 180 1011
Analytical Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi- Bw (Water FVF) 123, 182, 216, 240
Phase Pseudo-Pressures) 186 Analytical Well & Reservoir Description
Analytical Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table 123
Editing 189 Condensate Fluid Parameters 240
Block Permeability/Height Ratio 892 Gas Fluid Parameters 216
Block Type 167 Oil Fluid Parameters 182
Bo (Oil FVF) 182 C
Boundary 168, 174, 176, 177, 179, 395, C&n 531, 534, 537, 717, 718
424
Analysis Toolbar C&n FAF 717
Analysis Select Analysis Model 395
Analysis Toolbar C&n Isochronal 718
Analytical Boundary Model 168
Deliverability IPR C&n Results -
Analytical Boundary Parameters 174 Additional Data 534
Analytical Edit Image Wells 177 Deliverability IPR C&n Results
Analytical Estimated Test Duration 179 (Gas/Condensate) 531
Analytical Number of Image Wells 176 Deliverability Production Forecasting
Simulate Boundary Type 424 537
Boundary (Delete Internal) 297 C&n Isochronal 718
Boundary Conditions 296 C&n Plot 714
Boundary Model 168, 174, 176, 177, Calculations 180, 189, 215, 231, 238
179, 424 Analytical Condensate Fluid Parameters
Analytical Boundary Model 168 238
Analytical Boundary Parameters 174 Analytical Gas and Condensate

Composition 231
Analytical Estimated Test Duration 179
Analytical Gas Fluid Parameters 215
Analytical Number of Image Wells 176
Analytical Oil Fluid Parameters 180
Edit Image Wells 177
Gas and Condensate Pseudo-Pressure
Simulate Boundary Type 424 Table Editing 222
Boundary Parameters 168, 174, 424 Oil Pseudo-Pressure Table Editing 189
Analytical Boundary Model 168 Cartesian Plot 686, 897, 957
Analytical Boundary Parameters 174 Analysis Toolbar Cartesian Plot 686
Simulate Boundary Type 424 Gas Analysis Cartesian Plot 957
Bpr 528 Oil Analysis Cartesian Plot 897
Deliverability IPR Transient Welltest Center View (PanMesh Numerical
and LIT Results (Gas/Condensate) Simulation) 451
Dialog 528
Cf (Compressibility, Rock) 136
br (Report Template) 550
Cg (Compressibility, Gas) 123, 182, 216,
Browser (File Import) 74 240
Bubble- Point 182, 210 Condensate Fluid Parameters 240
1226
Index
Data Prep Well & Reservoir Description Closing 825

123 Cnf tool 720
Gas Fluid Parameters 216 Analysis Toolbar Confirm Results 720
Oil Fluid Parameters 182 Co (Oil Compressibility) 182
Change F (Correct for Rate Dependency) Codes - Page Set-Up 24
411
Coefficients (Regression) 428
Change Line Type 730
Color 28, 29, 31, 32, 33
Change Model 395, 401
Edit Datasets 32
Analysis Select Analysis Model 395
Edit Description 31
Analysis Suggest Model 401
Edit Legend 29
Change T0 721
Edit Title 28
Check - PVT 193, 235, 247
Edit X-Axis 33
Analytical Black Oil Properties 193
Color - Toggle Background (PanMesh
Analytical Condensate Properties 247 Numerical Simulation) 462
Analytical Dry Gas Properties 235 Color Contour (PanMesh Numerical
Check Pressure and Temperature 123, Simulation) 458
184, 218, 242 Column Definition 73, 489
Analytical Well & Reservoir Description Dataprep Gauge Data - File Import
123 Column Definition 73
Condensate Fluid Parameters 242 Numerical Simulation (PanMesh)
Gas Fluid Parameters 218 Simulated Column Names 489
Oil Fluid Parameters 184 Combo Mode - Auto Match 428
Classic Wellbore Storage 128, 924, 928, Combo Mode - Quick Match 418
950, 981 Commands 616
Analytical Wellbore Storage Help Commands Index 616
Parameters 128
Commands Help 613, 614
Gas Analysis Log-Log Plot 950
Help General Index 614
Gas Analysis Wellbore Storage Type-
Curves 981 PanSystem Help Menu Index 613
Oil Analysis Fractured Well Type- Commingled 254

Curves 928 Compartmentalized Boundary Model 171
Oil Analysis Wellbore Storage Type- Complete (Report Template) 550
Curves 924 Completion Data (PanMesh Input) 278
Clear 97 Completions (View in PanMesh Numerical
Clipping Plane - Reset Auto (PanMesh Simulation) 452
Numerical Simulation) 456 Composite (Radial-Composite) Model
Clipping Plane - Reset Near (Multiple Zones) 150
(PanMesh Numerical Simulation) Composite (Radial-Composite) Model
457 (Two-Zone) 145
Close 631 Composite (Radial-Composite) Type-
Closed System 171, 174 Curves 935, 987
Analytical Boundary Parameters 174 Gas Analysis Radial Composite Type-
Dataprep/Analysis Boundary Model 171 Curves 987
1227
Oil Analysis Radial-Composite Type- Partially-Sealing Fault 151

Curves 935 Vertical Fracture Finite
Composite Layer 253, 394 Conductivity 144
Analysis Selection 394 Vertical Fracture Infinite
Analytical Create Composite 253 Conductivity 144
Composite Linear Reservoir Model Confidence Intervals 428, 431, 434, 562
157 Report Edit Report Analysis Section
Compressibility 136, 184, 212, 218, 242 Sub-Dialog 562
Condensate Fluid Parameters 242 Simulate Auto Match - Points Selection

Dialog 431
Gas Fluid Parameters 218
Simulate Automatic Matching Dialog
Layer Parameters 136 428
Oil Fluid Parameters 184 Simulate Matching Progress Sub-Dialog
Water Fluid Parameters 212 434
Concave Angles (PanMesh) 273 Configuration (Report) 556
Condensate (Multi-Phase Pseudo- Configure 587, 589, 592, 598, 601, 604
Pressure) 124, 222, 227, 244, 1005 Configure Font Definition Dialog 604
Analytical Condensate Fluid Parameters Configure Gauge Details Dialog 598
(MPPP) 244
Configure General Configuration Dialog
Analytical Gas & Condensate Pseudo- 589
Pressure Table Editing 222
Configure Graphing Configuration
Analytical MPPP (Gas and Condensate) Dialog 601
Data Review 227
Configure Unit Systems Dialog 592
Dataprep Well & Reservoir Description
- Multi-Phase Fluid Type 124 PanSystem Configure Menu Index 587
PanSystem File Structures - MPPP Configure Dataset Styles 32

(PSP) File 1005 Configure Fonts 604
Condensate Composition 231 Configure Gauge 598
Condensate Model 215, 220, 227, 229, Configure General 589
231, 238, 244, 247, 249 Configure Graphs 601
Condensate Fluid Parameters 238 Configure Menu 587
Condensate Fluid Parameters (MPPP) Configure Units 592
244
Confirm 651
Condensate Properties 247
Confirm (Cnf tool) 720
Edit Pseudo-Table 229
Analysis Toolbar Confirm Results 720
Gas and Condensate Composition 231
Confirm Results 720
Analysis Toolbar Confirm Results
Gas Fluid Parameters (MPPP) 220 Dialog 720
Match Condensate Properties 249 Constant Pressure Boundary
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (Gas and Homogeneous Model 148
Condensate) Data Review 227 Contact (EPS) 853, 1242
Conductivity 143, 144, 151 EPS Product Support 1242
Analytical Model Parameters Dialog Glossary EPS Address 853
143
1228
Index
Context-Sensitive Help 629 Correction to Datum 192, 214, 233

Control Points (PanMesh) 301 Analytical Correction to Datum for Gas
Controls 630, 844 and Condensate Sub-Dialog 233
Keyboard PanSystem and Windows Analytical Correction to Datum for Oil

Keys 844 Sub-Dialog 192
Windows System Commands 630 Analytical Correction to Datum for

Water Sub-Dialog 214
Convergence Skin (Sconv) 909, 919,
970, 977 Correlations 136, 180, 215, 231, 238
Gas Analysis (Horizontal Wells) Analytical Condensate Fluid Parameters

Square-Root Plot 977 Sub-Dialog 238
Gas Analysis Reservoir Linear Flow 970 Analytical Gas and Condensate
Composition Dialog 231
Oil Analysis (Horizontal Wells) Square
Root Plot 919 Analytical Gas Fluid Parameters Sub-
Dialog 215
Oil Analysis Reservoir Linear Flow 909
Analytical Layer Parameters Dialog 136
Conversion THP to BHP 51, 88
Analytical Oil Fluid Parameters Sub-
Dataprep Gauge Data TPR Data Dialog 180
Preparation Dialog 51
Cover Page (Report) 552
Dataprep Gauge Data Wellhead to BHP
Conversion Dialog 88 Create Commingled 254
Convex angles (PanMesh) 273 Create Composite 253
Co-ordinates 41, 126, 260, 278, 483, Create Unit System 594
832 Create/Delete Regions and Boundaries
Analytical Well Parameters 126 298
Edit View Co-ordinates 41 Creating Type-Curves 517, 998
Graphing Adding and Removing the Advanced Simulation - Generating

Co-ordinates 832 Type-Curves 517
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Enter PanSystem File Structures - Type

the Co-ordinates 483 Curve File 998
PanMesh Data Prep Reservoir Cross-Flow 143, 167

Geometry 260 Analytical Dual-Porosity Block Type
PanMesh Data Prep Well Configuration Sub-Dialog 167
278 Analytical Model Parameters Dialog
Copy (Data Edit) 59 143
Copy Data to Clipboard 27 Cs (Wellbore Storage) 128, 927, 944,

1009
Copy Graph to Clipboard 27
Analytical Wellbore Storage
Copy Layer 135 Parameters Sub-Dialog 128
Copy Plot (to ClipBoard) 27 Oil Analysis Slug Test Type-Curves 927
Copy to Clipboard 27 Slug Test Analysis - Ramey et al Type-
Copy Well 135 Curves 944
Copyright 852 Slug Test Analysis Workflow 1009
Corey Coefficients 140 Ct (Total Compressibility) 136, 184, 212,
Correction for Rate-Dependency 409, 218, 242
959 Analytical Layer Parameters Dialog 136
1229
Condensate Fluid Parameters 242 Dataprep Gauge Data Define New Data
Gas Fluid Parameters 218 File Dialog 87
Oil Fluid Parameters 184 Dataprep Gauge Data Edit Dialog 59
Water Fluid Parameters 212 Dataprep Gauge Data Edit Test Design
Dialog 81
Customer-Defined Flow Models 149
Dataprep Gauge Data Editing Clear
Cut Plane (PanMesh Numerical Sub-Dialog 97
Simulation) 454, 457, 473
Dataprep Gauge Data Editing Delete
Controls 473 Sub-Dialog 99
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Dataprep Gauge Data Editing Function
Graphical Interface 457 Sub-Dialog 95
Positioning Tool 454 Dataprep Gauge Data Editing GoTo
Cw (Water Compressibility) 210 Sub-Dialog 96
D Dataprep Gauge Data Editing Insert
D (Rate-Dependent Skin) 131, 146, 148, Sub-Dialog 98
154, 156, 284, 396, 960 Dataprep Gauge Data Editing Names
Analytical Edit Skin and Storage Sub- Sub-Dialog 101
Dialog 131 Dataprep Gauge Data Editing Time
Gas Analysis - Transient Analysis Sub-Dialog 100
with Rate-Dependent Skin 960 Dataprep Gauge Data Export Data Files
Horizontal Well 148 Dialog 61
PanMesh Dataprep - Material Dataprep Gauge Data Import Data
Properties 284 Files Sub-Dialog 64
Select Analysis Model - Allow Different Dataprep Gauge Data Import Status
Skin and Storage per Flow Period Sub-Dialog 76
396 Dataprep Gauge Data Open Data Files
Three-Layer Homogeneous - Dialog 62
Internal Cross-Flow 154 Dataprep Gauge Data TPR Preparation
Two-Layer Homogeneous - Dialog 51
Internal Cross-Flow 156 EUB Reporting AOF PAS Test Data
Vertical Well 146 Tabbed Dialog 575
Damage Zone Permeability 283 EUB Reporting TRG PAS Test Data
Tabbed Dialog 575
Damage Zone Radius 277
IPR Relative Permeability - Data
Data 51, 58, 59, 61, 62, 64, 73, 76, 81, Selection Sub-Dialog 138
87, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 110,
121, 138, 140, 142, 260, 277, 278, IPR Relative Permeability - Edit
281, 294, 296, 312, 493, 575 Parametric Data Sub-Dialog 140
Data Prep Analytical Well and Reservoir IPR Relative Permeability - Edit Tabular
Description Dialog 121 Data Sub-Dialog 142
Dataprep Data Files 110 PanMesh Data Prep Boundary
Conditions Sub-Dialog 296
Dataprep Gauge Data - File Import
Column Definition Sub-Dialog 73 PanMesh Data Prep Material Properties
Tabbed Dialog 281
Dataprep Gauge Data - Select Data File
to Delete Dialog 58 PanMesh Data Prep Node Parameters
Sub-Dialog 294
1230
Index
PanMesh Data Prep Radial Regions Export Data Files 61

Around The Wellbore Sub-Dialog 277 File Import Column Definition 73, 74
PanMesh Data Prep Reservoir View Data File Browser 74
Geometry Tabbed Dialog 260
Flow Periods 117
PanMesh Data Prep Well Configuration
Tabbed Dialog 278 Gauge Data Edit Plot 108
Simulate Numerical Simulation Import Data Files 64, 66, 67, 69, 70,
(PanMesh) Control Dialog 493 72
Tide Edit Tide Table Dialog 312 Date Definition 69
Data Edit Plot 108, 558, 805 Number of Lines in Header 66
Dataprep Data Edit Plot Overview 108 Skip 72
Report Edit Input Report Section Sub- Space/Tab 67

Dialog 558 Time 24hr Update 70
Specific Screen Region Ruler Window TPR Format Template 72
805 Import Status 76
Data Edit Remarks 102 Master Pressure and Rate Columns 112
Data Preparation (Dataprep - Gauge Open Data Files 62
Data) 51, 58, 59, 61, 62, 64, 73, 76,
77, 81, 86, 87, 88, 102, 103, 104, Rate Change Dialog 113, 114
108, 112, 113, 117, 118 Mark as End of Build-Up 114
Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR) Rate Data Averaging 104
Preparation Dialog 51 Rate Data Transfer 103
Dataprep Toolbar 638 Select Data File to Delete 58
Define New Data File 87 Test Design 86
Edit Dialog 59, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, Test Period Classification 118, 119
100, 101
Pressure Integral Method 119
Clear 97
Wellhead to BHP Conversion 88
Delete 99
Data Preparation (Dataprep - Tide Data)
Function 95 309, 311, 312, 315, 316, 317, 318,
GoTo 96 319
Insert 98 Tide Edit Tidal Pressure Gauge Dialog
Names 101 319
Paste 59 Tide Edit Tide Table Dialog 312
Time 100 Tide Edit Tide Table Parameters Sub-

Dialog 315
Edit Rate Changes 77, 80
Tide Martime Tide Table 311
Injection Fall-Off Tests 80
Tide Select Tidal Pressure Gauge
Special Set-Up for Slug Tests 80 Dialog 318
Edit Test Design 81, 83 Tide Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge 317
Injection Fall-Off Tests 81 Tide Tide Data - Overview 309
Interfering Wells 83 Tide Tide Table Time Formats Sub-
Transfer Rate Change Times and Dialog 316
Rates 83
Edit TPR Header 102
1231
Data Preparation (Dataprep - WRD 3D Design View 275

Analytical) 121, 123, 124, 125, 278, Boundary Editing 273
675
Defining Sub-Layers 270
Analysis Toolbar 675
Delete Regions or Internal
Data Prep Analytical Well and Reservoir Boundaries 273
Description Dialog 121
Editing Node Details 271
Fluid Parameters 123
Internal Boundaries, Regions and
Fluid Type 123 Nodes 271
Layer Control 121 Less than 180 Degrees 273
Multi-Phase Fluid Type 124 More than 20 Nodes 275
Multi-Phase Perrine 124 Moving Nodes 270
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure 186 Node Information Table 263
Principal Well 121 Run Mode 286
Principal Well Orientation 125 User Menu (Pop-Up) 289
Well Control 121 Sketch Display 289
Data Preparation (Dataprep - WRD Using Regions and Defining Areal
Numerical) 256, 260, 277, 281, 286, Heterogeneity 298, 300, 301, 305
289, 292, 294, 296, 297, 298, 306,
307 Control Points for PanMesh 301
Boundary Conditions 296 Delete Region or Internal Boundary

301
Define Internal No-Flow Boundaries
292 Imported Templates and Maps 305
Delete Areal Region 297 Sub-Dividing with Nodes 300
Graph Window Scale 306 Well Configuration 278, 279
Import Map Wizard 307 Wellbore Storage 279
Material Properties 281, 282, 283, 284, Data View Controls (PanMesh Numerical
285 Simulation) 473
Damage Zone Permeability 283 Cut Plane 457
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure 284 Flow Arrows 458
Pseudo-Pressures 285 Menu 463
PVT Calculator 284 Select Point 458
Rate-Dependent Skin 284 Stock Views 452
Sub-Layers and Regions 281 Stream Tube 460
Vertical Mesh Refinement 282 Dataprep Data Files 110
Wellbore Damage 283 Dataprep Gauge Data 51
Node Parameters 294 Dataprep Master Pressure and Rate

Columns 112
Sub-Layer 294
Dataprep Menu Index 49
Numerical Well and Reservoir
Description 256 Dataprep Rate Change 113
Radial Regions Around the Wellbore Dataprep Report 558, 561

277 Dataprep Tide 309, 315, 316, 317
Reservoir Geometry 260, 263, 270, Dataprep Toolbar 638
271, 273, 275
1232
Index
Dataprep TPR 58, 59, 61, 62, 64, 73, 81, Definition of Terms 848
87, 110, 111, 112, 113, 117, 118 Delete 58, 99, 121
Datasets 32, 837 Delete Areal Region 297
Datasets Edit 32 Delete Internal Boundary 297
Datasets Styles 32 Delete Marker 47
Date (Selection/Optional) 69 Delete Results box 30
Date Formats (Import) 73 Deliver (Report Template) 550
Gauge Data Import Data File Sub- Deliverability 519, 520, 525, 528, 531,
Dialog - Date Definition 69 534, 536, 537
Date on Time Axis 33 Deliverability (IPR) C&n Data 531, 534
Datum Correction 192, 214, 233 Deliverability (IPR) Gas/Condensate Data
Decline Analysis 543, 548, 755, 761 528, 531, 534
Deconvolution 365 Deliverability (IPR) LIT Data 528
Advanced Option 372 Deliverability (IPR) Oil/Water Data 525
Deconvolved Datasets 373 Deliverability and Forecasting
Deleting 374 Calculations 900, 905, 962, 968
Flow Period Selection 368 Deliverability Forecasting 537
Initialization 369 Deliverability Menu Index 519
Introduction 365 Deliverability Results (Report) 563
Plot toolbar 379 Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Overview

520
Plots 371
Denoising
Pressure Period Selection 368
Rate-Dependent Skin 379 332
References 381 Data Edit Plot (smoothing) 646
Run 370 Density (ro) 123
Save Results 377 Condensate Fluid Parameters 240
Starting 365 Gas Fluid Parameters 216
Test Derivative Overlay 375 Oil Fluid Parameters 182
Theoretical Background 380 Water Fluid Parameters 210
Toolset Screen 367 Derivative (deconvolved) 370
Tutorial 381 Derivative Diagnostic Library 858, 860,
Deconvolved Datasets 862, 864, 866, 868, 870, 873, 875
Curve Properties 374 Derivative, Log-Log Plot
Deleting 374 Equations 879
Properties 374 Description 31, 833, 838
Saving 377 Design 81, 86
Deconvolved Pressure Destination (Report Output) 585
(deconvolution) 377 Deviation Factor (Gas and Condensate)
Default Fonts (Save/Restore) 604 123
Define Line 363 Condensate Fluid Parameters 240
Definition of Data Types 848 Gas Fluid Parameters 217
1233
Dew-Point 247 Duplicate Column Names 439

Dietz Shape Factor 174, 686, 856 Duration (PanMesh Simulation) 490
Difference 659 Duration (Test) 179
Different Skins 128, 415 E
In Analytical Layer Parameters Dialog ECR (Equivalent Constant Rate) 755
137 PDA Plot - Troubleshooting ECR 545
Different Storage 128, 415 Edit 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 35,
In Analytical Layer Parameters Dialog 37, 38, 41, 42, 43, 45, 46, 47, 48, 51,
137 58, 59, 62, 64, 73, 77, 81, 86, 87, 95,
Discontinuity Radial Distance (Lrad) 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103,
147 131, 140, 142, 177, 189, 229, 312,
315, 316, 318, 319, 485, 488, 558,
DLL Link (Customer-Defined Flow 562, 563, 564
Models) 149
Edit Co-ordinates 41
Dpr (Rate-dependent Skin Coefficient)
962 Edit Copy to Clipboard 27
Deliverability IPR C&n Results - Edit Dataset 32

Additional Data Sub-Dialog 534 Edit Delete Marker 47
Deliverability IPR C&n Results Edit Description 31
(Gas/Condensate) Dialog 531 Edit Input (Report) 558
Deliverability IPR Model Parameters Edit Legend 29
Sub-Dialog 536
Edit Mark Points 45
Deliverability IPR Transient Welltest
and LIT Results (Gas/Condensate) Edit Marker Text 46
Dialog 528 Edit Menu 26
Gas Analysis Deliverability 962 Edit Mesh 450, 485
Drainage Area Size (A) 543, 686 Edit Plot 32, 43, 45, 108, 686, 694, 714
In Analytical Boundary Parameters Edit Plot Rate Changes 42
Dialog 175 Edit Plot Right Hand Axis 39
In Quick Match Results 418 Edit R-Axis 38
Drawing Display (Plot Window and Edit Results 30
PanMesh) 260, 802
Edit Show Marker Text 48
Drift (Gauge) 598
Edit T-Axis 37
Dual Pressure Analysis 56
Edit Title 28
Dual-Permeability Model 144
Edit Units System 592, 596
Technical Reference 1015
Edit X-Axis 33
Dual-Permeability Type-Curves 933, 986
Edit Y-Axis 35
Dual-Porosity 167, 930, 984
Effective Permeability (Gas Analysis) 955
Dual-Porosity (Pseudo-Steady-
State) Model 144 Effective Permeability (Oil Analysis) 893
Dual-Porosity (Transient) Model Elevation View (Reservoir) 289

144 E-Mail 16
Dual-Porosity (Two No-Flow End of Build-Up (Mark) 114
Boundaries) Horizontal Well EPS 852, 853, 1242, 1243
Model 148
1234
Index
Equations (Gas Analysis) 948, 950, 952, Export Type-Curve 412

957, 959, 962, 968, 969, 970, 971, External Models 149
972, 973, 975, 977, 979, 980, 981,
982, 983, 984, 985, 986, 987, 988, Extrapolation (Pressure) 404, 749
989, 990, 991, 992 F
Equations (Oil Analysis) 879, 883, 893, F (Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient)
895, 897, 900, 905, 906, 909, 911, Gas Analysis - Transient Analysis
913, 915, 917, 919, 921, 923, 924, with Rate-Dependent Skin 960
926, 927, 928, 930, 932, 933, 935,
937, 939, 940, 942, 944, 946 F Ang 157
Equations of State 231 F1 Key 620
Equilateral Triangle Model 427 FAF 712, 717
Equivalent Constant Rate (ECR) Fair's Model (Wellbore Storage) 128
PDA Plot - Troubleshooting ECR 545 Fall-Off Test (Edit Rate Changes Dialog)
80
Equivalent Drawdown Time
Fall-Off Test (Edit Test Design Dialog) 81
Oil Analysis Semi-Log Plot - Equivalent
Time (Constant Rate, Build-Up) 884 Fault Model (General Intersecting)
156
Oil Analysis Semi-Log Plot - Equivalent
Time (Full History, No Horner) 886 Fault Model (Partially-Sealing) 151
Oil Analysis Semi-Log Plot - Initial Fc (Fault Conductivity) - Composite

Pressure (Pcalc) 887 Linear Reservoir 158
Equivalent Rate 712 Fc (Fault Conductivity) - Partially-

Sealing Fault 151
Erosional Limit (Maximum Flow Rate)
992 Fcd (Dimensionless Fracture
Conductivity) 146
Essis-Thomas Plot 411
Fcd Range 738
Estimated Test Duration 179
Field Wide Trend 537
EUB Report 549, 552, 573, 575, 577,
579, 581 File 58, 59, 62, 64, 77, 81, 86, 87, 95,
96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 103, 110,
Event Detection 335 315, 316, 318, 998, 1004, 1005, 1007,
Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning 1008
335 File Exit 25
Data Edit Plot 663 File Import 14, 62, 64, 76
Examples (PanMesh) 1215, 1229, 1233, File Menu 7
1238
File Name 7, 9, 11, 12, 13
Examples (PanSystem) 1024, 1073,
1113, 1158, 1175 File New 8
Excel 64 File Open 9, 64
Dataprep Gauge Data Import Data File Page Set-Up 19, 24, 556
Files Sub-Dialog#Excel 64 File Print 17, 21
Dataprep Gauge Data Import Data File Printer Set-Up 21
Files Sub-Dialog#XLS 64 File Save 11, 12, 13
Exit PanSystem 25 File Save As 12, 13
Export 15, 61, 412 File Save As Previous 13
Export to Word Document 586 File Send As e-mail 16
1235
File Structures 998, 1004, 1005, 1007, Fonts 604

1008 Footer Codes 24
Fit to Page (Plot Size) 19 Forecasting 537
Fixed Column Width 64 Format Report 556
Flow Analysis (PanMesh Numerical Formation Thickness 136
Simulation) 471, 485
Four-Point Test (C&n Plot) 715
Flow Arrows (PanMesh Numerical
Simulation) 458 Fourth-Root Plot 694
Flow Capacity Ratio (kappa) 147 Fpr 528
Flow Efficiency (Gas Analysis Semi- Deliverability IPR Transient Welltest

Log Plot) 954 and LIT Results (Gas/Condensate)
Dialog 528
Flow Efficiency (Oil Analysis Semi-
Log Plot) 889 Fracture (Fracture Models) 143
Flow into Completions (PanMesh Dimensionless Fracture

Numerical Simulation) 471 Conductivity (Fcd) Vertical Well
146
View 471
Fracture Half-Length (Xf) Vertical
Flow Model 167, 395, 517, 998 Well 146
Customer-Defined Models 149 Fracture Height (hf) Vertical Well 147
Horizontal Well Models 147 Fracture Offset (zwdf) 147
Model Parameters 148 Fracture Skin (Sf) Vertical Well 146
Vertical Well Models 143 Vertical Fracture Finite
Model Parameters 145 Conductivity Model 144
Flow Period 108, 117, 118, 136, 402, Vertical Fracture Infinite
415, 805 Conductivity Model 144
Flow Period Display 805 Vertical Fracture Limited Height Model
Flow Period Selection (for deconvolution) 144
368 Vertical Fracture Uniform Flux
Flow Planes (PanMesh Numerical Model 144
Simulation) 455 Fracture Conductivity (kfw) in Quick
Flow Plane Settings 477 Match 417
Positioning Tool 455 Free Model (Horizontal) 147
Zoom Into 452 Free Model (Vertical) 143
Flow Rate Advisor 992 Full Analysis 537
Flow-After-Flow (FAF) 712, 717 Full Page (Plot) 19
Flowmeter Calibration 95 Function Edit 95
Fluid (Multi-Phase Options) 186, 189, G

220, 222, 244, 1005 Gas (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure) 220,
Dataprep Well and Reservoir 222, 227, 1005
Description (Analytical) Dialog - Dataprep Well and Reservoir
Multi-Phase Fluid Type 124 Description (Analytical) - Multi-Phase
Fluid Parameters 180, 192, 214, 215, Fluid Type 124
231, 233, 238, 281 Gas (Single-Phase) Import Table 222,
Fluid Type 123 228, 229
1236
Index
Gas and Condensate (Data Review) 227 Review Mode 467

Gas and Condensate Composition 231 Graphs/Plots 19, 24, 28, 29, 31, 32, 33,
Gas Equations 948, 950, 952, 957, 959, 35, 37, 38, 43, 45, 394, 811
962, 968, 969, 970, 971, 972, 973, Gravity Calculation (Gas and
975, 977, 979, 980, 981, 982, 983, Condensate) 231
984, 985, 986, 987, 988, 989, 990, Green's Functions 168, 174
991, 992
In Simulate Boundary Type Dialog 424
Technical Reference 1017
Gas Model 215, 229, 231, 233, 234, 235,
236 Group Flow Periods 805
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Option H

220, 227 h (Formation Thickness) 136
Gas Properties 215, 231, 235 h2 (Layer Thickness) 151
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Option Hard Copy 821
220 Header Codes 24
Gas Saturation 136 Hegeman's Model (Wellbore Storage)
Gas-Cap/Aquifer Model 145 128
Gauge 88, 579, 598 Help 606, 607, 608, 614, 620, 627, 628,
Gauge Characteristics 598 808
Gauge Data 51, 58, 59, 61, 62, 64, 73, Help About PanSystem 614, 620, 627,
76, 77, 81, 86, 87, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 808
100, 101, 103 Help Access (F1) 620
General Intersecting Fault Model 156 Help Commands 616
Geometrical Coefficient for Matrix Help Index 614
Block Type 146 Help Keyboard 615, 843
Get Model Parameter 413 Help Menu 613
Glossary Help 614, 620 Help Procedures 617, 628
Goodness of Match 434 Help Screen Regions 808, 824
Goto 96 Help Using Help 620
Graphic Viewer 15 Hexagonal 172
Graphical Interface (PanMesh Dataprep) hf (Fracture Height) 147
260
Hide Results box 30
Graphical Interface (PanMesh Numerical
Simulation) 448, 450 History Matching 415, 504, 1113
3D Visualization Window 450 HLLC_K_L (Horizontal Well Models) 1020
PanMesh Toolbar 456 Homogeneous 923, 980
View Controls 451 No-Flow/Constant Pressure

Boundary - Homogeneous Model
Graphics Export 15 148
Graphing 601, 845 Radial Homogeneous Model 143
Graphing Keys 845 Two No-Flow Boundaries
Graphing Window (PanMesh Homogeneous Model 147
Numerical Simulation) 465
Pop-Up Menu 466
1237
Two-Layer Homogeneous Deliverability/Injectivity Plot Overview

Reservoir Model - Internal Cross- 520
Flow 154 Edit Rate Changes Dialog -
Horizontal Cut (PanMesh) 473 Injection/Fall-Off Tests 80
Horizontal Well 126, 168 Edit Test Design Dialog - Injection/Fall-
Dataprep Well and Reservoir Off Tests 81
Description (Analytical) - Production Forecasting Dialog 537
Principal Well Orientation 125 Inorganics 234
Flow Models 147 Input Parameters (Model) 400
Flow Model Parameters 148 Input/Ouput Data 549, 558
Horizontal Well (PanMesh) 278 Advanced Simulation Control - Well
Horizontal Well Equations 915, 917, 919, Input/Output Data 437
940, 973, 975, 977, 990 Insert 98
Horizontal Well Type-Curves 940, 990 Interface 450
hp (Perforation Height) 147 Interference Test 118, 126, 1175
htop (Perforation Top Distance) 147 PanMesh Numerical Simulation from
I TCX File - Generating Response at
IBDY (Slanted Well Model) 149 Remote Point 499
IBDY 1,2 (General Intersecting Fault Interfering Wells (Test Design) 81
Model) 157 Internal Boundaries (PanMesh) 292, 297,
Image Wells 176, 177, 179 298
In Analytical Boundary Model Internet 620, 1242
Dialog 173 Interpolation (Advanced Gauge Data
Import Files 14, 62, 64, 73, 222, 575, Conditioning) 330
1004 Interporosity Flow Coefficient
Import from Clipboard 64 (Lambda) 146
Import from Excel 64 Lambda 12 - Two-Layer
Homogeneous Reservoir -
Import Map 307 Internal Cross-Flow 155
Import Status 76 Lambda 12, 23 - Three-layer
Index of Help 614 Homogeneous Reservoir -
Infinitely-Acting 168 Internal Cross-Flow 154
Information 573 Oil Analysis (Radial Flow), Semi-
Log Plot 892
Initial Pressure (for deconvolution) 367
Oil Analysis Dual-Porosity Type-Curves
Initial Pressure (In Quick Match) 417 930
Gas Analysis Semi-Log Plot Intersecting Fault Model (General)
(Calculated Pi) 953 156
Oil Analysis Semi-Log Plot Intersecting Faults 169
(Calculated Pi) 887
Intersection Time Calculations (Gas
Oil Analysis Semi-Log Plot Analysis, Semi-Log) 956
(Reference Back to Pi) 886
Intersection Time Calculations (Oil
Initialize (deconvolution) 369 Analysis, Semi-Log) 890
Injection 519, 520, 537 Inter-Well Distance 126
Deliverability Menu Index 519
1238
Index
IPR 138, 140, 142, 519, 520 Oil Analysis Deliverability 900
IPR Calculations (Gas Deliverability) 962 kz (Vertical Permeability - Horizontal
IPR Calculations (Oil Deliverability) 903 Wells) 148
IPR Plots 520 kz (Vertical Permeability - Vertical

Wells) 145
Isochronal 718
L
Gas Analysis - Transient Analysis with
Rate-Dependent Skin 960 Lam12, 23 154
Isosurface (PanMesh Numerical Lambda (Interporosity Flow

Simulation) 458 Coefficient)
Plan View 452 Oil Analysis (Radial Flow), Semi-

Log Plot 892
Iterations (deconvolution) 373
Oil Analysis, Dual-Porosity Type-Curves
J 930
J (Productivity/Injectivity Index) 520, Three-Layer Homogeneous
525, 528, 900 Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow
K 154
k (Radial Permeability) 136, 138, 140, Two-Layer Homogeneous
142 Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow
Horizontal Wells 148 155
K2, K3, K4 - Multiple Radial Vertical Well 146
Composite 150 Lambda Coefficient (deconvolution) 369
Three-Layer Homogeneous Landscape Plots 17, 21
Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow Layer 134, 135, 143, 222, 253, 254
153
Layer Control 121
Two-Layer Homogeneous
Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow Layer Parameters 136
155 Layer Pressure 136, 423
Vertical Wells 145 Layer Pressure (Average - Pavg) 417
Kap 1, 2, 3 153 Layer Pressure (Initial - Pi) 417
Kap 1,2 155 Layer Temperature 136
Kappa 147 Layer Thickness 136
Three-Layer Homogeneous (h) Pinch-Out Model 152
Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow (h2) Partially-Sealing Fault Model
153 151
Two-Layer Homogeneous Layers (Dual Porosity) 167
Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow
155 Layers (PanMesh) 281
Keyboard 615, 843, 844 Defining 270
kf (Fault Zone Permeability) 158 Layout (Report) 564
kfw (Fracture Conductivity in Quick Leak-Off Test 118, 921, 927
Match) 417 Leaky Fault Boundary Model 171
kh (Permeability Thickness in Quick Legend (Plot) 29, 813, 834, 839
Match) 417 Length/Distance/Thickness (L) in Model
Kpr 900 Parameters 143
Gas Analysis Deliverability 962
1239
(L1) - Fault to Well Distance - Map (Import for PanMesh) 306, 307
Partially Sealing Fault 151 Margins (Plot) 19
(L1, L3) - Boundary to Well Maritime Tide Table 312, 1008
Distances - Pinch-Out 152
Mark 45
(Lf) - Thickness of Fault Zone -
Composite Linear Reservoir 158 Mark as End of Build-Up 114
(Lint) - Fault Intersection to Well Mark Points 45

Distance - General Intersecting Marker Text 46
Fault 157 Master Gauge Data 43, 51, 73, 110, 112,
(Lp) - Well to Pinch-Out Distance - 561
Pinch-Out 152 Match - PVT 194, 204, 205, 236, 249
Limited Height (Vertical) Fracture 144 Black Oil Matching Example 196
Fracture Height (hf) 147 Match (Auto, Quick and Type-Curve)
Limits (Auto Match) 429 415, 428, 431, 433, 434
Line (Analysis of Straight Line) 402 Match Plot 204, 205
Line-Fitting Tools 359 Material Balance Correction 407, 418,
Line (Average Slope) 729 440
Line (Change Type) 730 Material Properties (PanMesh) 281
Line (Type Definition) 363 Matrix Block Type (Geometrical

Coefficient) 146
Line Fitting Tools 359
Matrix Blocks (Permeability/Height) 167
Line Thickness (Plots) 32
Oil Analysis, Semi-Log Plot 892
Linear Composite Model 157
Maximize 632, 794
Linear Flow 906, 909, 970
Maximizing 826
Liquid Load-Up (Minimum Flow Rate) 992
Maximum Flow Rate (Erosional Limit)
LIT 528, 537, 712, 962 992
LIT FAF (Flow-After-Flow) 712 MBH (Average Reservoir Pressure)
Lock Scales (Plot Axes) 33, 35, 38 Gas Analysis, Semi-Log Plot 954
Log-Log Plot 363, 879, 917, 950, 975 Oil Analysis, Semi-Log Plot 889
Line-Fitting Tools 359 MDH Plot (Calculated Initial
Logo 564 Pressure Pcalc)
Lrad (Discontinuity Radial Distance) Gas Analysis, Semi-Log Plot 953
147 Oil Analysis, Semi-Log Plot 887
Oil Analysis (Radial Flow), Semi- Mean Tide Height 315
Log Plot 890
Mechanical Skin 283
Lw (Well Length - Horizontal) 149
Memory (Importing File to) 62
M
Menu 7, 26, 49, 356, 414, 519, 543,
M (Mobility Ratio) 893 549, 587, 613, 614, 675
Gas Analysis Semi-Log Plot - Multi- Menu Bar (PanMesh) 461
Phase Flow 955
Menu Bar (Windows Screen Regions) 795
Oil Analysis (Radial Flow), Semi-
Log Plot - Average Reservoir Menu Help 808
Pressure 889
Vertical Well 147
1240
Index
Mesh (PanMesh Dataprep) 49, 260, 277, Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure

278, 281, 292, 294, 296, 297, 298, (PanMesh) 284
306, 307 Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File 1005
Mesh (PanMesh Numerical Simulation) Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Table
448, 485, 490, 493, 494, 498 (Select/Edit/Calculate/Import/Plot)
Mesh Edit 485 189, 222
Pop-Up Menu 464 Multiple Interpretations 395, 415
Minimize 633, 796 Multiple Radial Composite Systems
Minimizing 827 150
Minimum Flow Rate (Liquid Load-Up) 992 N
Mobility Ratio 893 Names 101, 446
Gas Analysis Semi-Log Plot - Multi- Nearest Point 661

Phase Flow 955 New Analysis 8
Oil Analysis (Radial Flow), Semi- New Features in Current Version of
Log Plot - Average Reservoir PanSystem 1
Pressure 889 New File 8
Vertical Well 147 New Gauge Data 87
Model 126, 143, 167, 168, 395, 400, New Run 490
401, 424, 536, 609, 611
No Points Warning 431
Model Options (Analysis) 395
Nodes 260
Model Parameters 126, 143, 400, 536
Creating More than 20 Nodes for
Models 143, 168 an Outline 275
Customer Defined Flow Models 149 Deconvolution 373
Horizontal Well Flow Models 147 Drawing Boundaries Between Nodes
Vertical Well Flow Models 143 300
Modified Isochronal Test 718 Moving Nodes 270
Move 634 Node Edit 271
Moving 828 Node Parameters 294
Multi-Layer Response 394 Sub-Dividing Regions with Internal
Multi-Phase Equations (Gas Analysis) Nodes 300
955 No-Flow/Constant Pressure
Multi-Phase Equations (Oil Analysis) 893 Boundary Homogeneous Model 148
Multi-Phase Fluid Type 186, 220, 244 Noise (Gauge) 598
In Dataprep Well and Reservoir Non-Darcy Skin 409, 411

Description (Analytical) 124 In PanMesh Dataprep Material
Multi-Phase Perrine (Oil) Method 124 Properties 284
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure (MPPP) Non-Spreadsheet Style 73

186, 189, 191, 220, 222, 227, 244, Normal Test Type 118
1005 Normalized Flow Rate 1126
In Dataprep Well and Reservoir Number of Points 652
Description (Analytical) 121
Numerical Reporting 558, 560
In PanMesh Dataprep Material
Properties 284 Numerical Reservoir Description
(PanMesh Dataprep) 256, 260, 278,
1241
281, 286, 289, 292, 294, 297, 306, Optimized Flowrate (deconvolution)
307, 493 377
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) 448, Optional Start Date 69
490, 494, 498, 560 Orientation 278
Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) Control Dataprep Well and Reservoir
493 Description (Analytical) -
O Principal Well Orientation 125
Observation Point 441, 447 Outlier Removal 327
PanMesh Replay - Generating Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning
Time/Pressure Response for 327
Point 496 Data Edit Plot 645
Observation Well 1175 Output 437
ODBC Import Support Documentation Overlay Pressure 43
120
P
Offices (EPS Worldwide) 853, 1242
P* (From Radial Flow Line) 883, 952,
Oil 180, 191, 192, 194, 525 1134
Dataprep Well and Reservoir P_lay 417
Description (Analytical) - Multi-Phase
Fluid Type 124 Packer Probe Formation Test 158
Dataprep Well and Reservoir Packer-active 158

Description (Analytical) - Multi- Page 19, 552, 556, 589
Phase Perrine Method 124 Page Set-Up Codes 24
Dataprep Well and Reservoir Paging Directory 589
Description (Analytical) - Multi-
Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method PAN System File 9, 1004
124 PanFlow 436, 444, 446, 447
Oil Equations 879, 883, 893, 895, 897, PanMesh (Dataprep) 49, 260, 277, 278,
900, 905, 906, 909, 911, 913, 915, 281, 286, 292, 294, 296, 297, 298,
917, 919, 921, 923, 924, 926, 927, 306, 307
928, 930, 932, 933, 935, 937, 939, Control Points 301
940, 946
Damage Zone Permeability 283
Omega (Storativity Ratio)
Defining Sub-Layers 270
(w1, 2, 3) - Three-Layer
Homogeneous Reservoir - Imported Templates and Maps 305
Internal Cross-Flow 154 PVT Calculator 284
(w1,2) - Two-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir Geometry - Less Than
Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow 180 Degrees 273
155 Reservoir Geometry - More Than
Vertical Well 146 20 Nodes 275
Open Analysis 9 Sub-Dividing with Nodes 300
Open File 9 Vertical Mesh Refinement 282
Open Intervals (PanMesh) 278 PanMesh (Numerical Simulation) 448,
Optimize Q (deconvolution) 369 483, 485, 487, 488, 489, 490, 493,
494, 498
Optimized flowrate (deconvolution) 377
1242
Index
PanMesh Input 260, 277, 278, 281, 286, PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) 543,
292, 294, 296, 297, 298, 306, 307, 548, 761
493 PDA Plot - AG TC Troubleshooting 547
PanMesh Output 286, 448, 490, 494, PDA Plot - ECR Troubleshooting 545
498
PDA (Pressure Decline Analysis) Toolbar
PanMesh Tutorials 1215, 1229, 1233, 761
1238
Perforation Height (hp) 147
PANSYS31.INI 1020
Perforation Top Distance (htop) 147
PanSystem 1, 3, 4, 5, 1242, 1243
Performance (Speeding Up) 62
PanSystem File Types 994
Period (Test) Validity 361
PanSystem Tutorials 1024, 1073, 1113,
1158, 1175 Permeability 136, 138, 140, 142
PanWizard 606, 607, 608, 609, 611, 612 (k) Horizontal Wells 148
PanWizard Load File 608 (k) Three-Layer Homogeneous

Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow
PanWizard Welcome 607 153
Papers (Technical, References, SPE) (k) Two-Layer Homogeneous
Parallel Faults 169 155
Parameters (k) Vertical Wells 145
(Model/Fluids/Boundary/Wells) 126, (K2, K3, K4) Multiple Radial
128, 136, 143, 174, 180, 191, 192, Composite 150
214, 215, 227, 231, 233, 238, 395,
400, 413 (kf) Fault Zone Permeability -
Composite Linear Reservoir Model
Parametric (Relative Permeability) 140 158
Partial Penetration Model 145 (kz) Vertical Permeability -
Partially Sealing Fault Model 151 Horizontal Wells 148
PAS File Dataprep/Export/Results 552, (kz) Vertical Permeability -
573, 575, 577, 579, 581 Vertical Wells 145
PAS Format (Version used in PanSystem) Permeability Thickness (Kap 1, 2)
550 155
Paste (Data Edit) 59 Permeability Thickness (Kap 1, 2, 3)
Pav (Average Layer Pressure) 417 153
PAX System File 9, 1004 Permeability Thickness (kh) in Quick

Match 417
Pb (Bubble-Point) 182, 186
Perrine Method 124
Oil Analysis Deliverability -
Maximum Flow Potential 902 Oil Analysis (Multi-Phase Flow) Semi-
Log Plot - Equation 893
Pb/Rs 199
Pi (Regression in Test Overview)
Pcalc (From Radial Flow Line)
Gas Analysis, Semi-Log Plot -
Gas Analysis, Semi-Log Plot 953 Calculated Pi 953
Oil Analysis, Semi-Log Plot 887 Oil Analysis, Semi-Log Plot -
Pd Tool Calculated Pi 887
Oil Analysis Type-Curves Oil Analysis, Semi-Log Plot
(Homogeneous Reservoir) - Pd (Reference Back to Pi) 886
Calculation 923
1243
Simulate Auto Match - Initial Pressure Square-Root (Linear Flow) 906, 909,
Information 435 919, 970, 977
Simulate Quick Match - Initial Pressure Test Overview (Analysis Plot) 358, 394
417 Type-Curve 924, 926, 927, 928, 930,
Tutorial Example 1134 932, 933, 935, 937, 939, 940, 981,
PIC File 1007 982, 983, 984, 985, 986, 987, 988,
989, 990
Importing External Pseudo-Pressure
Table 222 Plot View Co-ordinates 41
Pick P0 (Pressure Overlay) 43 Point Selection 431
Pinch-Out Model 152 Point Weighting 428
Tutorial Example 1215 Points 431
Plot (Analysis Menu Option) 358, 394 Porosity 136
Plot (Edit Rate Changes - Data Edit Plot) Portrait Layout (Plots) 17, 21
113 Preparing Gauge Data 3, 51, 62, 73,
Plot (Excel Relative Permeability) 140 1024
Plot (General) 19, 24, 27, 28, 29, 31, 33, Pres/Pb 902
35, 37, 38, 41, 42, 43, 108, 204, 205, Pressure (Layer) 136
358, 394, 543, 761, 811 Pressure (Tidal Filter) 318
Plot Annotation 841 Pressure at a Point (PanMesh) 458
Plot AOF 520 Pressure Contours (PanMesh) 458
Plot as Graphics File 15 Pressure Decline Analysis (PDA) 543,
Plot Datasets 32 761
Plot Line Results 416 PDA Plot - AG TC Troubleshooting 547
Plot Line-Fitting Tools 363, 402, 730 PDA Plot - ECR Troubleshooting 545
Summary 359 Pressure Extrapolation 404, 749
Plot Overlay Pressure 43 Pressure Integral Method 119
Plot Print 17 Slug Test Analysis 942
Plot Rate Schedule 42 Slug Test Analysis Workflow 1009
Plot Save 15 Pressure Overlay 43
Plot Tools 675 History Matching in Advanced
C&n 714 Simulation 506
Cartesian 686, 897, 957 Pressure Period Selection (for

deconvolution) 368
Data Edit Plot 108
Pressure Transformation 407
Deliverability/Injectivity 520, 900, 962
Pressure Visualization (PanMesh)
Fourth-Root (Bilinear) 694, 911, 971 458
IPR 520 Review Mode 467
Log-Log 917, 950, 975 Pressure/Derivative Weighting 430
Match 204, 205 Pressure-Squared (Gas Welltest
PDA 543, 761 Analysis) 222, 407
Semi-Log (Radial Flow) 883, 893, 895, Principal Well 121
915, 952, 973 History Matching in Advanced
Spherical Flow 913, 972 Simulation 504
1244
Index
In Analytical Well Parameters R

Dialog 126 Radial Composite Model 145
Well Orientation 125 Multiple Zones 150
Print 17, 21, 24, 628 Type-Curves 935, 987
Print (PanMesh) 461 Radial Distance to Discontinuity 147
Print Plot 17 Oil Analysis (Radial Flow), Semi-
Print Report 556, 585 Log Plot 890
Print Set-Up 21 Radial Homogeneous Model 143
Printing 17, 21, 23, 556, 585, 628, 820, Radial Regions 277
821 Radius (Damage Zone) 283
Printing Procedures 628, 820 Radius of Investigation (Rinv) 598
Printing the Screen 821 Oil Analysis (Radial Flow), Semi-
PRO File (v1.80 Import) 14 Log Plot 888
Probe-observation 158 Oil Analysis Wellbore Storage Type-
Procedures 86, 138, 278, 500, 501, 504, Curves 925
508, 517, 617, 820, 824 Rate Change (Edit) 59, 548
Procedures Help 617 Special Set-Up for Slug Tests 80
Product Support 1242, 1243 Rate Changes 42, 43, 77, 103, 108, 113,
Production Forecasting 525, 528, 531, 805
534, 536, 537, 900, 962, 1113 Picking Rate Changes 638
Production Forecasting Dialog 537 Rate Columns 62, 73, 112
Progress 434, 443 Rate Data Averaging 104, 113
Pseudo-Pressure 186, 189, 220, 222, Rate-Dependent Skin 409, 959
228, 229, 244, 948 for deconvolution 379
Import External Pseudo-Pressure PanMesh Dataprep Material Properties
Table 226 284
In PanMesh Dataprep Material R-axis 38, 39, 817
Properties 285
Plot Right Hand Axis 39
Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor
RCP2, 3, 4 150
Oil Analysis, Deliverability 900
Reduction, data 338
Pseudo-Tables 191, 222, 227, 228, 253,
254 Advanced Gauge Data Conditoning 338
Pseudo-Time 222, 406 Reference Back to Initial Pressure
Q Tutorial Example 1113
Quick (Report Template) 550 References 1013
Quick Match 30, 131, 415, 423, 424 Region (PanMesh) 260, 281, 297
Average Layer Pressure (Pavg) 417 Registry 1020
Initial Pressure (Pi) 417 Relative Permeability 136, 138, 140, 142
Quick Match Traces 415 Remarks 102
Quickanl (Report Template) 550 Replace Previous 415
Quickinp (Report Template) 550 Replay 494
Quit 612
1245
Report 102, 549, 552, 556, 558, 560, Resolution 428, 598
561, 562, 563, 564, 575, 585 Restore 635, 797
Report - Page Set-Up Codes 24 Restoring 829
Report (Numerical/Analytical) 558, 560 Results 17, 30, 577, 720, 814
Report (Word Document) 586 Rho g (Gas Density) 123
Report Configure 556 Condensate Fluid Parameters 240
Report Cover Page 552 Gas Fluid Parameters 216
Report EUB 552, 573, 575, 577, 579, Oil Fluid Parameters 182
581
Water Fluid Parameters 210
Report Menu Overview 549
Rho o (Oil Density) 123
Report Print 17, 19, 21, 24, 102, 552,
556, 558, 564, 585, 628 Gas Fluid Parameters 216
Reporting (Tutorial) 1158 Oil Fluid Parameters 182
Reporting Bugs 1242 Water Fluid Parameters 210
Reservoir 121, 126, 128, 133, 134, 135, Rho w (Water Density) 123
136, 143, 168, 174, 176, 177, 179, Condensate Fluid Parameters 240
180, 191, 192, 214, 215, 222, 227, Gas Fluid Parameters 216
228, 231, 233, 238, 253, 254, 256,
289 Oil Fluid Parameters 182
Reservoir (3D - PanMesh) 256, 260 Water Fluid Parameters 210
Three-Dimensional Design View RI, 2, 3, 4 (Multiple Radial

275 Composite System) 150
Reservoir Control 121 Right-hand Plot Axis 39
Reservoir Flow Model (Customer- Rinv (Radius of Investigation) 888

Defined) 149 RKZR (Slanted Well Model) 149
Reservoir Flow Models (General) 143 Rock Compressibility 136
Horizontal Well 147 Rotate (PanMesh Reservoir Image)
Model Parameters 148 275
Vertical Well 143 Round Scaling (Plot Axis) 33, 35, 38
Model Parameters 145 Ruler Window/Bar 805
Reservoir Geometry 143, 168, 260, 292, Run Mode (PanMesh) 286
297, 298, 306, 307, 395, 424 S
Reservoir Geometry (PanMesh) 260, S (Skin) 131, 277
277, 289, 292, 294, 296, 297, 298, (S, S2) Two-Layer Homogeneous
Creating More Than 20 Nodes for 155
an Outline 275 (S, S2, S3) Three-Layer
Defining Sub-Layers 270 Homogeneous Reservoir -
Editing Node Details 271 Internal Cross-Flow 153
External Angles Less Than 180 Gas Analysis - Transient Analysis

Degrees 273 with Rate-Dependent Skin 960
Moving Nodes 270 Horizontal Wells 148
Reservoir View Window (PanMesh) 260 In Quick Match Results Dialog 416
Vertical Wells 145
1246
Index
Save 11, 12, 13 Simulate Boundary 168, 174, 424

Save Analysis 11, 12, 13 Simulate Menu 414
Save As 12, 586 Simulate Numerical 448, 490, 494, 498
Save As Previous 13 Simulate PanFlow 436, 443, 444, 446,
Save Plot File 15 447
Scale 306 Simulate Quick 415, 424
Sconv (Convergence Skin) 909, 919, Simulated Data 43, 500, 504, 508
970, 977 Simulation 415, 423, 424, 428, 431,
Screen Regions 618 433, 434, 436, 437, 441, 443, 444,
446, 447
Screen Regions Help 618
Simulation (Tutorials) 1073, 1113, 1175
Screen Size (Plot) 19
Simulation Automatic 428
Scroll Bars 798
Single Fault (Analytical Boundary
SEA File Format 1008 Model) 168
Select a Point (PanMesh Numerical Single-Phase 180, 210, 215
Simulation) 458
Single-Point Tests (C&n Plot) 715
Select Tidal Pressure Gauge 318
Size 636
Selecting Points 431
Size (Plot) 19
Semi-Log Plot 883, 893, 895, 915, 952,
973 Sizing 830
Gas Analysis - Transient Analysis Skin and Storage 128, 131

with Rate-Dependent Skin - (Sf) Fracture Skin 146
Radial Flow Plot 959 Allow Different Skin and Storage per
Send As e-mail 16 Flow Period (Layer Parameters) 137
Separator Fluids - Condensate 240 Allow Different Skin and Storage per
Setting-Up a Printer 822 Flow Period (Select Analysis Model)
396
Setting-Up the Page Layout 823
Rate-Dependent Skin - Horizontal
Set-Up 19, 24 Well 148
Sf (Fracture Skin) 146 Rate-Dependent Skin - Vertical
Sg (Gas Saturation) 136 Well 146
Shape Factors 856 Wellbore Storage Models 126
Shift Data 657 Skin Factor 126, 131
Short Flow Logic 398 (Sf) Fracture Skin 146
Show Marker Text 48 Allow Different Skins and Storage 137
Shut-In Pressure 526 In PanMesh 277
Simplified (C&n ) Method 520, 531, 714, Wellbore Damage 283
717, 718 Mechanical 520, 919, 935, 937, 977
In Deliverability Forecasting 541 Gas Analysis - Log-Log Plot 950
Simulate 415, 423, 424, 428, 431, 433, Gas Analysis - Semi-Log Plot 952
434, 493
Gas Analysis - Transient Analysis
Simulate Advanced/PanFlow Rate with Rate-Dependent Skin 960
(Analytical) 433, 436, 437, 441, 443,
446, 447, 500, 501, 504, 508, 517 Gas Analysis Horizontal Wells - Log-
Log Plot 976
1247
Gas Analysis Horizontal Wells - Semi- Rate-Dependent Skin (D) - Vertical

Log Plot 974 Wells 146
Horizontal Well 148 Skin (S) - Horizontal Wells 148
Oil Analysis - Log-Log Plot 880 Skin (S) - Three-Layer
Oil Analysis - Semi-Log Plot 883 Homogeneous Reservoir -
Internal Cross-Flow 153
Oil Analysis Horizontal Wells - Log-
Log Plot 917 Skin (S) - Two-Layer
Homogeneous Reservoir -
Oil Analysis Horizontal Wells - Semi- Internal Cross-Flow 155
Log Plot 915
Skin (S) - Vertical Wells 145
Vertical Well 145
Skip (Column Import) 72
Pseudo-Radial 525, 900
Slant Well (PanMesh) 278
Gas Analysis Horizontal Wells - Log-
Log Plot 976 Slant Well (Well Orientation) 125
Gas Analysis Horizontal Wells - Semi- Slanted Well Model 149

Log Plot 974 Slider Desuperposition/Extrapolation
Rate-Dependent 520 686, 897, 939, 957, 989
Gas Analysis - Transient Analysis Slope of Line 363

with Rate-Dependent Skin 960 Slug Test (Advanced Simulation) 128
Horizontal Well 148 Slug Test (Classification) 118
Vertical Well 146 Slug Test (Equations) 942, 944
Skin Factor Variation 131 Slug Test (Special Set-Up in Dataprep)
Allow Different Skins and Storage 137 80
Skin pressure drop (dpS) 415 Slug Test (Wellbore Storage

Parameters) 128
Skin Pressure Drop (Gas Analysis,
Semi-Log Plot) 953 Slug Test Workflow 1009
Skin Pressure Drop (Oil Analysis, Smoothing, data

Semi-Log Plot) 887 Advanced Gauge Data Conditioning
Skin Versus Flow Rate (SvQ) Plot 321
1126 Data Edit Plot 646
Gas Analysis - Transient Analysis Deconvolution, Nodes 372
with Rate-Dependent Skin 959 Solid Model View (PanMesh) 289
Skins (S and D) 415 Solution GOR 194
Allow Different Skins and Storage Black Oil Matching Example 196
(Layer Parameters) 137
Solution Model (Creating - Type Curve)
Allow Different Skins and Storage per 517
Flow Period 396
Solution Model (Well Test Design) 512
Gas Analysis (D) - Transient
Analysis with Rate-Dependent Space/Tab Delimited 64
Skin 960 Speed Option (Advanced Simulation)
Gas Analysis (S) - Transient 438
Analysis with Rate-Dependent Speed Option (PanFlow Rate
Skin 960 Simulation) 445
Rate-Dependent Skin (D) - Speed-Up Plotting 1068
Horizontal Wells 148 Spherical Flow Plot 913, 972
1248
Index
Spr 900 Stream Tube (PanMesh Numerical

Spr (Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor) 525, Simulation) 460
900 Sub-Layers (PanMesh) 270
Gas Analysis, Horizontal Wells - Log- Node and Sub-Layer Information
Log Plot 976 Table 263
Gas Analysis, Horizontal Wells - Semi- Sub-Layer Thickness 294
Log Plot 974 Sub-Layers and Regions 281
Oil Analysis - Fractured Well Type- Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge 317, 318
Curves 928
Suggest Model 611
Oil Analysis, Horizontal Wells - Log-Log
Plot 918 Summary 577
Oil Analysis, Horizontal Wells - Semi- Support (EPS) 1242

Log Plot 916 Sw (Water Saturation) 136
Oil Analysis, Reservoir Bi-Linear Flow Switch (to Another Application) 847
911 Symbol Weights (Plots) 32
Spreadsheet Import 64, 73, 76 System Close 631
Square-Root Plot 909, 970 System Files 996
Start Date (Optional) 69 System Maximize 632
Start Values (Auto Match) 429 System Minimize 633
Start/End (Quick Match) 415 System Move 634
Status (Import) 76 System Restore 635
Status Bar 809 System Size 636
Status Bar (PanMesh) 468 System Switch To 847
Stock View Controls (PanMesh Numerical System Units 592, 594, 595, 596, 597
Simulation) 452
T
Storage 128, 131, 395, 415
T0 Tool 721
Allow Different Skin and Storage 137
Tables 131, 142, 191, 222, 227, 228,
Storage Coefficient (C alpha) at Early- 229, 311, 315, 316
Time 129
Tabular (Relative Permeability) 142
Storage Model 128
T-axis 37, 818
Wellbore Storage Models 126
TC (Type-Curve) Tool 412
Storage Time Constant (tau) 129
TCX 412, 498, 998
Storativity Ratio (Omega) 146
Technical References 1013
Gas Analysis - Log-Log Plot 951
Teff (Inter-Cell Transmissibility) - Gas
Oil Analysis - Radial Flow 880 Analysis 958
w1, 2, 3 - Three-Layer Teff (Inter-Cell Transmissibility) - Oil
Homogeneous Reservoir - Analysis 898
Internal Cross-Flow 154
Temperature (Layer) 136
w1,2 - Two-Layer Homogeneous
Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow Template 260, 549
155 Gauge Data Import - TPR Format 72
Straight Line Analysis 359 Test Data 51
1249
Test Design 5, 81, 86, 118, 508, 946, Water Fluid Parameters 212
991, 1175 TPR 51
Injection/Fall-Off Tests 81 TPR Header (Gauge Data) 102
Interfering Wells 83 Number of Lines in Header 66
Test Duration 179 Transfer 103, 191, 227
Test Overview Plot/Tool 683 Transfer (Edit Test Design) 504
Allow Different Skins and Storage 137 Transfer Rate Change 103
Test Period (Tutorial) 1024 Transfer Rate Change Times and Rates
Test Period Classification 118 83
Test Period Display 805 Transformation 406, 407
Test Period Type 118 Transmissibility 143
Test Period Validity 361 Composite Linear Reservoir Model
Testing Time Advisor 946, 991 157
Thickness (Formation) 136 Gas Analysis, Cartesian Plot - Inter-

Cell Transmissibility 958
Thickness (PanMesh Sub-Layer) 294
Oil Analysis, Cartesian Plot - Inter-Cell
THP to BHP 51, 88 Transmissibility 898
Ticks (Plot Axes) 33, 35, 37, 38 Partially-Sealing Fault Model 151
Tide 309, 315, 316, 317, 1008 Three-Layer Homogeneous
Tide Data 309 Reservoir with Internal Cross-
Tide Table 315, 316, 1008 Flow 154
Time 64, 73, 100, 316 Two-Layer Homogeneous
Reservoir with Internal Cross-
24hr. Update 70 Flow 155
Time (Pseudo) 222, 406 Transparency (PanMesh Numerical
Time (to Detect Boundaries) 946, 991 Simulation) 462
Time (to Semi-Steady-State) 946, 991 TRG-PAS 552, 573, 575, 577, 579, 581
Time Formats 64, 73, 100, 316 EUB Reporting TRG PAS AOF/IPR
Time Mark Tool 739 Results Summary Tabbed Dialog 583
Time Transformation 406 EUB Reporting TRG PAS Version
Tabbed Dialog 575
Time-Stepped Wellbore Storage 128
EUB Reporting TRG PAS Well
Title 28, 812, 835, 840 Information Tabbed Dialog 573
Title Bar 799 Troubleshooting (PDA Plot - AG TC) 547
Toggle Background Color (PanMesh Troubleshooting (PDA Plot - ECR) 545
Numerical Simulation) 462
Troubleshooting ODBC Import 120
Tool Display 638, 675, 751, 767, 804
Tuning 236
Toolbars (PanMesh) 260, 289
Black Oil - Anchored and Free 199
Toolbars (PanSystem) 638, 675, 686,
694, 714, 729, 730, 751 Condensate - Principles of Tuning 251
Total Compressibility (Ct) 136 Turbulent Skin Factor (D) 131
Condensate Fluid Parameters 242 Allow Different Skin and Storage per
Flow Period 396
Oil Fluid Parameters 184
1250
Index
Gas Analysis - Transient Analysis Ungroup Flow/Test Periods 761

with Rate-Dependent Skin 960 Unit Classes 595
Horizontal Well 148 Units 592, 594, 595, 596, 597
In PanMesh Dataprep Material Units Detail 597
Properties 284
Unloading (Minimum Flow Rate) 992
Three-Layer Homogeneous
Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow Unzoom (PanMesh) 289
154 Uo (mu - Oil Viscosity) 123
Two-Layer Homogeneous Oil Fluid Parameters 182
Reservoir - Internal Cross-Flow Water Fluid Parameters 210
156
Use EoS 215, 238
Vertical Well 146
Gas Composition Dialog - EoS 231
Tutorials (PanMesh) 1215, 1229, 1233,
1238 User Menu (PanMesh) 289
Tutorials (PanSystem) 1024, 1073, User Supplied/Selected 998, 1005,

1113, 1158, 1175 1007
Two No-Flow Boundaries Dual- Customer-Defined Flow Models 149

Porosity Model 148 U-Shaped Faults 171
Two No-Flow Boundaries Using Help 620
Homogeneous Model 147 Uw (mu - Water Viscosity) 123
Two-Cell Compartmentalized Boundary Condensate Fluid Parameters 240
Model 171
Two-Compartment Analysis Type 397
Oil Fluid Parameters 182
Two-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir
with Internal Cross-Flow 154 Water Fluid Parameters 210
Type-Curve 412 V
Type-Curve (Creating) 517, 998 V1.80 14
Type-Curve Equations (Gas) 981, 982, Valid Test Period Check 361
983, 984, 985, 986, 987, 988, 989, Vaporizing Volume Ratio (Vvap) 243
990 Variable (Auto-Match) 429
Type-Curve Equations (Oil) 921, 923, Varying Rate 415
924, 926, 927, 928, 930, 932, 933,
935, 937, 939 Varying Skin 131
Varying Wellbore Storage 131
Type-Curve Export 412
Version 13, 14, 575, 627
Type-Curve File 998
Version (PAS Format used in PanSystem)
Type-Curves (Horizontal Wells) 940, 990
550
Type-Curves (Tutorial) 1109
VertFrac-FinCond (Vertical Well Models)
U 1020
Ug (mu - Gas Viscosity) 123 Vertical Cross-Flow 167
Condensate Fluid Parameters 240 Vertical Cut (PanMesh) 457
Gas Fluid Parameters 216 Vertical Fracture Finite Conductivity
Oil Fluid Parameters 182 Model 144
Water Fluid Parameters 210 Vertical Fracture Infinite
Undo 650 Conductivity Model 144
1251
Vertical Fracture Limited Height Model Oil Fluid Parameters 182

144 Water Fluid Parameters 210
Vertical Fracture Uniform Flux Model Volatile Oil 247
144
Volume Factor (B, FVF) 123
Vertical Interference 164
Condensate Fluid Parameters 240
Vertical Mesh Refinement in Adjacent
Layers (PanMesh) 282 Gas Fluid Parameters 216
Vertical Permeability (Horizontal Oil Fluid Parameters 182

Well) 148 Water Fluid Parameters 210
Vertical Permeability (Vertical Well) Vvap (Vaporizing Volume Ratio) 243
145 W
Vertical Thickness 136 W Ang 128
Sub-Layers in PanMesh Dataprep 294 In Analytical Model Parameters
Vertical Well 126, 143 Dialog 157
Principal Well Orientation 125 w1, 2, 3 (Layer Storativity - Three
Vertical Well (PanMesh) 278 Layer) 154
Vertical Well Flow Model Parameters w1,2 (Layer Storativity - Two-Layer)

145 154
Vertical Well Flow Models 143 Water (Single-Phase) 123
VFP Table 1021 Water Fluid Properties (Calculated)

210
Deliverability Forecasting - VFP File
Import 538 Water Fluid Properties (Input) 212
VFP-Units (VFP Table) 1020 Water Fluid Properties (MPPP) 186, 220
Deliverability Forecasting - VFP File Water Model 210, 214

Import 538 Water Saturation 136
View Centering (PanMesh Numerical Water/Gas Ratio 218
Simulation) 451 Wavelet 332
View Completions (PanMesh) 452 Web Site (EPS) 1242
View Control Panels (PanMesh) 451 Weighting Pressure/Derivative 430
View Co-ordinates 41 Well 111, 126, 128, 133, 135, 167, 168,
PanMesh Dataprep - Node 174, 176, 177, 179, 573
Information Table 263 Input Parameters 126
View Data File (Non-Spreadsheet) 74 Inter-Well Distance 126
View Data File (Spreadsheet) 64 Well Co-ordinates 126
View Management (PanMesh Numerical Well (Principal) 121
Simulation) 452
Well and Reservoir Description
Edit View Title 481 (Analytical) 121
Enter New View Title 482 Well and Reservoir Description
Saved Views Dialog 479 (Numerical) 256
View Units System 597 Well Configuration (PanMesh) 278
Viscosity (mu) 186 Well Control 121
Condensate Fluid Parameters 240 Well Co-ordinates 126
Gas Fluid Parameters 216 Well Data Input (Tutorial) 1073
1252
Index
Well Flow Models 143 WFT Dual-probe 161

Well Length (Horizontal) 149 WFT Packer-probe 158
Well Offset (Horizontal) 149 WFT Probe Test 161
Well Orientation 125 Wizards Help 606, 607, 608, 609, 611,
Well Test 4, 5, 51, 358, 500, 1024, 612
1073, 1175 Word Document 586
Wellbore 126, 395 Workflow (Slug Test Analysis) 1009
Wellbore Storage 128, 927, 944, 946, X
991, 1009 X, Y, Z Co-ordinates (Exact Position
In PanMesh Dataprep 279 PanMesh) 294
Wellbore Storage - Gas Analysis, Log-Log X-axis 33, 815
Plot (Dimensionless) 950 Xf (Fracture Half-Length) 146
Wellbore Storage - Oil Analysis, Log-Log XLS
Plot (Dimensionless) 879
Dataprep Gauge Data Import Data
Wellbore Storage (Fractured Well) 928 Files Sub-Dialog#Excel 64
Wellbore Storage Model 396 Dataprep Gauge Data Import Data
In Well Parameters Sub-Dialog 126 Files Sub-Dialog#XLS 64
Wellbore Storage Type-Curves 924, 944, Y
981 Y-axis 35, 816
Wellbore Storage Variation 131 Z
Wellbore View (PanMesh) 452 Z-Factor 123
Wellhead to BHP Conversion 51, 88 Condensate Fluid Parameters 240
Wet Stream Rate 238, 712 Gas Fluid Parameters 217
WFT Dual-Permeability Test 164 Oil Fluid Parameters - Gas
WFT Packer Test 158 Correlations 182
Window Border 800 Zooming 842
Windows Procedures 824 Zooming In/Out (PanMesh) 289
Windows Registry 1020 Zwd (Well Offset) 149
Windows System Commands 630 ZWDB 149
Wire-Frame View (PanMesh) 289 Zwdf (Fracture Offset) 147
Wireline Formation Tester ZWDT 149
WFT Dual Permeability 164
1253

PanSystem 3.5 User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PanSystem 3.5 User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PanSystem 3.

Plot Rate Schedule ...................................................................................... 42

Advanced Simulation Control Dialog.............................................................. 435

Suggest Model Dialog ................................................................................. 609

Exact Point Facility/Dialog ........................................................................... 658

Zero Slope Line ......................................................................................... 721

Test Data Linear Plot .................................................................................. 771

Graphing Title .............................................................................................. 810

PanSystem Glossary ........................................................................................... 846

Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File .................................................................. 1003

PanSystem Tutorial Example 2...................................................................... 1066

PanSystem Tutorial Example 4...................................................................... 1144

PanMesh Turorial Example 4 ......................................................................... 1216

New Link to New Features

*The PanMesh Numerical Simulator is an optional extra.

Refer to PanSystem/Panmesh Overview for a description of PanSystem/PanMesh

Preparing Data for Analysis in PanSystem

Using PanSystem for Analysis

Using PanSystem for Test Design

Program Menu Bar Options and Commands

PanSystem Menus and Windows Commands Index

PanSystem Menus and Window Commands

PanSystem File Menu Index

Also refer to the help topic for Gauge Data Files.

Save As Previous Version Dialog

Import v1.80 Dialog

Graphics Export Dialog

An Advanced button gives users access to a further sub-dialog where

Refer also to the help file for:

Page Set-Up Dialog

Printer Set-Up Dialog

Refer also to the help files for:

Connect to Printer Sub-Dialog

Page Set-Up Codes

PanSystem Edit Menu Index

Example of log-log plot data copied to Clipboard and pasted to an editor

Refer also the the Help topic for Graphing Configuration.

Refer also the the Help topic for Graphing Configuration.

The Divisions option is not enabled for logarithmic scaling.

Refer also to the Help topic for Graphing Configuration.

The Divisions option is not enabled for logarithmic scaling.

Refer also to the Help topic for Graphing Configuration.

Edit Plot Right Hand Axis

Plot Rate Schedule

Overlay Pressure Dialog

Marker Text Dialog

The data points themselves will not be deleted!

Show Marker Text

PanSystem Dataprep Menu Index

Dataprep Gauge Data

Pressure and Rate Data Preparation Dialog

Flow Periods - Can be Grouped and Ungrouped on the plot.

The dialog contains five main sections, each described below:

A Pressure Column must be highlighted/selected in the Data File/Column

In this case there are no choices to be made in the Master section.

Select Data File to Delete Dialog

Export Data Files Dialog

Open Data Files Dialog

Repeated hard disk access makes plotting and editing slower.

Non-Spreadsheet Style (i.e. Spreadsheet Style checkbox unchecked): This

Import Data Files (Spreadsheet Style) Sub-Dialog

Importing gauge data using Space/Tab Delimited mode

Select the (DATE)hh:mm:ss Time format if Date information is being read-in

Select this (DATE)hh:mm:ss Time format only if Date information is being